The ordinance codified in this title may be cited as either the Bothell Zoning Code or BMC Title 12, and is hereinafter referred to as “this title.” (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this title is to promote the public health, safety and welfare through regulations which control the location and development of land uses within the city of Bothell, in accordance with the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. (Ord. 2441 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. No use or structure shall be established, substituted, expanded, constructed, altered, moved, maintained or otherwise changed except in conformance with this title.
B. Creation of or changes to lot lines shall conform with the use provisions, dimensional and other standards, and procedures of this title and city of Bothell subdivision regulations.
C. All land uses and development authorized by this title shall comply with all other regulations and/or requirements of this title and any other local, state or federal agency that has jurisdiction over land uses and development. Where a difference exists between this title and other regulations, the more restrictive requirements shall apply.
D. Where more than one part of this title applies to the same aspect of a proposed use or development, the more restrictive requirement shall apply, except as provided in BMC 12.04.020. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In interpretation and application, the requirements set forth in this title shall be considered the minimum requirements necessary to accomplish the purposes of this title. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Regulations, conditions or procedural requirements that are specific to an individual land use shall supersede regulations, conditions or procedural requirements of general application.
B. A land use shall be interpreted as including structures within or on which the use is conducted.
C. Chapter and section headings, captions, illustrations and references to other sections or titles are for reference or explanation only and shall not be deemed to govern, limit, modify, or in any manner affect the scope, meaning or intent of any section. In case of any ambiguity, difference of meaning or implication between text and any heading, caption or illustrations, the text and the permitted use tables in Chapter 12.06 BMC shall control. All applicable requirements shall govern a use whether or not they are cross-referenced in a text section or land use table.
D. The word “shall” is mandatory and the word “may” is discretionary.
E. Unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, words in the present tense shall include past and future tense, and words in the singular shall include the plural or vice versa. Except for words and terms defined in this title, all words and terms used in this title shall have their customary meanings.
F. The words “use,” “used,” “occupy” or “occupied” as applied to any land or building shall be interpreted to include the words “intended,” “arranged” or “designed” to be used or occupied. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Amendments to the provisions of this title shall be made consistent with the procedures in Chapter 11.18 BMC. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish and describe the purpose of zoning classifications utilized in this title, and to establish maps which depict the geographic allocation of those zoning classifications throughout the city. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In order to regulate the use of land and structures, the city is divided into the following land use zoning classifications. The development potential of any individual property under these zoning classifications shall be based on the net buildable area of that property, and shall be further subject to planned unit development provisions, availability of necessary utilities, critical area regulations, impact mitigation and other applicable development policies, regulations and standards.
Name | Symbol |
|---|---|
Agricultural | AG |
Residential/Conservation | R-C |
Residential/Low 1 | R-L1 |
Residential/Low 2 | R-L2 |
Residential/Medium 1 | R-M1 |
Residential/Medium 2 | R-M2 |
Residential/Medium 3 | R-M3 |
Residential/Medium 4 | R-M4 |
Residential – Activity Center (see subarea plan for minimum density; maximum number of units controlled by site and building envelope regulations) | R-AC |
Residential/Manufactured Home Park | R-MHP |
Office-Professional | OP |
Neighborhood Business | NB |
Community Business | CB |
General Commercial | GC |
Mixed Use/Neighborhood Overlay | MU-N |
Mixed Use/Community Overlay | MU-C |
Mixed Use/Employment Overlay | MU-E |
Commercial/General Overlay | C-G |
Employment/Medium (City) Overlay | E-MC |
Light Industrial | LI |
Specialized Senior Housing Overlay | SSHO |
Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay | MVSO |
North Creek Fish and Wildlife Critical Habitat Protection Area | NCFWCHPA |
Zoning classifications are applied separately (e.g., R-M4) where one category of land use is determined to be appropriate as designated by the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, and in combination (e.g., R-M4, OP, CB) where more than one category of land use is determined to be appropriate as designated by the plan. When used in combination, the most permissive regulations of the combined zones shall apply, unless specifically provided otherwise, such as minimum density and minimum floor area ratio requirements which must be met. (Ord. 2457 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 6, 2021; Ord. 2282 § 4, 2019; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The intent of agricultural zoning classification (AG) is to preserve and protect irreplaceable and limited supplies of farmland well suited to agricultural uses by their location, geological formation and chemical and organic composition, and to encourage environmentally sound agricultural production. This classification is assigned solely to the Magnolia Dairy properties in the Westhill Subarea: further development of these properties is subject to the regulations in Chapter 12.62 BMC and the terms of the 1986 King County purchase of development rights, consistent with the provisions of Chapter 84.34 RCW. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010).
The intent of residential zoning classifications (R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, R-M2, R-M3, R-M4, R-MHP, R-AC) is to provide locations for a range of densities and housing types to ensure a broad choice of attractive and affordable living accommodations to persons desiring to reside in Bothell. Residential zones may contain as outright permitted uses or conditional uses certain nonresidential uses which enhance the community including but not limited to schools, churches and parks. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification is intended to allow specialized senior housing development at densities higher than normally permitted in specified R-C through R-M3 zoning districts where such development has been determined to be appropriate due to proximity to facilities and/or services which especially benefit the elderly. The implementing regulations concerning the location, density, design and operation of specialized senior housing are set forth in the subarea chapter in which the SSHO zoning classification is located. The SSHO zoning classification provides for an additional use within, but does not replace, the underlying zoning classification. SSHO zoning classification regulations shall not apply to uses other than specialized senior housing (see BMC 12.04.020). (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997).
The Office-Professional zoning classification (OP) is intended to provide locations for personal and professional service businesses such as banks, medical, dental and psychological clinics, accounting, law, real estate, insurance and travel agencies. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Neighborhood Business zoning classification (NB) is intended to provide locations for retail and service businesses which serve the limited convenience shopping and personal service needs of the immediate surrounding neighborhood. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Community Business zoning classification (CB) is intended to provide locations for retail, dining, entertainment, and other businesses which are primarily oriented indoors and serve large portions of the city or the community as a whole. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay zoning classification (MVSO) is intended to allow the sale and outside display of automobiles, vans, light trucks, motorcycles, boats and watercraft within Community Business (CB) zoning districts where such development has been determined to be appropriate due to proximity to arterial streets, high intensity retail uses, and the presence of other motor vehicle dealers. The sale and display of heavy equipment such as construction and earthmoving equipment, tractors, farm implements, heavy vehicles such as heavy trucks, dump trucks and trailers, semi-tractors and trailers, buses, recreational vehicles and other large-sized vehicles are not permitted within the MVSO. The implementing regulations concerning the location, landscaping, lighting and design of motor vehicle sales lots within Community Business zones are set forth in the applicable subarea chapter in which the MVSO zoning classification is located. The MVSO zoning classification provides for an additional use within, but does not replace, the underlying zoning classification. The MVSO zoning classification regulations shall not apply to uses other than motor vehicle sales. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001).
The General Commercial zoning classification (GC) is intended to provide locations for retail and service uses which typically require outdoor display and/or storage of merchandise, involve the operation or repair of machinery, and/or generate noise as a part of their operations. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Mixed Use Neighborhood Overlay (MU-N) is intended to promote mixed-use development focused on medium-density multifamily residential and supporting neighborhood business in areas near other higher-intensity mixed-use development and with good access to other services. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for a mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services with a focus on medium density multifamily residential and supporting neighborhood businesses, with typical heights up to five stories and a target FAR of up to 3.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Mixed Use Community Overlay (MU-C) is intended to promote transit-oriented, mixed-use development focused on higher density multifamily residential and supporting retail and services in areas closest to high-capacity transit. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for a mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services with a focus on higher-density multifamily residential and supporting retail and services, with typical heights up to five stories with a target FAR of up to 3.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Mixed Use Employment Overlay (MU-E) is intended to promote transit-oriented, mixed-use development providing employment and multifamily housing opportunities in areas closest to high capacity transit, including portions of the Canyon Park Regional Growth Center, North Creek Business Park, and the Midtown Subarea. These areas are intended to foster centers of activity, reduce automobile trips, and encourage other travel modes and to make use of existing neighborhood anchors, such as groceries, parks, schools, and other businesses. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for a mix of office, residential, retail, services, and other comparable commercial uses, with a focus on multifamily housing and supportive commercial activities, with typical heights up to seven stories and a target FAR of up to 3.5. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Commercial General Overlay (C-G) is intended to promote options for local retail, service, dining/entertainment, personal and professional service businesses, and other businesses that serve large portions of the city or the community as a whole. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for retail and service uses ranging from those primarily oriented indoors to those which typically require outdoor display and/or storage of merchandise, involve the operation or repair of machinery, and/or generate noise as a part of their operations. The overlay also allows for personal and professional service businesses, which may include banks, medical, dental, and psychological clinics, accounting, law, real estate, insurance, and travel agencies. The C-G overlay allows for typical heights up to three stories and a target FAR of up to 2.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Employment Medium (City) Overlay (E-MC) is intended to provide specifically for medium intensity employment opportunities and supporting non-residential uses. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay are intended primarily for medium-intensity office/flex/manufacturing uses with some light industrial, with maximum heights typically up to five stories and a target FAR of up to 3.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The intent of the Light Industrial zoning classification (LI) is to provide for a range of manufacturing, processing, wholesaling, distributing, and similar activities, together with associated administrative and office uses, which typically serve regional, national, and international markets. Such uses tend to require large buildings and to generate more large truck traffic than do other types of land uses. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The North Creek Fish and Wildlife Critical Habitat Protection Area (NCFWCHPA) zoning classification is intended to implement special protections for specified areas within the city which have been determined to contain or contribute to exceptional fish and wildlife habitat. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005).
The shoreline master program (SMP) contains use, development, performance, and procedural regulations which apply to portions of the city within 200 feet of the ordinary high water mark of North Creek and the Sammamish River, plus associated wetlands. The shoreline master program comprises BMC Title 13. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Manufactured Home Park zoning classification is intended to promote the retention of manufactured home parks as a source of affordable detached single-family and senior housing. This classification is assigned to certain existing manufactured home parks which contain rental pads, as opposed to fee simple owned lots, and as such are more susceptible to future redevelopment. The Manufactured Home Park zoning classification limits development to manufactured home parks unless and until a comprehensive plan and zoning amendment for another type of land use is requested, considered and adopted. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Within designated activity centers in conjunction with the R-AC zone classification, the OP, NB, CB, GC, and LI zones may have a minimum floor area ratio (FAR) established within the individual subarea plan regulations. The maximum FAR shall be controlled by site and building regulations concerning height, parking, landscaping, setbacks, and other aspects of development established within each subarea plan. (Ord. 2353 § 6, 2021).
Prior to the Canyon Park Annexation, owners of certain properties within the annexation boundaries entered into concomitant zoning agreements with the city providing for retention of Snohomish County development regulations, as they existed at adoption of the annexation, for varying lengths of time, depending on the individual agreement. As these agreements expire, or if property owners desire to void their agreements prior to the expiration dates, the Snohomish County development regulations which existed at adoption of the annexation, which regulations were adopted and codified as the Bothell Municipal Code Appendix, will be replaced with city of Bothell development regulations, including zoning classifications. The boundaries of properties subject to these concomitant zoning agreements are depicted on the zoning map. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In order to plan for and regulate the use of land and structures in a manner which recognizes that residential neighborhoods and business areas within Bothell vary one from another in desired character, subareas are established in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan and these implementing zoning regulations.
Subarea comprehensive plans are implemented in part through the adoption of use, development, performance, or procedural regulations specific to the subarea or to a portion or portions of the subarea. Regulations which are specific to a subarea or portions of a subarea are located in the chapter of this zoning code concerning the subarea.
The following subareas are established:
Name | Symbol | Code Chapter |
|---|---|---|
Queensborough/Brentwood/Crystal Springs | QB | 12.42 |
Shelton View/Meridian/3rd Avenue SE | SV | 12.44 |
Country Village/Lake Pleasant/527 Corridor | CV | 12.46 |
Canyon Park | CP | 12.48 |
Canyon Creek/39th Avenue SE | CC | 12.50 |
Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE | FI | 12.52 |
Maywood/Beckstrom Hill | MB | 12.54 |
North Creek/NE 195th Street | NC | 12.56 |
Bloomberg Hill | BH | 12.58 |
Brickyard Road/Queensgate | BR | 12.60 |
Westhill | WH | 12.62 |
Downtown | DT | 12.64 |
Waynita/Simonds/Norway Hill | WS | 12.66 |
Locust/14th Avenue W | LO | 12.68 |
Damson/Logan | DL | 12.70 |
Filbert/Winesap | FW | 12.72 |
Thrasher’s Corner/Red Hawk | TC | 12.74 |
(Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The downtown subarea regulations in Chapter 12.64 BMC comprise zoning regulations which are unique to the downtown subarea, except where other regulations in this title are adopted by reference. The downtown subarea regulations reside in a document, entitled the “Downtown Subarea Plan and Regulations,” which is formatted differently and bound separately from the other regulations in this title. The downtown subarea regulations utilize district zoning classifications unique to this subarea, which zoning classifications are denoted in color in the downtown subarea plan and regulations but are assigned letter symbols for city-wide zoning classification mapping purposes as follows:
Name of Downtown Subarea District | Symbol |
|---|---|
Downtown Core District | DC |
Downtown Neighborhood District | DN |
Downtown Transition District | DT |
SR-522 Corridor District | 522 |
General Downtown Corridor District | GDC |
Sunrise/Valley View District | SVV |
Campus District | C |
Parks and Public Open Space District | PPOS |
(Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009).
The Canyon Park Subarea regulations in Chapter 12.48 BMC comprise zoning classifications and regulations which are unique to the subarea, except where other regulations in this title are adopted by reference.
Name of Canyon Park Subarea Districts | Symbol |
|---|---|
Office/Residential Mixed-Use – High | OR-H |
Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Medium | OR-M |
Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Low | OR-L |
Residential Mixed-Use – High | RMU-H |
Residential Mixed-Use – Medium | RMU-M |
Employment – Medium | E-M |
Employment – Low | E-L |
A. Office/Residential Mixed-Use – High (OR-H). This zone is intended for a high-intensity, transit-oriented mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services in those areas closest to high-capacity transit service. Professional office uses will be emphasized in those areas closest to the planned high-capacity transit station. Buildings up to seven stories are envisioned throughout the district.
B. Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Medium (OR-M). This zone is intended for a medium-intensity (three to six stories) mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services and functions as a transition between the high-intensity transit-oriented development and nearby job opportunities.
C. Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Low (OR-L). This zone is intended for a lower-intensity (up to three stories) mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services further from transit and focused public investments and could include “missing middle” housing that makes use of North Creek as an amenity and connects residential areas.
D. Residential Mixed-Use – High (RMU-H). This zone is intended for high-intensity residential uses (three to six stories) within walking distance to high-capacity transit service. Office, retail, and other commercial services are also allowed in the zone.
E. Residential Mixed-Use – Medium (RMU-M). This zone is intended for medium-intensity residential uses (three to six stories) and functions as a transition between the high-intensity transit-oriented development and nearby job opportunities. Office, retail, and other commercial services are also allowed in the zone.
F. Employment – Medium (E-M). This zone is intended for medium-intensity (three- to six-story) office/flex/manufacturing uses.
G. Employment – Low (E-L). This zone is intended for low-intensity (one- to two-story) office/flex/manufacturing uses. (Ord. 2341 § 2, 2020).
This title consists of text, illustrations, and city-wide and subarea zoning maps. The purpose of the city-wide zoning map is to depict the exact boundaries of each zoning classification for the entire city. The purpose of the subarea zoning maps is to depict the exact boundaries of each zoning classification within each subarea and the exact boundaries of special zoning districts in which regulations specific to that district apply. The city-wide and subarea zoning maps are adopted as parts of the ordinance codified in this title, and may be amended from time to time by ordinance.

(Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.04.130).
When uncertainty exists as to boundaries of any land use zoning classification on the zoning map, the community development director following the administrative procedures of a Type I application as contained in Chapter 11.04 BMC shall make a determination as to the location of the boundary in question based on the following rules of construction:
A. Where zone boundaries are indicated as approximately following the centerline of street, alley or highway right-of-way, the actual centerline shall be the boundary.
B. Where zone boundaries are indicated as running approximately parallel to the centerline of the street right-of-way, the boundary line shall be construed to be parallel to the centerline of the street right-of-way.
C. Where zone boundaries are indicated as approximately following the lot or tract lines, the actual lot or tract lines shall be construed to be the boundaries of such zone.
D. Where a zone boundary divides a tract in unsubdivided property, the location of such zone boundary, unless the same is indicated by dimensions thereon, shall be determined by use of the scale appearing on the zoning map.
E. Zone boundaries indicated as following shorelines shall be interpreted to follow such shorelines, and in the event of change in the shoreline shall be interpreted as moving with the actual shoreline.
F. Where a public street or alley right-of-way is officially vacated or abandoned, the regulations applicable to the abutting property to which the vacated portion shall revert shall apply to such vacated or abandoned street or alley right-of-way.
G. Where the zone boundaries shown on the zoning map are inconsistent with the written legal descriptions of the zoning boundary as described in the implementing ordinance, the written legal description of the zoning boundary shall prevail. (Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.04.140).
In case uncertainty exists in zoning designation lines which cannot be resolved by application of the administrative rules contained in BMC 12.04.140, the hearing body shall recommend and the city council determine the location of such zone boundaries. This action shall be considered a Type IVA application as outlined under Chapter 11.04 BMC. The hearing body and city council shall base the determination of zone designation lines on the land use designation maps and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.04.150).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish permitted land uses for the city of Bothell. The use of a property is defined by the activity for which the building or lot is intended, designed, arranged, occupied, or maintained. The use is considered permanently established when that use will be or has been in continuous operation for a period exceeding 60 days, except that in no case shall a transitory accommodation, which may be allowed to operate continuously for a period of up to 90 days as set forth in BMC 12.06.160(B)(3)(c), be considered permanently established. A use which will operate for 60 days or less, and transitory accommodations, are considered temporary uses, and are subject to the requirements of BMC 12.06.160. All applicable requirements of this code, or other applicable state or federal requirements, shall govern a use located within the Bothell city limits. (Ord. 1955 § 1, 2005; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. The land use tables in this chapter determine whether a specific use is allowed in a zone classification. Specific uses are divided among 17 tables, each of which represents a broad category of land use. The tables are arranged in alphabetical order by land use category, as listed at the beginning of this chapter. Within each table, zone classifications are located in vertical columns and specific uses are arranged alphabetically in horizontal rows.
B. If no symbol appears in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is not allowed in that zoning classification.
C. If the letter “P,” for “Permitted,” appears in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is allowed in that classification, subject to the development and operational requirements of this and other applicable titles. The conduct or development of a permitted use may require approvals including but not limited to land clearing, grading, plumbing, mechanical and building permits. The procedures for applying for such approvals shall be as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations.
D. If the letter “C,” for “Conditional,” appears in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is allowed subject to conditional use permit procedures and requirements and other development and operational requirements of this and other applicable titles. The conduct or development of a conditional use shall require approval of a conditional use permit in addition to other approvals as set forth in subsection C of this section. Procedures for applying for a conditional use permit shall be as set forth in Chapter 12.28 BMC and BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations.
E. If a number appears in the box describing the use, or in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is subject to specific development and/or operational requirements which may be in addition to or in place of general requirements of this and other applicable titles. Such use-specific requirements typically follow the table and correspond to the number in the table, although some such requirements, such as those for specialized senior housing, are set forth in separate chapters.
F. Where multiple zoning classifications are combined (e.g., OP, LI), the most permissive land use regulations of the individual zoning classifications shall apply, unless specifically provided otherwise or as stipulated within a subarea regulation. For example, if a use is not permitted in the OP zone but is permitted in the LI zone, the use is permitted on land zoned OP, LI.
G. Any proposed use not listed in the table shall be classified by the community development director as permitted, conditional, or not permitted, based on the listed use to which the proposed use is most similar. If the community development director determines that the proposed use is not similar to any use in the table, the proposed use shall not be permitted. The determination of the community development director shall be appealable to the hearing body.
H. Permitted uses as established by this chapter may be modified by subarea regulations. (Ord. 2353 § 7, 2021; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Agriculture | Zoning Classification | |||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | AG | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Growing and harvesting of crops (1) | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Plant nurseries and greenhouses (1) | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes (1)(2) | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | ||||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Activities associated with the growing and harvesting of crops and the operation of plant nurseries and greenhouses shall be controlled so as not to result in adverse impacts on nearby properties. Such adverse impacts include but are not limited to noise, dust, fertilizer/pesticide overspray, odor, and glare.
b. The sale of agricultural products on the property on which the products were grown is permitted.
c. The raising and keeping of chickens as an accessory use to residential properties is regulated under BMC 12.06.140(B)(2).
2.
a. Activities associated with the raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes shall be controlled so as not to result in adverse impacts on nearby properties. Such adverse impacts include but are not limited to noise, dust, fertilizer/pesticide overspray, odor, glare and roaming. No stable, shed, coop or other structure for the keeping of animals, not including bees, shall be located closer than 20 feet from any exterior property line. Setbacks for structures for the keeping of bees are addressed in BMC 12.06.190(B).
b. Minimum requirements for animals raised and kept for agricultural purposes are as follows:
(1) Large livestock including but not limited to horses, cows, steers, and llamas, one-half acre per animal, and one acre minimum lot area;
(2) Small livestock including but not limited to sheep, pigs, goats, mink and miniature horses, 7,000 square feet per animal, and one acre minimum lot area;
(3) Poultry other than chickens and small animals including but not limited to rabbits, mice and rats, one animal per one square foot of structure used to house such animals, up to a maximum of 2,000 square feet, and one-half acre minimum lot area;
(4) The minimum requirements for beekeeping for agricultural purposes shall be the same as the minimum requirements for hobby beekeeping as outlined in BMC 12.06.190(B)(4).
c. The sale of animals raised for agricultural purposes and the sale of products of such animals, such as eggs, fleece and milk, on the property on which the animals are or were raised or kept is permitted subject to subsection A of this section. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2378 §§ 1, 2, 2022; Ord. 2141 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Automotive, Marine, and Heavy Equipment Services | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Automotive or marine repair (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Car wash (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Electric vehicle battery charging station | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Gasoline or diesel fuel dispensing (gas stations) (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Heavy equipment repair (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Service and car wash bay openings shall be oriented away from adjacent streets and Residential-zoned properties, or landscaping shall be installed between the bay opening and adjacent streets and Residential-zoned properties so as to soften adverse visual impacts. In addition, where a service or car wash bay opening would be oriented towards an abutting Residential-zoned property, noise shall be reduced by means of an intervening building or buildings, freestanding walls, doors or other devices for enclosing the car wash, or other methods determined by the community development director to be effective for reducing noise.
b. Storage of inoperable vehicles awaiting repair shall be screened from adjacent streets or properties through a combination of fencing and landscaping.
2.
a. Gas stations shall be located only on arterials, unless incorporated as an integral part of a shopping center or business complex.
b. Gas station driveways shall be located at least 50 feet from the nearest point of intersection of public rights-of-way. There shall be no more than four curb cuts with a maximum combined length of 120 feet. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Business and Personal Services | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Architectural/engineering services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Banking and financial services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Churches, temples, mosques and other religious facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Clerical services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Conference centers | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | |
Dry cleaning establishments | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Environmental analysis services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Social organizations and other private clubs | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | P | P | P |
Insurance services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Kennels, catteries and animal obedience schools (1) | C | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Legal services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Mortuary services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Personal care services (e.g., barbershops, hair salons, tanning booths) | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – | – |
Photo processing, photo copying, and printing services | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Print and electronic media offices (newspaper, magazine, radio, television) (2) | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Real estate services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Self-service laundromats | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
– | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P | |
Travel services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Veterinary clinics (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Any other professional, executive or administrative office use | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. The portion of the building or structure in which animals are treated, trained, or kept shall be soundproofed. All run areas shall be surrounded by an eight-foot-high solid wall and surfaced with concrete or other permanent impervious material. The wall shall be placed consistent with the setback requirements of the underlying zone. The outside of the wall shall be screened with evergreen plantings which shall be six feet tall upon planting and shall attain a height of eight feet within five years. Kennels, catteries, animal obedience schools, animal shelters, and veterinary clinics shall be operated in accordance with BMC Title 6, Animals.
2. Transmitting and receiving equipment shall be subject to the use-specific requirements in BMC 12.06.180.
3. Animal shelters owned, maintained or operated by a public body, an established humane society, animal welfare society, society for the prevention of cruelty to animals, or other nonprofit organization whose primary mission is the protection and welfare of animals may sell goods and products that enhance the health and comfort of the animals adopted. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Eating and Drinking Establishments | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Restaurants, drive-through order | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Restaurants, take-out order | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Restaurants, on-site dining (indoor and outdoor) (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Taverns (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Vendor carts or trucks (3) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Vendor, ice cream | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Vendor spaces or stands (4) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Outdoor seating, tables, umbrellas and other appurtenances of outdoor dining may be placed on public sidewalks, provided a minimum sidewalk width of five feet measured to the street side of the sidewalk shall be kept clear for pedestrians.
2. Taverns may include brewing equipment.
3. Vendor carts and trucks shall be subject to the following conditions:
a. Carts may be placed on public sidewalks; provided a public area use permit is obtained, a minimum sidewalk width of five feet measured to the street side of the sidewalk shall be kept clear for pedestrians, and visibility at driveways, street intersections, store entrances and display windows shall not be obscured (note: a public area use permit is not required for private streets or the campus district, but other requirements of this subsection apply);
b. If a cart or truck is to be situated on private property, written permission shall be obtained from the legal owner of such property on which the cart is situated;
c. Carts or trucks shall not be located in required parking or landscaping areas;
d. Carts shall be limited to two per city block side or 300 lineal feet, whichever is less, or, when placed within a building, one cart per building;
e. Carts or trucks shall be removed at night, or, when carts are placed within a building, they shall be covered or secured;
f. Carts shall be no larger than a size which can be maneuvered by one person on foot, and in no case shall cover an area larger than 25 square feet;
g. The vendor shall comply with all applicable state and county health regulations. Evidence of compliance and a current city of Bothell business license must be conspicuously posted on the vendor truck or cart;
h. Vendor carts within a building shall be located in a manner that is consistent with International Building and Fire Code requirements for exiting, corridor width, and other requirements;
i. Vendor trucks shall be no larger than eight feet wide by 30 feet long, exclusive of temporary canopies which may be extended over the service side when parked;
j. Vendor trucks may be placed on public property and streets; provided a public area use permit is obtained, adequate lane width is maintained, adequate sidewalk space is available for the service side of the truck, and visibility at driveways, street intersections, store entrances and display windows is not obscured (note: a public area use permit is not required for private streets or the campus district, but other requirements of this subsection apply);
k. The city may place additional restrictions, including limits on duration and frequency, for public area use permits for vendor trucks;
l. Vendor trucks shall not be placed in a public area closer than 100 feet from any existing eating establishment, unless the legal owner of the eating establishment provides written permission to be within 100 feet of the eating establishment.
4. Vendor stands shall be considered permanent structures and shall meet all requirements for such structures. Vendor spaces placed within an existing building shall meet all International Building Code requirements and shall not exceed 1,000 square feet in total area, including product preparation and seating areas. Vendors shall comply with all applicable state and county health regulations. Evidence of compliance must be conspicuously posted on the vendor stand or space. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2152 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1991 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Education Services | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Administrative offices, not located in schools | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Community colleges, colleges and universities, less than 10 acres in land area (1) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P |
Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage areas for education services (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Portable or modular classroom buildings, as additions to existing schools (3) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Pre-schools | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Primary and secondary schools (elementary, junior high, and high schools), with associated athletic and other facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Vocational-technical institutions, less than 10 acres in land area | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | P | P | P |
Vocational-technical institutions, 10 acres or more in land area | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Community colleges, colleges and universities 10 acres in land area or more are essential public facilities, which are subject to the requirements of BMC 12.06.080.
2.
a. Service and car wash bay openings shall be oriented away from residential uses or screened from such uses by a combination of fencing and landscaping; where a service or car wash bay opening would be oriented towards an abutting Residential-zoned property, noise shall be reduced by means of an intervening building or buildings, freestanding walls, doors or other devices for enclosing the car wash, or other methods determined by the community development director to be effective for reducing noise. In any case, noise shall be controlled so as to comply with BMC 8.26.040.
b. Storage of vehicles and equipment shall be located behind buildings or screened from adjacent streets and properties by a combination of fencing and landscaping.
3. Portable and modular classroom buildings are permitted as additions to existing schools; provided all setbacks are met, required parking and landscaping are provided, and the cumulative square footage of the added building or buildings comprises no more than 20 percent of the original permanent building square footage. Proposals which exceed this threshold shall require a conditional use permit. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2120 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1845 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Essential Public Facilities | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | |
Community colleges, colleges and universities, 10 acres or more in land area (1)(2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | |
Electrical transmission lines of higher voltage than 115 kV, in existing corridors of such transmission lines (1)(2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Electrical transmission lines of higher voltage than 115 kV, in new corridors (1)(2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | |
In-patient facilities including but not limited to substance abuse facilities and mental health facilities (1)(2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | – | C | C | C |
– | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | |
C | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | |
Transit bus, train, or other high capacity vehicle bases (1)(2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | |
– | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. RCW 36.70A.200, the Growth Management Act, requires cities to include in their comprehensive plans a process for identifying and siting essential public facilities (EPFs). Essential public facilities are described in the Act as those facilities which are typically difficult to site, but are needed to support orderly growth and delivery of services. The Act states that no local comprehensive plan or development regulation may preclude the siting of essential public facilities.
2. Essential public facilities shall require a conditional use permit. In addition to the regular conditional use permit review criteria, the following shall apply:
a. Documentation of Need. Project sponsors must demonstrate the need for their proposed EPFs. Included in the analysis of need should be the projected service population, an inventory of existing and planned comparable facilities and projected demand for this type of essential public facility.
b. Consistency with Sponsor’s Plans. The proposed project should be consistent with the sponsor’s own long-range plans for facilities and operations.
c. Consistency with Other Plans. The proposal must demonstrate the relationship of the project to local, regional and state plans. The proposal should be consistent with the comprehensive plan and other adopted plans of the prospective host community. In evaluating this consistency, consideration shall be given to urban growth area designations and critical area designations, population and employment holding capacities and targets, and the land use, capital facilities and utilities elements of these adopted plans.
d. Relationship of Service Area to Population. The facility’s service area population should include a significant share of the host community’s population, and the proposed site should be able to reasonably serve its overall service area population. However, linear transmission facilities are exempt from this criterion. Equitable distribution would preclude siting of SCTFs for both counties in Bothell.
e. Minimum Site Requirements. Sponsors shall submit documentation showing the minimum siting requirements for the proposed facility. Site requirements may be determined by the following factors: minimum size of the facility, access, support facilities, topography, geology, and mitigation needs. The sponsor shall also identify future expansion needs of the facility.
f. Alternative Site Selection. The project sponsor shall search for and investigate alternative sites before submitting a proposal for siting review. The proposal shall indicate whether any alternative sites have been identified that meet the minimum site requirements of the facility. The sponsor’s site selection methodology will also by reviewed. Where a proposal involves expansion of an existing facility, the documentation shall indicate why relocation of the facility to another site would be infeasible.
g. Distribution of Essential Public Facilities. In considering a proposal, the city shall examine the overall distribution of essential public facilities within King and Snohomish Counties to avoid placing an undue burden on any one community. Equitable distribution would preclude siting of SCTFs for both counties in Bothell.
h. Public Participation. Sponsors shall encourage local public participation in the development of the proposal, including mitigation measures. Sponsors shall conduct local outreach efforts with early notification to prospective neighbors to inform them about the project and to engage local residents in site planning and mitigation design prior to the initiation of formal hearings. The sponsor’s efforts in this regard shall be evaluated.
i. Consistency with Local Land Use Regulations. The proposed facility shall conform to local land use and zoning regulations that are consistent with the applicable county-wide planning policies. Compliance with other applicable local regulations shall also be required.
j. Compatibility with Surrounding Land Uses. The sponsor’s documentation shall demonstrate that the site, as developed for the proposed project, will be compatible with surrounding land uses.
k. Proposed Impact Mitigation. The proposal must include adequate and appropriate mitigation measures for the impacted area(s) and community(ies). Mitigation measures may include, but are not limited to, natural features that will be preserved or created to serve as buffers, other site design elements used in the development plan, and/or operational or other programmatic measures contained in the proposal. The proposed measures shall be adequate to substantially reduce or compensate for anticipated adverse impacts on the local environment.
3. Additional Siting Criteria for SCTFs.
a. In no case shall a secure community transition facility (SCTF) be sited adjacent to, immediately across a street or parking lot from, or within the line-of-sight of risk potential activities or facilities in existence at the time a site is listed for consideration. Line-of-sight has been estimated to be 600 feet from a risk potential activity or facility, which distance has been determined to be the maximum distance at which it is possible to reasonably visually distinguish and recognize individuals. Through the conditional use process, line-of-sight may be considered to be less than 600 feet if the applicant can demonstrate that visual barriers exist or can be created which would reduce the line-of-sight to less than 600 feet.
b. The site or building shall meet all of the security requirements of RCW 71.09.285.
c. No SCTF may be located within 600 feet of any residentially zoned property.
d. In mixed use zones, SCTFs may be located only in mixed use zones which do not have a Residential designation in the zone. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1884 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Government Services, General | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
City, county, special district, state, and federal offices | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Fire stations | C | C | C | C | – | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage areas for general government services (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Police stations, including temporary holding cells (2) | C | C | C | C | – | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Post offices | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Service and car wash bay openings shall be oriented away from residential uses or screened from such uses by a combination of fencing and landscaping; where a service or car wash bay opening would be oriented towards an abutting Residential-zoned property, noise shall be reduced by means of an intervening building or buildings, freestanding walls, doors or other devices for enclosing the car wash, or other methods determined by the community development director to be effective for reducing noise. In any case, noise shall be controlled so as to comply with BMC 8.26.040.
b. Storage of vehicles and equipment shall be located behind buildings or screened from adjacent streets and properties by a combination of fencing and landscaping.
2. Temporary holding cells may include overnight stays. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1845 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Health and Social Services (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Day care centers in existing schools (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Day care centers in new schools and in existing or new churches (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | – |
Day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of owners or renters of dwelling units located on the same site (2, 3) | – | – | – | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – |
Day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of employees of a separate business establishment located on the same site (2, 3) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Day care centers, independent (2) | – | – | – | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | – |
Hospitals | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | – | C | C | – |
Human service agency offices | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Medical, dental, psychological, psychiatric, osteopathic, naturopathic, chiropractic, physical therapy or other clinics | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Pharmacies | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Family day care, adult family homes and other health and social services which are residential in nature are regulated under BMC 12.06.140, Residential uses.
2. Includes adult and child day care, subject to all state licensing requirements. Day care centers in the R-M4 zone shall incorporate residential design features.
3. Day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of owners or renters of dwelling units located on the same site, and day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of employees of a separate business establishment located on the same site, shall be given the following allowances to encourage development of such uses:
a. Such day care centers shall not be required to provide parking for the day care use in addition to parking required for the primary business or the dwelling units; and
b. Such day care centers may provide care for children and/or adults other than those related to employees of the on-site business or the owners or renters of the on-site dwelling units. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Lodging | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Bed and breakfast guest houses (1) | P | – | P | P | – | P | P | P | P | – | – |
Campgrounds (2) | C | C | C | C | – | C | C | – | – | – | – |
Hostels | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Hotels and motels | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – | P | P | P |
Recreational vehicle parks (2) | C | C | C | C | – | C | C | – | – | C | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Bed and breakfast guest houses may be converted from existing residences or newly constructed residences, but shall not contain more than four bedrooms for guests in the R-C, R-M2, and R-M3 zones.
b. Parking for bed and breakfast guest houses shall be limited to that which can be accommodated in a garage and driveway. No such garage or driveway shall be wider than that necessary to park three vehicles abreast. No on-street parking shall be allowed.
c. The establishment shall be operated in such a manner as to give no outward appearance nor manifest any characteristics of a business that would be incompatible with the ability of the neighboring residents to enjoy peaceful occupancy of their properties.
d. The owner shall operate the establishment and reside on the premises.
e. Meal service shall be limited to serving overnight guests of the establishment. Kitchens shall not be allowed in individual guest rooms.
2. Campgrounds and recreational vehicle parks shall be a minimum of 10 acres, and may be combined. Such uses shall include shower and restroom facilities connected to public water and sanitary sewer services, a paved roadway which provides access to each campsite and recreational vehicle site in the development, and Type III landscaping around the perimeter of the development in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Manufacturing, Distribution, Storage, and Warehousing | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Contractors’ shops (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Distribution | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Food manufacturing, including bakeries, breweries, distilleries, and wineries (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Manufacturing | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Outdoor storage yards (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Research, development and testing | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – | – | P | P |
Self-service warehouses (“mini-warehouses”) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Warehouse and wholesale trade | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Wholesale bakeries, breweries, distilleries and wineries may contain retail outlets.
2. Any outside storage shall be screened from view from the street and adjacent properties by fences, walls, earth berms, landscaping, or any combination of these features. In the CB zone, only inside storage shall be allowed. However, properties located within the Canyon Park, North Creek, and Downtown 180th St./Riverfront subareas within a Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay (MVSO) designation having the required city authorization may have outdoor display and/or storage of motor vehicles subject to the provisions of the subarea. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Recreation, Culture and Entertainment | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Adult entertainment facilities (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – |
Amusement arcades | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Amusement parks | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | – |
Art galleries | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Baseball, football, soccer, tennis and other sports fields and courts (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Beaches and other natural water-oriented play areas | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Bingo halls | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Bowling centers and billiard parlors | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Community centers | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Fitness clubs | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Golf courses | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Golf driving ranges (3) | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Golf, miniature | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Indoor recreation facilities (6) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Libraries | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Marinas | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Movie theaters | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Museums | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Parks | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Performing arts facilities | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | P | P | – |
Riding arenas (5) | C | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Riding stables (4) | P | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Shooting or archery ranges, indoor | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Skating arenas | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Stadiums, not including stadiums for professional sports teams | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
Swimming pools | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Adult entertainment facilities are allowed only on General Commercial-zoned properties which are located west of Bothell Way NE (SR-522) south of a point approximately 300 feet south of the intersection of SR-522 and Hall Road, and which have frontage on SR-522. No more than three adult entertainment establishments shall be allowed within this area at one time. Adult entertainment facilities shall be subject to the following special conditions:
a. Purpose and Intent. The purpose and intent of requiring the following special conditions for adult entertainment facilities is to mitigate the adverse secondary effects caused by such facilities and to maintain compatibility with other land uses and services permitted within the city.
b. Applicability. The conditions established in this section apply to all adult entertainment facilities and include, but are not limited to, the following: adult arcades, adult motels, adult motion picture theaters, adult retail establishments, and other adult entertainment facilities.
c. Limitations. The conditions established in this chapter shall not be construed to restrict or prohibit the following activities or products:
(1) Expressive dance;
(2) Plays, operas, musicals, or other dramatic works;
(3) Classes, seminars, or lectures conducted for a scientific or educational purpose;
(4) Printed materials or visual representations intended for educational or scientific purposes;
(5) Nudity within a locker room or other similar facility used for changing clothing in connection with athletic or exercise activities;
(6) Nudity within a hospital, clinic, or other similar medical facility for health-related purposes; and
(7) All movies and videos that are rated G, PG, PG-13, R, and NC-17 by the Motion Picture Association of America.
d. Visibility. All building entrances and parking areas shall be visible to law enforcement officers from the street frontage, in accordance with the following:
(1) Required landscaping materials, including trees and ground cover, shall be of such species and spaced and maintained in such a manner as to preserve a clear view of the site from the street frontage. Large shrubs, hedges and coniferous trees which obscure vision shall not be allowed.
(2) Exterior lighting of all building entrances and parking areas shall be required. All exterior lighting equipment, including light bulbs, shall be maintained in good operating condition, and be in operation from dusk to one hour past closing time. Exterior lighting shall be of a brightness or luminosity sufficient in the determination of the director to provide law enforcement visibility of the building and parking areas during hours of darkness consistent with the intent of this subsection.
In accordance with BMC 8.64.030, all exterior lighting shall be shielded or recessed so that direct glare and reflections are contained within the boundaries of the property, and shall be directed downward and away from adjoining properties and public rights-of-way. No lighting shall blink, flash, or be of unusually high intensity or brightness. All lighting fixtures shall be appropriate in scale, intensity and height to the use they are serving.
Exterior lighting shall be installed so that in no case shall more than one footcandle power of light five feet above ground cross a property line as measured by a light meter meeting the American National Standards Institute specifications for such instruments. The owner of the property on which the light source is located shall bear the burden of proof that exterior lighting on their property meets these requirements, including the expense of a light meter reading. The meter reading shall be taken by a person deemed qualified by the director. The director shall maintain a list of pre-qualified persons available to the public.
e. Signage. Signage of an adult entertainment facility shall be in accordance with Chapter 12.22 BMC, Signs, except for the following provisions:
(1) Subject to subsections (B)(1)(e)(2) and (3) of this section, signage and other informational material on the building shall be limited to one sign flush with the building front as defined by this code, and shall be limited to the name of the establishment, street address, the days and hours of operation, restrictions on the age of persons to be admitted to the building, and identification of the stock-in-trade or adult entertainment offered therein.
(2) Nowhere on the building visible to passersby outside the building shall appear any words suggestive of sexual acts.
(3) Nowhere on the building visible to passersby outside the building shall appear any drawings or pictures or other depictions representing the sexually oriented materials and/or performances of such adult entertainment facilities.
2. Any lighting or public address system on a sports field or court located on Residential-zoned land shall be turned off by an automatically timed mechanism no later than 10:00 p.m. Field or court lighting fixtures shall minimize scattering of light beyond the field or court being illuminated. Adequate parking shall be provided on site to accommodate all participants’ and spectators’ vehicles. Parking need shall be determined for each proposed facility based on a demand analysis provided by the applicant.
3. Within residential zoning classifications, golf driving ranges shall be allowed only as accessory uses to golf courses.
4. Riding stables are private or public open air areas where equine boarding and equestrian riding activities occur at the same site. Sites hosting riding stables shall be limited in the number of horses to those criteria contained under BMC 12.06.030.
5. Riding arenas are private or public facilities devoted to spectator viewing of equestrian activities. Riding arenas may be indoor or outdoor with spectator seating, temporary or permanent equine boarding facilities, and accessory uses.
6. Indoor recreation areas are those recreational uses contained entirely within an enclosed building. Indoor recreational facilities shall provide parking, setbacks, landscaping, and other improvements consistent with the use that most closely resembles the specific type of recreational use placed within the building. No portion of the use may be placed outside of the building. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1697 § 3, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Residential Uses | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Adult family homes (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Co-living | C | C | C | P | – | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Domestic animals, keeping of (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Dormitories, fraternities and sororities (3) | C | C | C | P | – | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Dwelling units, accessory (4) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Dwelling units, single-family (5) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – | |
Dwelling, multifamily (6) | – | – | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Emergency housing | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P |
Family day care (7) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Home occupations (8) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Manufactured home parks (9) | C | C | C | C | P | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Mobile and/or manufactured homes, in manufactured home parks (9) | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Nursing homes (10) | – | C | C | C | – | C | C | C | C | C | – |
Permanent supportive housing (16) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P |
Residential care facilities (11) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Rooms for roomers or boarders (12) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Rooms for the use of domestic employees of the owner, lessee, or occupant of the primary dwelling (12) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Specialized senior housing (10) | – | – | – | C | – | C | C | C | C | C | – |
Transitional housing | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P |
Uses customarily accessory to permitted principal uses, including but not limited to garages, garden houses, tool sheds, playhouses or other play structures, greenhouses, swimming pools, and boat moorage (13) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development Conditions.
1. Adult family homes are permitted, subject to obtaining a state license in accordance with Chapter 70.128 RCW and the following:
a. Compliance with all building, fire, safety, health code, and city licensing requirements;
b. Conformance to lot size, setbacks, building coverage, hard surface coverage, and other design and dimensional standards of the zoning classification in which the home is located.
2. Keeping of animals shall not constitute a public nuisance which endangers the public health, safety or general welfare, in accordance with BMC Title 6, Animals. Suitable structures or fences shall be provided to restrain animals from leaving the premises. Animals other than and in excess of those permitted by this title shall require a conditional use permit. The raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes is regulated under BMC 12.06.030.
The following domestic animals are permitted in residential uses; provided, that hobby kennels or catteries and special hobby kennels or catteries may increase the number of adult dogs and cats, pursuant to Chapter 6.12 BMC:
a. Three or fewer adult dogs per dwelling unit;
b. Three or fewer adult cats per dwelling unit;
c. A total of three adult dogs or three adult cats per dwelling unit; provided, that any combination of adult dogs and adult cats shall not exceed four;
d. Three or fewer adult rabbits per dwelling unit;
e. The keeping of chickens shall comply with the following:
(1) The number of chickens allowed shall be based upon the following:
(A) No chickens may be kept on properties less than 5,000 square feet in area or on properties within the R-M4, DT, DN, DC, GDC, 522 and R-AC zoning classifications, except for those properties within the aforementioned zones which contain one single-family residence may keep the number of chickens allowed herein;
(B) Up to five total adult chickens on properties of 5,000 to 7,200 square feet;
(C) Up to eight total adult chickens on properties of 7,200 to 35,000 square feet; and
(D) Up to eight total adult chickens on properties larger than 35,000 square feet plus one additional adult chicken for each 1,000 square feet of additional lot area beyond 35,000 square feet;
(2) Coops, sheds, or structures, including chicken tractors (small portable cages that are moved periodically), used to house chickens shall be set back per the accessory setback requirements of Chapter 12.14 BMC;
(3) Juvenile chickens, or chicks, less than 30 days old shall not be counted toward the total number of allowed adult chickens; and
(4) Adult roosters are prohibited;
f. Three or fewer adult non-chicken fowl per dwelling unit;
g. Gerbils, guinea pigs, hamsters, mice, caged birds;
h. Nonvenomous reptiles and amphibians;
i. Other animals normally associated with a dwelling unit, and which are generally housed within the dwelling unit;
j. In addition to the maximum number of adult animals permitted, offspring from females are permitted at any given time until those offspring are able to survive independently.
3. Dormitories, fraternities and sororities shall be permitted as accessory uses to public or private educational institutions or churches.
4. Accessory dwelling units are permitted when added to, created within, or detached from a primary dwelling unit(s) subject to the restrictions in BMC 12.14.135.
5. Detached primary dwelling units, or single-family dwelling units, include site-built homes, type A manufactured homes and modular homes. Modular homes on individual lots shall incorporate design features of typical site-built homes including but not limited to modulation, articulation, sloped roofs, and wood siding or siding of a material which imitates wood.
6. In the R-M3 zone, permitted primary dwelling units may include middle housing or multifamily units, in accordance with subarea regulations.
7. Family day care is a permitted use, subject to obtaining a state license in accordance with Chapter 74.15 RCW and the following:
a. Compliance with all building, fire, safety, health code, and city licensing requirements;
b. Conformance to lot size, setbacks, building coverage, hard surface coverage, and other design and dimensional standards of the zoning classification in which the home is located;
c. Certification by the office of child care policy licensor that a safe passenger loading area, if necessary, is provided.
8. Home occupations are permitted subject to the following:
a. The home occupation shall be subordinate to the primary use of the premises as a dwelling unit.
b. All activities of the home occupation shall be conducted indoors.
c. The business shall be conducted by a resident of the dwelling unit plus no more than one additional person not residing in the dwelling unit.
d. Home occupations may have on-site client contact subject to the following limitations:
(1) All the activities of the home occupation shall take place inside the primary residential structure or accessory building;
(2) The home occupation shall generate no more than two vehicle trips per hour to the licensed residence, except that for one continuous three-hour period per month, the home occupation may generate up to 10 vehicle trips; and
(3) The home occupation shall not create a public nuisance as defined and regulated in Chapter 8.24 BMC.
e. The following activities shall be prohibited:
(1) Automobile, truck, boat and heavy equipment repair;
(2) Auto or truck body work or boat hull and deck work;
(3) Parking and storage of heavy equipment;
(4) Storage of building materials for use on other properties;
(5) Painting or detailing of autos, trucks, boats, or other items;
(6) The outside storage of equipment, materials or more than one vehicle related to the business;
(7) Vehicles larger than 10,000 pounds gross weight operated out of the premises or parked on the property or on adjacent streets; and
(8) Taxicab, van shuttle, limousine or other transportation services, except for office activities; provided all other requirements of this subsection concerning home occupations are met.
f. Home occupations shall not be allowed in accessory buildings within the rear yard setback, except when conducted in an accessory dwelling unit on an alley meeting all other setback provisions.
g. Home occupations in accessory buildings shall not permit noise to intrude into another residential property at a level at or above 45 decibels outside the hours of 7:00 a.m. through 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, and 9:00 a.m. through 5:00 p.m. on Saturday.
9. Mobile and/or (type B) manufactured homes are allowed only in manufactured home parks developed in accordance with Chapter 12.08 BMC.
10. See BMC 12.04.035, Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification; Chapter 12.10 BMC, Specialized Senior Housing and Nursing Homes, and BMC 12.66.060, Specialized Senior Housing Overlay in the vicinity of the Northshore Senior Services Center – R-L1, SSHO zoning.
11. Residential care facilities means facilities which care for at least five but not more than 15 functionally disabled persons, and which are not licensed as an adult family home pursuant to Chapter 70.128 RCW. Residential care facilities are subject to the following:
a. Compliance with all building, fire, safety, health code, and state and city licensing requirements;
b. Conformance to lot size, setbacks, building coverage, hard surface coverage, and other design and dimensional standards of the zoning classification in which the home is located;
c. A safe passenger loading area shall be provided, if determined necessary by the director.
12. If such rooms meet the definition of a dwelling unit, the requirements for accessory dwelling units shall be met.
13. Non-residential accessory buildings shall be limited to a maximum building coverage of five percent as established in BMC 12.14.030. Garages and carports located in R-L2, R-M1, R-M2, R-M3, and R-M4 zoned properties may exceed the five percent coverage limitation provided the garage or carport does not exceed 480 square feet in area. Accessory buildings shall be consistent with BMC 12.14.130 which addresses accessory building height and design.
14. Middle housing is permitted as follows and subject to the provisions in BMC 12.14.134:
a. The development of two dwelling units per lot on all lots zoned predominantly for residential use, unless zoning permitting higher densities or intensities applies.
b. The development of up to four dwelling units per lot in the R-L zones and six units per lot in the R-M zone, unless zoning permitting higher densities or intensities applies, within one-quarter mile walking distance of a major transit stop. Middle housing within one-quarter mile of major transit stops is not required to provide an affordable unit.
c. The development of four dwelling units per lot in the R-L zones and six units per lot in the R-M zones, unless zoning permitting higher densities or intensities applies, if at least one unit above the base two units in the R-L zones or one unit above the base four units in the R-M zones is affordable housing in accordance with Chapter 12.07 BMC:
(i) Owner-Occupied Units. The development shall commit to providing a minimum of one unit per four affordable to moderate-income (BMC 12.07.015) households.
(ii) Renter-Occupied Units. The development shall commit to providing a minimum of one unit per four affordable to low-income (BMC 12.07.015) households.
d. Cottage and courtyard housing is allowed on all lots zoned predominantly for residential use when all applicable requirements of BMC 12.14.134 are met.
15. Nursing homes in R-M1, R-M2, and R-M3 zones are subject to the following conditions:
a. Nursing homes are only allowed on parcels of four acres or more.
b. Vehicular access to nursing homes must be from arterial streets only. Where secondary access for emergency vehicles is required, the secondary access may be from nonarterial streets provided the access is restricted to emergency vehicles only.
c. Nursing homes adjacent to R-C and R-L zones must have a minimum 25-foot setback including a minimum 10-foot Type II landscape buffer.
16. Permanent supportive housing may include accessory office and support uses designed to provide direct support to residents.
17. Co-living housing is permitted by right within R-M2 and R-M3 zones, which allow at least six multifamily units. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 3 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2348 § 3, 2021; Ord. 2284 § 1, 2019; Ord. 2258 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2255 § 2, 2018; Ord. 2252 § 3, 2018; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2141 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1995 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1817 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1661 § 1, 1996; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Retail Uses | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Boat sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Building materials stores (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Bulk retail stores | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Department and variety stores | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Equipment or tool sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Heavy equipment and heavy vehicles sales or rental, new or used | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – |
Manufactured or modular home sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Motor vehicle sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Neighborhood scale commercial (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – |
Open air markets | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Recreational vehicle sales or rental, new or used | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – |
Any other retail business the primary activity of which is the sale of merchandise in an enclosed building | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. The uses denoted shall be permitted in the Community Business zone provided at least 50 percent of the space devoted to the display and/or storage of products for sale or rent is enclosed within a building allowed. However, properties located within the Canyon Park, North Creek, and Downtown 180th St./Riverfront subareas within a Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay (MVSO) designation having the required city authorization may have outdoor display and/or storage of motor vehicles subject to the provisions of the subarea.
2. Neighborhood Scale Commercial.
a. Intent. Neighborhood scale commercial uses are intended to promote neighborhood vitality and compatibility with surrounding residential areas, allowing only small-scale retail, service, and residential uses that primarily serve local residents with minimal traffic from outside the neighborhood. These businesses should support live-work opportunities, be easily accessible by walking, biking, and local transit, and contribute to vibrant, pedestrian-friendly community hubs which eliminate reliance on automobiles.
b. Hours of Operation. Hours of operation, including deliveries, are allowed between 6:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, 7:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m. Saturday through Sunday.
c. Scale. Maximum square footage for a neighborhood scale commercial space is limited to the greater of 1,800 square feet or 30 percent of the net buildable area of the lot, not to exceed 2,500 square feet.
d. Permitted Uses. The following uses are allowed within neighborhood scale commercial. Other proposed uses that are not mentioned in this section but achieve the intent and definition of neighborhood scale commercial highlighted in subsection (B)(2)(a) of this section and BMC 11.02.060 as determined by the community development director, may be considered a permitted use as an administrative interpretation.
(1) Food and Beverage.
(i) Restaurants;
(ii) Coffee shops;
(iii) Bakeries;
(iv) Bars/pubs/taverns;
(2) Retail Sales.
(i) Grocery or food markets (i.e., traditional “corner stores”);
(ii) Hardware stores;
(iii) Bike and sporting goods;
(iv) Pharmacies;
(v) Boutique shopping (i.e., clothing, crafts, art, houseplants);
(vi) Artisan manufacturing with on-site sales;
(3) Services.
(i) Child-care centers;
(ii) Salons and barbers;
(iii) Pet care, boarding, vet;
(iv) Physicians and dentists;
(v) Art gallery;
(vi) Financial services (i.e., tax preparers);
(vii) Florist shops.
e. Prohibited Uses and Elements.
(1) Automotive, marine, and heavy equipment services listed in BMC 12.06.040 such as gas stations and repair shops;
(2) Large item retailers providing items such as furniture and appliances;
(3) Auto or truck body work or boat hull and deck work;
(4) Parking and storage of heavy equipment;
(5) Storage of building materials for use on other properties;
(6) Painting or detailing of auto, truck, boats, or other items;
(7) The outside storage of equipment, materials, or more than one vehicle related to the business;
(8) Vehicles larger than 10,000 pounds gross weight operated out of the premises or parked on the property or on adjacent streets;
(9) Taxicab, van shuttle, limousine or other transportation services, except for office activities; provided, that all other requirements of this subsection concerning neighborhood scale commercial are met;
(10) No outdoor pet runs, kennels, or similar activities associated with pet care, boarding, or vet uses (indoor is permitted);
(11) Drive-in or drive-through businesses; and
(12) Weapon sales. (Ord. 2460 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Temporary Uses | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Amusement rides, carnivals or circuses | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Christmas tree lots | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Community festivals and street fairs | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Construction sheds or trailers (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Fireworks stands | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Parking lot and sidewalk sales | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Wireless communication facilities (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Seasonal sales of flowers or produce | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Transitory accommodations (3) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Yard and garage sales | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Construction sheds and trailers are permitted on the subject property or on adjacent property with permission of the owner for the duration of the construction activity; provided, that such sheds and trailers are located in conformance with all required setbacks and no residential or other use shall be made of such sheds or trailers which is unrelated to the construction activity.
2. Temporary WCFs as defined in BMC 12.11.020 are permitted for the following purposes:
a. Evaluating the technical feasibility of locating a permanent WCF upon the subject property, not to exceed three consecutive days.
b. Providing emergency communications services during natural disasters or other emergencies which may threaten the public health, safety and welfare.
c. Providing signal coverage for a temporary special event, such as a news event, community activity, sporting event or other special event, for up to five consecutive days; provided, that additional days may be approved by the director.
The placement and use of temporary WCFs shall conform to required setbacks as specified in Chapter 12.11 BMC and shall be maintained in a good and safe condition, and shall comply with all federal, state and local rules and regulations. No person may extend the allowable time for a temporary WCF through trivial or minimal movements of the temporary WCF.
3. “Transitory accommodations” shall mean tents, sheds, huts, cabins, trailers or other enclosures which are not permanently attached to the ground, may be easily erected and dismantled, and are intended for temporary occupancy, usually for recreational or humanitarian purposes. Transitory accommodations are permitted provided the community development director determines on a case-by-case basis that such use possesses no characteristics which would adversely impact the community in any way, or that any potentially adverse characteristics can be adequately minimized and/or mitigated so as not to be materially detrimental to the community. Transitory accommodations can vary widely in their characteristics, which include but are not limited to size of site, surrounding land uses, duration, number of occupants, noise generation, and light and glare emanation. Accordingly, certain types of transitory accommodations may require the imposition of extensive conditions to mitigate potential adverse impacts to the community, while others may not; in some cases, adequate mitigation of impacts may not be feasible, and a proposed transitory accommodation consequently may not be allowed. The community development director shall therefore have the authority to approve, approve with conditions, or deny a permit for a transitory accommodation proposal, after consideration of the performance criteria set forth herein.
a. Process.
(1) A transitory accommodation permit shall be required prior to the commencement of such a use, unless the community development director determines, after consideration of the performance criteria set forth in this section, that the proposed transitory accommodation possesses no characteristics which might adversely impact the community. The prospective transitory accommodation host (property owner and lessee, if applicable), sponsor and manager shall jointly apply for the transitory accommodation permit and shall be equally responsible for compliance with all conditions of the permit. “Applicant,” as used in these regulations, shall mean the transitory accommodation host, sponsor and manager. “Proponent,” as used in these regulations, shall mean the prospective host, sponsor and manager prior to submittal of an application for a transitory accommodation permit.
(2) A transitory accommodation permit is a Type II action and shall be processed accordingly, as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, except that a pre-application conference and transportation concurrency review shall not be required. The permit fee shall be established by resolution of the city council.
(3) The applicant shall identify potential adverse effects of the proposed transitory accommodation on neighboring properties and the community and shall develop measures to mitigate such effects. The applicant shall submit a transitory accommodations impact mitigation plan with the permit application. The plan shall contain a narrative and drawing(s) that describe, to the satisfaction of the community development director, the measures the applicant will use to mitigate the effects of the transitory accommodation. At a minimum, the plan shall specifically describe the measures that will be implemented to satisfy the approval criteria provided in subsection (B)(3)(b) through (f) of this section, except for criteria specifically waived by the community development director.
The plan shall include a code of conduct and the names and phone numbers of all persons comprising the applicant. The form and organization of the mitigation plan shall be as specified by the community development director, but the elements of the plan shall be bound together. The approved transitory accommodation impact mitigation plan shall be signed by the community development director and the applicant, and implementation and enforcement of the plan shall be a condition of permit approval.
(4) Advance Discussions with Nearby Child Care Facilities and Schools.
(A) Except for religious organizations, prior to applying for a transitory accommodation permit, the proponent shall provide written notice to any licensed child care facility and the administration of any public or private elementary, middle, junior high or high school within 600 feet of the boundaries of the proposed transitory accommodations site, and shall seek comments from said child care facility and school administration.
(B) Where no comments are received, or where said child care facility(ies) or the administration of said school(s) is supportive of the proposal, the proponent shall submit an affidavit to this effect with the application.
(C) Where said child care facility(ies) or the administration of said school(s) registers objections or concerns regarding the proposed transitory accommodations, the proponent shall attempt to resolve such objections or concerns via a negotiated mitigation plan between the proponent and the child care facility(ies) or school(s). Such a plan shall be submitted with the application and shall be incorporated in the conditions of the permit. Where the negotiations do not result in a mutually agreed upon mitigation plan within 30 days of receipt by the child care facility or school administration of the initial notice from the proponent, but the parties desire to continue to pursue resolution of the issues, the parties may request mediation services from or through the city. In the event the parties cannot reach agreement after a good faith effort of at least 30 days from receipt by the child care facility or the school administration of the initial notice from the proponent, the proponent may submit an application but shall provide a record of the negotiations between the parties, including but not limited to copies of all correspondence and meeting notes. In evaluating the application against the performance criteria set forth herein, the director shall consider the topic(s) of the unsuccessful negotiations and the extent to which the parties demonstrated good faith in their discussions. “Good faith” in this context shall mean a recognition of the legitimacy of, and a willingness to reasonably accommodate, each party’s needs, desires and concerns.
(D) A religious organization may host individuals or families experiencing homelessness pursuant to RCW 35A.21.360, including extreme weather shelters, on property owned or controlled by the religious organization whether within buildings located on the property or elsewhere on the property outside of buildings, subject to the conditions set forth in this section. The city may require an organization to enter into a memorandum of understanding for fire safety that includes inspections, an outline for appropriate emergency procedures, a determination of the most viable means to evacuate occupants from inside a site with appropriate illuminated exit signage, panic bar exit doors, and a completed fire water agreement indicating: (a) posted safe means of egress; (b) operable smoke detectors, carbon monoxide detectors as necessary, and fire extinguishers; and (c) a plan for monitors who spend the night awake and are familiar with emergency protocols, who have suitable communication devices, and who know how to contact the fire department.
(5) Decisions of the community development director and/or police chief may be appealed. Such appeals shall be heard and decided by the hearing examiner in accordance with the procedures set forth in BMC 11.12.010.
(6) Emergencies. The community development director may waive these requirements when a natural or manufactured disaster necessitates the immediate establishment of transitory accommodations.
(7) Failure to Comply. If a transitory accommodation permit has been issued, and the community development director determines that the applicant has violated any condition of that permit, the director shall issue a notice of violation and require compliance in accordance with the procedures set forth in Chapter 11.20 BMC, Enforcement. Failure to correct the violation after a reasonable time for compliance shall result in revocation of the permit. In such an event all activities associated with the accommodation shall cease immediately and the site shall immediately be vacated and restored to its pre-accommodation condition.
b. Site Performance Criteria.
(1) Size. The site shall be of sufficient land area to support the activities of the transitory accommodation without overcrowding of occupants, intruding into required setbacks or critical areas, destroying vegetation, eroding soils or otherwise overtaxing the land. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a site plan indicating the location of the proposed transitory accommodation on the host property; its area in square feet; and the proposed distribution of, and allocation of space for, anticipated activities including but not limited to sleeping, eating, socializing, and bathing and other personal functions.
(2) Setbacks from Property Line. All activities of the transitory accommodation shall be set back from adjacent properties a sufficient distance so as not to impinge upon or otherwise unduly influence activities on said adjacent properties. The transitory accommodation shall be positioned on the property in the location that results in the least adverse impact to occupants of neighboring properties. The community development director may require the applicant to change the proposed location of the transitory accommodation to mitigate adverse impacts to occupants of neighboring properties. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a site plan indicating buildings and uses on properties surrounding the proposed transitory accommodation, and the distance the proposed accommodation would be set back from surrounding property lines. A transitory accommodation shall be set back no less than 20 feet from the exterior boundary lines of adjacent properties unless the owners of such properties consent in writing to a reduction or waiver of such setback.
(3) Screening of Activities. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, activities of the transitory accommodation shall be obscured from view from adjacent properties, by a minimum six-foot-high temporary fence, an existing fence, existing dense vegetation, an existing topographic difference, distance from exterior property lines, or other means, to the maximum extent feasible.
(4) Parking. Adequate parking for the transitory accommodation shall be provided so as not to reduce parking utilized by existing surrounding uses. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a proposed parking plan which addresses the following:
(A) A description of parking capacity, both on site and on street, that describes the amount and location of parking prior to the transitory accommodation and any displacement of parking resulting from the transitory accommodation; and
(B) Any circumstances which may reduce the normal demand for parking, such as off-peak-season use; and/or any mechanisms or strategies to reduce parking demand, such as the provision of shuttle buses for the use of occupants of the transitory accommodations, or the provision of shared parking agreements with adjacent uses.
(5) Access to Public Transportation. Where occupants of a proposed transitory accommodation are anticipated to walk to public transportation services, said accommodation shall be located no farther than one-half mile walking distance from a regular public transportation stop.
(6) Critical Areas. All proposed transitory accommodations shall comply with the city’s critical areas regulations as set forth in Chapter 14.04 BMC. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a site plan indicating the presence and extent of any critical areas.
(7) Restoration of Site. Upon cessation of the temporary accommodation, the site shall be restored, as near as possible, to its original condition. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall re-plant areas in which vegetation had been removed or destroyed.
c. Duration Performance Criteria.
(1) Length of Time. The proposed transitory accommodations shall be in operation the minimal length of time necessary to achieve the recreational, humanitarian or other objective(s) of the applicant. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a narrative explaining the objective(s) the applicant seeks to achieve, and the amount of time the applicant believes necessary to achieve that objective. However, under no circumstances shall a proposed transitory accommodation be allowed in one location for more than 90 days, either consecutively or cumulatively, during any 12-month period, except that where the ninetieth day falls on a Friday, an additional two days shall be allowed to dismantle and remove the accommodation over the immediately following weekend.
d. Health and Safety Performance Criteria. Transitory accommodations shall be operated in such a manner as to ensure the health and safety of occupants of the subject and surrounding properties. Accordingly, all transitory accommodations shall comply with the following:
(1) Health Regulations. All applicable city, county and state regulations pertaining to public health shall be met.
(2) Fire Safety. Inspections of the accommodation by the city for fire safety purposes may be conducted at any time and without prior notice. Adequate access, as determined by the fire marshal, shall be maintained within and around the accommodation at all times to ensure that emergency vehicles can ingress/egress the site.
(3) Building Code Inspections. Inspections of the accommodation by the city to ensure the public health and safety with regard to structures may be conducted at any time and without prior notice.
(4) Drinking Water and Solid Waste. An adequate supply of potable water shall be available at all times. Adequate toilet facilities shall be provided ons ite, as determined by the public works director. All city, county and state regulations pertaining to drinking water connections and solid waste disposal shall be met.
(5) Trash. Adequate facilities for dealing with trash shall be provided on site. A regular trash patrol or other method of regular maintenance in the immediate vicinity of the site shall be provided.
e. Conduct and Security Performance Criteria.
(1) Noise. Any transitory accommodation shall comply with city noise regulations as set forth in Chapter 8.26 BMC. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a plan to mitigate potential noise impacts.
(2) Light and Glare. Any transitory accommodation shall comply with city light and glare regulations as set forth in Chapter 8.64 BMC. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a plan to mitigate potential light and glare impacts.
(3) Security. Any transitory accommodation shall comply with city regulations regarding lawful behavior as set forth in BMC Title 9, Criminal Code. Any transitory accommodation shall provide all required legal access to public areas of the site by the city of Bothell police department and any other relevant law enforcement agency at all times. Additionally, where deemed necessary by the community development director or the police chief, the applicant shall provide for the following:
(A) The applicant shall take all reasonable and legal steps to obtain verifiable identification, such as a valid driver’s license, government-issued identification card, military identification card, or passport, from all prospective and current camp residents.
(B) The applicant will use such identification to obtain warrant and sex offender checks from the King or Snohomish County Sheriff’s office or other relevant authority. The anonymity of the requesting party shall be maintained.
(C) If said check reveals that the subject of the check is a sex offender, required to register with the city, county or state authorities pursuant to RCW 9A.44.130, then the applicant shall immediately reject the subject of the check for residency in the transitory accommodation or eject the subject of the check if that person is currently a resident of the accommodation, and shall immediately notify the Bothell police department of such rejection or ejection.
(D) If said check reveals that the subject of the check has an existing or outstanding warrant, then the applicant may select either of the following alternative actions:
(1) Immediately reject or eject the subject of the check and immediately notify the Bothell police department of such rejection or ejection; or
(2) Request the Bothell police department to confer with the agency or court of jurisdiction from which the warrant originated to determine whether or not said agency or court desires the warrant to be served. If the originating agency or court desires the warrant to be served, the Bothell police department shall do so immediately. If the originating agency or court declines warrant service, due to the minor nature of the offense for which the warrant was issued or for other reasons, the subject may enter or remain in the transitory accommodation; provided, that the applicant actively assists the subject in resolving the warrant.
(E) The applicant shall keep a log of all individuals who stay overnight in the transitory accommodation, including names and dates. Logs shall be kept for a minimum of six months.
(F) The applicant shall provide on-site security, as approved by the community development director in consultation with the city of Bothell police department.
(4) Codes of Conduct. The applicant shall provide and enforce a written code of conduct which mitigates impacts to neighbors and the community. Said code shall be incorporated into the conditions of approval.
f. Other Performance Criteria.
(1) Indemnification. Except for religious organizations, the applicant shall defend, indemnify, and hold the city, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits of any nature, including attorney fees, due to the acts or omissions of the applicant in connection with the operation of the transitory accommodation.
(2) Liability Insurance. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, with the exception of religious organizations, the applicant shall procure and maintain in full force, through the duration of the transitory accommodation, comprehensive general liability insurance with a minimum coverage of $1,000,000 per occurrence/aggregate for personal injury and property damage.
(3) Other Criteria. Where deemed necessary, the community development director may identify other performance criteria; require the applicant to describe the potential impacts of the proposed transitory accommodation with respect to those criteria; and determine if measures are warranted to minimize or otherwise mitigate such impacts. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2093 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1955 § 1, 2005; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1733 §§ 4 (Exh. C), 6, 1998; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Transportation | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Highways, rail lines and high occupancy vehicle lanes | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Parking facilities (surface or structured) (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Streets and pedestrian and bicycle facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Transit park and ride lots | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Transit shelters | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Transit stations (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. In the Residential, OP, and NB zones, parking facilities are permitted only as accessory uses to a principal use.
2. Transit stations may incorporate accessory convenience retail and service establishments for use by transit riders. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Utilities | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Electrical distribution lines, pipes, and support poles, transformers, and related facilities, not including substations (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Electrical distribution substations (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Electrical transmission lines of 115 kV or less and support poles (3) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Electric vehicle battery charging stations (7) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Natural gas conveyance facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Potable water conveyance facilities (5) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Potable water storage facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
Storm water collection and conveyance facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Storm water detention/retention facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications earth receiving stations (satellite dishes) (4) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications lines, pipes, support poles and related facilities, not including earth receiving stations, personal wireless service, transmission/receiving/relay facilities, or switching facilities (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications switching facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications transmission/receiving/relay facilities (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Waste water conveyance facilities (5) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Wireless communication facilities (WCFs) (6) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Electrical and telecommunications service lines on individual properties shall be placed underground in conjunction with new development or any construction activity which increases floor area, or, in the case of a remodel which does not increase floor area, has a valuation amounting to more than 50 percent of the assessed value of the structure being remodeled, according to the records of the King or Snohomish County assessor.
2.
a. Electrical substations and telecommunications towers, antennas and switching stations shall be designed so as to be compatible with surrounding development, through placement, architectural features, landscaping, and other measures, except that WCFs shall be regulated in accordance with Chapter 12.11 BMC.
b. Amateur radio antennas shall be allowed at heights no greater than those minimally sufficient to accommodate amateur service communications, in accordance with FCC regulations. Persons desiring to erect such antennas shall submit documentation indicating the height which meets this requirement. Such antennas shall be required to comply with the requirements of the Washington State Building Code, including the seismic and wind resistance provisions of the code, and to obtain a building permit.
3. Support poles for transmission lines shall be designed so as to minimize adverse aesthetic impacts. Electrical transmission lines over 115 kV are classified as essential public facilities, and are regulated under BMC 12.06.080.
4. Telecommunications earth receiving stations (satellite dish antennas) over two feet in diameter shall be screened from view from neighboring properties by location, berming, fences, walls, landscaping, or a combination of these techniques; provided, however, that no screening shall be required which would prevent reception of satellite signals.
5. Aboveground water conveyance facilities and waste water conveyance facilities shall require a conditional use permit.
6. WCFs shall be regulated in accordance with Chapter 12.11 BMC.
7. Electric vehicle charging stations are permitted as an accessory use to any permitted primary use and shall count towards the required number of parking spaces for said primary use. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1733 § 3 (Exh. B), 1998; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Uses Not Otherwise Categorized | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Cemeteries (1) | C | C | C | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – |
Off-site hazardous waste treatment and/or storage facility for the processing and handling of dangerous waste (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C |
On-site hazardous waste treatment and/or storage facility (3) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
Hobby beekeeping (4) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. The development and operation of cemeteries shall comply with RCW Title 68.
2. Subject to compliance with Department of Ecology regulations and state siting criteria as adopted in accordance with RCW 70.105.210, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended; provided, that dangerous substances are processed and handled as permitted uses in this zone; provided further, that nothing herein shall be construed to allow the processing and handling of dangerous substances or dangerous waste if otherwise prohibited by this code; and provided further, that a conditional use permit is not required for the treatment and/or storage of household hazardous waste.
3. Subject to compliance with Department of Ecology regulations and state siting criteria as adopted in accordance with RCW 70.105.210, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended; provided, that nothing herein shall be construed to allow the processing and handling of hazardous substances or hazardous wastes if otherwise prohibited by the code; and provided further, that a conditional use permit is not required for the treatment and/or storage of household hazardous waste.
4. The minimum requirements for hobby beekeeping are as follows:
a. Required Review Process. No permit, review, or authorization from the city is required for beekeeping complying with the requirements of this subsection.
b. Maximum Number of Hives. The maximum number of hives that may be located on a single lot shall be determined by lot size as follows:
(1) No more than four hives, each with only one swarm, shall be kept on lots that are 10,000 square feet or less in area.
(2) For each 2,500 square feet of lot area in excess of 10,000 square feet, one additional hive may be kept, up to a maximum of 10 hives. Each additional hive shall have only one swarm.
c. Hive Size. No hive shall exceed the standard dimensions typical to the practice of beekeeping.
d. Required Setbacks. Each hive must be located at least 25 feet from any property line, except that hives may be located closer than 25 feet to any property line where each hive is:
(1) Situated eight feet or more above adjacent ground level; or
(2) Situated less than six feet above adjacent ground level and behind a solid fence or hedge six feet in height parallel to any property line within 25 feet of the hive and extending at least 20 feet beyond the hive in both directions.
e. Special Regulations.
(1) All bee colonies must be raised and kept in movable frame hives.
(2) Adequate space must be maintained in every hive to prevent overcrowding and swarming.
(3) Each and every hive containing bees that exhibit swarming or aggressive behavior must be immediately requeened.
(4) Each person owning one or more hives with bees, brokers renting hives, and apiarists residing in other states who operate hives within the city must register with the Washington State Department of Agriculture as required under Chapter 15.60 RCW.
f. Permissible Zones.
(1) If the requirements of this subsection (B)(4) are satisfied, then hobby beekeeping is allowed within any zone as an accessory use to any permissible detached single-family use.
(2) Hobby beekeeping is not allowed as an accessory use to any multifamily use anywhere in the city. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2378 §§ 3, 4, 2022; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The incentives and regulations offered in this chapter are used by the city as one means of meeting its commitment to encourage housing affordable to all economic groups, and to meet its regional share of affordable housing requirements. The purposes of this chapter are to:
A. Help achieve comprehensive plan goals of affordable housing;
B. Implement through regulations the responsibility of the city under state law to provide for housing opportunities for all economic segments of the community;
C. Preserve opportunities for affordable housing as the city continues to grow;
D. Create affordable housing opportunities as a result of increased development capacity in various zones of the city; and
E. Encourage developments that include affordable housing and that combine local incentives provided by the city with resources available from other public and private sources. (Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
The following definitions are listed in alphabetical order for the purpose of these affordable housing regulations, and shall apply to the administration of this chapter. In addition, except as otherwise provided in this section, those definitions as contained in Chapter 11.02 BMC are adopted and incorporated into this section by reference.
A. “Affordable housing” and “affordable unit” mean a dwelling unit(s) reserved for occupancy by eligible households and having monthly housing expenses to the household no greater than 30 percent of a given monthly household income, adjusted for household size for a designated percent of area median income.
B. “Area median income” means the median family income for the Seattle-Bellevue, WA Metro Fair Market Rent (FMR) Area as most recently determined by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) under Section 8(f)(3) of the United States Housing Act of 1937, as amended. In the event that HUD no longer publishes median family income figures for the Seattle-Bellevue, WA HUD Metro FMR Area, the city may estimate the median income in such manner as the city shall determine.
C. “Eligible household” means one or more adults and their dependents who certify that their annual household income does not exceed the applicable percent of the area median income, adjusted for household size, and who certify that they meet all qualifications for eligibility, including any requirements for recertification on income eligibility.
D. “Housing expense” means, in the case of renter-occupied housing, rent, tenant-paid utilities (excluding telephone), and other tenant expenses required for the dwelling unit; and in the case of owner-occupied housing, mortgage, mortgage insurance, property taxes, property insurance, and homeowner’s dues. (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2341 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2325 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
A. Downtown Subarea:
1. Within the Downtown Transition District Affordable Housing Overlay, affordable housing is required as provided in BMC 12.64.103(B)(3)(a), and voluntary affordable housing incentives are available as provided in BMC 12.64.103(B)(3)(b).
2. Within the SR 522 Corridor District Affordable Housing Overlay, affordable housing is required as provided for in BMC 12.64.104(B)(4).
3. Within the SR 522 Corridor District outside the Affordable Housing Overlay, voluntary affordable housing incentives are available as provided in BMC 12.64.104(B)(5).
4. Within the General Downtown Corridor District, affordable housing is required as provided for in BMC 12.64.105(B)(4).
B. The development of four middle housing dwelling units per lot in the R-L and six middle housing dwelling units per lot in the R-M zones on all lots zoned predominantly for residential use are required to provide one affordable unit per four units in the R-L zones and one affordable unit per six units in the R-M zones, unless within one-quarter mile walking distance of a major transit stop, in accordance with BMC 12.06.140. (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2416 § 2 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 4 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2360 § 2, 2021; Ord. 2325 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2270 § 2, 2018).
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all affordable housing units required by, or allowed through, any chapter of the Bothell Municipal Code, except as otherwise provided by this code.
A. Threshold for Compliance.
1. For Affordable Housing Overlays. All developments creating 10 or more new dwelling units shall provide for affordable dwelling units within the development or provide other methods of creating affordable housing as provided in BMC 12.07.050. Adjacent developments by the same developer will be considered as a single development for the purpose of applying the threshold for compliance.
2. For Affordable Housing Incentives. All developments using voluntary incentives shall make dwelling units within the development affordable as provided in BMC 12.64.103(B)(3)(b) and 12.64.104(B)(5).
B. Duration of Affordability. Affordable units that are provided under this section shall remain as affordable housing for a minimum of 50 years from the date of initial occupancy for owner-occupied affordable units and for the life of the project (an individual building or group of buildings as part of one development) for renter-occupied affordable units. At the sole discretion of the director, the city may approve a shorter affordability time period for owner-occupied affordable housing, not to be less than 30 years, in order to meet federal financial underwriting guidelines.
C. Designation of Affordable Units and Standards for Affordable Units in Developments with a Mix of Affordable and Market-Rate Units. Prior to the issuance of any permit(s), the city shall review and approve the selection of affordable units, consistent with the following standards:
1. The affordable units shall generally be interspersed with all other dwelling units in the development.
2. The tenure (ownership or rental) of the affordable units shall be the same as the tenure of the rest of the dwelling units in the development.
3. The affordable units shall consist of a mix of number of bedrooms that is generally proportionate to the bedroom mix of units in the overall development.
4. The exteriors of the affordable units shall be compatible with and comparable in quality and durability to the rest of the dwelling units in the development and shall comply with any design standards for the underlying zoning district. The interior finish, durability and quality of construction of the affordable units shall, at a minimum, be comparable to new entry level rental or ownership housing in the city.
D. Availability in Developments with a Mix of Affordable and Market-Rate Units. The affordable units shall be available for occupancy in a time frame comparable to the availability of the rest of the dwelling units in the development. (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2416 § 2 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2325 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
A. An affordable housing agreement shall be recorded with the King or Snohomish County recorder’s office, as applicable, prior to the issuance of a building permit for any development providing affordable housing pursuant to the requirements or incentives of the Bothell Municipal Code.
B. The recorded agreement shall be a covenant running with the land and shall be binding on the assigns, beneficiaries, and successors of the applicant.
C. The agreement shall be in a form approved by the city and shall address price restrictions, homebuyer or tenant qualifications, affordability duration, phasing of construction, monitoring of affordability, and any other topics related to the provision of the affordable housing units.
D. The agreement shall provide the city sole discretion to establish monitoring fees for the affordable units, which fees may be adjusted over time to account for inflation. The purpose of any monitoring fee is for the review and processing of documents to maintain compliance with income and affordability restrictions of the affordability agreement.
E. The city may agree, at its sole discretion, to subordinate any affordable housing regulatory agreement for the purpose of enabling the owner to obtain financing for development of the property. (Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
The city’s priority is for residential and mixed-use developments to provide affordable housing on the site of the development generating the affordable housing requirement. With respect to the programs identified in BMC 12.07.020(A), an applicant may propose alternative methods for satisfying all or part of a project’s on-site affordable housing, which the city will evaluate according to the requirements of this section.
A. Application Requirements. Applicants requesting alternative compliance must do so in writing at the time of any building permit or land use application, whichever is earliest, and receive approval prior to obtaining any building permit for the project, unless otherwise allowed by the director.
B. Criteria. The director may, at the director’s discretion, approve an applicant’s request for alternative compliance that must achieve an affordable housing benefit to the city equal to or better than providing the affordable units on site.
C. For off-site affordable housing as alternative compliance, the director may approve an off-site location for affordable units. If allowed, the following restrictions apply:
1. The off-site location for the affordable housing would not lead to a disproportionate concentration of affordable dwelling units either on the proposed off-site property or within a particular location within the city;
2. The alternative location must demonstrate that the affordable units provided off site will be completed and made available for occupancy before or within the same time period as the development generating the affordable housing requirement; and
3. The affordable units provided off site will have the same tenure (type of ownership) of units as the new market-rate housing units developed on the subject property.
D. For payments in lieu of construction of affordable housing as alternative compliance, the director may approve cash payments in lieu of providing actual affordable units with the following parameters:
1. The director shall establish a generally applicable formula for determining the payment amount, which may be modified as frequently as once per year.
2. The director shall determine the payment obligation for a particular applicant and the applicant must enter into an agreement with the city agreeing to payment of the fee, all prior to issuance of any building permits for the project.
3. Payment shall be due prior to issuance of any certificate of occupancy for the project.
4. The city shall deposit collected payments in an affordable housing fund established by the city and used for affordable housing development.
5. The subarea generating the affordable housing requirement is the priority location for affordable housing funded wholly or in part with in-lieu fees. However, the city may authorize the use of these funds for affordable housing projects in other subareas of the city (as a second priority) or within another jurisdiction (as a third priority) with close proximity to commercial uses, transit services, and/or employment opportunities.
E. The director may consider other alternative compliance methods for satisfying the affordable housing requirements, as proposed by the project proponent, such as fewer affordable units at greater affordability (e.g., 50 percent of area median income instead of 60 percent of area median income). (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
A. Payment shall be due prior to issuance of any certificate of occupancy for the project.
B. The city shall deposit collected payments in an affordable housing fund established by the city and used for affordable housing development.
C. The subarea generating the affordable housing linkage fee is the priority location for affordable housing funded wholly or in part with the fee. The city may, however, authorize the use of these funds for affordable housing projects in other subareas of the city (as a second priority) or within another jurisdiction (as a third priority) with close proximity to commercial uses, transit services, and/or employment opportunities. (Ord. 2341 § 4, 2020).
In the event a fractional affordable housing unit is required, the owner or developer shall have the option of providing an affordable unit or making payment to the city, as described in BMC 12.07.050(D), payments in lieu of construction. (Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish regulations concerning the development and operation of manufactured home parks. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Manufactured home parks shall be not less than 10 acres in size.
B. The number of manufactured homes in the manufactured home park shall not exceed the allowable number of site-built dwelling units which could be constructed on the property in the zone district in which the manufactured home park is located. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Manufactured home parks shall require the same permitting requirements and development standards as the zone district in which the manufactured home park is located. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2252 § 4, 2018; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Chapter 296-150M WAC as currently promulgated, together with any future amendments thereof or future additions thereto, is adopted by this reference and incorporated into this code as if set forth in this section in full. The building official, or designee, is authorized to inspect the installation of manufactured homes, issue permits for all manufactured homes that meet the requirements of this chapter and enforce all violations of this chapter. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
No manufactured home shall be placed on any lot within the city unless a valid installation building permit has been issued by the city pursuant to the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All manufactured home parks existing on April 1, 1996, and which were in compliance with existing city or county codes at the time of their establishment shall be legal nonconforming uses and shall be entitled to the number of manufactured homes which was permitted by the applicable ordinance in effect at the time the manufactured home park was established; provided, however, that no increase in the number of units shall be allowed unless the provisions of this chapter are met.
B. Setbacks applied to structures within the existing Hollyhills and Woodcrest Estates Manufactured Home Parks shall be based upon the setback dimensions of Table 12.08-1 below; provided, that all setback dimensions shall be consistent with the city-adopted building and fire codes:
Table 12.08-1: Setbacks Applicable to Hollyhills and Woodcrest Estates Manufactured Home Parks
Notes:
1Corner lots shall observe a minimum setback of 10 feet from all streets and alleys.
2The distance from accessory buildings to the manufactured home may be reduced when consistent with the building and fire codes.
(Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2252 § 4, 2018; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to provide standards for the development of specialized senior housing and nursing homes in a manner which recognizes and accommodates the varied housing needs and desires of seniors; promotes independence and a high quality of life; and ensures that specialized senior residences and nursing homes are so located and constructed as to be compatible with surrounding land uses.
Seniors, like other segments of the community, are varied in their housing needs and lifestyle choices. Most of the community’s seniors reside in nonspecialized owned or rented site-built single-family residences, mobile and manufactured homes, and apartments and condominiums which typically contain no inherent design features to aid mobility (although such features may be included by the owner), and which offer no on-site services or activities. These types of housing which are not specifically age-targeted, as well as accessory senior dwelling units (“mother-in-law apartments”) and adult family homes, are regulated elsewhere in this title (see permitted uses and accessory uses under each zoning classification). This chapter provides for and regulates housing intended for those seniors who want or need such specialized design features, services and/or activities to enhance their quality of life.
Where the regulations of this chapter conflict with other regulations in this title, the more restrictive regulations shall apply.
These housing types are described as follows:
A. Specialized senior housing, comprising of coordinated developments of two or more owned or rented site-built single-family dwellings, manufactured homes, apartments and condominiums which contain specialized design features and/or on-site services and activities to accommodate the mobility, nutrition, medical, social and/or other needs of persons 62 years of age or older and/or disabled persons. Domestic partners of and/or caregivers for such persons may also reside in such developments and need not be 62 years of age or older and/or disabled. Individual residences which contain design features to aid mobility but which are not part of a coordinated development are not included in this category.
This category covers a range of service levels, from no services (“independent living”) to minimal meal service and housekeeping (“semi-independent living”) to a high level of assistance with daily life functions (“assisted living”), with many gradations of service levels in between.
B. Nursing homes, comprising facilities which provide short- or long-term care for seniors and other persons who need skilled nursing care but do not require hospitalization. (Ord. 2445 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Occupancy of specialized senior housing shall be limited to persons 62 years of age or over and/or disabled persons, and their domestic partners and/or live-in caregivers who need not be 62 years of age or older and/or disabled. Senior housing may not be converted to another allowed residential use, unless such use meets the density and other requirements of the city code. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The maximum number of dwelling units in a specialized senior housing development and the maximum number of beds in a nursing home development shall be as set forth below.
A. Specialized Senior Housing.
1. On properties located within an area with a Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification, the particular density or intensity of the developments shall be as set forth in the subarea chapter containing the overlay, subject to compliance with all development standards set forth in the said subarea chapter.
2. On properties zoned R-M3, R-M4, R-AC or having multiple zoning classifications (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB), the maximum number of specialized senior housing dwelling units shall not be restricted, subject to compliance with all dimensional, design, parking, landscaping and other development standards of the zoning classification in which the development would occur except those standards relating to density or number of units allowed for nonspecialized housing.
B. Nursing Homes. The maximum number of beds in a nursing home shall not be restricted, subject to compliance with all dimensional, design, parking, landscaping and other development standards of the zoning classification in which the development would occur except standards relating to density or number of units allowed for nonspecialized housing. (Ord. 2445 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Specialized senior housing developments and nursing homes shall exhibit a residential rather than institutional character, through quality site, building, and landscaping design and materials. Adherence to this standard shall be ensured through application of the goals, policies and actions contained in the Urban Design Element of the Comprehensive Plan. Specialized senior housing located within an area having a Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification shall in addition be designed, located and operated in accordance with development standards set forth in the subarea chapter containing the overlay. Where a conflict between city-wide and subarea design and operating standards exists, the subarea standards shall apply. (Ord. 2284 § 2, 2019; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Specialized senior housing located within an area having a Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification shall be designed, located and operated in accordance with development standards set forth in the subarea chapter containing the overlay. Where a conflict between city-wide and subarea design and operating standards exists, the subarea standards shall apply.
Where a property proposed for specialized senior housing or nursing home development is directly adjacent along a property line to single-family zoned property, which zoning shall include R-C, R-L1, and R-L2, compatibility shall be achieved through a combination of measures including but not limited to the following:
A. The minimum setback from adjacent single-family zoned property line(s) shall be 25 feet;
B. Type II landscaping shall be required along the single-family property line(s); this and other landscaping within the development shall reinforce the existing landscape character of the area to the maximum extent possible;
C. Building design shall incorporate a repetitive articulation and modulation which reflects the scale of nearby single-family lot development, unless the context is poorly defined and/or undesirable and a different character and scale has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations;
D. The following design features of nearby single-family residential development shall be incorporated unless the context is poorly defined and/or undesirable and a different character and scale has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations:
1. Siding materials and styles;
2. Fenestration pattern;
3. Roof materials and styles; and
4. Proportions of architectural elements;
E. Building design shall respect and preserve the privacy and solar access of adjacent single-family development and minimize windows, decks and balconies overlooking neighboring single-family yards;
F. Parking lots shall be designed so as to least impact the character of the neighborhood;
G. Heating, cooling, kitchen and other mechanical equipment; conduits, service panels, meters and other electrical equipment; and refuse collection facilities shall be located and/or screened so as not to be visible or audible above ambient noise levels from adjacent single-family development or the street;
H. In non-single-family zones, building height may exceed that allowed in Chapter 12.14 BMC for architectural elements only and not to increase the number of floors; provided, that for every additional foot of height over the maximum, the building shall be set back from the single-family zoned property line(s) one foot in addition to the minimum required setback. (Ord. 2445 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The required number of parking stalls for specialized senior housing is one per dwelling unit. This may be reduced to one stall per one and one-half dwelling units if justification for the reduction can be provided based on the number and types of services and activities to be provided on site or other factors which affect parking demand. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Recreation space shall be provided at a ratio of a minimum of 100 square feet per dwelling unit for specialized senior housing, and 50 square feet per bed for nursing homes. At least 50 percent of the required minimum area shall be outdoors. The location and layout of recreation space for such developments shall be as set forth in Chapter 12.20 BMC. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Specialized senior housing and nursing home developments on properties located more than one-half mile by sidewalk or walkway from the outer perimeter of a community or neighborhood retail/services activity center (as depicted in Figure ED1 of the comprehensive plan) or a transit route shall demonstrate that a disabled-accessible transportation program offering regular and frequent daily service is provided to the site for use by residents. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Provision of Opportunities for Wireless Providers. This chapter is designed to provide opportunities for wireless communication facilities (WCFs) and small wireless facilities (SWFs) consistent with rights of wireless service providers while providing for an orderly development of the city and protecting the health, safety, and general welfare of the city’s residents and property owners.
B. Preservation of Character of City. A primary objective of this chapter is to preserve the existing visual and aesthetic character of the city and its neighborhoods, as well as minimize the noise impacts generated by WCFs and SWFs. Preserving the visual and aesthetic character of the city includes the protection of views within the city which create a special character for the community, high property values and a tax base sufficient to support the city’s operations, limiting the intrusion of noise, visual, and aesthetic impacts associated with commercial and other uses into residential neighborhoods, and encouraging well-coordinated, cohesive streetscapes in those areas of the city where specific design districts are established through planning efforts and capital investments.
C. Goals. The goals of this chapter include:
1. Establishing development regulations consistent with the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, adopted July 31, 1995, as subsequently updated;
2. Providing sites for locating WCFs and SWFs;
3. Providing WCFs and infrastructure a regulatory process free from local regulation that could effectively prohibit wireless communication providers from serving the city and its residential, educational, public safety, commercial users and visitors who use wireless services, as well as providing consumers a choice of providers and allows for continuous improvements in quality, reliability, and innovation;
4. Encouraging the use of appropriate designs that have minimal adverse environmental, noise, and visual impacts on the city and the prompt removal of abandoned facilities;
5. Prioritizing the location of WCFs upon existing nonresidential structures, in such a manner that the WCF is integrated, or appears to be integrated, into the structure;
6. Establishing standards for WCFs and SWFs to mitigate the visual and noise impacts associated with those facilities;
7. Facilitating the use of rights-of-way for WCFs and SWFs to reduce the impact of those facilities upon residential areas of the city where the siting of WCFs or SWFs in residential zoning districts is necessary or desired by a provider;
8. Facilitating the use of existing high voltage transmission towers in private rights-of-way in commercial and certain mixed use zones for WCFs to reduce the need of such facilities within residential areas and to reduce the impacts of WCFs upon residential and other properties; and
9. Encouraging the development of WCFs and SWFs on a competitively neutral basis. (Ord. 2445 § 5 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2295 § 3, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
The following definitions apply throughout this chapter. Additional definitions applicable to those sections relating specifically to eligible facilities requests are included in a separate section within that particular article:
A. “Antenna” means an apparatus designed for the purpose of emitting radio frequency (RF) radiation, to be operated or operating from a fixed location pursuant to FCC authorization, for the provision of personal wireless service and any commingled information services. For the purposes of this definition, the term “antenna” does not include an unintentional radiator, mobile station or device authorized by 47 C.F.R. Part 15.
B. “Antenna array” means two or more devices used for the transmission or reception of radio frequency signals, microwave or other signals for commercial communications purposes.
C. “Applicant” means any person, firm or entity seeking to place a WCF within the boundaries of the city.
D. “Camouflaged” or “concealed” means the use of shape, color and texture to cause an object to appear to blend into something else, usually a structure, such as a building, wall or roof. “Camouflage” or “conceal” does not mean invisible, but rather appearing as part of or blending into either the structure used as a mount or the immediate adjacent background.
E. As used in this chapter, the term “city” means the city of Bothell, Washington.
F. “Director” means the director of the community development department and their designee.
G. “Disguised” means that a WCF is changed to appear to be something other than what it really is. For example, WCFs are sometimes disguised to appear as trees or flagpoles.
H. “Emergency notification services” means services that notify the public of an emergency.
I. “Emergency services” means 911 emergency services and emergency notification services.
J. “Emergency support services” means information or database management services used in support of emergency services.
K. “Equipment enclosure” means a structure, shelter, cabinet, box or vault designed for and used to house and protect the electronic equipment necessary and/or desirable for processing wireless communication signals and data, including any provisions for mechanical cooling equipment, air conditioning, ventilation, or auxiliary electric generators.
L. “FCC” means the Federal Communications Commission.
M. “Guyed tower” means a vertical support structure which is usually over 100 feet tall, which consists of metal crossed strips or bars, and is steadied by wire guys in a radial pattern around the tower.
N. “Lattice tower” means a wireless communication support structure that consists of metal crossed strips, bars, or braces, forming a tower which may have three, four, or more sides.
O. “Licensed carrier” means any person, firm or entity licensed by the FCC to provide personal wireless services and which is in the business of providing the same.
P. “Light pole” means a nonwooden pole that provides lighting for the right-of-way.
Q. “Monopole tower” or “monopole” means a vertical support structure, consisting of a single vertical pole, typically with a platform or bracket for mounting multiple antennas. Monopoles as used herein do not apply to structures designed to support small wireless facilities.
R. “Mount,” depending on its context, means any mounting device or bracket which is used to attach an antenna or antenna array to a utility pole, building, structure, lattice tower, or monopole or may mean the structure or surface upon which personal wireless communication facilities are mounted.
S. “Panel antenna” means a directional antenna designed to transmit and/or receive signals in a directional pattern.
T. “Right-of-way” means any public right-of-way that is classified as an alley, local access street, collector street, minor arterial, or principal arterial and that is partially or fully developed and devoted to transportation use by the public at large. The term shall be interpreted to be synonymous with the term right-of-way as defined in RCW 35.99.010(5).
U. “Small wireless facility (SWF)” is defined in accord with 47 C.F.R. 1.6002(l).
V. “Structure” means a pole, tower, base station, or other building, whether or not it has an existing antenna facility, that is used or to be used for the provision of personal wireless service (whether on its own or comingled with other types of service).
W. “Temporary WCF” means a nonpermanent WCF installed on a short-term basis, for the purpose of evaluating the technical feasibility of a particular site for placement of a WCF; for providing emergency communications during a natural disaster or other emergencies which may threaten the public health, safety and welfare; for providing wireless service during a special event; or for other purposes approved by the city under BMC 12.11.035. Examples of temporary WCFs include, but are not limited to, placement of an antenna upon a fully extended bucket truck, crane, or other device capable of reaching the height necessary to evaluate the site for placement of a WCF.
X. “Unified enclosure” means a small wireless facility providing concealment of antennas and equipment within a single enclosure.
Y. “Utility pole” means a structure designed and used primarily for the support of electrical wires, communication wires, television cables, and it includes light poles. Utility poles can be wooden or nonwooden.
Z. “View corridor” means scenic views of natural and built areas and features, including, but not limited to: tree-covered hillsides; the “feathered edge” along ridgelines surrounding the city; views of the built environment which contain significant architectural or historical features; natural features such as lakes, rivers, streams or mountains; an area of landscaping of local or regional significance; or a public art work.
AA. “Whip antenna” means an omni-directional antenna designed to transmit and/or receive signals in a 360-degree pattern.
BB. “Wireless communications facilities (WCFs)” means any unstaffed facility for the transmission and/or reception of wireless communications services, but does not include small wireless facilities within this definition.
CC. “Wireless services” means any service using licensed or unlicensed spectrum, whether at a fixed or mobile location, provided to the public.
DD. “Wireline services” means a facility used to transport communications data by wire, including but not limited to fiber optic, coax, or other physical medium. (Ord. 2295 § 4, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1885 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
A. Design and construction covered in this chapter shall be in accordance with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications (“Bothell Standards”), which are incorporated herein by reference as currently issued and as may be later amended by the public works director or the director’s designee. The public works director has the authority to implement and enforce the Bothell Standards.
B. The public works director and the community development director are jointly responsible for interpretation and application of the Bothell Standards specifically related to WCF and SWF projects and developments in the city. The procedure for such administrative interpretations is set forth in Chapter 11.04 BMC.
C. The public works director and the community development director jointly shall have the authority to review requests from an applicant for deviations from the Bothell Standards, provided the deviation shall result in performance equal to or better than the original standard. The decision to approve or deny the request shall include consideration of written information submitted by the applicant, and the public works director and the community development director jointly shall notify the applicant in writing of the decision as part of the normal permit review process. A copy of the decision shall be kept in the city’s project files for reference. (Ord. 2295 § 5, 2019).
A. The placement or modification of any WCF or SWF at any location within the city is subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. WCFs shall not be permitted on any building or structure within an area of the city zoned exclusively R-C through R-M4, including the SSHO and MHP overlay zones, except as specified in BMC 12.11.040.
C. Unless specifically exempted by law or ordinance, WCFs and SWFs located within a designated critical area or within a shoreline management area and/or WCFs and SWFs subject to the State Environmental Policy Act shall comply with the requirements of BMC Titles 13 and 14.
D. Lattice and guyed towers solely for WCFs and SWFs shall not be permitted in any zoning district. Monopoles shall be permitted only as specified in BMC 12.11.040.
E. All applicants for WCFs or SWFs in the right-of-way must obtain a franchise. (Ord. 2445 § 5 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2295 § 6, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
The following are exempt from the provisions of this chapter and shall be permitted in all zones:
A. Industrial processing equipment and scientific or medical equipment using frequencies regulated by the FCC.
B. Radar systems for military and civilian communication and navigation.
C. Wireless radio utilized for temporary emergency notifications in the event of a disaster, and police, fire and first responder communications facilities; provided, however, that joint use networks such as the Public Safety Broadband Network (First Net) which also provide commercial telecommunications services to the public shall be subject to this chapter.
D. Licensed amateur (ham) radio stations.
E. Satellite dish antennas less than two meters in diameter, including direct to home satellite services, when used as a secondary use of the property.
F. Routine maintenance, replacement, or repair of a WCF and related equipment (excluding increases in height or expansion of or dimensions of antennas, towers, or buildings); provided, that compliance with the standards of this title is maintained.
G. Subject to compliance with all other applicable standards of this title, a building permit application need not be filed for emergency repair or maintenance of a WCF until 30 days after the completion of such emergency activity.
H. A cell on wheels or other temporary personal wireless telecommunications facility shall be permitted at a time and manner as determined by the city.
I. Automated meter reading (AMR) facilities for collecting utility meter data for use in the sale of utility services, except for whip and other antennas greater than two feet in length; so long as the AMR facilities are within the scope of activities permitted under a valid franchise agreement between the utility service provider and the city. (Ord. 2295 § 7, 2019).
The following siting standards shall apply to all new WCFs and SWFs:
Zone Designation | Permitted Uses | Visual, Dimensional and Equipment Enclosure Standards | Noise Standards |
|---|---|---|---|
Exclusive residential zones (R-C through R-M4, including MHP and SSHO overlays) | In the right-of-way, WCFs and SWFs are permitted | As per BMC 8.26.040 and WAC 173-60-040 | |
Outside of the right-of-way, WCFs and SWFs attached to nonresidential structures and existing monopole and lattice towers are permitted | |||
New monopoles on nonresidential properties with a CUP | As per BMC 12.11.070 | ||
Commercial zones (NB, CB, GC, LI, OP) and mixed use zones (SR 522, GDC, DT, DN, DC, and those containing R-M4 or R-AC as components) | In the right-of-way, WCFs and SWFs are permitted | As per BMC 8.26.040 and WAC 173-60-040 | |
WCFs and SWFs attached to commercial or mixed use buildings are permitted | |||
WCFs and SWFs attached to existing high voltage transmission towers are permitted | |||
Monopoles are permitted outside of the public right-of-way. New monopoles are limited to the zones listed below. | As per BMC 12.11.070 |
New monopoles not to exceed 110 feet in height, unless additional height is demonstrated to be technically necessary to prevent an effective prohibition of service as certified by the provider’s qualified radio frequency engineer and with approval of the community development director and the public works director, are permitted in the following zones:
A. Properties which contain the specific zoning classification combination of: CB, OP, LI and R-AC.
B. Commercial zones which have the exclusive combination of R-AC, CB and OP as a zoning classification and which are located in areas lying within 400 feet of the Interstate 405 right-of-way and more than 100 feet east of the SR-527 right-of-way.
C. Commercial zones which have the exclusive combination of OP and LI as a zoning classification.
D. Other commercial or mixed use zones and public lands as provided by the siting hierarchy in BMC 12.11.065.
E. On nonresidential properties in residential zones as a conditional use. (Ord. 2445 § 5 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2295 § 8, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1885 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish forest practices and land clearing regulations which allow the growing, harvesting and processing of timber on forest land, the conversion of forest land to uses incompatible with timber growing, and the clearing of nonforest land, while preventing the indiscriminate removal or destruction of trees and ground cover on undeveloped and partially developed property during such activities. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The definitions in RCW 76.09.020 of the state Forest Practices Act are hereby adopted by reference for purposes of administration of forest practices permits and shall apply in lieu of any conflicting definitions in the Bothell Municipal Code. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010).
No person, corporation, or other legal entity shall conduct Class I, II, III or IV forest practices, as defined in RCW 76.09.050, or engage in or cause land clearing in the city without first having obtained a forest practices/land clearing permit, except for exempt activities as provided otherwise under BMC 12.12.040. A forest practices/land clearing permit is a Type I permit if environmental review is not required and a Type II permit if environmental review is required, and shall be subject to the procedures for such permits as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.020).
The following shall be exempt from the provisions of this chapter:
A. No separate forest practices/land clearing permit shall be required under this chapter if an application has been filed for a development permit, so long as no alteration of the site is made pending the consideration by the city of such application. The purposes and standards set forth in this chapter shall apply to said pending application;
B. The installation and maintenance of fire hydrants, water meters, pumping stations, and street furniture, by the city or its contractors;
C. Removal of trees and ground cover in emergency situations involving immediate danger to life or property or substantial fire hazards;
D. Removal of dead or diseased trees, dead or diseased shrubs, or dead or diseased ground cover;
E. Removal of invasive, nonnative trees, shrubs, or ground cover unless located within a critical area or its buffer;
F. Removal of ornamental, landscape trees installed for aesthetic purposes in association with a residential use subject to the landscaping and tree retention requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC and the critical areas requirements of Chapter 14.04 BMC. Trees associated with timber production such as Douglas fir, western hemlock, western red cedar, western white pine, Engelmann spruce, western larch, and other timber trees as determined by the director of community development shall not be considered ornamental landscape trees for the purposes of this exemption;
G. Removal of trees, shrubs or ground cover for purposes of general property and utility maintenance or landscaping on developed properties one half acre or less in area, subject to the landscaping and tree retention requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC and the critical areas requirements of Chapter 14.04 BMC. This exemption shall not apply to any forest practices or land clearing which involves the use of a bulldozer or similar mechanical earth-moving equipment, neither shall it be construed to eliminate the requirement of obtaining other applicable development permits;
H. Removal of trees as part of the normal maintenance within the Tolt River pipeline right-of-way and the Seattle City Light transmission line easement;
I. Forest practices on ownerships of contiguous forest land equal to or greater than 20 acres where the forest landowner provides, to the Department of Natural Resources and the applicable county, a written statement of intent, signed by the forest landowner, not to convert to a use other than growing commercial timber for 10 years, in accordance with RCW 76.09.240(1)(a)(i);
J. Forest practices necessitated by fire, flood, windstorm, earthquake or other emergency defined by the state Forest Practices Board, in accordance with RCW 76.09.060(7);
K. Forest practices conducted to control exotic forest insect or disease outbreaks, in accordance with RCW 76.09.060(8); and
L. Forest practices consistent with a habitat conservation plan approved prior to March 25, 1996, by the United States Secretary of the Interior or Secretary of Commerce, and the Endangered Species Act of 1973 as amended, in accordance with RCW 76.09.340. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.030).
An application for a forest practices/land clearing permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application shall contain:
A. A map or plot plan of the subject property at a scale determined to be adequate by the community development director and including date; north arrow; scale; property area, in acres or square feet; contours; location of existing and proposed improvements; location, type, size, and condition of existing trees; general location of existing ground cover and shrubs; and identification of trees, shrubs, and ground cover to be cut or removed;
B. A tree retention plan consistent with BMC 12.18.030, including calculations;
C. Description of the methods intended to be utilized for the proposed forest practices or land clearing activity and the expected dates of commencement and completion of such activity;
D. If applicable, a critical area report as set forth in Chapter 14.04 BMC;
E. A temporary erosion sedimentation control plan as set forth in the Bothell design and construction standards and specifications;
F. Additionally, for applications for forest practices permits and conversions to uses other than commercial timber operation, the information required in RCW 76.09.060, including reforestation plans if applicable;
G. A completed development review billing form committing the applicant to pay development review fees as established in the city fee resolution;
H. Additionally, for forest practices permit applications, fees as established in RCW 76.09.065. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.040).
A forest practices/land clearing permit application shall be evaluated by the city and the permit granted if it is determined that the proposed forest practice or land clearing activity:
A. Promotes the public health, safety, and general welfare of the citizens of Bothell;
B. Is consistent with Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan goals and policies fostering sensitive treatment of the city’s natural vegetation, including but not limited to LU-G7, LU-G8, LU-P10, LU-P11, NE-G1, NE-G2, NE-G3, NE-P5 and UD-P7;
C. Complies with the requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC, Tree Retention and Landscaping, including but not limited to retention of significant trees;
D. Complies with the requirements of BMC Title 13, Shoreline Management, as applicable;
E. Complies with the requirements, purpose and provisions of BMC Title 14, Environment;
F. Complies with the requirements of the Bothell design and construction standards and specifications, including but not limited to installation and maintenance of erosion and sedimentation control before, during and after the forest practice or land clearing activity;
G. Complies with all other applicable requirements of the Bothell Municipal Code and Bothell design and construction standards and specifications;
H. Prevents the indiscriminate removal or destruction of trees and ground cover on undeveloped and partially developed property, and significantly retains the effect of the wooded slopes and the existing tree top line as seen from the valley floors, also known as the “feathered edge”;
I. Promotes building-planning and site-planning practices that are consistent with the city’s natural topographical and vegetational features;
J. Retains clusters of trees for the abatement of noise and for wind protection;
K. Additionally, applications for permits to conduct forest practices or for conversions to uses other than commercial timber operation shall be evaluated for compliance with the requirements of the state Forest Practices Act as set forth in Chapter 76.09 RCW, including but not limited to the following sections:
1. Legislative finding and declaration, as set forth in RCW 76.09.010;
2. Rules establishing classes of forest practices – Applications for classes of forest practices – Approval or disapproval – Notifications – Procedures – Appeals – Waivers, as set forth in RCW 76.09.050;
3. Form and content of notification and application – Reforestation requirements – Conversion of forest land to other use – New applications – Approval – Emergencies, as set forth in RCW 76.09.060;
4. Forest practices permit – Habitat incentives agreements, as set forth in RCW 76.09.063;
5. Forest practices application or notification – Fee, as set forth in RCW 76.09.065;
6. Application for forest practices – Owner of perpetual timber rights, as set forth in RCW 76.09.067;
7. Reforestation – Requirements – Procedures – Notification on sale or transfer, as set forth in RCW 76.09.070;
8. Forest practices – County, city or town to regulate – When – Adoption of development regulations – Enforcement – Technical assistance – Exceptions and limitations – Verification that land not subject to a notice of conversion to nonforestry uses – Reporting of information to the department of revenue, as set forth in RCW 76.09.240;
9. Notice of conversion to nonforestry use – Denial of permits or approvals by the county, city, town or regional governmental entity – Enforcement, as set forth in RCW 76.09.460; and
10. Conversion of land to nonforestry use – Action required of landowner – Action required of county, city, town or regional governmental entity, as set forth in RCW 76.09.470. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.050).
In accordance with the state Forest Practices Act, when issuing a forest practices permit, the city shall:
A. Include with every forest practices permit associated with the conversion of forest land to a use other than commercial timber operation a verification that the land in question is not or has not been subject to a notice of conversion to nonforestry uses under RCW 76.09.060 during the six-year period prior to the submission of a permit application, as required by RCW 76.09.240(7);
B. Report to the state Department of Revenue no later than 60 days after the date the forest practices permit was issued permit information including but not limited to the landowner’s legal name, address, telephone number, and parcel number, as required by RCW 76.09.240(8); and
C. Make inspections of forest lands before, during and after the conducting of forest practices, as required by RCW 76.09.150. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010).
A. Conducting forest practices or land clearing without a permit or failing to comply with the conditions of an issued forest practices/land clearing permit is a violation of these regulations and shall be subject to the provisions under Chapter 11.20 BMC, Enforcement. The unauthorized removal of vegetation shall be mitigated as set forth in BMC 12.18.030(F).
B. In addition to the provisions in subsection A of this section, conducting forest practices without a permit or failing to comply with the conditions of a permit which authorizes a forest practice, including unauthorized conversion to nonforestry use, shall be subject to the violation regulations in the state Forest Practices Act as set forth in Chapter 76.09 RCW, including but not limited to the following sections:
1. Stop work orders – Grounds – Contents – Procedure – Appeals, as set forth in RCW 76.09.080;
2. Notice of failure to comply – Contents – Procedures – Appeals – Hearing – Final order – Limitations on actions, as set forth in RCW 76.09.090;
3. Failure to comply with water quality protection – Department of ecology authorized to petition appeals board – Action on petition, as set forth in RCW 76.09.100;
4. Final orders or final decisions binding on all parties, as set forth in RCW 76.09.110;
5. Failure of owner to take required course of action – Notice of cost – Department authorized to complete course of action – Liability of owner for costs – Lien, as set forth in RCW 76.09.120;
6. Failure to obey stop work order – Departmental action authorized – Liability of owner or operator for costs, as set forth in RCW 76.09.130;
7. Enforcement, as set forth in RCW 76.09.140;
8. Violations – Conversion to nontimber operation – Penalties – Remission or mitigation – Appeals – Lien, as set forth in RCW 76.09.170;
9. Disposition of moneys received as penalties, reimbursement for damages, as set forth in RCW 76.09.180;
10. Additional penalty, gross misdemeanor, as set forth in RCW 76.09.190;
11. Notice of conversion to nonforestry use – Denial of permits or approvals by the county, city, town or regional governmental entity – Enforcement, as set forth in RCW 76.09.460; and
12. Conversion of land to nonforestry use – Action required of landowner – Action required of county, city, town or regional governmental entity, as set forth in RCW 76.09.470. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010).
The burning of trees, shrubs, ground cover or any other material shall be prohibited. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.070).
Any permit granted under this chapter shall expire two years from the date of issuance. Upon a showing of good cause, a permit may be extended for an additional one year. Approved plans shall not be amended without authorization of the responsible official. The permit may be suspended or revoked by the community development director if incorrect information has been supplied in the application, or upon violation of the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.080).
The community development director may require as a condition to the granting of a forest practices/land clearing permit that the applicant furnish a performance bond to the city to secure the applicant’s obligation to complete the restoration and replanting of the property after the approved land clearing has been accomplished in accordance with the terms of this permit and within the term thereof. The bond shall be in an amount equal to 120 percent of the estimated cost of such restoration and replanting and with surety and conditions satisfactory to the community development director. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.090).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish area, dimension and design regulations which comply with and implement the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan with respect to the desired intensity and appearance of development within the city’s residential, commercial and industrial areas. (Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040 contain general density and dimension standards for the various zones. Subarea regulations may establish specific and different density and dimensional standards and take precedent over city-wide regulations. Methods for measuring these city-wide standards are set forth in BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.140.
B. The area and dimension standards are arranged in a table for each of two general land use categories:
1. Residential;
2. Commercial/industrial.
C. Development standards are listed down the left side of both tables, and the zones are listed at the top. The matrix cells contain the area and dimensional requirements of each zone. All dimensions are measured in lineal feet, and all areas are measured in square feet. The parenthetical numbers in the matrix identify specific requirements or other information which is set forth following the matrix. (Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Development Standards Table.
Residential Development Standards (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1 | R-L2 | R-M1 | R-M2 | R-M3 | R-M4 | R-AC (always in combination with OP, NB, CB, and/or LI) | ||
40,000 min. | 6,000 | 3,600 | None | None | None | None | None | ||
Middle housing (see BMC 12.14.134) | Base | 2 | 2 | 2 | 4 | ||||
Transit/affordable housing | – | 4 | 4 | 6 | |||||
Maximum ADUs per lot | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | |||||
Maximum base density (3) | 25 | 50 | 60 | 80 | |||||
50% of maximum base density | 50% of maximum base density | 50% of maximum base density | As established for designated centers (6) | ||||||
Garage door | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | As established for designated centers (6) or for associated commercial designations See BMC 12.14.040(A) | |
All others | 15 | 15 | 15 | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 | ||
No Alley | 35 | 15 | 15 | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 | ||
Alley | – | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||
Alley (garage doors) | – | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | ||
5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | |||
Maximum building height (5) | 35 | 35 | 35 | 35 | 35 | 45 | 55 | ||
Maximum hard surface coverage (7) | 35% | 55% | 60% | 70% | 75% | 80% | 90% | 80% | |
The area within the front yard setback shall not contain any hard surface except for driveways, walkways, and structures allowed to project into the setback in accordance with BMC 12.14.090. If critical areas are present anywhere on the property, impervious surface coverage is further regulated by BMC Title 14, Environment. | If critical areas are present anywhere on the property, impervious surface coverage is further regulated by BMC Title 14, Environment. | ||||||||
B. Notes.
1. General Notes.
a. Where a district combines multiple zoning classifications or overlays (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB, MU-N), the most permissive standards of the individual zoning classifications shall apply.
b. Development standards may be modified through the planned unit development process. See Chapter 12.30 BMC.
c. Development standards for manufactured home parks are contained in Chapter 12.08 BMC.
2. Minimum, Average and Maximum Lot Area.
a. In the R-C zone, no lot shall be less than the minimum lot area except as may otherwise be permitted under an approved planned unit development, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC or under Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea regulations in accordance with Chapter 12.52 BMC.
b. Lot Size Averaging in Land Divisions. Lot size averaging applies in the R-L1 and R-L2 zones. When creating new residential lots through land division, individual lots shall be considered in compliance with minimum lot size requirements if the average of the areas of all the lots in the land division meets the minimum requirement for the base zone in which the land division is located, provided:
(1) That no individual lot therein shall be reduced below the average lot size for the next densest zone. For example, lots in the R-L1 zone may not be reduced below R-L2 square feet and lots in the R-L2 zone may not be reduced below R-M1 square feet equivalent of units per acre.
c. In order to promote efficient use of land, no subdivision shall contain any lot having more than one and one-half times the minimum lot area in the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, and R-M1 zones, except as follows:
(1) Any subdivision of nine lots or fewer may contain larger lots, but the property lines of such a subdivision shall be laid out so as to allow future subdivisions which comply with this subsection;
(2) A subdivision of 10 or more lots may contain larger lots to accommodate phasing of the subdivision; provided, that at completion of all phases, the subdivision complies with this subsection;
(3) A subdivision of 10 or more lots may contain a larger lot to permit the preexisting house and any related outbuildings and grounds to be retained intact on one property;
(4) These maximum lot size regulations do not apply to any common tracts for critical area protection, open space retention, storm water retention/detention or other purposes as may be required by the city as a condition of subdivision approval.
d. Land area in dedicated public rights-of-way, surface storm water retention/detention/water quality facilities located within required tracts, critical areas, critical area buffers, or any other land dedicated to the city, shall not be included in any proposed single-family lot, unless so stated in the conditions of an approved planned unit development, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
e. Land in an access easement, utility easement, or other form of easement which is not set aside as a separate tract as required under subsection (B)(2)(c)(4) of this section shall be counted as part of the area of a parcel for the purpose of calculating minimum lot area.
3. Multifamily Minimum and Maximum Density.
a. In the R-M1 through R-M4 zones, one multifamily dwelling unit shall be allowed for each whole number multiple of the stated allowed density, measured as units per acre. Only whole numbers may be credited toward unit count. Rounding up is not permitted. The following exceptions apply:
(1) Specialized senior housing subject to an approved conditional use permit in accordance with Chapter 12.10 BMC; or
(2) Middle housing developments created consistent with BMC 12.06.140 and 12.14.134.
b. In order to promote efficient use of land, no multifamily development in the R-M2 through R-M4 zones shall contain fewer than 50% of the maximum base units for each zone, except as follows:
(1) The total number of units may be fewer than as required above if the development is proposed to be phased; provided, that at completion of all phases, the development complies with the above requirements;
(2) These minimum density regulations do not apply to any multifamily/commercial combination zoning classification (e.g., R-M4, OP, CB);
(3) These minimum density regulations do not apply to any common tracts for critical area protection, open space retention, storm water retention/detention or other purposes as may be required by the city as a condition of development approval.
c. In the R-M2 through R-M4 zones, density, calculated as units per acre, is determined using the net buildable area, unless so stated in the conditions of an approved planned unit development, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
d. Land in an access easement, utility easement, or other form of easement which is not set aside as a separate tract as required under subsection (B)(3)(b)(3) of this section shall be counted as part of the net buildable area of a parcel for the purpose of calculating number of units allowed.
e. In the R-AC zone, minimum residential density is based on the net buildable area and shall be consistent with the applicable subarea regulations.
4. Setbacks.
a. “Setback” shall mean the distance from the lot line to the point where a structure may be constructed, not including those structures permitted under BMC 12.14.090 to project into the setback. The area between a lot line and a setback is a yard. Setbacks shall be in accordance with BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.100.
b. Garages, carports, and other structures whose intent is to house or provide parking for vehicles shall be set back from streets and access tracts a minimum of 20 feet.
c. Special setbacks apply to specific building types, uses and accessory structures. See BMC 12.14.070.
d. When middle housing is created by retaining and renovating a legally established nonconforming residential structure, building setbacks and height of the nonconforming residential structure can be matched in any building addition or expansion necessary to convert the existing dwelling unit to middle housing.
e. For duplex, triplex, or fourplex development, front and rear setbacks may be reduced to a minimum of five feet in the R-C, R-L1, and R-L2 zones, when at least one of the following conditions exists:
(1) Such reduction is allowed with an equal increase in setback distance on the opposite side of the structure. For example, a 10-foot reduction in front yard setback would require a 10-foot increase in rear yard setback.
(2) Such reduction is allowed when necessary to preserve or create natural amenities on the lot. Natural amenities may include, but are not limited to, trees, low impact development features such as rain gardens, or other similar amenities as approved by the community development director. Such amenities shall be placed in a conservation, utility, drainage or similar easement.
(3) Such reduction is allowed when the reduced front and rear setbacks or the associated increased setback pursued under subsection (B)(4)(e)(1) of this section is planted with a 10-foot-wide Type V landscape strip. Low impact development-compliant features such as rain gardens designed to treat storm water runoff from the entire site are allowed in lieu of the required planting strip.
5. Specific building height, minimum residential densities, and minimum floor area ratios may apply to certain activity centers as follows:
a. Within the following activity centers identified in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan:
(1) Filbert/Winesap neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.72 BMC.
(2) Juanita-Woodinville Way/I-405 neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.60 BMC.
(3) Maltby/York/Jewel neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.74 BMC.
(4) Canyon Park community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC. In zones where multiple designations exist, the commercial development regulations in BMC 12.14.040(A) shall apply.
(5) Downtown community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.64 BMC (Downtown Subarea Regulations).
(6) Thrasher’s Corner community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.48 and 12.74 BMC.
(7) Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC.
(8) North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.56 BMC.
(9) Midtown neighborhood activity center in accordance with Chapter 12.46 BMC.
b. Within the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, and R-M2 zones, residential structures may be up to 35 feet in height, provided the residential structure shall incorporate peaked roofs having a minimum roof pitch of four feet vertical for every 12 feet horizontal (4:12), or the uppermost interior floor area does not exceed 50 percent of the interior floor area directly below.
6. Hard surface coverage shall be measured as set forth in BMC 12.14.140. For the purposes of this section, driveways within the front yard setback shall be no wider than necessary to accommodate three vehicles across, and walkways within the front yard setback shall not exceed five feet in width.
a. Notes. Hard surfaces legally established on a site prior to December 31, 2016, and which exceed the limits set forth in this section and BMC 12.14.040 shall be subject to nonconforming provisions of Chapter 12.26 BMC.
b. In determining the hard surface coverage for a panhandle lot, the handle or access portion of the lot shall not be used to determine hard surface coverage. Hard surface coverage shall be measured as though no handle was on the lot.
c. For duplex, triplex and fourplex development, maximum hard surface coverage may be increased by 10 percent, subject to the conditions in subsection (B) of this section.
7. Within the R-AC zoning classification, minimum residential density is prescribed in the applicable subarea regulations. The maximum number of dwelling units attainable shall be controlled by the applicable site and building envelope design regulations.
8. Lands with a zoning classification of R-M3, R-M4, DC, DT, DN, GDC, or R-AC where offspring or unit lots are proposed to be created within a parent site through the subdivision provisions of BMC Title 15 may apply setback dimensions to the offspring lots as set forth in BMC 12.14.085.
9. Within specific subareas duplexes shall be allowed on individual lots to meet affordable housing requirements (see Chapter 12.07 BMC). Such duplexes do not need to meet the side yard setbacks for the common walls between dwelling units, but all duplex lots shall provide all setbacks from adjacent property lines pursuant to subsection A of this section. (Ord. 2459 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2457 § 3 (Exh. C), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2373 §§ 6, 7, 2022; Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2348 §§ 4, 5, 2021; Ord. 2282 § 5, 2019; Ord. 2258 § 2, 2018; Ord. 2255 § 3, 2018; Ord. 2252 §§ 6, 7, 2018; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1995 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1988 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1980 § 2, 2007; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Development Standards Table.
Commercial and Industrial Development Standards (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Minimum front yard setback (2) | Setbacks shall be the distance required for landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, except as otherwise provided under BMC 12.14.080 | ||||
Minimum rear yard setback (2) | |||||
Minimum side yard setback (2) | |||||
Maximum building height (3) | 35, or as established for designated centers (3) | 35, or as established for designated centers | 35, or as established for designated centers (3) | 35 | 35, or as established for designated centers (3) |
Floor area ratios (3) | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers |
Maximum hard surface coverage (4) | 100%, except for any required landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, and required critical areas and their buffers, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment | ||||
B. Notes.
1. General Notes.
a. Where a district combines multiple zoning classifications (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB), the most permissive standards of the individual zoning classifications shall apply; provided, however, that within activity centers, minimum density and/or floor area ratio requirements as established within the applicable subarea regulations shall be met.
b. Development standards may be modified through the planned unit development process consistent with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
2. Setbacks shall be in accordance with BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.100.
3. Specific building height, minimum residential densities, and minimum floor area ratios may apply in the following activity centers identified in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan:
a. Canyon Park community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.44 and 12.48 BMC.
b. Thrasher’s Corner community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.48 and 12.74 BMC.
c. Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC.
d. North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.56 BMC.
e. Downtown community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.64 BMC (Downtown Subarea Regulations).
f. Juanita-Woodinville Way/I-405 neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.60 and 12.66 BMC.
g. Filbert/Winesap neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.72 BMC.
h. Maltby/York/Jewel neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.74 BMC.
i. Country Village/Bothell-Everett Highway/Lake Pleasant/Bothell-Everett Highway neighborhood activity center in accordance with Chapter 12.46 BMC.
4. Building and hard surface coverage shall be measured as set forth in BMC 12.14.140.
C. Development Standards Table – Overlays.
Commercial and Industrial Development Standards (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
MU-N | MU-C | MU-E | C-G | E-MC | |
Minimum front yard setback (2) | Setbacks shall be the distance required for landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, except as otherwise provided under BMC 12.14.080 | ||||
Minimum rear yard setback (2) | |||||
Minimum side yard setback (2) | |||||
Maximum building height (3) | 60, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) | 60, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) | 85, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) | 35 | 60, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) |
Floor area ratios(3) | 3.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 3.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 3.5 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 2.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 3.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater |
Maximum hard surface coverage(4) | 100%, except for any required landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, and required critical areas and their buffers, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment | ||||
D. Notes.
1. General Notes.
a. Where a district combines multiple zoning classifications (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB), the most permissive standards of the individual zoning classifications shall apply; provided, however, that within activity centers, minimum density and/or floor area ratio requirements as established within the applicable subarea regulations shall be met.
b. Development standards may be modified through the planned unit development process consistent with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
2. Setbacks shall be in accordance with BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.100.
3. Specific building height, minimum residential densities, and minimum floor area ratios may apply in the following activity centers identified in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan:
a. Canyon Park community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.44 and 12.48 BMC.
b. Thrasher’s Corner community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.48 and 12.74 BMC.
c. Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC.
d. North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.56 BMC.
e. Downtown community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.64 BMC (Downtown Subarea Regulations).
f. Juanita-Woodinville Way/I-405 neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.60 and 12.66 BMC.
g. Filbert/Winesap neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.72 BMC.
h. Maltby/York/Jewel neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.74 BMC.
i. Country Village/Bothell-Everett Highway/Lake Pleasant/Bothell-Everett Highway neighborhood activity center in accordance with Chapter 12.46 BMC.
4. Building and hard surface coverage shall be measured as set forth in BMC 12.14.140. (Ord. 2459 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Front Yard Setbacks.
1. Front yard setbacks shall be measured from the street right-of-way boundary to a line parallel to and measured perpendicularly from the street right-of-way boundary. In the case of corner lots, there shall be a front yard setback provided for each lot side abutting an existing or proposed public right-of-way. The yards opposite said front yards need only meet the side yard setback requirements.
2. Where a property abuts a street identified as a collector, minor arterial, principal arterial or freeway/limited access highway in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, the front yard setback shall be measured from the projected right-of-way boundary for the street as if it were fully developed in accordance with the plan.
3. Should the edge of a street surface improvement, including roadway, curb and gutter, and sidewalk, extend beyond the street right-of-way boundary, the front yard setback shall be measured from the edge of the surface improvement. For the purposes of this chapter, the edge of the surface improvements shall be the edge of the pavement, curb or sidewalk.
B. Side and rear yard setbacks shall be measured from the interior lot line to a line parallel to and measured perpendicularly from the interior lot lines at the depth prescribed for each zone.
C. The director is authorized to designate front, side and rear yard setbacks in accordance with subsections A and B of this section. If these subsections do not establish a front, side and rear yard setback, the director shall establish the setbacks based upon orientation of the lot to surrounding lots and to any existing development pattern. All other setbacks shall be established in relation to the established front, side and rear yard setbacks. (Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Structures shall be set back from a property line abutting an alley a minimum of five feet, except as provided in BMC 12.14.030 and subsection B of this section.
B. Vehicle access points from garages, carports or fenced parking areas shall be set back from the alley property line to provide a straight line length of at least 25 feet from the access point to the opposite edge of the alley. No portion of the garage or the garage door in motion may cross the property line. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
When a building or use is required to maintain a specific setback from a property line or other building, such setback shall apply only to the specified building or use.
A. Any structures containing two or more attached primary dwelling units shall be set back a minimum of 25 feet from any property line in or abutting the R-40,000 zone, unless the adjacent property already is occupied by structures containing two or more primary dwelling units. This special setback requirement shall not apply to middle housing structures within detached residential zones that provide affordable dwelling units consistent with the affordable housing provisions of Chapter 12.07 BMC.
B. Within all residential zone classifications, rear yard setbacks for accessory buildings and structures, other than detached accessory dwelling units, shall be five feet. Detached accessory dwelling units shall maintain the same rear yard setback as primary structures, except for those accessory dwelling units located on an alley, in which case the setbacks for structures adjoining alleys in BMC 12.14.060 shall apply.
C. Gas station pump islands shall be set back a minimum of 25 feet from any property line.
D. Abutting an Residential-zoned property, not including combined zones, the setback shall be 50 feet for any building containing manufacturing, distribution, storage or warehousing uses, and 30 feet for any other nonresidential use.
E. Pad-mounted heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment such as heat pumps, air conditioning units, furnaces, and other similar pad-mounted equipment installed after October 16, 2010, shall comply with the following (note: these requirements shall not apply to portable generator use during times of emergency):
1. Not be located in any front yard setback area;
2. Be located at least three feet from any adjacent property line or structure, including fences;
3. Be screened from view of any public right-of-way by means of either landscaping or fencing. Any such screening should be installed such that it can either be readily removed to provide access to said equipment, or should be placed at least three feet from said equipment to allow for access. (Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2373 § 8, 2022; Ord. 2258 § 3, 2018; Ord. 2255 § 4, 2018; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2047 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.080).
The following setback modifications are permitted:
A. When the common property line of two lots is covered by a building(s), the setbacks required by this chapter shall not apply along the common property line;
B. When a lot is located between lots containing structures which are located at nonconforming front yard setbacks, the required front yard setback for such lot may be the average of the two nonconforming setbacks or 60 percent of the required front yard setback, whichever results in the greater front yard setback; and
C. Any modification of setbacks shall be reviewed by the fire department for potential effects on fire flows. (Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.090).
Lands with a zoning classification of R-M3, R-M4, DC, DT, DN, GDC, or R-AC where offspring lots are created through the subdivision provisions of BMC Title 15 may apply the following special setbacks to offspring lots within a parent site; provided, however, that setbacks from the exterior lot lines of the parent site shall be consistent with BMC 12.14.030(A), 12.14.050, 12.14.060, 12.14.070, and 12.14.080(B):
A. Side and rear yard setbacks from offspring lot lines that are not a parent site lot line may be based upon the building separation requirements of the applicable building and fire codes; provided, that zero, common, or shared lot lines may be allowed as set forth within subsection C of this section;
B. Front yard setbacks from internal private access streets and/or access drives shall be at least five feet or shall be set back from the internal private access street and/or access drive tract or easement line sufficient to provide a straight line length of at least 25 feet from the access point of the garage, carport or parking area to the opposite edge of the private access street and/or access drive tract or easement. No portion of a garage or any garage door which may be in motion may cross any lot line;
C. Zero, common, or shared lot lines may be permitted subject to the standards of the applicable building and fire codes;
D. Existing developments comprising detached condominiums or common wall townhouses may utilize the setback provisions of this section if converting to fee simple lots as provided by the subdivision process of BMC Title 15; and
E. Figure 12.14.085-1 provides a visual example of the parent site and offspring lot line setback requirements as set forth within subsections A, B, and C of this section and Figure 12.14.085-2 provides a visual example of zero, common, or shared offspring lot line requirements as set forth within subsection C of this section.


(Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013).
Projections and facilities may extend into required setbacks as follows:
A. Fireplace structures, bay or garden windows, enclosed stair landing, or similar structures may project into any setback, provided such projections are:
1. Limited to one per facade;
2. Not wider than 10 feet; and
3. Not more than 18 inches into a setback.
B. Uncovered porches and decks which exceed 18 inches above the finished grade may project:
1. Eighteen inches into side and rear yard setbacks; and
2. Thirty-six inches into the front yard setback.
C. Uncovered porches and decks not exceeding 18 inches above the finished grade may project to the property line.
D. Eaves may not project more than:
1. Eighteen inches into a side or rear yard setback;
2. Twenty-four inches into a front yard setback; or
3. Eighteen inches across a lot line in a zero lot line development.
E. Fences with a height of six feet or less may project into any setback; and
F. Storm water facilities, such as, but not limited to, retention/detention ponds, bioswales, vaults, bioretention or other facilities as required by the Bothell Standards, may be located within any front, rear and side yard setback, provided such facilities are set back from any property line a minimum of five feet. Any portion of a surface water retaining structure that is exposed to the air for a dimension of four feet or more above city-approved finish grade shall be consistent with BMC 12.14.152(B)(3). (Ord. 2269 § 5, 2018; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.100).
In determining setbacks for a panhandle lot, the handle or access portion of the lot shall not be used to determine building setbacks. Setbacks shall be determined as though no handle was on the lot. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.110).
A. Building height shall be measured vertically from the average city-approved finish grade to the highest point of the structure.
B. The average city-approved finish grade shall be measured by first delineating the smallest rectangle which can enclose the building and then averaging the existing ground elevations taken at the midpoint of each side of the rectangle. In the event the midpoint of the rectangle drawn is not located on the subject property, the measurement point shall be determined by establishing the midpoint of the property line where it intersects the rectangle.
C. Submittal Requirements.
1. The site plan shall indicate the existing ground elevations and proposed finish grades, as determined by a licensed land surveyor.
2. Building elevations or sections shall be provided for all sides of the building.
D. Compliance with the height requirement shall be determined by:
1. Review of building permit plans, including a site plan indicating existing and proposed finished grades and building footprint, and elevations for each side of the structure; and
2. Field verification at the completion of building framing. On sloping lots or when the structure is within two feet of the height limit, certification by a licensed surveyor is required. On all other structures, verification shall be provided to the building official as required at the time of the framing inspection. (Ord. 1980 § 2, 2007; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.120).
The following structures may be erected above the height limits as set forth in BMC 12.14.110:
A. Roof structures housing or screening ventilating fans, HVAC (heating and cooling equipment), or similar equipment required for building operation and maintenance;
B. Fire or parapet walls, flagpoles, chimneys, smokestacks, communication transmission and receiving structures, utility line towers and poles, water towers/storage tanks, and similar structures;
C. On properties with any of the following zoning designations: R-M4, R-AC, OP, NB, CB, CG, or LI, architectural elements including, but not limited to, peaked roofs and steeples; provided, that the increase in height shall not increase usable floor area;
D. Structures containing certain manufacturing processes within the Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with BMC 12.48.020, or the North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with BMC 12.56.080;
E. Repealed.
F. Primary and secondary schools in the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, and R-M1 through R-M4 zones, through the conditional use permit process, in accordance with the following:
1. The maximum height for school buildings shall be 35 feet except as provided in subsection (F)(2) of this section.
2. Architectural elements which do not increase usable floor area, including but not limited to peaked roofs, may extend above 35 feet but in no case shall exceed a height of 55 feet, subject to the following:
a. For each one foot of building height over 35 feet, the required building setback shall be increased one foot from street property lines and two feet from interior property lines. Such increased setbacks shall apply only to that portion of the building exceeding 35 feet in height.
b. For each one foot of building height over 35 feet, the required interior lot line landscaping width shall be increased 0.25 foot (three inches) along those interior lot lines from which the portion of the building over 35 feet is visible.
c. Additional site and building design requirements may be imposed through the conditional use permit process if deemed necessary to mitigate the visual impacts of buildings over the normal height limit and otherwise ensure that such buildings comply with the criteria for approval of conditional use permits, as set forth in BMC 12.28.040. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1922 § 1, 2004; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.130).
Accessory buildings and structures within residential zone classifications, including but not limited to storage buildings and detached private garages, shall maintain the same residential character of the primary structure, shall cover a maximum of five percent of the lot area, and shall have an exterior height no greater than 20 feet or the height of the primary building or structure, whichever is less, except as provided for detached accessory dwelling units in BMC 12.14.135.
A. Accessory buildings shall utilize similar siding, roofing and detailing as the primary structure, and be of a style that complements the primary structure. Metal buildings that are clearly of a different style than the primary structure shall not be allowed for accessory buildings over 120 square feet.
B. Accessory buildings with a footprint greater than 1,200 square feet shall be set back from the required setback line an additional foot for each 100 square feet of area above 1,200 square feet. A minimum 10-foot-wide Type II landscape buffer shall be installed between any accessory building with a footprint greater than 1,200 square feet and any property line within 50 feet of that structure.
C. Accessory buildings shall have a maximum height of 10 feet at the five-foot accessory building rear setback line, increasing by one foot for each additional foot of setback to the maximum height allowed for accessory buildings. (Ord. 2258 § 4, 2018; Ord. 1995 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.140).
Floor area ratio (FAR) is a mechanism for establishing a relationship between the floor area of a building and the size of the parcel upon which the building is located.
A. FAR is calculated using the following method:
1. First, determine the net buildable area of the site.
2. Second, determine the total square footage of all enclosed and temperature-controlled portions of the proposed, existing or any combination thereof of building(s) located on the subject parcel. Square footage within the building(s) dedicated for parking, parking garages, drive aisles, and interior recreation purposes consistent with BMC 12.20.020 are exempt from the FAR ratio.
3. Finally, divide the floor area by the net buildable site area using similar units of measure to derive the floor area ratio.
4. For example, a 10,000-square-foot parcel within an activity center that requires a minimum FAR of 0.5 establishes that the minimum square footage of temperature-controlled and enclosed building area must be at least 5,000 square feet.
B. Visual examples of FAR:
Figure 12.14-133-A

Figure 12.14-133-B

C. FAR Transference. Square footage of building used to satisfy the floor area ratio may be located anywhere within the subject property and may further be transferred across contiguous or noncontinuous parcels provided the parcels are included as part of an overall development, the FAR transfer runs with the land in perpetuity, and transfer documents shall be recorded with the applicable county. This provision does not relieve an applicant from compliance with all other applicable provisions of the code.
D. Mixed-Use Developments. Where residential and nonresidential uses are combined within one or more buildings on a single parcel or development area, the mix of minimum residential density and nonresidential floor area ratio shall be established within the subarea regulations. (Ord. 2457 § 3 (Exh. C), 2025; Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021).
A. Middle housing is allowed in residential zones pursuant to BMC 12.06.140. Middle housing projects shall comply with the design requirements in this section.
1. All middle housing units directly abutting a public street shall have entries and windows facing the street.
2. Where alleys are available, vehicular access for all middle housing units shall be provided from the alley, unless alley access is demonstrated to be infeasible and alternate access is approved by the public works director as a deviation.
B. Cottage Housing.
1. Cottage housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
a. Maximum lot sizes shall not apply to cottage housing developments.
b. Cottages shall be separated by a minimum distance of six feet.
c. Cottages shall be oriented to a shared open space and shall be connected to the shared open space by a pedestrian path. Cottages within 20 feet of a street property line shall be oriented toward the street.
2. Shared open space owned in common shall be provided for cottage housing as follows:
a. A minimum of 150 square feet per cottage of shared open space is required. The shared open space shall be one contiguous area unless infeasible due to space constraints, as approved by the community development director. Parking areas, driveways, setback areas, and private open space do not qualify as shared open space. Storm water management facilities do not qualify as shared open space unless they are low impact development features that do not adversely impact access to or use of the shared open space for typical use by residents. The shared open space must be a minimum of 15 feet wide in any dimension.
b. Land located between dwelling units and an abutting right-of-way or access easement greater than 21 feet in width shall not serve as required common open space, unless the area is reserved as a separate tract, and does not contain pathways leading to individual units or other elements that detract from its appearance and function as a shared space for all residents.
c. At least 50 percent of the cottages shall abut the shared open space. All cottages shall be within 60 feet walking distance measured from the nearest entrance of the cottage along the shortest accessible walking route to the nearest point of the shared open space.
d. Shared open space shall have cottages on at least two sides.
e. The shared open space shall be developed in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC and shall include a mix of landscaping, lawn area, pedestrian paths, and/or paved courtyard area, and may also include recreational amenities. Impervious surfaces shall not exceed 75 percent of the total shared open space.
3. Private open space shall be provided for cottage housing as follows:
a. Each cottage shall be provided with a minimum of 200 square feet of usable private open space that is clearly separated from the shared open space.
b. No dimension of the private open space shall be less than six feet.
4. Parking shall meet the following requirements:
a. Parking shall be located on the same property as the cottage housing. Parking can be consolidated into one or more off-street parking areas. Off-street parking areas shall be located to the side or rear of the cottage housing development. Off-street parking areas shall not be located between the cottage housing development and the primary street frontage.
b. Off-street parking may be located in or under an accessory parking structure (such as a single or multi-auto carport or garage), but such structures shall not be attached to individual cottages. Uncovered parking is also permitted.
c. Off-street parking shall be screened from direct street view by garage doors, six-foot-high solid sight-obscuring fencing, and/or Type III landscaping that is at least five feet wide.
C. Courtyard housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
1. Number of Dwelling Units. A single courtyard housing development shall include a maximum of eight units, except in R-M3 zones and denser.
2. Courtyard housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
a. Lots developed with courtyard housing shall meet the average lot size requirements of the zone.
b. The main entry to each ground floor dwelling unit shall be directly off a common courtyard or directly from a street. Access to upper-level dwelling units may be through an open or roofed stair.
c. Clear and obvious pedestrian access and visual access between the sidewalk shall be provided.
3. Courtyard housing shall be in a U- or L-shaped configuration where the ends facing the street have the dimensions no larger than a single-family detached structure on the combined lots or adjacent lots on the block-face.
4. Shared open space shall be provided for courtyard housing as follows:
a. A minimum of 200 square feet per dwelling unit of shared open space is required. At least 800 square feet of shared open space shall be provided for each courtyard housing development. Parking areas, driveways, setback areas, and private open space do not qualify as shared open space. Storm water management facilities do not qualify as shared open space unless they are low impact development features that do not adversely impact access to or use of the shared open space for typical use by residents. The shared open space must be a minimum of 15 feet wide in any dimension.
b. Fences are not allowed in any shared open space areas.
c. The shared open space shall be developed with a mix of landscaping, lawn area, pedestrian paths, and/or paved courtyard area, and may also include recreational amenities. Impervious surfaces shall not exceed 75 percent of the total shared open space.
5. Private open space shall be provided for courtyard housing as follows:
a. Each dwelling unit shall be provided with a minimum of 60 square feet of usable private open space in the form of a private yard, porch, patio, balcony, or similar configuration.
b. No dimension of the private open space shall be less than six feet.
6. Parking shall meet the following requirements:
a. Parking shall be located on the same property as the courtyard housing development. Parking can be consolidated into one or more off-street parking areas. Off-street parking areas shall be located to the side or rear of the courtyard housing development. Off-street parking areas shall not be located between the courtyard housing development and the primary street frontage.
b. Off-street parking may be located in or under an accessory parking structure (such as a single or multi-auto carport or garage), but such structures shall not be attached to individual units. Uncovered parking is also permitted.
c. Off-street parking shall be screened from direct street view by garage doors, solid sight-obscuring fencing, and/or Type III landscaping that is five feet wide. (Ord. 2461 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024).
Accessory dwelling units are permitted subject to the following requirements:
A. Two accessory dwelling units are allowed per lot.
B. One accessory dwelling unit in any configuration is allowed on a lot developed with middle housing.
C. One accessory dwelling unit is allowed on lots designated with critical areas or their buffers.
D. The size of an accessory dwelling unit shall be limited as follows:
1. An accessory dwelling unit may be developed up to 1,200 square feet. Conversion of an existing space to an accessory dwelling unit may exceed 1,200 square feet as approved by the community development director, provided this does not exceed 40 percent of the primary dwelling unit’s gross floor area.
2. Detached accessory dwelling units are exempt from the provisions of BMC 12.14.130 that limit the size of accessory buildings to five percent of the lot area.
E. Detached accessory dwelling units shall have a height no greater than 30 feet or no greater than 33 feet for units over an existing accessory structure.
F. For existing accessory dwelling units that were created without an approved application, the property owner must apply to the city for approval. If an accessory dwelling unit was created without a building permit, the city shall require a building inspection to determine whether the structure is sound, will not pose a hazard to people or property, and meets the requirements of this section and BMC Title 20. The accessory dwelling unit application fee will cover the building inspection of the accessory dwelling unit. Permits and inspections may be required for existing attached and detached ADUs per the building official.
G. The city will not assess impact fees on the construction of accessory dwelling units that are greater than 50 percent of the impact fees that would be imposed on the principal unit. (Ord. 2461 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2277 § 1, 2019; Ord. 2258 § 5, 2018).
A. Building coverage shall mean that portion of a lot that is occupied by the principal building and its accessory buildings, including all projections except eaves. Decks are exempted from the building coverage provisions. Building coverage shall be expressed as a percentage of the total lot area.
B. Hard surface coverage shall mean the ground areas of the entire development site covered by any impervious surface, permeable pavement, or vegetated roof, determined by extending a vertical projection to the ground from the widest points of any hard surface, and expressed as a percentage of total lot area. Permeable pavement and vegetated roofs shall count only 50 percent of their site area as hard surface for the purposes calculating coverage in the Development Standards Tables in BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.150).
Fences and freestanding walls may be erected in any zone district as provided below:
A. Fences and/or freestanding walls six feet or less in nominal height shall be consistent with the following:
1. Shall be placed behind any landscape buffer required by Chapter 12.18 BMC.
2. Where no landscape buffer is required, fences and freestanding walls may be allowed without a setback within any front, rear or side yard.
3. Fence and freestanding wall height shall be measured from the horizontal projection of the predominant ground level of either the city-approved finish grade where such grade has been established, or from the horizontal projection of the predominant existing grade in the vicinity of the fence.
4. Fence and freestanding wall height shall be measured to the upper surface of the fence or freestanding wall panel.
5. Where the International Residential Code (IRC) or the International Building Code (IBC) requires a guard on top of a retaining wall or retaining structure, any fence or freestanding wall so located shall meet the minimum guard height and construction requirements of the IRC or IBC, as applicable.
6. No fence or freestanding wall shall be placed closer than three feet to or may obscure the vision of any fire hydrant.
7. All fences and freestanding walls shall comply with the sight distance requirements of the Bothell Standards.
B. Fences and freestanding walls that exceed a nominal height of six feet shall comply with any required front, side, and rear yard setbacks.
C. Electric fences shall:
1. Be permitted only within the residential zone classifications and only for the raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes or pasturing;
2. Be posted with permanent signs a minimum of two square feet in area at 50-foot intervals stating that the fence is electrified;
3. Be placed no closer than six feet to any fire hydrant.
D. Barbed wire fencing is permitted in association with animal husbandry or pasturing and for security purposes to protect sensitive locations or facilities as identified by the chief of police.
E. Razor wire fencing is prohibited; provided, however, that military or police services may install razor wire to protect sensitive locations or facilities as identified by the chief of police. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2269 § 6, 2018; Ord. 1997 § 2, 2008; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.160).
Retaining walls, rockeries, modular block walls, rock walls, or any other structures which retain soil, retain earth surcharge, protect an exposed soil face, or serve as a gravity retaining wall, shall, for the purposes of this chapter, be known as retaining structures. Retaining structures shall be consistent with the following:
A. Height Measurement. The height of a retaining structure shall be measured from the point at which the ground elevation of the city-approved finish grade intersects with the retaining structure to the highest point of the retaining structure as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-1.
Figure 12.14.152-1

B. Outward Facing Retaining Structures. The following section regulates retaining structures that face outward from a property and are primarily and directly visible to adjacent properties:
1. Retaining Structure Location, Maximum Heights and Minimum Separation within Setbacks.
a. All retaining structures, including footings or foundations, shall be set back at least one foot or a horizontal distance equal to the height of the structure, whichever is greater, from any property or right-of-way line, unless the applicant provides a recorded easement from the adjacent property owner or owners to allow either all or a portion of the retaining structure to be on or closer to an adjacent property.
b. Within rear and front yard setback areas, retaining structures shall not be higher than four feet. Two or more up to four-foot-high retaining structures may be permitted within rear or front yard setbacks, provided the retaining structures are separated by a distance that is equal to two times the height of the structure as illustrated in Figures 12.14.152-2 and 12.14.152-3.
c. The maximum slope gradient allowed between retaining structures shall be a four-foot horizontal to a one-foot vertical (4H:1V) slope.
d. Within side yard setback areas, retaining structures shall not be higher than six feet as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-2.
Figure 12.14.152-2

Figure 12.14.152-3

Figure 12.14.152-4

2. Retaining structures located outside the setback or yard area shall be consistent with the following:
a. Retaining structures shall have a maximum height of 12 feet;
b. All retaining structures shall be separated by a distance that is equal to the height of the downslope retaining structure; and
c. A maximum slope gradient of four feet horizontal to one-foot vertical (4H:1V) shall be placed between retaining structures;
These provisions are illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-5 below.
Figure 12.14.152-5

d. The community development director, in consultation with the public works director, may waive or reduce the wall separation distance, may increase the maximum allowed slope gradient between retaining structures up to a three-to-one slope (3H:1V), and may increase the allowed maximum height of a retaining structure if the applicant demonstrates the reduced separation distance and/or increased gradient and/or wall height is necessary to:
(1) Reduce potential adverse impacts to a critical area(s) or buffer(s) as defined by Chapter 14.04 BMC; or
(2) Retain a greater number or diameter inches of significant trees; or
(3) Permit the installation of transportation improvements; or
(4) The alternative separation, slope gradient, or height is in the public interest.
3. All retaining structures, building or structure foundation walls or the walls of surface water vaults or facilities that are visible from adjacent public rights-of-way or residential properties shall apply the following:
a. All retaining structures four or more feet in height shall be constructed of or faced with brick, stone, split-face or fluted concrete block, textured poured-in-place concrete, or other materials with texture to reduce the apparent mass of the wall, as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-6;
Figure 12.14.152-6

b. All retaining structures greater than six feet in height shall be installed with hanging and/or climbing vegetation above or below the wall, and/or shall be installed with a bas-relief sculpture or other art forms as approved by the community development director, which sculpture or art shall be incorporated on or into the face of the wall, as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-7.
Figure 12.14.152-7

C. Inward Facing Retaining Structures. The following subsection regulates retaining structures that face into a development site and are primarily visible to the tenants and users of that development:
1. Retaining Structure Location, Maximum Heights and Minimum Separation.
a. Retaining structures, including footings, foundations and tie-backs or other structural anchors, shall be set back at least one foot from any property or right-of-way line or a horizontal distance equal to the height of the structure, whichever is greater, unless the applicant provides a recorded easement from the adjacent property owner or owners to allow either all or a portion of the retaining structure to be on or closer to an adjacent property (see Figure 12.14.152-8).
b. Engineered retaining structures may be built one foot from the property line regardless of the height of the structure as long as the horizontal distance to any structures on the adjacent property is equal to the height of the structure (see Figure 12.14.152-9).
c. Maximum exposed height shall be 12 feet unless mitigated by measures described in subsections (B)(2)(d) and/or (B)(3) of this section.
d. Height of exposed walls may also be mitigated through the use of one or more planters designed to accommodate minimum landscape buffers. Width of such planters shall be a minimum of five feet.
e. Minimum separation from face of building shall be 10 feet, or more if determined to be necessary for fire or other access requirements.
Figure 12.14.152-8

Figure 12.14.152-9

(Ord. 2417 § 2 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2269 § 7, 2018).
All development other than single-family residential development shall provide storage space for the collection of recyclables and garbage as follows:
A. The storage space shall be provided at the rate of:
1. Three square feet per dwelling unit in multifamily developments except where the development is participating in a public agency-sponsored or approved direct collection program in which individual recycling bins are used for curbside collection;
2. Four square feet per every 1,000 square feet of building gross floor area in office, educational and institutional developments;
3. Six square feet per every 1,000 square feet of building gross floor area in manufacturing developments and all developments other than those specified in this subsection; and
4. Ten square feet per every 1,000 square feet of building gross floor area in retail developments.
B. The storage space for multifamily residential developments shall be apportioned and located in collection points as follows:
1. The required storage area shall be dispersed among collection points throughout the site when there is more than one building.
2. There shall be a minimum of one collection point for every 30 dwelling units.
3. Collection points may be located within residential buildings, in separate buildings/structures without dwelling units, or outdoors. Outdoor collection points shall not be located in any required setback areas.
4. Collection points located in separate buildings/structures or outdoors shall be no more than 200 feet from a common entrance of a residential building.
5. Collection points shall be located in a manner so that hauling trucks do not obstruct pedestrian traffic or project into any public right-of-way.
C. The storage space for nonresidential development shall be apportioned and located in collection points as follows:
1. Storage space may be allocated to a centralized collection point.
2. Outdoor collection points shall not be located in any required setback areas.
3. Collection points shall be located in a manner so that hauling trucks do not obstruct pedestrian or vehicle traffic , or project into any public right-of-way.
4. Access to collection points may be limited, except during regular business hours and/or specified collection hours.
D. The collection points shall be designed as follows:
1. Dimensions of the collection points shall be of sufficient width and depth to enclose containers for recyclables and garbage. The area enclosed in such collection points shall be in accordance with the storage space requirements set forth in subsection A of this section.
2. Architectural design of any structure enclosing an outdoor collection point or any building primarily used to contain a collection point shall be consistent with the design of the primary structure(s) on the site through all of the following:
a. Similar architectural style;
b. Similar exterior finish materials and colors;
c. Similar architectural details or features.
3. Collection points shall be identified by signs not exceeding two square feet each.
4. A seven-foot wall or fence with a gate or gates shall enclose any outdoor collection point, excluding collection points located in industrial developments that are greater than 100 feet from residentially zoned property and not visible from the street right-of-way.
5. Enclosures for outdoor collection points and buildings used primarily to contain a collection point shall have gate openings at least 12 feet wide for hauling trucks. In addition, the gate opening for any building or other roofed structure used primarily as a collection point shall have a vertical clearance of at least 12 feet. Each enclosure may have more than one gate opening.
6. Weather protection of recyclables shall be ensured by using weather-proof containers or by providing a roof over the storage area.
7. No collection point or container shall be visible from the street right-of-way or adjacent single-family development. The collection point or container shall either be located behind the building or shall be adequately screened with Type I landscaping.
E. Only recyclable materials and garbage generated shall be collected and stored at such collection points. Except for initial sorting of recyclables by users, all other processing of such materials shall be conducted off site.
F. No container shall be collected and stored at any location on the site except in a designated storage facility.
G. The lids of all garbage and recyclables containers shall be maintained in a closed position. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.165).
When a lot is divided by a zone boundary, the following rules shall apply:
A. When a lot contains both residential and nonresidential zoning, the zone boundary between the zones shall be considered a lot line for determining permitted building height and required setbacks on the site;
B. When a lot contains residential zones of varying density, any residential density transfer within the lot shall only be allowed from the portion with the lesser residential density to that of the greater residential density; and
C. Uses on each portion of the lot shall only be those permitted in each zone pursuant to Chapter 12.06 BMC. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.170).
Design of sites and buildings shall comply with BMC 12.14.180 through 12.14.230 and other applicable regulations in this code which implement the goals and policies of the urban design element of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. In addition to compliance with these regulations, persons interested in developing property are required to consult the illustrations and written guidelines in the urban design element and in the residential development handbook for Snohomish County Communities, which is incorporated by reference in the comprehensive plan as Appendix H. As an appendix to the plan, the residential development handbook is an adopted SEPA policy of the city of Bothell. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.180).
A. Residential Development Access Design. The access design of residential developments shall comply with the following:
1. Streets shall be located and configured in such a manner as to not promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic. Improvements to the existing street network shall be planned to restrict through traffic to arterials and to reduce the amount of through traffic on residential neighborhood streets. Neighborhood cut-through traffic shall mean motor vehicle traffic which neither originates nor terminates within the neighborhood, but travels through the neighborhood for the purposes of avoiding arterial traffic and/or saving time between an origin and a destination outside the neighborhood. Whether a proposed street network promotes or does not promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic will be determined on the basis of the required traffic impact analysis submitted with the development application.
2. Connections to surrounding streets and developments shall be provided for pedestrians and bicyclists as warranted for safe and efficient nonmotorized travel within and between neighborhoods, and in particular to provide access to activity centers, parks, schools, transit stops and other gathering places. Such connections shall include but are not limited to bicycle lanes, sidewalks and dedicated pedestrian/bicycle paths, and shall be provided in accordance with BMC 12.16.120 and this section.
3. Connections to surrounding streets and developments shall be provided for police, fire and emergency medical services vehicles as warranted to minimize response times to, from and within the neighborhood. Where such connections are determined on the basis of the required transportation impact analysis to promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic, emergency vehicle-only access ways shall be provided.
B. Commercial and Mixed-Use Development Access Design. In conjunction with new development or redevelopment in areas zoned for commercial or mixed commercial and residential uses, proposed streets shall be located and configured in such a manner as to create an interconnected network which facilitates motorized and nonmotorized travel; provided, however, that proposed streets or connections which are determined to promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic, as defined in subsection A of this section, are not allowed.
C. Development on Hillsides. Development on hillsides shall blend visually and functionally into the natural environment to the maximum extent possible. Such development shall comply with the following:
1. Changes to the natural topography shall be minimized. Roads, lots, buildings and parking areas shall be located, configured and constructed so as to minimize grading and its consequent impacts on soil stability and surface and groundwater movement.
2. Clearing of existing native vegetation shall be minimized. Existing vegetation shall be retained in accordance with BMC 12.18.030 and this section to preserve wildlife habitat and natural groundwater recharge functions and promote soil stability.
3. Retaining walls and high foundations on the underside of buildings shall be screened by vegetation.
D. Location of Buildings and Parking. In any development in the OP, NB, CB, and GC zoning classifications, and in any zone which combines one or more of these classifications with an R zoning classification, parking shall not be located between any building to which the general public has access and the front lot line, subject to the following:
1. Parking shall be prohibited in the area between the front lot line and a line running parallel to the front lot line and tangent to the closest point of the building to the front lot line, and extending along the front lot line that distance by which the building faces the front lot line, as measured between points projected from the most distant points of the building at right angles to the front lot line. Examples of how this regulation applies are provided in Figures 12.14-1, 12.14-2 and 12.14-3.
Fig. 12.14-1

Fig. 12.14-2

Fig. 12.14-3

2. Corner Lots. A corner lot is defined as a lot at the junction of and having frontage on two or more intersecting streets. On a corner lot, each lot line abutting a street right-of-way is considered a front lot line.
a. A building on a corner lot shall be placed at the intersection of the front lot lines so that there is no parking between the building and either front lot line.
b. When a corner lot has frontage on more than one street intersection, the regulation in subsection (A)(2)(a) of this section shall apply only to one of the intersections. An example of how this regulation applies is provided in Figure 12.14-4.
c. Buildings on a corner lot shall be located so as not to interfere with sight distance at intersections.
Fig. 12.14-4

3. A through lot is defined as a lot which has frontage on two parallel or approximately parallel streets. In such a case, the requirements in subsection A of this section shall apply to only one of the frontages. An example of how this regulation applies is provided in Figure 12.14-5.
Fig. 12.14-5

4. Where a development consists of two or more buildings on one property, the requirement in this subsection D shall apply to only one of the buildings in the development. Buildings containing less than 1,000 square feet of gross floor area shall not be counted as satisfying this requirement.
5. The area between the building and the front lot line may be utilized for landscaping, outdoor pedestrian activities, critical areas and their buffers, or storm water detention facilities.
6. Where it can be demonstrated that one or more site characteristics make compliance with these regulations unfeasible, the community development director may allow an alternative building location. Such site characteristics include but are not limited to:
a. Parcel shape;
b. Topography;
c. Existing shared access with adjacent properties;
d. Existing significant trees which might be saved by locating a building elsewhere.
7. Where an overall site plan has been adopted, through a subarea plan and implementing regulations, a planned unit development, a binding site plan, a conditional use permit, or other mechanism requiring approval by the hearing body, planning commission and/or the city council, the adopted site plan shall control the location of buildings and parking.
8. These regulations shall not apply to location of single-family dwellings.
E. Community Gathering Place. To encourage public interaction and promote a sense of community, proposed developments of five acres or more shall provide a community gathering place or places at a ratio of 20 square feet of improved space per acre, with a minimum of 100 square feet per gathering place. For the purposes of these regulations, “community gathering place” shall mean an informal, small-scale, hard-surfaced area intended for use by the general public. The community gathering place may be located adjacent to public right-of-way, for example, as a plaza connected to the sidewalk, or internal to the development. Adjacent developments may combine to form one or more community gathering places. Each community gathering place shall include one or more features to encourage public interaction. Such features include but are not limited to the following:
1. Benches;
2. Fountains;
3. Sculpture or other art forms;
4. Kiosks for posting neighborhood items;
5. Links to transit and pedestrian and bike trails;
6. Bandstands or gazebos;
7. Pedestrian-scale lighting.
F. Exterior Lighting. Exterior lighting shall be an integral part of the site and building design and shall serve the purposes of enhancing safety and security, defining on-site pedestrian and bicycle paths and connections with off-site paths, and encouraging safe nighttime pedestrian activity and public interaction. Such lighting shall accomplish one or more of the following:
1. Illuminate landscaping elements such as tree foliage and shrubs;
2. Illuminate building elements such as entryways, canopies, cornices or other architectural features;
3. Illuminate parking lots;
4. Illuminate pedestrian and bicycle pathways with fixtures such as lighting bollards or low pole lights.
G. Design of Parking Lots, Parking Structures, Transit Stops and Shelters and Pedestrian Sidewalks and Pathways. The design of these facilities shall be in accordance with BMC 12.16.080 through 12.16.120. (Ord. 2269 § 8, 2018; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.190).
A. Overall Design. The exterior of each non-single-family building shall be designed so as to have a visually distinct base, main section and roofline, to provide visual references to the scale of the building, and to help the building fit in with its context, in accordance with the following:
1. The base may comprise the foundation itself; the nonstructural use of materials such as brick, stone or textured concrete which convey an impression of permanence and support; or a contrast in materials or colors between the base and the main section.
2. The main section shall incorporate architectural features and detailing to create visual interest. In addition to the requirements of BMC 12.14.200 and 12.14.210, such features and detailing may include but are not limited to windows, columns, pilasters, belt courses, brackets, arches, decorative molding, quoins and similar architectural devices. Any architectural decoration shall be part of a unified design.
3. The design of the roof shall employ at least one of the following:
a. A gable, gambrel or hipped roof;
b. A broken or articulated roofline;
c. A prominent cornice or fascia that defines and emphasizes the top of the building;
d. Any other roof element that emphasizes a building’s unifying architectural concept and helps it to fit in with its context.
Examples of how these regulations apply are illustrated in Figures 12.14-9, 12.14-10 and 12.14-11.
Fig. 12.14-9

Fig. 12.14-10

Fig. 12.14-11

B. Pedestrian Entries. The building design shall clearly define and emphasize the pedestrian entries. Any primary pedestrian entry to a building shall be designed so as to be visually predominant over parking lot driveways or garage entrances. Pedestrian entries shall be emphasized by one or more of the following methods:
1. Landscaping the entry and approach to the entry in a manner which is consistent with and extends the building design theme;
2. Incorporating a formal entry;
3. Utilizing modulation to emphasize by indentation or protrusion the portion of the building containing the entry;
4. Incorporating a porte-cochere or other cover providing weather protection for the entry.
Examples of how these regulations apply are illustrated in Figure 12.14-12.
Fig. 12.14-12

C. Exterior Building Materials. Building exteriors shall be constructed of durable and easily maintainable materials, to enhance the overall appearance, community character and long-term economic vitality of the area in which the building is located. The use of various types of materials in exterior building design shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Metal siding shall have visible corner moldings and trim, and a matte finish;
2. Mirrored glass is allowed only in the LI zone and above the street level story in the OP, NB, CB and GC zones;
3. Concrete walls shall be enhanced by texturing, coloring with paint or an admixture, or by incorporating embossed or sculpted surfaces, mosaics or artwork.
D. Screening of Roof-Mounted Mechanical Devices. Mechanical devices, such as exhaust fans, vents, air conditioning units, heating equipment, electrical devices, mechanical, electrical and other equipment located on the roof of any structure shall be screened to avoid unsightly roof appearance as viewed from surrounding property, including hillsides. The design of the screening shall be incorporated as an integral part of the overall building design. Screening materials shall be consistent with subsection C of this section. Roof-mounted solar or wind equipment is exempt from screening requirements, provided the installation is consistent with BMC 12.14.250(D). (Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.200).
A. Multiple-family residential building design shall promote public interaction and a sense of community within each development by incorporating one or more of the following features:
1. Balconies;
2. Porches;
3. Rooftop terraces;
4. At-grade patios;
5. Courtyards;
6. Formal or informal gardens.
B. Where a building containing residential dwelling units would be located in close proximity to a public right-of-way, the design shall create a transition between the public realm of the street and the private realm of the residences by incorporating one or more of the following:
1. Screening and buffering with trees, shrubs, fences and/or walls to create a physical separation between pedestrians and the windows of residential units;
2. Construction of the first story of units so that they are above the level of the sidewalk a sufficient height to prevent a direct view into the dwelling units;
3. Partially enclosed porches and other outdoor living areas which front onto the street;
4. Courtyards fronting on the street and defined by landscaping and/or fences.
Examples of how these regulations apply are illustrated in Figure 12.14-13.
Fig. 12.14-13

C. Building Facade Modulation. Modulation is a measured and proportioned inflexion or setback in a building’s face. Multifamily residential buildings shall provide modulation on facades as follows:
1. The maximum wall length without modulation shall be 40 feet;
2. The sum of the modulation depth and modulation width shall be no less than eight feet. The modulation depth shall be not less than two feet and the modulation width shall be not less than six feet.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-14.
Fig. 12.14-14

D. Roofline Variation. Multifamily residential buildings shall provide roofline variation as follows:
1. The maximum roof length without variation shall be 40 feet;
2. The minimum horizontal or vertical offset shall be three feet;
3. The minimum variation length shall be six feet;
4. Roofline variation shall be achieved using one or more of the following methods:
a. Vertical offset in ridge line;
b. Horizontal offset in ridge line;
c. Variations of roof pitch;
d. Gables;
e. Any other technique approved by the community development director which avoids the appearance of a continuous unrelieved monolithic roofline.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-15.
Fig. 12.14-15

(Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.210).
A. Where pedestrian activity is present, windows are preferable to blank walls because windows create visual interest both for the passerby and for the building occupant. Windowless walls shall not be oriented to the street unless necessary for the use conducted in the building, mandated by the fire code, or otherwise required by city codes. Where a windowless wall is oriented to the street, the appearance of the wall shall be softened by application of BMC 12.18.080(C) and one or more of the following:
1. Installation of trellises and vines;
2. Use of brick, stone, split-face or fluted concrete block, textured poured-in-place concrete, or other materials with texture to reduce the scale of the wall;
3. Incorporation of artwork, such as a mural, sculpture, or bas-relief, on the wall surface;
4. False windows.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-16.
Fig. 12.14-16

B. Buildings at the corners of street intersections shall incorporate design features to create or reinforce the appearance and feeling of the intersection as an outdoor community “room.” Such design features include but are not limited to:
1. A change of wall plane;
2. A change of roofline;
3. A major pedestrian entry;
4. Balconies;
5. Turrets;
6. Sculpture, mosaic, or other artwork.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-17.
Fig. 12.14-17

(Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.220).
Where multifamily residential, commercial or industrial development abut single-family residential zones, design compatibility shall be achieved through a combination of measures including but not limited to the following, in addition to other requirements of this title:
A. The minimum setback from adjacent single-family zoned property shall be 25 feet;
B. At a minimum, a Type II landscaping buffer shall be required along the single-family property line(s); this and other landscaping within the development shall reinforce the existing landscape character of the area to the maximum extent possible;
C. Multiple-family and mixed use building design shall incorporate a repetitive articulation and modulation which reflects the character of development in the adjacent single-family zones, as illustrated in Figure 12.14-18, unless a majority of the houses within one street of the proposed development do not share a common style or a different character has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations;
Fig. 12.14-18

D. The following design features of adjacent single-family residential development shall be incorporated in multiple-family and mixed use developments unless a majority of the houses within one street of the proposed development do not share a common style or a different character and scale has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations:
1. Siding materials and styles;
2. Window arrangement, spacing and sizing;
3. Roof materials and styles; and
4. Proportions of architectural elements;
Examples of how the above regulations apply are illustrated in Figure 12.14-19.
Fig. 12.14-19

E. Building design shall respect and preserve the privacy of adjacent single-family development by minimizing the quantity and size of windows oriented to the single-family residential zone. Any decks and balconies overlooking neighboring single-family yards are prohibited;
F. Parking lots shall be designed so as to least impact the character of the single-family neighborhood;
G. Heating, cooling, kitchen and other mechanical equipment, conduits, service panels, meters and other electrical equipment, and refuse collection facilities shall be located and screened so as not to be visible or audible above ambient noise levels from adjacent single-family development or the street. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.230).
Where a proposed development would be on or adjacent to a property on the local, state or national historic register or local historic inventory or within an historic district on the register, the following regulations shall apply:
A. If the proposed development would entail any changes to a structure on an historic register or demolition of a structure on the local historic inventory, such proposed changes or demolition shall be subject to the procedures and criteria set forth in Chapter 22.28 BMC, Changes to Property on Register or Inventory.
B. The proposed development shall reflect the architectural character of adjacent and nearby historic properties by one or more of the following measures:
1. A similar unifying design concept which organizes a building’s architectural elements into a harmonious composition;
2. Similar building proportions, scale and roof line;
3. Similar architectural style and exterior finish materials;
4. Similar patterns and proportions of windows;
5. Similar entry configuration and relationship to the street;
6. Similar architectural details or features (such as cornices or trellises). (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.240).
A. Purpose. The purpose of this section is to regulate exterior lighting by promoting the principles of good lighting design, including:
1. Permit reasonable amounts of exterior lighting for night-time safety, utility, security, productivity, enjoyment and commerce;
2. Minimize adverse off-site impacts including light trespass, glare, and night glow;
3. Conserve energy and resources to the greatest extent possible; and
4. Curtail light pollution and preserve the night-time environment.
B. Definitions. The following definitions are listed in alphabetical order for the purpose of exterior lighting regulations, and shall apply to the administration of this section. In addition, except as otherwise provided in this section, those definitions as contained in Chapter 11.02 BMC are adopted and incorporated into this section by reference.
“Adjacent grade” means the grade directly below a luminaire (light fixture) on a plumb line or nearest grade thereto based upon city-approved finish grade.
“Astronomic time switch” means an automatic lighting control device that operates as an on/off switch for outdoor lighting relative to the time of solar day with time of year correction.
“Canopy” means a covered, unconditional structure with at least one side open for pedestrian and/or vehicular access.
“Common outdoor areas” means one or more of the following: a common parking for three or more domiciles or buildings; a common parking garage or covering entrance intended to be used by three or more domiciles or buildings; a common entrance for three or more domiciles or buildings.
“Curfew” means a time defined by the authority when outdoor lighting is reduced to a specified maximum level or extinguished.
“Emergency conditions” means a loss of electrical power, fire, security alarm, or other situation requiring uninterrupted illumination for the path of egress.
“Fully shielded luminaire” means a luminaire typically with opaque top and sides, capable of only emitting light in the lower photometric hemisphere as installed.
“Glare” means a light entering the eye directly from luminaires that causes visual discomfort or reduced visibility.
“Hardscape area” means area in square feet of all hardscape including any medians, walkways, landscape areas 10 feet or less in width within the hardscape area.
“Hardscape perimeter” means a perimeter in linear feet of all hardscape outside perimeter plus perimeter around buildings and structures greater than 10 feet in width.
“IDA” means the International Dark-Sky Association.
“IESNA” means the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
“Illuminated area” means an exterior area for which lighting of reasonable uniformity and illumination is provided; not incidentally lighted or partially lighted.
“Improved area” means the area of a specific use, measured in plain view.
“Initial lamp lumens” means the lumen rating of a lamp when the lamp is new and has not depreciated in light output (rated lamp lumens). Lamp lumen depreciation equals 1.0.
“Intended manner” means the manner of use of the product generally as listed, advertised and/or per manufacturer’s standard installation instructions.
“Lamp” means a generic term for a source created to produce optical radiation (i.e., “light”), often called a bulb or tube.
“Lamp watts” means the rated watts of the lamp, not including the watts of external auxiliaries.
“Landscape lighting” means lighting not mounted to poles or buildings, for the purpose of illumination of trees, shrubbery and other natural external elements.
“Light pollution” means light trespass, and excessive light levels, beyond what is necessary to perform the defined task.
“Light trespass” means unwanted light that falls on neighboring properties.
“Lighting equipment” means equipment specifically intended to provide electric illumination, including, but not limited to, luminaire(s), poles, posts, and related structures, electrical wiring, and other necessary or auxiliary components.
“Lighting system” means on a site, all exterior artificial lighting sources, associated infrastructure and controls.
“Lighting zone (LZ)” means a designation assigned by the city for specified parcels, areas or districts defining allowable ambient lighting levels, operational characteristics and other control criteria.
“Low voltage landscape lighting” means electric lighting powered at less than 24 volts and limited to lamps of 50 watts or less, not mounted to poles or buildings, for the purpose of illuminating trees, shrubbery and other natural external elements.
“Lumens (lm)” means an international unit of luminous flux; light power corrected for Vλ, the human photopic sensitivity function.
“Luminaire” means the complete lighting unit assembly (entire fixture), consisting of a lamp, or lamps and ballast(s), drivers or transformers (when applicable), together with the parts designated to distribute the light (reflector, lens, diffuser), to position and protect the lamps, and to connect the lamps to the power supply.
“Mounting height” means the height of a luminaire above finished grade level. The horizontal spacing of poles is often measured in units of “mounting height.” Example: “The luminaires can be spaced up to four mounting heights apart.”
“New lighting” means lighting for areas not previously illuminated; newly installed lighting of any type except for replacement lighting or lighting repairs.
“Nontradable surface” means those surfaces where lighting power allowance amounts may be used only for the specific application identified within subsection F of this section and Table 12.14-2 and cannot be transferred to other surfaces or be used as a group.
“Opaque” means a solid material not allowing light to pass through.
“Ornamental lighting” means lighting that is not a sign and does not impact the function and safety of an area but is purely decorative, or used to illuminate architecture and/or landscaping, and installed for aesthetic effect.
“Partly shielded luminaire” means a luminaire in which the lamp is shielded by a translucent shade as to prevent light from being directly emitted by the lamp or reflector into the upper photometric hemisphere.
“Photoelectric switch” means a control device employing a photocell or photodiode to detect daylight and automatically switch lights off by day.
“Project” means installation of a lighting system under a single electrical permit or for a specific construction project, multiple permits when required for phased construction.
“Property line” means the boundary line, or lot line between platted or unplatted lots or both, defining the edges of a legally defined piece of property.
“Replacement lighting” means lighting installed specifically to replace existing lighting equipment that is sufficiently inoperable to be beyond repair(s).
“Repair(s)” means the reconstruction or renewal of any part of an existing luminaire for the purpose of its ongoing operation, including but not limited to relamping or replacement of components such as capacitor, ballast, or photoelectric control.
“Residential luminaire” means luminaires used solely for compliance with Section V.
“Right-of-way” means the land, property, or interest therein acquired for or devoted to transportation purposes.
“Sales area” means exterior areas used for sales of retail goods and materials, including but not limited to automobiles, recreational vehicles, trailers, boats, building supplies, and gardening and nursery products.
“Seasonal lighting” means temporary lighting installed and operated in connection with holidays, community celebrations or traditions.
“Service yard” means uncovered exterior area specifically used for vehicular, marine or aviation service or for outdoor storage and/or loading of goods and materials.
“Shielded directional luminaire” means a fully shielded luminaire with an adjustable mounting device allowing aiming in a direction other than straight downward.
“Sign” is a communication device, structure, or fixture which incorporates graphics, symbols, or written copy for the purpose of conveying a particular message to public observers.
“Site” means a geographical area delineated by specific dimensions and coordinates or a complete land parcel defined by designated property boundaries as recorded by the authority.
“Sky glow” means the illumination of clouds, moisture and airborne matter by lighting.
“Temporary lighting” means lighting installed and operated for periods not to exceed 60 days, completely removed and not operated again for at least 30 days.
“Third party” means a party contracted to provide lighting, such as a utility company.
“Time switch” means an automatic lighting control device that operates as an on/off switch for outdoor lighting according to time of day.
“Tradable surface” means those surfaces where lighting power allowances may be traded or transferred from one surface to another surface resulting in an increase of the power allowance on one surface and a decrease of power allowance on other surfaces. Tradable surface power allowances may be added together used as a group. See subsection F of this section and Table 12.14-1.
“Translucent” means a material allowing light to pass through while obscuring or diffusing the lamp.
“Uplight” means, for an exterior luminaire, light emitted in the hemisphere at or above the horizontal plane.
“WS NREC” means the Washington State Non-Residential Energy Code (current version).
C. Applicability. These regulations shall be applicable to all exterior lighting whether attached to structures, poles, the earth, or any other location, installed in conjunction with development applications, including building permits, grading permits, utility permits, shorelines substantial development permits, conditional use permits, tenant improvement permits, and right-of-way invasion permits except as provided in subsection D of this section. Provided, however, that different land uses and development scale may be subject to specific exterior lighting provisions as provided below. Where the exterior lighting regulations within this section are in conflict with exterior lighting provisions of a subarea zoning regulation, or the conditions of approval for a conditional use permit or planned unit development, the subarea zoning regulations or conditions of approval shall control.
D. Exemptions. The following exterior lighting is exempt from the provisions of this section:
1. Lighting equipment placed within public rights-of-way intended solely for roadway and sidewalk illumination;
2. Lighting equipment used exclusively for signs;
3. Lighting equipment necessary for emergency situations and law enforcement actions;
4. Temporary lighting installed for holidays and celebrations; provided, that individual lamps are 10 watts or less;
5. Traffic control signals and devices;
6. Low voltage landscape lighting equipment controlled by a photoelectric switch or astronomic time switch;
7. Lighting equipment in swimming pools, spas, fountains, and other water features;
8. Temporary lighting equipment for theatrical, television, performance areas and construction sites;
9. Repairs to existing lighting equipment; provided, all light fixtures repaired or replaced shall comply with basic light glare and light pollution standards as detailed within subsection H of this section;
10. Lighting equipment for public monuments, flags, and statuary; and
11. Existing lighting equipment installed on or before January 22, 2011, for the following minor building or site alterations:
a. Tenant improvements that do not alter the building exterior;
b. Alterations or remodels that do not alter the building exterior;
c. Improvements to parking lots that do not increase the number of parking stalls;
d. Changes in use when the change is for uses listed within the same use table within Chapter 12.06 BMC. For example, BMC 12.06.050, Business and personal services, lists a number of similar uses, including architectural/engineering and banking and financial services. When the change in use is from one business and personal use to another business and personal use the change in use is exempt from these lighting regulations.
E. Lighting Zones. The city of Bothell has established lighting zones (LZ) which limits the amount of electrical energy used for exterior lighting as specified in subsection F of this section and Tables 12.14-1 and 12.14-2 (see Figure 12.14-20 for a map of zone locations). The descriptive criteria for each lighting zone shall be as follows:
1. Lighting Zone 1 (LZ1). Low ambient lighting including developed areas of national parks, state parks, forest land, and rural areas. No Lighting Zone 1 areas have been identified within the city of Bothell;
2. Lighting Zone 2 (LZ2). Moderate ambient lighting areas including lands predominately consisting of residential zoning, neighborhood business districts, light industrial with limited night-time use and residential mixed use areas. These areas are depicted on Figure 12.14-20 and include the following zoning classifications: R-C; R-L1; R-L2; R-M1; R-M2; R-M3; R-M4; OP; OP; R-M4, OP; MHP; SSHO; R-C (LID); R-L1 (LID), R-M3 (LID); C; SVV; PPOS; DT; and OP, LI;
3. Lighting Zone 3 (LZ3). Moderately high ambient lighting areas such as commercial districts. These areas are depicted on Figure 12.14-20 and include the following zoning classifications: CB; R-M4, OP, CB; R-M4, OP, NB; R-AC, OP, CB, LI; R-AC, OP, CB, MVSO; OP, CB, MVSO; OP, CB, LI, MVSO; SR-522; and GDC; and
4. Lighting Zone 4 (LZ4). High ambient lighting including high activity commercial districts in major metropolitan areas. No Lighting Zone 4 areas have been identified within the city of Bothell. However, pursuant to subsection (I)(2)(b) of this section, an applicant of a large development may request Lighting Zone 4 high ambient lighting energy levels;
5. Lighting zone power allowances shall be based upon subsection F of this section and Tables 12.14-1 and 12.14-2.
F. Exterior Lighting Power Allowances (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1). The city of Bothell is utilizing the exterior lighting power allowances as promulgated by the American National Standards Institute/American Society of Hearing Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA) Standard 90.1 to promote energy efficiency and reduce power consumption associated with exterior lighting. Certain modifications to the standard have been incorporated to accommodate lighting zones as described in subsection E of this section.
1. The total exterior lighting power allowance for exterior areas shall be the sum of the individual lighting power densities specified in Tables 12.14-1 and 12.14-2 plus the base power allotment specified for the lighting zone of the subject property.
2. Transference or trade-offs of lighting power densities may only occur between exterior surfaces listed as tradable surfaces in Table 12.14-1.
Table 12.14-1 Lighting Power Allowances Tradable Surfaces
Zone 2 | Zone 3 | Zone 4 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Base Site Allowance (All properties are allowed the base site allowance and may use the base site allowance for either tradable or nontradable surfaces but cannot be combined) | 600 W | 750 W | 1300 W | |
Building Grounds | ||||
Walkways less than 10 feet wide | 0.7 W/linear foot | 0.8 W/linear foot | 1.0 W/linear foot | |
Walkways 10 feet wide or greater | 0.14 W/ft2 | 0.16 W/ft2 | 0.2 W/ft2 | |
Plaza areas | ||||
Special feature areas | ||||
Uncovered Parking Areas | ||||
Parking areas and drives | 0.06 W/ft2 | 0.10 W/ft2 | 0.15 W/ft2 | |
Tradable Surfaces (Lighting power densities for uncovered parking areas, building grounds, building entrances and exits, canopies and overhangs and outdoor sales areas may be traded) | Building Entrances and Exits | |||
Main entries | 20 W/linear foot of door width | 30 W/linear foot of door width | 30 W/linear foot of door width | |
Other doors | 20 W/linear foot of door width | 20 W/linear foot of door width | 20 W/linear foot of door width | |
Entry canopies | 0.25 W/ft2 | 0.4 W/ft2 | 0.4 W/ft2 | |
Sales Canopies | ||||
Freestanding and attached | 0.8 W/ft2 | 0.8 W/ft2 | 1.0 W/ft2 | |
Outdoor Sales | ||||
Open areas (including vehicle sales lots) | 0.5 W/ft2 | 0.5 W/ft2 | 0.5 W/ft2 | |
Street frontage for vehicle sales lots in addition to open area allowance | 10 W/linear foot | 10 W/linear foot | 10 W/linear foot | |
Table 12.14-2 Lighting Power Allowances Nontradable Surfaces
Zone 2 | Zone 3 | Zone 4 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Base Site Allowance (All properties are allowed the base site allowance and may use the base site allowance for either tradable or nontradable surfaces but cannot be combined) | 600 W | 750 W | 1300 W | |
Nontradable Surfaces (Lighting power density calculations for the following applications can be used only for the specific application and cannot be traded between surfaces or with other exterior lighting. The following allowances are in addition to any allowance otherwise permitted in the “Tradable Surfaces” section of this table) | Building Facades | 0.1 W/ft2 for each illuminated wall or surface or 2.5 W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length | 0.15 W/ft2 for each illuminated wall or surface or 3.75 W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length | 0.2 W/ft2 for each illuminated wall or surface or 3.75 W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length |
Automated teller machines and night depositories | 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location | 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location | 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location | |
Entrances and gate-house inspections at guarded facilities | 1.25 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 1.25 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 1.25 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | |
Loading areas for law enforcement, fire, ambulance and other emergency service vehicles | 0.5 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 0.5 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 0.5 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | |
Drive-up windows/doors | 400 W per drive-through | 400 W per drive-through | 400 W per drive-through | |
Parking near 24-hour retail entrances | 800 W per main entry | 800 W per main entry | 800 W per main entry | |
Figure 12.14-20 Lighting Zones Map

G. Exterior Lighting Controls and Curfews. Exterior lighting shall be equipped with automatic controls and, for the specific uses identified below, curfews and automatic lighting reduction controls as consistent with the following:
1. Automatic Control Requirements. All exterior lighting shall have controls that automatically extinguish all exterior lighting during daylight hours using a switching device such as a photoelectric switch, astronomic time switch or a control system such as a programmable lighting controller, building automation system, lighting energy management system or equivalent, per the requirement of WS NREC.
2. Curfew and Automatic Lighting Reduction Requirements. The city of Bothell has established curfew time(s) specific to business and/or use types, for all lighting systems installed after January 22, 2011, whereupon the total outdoor lighting lumens shall be uniformly reduced by a specified amount. Individual light fixtures shall not be extinguished to meet this curfew lighting reduction requirement. The following uses and project types shall have curfews as follows:
a. Office, warehouse, manufacturing, light industrial and similar use exterior parking lots – 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. or 30 minutes before opening. The lighting system must be uniformly reduced to a maximum of 25 percent of normal output during curfew times.
b. Retail and mixed use without residential uses exterior parking lots – two hours after close of business hours. Lighting system must be uniformly reduced to a maximum of 25 percent of normal output during curfew times.
c. Mixed use containing residential uses, exterior parking lots – 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. or 30 minutes before opening. The lighting system must be uniformly reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal output during curfew times.
d. Parking structures or garages and other types of covered parking areas – no curfew; provided, that all light fixtures are fully shielded or obscured by building components such that the fixture is not visible from surrounding properties.
e. Sports Fields.
(1) Located on lands with detached residential zoning classifications of R-C, R-L1, and R-L2 – 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. unless a game is in progress. Games may not start after 8:00 p.m. Spectator, parking lot, and other non-sports field areas may remain fully illuminated for up to two hours after completion of the event.
(2) Located on lands with all other zoning classifications – 11:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. Spectator, parking lot, and other non-sports field areas may remain fully illuminated for up to two hours after completion of the event.
H. Illumination Standards. The city of Bothell requires that all exterior lighting satisfy the illumination level recommendations as established within the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Lighting Handbook and associated recommended practice documents.
I. Requirements for Exterior Lighting.
1. The following exterior lighting requirements are applicable to all proposed development applications and existing developments, except outdoor performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfield lighting, which must comply with subsection H of this section, and individual single-family residential structures, which must comply with subsection J of this section.
a. Submittal Requirements.
(1) A site plan showing the proposed location, mounting height, aiming point, type, and size of all exterior lighting including building mounted, landscape, roadways, and parking lot lighting drawings should include property line or project limit line if part of a larger campus.
(2) Manufacturer fixture specification sheets or cut-sheets for all fixture types. Fixture cut sheets must be labeled with fixture type and all fixture features and accessories must be defined and an image of the fixture included.
(3) A fixture schedule including quantity and type of lamps.
(4) If building elevations are to be illuminated, submit building elevation drawings showing the location and type of all fixtures, the area of the building elevation to be illuminated, the illumination levels, and the aiming point for all light fixtures.
(5) If building mounted fixtures are used, submit building elevations showing the location of each fixture.
(6) All drawings must have fixture type indicators.
(7) The community development director may require submittal of additional information demonstrating the objectives of the lighting design including:
(A) A brief written narrative; and/or
(B) Supplemental drawings.
b. Fixture Requirements.
(1) All fixtures must be similar to those identified as acceptable within Figures 12.14-21, 12.14-22, and 12.14-23;
(2) The maximum mounting pole height of exterior light fixtures shall be consistent with the following schedule:
(A) Within Lighting Zone 2: 15 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(B) Within developments classified as large under subsection (I)(2) of this section located within Lighting Zone 2: 20 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(C) Within Lighting Zone 3: 20 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(D) Within developments classified as large under subsection (I)(2) of this section located within Lighting Zone 3: 25 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(E) Within properties which have been assigned a Lighting Zone 4 classification by the community development director per subsection (I)(2)(b) of this section: 25 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(3) All light fixtures within two mounting pole heights of any adjacent property (excluding public rights-of-way) that are not building mounted must be facing in toward the project and have house-side shields consistent with Figure 12.14-25 installed on the side of the fixture nearest the adjacent property. (See Figure 12.14-25).
Figure 12.14-21 Acceptable and unacceptable light fixtures
Acceptable fixtures | Comments | Not acceptable fixtures | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|
![]() | Example of ceiling mounted fixture | ![]() | Surface mounted square fixture with exposed lamp and lens |
![]() | Lamp concealed in opaque upper portion. Clear flat glass lens | ![]() | Translucent white lens with decorative metal grill work is not acceptable |
![]() | Solid, opaque sides and top. Flat clear glass lens | ![]() | Vertical lamp with dropped lens is not acceptable |
![]() | Flat lens and horizontal top is acceptable | ![]() | Clear, translucent, white or clear textured with or without an internal refractor is unacceptable |
![]() | Clear flat lens. Lamp concealed within opaque portion of fixture at less than 5 degrees above the horizontal | ![]() | Fixture aimed above the horizontal is not acceptable |
![]() | Bollard lamp concealed by opaque louvers aimed in a downward direction | ![]() | Bollards with translucent lens with decorative grill-work directed horizontally are not acceptable |
![]() | Fixture has opaque shields with flat lens | ![]() | Standard yard or barn light |
![]() | Flat lens fixtures with lamp concealed in top opaque portion | ![]() | Lamp below opaque portion of fixture is not acceptable |
![]() | Full cut-off wall pack fixture | ![]() | Perimeter wall pack with exposed lens or lamp |
![]() | Flat glass lens. Lamp completely concealed within opaque fixture | ![]() | Compact refractor wall pack with exposed lens or lamp |
Figure 12.14-22 Acceptable fixtures subject to special requirements
Fixtures acceptable subject to specific requirements | Requirements |
|---|---|
![]() | Pole-mounted fixtures limited to 6,600 lumens. Fixture must not have more than two percent of lumens above 90 degrees |
![]() | Floodlights aimed above the horizontal to illuminate flags and building elements are acceptable only when the fixture is shielded or aimed such that people on the ground cannot see into the fixture or the lamp from normal viewing angles. See Figure 12.14-26 for information regarding other options for illuminating building elements |
![]() | Wall sconces with opaque fronts that are limited to 6,200 lumens. Uplighting is acceptable only when fixture is located beneath building overhangs, cantilevers, or canopies. Arrows indicate direction of light |
![]() | Horizontal lamp completely contained inside opaque portion of housing. Lamp limited to 6,200 lumens. Clear or translucent lens acceptable |
![]() | Wall mounted fixtures with translucent, white lens up to 12 inches in diameter and limited to 1,250 lumens |
![]() | Decorative wall sconce with translucent white lens. If using metal halide lamp, lamp must be concealed in upper or lower opaque portion of fixture. Limited to 3,300 lumens. If using fluorescent lamp, limited to one T8 or T5 standard output lamp mounted vertically within the fixture |
Figure 12.14-23 Acceptable fixtures for individual single-family residential
Acceptable fixtures (may be similar) | Requirements |
|---|---|
![]() | Clear glass with a maximum of 345 lumens per lamp. Two lamps per fixture maximum |
![]() | Translucent lens up to 1,220 lumens per lamp maximum. One lamp per fixture maximum |
![]() | Post top with clear glass with maximum lamp lumens of 345 with a three lamp maximum |
![]() | Bare bulbs with motion sensor |
![]() | Light completely concealed within opaque housing. All light aimed in a downward direction |
![]() | Shielded lamps with motion sensors |
Figure 12.14-24 Unacceptable fixtures
Unacceptable light fixtures | Comment |
|---|---|
![]() | Commonly called a yard or area light, these fixtures are not acceptable under any circumstances |
![]() | Bare bulbs with no shielding and no motion sensor |
![]() | Flood light fixtures with no shielding and no motion sensors |
Figure 12.14-25 Example of house-sided shielding

Figure 12.14-26 Illustration demonstrating building uplight requirement
Acceptable flood light use for architectural uplighting | Unacceptable flood light use for architectural uplighting |
|---|---|
![]() | ![]() |
Figure 12.14-27 Illustration demonstrating shielding requirement for pole-mounted fixtures located within two pole heights of adjacent properties

Figure 12.14-28 Illustration demonstrating when pole-mounted fixtures are located two or more pole heights away from adjacent properties house-side shielding not required

2. The following additional requirements are applicable to development applications for projects that include: buildings covering 10,000 square feet or more of gross floor area; parking lots containing 40 or more parking stalls; and residential developments of 20 or more dwelling units shall comply with subsection (G)(1) of this section except outdoor performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfield lighting, which must comply with subsection H of this section, and individual single-family residential structures, which must comply with subsection J of this section.
a. Submittal Requirements.
(1) All of the submittal items required for general requirements plus provide site lighting calculations showing:
(A) Illumination points at maximum 10 foot intervals for all parking and on-site roadways measured at finish grade;
(B) Pathways, stairs, entrances, under canopies, and other pedestrian areas must be at five-foot maximum intervals. Include any areas intended for human use; and
(C) The grid shall extend to the points surrounding the property line to the point where the light levels fall below 0.2 footcandles. The calculations shall include any existing or proposed ROW lighting that will contribute light onto the property.
b. Lighting Standards for Larger Developments.
(1) Maximum fixture pole height shall be 20 feet above city-approved finish grade, including height of pole base;
(2) Lighting power density shall not exceed the limits established within Table 12.14-1 for the applicable lighting zone;
(3) The community development may allow increases from the established lighting zone to the next highest zone, if any, if safety and security is an issue. This may include instances where:
(A) The parking facility is used during all hours of the day and night; where the police chief has identified special security needs exist;
(B) High vandalism or crime rates have been documented by the Bothell police department; or
(C) The community development director may consider specific site characteristics, level of vehicle and pedestrian conflict, special security needs, and history or likelihood of crimes in making a determination.
J. Lighting of Exterior Performance, Sport and Recreation Facilities and Playfields. The following requirements shall be applied to all illuminated exterior performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfields:
1. Lighting levels for outdoor performance areas, sport and recreation facilities, and playfields shall be Class III and Class IV as determined by the IESNA RP-6 (Recommended Practice for Sports and Recreational Area Lighting). The community development director may allow increases in designed lighting levels for venues hosting higher classes of sports play (collegiate/professional) and/or for stadiums with seating capacities in excess of 2,500 spectators.
2. Where exterior playing fields or other exterior activity areas are to be illuminated, lighting fixtures shall be mounted, aimed and shielded such that light is directed only to the primary playing area and immediate surroundings associated with the playing area, such as spectator seating, concessions, ingress/egress areas, pedestrian aisles, maintenance facilities, and general pedestrian use areas. Direct illumination of adjacent nonplaying and immediate surroundings associated with the playing areas is prohibited.
3. Floodlight shielding shall consist of one of the following:
a. Full cutoff shoebox style floodlights aimed a maximum of five degrees above the horizontal mounting height of the luminaire. (See Figure 12.14-25). This is the only light fixture acceptable for tennis or similar hardcourts.
b. Spun parabolic floodlights with external shielding consisting of a visor attached to the front of the floodlight. The visor shall extend beyond the upper hemisphere of the fixture a minimum of 12 inches and wrap a minimum of 170 degrees around the upper hemisphere of the floodlight. All surfaces of the fixture shall be nonreflecting and the external visor shall have a dull powder coat factory finish.
4. Areas used for ingress/egress, pedestrian aisles, and general pedestrian use not associated with the playing or activity area shall be illuminated with separate lighting fixtures and shall provide an average horizontal illumination level at grade of no more than 1.0 footcandle average.
5. In facilities with a seating capacity of 2,500 or more spectators, circulation areas around the concessions and restroom areas shall be no more than 10.0 footcandles average at three feet above grade, and shall be no more than 5.0 footcandles average at three feet above grade for facilities with a seating capacity of less than 2,500 spectators. The uniformity ratio (average horizontal illumination to minimum illumination) shall not exceed 4:1 within pedestrian aisles and walkways.
6. Light trespass levels shall be a maximum of one and one-half footcandles when measured on either a horizontal surface (three feet above grade) or a vertical surface (five feet above grade) at all residential property lines.
7. Applicants shall submit lighting plans for all outdoor sports courts and playing fields for review and approval. The following plans and information shall be included:
a. Pole locations;
b. Pole heights (poles used for exterior performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfields may exceed the height maximum established within the lighting zone requirements);
c. Pole types;
d. Luminaire quantities;
e. Luminaire types;
f. Luminaire mounting heights;
g. Aiming points;
h. Fieldcourt boundaries; and
i. Site property lines.
j. Computer generated vertical and horizontal illumination grids for the field or court shall be provided with the plans showing:
(1) Horizontal footcandle levels calculated on a 15-foot grid three feet above the playing surface. The horizontal grid shall extend to the points surrounding the lighted field/court to the point where the light levels fall below 0.2 footcandles including lands beyond the subject property when necessary.
(2) Vertical footcandle illumination levels at 15-foot increments, five feet high facing into the field at all property lines.
8. Measurement and Verification. Prior to issuance of occupancy permit, the applicant shall provide the city with confirmation of compliance with regulations. Applicant shall measure lighting along residential property lines at a minimum of 30 feet on center. Documentation shall be submitted in writing and signed by the engineer of record.
Figure 12.14-29 Illustration of spun parabolic floodlight with shields

Figure 12.14-30 Example of full-cut-off shoe box floodlight

Figure 12.14-31 Illustration of five degree maximum tilt

K. Requirements for Single-Family Residential Lighting. Individual single-family residential structures shall be subject to the following requirements:
1. Decorative building mounted lighting (porch lights and sconces) are acceptable with the following limitations:
a. Fixtures with clear glass lenses are limited to up to two 345 lumen lamps (equivalent to 25 watt incandescent).
b. Fixtures with translucent lenses are limited to a total of 1,220 lumens (equivalent to 75 watt incandescent).
c. Fully shielded fixtures (see example in Figure 12.14-21) can be up to 2,700 lumens (equivalent to 150 watt incandescent).
d. Low voltage fixtures up to 50 watts and/or 1,500 lumens.
e. Fixtures shall comply with Figures 12.14-23 and 12.14-24 or be consistent with the above standards.
2. Pole-mounted light fixtures are acceptable with the following limitations:
a. Fixtures’ lumen output shall be consistent with subsection (K)(1) of this section;
b. Fixtures shall be mounted a maximum of 12 feet above finish grade;
c. Fixtures used for hardscape sports courts, such as tennis, basketball, pickleball and other courts shall be consistent with subsection J of this section. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2373 § 9, 2022; Ord. 2055 § 2 (Exh. B), 2011).
A. Purpose and Intent. This section is established to:
1. Promote clean energy production by citizens and businesses;
2. Ensure that alternative energy infrastructure is compatible with the development and development on adjacent properties;
3. Provide options to traditional energy use; and
4. Promote reduction of energy use within the city.
B. General Criteria. Alternative energy infrastructure shall meet all of the following criteria:
1. Setbacks. Alternative energy infrastructure shall not be located within any building setback or required setback, unless below grade or as allowed in BMC 12.14.070(E) for pad-mounted equipment and BMC 12.14.090(D) for panels that are components of roof structures.
2. Compliance with International Building Code. Any installation of an alternative energy system shall comply with any and all applicable provisions of the International Building Code.
3. Compliance with National Electrical Code. Any installation of an alternative energy system shall comply with any and all applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code.
4. Utility Notification. No alternative energy system shall be installed unless evidence has been provided to the city of Bothell that the utility company has been informed of the customer’s intent to install an interconnected customer-owned power generation system. Off-grid systems shall be exempt from this requirement.
5. Compliance with Environmental Regulations. Any installation of alternative energy infrastructure shall comply with all applicable environmental regulations.
C. Geothermal Infrastructure Criteria. In addition to the approval criteria established in subsection B of this section, geothermal alternative energy systems are encouraged and shall comply with the following standards:
1. Location. Geothermal infrastructure shall be located entirely within the subject property, or within appropriate easements.
2. Installation. Installation of geothermal infrastructure shall comply with all building department requirements, and applicable state laws and codes.
D. Solar and Wind Infrastructure. Alternative energy facilities, including solar and wind equipment, are encouraged, subject to the following provisions:
1. Solar and Wind Infrastructure Requirements.
a. Building-mounted solar and wind equipment shall be integrated into the structure’s architectural design. Techniques for achieving this include, but are not limited to, aligning equipment with a building’s structural or functional articulation, coordinating panel placement with other building features or using equipment to enhance a building’s architectural expression.
b. Roof-mounted solar and wind equipment may extend above the building height limit without screening, but shall be designed to avoid creating glare or blocking views and solar access to surrounding properties.
2. Solar and Wind Infrastructure Guidelines.
a. Use of solar panels to serve other functions, like weather protection, shading, building articulation and place-making, is encouraged.
b. Exposing solar and wind equipment in a way that enhances architectural design and demonstrates the viability of alternative energy is encouraged. (Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012).
The purpose of this chapter is to provide adequate parking for all uses permitted in the code, to reduce demand for parking by encouraging alternative means of transportation including public transit, ride-sharing and bicycles, to increase pedestrian mobility, and to ensure that the visual impacts of parking and loading areas and structures are minimized. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Before an occupancy permit may be granted for any new or enlarged building or for a change of use in any existing building, the use shall be required to meet the provisions of this chapter.
1. Outdoor dining space structures of 1,000 square feet in area or less associated with existing businesses are exempt from the provisions of this chapter and do not constitute an expansion of the existing business.
B. Repealed by Ord. 2461.
C. Parking spaces may be enclosed or unenclosed. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2397 § 1, 2023; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Except as provided herein, there is no required minimum number of off-street parking spaces. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2442 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 6 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2397 § 2, 2023; Ord. 2360 § 3, 2021; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Bicycle Requirements Table.
Specific Use | Long-Term Spaces | Short-Term Spaces |
|---|---|---|
1. Multifamily housing | 2, or 0.5 per bedroom and studio unit. | 2 per 10 units. |
2. Commercial: Retail sales and services, including eating and drinking establishments | 2, or 1 per 12,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. | 2, or 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. |
3. Commercial: Office | 2, or 1 per 10,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. | 2, or 1 per 20,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. |
4. Commercial: Off-street parking lots and garages available to the general public without charges or on a fee basis | 2, or 1 per 20 vehicle spaces. | 6, or 1 for each 20 vehicle spaces. |
Note: Wherever this table indicates two numerical standards, such as “2, or 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area,” the larger number applies. Fractions of 0.5 or greater are rounded up to the next whole number. | ||
B. Bicycle parking is required to encourage the use of bicycles by providing safe and convenient places to park bicycles. These regulations ensure adequate short- and long-term bicycle parking based on the demand generated by the different use categories and on the level of security necessary to encourage the use of bicycles for short and long stays.
1. The required minimum number of bicycle parking spaces for each use category is shown in the bicycle parking requirements table. No bicycle parking is required for uses not listed.
2. The required minimum number of bicycle parking spaces is based on the primary uses on a site. When there are two or more separate primary uses that operate at the same time on a site, the required bicycle parking for the site is the sum of the required parking for the individual primary uses.
C. Exemptions.
1. No long-term bicycle parking is required on a site where there are less than 2,500 square feet of gross building area.
2. No bicycle parking is required for unattended surface parking lots.
D. Bicycle Parking Standards.
1. Short-Term Bicycle Parking.
a. Purpose. Short-term bicycle parking encourages shoppers, customers, messengers, and other visitors to use bicycles by providing a convenient and readily accessible place to park bicycles. Short-term bicycle parking should serve the main entrance of a building and should be visible to pedestrians and bicyclists.
b. Standards.
(1) Required short-term bicycle parking shall be located:
(A) Outside a building;
(B) On the site;
(C) At the same grade as the sidewalk or at a location that can be reached by an accessible route; and
(D) Within 50 feet of the main entrance to the building as measured along the most direct pedestrian access route. For sites that have more than one primary building, the bicycle parking shall be within 50 feet of a main entrance as measured along the most direct pedestrian access route, and shall be distributed to serve all primary buildings.
(2) Short-term bike parking may be located within the public right-of-way provided the location and design are subject to public works department approval.
2. Long-Term Bicycle Parking.
a. Purpose. Long-term bicycle parking provides employees, residents, commuters and others who generally stay at a site for several hours a secure and weather-protected place to park bicycles. Although long-term parking does not have to be provided on site, the intent of these standards is to allow bicycle parking to be within a reasonable distance in order to encourage bicycle use.
b. Standards. Required long-term bicycle parking shall be:
(1) Provided in racks or lockers that meet the standards of subsection (D)(3)(c) of this section;
(2) Located on the site or in an area where the closest point is within 300 feet of the site;
(3) Covered. At least 50 percent of required long-term bicycle parking shall be covered and meet the standards of subsection (D)(3)(e) of this section (Covered Bicycle Parking); and
(4) Secured. To provide security, long-term bicycle parking shall be in at least one of the following locations:
(A) In a locked room;
(B) In an area that is enclosed by a fence with a locked gate. The fence shall either be eight feet high or be floor-to-ceiling;
(C) Within view of an attendant or security guard;
(D) In an area that is monitored by a security camera; or
(E) In an area that is visible from employee work areas.
(5) E-Bikes. Long-term bicycle parking facilities shall include at least one electrical outlet for e-bike charging, and a minimum of one outlet shall be provided for every 10 long-term bicycle parking spaces. Electrical outlet shall be provided within or adjacent to each long-term bicycle parking facility, in a secure and accessible location, to accommodate the charging of electric bicycles. Charging infrastructure must comply with applicable code requirements and be protected from weather and vandalism.
3. Standards for All Bicycle Parking.
a. Purpose. These standards ensure that required bicycle parking is designed so that bicycles may be securely locked without undue inconvenience and will be reasonably safeguarded from intentional or accidental damage.
b. Bicycle Lockers. Where required bicycle parking is provided in lockers, the lockers shall be securely anchored.
c. Bicycle Racks. Required bicycle parking may be provided in floor, wall, or ceiling racks. Where required bicycle parking is provided in racks, the racks shall meet the following standards:
(1) The bicycle frame and one wheel can be locked to the rack with a high security, U-shaped shackle lock if both wheels are left on the bicycle;
(2) A bicycle six feet long can be securely held with its frame supported so that the bicycle cannot be pushed or fall in a manner that will damage the wheels or components; and
(3) The rack shall be securely anchored.
d. Parking and Maneuvering Areas.
(1) Each required bicycle parking space shall be accessible without moving another bicycle;
(2) There shall be an aisle at least five feet wide behind all required bicycle parking to allow room for bicycle maneuvering. Where the bicycle parking is adjacent to a sidewalk, the maneuvering area may extend into the right-of-way; and
(3) The area devoted to bicycle parking shall be hard surfaced.
e. Covered Bicycle Parking. Covered bicycle parking, as required by this section, can be provided inside buildings, under roof overhangs or awnings, in bicycle lockers, or within or under other structures. Where required covered bicycle parking is not within a building or locker, the cover shall be:
(1) Permanent;
(2) Designed to protect the bicycle from rainfall; and
(3) At least seven feet above the floor or ground.
f. Signs. If required bicycle parking is not visible from the street or main building entrance, a sign shall be posted at the main building entrance indicating the location of the parking. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025).
In the event that shared parking facilities for two or more uses are proposed, a covenant or other contract for shared parking between the cooperating property owners is approved by the community development director. This covenant or contract must be recorded with the appropriate county auditor as a deed restriction on all affected properties and cannot be modified or revoked without the consent of the community development director. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Off-street parking and access for physically disabled persons shall be provided in accordance with the State Building Code as adopted in Chapter 51-50 WAC. (Ord. 2212 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. An off-street loading space having access to a public thoroughfare shall be required adjacent to each business building thereafter erected or enlarged if the use of such building entails deliveries or shipments to or from it. Such loading space shall be of adequate size to accommodate the number and size of vehicles simultaneously loaded and/or unloaded in connection with the business conducted in such building. Loading spaces shall be located so that vehicles to be loaded or unloaded shall not obstruct pedestrian or other vehicle traffic movement or project into any public right-of-way. All loading space areas shall be separated from required parking areas and shall be designated as vehicle loading spaces.
B. Any lighting used in association with loading areas shall be directed onto the loading area only and shall not intrude onto adjacent properties. Loading areas serving businesses that are located adjacent to a less intensive zone than that in which the business is located, or are located adjacent to a public use area such as a street, sidewalk, park, or trail, shall be landscaped to provide a buffer between the loading area and the adjacent zone or public use. Said landscaping shall conform to the requirements of BMC 12.16.090 and Chapter 12.18 BMC. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. A stacking space shall be an area measuring eight feet by 20 feet with direct forward access to a service window of a drive-through facility. A stacking space shall be located to prevent any vehicles from extending onto the public right-of-way, or interfering with any pedestrian circulation, traffic maneuvering, or other required parking areas. Stacking space for drive-through or drive-in uses may not be counted as required off-street parking spaces.
B. For each drive-up lane of a financial institution, business service, vendor stand, or other drive-through use not listed, a minimum of three stacking spaces shall be provided.
C. For each service lane of a drive-through restaurant, a minimum of seven stacking spaces shall be provided.
D. Stacking spaces serving businesses that are located adjacent to a less intensive zone than that in which the business is located, or are located adjacent to a public use area such as a street, sidewalk, park, or trail, shall be landscaped to provide a buffer between the stacking spaces and the adjacent zone or public use. Said landscaping shall conform to the requirements of BMC 12.16.090 and Chapter 12.18 BMC.
Figure 12.16-1 Stacking Space Requirements for Typical Drive-Through

(Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Off-street parking areas shall not be located more than 500 feet from the building they are required to serve except as otherwise provided in BMC 12.16.040 and subsections (A)(1) through (A)(3) of this section. Where the off-street parking areas do not abut the building they serve, the required maximum distance shall be measured from the nearest building entrance that the parking area serves:
1. For single-family dwellings, the parking spaces shall be located on the same lot they are required to serve;
2. For multifamily residential dwellings, at least a portion of parking areas shall be located within 100 feet from the building(s) they are required to serve; and
3. For all nonresidential uses permitted in residential zones, the parking spaces shall be located on the same lot they are required to serve and at least a portion of parking areas shall be located within 150 feet from the nearest building entrance they are required to serve.
B. The minimum parking space and aisle dimensions shall be as set forth in the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications.
C. Lighting shall be provided for safety of traffic and pedestrian circulation on the site, and shall be designed to minimize direct illumination of abutting properties and adjacent streets.
D. Tandem or end-to-end parking is allowed in residential developments and in other developments provided the applicant demonstrates special conditions and/or management plans that allow use of tandem parking without effectively reducing the number of required parking spaces available. In residential developments, tandem parking is only allowed when the tandem spaces are assigned to the same dwelling unit and shall count toward meeting minimum parking requirements at a rate of one space for every 20 linear feet with any necessary provision for turning radius.
E. All vehicle parking and storage on a residential lot may be covered or uncovered and shall be on an approved hard surface. Any hard surface used for vehicle parking or storage shall have direct and unobstructed driveway access. Legally nonconforming gravel surfaces in existing parking areas can still be used to meet local parking standards, for up to six parking spaces.
F. The total number of vehicles parked outside of a building on a single-family lot shall not exceed six vehicles on lots 12,500 square feet or less and eight vehicles on lots greater than 12,500 square feet.
G. A dead-end alley may provide access to no more than eight required off-street parking spaces.
H. Parking facilities shall not be located between the front lot line and the building in the OP, NB, CB and GC zones, in accordance with and except as provided for in BMC 12.14.180.
I. Within community activity centers, as depicted in BMC 12.14.030(B)(6), parking garages along a street frontage shall incorporate in that portion of the garage facing the street externally oriented at-grade space for retail uses, eating and drinking establishments, recreation, culture and entertainment uses, personal services, and/or other similar businesses which are characterized by regular and frequent patronage during the course of the normal business day. “Externally oriented” shall mean having a door opening directly to the outside.
J. Parking garages shall be architecturally compatible with the building in which they are located, other buildings on the same site, and/or buildings on adjacent sites. Architectural compatibility shall be achieved through one or more of the following measures:
1. Facing the parking structure with the same material as the building;
2. Continuing architectural elements from the building, such as a frieze, cornice, trellis, or pattern of modulation or articulation, on the parking structure;
3. Incorporating usable space into the parking structure, such as storefronts along the sidewalk or a deck or garden on top of the structure;
4. Designing the entrance to the parking structure to be visually subordinate to pedestrian entrances to the building; for example, by emphasizing the pedestrian entrances using modulation, arches, porticos, molding, or other architectural devices, as illustrated in Figure 12.14-12;
5. Incorporating artistically designed bars or metal grilles for security and air circulation in the fascia of the parking structure;
6. Locating the entrance to the parking structure on a side street or alley. (Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2101 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 2093 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All parking lots and garages, loading areas, drive-through lanes and stacking spaces which can be seen from a public right-of-way shall be screened from view from the right-of-way by means of landscaping as provided for in BMC 12.18.050, 12.18.060 and 12.18.080, except as otherwise provided in BMC 12.16.080 and this section. In order to minimize the visual impact of parked automobiles, the required shrubs and ground cover shall include a berm a minimum of three feet in height and/or planting materials which will form a dense hedge a minimum of three feet in height. Vegetation-based LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities are permitted within parking lot landscaping provided the screening requirements are met. Use drought-tolerant plant materials such as Ottoluyken laurel, Zabel laurel, photinia and pyramidalis, or other plant materials as approved by the city. Periodic breaks in the hedge for pedestrian paths may be provided, and the hedge shall be installed and maintained so as not to interfere with sight distance, in accordance with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications.
B. In cases where, in accordance with Chapter 12.36 BMC, a variance from the street frontage landscaping width requirements as set forth in BMC 12.18.050 and 12.18.060 has been applied for and granted, a screen wall shall be substituted. Said wall shall be a minimum of three feet high, of durable and attractive materials such as brick, stone or textured concrete, and shall incorporate a continuous planting box or trellis or grillwork with climbing plants. Said wall shall not interfere with sight distance in accordance with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications.
Figure 12.16-5 Screening Wall

(Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Parking and loading areas shall include lighting capable of providing adequate illumination for security and safety. Lighting standards shall be in scale with the height and use of the associated structure. Pedestrian walkways and sidewalks may be lighted with three- to four-foot-high lighting bollards. Any illumination, including security lighting, shall be directed away from adjoining properties and public rights-of-way. Lighting intensity shall comply with city exterior lighting performance standards as set forth in BMC 8.64.030. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All land uses for which the majority of the parking demand is generated by employees who remain on site for at least six hours each day shall be required to reserve one parking space for rideshare parking for every 20 installed parking spaces, up to a maximum of 20 rideshare spaces, as follows:
1. The parking spaces shall be located convenient to the primary employee entrance;
2. Reserved areas shall have markings and signs indicating that the space is reserved between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m., 12:00 noon and 1:00 p.m., and at all other shift changes; and
3. Parking in reserved areas shall be limited to vanpools and carpools established through rideshare programs and to vehicles meeting minimum rideshare qualifications set by the employer.
B. All uses which are located on an existing transit route and are required under the computation for required off-street parking spaces in BMC 12.16.030 to provide more than 200 parking spaces may be required to provide transit shelters, bus turnout lanes or other transit improvements as a condition of permit approval. Uses which reduce required parking shall provide transit shelters if transit routes adjoin the site. Adjoining uses which meet these criteria may coordinate in the provision of transit shelters.
C. Any development application to which this section applies shall complete and submit to the city all necessary agreements with transit agencies, rideshare programs, or other information required by this section prior to the issuance of any building permits associated with the development.
D. Any applicant for a development permit for other than a short plat or construction of a single-family residence shall inquire of the transit agency for the area in which the development would be located as to whether the agency desires a transit stop on the street or streets immediately adjacent to the development, or within the development itself. The applicant shall provide to the community development department a letter from the agency stating whether or not a transit stop is desired, and if so, whether the agency desires to construct and maintain a shelter at the stop. When a transit agency determines that a transit stop is warranted, the development shall incorporate the transit stop into the overall site design, including construction of a direct pedestrian connection from the transit stop to the development; construction of a pull-out, if desired by the transit agency; designation of land for a shelter, if the transit agency desires to construct a shelter; and installation of landscaping adjacent to the transit stop, in accordance with the transit agency’s landscaping standards. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2415 § 6 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2348 § 6, 2021; Ord. 2325 § 2, 2020; Ord. 2212 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2154 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All uses, except single-family building permits, shall provide pedestrian access onto the site. Pedestrian access points shall be provided at all pedestrian arrival points to the development including the property edges, adjacent lots, abutting street intersections, crosswalks, and transit stops. Pedestrian access shall be located as follows:
1. Access points at property edges and to adjacent lots shall be coordinated with existing development to provide circulation patterns between developments;
2. Residential development shall provide pedestrian access between cul-de-sacs or groups of buildings to allow pedestrian access from within the development and from adjacent developments to activity centers, parks, common tracts, open spaces, schools or other public facilities, transit stops and public streets, when determined by the community development director to be necessary for safe and efficient pedestrian circulation.
B. Provision for safe and efficient pedestrian circulation shall be provided as follows:
1. All developments which contain more than one building shall provide walkways between the principal entrances of the buildings;
2. All nonresidential buildings located more than 100 feet from the public right-of-way shall provide for direct pedestrian access from the building to buildings on adjacent lots;
3. Where a parking lot exists between a building or buildings and the street front sidewalk, pedestrian access shall be provided from the street front sidewalk to the building(s) and shall be designed so as to provide safe and efficient pedestrian travel across and/or around parking lots. This may be accomplished by integrating pedestrian sidewalks/walkways into the parking lot design either around the perimeter of the parking lot or through the interior of the parking lot.
Pedestrian sidewalks/walkways that serve the interior of the parking lot shall be clearly marked so as to distinguish those areas from vehicle drive lanes.
C. Pedestrian sidewalks and walkways shall meet the following minimum design standards:
1. Sidewalks and walkways shall be well lit using pedestrian scale lighting;
2. Sidewalks and walkways shall be a minimum of 60 inches of unobstructed width and meet city of Bothell standards for walkways and sidewalks; parked vehicles shall not intrude into the required unobstructed width;
3. Access for mobility impaired persons shall be provided in accordance with Section 7503 of the regulations adopted pursuant to Chapter 19.27 RCW, State Building Code; Chapter 70.92 RCW, Provisions in Buildings for Aged and Handicapped Persons. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Existing residential parking spaces that do not conform to this code as of June 6, 2024, are not required to be modified or resized, except to ensure compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). In existing paved parking lots, the size of the existing parking spaces is not required to be changed if such changes will be more costly or require significant reconfiguration of the parking space locations. (Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024).
The purpose of this chapter is to foster retention of significant trees, provide visual relief from large expanses of building and parking areas, reduce the impacts of development on drainage systems, provide wildlife habitat, and provide a separation or transition between land uses of differing intensities. (Ord. 2245 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2087 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all new development and to changes of use or structural additions comprising more than 20 percent of gross floor area prior to the addition, when such changes or additions require additional landscaping under the regulations of this chapter. (Ord. 2245 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2087 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Purpose. The retention of existing vegetation such as intact forest areas is an important component of the city’s character, and assists the city in meeting its aesthetic, surface water, and environmental policies within the Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan. Existing vegetation may also be used to meet all or portions of the landscaping requirements within this chapter.
B. Applicable Activities. Tree retention shall apply to developments where any human-caused change to improved or unimproved real estate, including, but not limited to, construction of buildings or other structures, dredging, filling, grading, paving, excavation, or other land-altering activities, are proposed or may be occurring. For the purposes of this chapter, vegetation retention shall apply to significant trees, which shall mean existing trees over eight inches in diameter (excluding alders and cottonwoods) as measured four feet above grade, that are located within the net buildable area of a subject property as described within BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040.
C. These tree retention requirements shall not apply to existing individual single-family dwellings on lots of record that are 20,000 square feet or less in area, or duplexes, multiple-family residential or nonresidential developments having less than 2,000 square feet of required landscaping over the entire development area.
D. All proposed development applications not specifically excepted as outlined in subsection C of this section shall include a tree retention plan for the entire subject property identifying and locating all significant trees on the subject property excepting only those lands where existing vegetation would not be disturbed in any manner including, but not limited to, lands covered by critical areas or critical area buffers. The tree retention plan shall be prepared by a qualified professional such as a licensed landscape architect, licensed/certified forester; licensed/certified arborist, or Washington State certified nurseryperson. The city may have submitted reports and tree retention plans peer-reviewed by qualified consultants at the applicant’s expense.
The tree retention plan shall include the following:
1. Location, size, species and driplines of all existing significant trees greater than eight inches in diameter measured four feet above grade;
2. Proposed and existing contours;
3. Trees and other vegetation to be retained and removed;
4. An evaluation by a qualified professional of all significant trees including those to be retained and removed;
5. A description of protection techniques to be utilized during construction to protect existing vegetation including, but not limited to, the use of an air shovel to locate the root zone, installation of a minimum four-foot-high chainlink or plastic-net fencing around tree driplines and/or root zones, using tunneling instead of trenching for utility installation, stump grinding instead of stump pulling and routing of construction traffic away from retained tree root areas to prevent soil compaction;
6. Tree retention plans shall indicate a disturbance-free area around all retained trees where the soil grade or ground contours shall not be altered. At a minimum, the disturbance-free area shall extend to a tree’s dripline or at least 15 feet from the trunk of a tree, whichever is the greater distance, unless an alternative tree protection method is submitted by a qualified professional, and said alternative method is approved by the city.
E. Significant trees shall be retained as follows:
1. Significant trees located within any required Type I or II perimeter landscape area as set forth in BMC 12.18.080(C) and 12.18.110 which do not pose a significant safety hazard as determined by a qualified professional.
2. Within the R-C, R-L1, and R-L2 zoning classifications, at least 20 percent of the total in diameter inches of the significant trees located within the net buildable area of the subject property as described within BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040 shall be retained.
3. Within the R-M1 through R-M4 zoning classifications, at least 20 percent of the total diameter inches of the significant trees located within the net buildable area of the subject property as described within BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040 shall be retained; provided, tree retention may be satisfied by retaining at least 15 percent of the tree diameter inches in significant trees and up to five percent of the tree diameter inches in existing trees two to eight inches in diameter or installing new coniferous trees at least six feet in height or new deciduous trees at least one and one-half inches in diameter. Each new tree installed shall be counted as two diameter inches toward the minimum required amount of tree diameter inches. For example, five new installed trees would be credited as 10 diameter inches.
4. Within the R-AC, DC, DN, DT, and GDC zones where the city desires to create compact, walkable neighborhoods, an applicant shall be required to preserve 15 percent of the site diameter inches of trees on the subject property but may implement the following alternative tree retention practices:
a. Retain existing coniferous or deciduous (excluding alders and cottonwoods) trees that are between two and eight inches in diameter as credit toward the 15 percent minimum site diameter inches retention; or
b. Install new coniferous and/or deciduous trees of an indigenous species to the maximum extent feasible on the subject property consistent with the following replacement ratios:
(i) Replace one significant tree with one new coniferous tree a minimum of 20 feet in height at time of planting; or
(ii) Replace one significant tree with two new coniferous trees a minimum of 14 feet in height at time of planting; or
(iii) Replace one significant tree with one new deciduous tree of a minimum diameter of four inches at time of planting; or
(iv) Replace one significant tree with two new deciduous trees of a minimum diameter of two inches at time of planting.
5. The selection of which existing significant trees are to be retained shall be based upon the following objectives:
a. Provide continuous overstory tree canopies;
b. Preserve trees in groupings or mutually supporting groves;
c. Protect trees adjacent to critical area buffers;
d. Retain or enhance the “feathered edge” visual effect of ridgeline trees against the sky. The feathered edge is more completely described within the Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan Land Use Element and is depicted in Land Use Element Figure LU-5;
e. Retain those trees which a qualified professional has identified have the best chance of survival following development;
f. Retain trees which will be used as part of a low impact development storm water facility such as dispersion of surface water; and
g. Retain trees within an open space tract created as part of a clustered subdivision planned unit development pursuant to Chapter 12.30 BMC.
6. The community development director is authorized to allow the minimum percentage of retained diameter inches of existing significant trees on the subject property to be satisfied through the retention of existing trees (excluding alders and cottonwoods) that are two to eight inches in diameter and/or by installing new coniferous or deciduous trees of an indigenous species to the maximum extent feasible and meeting the minimum size provisions of BMC 12.18.140 only if, in consultation with the public works director, the community development director determines that retention of significant trees on the subject property is in conflict with the adopted infrastructure standards of the Bothell Municipal Code and the Bothell Design and Construction Standards. Trees that are two to eight inches in diameter that are proposed to be retained, consistent with this subsection, shall be identified, located, and evaluated pursuant to subsection D of this section.
7. The community development director is further authorized to require the applicant to implement minor site plan alterations to achieve the tree retention requirements identified within this chapter. In exercising the authority granted when implementing this requirement, the director shall avoid requiring site plan modifications that:
a. Require the relocation of a building or improvement more than 20 feet horizontally;
b. Affect the location of required sanitary sewer, water and other utility facilities;
c. Modify the construction and location of surface water facilities that are consistent with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards; and
d. Conflict with the location of access drives and streets as required by the Bothell Design and Construction Standards.
F. The community development director shall require a tree retention bond or other surety be submitted to the city of Bothell to ensure retention of existing trees and plant material during construction. In the event any trees designated by the city to be retained are removed, the city shall have the option of enforcing any bond posted. Each tree identified for retention shall be bonded pursuant to the following table. The applicant may request that the bond be waived for trees outside the project clearing area, such as those within critical areas and their buffers, and such requests shall not be reasonably denied.
Tree Diameter | Amount |
|---|---|
8 – 12 inches | $2,000 |
Larger than 12 – 16 inches | $4,000 |
Larger than 16 – 20 inches | $8,000 |
Larger than 20 – 24 inches | $12,000 |
Larger than 24 – 28 inches | $16,000 |
Larger than 28 inches | $20,000 |
G. In the event that existing significant trees or vegetation which are designated to be retained die or are damaged or removed as a result of development activity, or which removal has been authorized by the city, prior to issuance of occupancy permits, or release of any tree retention bonds required pursuant to subsection F of this section, a restoration plan shall be prepared and submitted to the city for review and approval. The plan shall provide for replacement of trees in the following manner:
1. Each such significant tree designated to be retained that is removed or damaged as a result of development activity shall be replaced with new deciduous and/or coniferous trees pursuant to the following:
a. Replacement tree species shall be indigenous species to the maximum extent feasible or may be another species as approved by the city.
b. Replacement coniferous trees shall be as follows:
(i) Two trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum of 20 feet in height at time of planting; or
(ii) Four trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum of 14 feet in height at time of planting.
c. Replacement deciduous trees shall be as follows:
(i) Two trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum diameter of four inches at time of planting; or
(ii) Four trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum diameter of two and one-half inches at time of planting.
2. At the discretion of the community development director, the applicant may propose, and the director may allow, the retention of existing coniferous or deciduous (excluding alders and cottonwoods) trees that are between two and eight inches in diameter as credit toward the minimum site diameter inches retention standard, provided the coniferous or deciduous trees are identified, located, and evaluated pursuant to subsection D of this section.
3. Shrubs and ground cover shall be replaced by a mixture of Type VI indigenous materials in all disturbed areas.
4. Any funds generated by revocation of bonds for tree retention shall be used to plant new trees in the city of Bothell. (Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2245 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2087 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Types of landscaping are as follows. In cases where two types are specified for one area, the more intensive landscape type shall be required.
Type | Purpose | Tree Planting | Shrubs/Ground Covers | LID Elements | Other |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
I | Type I landscaping is intended to provide a solid sight barrier to totally separate incompatible uses. Coniferous materials are selected to provide maximum year-round screening. | A planting strip with two offset rows of coniferous trees at an average spacing of 10 feet triangulated on-center. | Mixture of shrubs, ground covers and other plant material to provide 85 percent surface coverage within two years from planting. | Vegetation-based LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities are permitted within all landscaping types provided the location and plant materials do not detract from the primary purpose of the landscaping type. Drought tolerant and native vegetation shall be used to the maximum extent practicable. | Either earth berming at a minimum height of two and one-half feet or a six-foot-high sight-screening fence. |
II | Type II landscaping is intended to create a semi-sight-obscuring buffer between incompatible uses and against building facades. The majority of selected plant materials shall be coniferous to provide the intended buffering year-round. | A planting strip planted with trees, of which a maximum of 30 percent may be deciduous, at an average spacing of 20 feet on-center. | |||
III | Type III landscaping is intended to provide visual relief between incompatible uses and against building facades. A mixture of deciduous and coniferous plant material shall be provided using a minimum of coniferous material to provide visual relief on a year-round basis. | Planting strip planted with coniferous or a maximum of 75 percent deciduous trees at an average spacing of 25 feet on-center. | |||
IV | Type IV landscaping is intended to provide visual relief within parking areas and adjacent to building facades. Deciduous tree materials are selected to provide shade and clear sight-lines within parking areas. | At least one deciduous tree for each 150 square feet of landscaped area at an average spacing of 30 feet on-center. | |||
V | Type V landscaping is intended to provide visual relief and add to the overall quality of a development by softening the effect of the new building upon the landscape. | At least one evergreen or deciduous tree for each 500 square feet of landscaped area. | |||
VI | Type VI landscaping is intended to revegetate, restore, or enhance existing or damaged areas of native plantings. | A mixture of coniferous trees which shall range from one to six feet at installation. Deciduous trees shall range from “whips” to one and one- half-inch caliper at installation. | Native wetland plants shall be preferred for wetland areas. |
Figure 12.18-1 Type I Landscaping

Figure 12.18-2 Type II Landscaping

Figure 12.18-3 Type III Landscaping

Figure 12.18-4 Type IV Landscaping

Figure 12.18-5 Type V Landscaping

(Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Landscaping shall be installed within street rights-of-way abutting all subdivisions, multifamily residential and commercial developments. For the purposes of this section, “street right-of-way landscaping” shall be that landscaping installed within the right-of-way. Street right-of-way landscaping includes landscaping installed between the curb and sidewalk, within planter strips, landscaping behind sidewalks, and landscaping installed within medians. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way landscaping where feasible, as determined by city of Bothell design and construction standards, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved. Where a property has frontage on a street which is part of the Bothell boulevard system, the regulations in BMC 12.18.060 shall apply. Street rights-of-way landscaping shall be as follows:
A. Landscaping shall be installed between the curb and sidewalk within a planter strip, pursuant to the following table:
Street Classification | Trees | Shrubs and Ground Covers |
|---|---|---|
Local access street | One deciduous tree, at an average spacing of 30 feet on center. Trees to be selected from the list contained in BMC 12.18.140(G). | Turf grass of ground covers as approved by director |
Collector | Pursuant to Type IV standard | Pursuant to Type IV standard |
Arterial street | Pursuant to Type IV standard | Pursuant to Type IV standard |
Boulevard street | See BMC 12.18.060 | See BMC 12.18.060 |
B. Landscaping installed within the street right-of-way between the sidewalk and the front property line shall meet or exceed a Type IV landscape standard. Other portions of abutting street right-of-way which do not contain roadway, gutters, curbing, street furniture, sidewalks or walkways or other hard surfaces shall be landscaped in accordance with a Type IV standard. Individual single-family and duplex residences are exempt from the provisions of this subsection.
C. Landscaping installed within city-approved traffic medians, islands, or other landscape features installed within street rights-of-way shall meet a Type IV landscape standard. All deciduous and coniferous trees installed within traffic medians or islands shall be selected from the Bothell boulevard median tree list as contained under BMC 12.18.060.
D. All landscaping installed within the street right-of-way shall comply with the sight distance requirements as set forth in the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications.
E. Property owners shall be responsible for maintaining any landscaping within abutting public rights-of-way.
F. The landscaping requirements in this section may be modified by the director when their strict application could create conflicts with overhead or underground utilities, traffic control signs, or other structures or conditions within the right-of-way. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Properties which have street frontage along the Bothell boulevard system as set forth in the urban design element of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan shall install Type IV landscaping in a five- to 10-foot-wide planter along the street frontage placed between the sidewalk and vehicle travel lanes, except in more urbanized areas with on-street parking and/or street trees with grates area appropriate, and shall incorporate the street trees specified in the table below. The city of Bothell may determine that median planting islands shall be required as part of street planting for the Bothell boulevard system. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way landscaping where feasible, as determined by city of Bothell design and construction development standards, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved. Median designs shall be reviewed and approved by the department of public works.
Boulevard Name | Street Tree | Median Tree(s) |
|---|---|---|
Bothell Way NE SR 522 to NE 188th St. (Multiway Boulevard) | Consistent with Multiway Boulevard design | Consistent with Multiway Boulevard design |
Bothell Way NE/Bothell-Everett Highway (NE 188th to I-405) | Red Oak (Quercus rubra), Summit Ash (Fraxinus pennsylvanica ‘Summit’) | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’), Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’) |
SR-527/Bothell Everett Highway (I-405 to northern planning area boundary) | Sugar Maple (Acer saccharum), Apollo Sugar Maple (Acer saccharum ‘Barrett cole’) | Hornbeam (Carpinus betula), Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’) |
SR 522 in the downtown core (from NE 180th to 102nd Ave. NE) | Consistent with Crossroads design | Consistent with Crossroads design |
SR-522 (outside of the downtown core) | Sycamore Maple (Acer pseudoplatanus), Greencolumn Maple (Acer nigrum ‘Greencolumn’), planted in a less formal, more naturalistic pattern | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’), Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’), Columnar (Acer rubrum ‘Red sunset’), Hornbeam (Carpinus betula ‘Fastigiata’) |
Pontius/Meridian Avenue (228th St. SE to SR-522) | Zelkova Tree (Zelkova serrat ‘Village Green’), Musashino Zelkova (Zelkova serrata ‘musashino’) | Snowdrop Tree (Styrax japonica), Pyramidal Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Fastigiata’), Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Aristocrat’) |
228th Avenue (entirety) | American Sweet Gum (Liquidambar styraciflua) | Little-Leaf Linden (Tilia cordata), Pyramidal Hornbeam (Carpinus betulus pyramidalis) |
Filbert Maltby Road | Pin Oak (Quercus palustris), Tricolor Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Roseomarginata’) | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Aristrocrat’), Pyramidal ‘Dawyck’ Beech (Fagus sylvatica fastigiata) |
35th Avenue SE/39th Avenue SE/240th St SE | Silver Maple (Acer saccarinum), Princeton Sentry (Gingko biloba ‘Princeton sentry’) | Katsura (Ceridiphyllum japonicum), Sargent Cherry (Prunus sargentii ‘Columnaris’) |
120th Avenue NE (north of NE 195th) | Red Oak (Quercus rubra), Summit Ash (Fraxinus pennsylvanica ‘Summit’) | Mountain Ash (Sorbus aucuparia), Sargent Cherry (Prunus sargentii ‘Columnaris’) |
120th Avenue NE/NE 180th Street (south of NE 195th) | Norway Maple (Acer platanoides), Parkway Maple (Acer platanoides ‘Columnarbroad’) | Mountain Ash (Sorbus aucuparia), Pyramidal Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Fastigiata’), Pyramidal Hornbeam (Carpinus betulus pyramidalis) |
Beardslee Blvd./NE 195th St. | American Sweet Gum (Liquidambar styraciflua) | Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’), Hornbeam (Carpinus betulus) |
Waynita Drive NE/100th Avenue NE | Sycamore Maple (Acer pseudoplatanus), Apollo Sugar Maple (Acer saccharum ‘Barrett cole’) | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’), Snowdrop Tree (Styrax japonica) |
Woodinville Way NE/NE 160th Street (if and when annexed) | Scarlet Oak (Quercus coccinea), Dawyck Purple Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Dawyck purple’) | Columnar maple (Acer rubrum ‘Columnare’), Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Aristocrat’) |
B. Alternative species may be substituted; provided such species are demonstrated to have the same characteristics such as speed of growth, form, size, leaf texture and root spread. Departures from the required street tree species shall require the approval of the community development director. (Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Amended during 7/15 supplement.
All development adjacent to I-405 shall install a minimum 20-foot-wide Type II landscaping area along the entire property line abutting the freeway right-of-way. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way landscaping where feasible, as determined by city of Bothell design and construction standards, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The required front lot line landscaping and interior lot line landscaping as set forth in the table in subsection C of this section shall be entirely on the subject property. For the purposes of this section, “front lot line landscaping” shall be that landscaping installed on the subject property immediately adjacent to the front or street lot line. “Interior lot line landscaping” is that landscaping installed on the subject property adjacent to the interior or side and rear lot line.
A. The width of the landscaping may be averaged but in no case shall be less than five feet.
B. Where a building is proposed to be located on a property line abutting a street right-of-way, alternative landscaping shall be installed to soften the appearance of the building. Examples of such landscaping include window boxes, hanging planters, ivy, large potted plants, and trees and shrubs planted against the building wall.
C. Front lot line landscaping and interior lot line landscaping shall comply with the table below. The land uses below correspond to those listed in Chapter 12.06 BMC.
D. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way and interior lot landscaping, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved.
Land Use | Front Lot Line | Interior Lot Line |
|---|---|---|
Agriculture, in R-M4, OP, NB, CB, GC and LI only | IV/5 ft. | IV/5 ft. |
Automotive, marine and heavy equipment services | III/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Business and personal services | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Eating and drinking establishments, not including vendor carts | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Education | IV/10 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Essential public facilities – to be determined in conjunction with conditional use permit review | ||
Government services, general | IV/10 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage areas | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Health and social services | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Hospitals | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Lodging, temporary, excluding bed and breakfast guesthouses | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Campgrounds and recreational vehicle parks | III/10 ft. | III/10 ft. |
Manufacturing, distribution, storage and warehousing | II/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Exception: Outdoor storage yards | II/5 ft. | I/10 ft. |
Recreation, culture and entertainment | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Amusement parks | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Exception: Baseball, football, soccer and other sportsfields | IV/15 ft. | III/10 ft. |
Exception: Stadiums, not including stadiums for professional sports teams | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Residential uses, including only the following uses: | ||
Dormitories, fraternities and sororities | IV/5 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Manufactured home parks | See BMC 12.08.030 | See BMC 12.08.030 |
Multifamily dwelling units | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Nursing homes and specialized senior housing | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Retail uses | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Boat, equipment, manufactured or modular home, and motor vehicle sales or rental, new or used | III/10 ft. | II/5 ft. |
Transportation, including only parking facilities, transit park and ride lots and transit stations | IV/5 ft. | IV/5 ft. |
Utilities, including only the following uses: | ||
Electrical distribution substations, potable water storage facilities, storm water detention/retention facilities, and telecommunications switching facilities | II/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Telecommunications earth receiving stations and transmission/receiving/relay towers | I/10 ft. | I/10 ft. |
Uses not otherwise categorized, as follows: | ||
Cemeteries | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Off-site and on-site hazardous waste treatment and/or storage facilities | II/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
(Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000).
The following are minimum landscaping requirements relating to off-street parking areas for development other than single-family detached and two-family dwellings:
A. A five-foot-wide Type IV landscape strip around the outside perimeter of the parking area, except where required street frontage landscaping forms a portion of such perimeter.
B. If a parking lot contains at least 20 parking stalls, Type IV landscaping shall be installed as follows:
1. At least seven percent of the interior parking area shall be landscaped;
2. At least one interior landscape island for every 10 parking stalls shall be distributed throughout the parking lot;
3. At least one tree shall be provided in each landscape island peninsula;
4. A planting bed or landscape island peninsula shall be provided at the end of each parking row;
5. Landscaping shall not be installed so as to obstruct the view of or inhibit access to fire hydrants or other fire protection equipment;
6. All planting beds, landscape islands, and landscape peninsulas shall have a minimum dimension of five feet as measured from the interior of the curb;
7. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be used within parking lot landscaping where feasible. Where bioretention facilities are located within parking lot landscaping, curb inlets shall be provided consistent with the city of Bothell design and construction development standards.
C. Use of parking lot area for outdoor dining facilities shall not result in a net loss of required landscaping. Removal of landscaping shall be avoided whenever possible. Any landscaping approved for removal shall be replaced in kind elsewhere on site as approved by the director.
Fig. 12.18-6. Parking Area Landscaping

(Ord. 2397 § 3, 2023; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.080).
A. Landscaping shall be required around buildings to soften the visual impact of large expanses of walls as follows. Bioretention facilities are permitted within landscaping around buildings, provided such facilities are set back at least five feet from any structure:
1. Building walls less than 30 feet in height, Type IV landscaping at least five feet in width;
2. Building walls between 30 and 50 feet in height, Type III landscaping at least eight feet in width;
3. Building walls more than 50 feet in height, Type II landscaping at least 10 feet in width.
B. All garbage dumpsters and other refuse containers shall be obscured from view from adjacent streets and properties with a solid four-foot evergreen hedge or a fence or textured wall supplemented with plantings a minimum of three feet in width. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.090).
The following minimum landscaping standards shall be required of properties developing adjacent to a less intensive zoning classification. If a property’s use has multiple zoning designations (e.g., R-M4, OP, CB), the standards of the more intensive zone shall be utilized. Landscaping required by BMC 12.18.050 may be credited for requirements herein. Subarea regulations may require additional landscaping adjacent to a less intensive zoning classification, particularly where subarea-specific building height regulations or overlay districts are established. The use of LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities is encouraged within landscaping, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved.
Zoning Classification of Subject Property | Zoning Classification of Adjacent Property | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C – R-M3 | R-M4 – R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
R-C – R-M3 | - | ||||||
R-M4 – R-AC | II/10 ft | - | |||||
OP | II/10 ft | II/10 ft | - | ||||
NB | II/10 ft | II/10 ft | III/5 ft | - | |||
CB | I/10 ft | I/10 ft | II/5 ft | II/5 ft | - | ||
GC | I/15 ft | I/15 ft | II/10 ft | II/5 ft | III/5 ft | - | |
LI | I/20 ft | I/20 ft | I/10 ft | I/10 ft | II/10 ft | II/10 ft | - |
(Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.100).
Type V landscaping shall be installed in any area of a proposed development that is not covered with a building, vehicle circulation area or other improvement, or is not committed to and being used for some specific purpose. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.110).
A. A dimensioned landscaping plan showing existing and proposed landscaping, irrigation and utilities shall be submitted with the project application for any development except that for individual single-family dwellings and duplexes; the plan shall only address landscaping within the right-of-way, in accordance with BMC 12.18.050. These landscaping plans shall be prepared by a licensed landscape architect or Washington State Certified Nurseryman, except that this requirement shall not apply to individual single-family dwellings, or duplexes, or multiple-family commercial, or industrial projects proposing 2,000 square feet of landscaping or less over the entire development area. Plants shall be identified by botanical and common names, and by caliper (deciduous trees), height (shrubs or coniferous trees), or container size of plant material (ground covers).
B. Irrigation system plans shall be provided, to consist of the following, as may be determined necessary by the community development director based on the size, scale and location of the proposed project:
1. Adequate water pressure and spacing to serve all landscaped areas in non-single-family developments;
2. Moisture or precipitation sensors;
3. Automatic timers set for operation during periods of minimum evaporation and that assure adequate moisture levels;
4. Pressure regulating devices;
5. Backflow prevention devices;
6. Separate irrigation zones for turf and planting beds.
C. Utility plans shall identify the location and size of existing and proposed sewer, water and storm drains and other utilities, both above and below ground. Potential conflicts between landscaping and utilities shall be minimized or avoided.
D. The normal scale for landscape plans shall be one inch equals 20 feet. However, in large projects, the landscape plans shall be at the same scale as all other construction drawings with supplemental drawings at one inch equals 20 feet if necessary to provide sufficient detail. This determination shall be made by the community development director.
E. Final landscaping plans shall be submitted as part of the construction drawing package with one additional copy of the landscaping plan, except as other provisions of this title may require earlier submittal.
F. Final plans shall be approved by the community development director prior to project construction. Changes to approved plans must be approved by the community development director prior to changes being made. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.120).
A. The community development director shall adopt a list of plant materials which may be used to comply with the provisions of this chapter. A copy of this plant list will be available for inspection and copying in the department of community development during regular business hours.
B. The applicant may use plant materials on the adopted plant list or other plant materials as approved by the city. The city may require the applicant to modify the plant choice to:
1. Provide a desired diversity of species;
2. Make the plantings more in scale and compatible with the uses in the immediate vicinity of the subject property;
3. Provide plant materials which will fulfill buffering or landscaping purposes on a year-round basis;
4. Provide Pacific Northwest indigenous plant species, particularly drought resistant species that minimize water, maintenance, and fertilizer requirements.
C. Nonvegetative material shall not be considered a substitute for plant material. Bark, mulch, gravel, or other nonvegetative material shall only be used in conjunction with landscaping to assist vegetative growth, retain soil moisture, and assist in maintenance.
D. Plant sizes, excluding Type VI landscaping, shall be as follows:
1. Evergreen trees shall be a minimum height of six feet above finished grade, except that evergreen trees in Type I/II landscaping shall be a minimum height of 10 feet above finished grade.
2. Deciduous trees in street frontage landscaping, the Bothell boulevard system and Type II landscaping areas shall be at least two and one-half inches in diameter measured six inches above grade. All other deciduous trees shall be at least one and one-half inches in diameter measured six inches above grade. Where sight distance needs to be maintained, deciduous trees shall have a clear trunk area of at least eight feet above the ground.
3. All shrubs shall be at least 21 inches in height above finished grade and spaced at maximum three feet on center. Dwarf varieties or others approved by the department of community development may be installed at smaller heights and spacing. Varieties significantly larger than 21 inches in height may be installed at greater heights and spacing subject to approval by the community development director.
4. Ground cover spacing for one gallon plantings shall be 18 inches on center maximum or four-inch pots planted at maximum 12 inches on center.
5. Shrubs and ground cover shall provide an immediate surface coverage of at least 50 percent with an 85 percent coverage within two years.
E. Those developments where reduced landscaping is approved, pursuant to BMC 12.18.150, may be required to install street trees utilizing tree pits. Tree pits shall be a minimum of four feet by four feet depending on size potential of the tree.
F. All plant materials shall conform to the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
G. Street trees installed along residential local access streets shall be chosen from the following list:
Red Maple (Non-columnar) (Acer rubrum)
Norway Maple (Acer platanoides)
Redmond Linden (Tilia americana ‘Redmond’)
Zelkova (Zelkova serrata)
English Oak (Quercus robor)
White Oak (Quercus alba)
Katsura tree (Katsura japonica)
European Hornbeam (Non-columnar) (Carpinus betula)
Other trees as reviewed and approved by the community development director (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.130).
A. The applicant shall follow accepted nursery standards and practices in the planting and maintenance of vegetation required by this chapter.
B. All shrubs and trees used in the landscaping and screening of a zone or use shall be maintained in a healthy, natural growing condition.
C. With the exception of dead, diseased or damaged trees specifically retained to provide wildlife habitat, other dead, diseased, damaged or stolen shrubs or trees shall be replaced immediately, and the planting area shall be maintained reasonably free of weeds and trash in perpetuity.
D. Fertilizer and pesticides applications within shorelines areas shall comply with the Bothell shoreline master program. Elsewhere, care shall be exercised to prevent entry into creeks, wetlands and stormdrains.
E. The use of plant material requiring excessive pesticide applications to be kept healthy and attractive is discouraged. Pesticide applications shall be made only for the control of specific pests, using proper materials at a correct rate, applied at the proper time to obtain the desired results. All pesticide applications practices shall conform to federal and state regulations and be in accordance with the product labels. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.140).
The applicant may request and the community development director may grant a modification to the requirements of this chapter under one or more of the following circumstances:
A. The existing or finished grade of the subject property or adjoining property decreases or eliminates the need for the required landscaping;
B. The modification will be more beneficial to the adjoining property than the required landscaping by causing less impairment of view or sunlight;
C. It is reasonable to anticipate that the adjoining property will be rezoned in the near future to a zone which would require no buffer or a less intensive buffer, based on land use designations in the adopted Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan;
D. The modification is necessary to allow for maximum efficiency of an active or passive solar energy system on the subject property or a nearby adjoining property;
E. The required landscaping would substantially conflict with existing utility lines;
F. If required biofiltration swales are required and proposed within landscape areas; provided the intent for the required type of landscaping is met by meandering the swale or increasing the landscape buffer to accommodate both;
G. If there are unique or unusual existing site configurations or structures which preclude landscaping requirements, they may be transferred elsewhere on site;
H. If application of these landscaping standards would block transmission or reception of a telecommunications signal. (Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.150).
A. All landscaping and required irrigation shall be installed and shall pass inspection by the city prior to final occupancy. To accommodate temporary occupancy permits, the city may accept a performance bond or other monetary surety as approved by the city attorney in lieu of immediate installation for 120 percent of the labor and materials cost to install the approved landscaping and required irrigation.
B. A landscaping maintenance bond or other approved monetary security for 10 percent of the labor and materials cost to install the approved landscaping shall be submitted prior to occupancy or release of any landscaping performance security held by the city. The maintenance security shall be released in three years after completion of the landscaping if the landscaping has been maintained in a healthy, growing condition, and if any dead, dying, or missing plants have been replaced. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.160).
This chapter is intended to provide for recreation areas for residents of dwellings in the R-M3, R-M4 and R-AC zoning districts, to separate such areas from automobile oriented space, and to enhance the environmental quality of such districts, thus promoting the public health, safety, and welfare of the community. (Ord. 2445 § 8 (Exh. H), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Each development within an R-M3 or R-M4 zoning district shall provide a minimum area of 200 square feet of recreation area for each living unit in the development, including those units used by the owner or building management personnel; in the R-AC zoning district, the minimum area shall be 50 square feet for each living unit. Balconies shall not be counted as recreation area. No more than 50 percent of recreation area may be indoor or covered space; except that in the R-AC zone, 100 percent of the recreation area may be indoor or covered space.
Except in specialized senior housing developments and in the R-AC zone, at least 50 percent of the recreation area shall be outdoors and laid out in a manner that makes it suitable and safe as play space for children. Recreation areas shall be accessible to disabled persons, in accordance with Chapters 19.27 and 70.92 RCW. (Ord. 2445 § 8 (Exh. H), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
No more than 50 percent of the required area may be used for single-purpose facilities, such as swimming pools, tennis courts and similar facilities which may be available for recreational use by occupants of the development. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Where the total required recreation area is 3,000 square feet or less after subtracting area in indoor or covered space and single-purpose facilities, in accordance with BMC 12.20.020 and 12.20.030, the recreation area shall be one continuous parcel of land, except as otherwise provided in BMC 12.20.020 for the R-AC zone. Where the required recreation area totals more than 3,000 square feet, the area may be divided into several usable parcels on the site; provided, that at least one parcel is a minimum of 2,000 square feet in size and all the other parcels are at least 1,000 square feet in size with a minimum width of 15 feet.
B. No part of the recreation area may be used for driveway, parking or other vehicular use. A six-foot-high fence and 10-foot-wide Type II landscaping strip shall separate the recreation space from public streets, parking areas and driveways.
C. The square footage in any required front yard setback area shall not be used to meet the recreation area requirements. The square footage in any required side yard and rear yard setback areas may be used to meet the recreation area requirements if it satisfies the requirements of this chapter. The shape and layout of the area shall be subject to approval by the community development director. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Enforcement of this chapter shall take place in accordance with BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish sign regulations that are intended to:
A. Protect the general public health, safety, welfare, and aesthetics of the community.
B. Implement community design standards, consistent with the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan.
C. Promote the community’s appearance by regulating the number, design, character, location, type, quality of materials, scale, illumination, and maintenance of signs to maximize their positive visual impact.
D. Promote the effective identification of businesses while maintaining an attractive and inviting cityscape.
E. Promote signs that identify uses and premises without confusion and remain content-neutral.
F. Reduce possible traffic and safety hazards through good signage. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following definitions are listed in alphabetical order for the purpose of sign regulations, and shall apply to the administration of this chapter. In addition, except as otherwise provided in this section, those definitions as contained in Chapter 11.02 BMC are adopted and incorporated into this section by reference.
“Animated sign” is a sign which contains wind-, electronically, or mechanically operated moving parts or which flashes or simulates motion by the use of electric lights.
“Awning” or “canopy” means a covering structure projecting horizontally from and attached to a building, affording protection from the elements to persons or property thereunder.
“Awning/canopy sign” is a sign which is integrated into an awning/canopy and does not extend beyond the limits of the awning or canopy.
“Awning/canopy sign, under” is a sign which is suspended from an awning/canopy but does not extend beyond the horizontal limits of the awning/canopy.
“Banners” are temporary signs made of cloth, fabric, paper, nonrigid plastic or similar types of material and displayed from a building or structure.
“Bench sign” means any sign which is painted or affixed to any portion of a bench.
“Billboard” means a large fixed outdoor advertising sign with one or more structural supports. The approximate sizes of the billboard faces range from 12 to 14 feet in height and 24 to 48 feet in width.
“Changeable copy sign” means a sign designed to allow the changing of copy through manual, mechanical, or electrical means including time and temperature.
“Directional sign” is a sign that guides the public to a specific place or location.
“Externally illuminated sign” is a sign which is lighted by a source not concealed or contained within the sign. “Externally illuminated sign” means the same thing as “indirect illumination.”
“Fixed sign” is any sign attached or affixed to the ground or any structure in such a manner so as to provide for continuous display for an extended or indeterminable period of time. Fixed signs include, but are not limited to, freestanding signs and wall signs.
“Freestanding sign” means a sign which is supported by one or more uprights, braces, poles, or other structural components that is not attached to a building or buildings. Examples of freestanding signs include pole-mounted signs and monument signs.
“Front face of building” means the face of a building which is parallel to an abutting street or the length of the projection of the wall of a building facing obliquely toward an abutting street when such projection is made perpendicular to the centerline of the street.
“Governmental sign” is a sign posted and displayed by a governmental agency that is necessary to protect and regulate the public health and safety. Governmental signs include traffic signs, directional and informational signs for public health and safety facilities (such as hospitals, police stations, governmental offices, etc.) and public safety warning or hazard signs.
“Illegal sign” is a sign which was erected without first complying with all ordinances and regulations in effect at the time of its erection and use.
“Internally illuminated sign” is a sign with the light source concealed or contained within the sign. “Internally illuminated sign” means the same thing as “direct illumination.”
“Multiple building complex” is a group of structures housing at least one retail business, office, commercial venture, or independent and separate department of a business which shares the same lot, access and/or parking facilities or coordinated site plan.
“Multiple tenant building” is a single structure housing more than one retail, office, or commercial business.
“Mural” is a picture painted directly on a building or its appurtenances.
“Nonconforming sign” is a legally established sign which fails to conform to the requirements of this chapter.
“Off-premises sign” means any sign which relates to a good, product, service, place, thing, event, or meeting that is offered, sold, traded, provided, located or conducted at a location other than that upon which the sign is posted or displayed. Off-premises signs include, but are not limited to, billboards and other outdoor advertising structures that are related to a particular location or premises other than that upon which the sign is posted or displayed.
“On-premises sign” means any sign which advertises or relates to a good, product, service, place, thing, event, or meeting that is lawfully offered, sold, traded, provided, located, or conducted at the location or premises upon which the sign is posted or displayed. On-premises signs also include signs not related to any particular location or premises, such as signs displaying religious, charitable, cultural, governmental, informational, political, educational or artistic messages that are intentionally displayed by the owner of the property or premises upon which the sign is displayed.
“Permanent sign” is a fixed or portable sign intended for continuous use or intermittent display for periods exceeding 60 days in any calendar year.
“Portable sign” means any sign which is readily capable of being moved or removed, whether attached or affixed to the ground or any structure, that is designed, constructed and typically intended for temporary display. Portable signs include, but are not limited to:
A. Signs posted or displayed upon a movable chassis or support with or without wheels;
B. A-frame signs;
C. Wooden, metal, or plastic “stake” or “yard” signs;
D. Posters or banners affixed to windows, railings, overhangs, trees, hedges, or other structures or vegetation;
E. Signs mounted on vehicles parked and visible from the public right-of-way, except signs mounted upon vehicles that are being primarily used for normal day-to-day transportation purposes and not primarily for advertising or display purposes and except for signs advertising for sale the vehicle upon which the sign is posted;
F. Searchlights;
G. Inflatables.
“Projecting sign” is any sign attached or affixed to a building or wall in such a manner that its leading edge extends more than 12 inches beyond the surface of the building or wall.
“Sign” is a communication device, structure, or fixture which incorporates graphics, symbols, or written copy for the purpose of conveying a particular message to public observers.
“Sign area.” The following shall apply for the purpose of defining sign area for various types of signs:
A. Freestanding signs of six feet in height or less/wall/projecting signs: the entire face of a sign, excluding any framing, projections, molding, or support structures.
B. Freestanding signs of greater than six feet in height/window/awning signs: the area defined by the smallest rectangle enclosing all lettering and any associated graphics and/or symbols.
C. Individual channel-type letters mounted on a building shall be measured by the area enclosed by the smallest rectangle outlining each word.
“Sign height” is the vertical distance from the city-approved finish grade to the uppermost element of the entire sign structure including any base or foundation, as illustrated below.

Fig. 12.22.020-1.
“Temporary sign” is an allowed portable sign intended for short-term use, not to exceed 60 days in a calendar year.
“Wall sign” is a sign attached to a wall or facade with its face parallel to the wall and projecting no more than one foot.
“Window sign” is any copy that is applied or attached to a window. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2282 § 6, 2019; Ord. 2101 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following table specifies the major categories of signs addressed by this chapter, gives examples of signs within each category, and specifies the applicable chapter section for those signs regulated within each category.
Sign and Display Category (applicable code section) | Example | Residential Zones | Residential – Activity Center, Business and Commercial Zones (R-AC, NB, CB, GC, OP and LI) |
|---|---|---|---|
Exempt Signs (BMC 12.22.040) | Traffic signs, legal and public notices, etc. Signs which because of their regulatory or public safety nature are exempt from the requirements of this chapter. Certain sizes of temporary signs. | Exempt. | Exempt. |
Temporary On-Premises Signs | A-frames, banners, posters, informational, political, decorative freestanding, wall, and portable signs for short-term display. | Banner signs require registration. Prohibited in residential zones. | Allowed, subject to sign size, height, design, and placement regulations. No sign permit required for exempt signs. Banner signs require sign registration. |
Permanent On-Premises Signs | Freestanding, wall, window, and portable signs intended for long-term display. | Subject to maximum signage limitations in residential zones. | Allowed, subject to sign size, height, design, and placement regulations. Sign permit required in commercial zones. |
Temporary Off-Premises Signs | Informational, political, decorative, and real estate signs displayed off site. | Allowed, subject to sign size, height, design, and placement regulations. No sign permit required for exempt signs. | |
Permanent Off-Premises Signs | Freestanding, wall, window, and portable signs located off site. | Prohibited. | Prohibited. |
(Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following signs are exempt from regulation under this title:
A. Off-premises governmental signs posted in accordance with BMC 12.22.070.
B. Signs required by law such as official legal notices.
C. Traffic control or directional signs posted on premises by private persons, which do not exceed six square feet in area and which contain only copy or symbols necessary to provide for reasonable traffic control and direction upon the premises. Such signs include, but are not limited to, “no parking,” “entrance,” “exit” and other similar informational and directional signs.
D. Signs or displays not visible from the public right-of-way.
E. Flags. Patriotic, governmental, institutional or corporate flags; provided, that each flag does not exceed 50 square feet.
F. “No Trespassing,” “No Dumping,” “No Parking,” “Private,” “Entrance,” “Exit” and other on-premises informational warning and directional signs which do not exceed two square feet in area.
G. Seasonal decorations within the public holiday season, or civic or festival season. Such displays shall be removed at the end of the season.
H. Sculptures, fountains, benches, lighting, mosaics, murals and other urban design elements.
I. Postal signs.
J. Gravestones.
K. Memorial signs, historic site markers or plaques recognized by the city council.
L. Address numbers not exceeding 12 inches in height.
M. Temporary signs with a sign area no greater than three square feet in area per side and no more than four feet in height that remain for less than 90 days in a one-year period. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2145 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following signs are prohibited:
A. Signs which interfere with the view of traffic signs, signals or devices, and approaching or merging traffic;
B. Animated Signs. No sign shall be animated, revolve or rotate either mechanically or by illumination except the movement of the hands of a clock, electronic message displays and barber poles;
C. Signs which are significantly distracting to vehicle operators, such as those containing flashing, moving or intermittent lights, or signs with a concentrated light source or reflecting frames or surface(s) of such intensity or glare that it may create a safety hazard to motorists or pedestrians;
D. Signs erected, maintained, or painted upon trees, rocks, or other natural features;
E. Signs which are structurally unsafe, or improperly maintained, or otherwise in violation of the Uniform Building Code and other Bothell ordinances;
F. Signs on utility poles as prohibited by RCW 70.54.100;
G. Pennants; permanent banners; streamers; strings of ribbon, tinsel, small flags, pinwheels, twirlers, propellers, and flashing or blinking lights; flares; balloons; and devices of a similar carnival character;
H. Portable permanent signs, with the exception of A-frame signs as allowed by BMC 12.22.060(B) and (C);
I. Portable temporary signs of the following types:
1. Signs posted or displayed upon a movable chassis or support, with or without wheels;
2. Posters;
3. Signs mounted upon vehicles as specified in subsection E of the definition for portable signs, BMC 12.22.020;
4. Searchlights;
5. Inflatables;
J. Signs which by reason of their size, location, movement, content, shape, coloring or manner of illumination obscure, imitate, or may be confused with lawfully posted governmental signs such as traffic control signs, signals, or devices;
K. Billboards. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following tables specify the permitted number, size and location of signs by zoning category:
A. Residential Zones – On-Premises Sign Requirements.
Use | Permitted Sign Type(s) and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width |
|---|---|---|---|
Residential uses and permitted and licensed activities1 occurring in a single-family residential structure. | One wall sign (on-premises real estate signs may also be freestanding). | Two square feet (on-premises real estate signs may be up to six square feet in area). | Wall – No sign shall project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Permitted and licensed activities1 occurring in a multifamily residential structure.3 | One wall sign (on-premises real estate signs may also be freestanding). | Two square feet (on-premises real estate signs may be up to six square feet in area). | Wall – No sign shall project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Schools, churches, and other permitted and licensed activities1 not occurring in a single-family or multifamily residential structure. | One wall and one freestanding sign per street frontage. | Wall – 36 square feet. Freestanding – 36 square feet. | Wall – No sign shall project above the uppermost extent of wall. Freestanding – six feet in height or 10 feet in width.4 |
Neighborhood, subdivision, multifamily complex and manufactured home park identification signs.2 | One freestanding sign per entrance. | 50 square feet. | Freestanding – six feet in height or 10 feet in width. |
1Permitted activities in these zones are specified in Chapter 12.06 BMC. Examples of some of these activities include home day care centers and home occupation businesses.
2Includes approved short and formal plats (subdivisions), approved multifamily developments of two or more dwelling units, and approved manufactured home parks.
3Potential users of such signs should note that the use of such signs may also be at the discretion of the property owner.
4Uses located on property containing at least 660 lineal feet of street frontage may erect a freestanding sign up to 15 feet tall. Other dimensional requirements as specified above shall still apply. No structural support poles or braces shall be visible (“pole signs” are prohibited) and the overall appearance of the sign shall be as a uniformly integrated whole. For the purposes of this section, lineal feet shall apply to a single street frontage only. Corner lots shall not count both street frontages towards the total.
Other: Only indirect illumination of signs permitted.
B. R-AC, NB, CB, OP, GC, and LI Zones – On-Premises Sign Requirements for a Single Use (One Business or Tenant) on an Individual Lot.
Use | Permitted Sign Type(s) and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width |
|---|---|---|---|
Advertisement and identification of permitted uses.4 | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: No maximum number.1 | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: Total area of all signs shall not exceed two square feet of sign area per lineal foot of front face of building containing a public entrance.1 A minimum of 36 square feet of sign area is permitted. | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: Shall not project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Freestanding: One sign per street frontage for individual uses located on a single lot. | Freestanding: Maximum of 50 square feet. | Freestanding: six feet in height or 10 feet in width.3 | |
Portable A-frame: One sign per property street frontage.2 | Portable A-frame: Maximum six square feet. | Portable A-frame: three feet in height or width. |
1There is no limit to the number of wall/window/projecting/awning signs a use may have, nor is there any particular locational requirement (though they must be located on the building where the use is occurring). The total maximum sign area may be applied to one sign, or be divided among several signs.
2A-frame signs shall be subject to the following criteria:
1Each legal business shall be permitted one A-frame sign per street frontage on which the business is located. The maximum size of an A-frame sign shall be six square feet in area and 36 inches in height or width.
2A-frame signs shall be located on the same lot on which the business being advertised by the sign is located. For the purposes of this section, the lot shall be considered to include the sidewalk abutting the business.
3A-frame signs shall be placed so as to not impede pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
4A-frame signs shall not be placed in any landscaped area.
3Uses located on property containing at least 330 lineal feet of street frontage may erect a freestanding sign up to 15 feet tall. Other dimensional requirements as specified above shall still apply. No structural support poles or braces shall be visible (“pole signs” are prohibited) and the overall appearance of the sign shall be as a uniformly integrated whole.
4If a property containing a single use changes such that two or more uses occupy the property, the sign regulations in subsection C of this section shall apply.
Other: Either indirect or internal illumination of signs is permitted.
C. R-AC, NB, CB, OP, GC and LI Zones – On-Premises Sign Requirements for Two or More Uses (Businesses or Tenants) Located on an Individual Lot, or an Aggregation of Lots into One Retail or Commercial Center.
Use | Permitted Sign Type(s) and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width |
|---|---|---|---|
Advertisement and identification of permitted uses. | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: No limit, subject to maximum allowable sign area.4 | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: two square feet of sign area per each lineal foot of the width of tenant’s space within the front face of the building.2 A minimum of 36 square feet of sign area is permitted. | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: Shall not project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Freestanding: One sign per each 150 lineal feet of property street frontage.1 | Freestanding: Maximum of 50 square feet. | Freestanding: six feet in height and 10 feet in width.3 | |
5Portable A-frame: One sign per property street frontage. | 5Portable A-frame: Maximum six square feet. | 5Portable A-frame: three feet in height or width. |
1Freestanding signs may be used both to identify a multitenant center and/or to identify individual tenants within a center, at the property owner’s discretion.
2A tenant whose business is located on more than one floor of a building shall be permitted sign area based upon the width of the tenant’s space within the building face of each occupied floor.
3For uses located on property containing at least 330 lineal feet of street frontage, one of the allowed freestanding signs may be up to 15 feet in height. Other dimensional requirements as specified above shall still apply. No structural support poles or braces shall be visible.
4The total maximum sign area may be applied to one sign, or be divided among several signs.
5A-frame signs shall be subject to the following criteria:
1Each legal business shall be permitted one A-frame sign per street frontage on which the business is located. The maximum size of an A-frame sign shall be six square feet in area and 36 inches in height or width.
2A-frame signs shall be located on the same lot on which the business being advertised by the sign is located. For the purposes of this section, the lot shall be considered to include the sidewalk abutting the business.
3A-frame signs shall be placed so as to not impede pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
4A-frame signs shall not be placed in any landscaped area.
Other: Either indirect or internal illumination of signs is permitted.
D. Other Requirements Applicable to All Zones.
1. In multiple use zones, the number of signs permitted and the location, maximum sign area, and permitted illumination shall be based upon the zoning designation of the actual use proposed (e.g., signs for a proposed multifamily complex within the R-M4, OP zone shall be regulated per the R-C through R-M4 zone restrictions).
2. In multiple building complexes, each building is permitted one additional 10-square-foot wall sign for building identification purposes.
E. Landscaping Requirements for Freestanding Signs.
1. Pole-mounted signs shall be landscaped around the base of the sign with shrubs and groundcovers, or other plant materials, such that, within a period of two years from planting, the pole support(s) of the sign shall effectively be obscured by the landscape plantings.
2. Monument signs shall be landscaped around the base of the sign with groundcovers or other plant materials sufficient to provide at least 85 percent ground coverage around the base of the sign within a period of two years from planting.
F. Setbacks. There are no specific setback requirements for on-premises signs; provided, that no sign shall intrude into the sight distance triangle and line of sight, as depicted in plan No. 316 of the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1994 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1879 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Permanent, off-premises signs are prohibited throughout the city (all zones), with the exception of governmental signs. The director of community development shall control the size, design, number and location of said signs. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 2373 § 10, 2022; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Banner signs require registration with the city in accordance with the registration procedures contained in BMC 12.22.125.
A. Residential Zones (R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, R-M2, R-M3, R-M4). Temporary signs located on-premises are subject to the following criteria:
Permitted Sign Type and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height |
|---|---|---|
One wall or freestanding sign per property street frontage. | Five square feet for wall or freestanding. | Wall – shall not project above the uppermost extent of the wall. Freestanding – six feet. |
B. Residential – Activity Center and Commercial Zones (R-AC, NB, CB, GC, OP, and LI). Temporary signs located on-premises are allowed, subject to the following criteria:
Permitted Sign Type and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width/Other |
|---|---|---|
One wall, window or banner sign per property street frontage. One banner per building. | Wall, window: 50 square feet. Banner: 50 square feet. | Wall – shall not project above the uppermost extent of the wall. Banner – shall not project above the uppermost extent of the wall on which it is located. Shall be wholly located upon the building on which it is displayed. Shall be registered with the city. |
(Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A. Temporary off-premises signs shall be prohibited, except as specifically provided in BMC 12.22.090.
B. All temporary off-premises signs relating to a specific meeting, event, or occurrence shall be removed within 10 days following the conclusion of the meeting, event, or occurrence to which they relate.
C. Only portable freestanding signs may be used as temporary off-premises signage.
D. The maximum number of allowed off-premises signs to be displayed simultaneously shall be four.
E. Temporary off-premises signs shall be constructed of suitable material and designed to adequately withstand the reasonably expected normal or average weather conditions during the intended display period of the sign.
F. Temporary off-premises signs shall be regularly inspected to ensure that they have not been damaged or destroyed by natural forces or vandalism. Damaged or destroyed signs shall be immediately removed or repaired so as to avoid threats to public health and safety or the accumulation of unclaimed refuse upon the public rights-of-way.
G. All temporary off-premises signs shall be posted and displayed in accordance with the following regulations:
1. Temporary off-premises signs may be posted in any portion of the public rights-of-way including areas landscaped with lawns. Temporary off-premises signs in the public rights-of-way are allowed only between the property line and the back edge of the nearest sidewalk, or where no sidewalk exists, between the property line and a line five feet away from the nearest edge of the roadway pavement. Approval of the abutting owner is recommended. Signs on stakes that can be manually pushed or hammered into the ground are allowed. All other signs are prohibited, unless specifically allowed by a street use permit;
2. Temporary off-premises signs may not be posted within areas of the public rights-of-way landscaped with trees, shrubs, or other large plant materials;
3. Temporary off-premises signs may not be posted in any portion of the public right-of-way typically used by motor vehicles in a lawful manner;
4. Temporary off-premises signs shall be posted so as to not impede pedestrian, bicycle or handicapped travel or access;
5. Temporary off-premises signs shall be posted in accordance with the requirements contained in the city’s adopted design and construction standards and specifications pertaining to driveway and intersection sight triangles and line of sight (drawing No. 316).
H. Any temporary, off-premises sign posted in the public right-of-way in violation of the regulations set forth in this section, or with the dimensional standards set forth in BMC 12.22.060 and 12.22.080, constitute a trespass upon public property and are declared to be a public nuisance. Such signs shall be subject to immediate abatement by removal and confiscation. The city shall dispose of all confiscated signs as follows:
1. If of apparent negligible value, the city may immediately destroy and/or permanently dispose of such signs.
2. If of apparent significant value, the city shall retain such signs for a period of not less than 30 days, after which time such signs shall be presumed abandoned under the provisions of RCW Title 63, unless claimed by their owner, and shall be disposed of in any lawful manner.
3. In the event a confiscated sign is claimed by its owner prior to final disposition by the city, the owner shall be liable to the city for all normal and reasonable costs and expenses incurred in the confiscation and storage of such signs. The city shall collect such costs from the owner prior to returning possession of the sign. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2015 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Temporary signs located off-premises are prohibited in all residential and commercial zones of the city. Temporary off-premises signs shall be posted in accordance with the general regulations for temporary off-premises signs contained in BMC 12.22.088. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Approval of a master sign plan shall be an option for retail, commercial, business park and industrial developments containing more than one tenant or business. The purpose of the master sign plan option is to simplify the sign permit process for multitenant/business developments. The master sign plan process allows all signs within a multitenant/business development to be reviewed and approved concurrently, thereby eliminating the need for individual sign permit applications for individual tenants/businesses. The following criteria shall apply:
A. Application for approval of a master sign plan shall be made and processed concurrently with the project application to construct the associated development, except that existing multitenant or multibusiness developments desiring to achieve conformance with this code shall be permitted to apply for a master sign plan retroactively. Submittal requirements shall be as per BMC 12.22.130.
B. Review of signs contained within the master sign plan shall consist of sign location, size, type, number, height, setback, and illumination, in accordance with the requirements contained within this chapter and within any applicable subarea sign regulations.
C. Approval of a master sign plan shall constitute approval for all individual signs contained within said plan with regards to the elements specified in BMC 12.22.140. No further review by the city for consistency with these elements shall be required. In order to document consistency with the approved master sign plan, individual tenants/businesses shall file with the city one copy of the appropriate sign plans for all signs within the approved master sign plan applicable to that tenant/business. Submittal requirements shall be per BMC 12.22.130.
D. A master sign plan is a Type I permit and shall be processed as such pursuant to BMC Title 11.
E. Minor revisions to an approved master sign plan may be granted by the director; provided, that no variation from the requirements of this chapter and any applicable subarea sign regulations are made. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A sign permit is a Type I action and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. No sign shall be erected, re-erected, attached, structurally altered, or relocated by any person, firm or corporation from and after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this section without a sign permit issued by the city. The director shall issue all sign permits. No permit is required for the repair, cleaning, repainting or other normal maintenance, nor for changing the message of a sign on a sign designed for changeable copy, as long as the sign structure is not modified in any way. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
An application for a sign permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application shall contain, at a minimum:
A. Submittal Requirements for All Signs. One set of folded sign design plans showing the following. All plans must be drawn to scale and dimensioned accurately. Indicate existing and proposed signs.
1. A diagram, plan or illustration clearly depicting the sign dimensions and design and indicating the color(s) of the proposed sign(s), materials to be used and lighting (if any) to be utilized;
2. Necessary building or lot dimensions as required to calculate allowable sign area.
B. Submittal Requirements for Freestanding, Wall-Mounted and Projecting Signs. In addition to the above sign design plan, two sets of construction plans showing the listed items below are required for submittal. All plans must be drawn to scale and dimensioned accurately.
1. Freestanding.
a. Plot plan clearly indicating the location of the proposed sign relative to existing buildings and other structures and to streets/rights-of-way and property lines;
b. Foundation plan;
c. Anchoring/mounting system; and
d. Manufacturing specifications.
2. Wall-Mounted.
a. Location of sign on building;
b. Anchoring/mounting system; and
c. Manufacturing specifications.
3. Projecting.
a. Height above sidewalk;
b. Distance from curb;
c. Anchoring/mounting system; and
d. Manufacturing specifications.
C. Per RCW 18.27.110, signs requiring a building permit shall require that any contractor required by law to be registered with the state, provide verification and evidence of such registration at the time of permit issuance. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A. Banner signs are allowed as a form of temporary signage; provided, that the signs are registered with the city in accordance with the following registration process:
1. The person seeking to display the sign shall notify the city either in person, by telephone, in writing via fax, the mail or electronically via the Internet, of their intent to display the sign and shall provide the city with the location of the sign and the dates of display, subject to the criteria contained in BMC 12.22.080.
2. The city shall maintain a log of registered signs that is available for viewing by the public upon request.
B. Any displayed banner sign that is not registered with the city shall be removed until such time that it is registered. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003).
A. A permitted sign shall present a finished appearance on all visible sides. There shall be no unfinished back side consisting of visible braces or other support structures.
B. No more than two sides are allowed per sign.
C. For the purpose of determining number of signs, a sign shall be considered to be a single display surface or display device containing elements organized, related, and composed to form a unit. Where independent elements are displayed in a random manner without organized relationship of elements, or where there is reasonable doubt about the relationship of elements, each element shall be considered to be a single sign.
D. The Uniform Sign Code, 1976 Edition, of the International Conference of Building Officials as adopted by Ordinance No. 873 of the city and any subsequent amendments to said ordinance are made a part of this chapter and shall also serve to regulate the construction of signs in the city. In the case of disagreement or contradiction between the zoning requirements and the Uniform Sign Code, the more restrictive provisions shall prevail.
E. There are no specific setback requirements for signs, but no sign shall be located within the sight distance triangle and line of sight, as determined according to drawing No. 316 of the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications.
F. Structural Requirements. The structure and erection of signs within the city shall be governed by the adopted Uniform Sign Code and Uniform Building Code (or any superseding edition adopted by the city, including appendices), as promulgated by the International Conference of Building Officials, which are adopted and made a part hereof by this reference. Compliance with the Uniform Sign Code and Uniform Building Code shall be a prerequisite to issuance of a sign permit under BMC 12.22.120.
G. Electrical Requirements. Electrical requirements for signs within the city shall be governed by the adopted National Electrical Code (or any superseding edition adopted by the city, including appendices), promulgated by the National Fire Protection Association, which is adopted and made a part hereof by this reference. Compliance with the Uniform Sign Code and Uniform Building Code shall be a prerequisite to issuance of a sign permit under BMC 12.22.120.
H. Sign Illumination. Illumination from or upon any sign shall be shaded, shielded, directed or reduced so as to avoid undue brightness, glare, or reflection of light on private or public property in the surrounding area, and so as to avoid unreasonable distraction to pedestrians or motorists. In no case shall any illuminated sign be in violation of the standards set forth in BMC 8.64.030, Exterior lighting.
I. Sign Maintenance. All signs, including signs heretofore installed, shall be constantly maintained in a state of security, safety and repair. If any sign is found not to be so maintained or is insecurely fastened or otherwise dangerous, it shall be the duty of the owner and/or occupant of the premises on which the sign is fastened to repair or remove the sign upon receiving notice from the director. The premises surrounding a freestanding sign shall be free and clear of rubbish and any landscaping area free of weeds.
J. Sign Obstructing View or Passage. No sign shall be located so as to physically obstruct any door, window or exit from a building. No sign shall be located that is hazardous to vehicular ingress, egress or that impedes the sight distance triangle or line of sight as determined according to drawing No. 316 of the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications.
K. Sign Inspection. All sign users shall permit the periodic inspection of their signs by the city upon city staff request.
L. Conflicting Provisions. Whenever two provisions of this code overlap or conflict with regard to size or placement of a sign, the more restrictive provision with regards to number, maximum height and sign area shall apply. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A. A legal, nonconforming sign existing on the effective date of this sign code shall be allowed to continue in existence without abatement provided all of the following criteria are met:
1. The sign was lawfully constructed, erected, posted or displayed in full compliance with all development regulations and standards then in effect; and
2. The sign does not present a threat to the public health and safety.
B. Any legal, nonconforming sign shall immediately be brought into compliance with the applicable provisions of this sign code upon any of the following events:
1. Any change in the use classification of the primary building or structure to which the sign advertises or relates, as determined by reference to the most current version of the Uniform Building Code as adopted by reference by the city of Bothell.
2. Any significant modification or repair to the structure, frame, or support of the nonconforming sign. For purposes of this section, “significant modification or repair” shall mean modification or repair that exceeds 50 percent of the fair market value of the sign.
3. Any relocation or replacement of a nonconforming sign.
C. A legal, nonconforming sign shall not be expanded or enlarged to any degree without bringing the sign into conformance with the provisions of this sign code.
D. Where the use of a legal nonconforming sign is abandoned or discontinued for a continuous period of 180 days, such sign shall lose its nonconforming status and shall be immediately removed or brought into compliance with the provisions of this sign code. For on-premises signs, a nonconforming sign shall be considered to be abandoned or discontinued upon the close, expiration, or termination of the location or activity to which the sign relates. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The hearing body may approve or approve with modification the application for a variance from the provisions of the sign code if:
A. The applicant is unable to obtain signage consistent with this chapter due to special circumstances or conditions related to the size, topography, location, or other physical characteristics of the premises, and that such special circumstances or conditions are not the direct result of the actions or omissions of the applicant. For purposes of this section, such special circumstances may include the proximity of the premises to any state highway, but shall not include proximity to local streets and roads;
B. The variance will not constitute a grant of a special privilege inconsistent with the limitation upon signage and other uses of other properties in the vicinity and zone in which the property, on behalf of which the application was filed, is located;
C. That the granting of such variance will not be materially detrimental to the public welfare or injurious to the property or improvements in the vicinity and in the zone in which the subject property is situated; and
D. Signs that are on, or are being considered for, nomination to any local, state, or national Register of Historic Places, or have, or are being considered for, local landmark status. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the legal status of nonconforming uses, buildings, other site improvements, and development densities by creating provisions through which such nonconformities may be established, maintained, altered, reconstructed, expanded or abated. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All nonconformities shall be subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. The provisions of this chapter do not supersede or relieve a property owner from compliance with:
1. The requirements of the Uniform Building and Fire Codes; or
2. The provisions of this code beyond the specific nonconformance addressed by this chapter. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Any use, building, other site condition (e.g. density or floor area ratio) or improvement (e.g., landscaping, parking or signage), or development density shall be considered legally nonconforming if:
1. It was legally established prior to the effective date of this title or amendments thereto; and
2. One of the following is applicable:
a. The use is now prohibited or cannot meet use limitations applicable to the zone in which it is located; or
b. The building or other site condition or improvement does not comply with the floor area ratio, dimensions, landscaping, parking, sign, design or other standards of this title; or
c. The development does not comply with the minimum density standards for this title.
B. A change in the required permit review process shall not create a nonconformity.
C. Any nonconformity that is brought into conformance for any period of time shall forfeit status as a nonconformity, except as specified in BMC 12.26.040. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
If, at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title or any amendment thereto, a lawful use of land exists that is made no longer permissible under the terms of this title or amendments thereto, such use may be continued as a legal nonconforming use so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following conditions:
A. No nonconforming use shall be intensified, enlarged, increased or extended to occupy a greater area of land than was occupied on the effective date of the zoning code or amendment that made the use no longer permissible.
B. No nonconforming use shall be moved in whole or in part to any other portion of the lot which contains the nonconforming use.
C. If any nonconforming use of land ceases for any reason for a period of one year over a three-year period, any subsequent use of such land shall conform to the regulations specified by this title for the zone in which such land is located. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
If, at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title or any amendment thereto, a lawful building or other improvement exists which is made no longer permissible under the terms of this title or amendment(s) thereto, such building or other site improvement may be continued as legal nonconforming so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following conditions:
A. No alteration or change is permitted which increases the nonconformity.
B. Nonconforming buildings that propose an increase in useable floor area are exempt from complying with the floor area ratio required at the time of the proposed increase.
C. Upkeep, repairs and maintenance of a legal nonconforming building or other improvement shall be permitted. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 9, 2021; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
If, at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title or any amendment thereto, a lot is developed at a residential density which is no longer permissible under the terms of this title or amendment thereto, the density may be continued as legal nonconforming so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following conditions:
A. Any proposed change in density is exempt from complying with the minimum required residential density at the time of the proposed change.
B. Buildings and other site improvements on such a lot are subject to a separate determination under BMC 12.26.030 as to their conformity to this code. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
A. This section only applies to nonconformities to this title.
B. A legal nonconforming building or other site improvement may be maintained, repaired, renovated or structurally altered provided the nonconformity is not increased.
C. All expansion or extension of nonconforming buildings or other site improvements shall be consistent with all other provisions of this code.
D. A nonconforming building or other site improvement destroyed by fire or acts of nature may be repaired or reconstructed to the same or smaller nonconformity that existed at the time of destruction; provided, that:
1. The repair or reconstruction does not increase the previous nonconformity;
2. The building permit application for repair or reconstruction is submitted within 12 months of the occurrence of damage;
3. Landscaping fully complies with the requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC.
E. Should such building or other site improvement be moved for any reason for any distance whatever, it shall thereafter conform to the regulations for the zone in which it is located. (Ord. 2461 § 3 (Exh. C), 2025; Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In any zone in which single-family dwellings are permitted, notwithstanding limitations imposed by other provisions of this title, a single-family dwelling may be erected on any single lot of record.
A. A lot of record is defined by utilizing the following criteria:
1. A lot created via the subdivision process of Chapter 58.17 RCW;
2. A lot which has a conveyance of record prior to November 5, 1951;
3. Any lot which was a legal lot under the regulations or standards of King or Snohomish County prior to annexation or incorporation into the city of Bothell; and
4. A building site under Ordinance No. 156 of the city.
B. The proponent or applicant for any permit application involving a nonconforming lot shall be required to provide information and documentation demonstrating consistency with this section.
C. Variance of area width and yard setback requirements shall be obtained only through the variance process as outlined under Chapter 12.36 BMC. (Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Any use, building, other site improvement, or developed density which cannot be established as a legal nonconformity shall be deemed illegal and be subject to abatement by removal or conformance with this title or amendments thereto in accordance with procedures set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application, and criteria for approval for conditional use permits. Conditional use permits are required for land uses which are appropriate in a zone but typically have certain characteristics such as traffic generation or building mass which warrant imposition of special conditions to ensure compatibility with permitted uses in the zone. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A conditional use permit is a Type III action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such permits as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
An application for a conditional use permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application shall contain:
A. Completed application form and attachments signed and dated by owner/agent.
B. Complete legal description of the subject property.
C. Site plan depicting proposed and existing improvements on the property. The site plan shall contain the following information:
1. Dimensions and shape of the lot, and street names;
2. Location and dimensions of existing and proposed building including setbacks;
3. Circulation. Adjacent street improvements, curb cut locations for ingress and egress, parking layout in accordance with Chapter 12.16 BMC;
4. Existing and proposed landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
5. Existing watercourses, critical areas, utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, structures, rockeries, and other manufactured or natural features restricting use of the subject property;
6. Preliminary grading plan depicting proposed and existing grades at five-foot contours if grading is proposed in conjunction with proposed use; and
7. Storm drainage, sidewalks, and exterior lighting.
D. An analysis detailing how the proposal is consistent with the criteria for approval as contained in BMC 12.28.040.
E. Ten copies of all plans. All oversized plans shall be folded to eight and one-half inches by 11 inches.
F. One paper reduction of each oversized plan to 11 by 17 inches.
G. Necessary information for review of environmental impacts, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment.
H. Application fee and environmental trust.
I. Applications found to contain material errors shall not be deemed complete until such material errors are corrected.
J. The community development director may waive specific submittal requirements determined to be unnecessary for review of the application. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A conditional use permit shall be granted by the city, only if the applicant demonstrates that:
A. The granting of the conditional use permit will not:
1. Adversely affect the established character of the surrounding vicinity. For the purposes of this section, character shall mean the distinctive features or attributes of buildings and site design on adjacent properties and in the vicinity and as articulated in the comprehensive plan, including but not limited to building facade, length, building modulation, building height, roof form, tree cover, types of flora, location of landscaping, size and location of signs, setbacks, amount and location of parking, fencing type, height and location, and the like;
2. Be detrimental to the public health, safety and general welfare; and
3. Be injurious to the property or improvements adjacent to, and in the vicinity of, the site upon which the proposed use is to be located.
B. The granting of the proposed conditional use permit is consistent and compatible with the goals and policies of the comprehensive plan, and any code, ordinance, regulation or standard in effect to implement the plan.
C. The proposed use is properly located in relation to other land uses, transportation and public facilities and services in the vicinity; and further, that the capacity of the transportation system and other public facilities and services will adequately serve the proposed use without placing an undue burden on such systems, facilities and services.
D. The intensity (i.e., the nature, types and hours of human activity) and character of the proposed use is compatible with the intensity and character of the uses of adjacent property and of property in the vicinity.
E. That the site is of sufficient size to accommodate the proposed use; and further that, in the opinion of the city, all yards, open spaces, landscaping, walls and fences, parking, loading, and other necessary features are properly provided to assure the proposed use will be compatible with adjacent uses and the character of the vicinity.
F. The proposed use will not introduce hazardous conditions at the site that cannot be mitigated so as to protect adjacent properties, the vicinity, and the public health, safety and welfare of the community from such hazards.
G. The conditions necessary to mitigate the impacts of the proposed conditional use are capable of reasonable monitoring and reasonable enforcement. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The city may impose any condition of approval on a conditional use permit needed to mitigate adverse impacts to the environment, adjacent properties or the community, consistent with the goals and policies of the comprehensive plan, and any code, ordinance, regulation or standard in effect to implement the plan. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A minor modification to an approved CUP is a Type I action and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and in accordance with the provisions of this section. Minor modifications to an approved CUP shall be defined as those which do not increase the intensity of the use and the resulting impacts to the surrounding area.
A. The community development director is authorized to allow minor modifications in accordance with subsection B of this section. The community development director shall allow only such minor modifications as are consistent with guidelines established in subsection B of this section.
B. For the purposes of this section, “minor modification” means a departure from the conditions of an approved CUP which is consistent with the following criteria:
1. It does not in any way change the use permitted by the approved CUP;
2. It maintains the design intent and quality of the original approval;
3. The number of dwelling units in residential developments and the square footage of nonresidential structures shall not involve more than a 10 percent increase of that established by the approved CUP;
4. The minor modification shall not relocate a building, parking area, street or other use or built feature in such a way that visual, light, noise, vibration or other impacts as experienced from surrounding properties and public rights-of-way are intensified, and shall not reduce any required yard, setback, buffer or open space below the area or dimensions established by code or conditions of CUP approval, whichever is more restrictive;
5. The height of buildings and other structures shall not increase;
6. Traffic volumes shall not increase more than 10 percent of that established by the approved CUP;
7. Modifications to internal circulation layout are acceptable; provided, that ingress and egress points to the subject property are not modified in such a way that external traffic patterns are affected or impacts increased;
8. Minor changes to plant species, variety, color, etc., may be made; provided, that the type of landscaping required pursuant to BMC 12.18.040 shall not be modified;
9. The adjustment does not add significant new environmental impacts or significantly increase environmental impacts disclosed in the original SEPA documents;
10. The community development director determines that the change will not increase any adverse impacts or undesirable effects of the project, or that the change in no way significantly alters the project. (Ord. 2252 § 8, 2018; Ord. 2046 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010).
A complete application of all required construction level permits shall have been submitted to the city for approval within five years of the date of conditional use permit approval; except that for conditional use permits approved through December 31, 2011, a complete application of all required construction level permits shall have been submitted to the city for approval within seven years of the date of conditional use permit approval. (Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002).
The purpose of this chapter is to provide for the modification of certain regulations when it can be demonstrated that such modification would result in a development which, except as expressly authorized by this chapter, would not increase the density and intensity of land use beyond that which would be allowed if no regulations were modified, would preserve or create features or facilities of benefit to the community such as but not limited to green development practices, open space or active recreational facilities, which features or facilities would not have been provided if no regulations were modified, would be compatible with surrounding development, and would conform to the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. Throughout this title, “PUD” shall mean the same as “planned unit development.” (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Five types of planned unit developments are established. A PUD may comprise all or any combination of the below types:
1. Standard single-family PUDs, comprising detached dwelling units on individual lots; the necessary streets and other public and/or private rights-of-way to serve such dwelling units; and any appurtenant common open space, recreational facilities or other areas or facilities. A single-family PUD requires the approval of a subdivision consistent with the procedures set forth in the Bothell subdivision ordinance, codified in BMC Title 15.
2. Non-single-family PUDs, comprising attached dwelling units, detached dwelling units not on individual lots, retail, office, service or industrial buildings, or any combination thereof, the necessary streets and other public and/or private rights-of-way to serve such uses, and any appurtenant common open space, recreational facilities or other areas or facilities.
3. Green PUDs, comprising single-family and non-single-family developments incorporating site development and building design, construction and operating features and practices which, compared to standard development features and practices, lessen impacts to native plants and animals, reduce consumption of raw materials, lower greenhouse gas emissions, provide healthier living and working environments, and otherwise decrease human impacts on local and global ecosystems. Green PUDs which comprise detached single-family residences require approval of a subdivision consistent with the procedures set forth in the Bothell subdivision ordinance, codified in BMC Title 15. In order to be considered a green PUD, a proposed development must include design and features that achieve at least the minimum certification level identified below under one of the following programs or other certification program as approved by the community development director:
a. For site development:
(1) The United States Green Building Council (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Neighborhood Design at the Gold level or higher;
(2) The International Code Council (ICC) and National Home Builders Association (NHBA) National Green Building Standard (NGBS) at either the Green Subdivision Four Star or higher level or the Lot Design, Preparation and Development Gold level or higher;
(3) The Master Builders Association (MBA) Built Green, at the Three Star level or higher;
(4) The Pacific Rivers Council Salmon Safe, at the Salmon Safe Certification level.
b. For building design:
(1) The United States Green Building Council (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) at the Silver or higher level;
(2) The International Code Council (ICC) and National Home Builders Association (NHBA) National Green Building Standard (NGBS) at the Silver or higher level for building design; and
(3) The Master Builders Association (MBA) Built Green, at the Three Star level or higher.
4. Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea clustering PUDs, comprising clustered subdivisions within the Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea consistent with Chapter 12.52 BMC.
5. City-wide clustered subdivision PUDs, which may include detached or attached residential developments on individual lots where the development preserves open space. A clustered subdivision PUD requires the approval of a subdivision consistent with BMC Title 15.
B. Planned unit developments may be located within any zoning classification.
C. Uses permitted within the PUD shall be governed by the use regulations of the underlying zoning classification as provided for within Chapter 12.06 BMC or any subarea regulations governing permitted and conditional uses, including special overlay zoning classifications, except as expressly modified by this chapter. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In considering a proposed planned unit development project, the approval thereof may involve modifications in the site development regulations, requirements and standards of this title, Zoning, and BMC Title 17, Transportation, as identified within this chapter. In modifying such regulations, requirements and standards as they may apply to a planned unit development project, the limitations set forth in this section shall apply to all PUDs. In order to be granted any such modifications, the applicant shall demonstrate that the proposed development complies with the purpose of this chapter as stated in BMC 12.30.010. The applicant shall bear the burden of supporting any change in requirements. The city may increase any requirement necessary to make the project conform to the purposes of this chapter.
A. Front Yard Setbacks. The requirements for minimum front yard setbacks for the zone in which the planned unit development is located shall apply to all exterior boundary lines of the site.
B. Distance between Buildings. The requirements for minimum side and rear yard setbacks may be modified; provided, that minimum distances required by the International Building Code and Fire Code shall be met.
C. Building Height. Building height and any corresponding setback requirements related to building height shall be governed by the requirements of the underlying zoning classification as set forth in Chapter 12.14 BMC or any applicable subarea regulation.
D. Minimum density and minimum floor area ratios in designated zones and/or activity centers shall be governed by the requirements of the applicable zones or subarea regulations wherein the development is located and shall not be modified. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 10, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.210).
Standard single-family PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to those limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030; provided, however, that within the Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea the clustering provisions of BMC 12.52.040 shall control regarding the minimum lot size, common open space areas, and the number of lots allowed:
A. The minimum lot size as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC may be reduced by up to 15 percent; provided, that an area(s), not including a critical area or its buffer or storm water conveyance or storage facility, equal to the combined reduction in lot area is set aside in a manner that creates a public benefit that would not exist if the minimum lot size were not modified. Set asides may include one or more of the following:
1. Common useable open space comprising landscaping and facilities such as but not limited to play areas, trails, gazebos, covered shelters, picnic tables and benches;
2. Areas containing significant trees as defined in Chapter 12.18 BMC;
3. Other noncritical areas, the preservation or creation of which promotes one or more goals and/or policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan;
B. The number of lots in a standard single-family PUD shall not exceed the number of lots which could be obtained if no regulations were modified;
C. Required side and rear yard setbacks may be reduced; provided, that minimum distances required by the International Building Code and Fire Code shall be met. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.220).
Non-single-family PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to those limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030:
A. When a non-single-family PUD proposes attached dwelling units and the subject property(s) contains different zoning classifications that have different dwelling unit per acre amounts, the total number of dwelling units allowed within the PUD may be determined by calculating the number of dwelling units allowed within each zoning classification portion of the PUD and adding the allowed dwelling units together creating a total number of allowed dwelling units, except as may be modified under BMC 12.30.070.
B. The number of units arrived at by the method identified above may be located anywhere within the planned unit development, subject to the PUD approval process set forth in this chapter. (Ord. 2282 § 7, 2019; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.230).
Green PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to those limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030, 12.30.040 and 12.30.050:
A. In single-family green PUDs, the minimum lot size as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC may be reduced by up to 30 percent; provided, that an area(s), not including a critical area or its buffer or a non-low-impact-development storm water conveyance or storage facility, equal to the combined reduction in lot area, is set aside for one or more of the following:
1. Common useable open space comprising landscaping and facilities such as but not limited to play areas, trails, gazebos, covered shelters, picnic tables and benches;
2. Permanently dedicated open space tracts containing intact, rehabilitated or restored forest areas as described within Chapter 11.02 BMC;
3. Special storm water conveyance or storage facilities consistent with low impact development practices and standards as promulgated within the Bothell Design and Construction Standards;
4. Other noncritical areas, the preservation or creation of which promotes one or more goals and/or policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan.
B. The number of lots in a single-family green PUD shall not exceed the number of lots which could be obtained if no regulations were modified.
C. The minimum lot circle diameter as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC may be reduced by up to 30 percent.
D. Within self-contained developments, the minimum front yard setback as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC for individual lots may be reduced up to 50 percent, except for garages and carports; this permissive modification shall not apply to the front yard setback from all exterior boundary lines of the site required under BMC 12.30.030(A).
E. Required side and rear yard setbacks may be reduced; provided, that minimum distances required by the International Building Code and Fire Code shall be met.
F. Recreation area requirements as set forth in Chapter 12.20 BMC may be varied as follows:
1. The minimum recreation area required in BMC 12.20.020 may be modified by the hearing body when trails and viewing platforms or facilities of a similar nature are provided within or adjacent to retained forest areas;
2. Single-purpose facilities may account for up to 80 percent of the required recreation area;
3. Location, layout and dimensions of required recreation areas in BMC 12.20.040 may be varied to accommodate the use of trails and other linear facilities located within forest retention areas.
G. The hearing body may grant modifications to the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications as adopted in BMC 17.02.010 as conditions of approval of a green PUD in accordance with the following:
1. Public street width standards may be reduced pursuant to the following:
a. Public streets classified by the city as public local access streets (ADT less than 500) may be constructed as two-lane, two-way, 20-foot-wide clear, drivable surface constructed of a standard paving material; provided, that on-street parking is prohibited on both sides of the street and announced with appropriate signage.
b. Should on-street parking on one side of the street be desired, a six-foot-wide parking area will be added to the 20-foot-wide drivable surface for a total width of 26 feet. The six-foot-wide parking area may be constructed of a pervious material as approved by the public works director.
c. Should on-street parking on both sides of the street be desired, a six-foot-wide parking area shall be added to both sides of the 20-foot-wide drivable surface for a total width of 32 feet. The six-foot-wide parking area may be constructed of a pervious material as approved by the public works director.
d. Local access streets (ADT less than 500) may be constructed as one-way looped road sections in accordance with recommendations from the public works director and the city fire marshal.
e. Guest parking must be provided when on-street parking is not constructed. One guest parking stall shall be provided for every four dwelling units. All guest parking will be clearly identified with signage and striping.
2. Private street and fire department access drives may be reduced to the following:
a. Local access private streets and access drives (ADT less than 500) may be constructed as 16-foot-wide clear, drivable surfaces constructed of standard pavement materials, with an additional three-foot pervious material shoulder capable of supporting the imposed weight of a fire apparatus on each side; provided, that on-street parking is prohibited on both sides of the street and announced with appropriate signage.
b. Guest parking must be provided when on-street parking is not constructed. One guest parking stall shall be provided for every four dwelling units. All guest parking will be clearly identified with signage and striping.
3. Roadway materials standards may be varied according to the following:
a. Pervious pavement may be allowed on road shoulders subject to specific standards established by the public works department to ensure serviceability and durability.
b. Pervious pavement on emergency vehicle turnouts and traveled ways may be allowed on a case-by-case basis by the public works director in consultation with the fire marshal based on specific plans and information regarding roadway serviceability and durability.
4. Cul-de-sac and turn-around dimensions may be varied to provide a hammerhead type of design to reduce impervious surface and may be constructed of pervious pavement pursuant to the LID Supplement to the Bothell Design and Construction Standards.
5. Pedestrian facility placement, design, and materials standards may be varied according to the following:
a. A sidewalk or trail may be allowed on one side of public or private streets or roads and driveways if the following criteria are met:
(1) The sidewalk is not designated as a primary pedestrian access route to schools;
(2) The sidewalk does not serve more than 100 dwelling units as the single point of pedestrian access between the residential unit and other elements of the pedestrian circulation system;
(3) Marked crosswalks are provided to allow pedestrians to safely cross the street to the pedestrian facility at safe locations.
b. Pedestrian facilities may utilize pervious pavement subject to specific standards to ensure serviceability and durability.
6. Parking lot standards may be varied to allow pervious pavement throughout the parking lot, provided drive aisles are capable of supporting the weight of fire apparatus. Pervious pavement shall be required on all portions of the parking lot other than the drive aisle when soil conditions warrant. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009. Formerly 12.30.240).
Clustered subdivision and attached residential PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to the applicable limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030, 12.30.040 and 12.30.050:
A. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the minimum lot area as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC within the R-L1, R-L2, and R-M1 zoning classifications may be reduced up to 50 percent.
B. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the minimum lot area as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC within the R-C zoning classification may be reduced up to 60 percent.
C. The number of lots in a clustered subdivision PUD shall be subject to the following lot yield methodology:
1. The net buildable area of the development site shall be determined pursuant to BMC 12.14.030(B)(3) wherein land area in dedicated public rights-of-way, surface storm water retention/detention/water quality facilities located within required tracts, critical areas, critical area buffers, or any other land dedicated to the city shall be deducted from the gross site area;
2. To determine the number of allowed lots upon the subject property, the net buildable area shall be divided by the underlying zoning classification’s minimum lot area thereby deriving the number of allowed lots using whole numbers only. Rounding up is not permitted;
3. Portions of the net buildable area placed into a dedicated open space tract pursuant to subsection G of this section shall be credited toward the allowed lot yield calculation; and
4. An increase in the number of allowed lots for clustered subdivisions PUDs shall be permitted consistent with subsection (H) of this section.
D. For attached residential PUDs, the number of dwelling units within the R-M2, R-M3, and R-M4 zones shall be subject to BMC 12.14.030(B)(3) and the following:
1. Portions of the net buildable area placed into a dedicated open space tract pursuant to subsection G of this section shall be credited toward the allowed unit yield calculation; and
2. An increase in the number of allowed dwelling units for attached residential PUDs shall be permitted consistent with subsection (G)(1)(d) of this section.
E. Side and Rear Yard Setbacks. Side and rear yard setbacks may be modified consistent with BMC 12.30.030(B).
F. Hard Surface Cover. The maximum hard surface cover for each residential lot within a clustered subdivision PUD may be increased consistent with the schedule below; provided, however, that the maximum amount of hard surface coverage shall be no greater than that established for the underlying zoning classification as applied to the net buildable area of the development site:
1. R-C Zone. No increase in hard surface coverage is allowed;
2. R-L1 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 55 percent up to a maximum of 65 percent;
3. R-L2. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 60 percent up to a maximum of 65 percent;
4. R-M1 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 70 percent up to a maximum of 75 percent; and
5. R-M2 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 75 percent up to a maximum of 80 percent; and
6. R-M3 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 80 percent up to a maximum of 85 percent.
G. Open Space Preservation. Clustered subdivision and attached residential PUDs shall reserve a portion of the site as dedicated, permanent open space not available for future development consistent with the following criteria:
1. Amount and Minimum Dimension of Land to Be Preserved.
a. All clustered subdivision PUDs shall provide for a minimum of 10 percent of the net buildable area of the site to be placed within a dedicated tract or tracts containing intact forest, rehabilitated or restored forest, a forest equivalent surface water facility, as defined herein, a tree preservation, or another type of passive open space tract to be preserved in perpetuity consistent with the provisions of subsection (G)(3) of this section;
b. Land preserved under this section shall meet the following dimensional standards:
(1) All open space tracts for clustered subdivision PUDs shall provide an average horizontal dimension equal to 50 percent of the underlying zoning minimum lot circle diameter with a minimum horizontal dimension of 20 feet;
(2) All open space tracts for clustered subdivision PUDs shall cover an area that is at least 50 percent of the minimum lot area of the underlying zoning classification;
(3) All open space tracts for attached residential PUDs shall provide an average horizontal dimension of at least 25 feet with a minimum dimension of 15 feet; and
(4) All open space tracts for attached residential PUDs shall cover an area that is at least equal to the underlying zoning classification minimum land area per dwelling unit;
c. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the city may approve an increase in the number of lots beyond the number established by the allowed lot yield method of subsection C of this section provided additional land is placed within a dedicated tract containing intact forest, rehabilitated or restored forest, forest equivalent surface water facility as defined herein, a tree preservation, or other type of passive open space, which tract is to be preserved in perpetuity consistent with the provisions of subsections (G)(2) and (G)(3) of this section, consistent with the following schedule:
(1) Preserving at least 15 percent of the net buildable area as open space tract consistent with this section, an increase of 10 percent of the calculated lot yield; or
(2) Preserving at least 20 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 15 percent of the calculated lot yield; or
(3) Preserving at least 25 percent of the net buildable area with an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 20 percent of the calculated lot yield; or
(4) Preserving at least 30 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 25 percent of the calculated lot yield;
d. For attached residential PUDs, the city may approve an increase in the number of dwelling units beyond the number established by BMC 12.14.030(B)(3) provided additional land, not including recreation area as required under Chapter 12.20 BMC, is placed within a dedicated tract consistent with subsections (G)(2) and (G)(3) of this section, and the following schedule:
(1) Preserving at least 20 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 10 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield; or
(2) Preserving at least 25 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 15 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield; or
(3) Preserving at least 30 percent of the net buildable area with an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 20 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield; or
(4) Preserving at least 40 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 25 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield.
2. Type of Land to Be Preserved as Open Space. The type of open space shall be based upon the following hierarchical preferences. Applicants shall demonstrate that all reasonable efforts have been made to design the development in a manner that preserves the types of lands listed herein consistent with these hierarchical priorities:
a. Intact forest areas as defined within Chapter 11.02 BMC;
b. Rehabilitated or restored forest areas as defined within Chapter 11.02 BMC;
c. Lands containing existing trees preserved pursuant to Chapter 12.18 BMC;
d. Lands adjacent to critical area buffers which are also enhanced pursuant to Chapter 14.04 BMC;
e. Lands used for forest equivalent surface water facilities, provided such facilities shall be limited to bio-infiltration or surface water dispersion into forest lands;
f. Lands used for passive recreational open space purposes may contain trails, picnic tables, benches, and open lawn areas; provided, that existing significant trees shall not be removed to create open lawn areas and/or other passive recreational uses. Up to 20 percent of the passive recreational open space area may be used for active recreation uses such as playgrounds, tot lots, sports courts, playfields, shelters, gazebos, and other active recreation open space uses.
All passive and active recreational open space areas shall be accessible to residents of the development via dedicated access tracts or easements that are at least 10 feet in width; and
g. Lands used for passive open space purposes containing trails, picnic tables, benches, and other passive recreational uses, provided such areas are accessible to residents of the development via access tracts or easements that are at least 10 feet in width.
3. All lands preserved as open space shall be placed into a separate and permanent open space tract as follows:
a. All open space tracts shall be recorded on all documents of title of record for all affected lots.
b. Open space tracts shall be designated on the face of the plat or recorded drawing in a form as approved by the city attorney and shall be placed within an individual tract. The designation shall include the following restrictions:
(1) The stated purpose of the open space tract shall be clearly indicated. For example, if the open space tract is adjacent to a critical area, the tract shall stipulate the purpose is to prevent harm to the environment, including, but not limited to, controlling surface water runoff and erosion, buffering, protecting plants, fish, and animal habitat, etc. If the purpose is to preserve existing mature trees and other plant materials, the tract shall stipulate that trees may not be removed except as needed to protect the health, safety and welfare of adjacent residential structures as reviewed and authorized by the city of Bothell; and
(2) The right of the city to enforce the terms of the restriction.
c. The city may require that the open space tract be held for its stated purpose in an undivided interest by each owner of a building lot within the development with the ownership interest passing with the ownership of the lot, or held by an incorporated homeowners’ association or other legal entity (such as a land trust or authorized entity, which ensures the ownership, maintenance, and protection of the tract).
d. Statements shall be included which provide that the open space tract shall not be subject to future development or alteration except for maintenance of the tract for its intended purpose or for other common activities associated with the purpose of the tract.
H. Clustered subdivision PUDs within the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, and R-M2 zones may allow attached residential developments such as townhouses or other types of attached residential development, provided the dwelling unit is contained within its own individual lot, subject to the following additional requirements:
1. At least 40 percent of the net buildable area is preserved within a permanent open space tract as described in subsections (G)(2) and (G)(3) of this section;
2. All buildings containing three or more dwelling units shall be set back from the perimeter of the development as described within BMC 12.30.030(A) a minimum of 30 feet and shall install a Type III landscape buffer. Should the development contain both attached and detached residential buildings, the portion of the site that contains detached residential buildings may apply the 20-foot perimeter setback dimension of BMC 12.30.030(A);
3. Attached residential buildings shall comply with the requirements of BMC 12.14.200, Exterior building design – Multiple-family residential; and
4. Increases in the lot yield for attached residential dwelling units as established under subsection C of this section shall be limited to a maximum of a 20 percent increase in lot or dwelling unit yield.
I. Clustered subdivision and attached residential PUDs are eligible for modifications to the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications as adopted in BMC 17.02.010 in accordance with the same modifications available for a green PUD as described within BMC 12.30.060(G). (Ord. 2457 § 4 (Exh. D), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2282 § 8, 2019; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017).
Each PUD shall require preliminary and final approval. Both preliminary and final PUD approvals are Type II actions and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations.
The preliminary development plan and the final development plan may be combined and together processed through review as a final development plan. In addition, the applicant may file a concurrent subdivision or short subdivision application, in accordance with the procedures as set forth in BMC Title 15, Subdivisions, which application(s) shall be processed concurrently with the PUD application(s). (Ord. 2348 § 7, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.070).
A. Development of a PUD project may be phased, in which case each complete phase may be processed separately through both preliminary development plan review and final development plan review. A map showing all property owned or controlled by the developer which is contiguous to the development site or which is within the area determined by the community development director to be relevant for comprehensive planning and environmental assessment purposes, together with a conceptual plan of said properties’ eventual development through all potential phases, shall be submitted with the application for the first phase. The developer is not responsible for providing a conceptual plan for contiguous or nearby property which is not owned or controlled by the developer. The conceptual plan shall conform to the purposes of this chapter and shall be used by the city to review all phases of the development. All phases of the development shall conform to the conceptual plan, all conditions of approval, and applicable regulations.
B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this section, all phased PUD projects shall comply with the provisions of this chapter and any subarea regulation. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.080).
A. The applicant shall file with the community development department a preliminary development plan, including the following:
1. A legal description of the property proposed to be developed;
2. A map of the subject property and surrounding area determined by the community development director to be relevant for comprehensive planning, environmental assessment or zoning review purposes, which map shall depict comprehensive plan designations, zoning classifications and existing land uses, including streets;
3. A proposed site plan for the subject property depicting the following:
a. Topography at two-foot contours for slopes 15 percent or less and five-foot contours for slopes over 15 percent;
b. Individual trees over eight inches in trunk diameter measured four feet above the base of the trunk in areas to be developed or otherwise disturbed;
c. Designated placement, location, and principal dimensions of lots, buildings, streets, parking areas, recreation areas and other open space, landscaping areas and utilities;
d. If the developer owns or otherwise controls property adjacent to the proposed development, a conceptual plan for such property demonstrating that it can be developed in a compatible manner with the proposed development;
4. A conceptual landscape plan showing existing and proposed landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
5. Drawing and/or text showing scale, bulk and architectural character of proposed structures;
6. For standard single-family PUDs, a conceptual drawing depicting the number and location of lots which would be allowed if no regulations were modified;
7. For green PUDs, a narrative and illustrations describing and depicting the specific green or sustainable features or practices proposed and how these features or practices achieve the purposes as set forth in BMC 12.30.020(A)(3), 12.30.110(F), and the following submittal items:
a. Identification of which green program the applicant is proposing to implement;
b. Documentation showing the applicant is either currently enrolled or is a member of the identified green program or that members of the development team are enrolled or are members of the identified green program;
c. The name of the green program verifier, or verification team; and
d. A completed checklist from the selected green program wherein the applicant identifies the features and techniques that will be used to achieve the minimum certification level;
8. For clustered subdivision PUDs, a conceptual drawing and narrative describing the type, location, size, and features of the proposed open space area(s);
9. Special features including but not limited to critical areas and sites or structures of historic significance;
10. A text describing conditions or features which cannot be adequately displayed on maps or drawings;
11. A narrative stating how the proposed development complies with the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, including level of service standards and guidelines, and with the development regulations contained in this and other titles;
12. Draft conditions, covenants and restrictions and other documents relating to operation and maintenance of the development, including all of its open areas and recreational facilities;
13. Other information required by the community development director, or by any other section of the Bothell Municipal Code. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.090).
Preliminary PUD approval shall be granted by the city only if the applicant demonstrates that:
A. The proposed project shall not be detrimental to present and potential surrounding land use.
B. Land surrounding the proposed development can be planned in coordination with the proposed development and can be developed so as to be mutually compatible.
C. Streets and sidewalks, existing and proposed, are suitable and adequate to carry anticipated vehicular and pedestrian traffic within the proposed project and in the vicinity of the proposed project, in light of the transportation provisions and concurrency standards of BMC Title 17 and the comprehensive plan.
D. Services including potable water, sanitary sewer and storm drainage are available or can be provided by the development prior to occupancy so as to comply with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and BMC Title 18, Utilities Infrastructure, and guidelines contained in the comprehensive plan.
E. Each phase of the proposed development, as it is planned to be completed, contains the required parking spaces, recreation spaces, landscape and utility areas necessary for creating and sustaining a desirable and stable environment.
F. In the case of green PUDs, the proposed site development and building designs include features, improvements and facilities that would achieve at least the minimum certification specified under BMC 12.30.020 under the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Standard, National Green Building Standard, the Built Green Standard, the Salmon Safe Standard, or other certification program as approved by the community development director.
G. The project conforms with the purposes and standards prescribed in this chapter.
H. The project conforms to the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, and any applicable subarea plan that has been adopted by the city.
I. If a subdivision application is being processed concurrently, conformance with the requirements of BMC Title 15. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.100).
A. A proposed minor change to an approved preliminary PUD is a Type I action and shall be incorporated into the application for final PUD approval, and any notification regarding such final PUD approval shall describe the proposed minor change(s). A “minor change” means any departure from the conditions of preliminary approval which is not a “major change” and includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Revisions to number of dwelling units in a structure;
2. Revisions to number of nonresidential structures;
3. Revisions to heights of structures;
4. Revisions to location of internal roads;
5. Revisions similar in nature to those above as determined by the community development director.
B. A proposed major change to an approved preliminary PUD shall require reapplication for preliminary PUD approval which is a Type II action, as set forth in BMC 12.30.080 and this section, and any notification regarding such preliminary PUD approval shall describe the proposed major change or changes. A major change is any departure from the conditions of preliminary PUD approval which would result in any of the following:
1. Revisions to the approved design concept;
2. Revisions to the approved use(s);
3. An increase or decrease in the number of residential dwelling units;
4. An increase or decrease in square footage of nonresidential structures;
5. A decrease in the amount of landscaping and site perimeter buffering;
6. A decrease in the amount or hierarchical preference of any proposed open space pursuant to BMC 12.30.070; and
7. An increase in traffic volumes or change in circulation patterns which impacts surrounding development. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2348 § 30, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.110).
For good cause shown, the city council, in its discretion, may grant an extension of time of one year for filing the final PUD application, and may grant additional one-year extensions; provided, however, the city shall have the right to re-examine and update any conditions made to mitigate development impact. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.120).
A. In the event the final PUD application is not filed within 12 months following approval of a preliminary PUD, except as provided in BMC 12.30.130 or as noted in subsection B of this section, the approval of the preliminary PUD shall lapse and the approval shall be deemed null and void and without force or effect; except that for preliminary PUDs approved through December 31, 2011, the final PUD shall be filed within 36 months following approval of a preliminary PUD or shall lapse and be deemed null and void and without force or effect.
B. When it is determined as part of the preliminary PUD approval that the final PUD is to be phased, the final PUD for the first phase shall be submitted within 12 months of preliminary approval; except that the final PUD for the first phase of a PUD receiving preliminary approval through December 31, 2011, shall be submitted within 36 months of preliminary approval. The final development plan for each subsequent phase shall be submitted within the schedule established at the time of preliminary PUD approval. In the case of a PUD which includes a subdivision, the final PUD shall be submitted within five years of receiving preliminary approval; except that for combined preliminary PUDs and subdivisions approved through December 31, 2011, the final PUD shall be submitted within seven years of receiving preliminary approval.
C. The time period for filing of final PUDs shall not include periods of time during which progress on the final PUD was reasonably halted or delayed due to the filing and pendency of legal actions challenging an approval granted by the city pursuant to this chapter; provided, that in all cases when more than two years have elapsed subsequent to the date of approval of a preliminary PUD, whether due to the pendency of litigation, city-approved extensions of time for filing or otherwise, the permittee shall be required to comply with all current building, construction, subdivision and other applicable standards of the city prior to being granted approval of the final PUD. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.130).
Within 12 months following the approval of the preliminary PUD, the applicant shall file with the community development director a final PUD conforming to the approved preliminary PUD, including any proposed minor changes pursuant to BMC 12.30.120. Should the approved preliminary PUD include a preliminary subdivision, the applicant shall file a final development plan within the time period provided under Chapter 58.17 RCW. Such a final subdivision shall not be approved unless and until the associated final PUD is approved. In addition to the information required under BMC 12.30.100 for the preliminary PUD, the final PUD shall include the following:
A. A survey of the property, showing for all areas to be developed or disturbed existing features, including topography at two-foot contours for slopes 15 percent or less and five-foot contours for slopes over 15 percent, buildings, structures, trees over eight inches in trunk diameter measured four feet above the base of the trunk, streets, utility easements, rights-of-way, and existing land uses;
B. Elevation and perspective drawings of project structures and improvements;
C. Proposed final conditions, covenants and restrictions (CC&Rs) and other documents relating to operation and maintenance of the development, including all of its open areas and recreational facilities and any open space pursuant to BMC 12.30.070, which CC&Rs and other documents shall be recorded upon final PUD approval;
D. Proposed final agreements which may have been required as conditions of preliminary PUD approval;
E. A development schedule, if development may extend over more than a two-year period;
F. The following plans and diagrams:
1. An off-street parking plan;
2. A circulation diagram indicating the proposed movement of vehicles and pedestrians within the planned unit development, and to and from existing and programmed thoroughfares; any special engineering features and traffic regulating devices needed to facilitate or ensure the safety of this circulation pattern must be shown;
3. Landscaping and tree planting plan, including site grading;
4. A topographic map or model of the site and surrounding vicinity;
5. For green PUDs, a site plan and/or building elevations or other drawings indicating the location of features which promote sustainability and which qualify for credit under the certification program utilized by the applicant; and
6. For clustered subdivision PUDs, a description of the type of open space being provided and the proposed management or maintenance of the open space. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.140).
Final PUD approval shall be granted by the city only if the applicant demonstrates that the final PUD substantially conforms to the approved preliminary PUD, including minor changes pursuant to BMC 12.30.120. For the purposes of this section, “substantially conforms” means that, as compared to the preliminary PUD, the final PUD contains no revisions in density, uses, design or development standards or in the site plan, other than the minor changes pursuant to BMC 12.30.120. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.150).
The approved final development plan shall have the effect of a binding site plan under RCW 58.17.040(5), so that a lease of land not involving a residential structure shall be exempt from the subdivision ordinance if the lease conforms to the final development plan. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.160).
The conditions of approval of an adopted final PUD control over any conflicting regulations. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.170).
The approval of a subdivision shall be required of all projects which involve or contemplate the subdivision of land and the procedures set forth in the Bothell subdivision ordinance, codified in BMC Title 15, shall be followed concurrently herewith. The approved final development plan shall be a binding site plan under RCW 58.17.040(5), so that a lease of land not involving a residential structure shall be exempt from the subdivision ordinance if the lease conforms to the final development plan. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.180).
A final PUD runs with the land and notice on title is required. All lots or other divisions of a subdivided planned unit development shall remain subject to compliance with the final development plan regardless of the fact of subdivision in compliance with BMC Title 15, or subsequent conveyance of such individual lots or divisions. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.190).
Minor modifications to approved final PUDs are Type I actions and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and in accordance with the provisions of this section.
A. The community development director is authorized to allow minor modifications in accordance with subsection B of this section. The community development director shall allow only such modifications as are consistent with guidelines established in subsection B of this section, and in no case shall a minor modification be allowed if it will increase the total amount of floor space authorized in the approved final PUD, or the number of dwelling units or density, or decrease the amount of parking or loading facilities or permit buildings to locate substantially closer to any boundary line or change substantially any point of ingress or egress to the site.
B. For the purposes of this section, “minor modifications” means any departure from the conditions of final PUD approval which complies with the following criteria:
1. The modification maintains the design intent and quality of the original approval;
2. The amount of landscaping, buffering and open space shall not be reduced;
3. The number of dwelling units in residential developments and the square footage of nonresidential structures shall not change;
4. The modification shall not relocate a building, street or other use more than 20 feet in any direction and shall not reduce any required yard and/or setback;
5. The height of buildings and other structures shall not increase;
6. Views from both structures on site and off site shall not be substantially reduced;
7. Traffic volumes shall not increase and circulation patterns shall not change;
8. Changes in colors, plant material and parking lot configurations are minor;
9. For green PUDs, the modification shall not reduce the number of credits for which the proposed development qualified at final PUD approval under the certification program utilized by the applicant; provided, however, that one or more green features or practices may be reduced or eliminated if the resulting reduction in the number of credits is offset by the increase or addition of other green features or practices;
10. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the modification shall not reduce the amount of open space lands, nor the identified type of open space and any facilities, consistent with BMC 12.30.070, permitted to be included within the open space tract;
11. The modification does not add significant new environmental impacts or significantly increase environmental impacts disclosed in the original SEPA documents;
12. The community development director determines that the modification will not increase any adverse impacts or undesirable effects of the project, or that the modification in no way significantly alters the project. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2076 § 2 (Exh. B), 2011; Ord. 2046 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.200).
For the purposes of this section, “major modifications” means any proposed modifications to an approved final PUD that do not comply with the criteria contained in BMC 12.30.210(B). Major modifications to approved final PUDs are Type II actions and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and in accordance with the provisions of this section.
A. Requirements for a Complete Application for Major Modification to an Approved Final PUD. These requirements are in addition to the minimum application requirements in BMC 11.06.002. Application contents:
1. Signatures of those persons or parties having an ownership interest in those lots, tracts, parcels, sites or divisions in the subject final PUD that are proposed to be altered;
2. A copy of any restrictive covenants applicable to the PUD. If the PUD is subject to restrictive covenants which were filed at the time of the approval of the final PUD, and the application for alteration would result in the violation of a covenant, the application shall contain an agreement signed by all parties subject to the covenants providing that the parties agree to terminate or alter the relevant covenants to accomplish the purpose of the modification of the PUD or portion thereof;
3. A copy of the approved final PUD sought to be modified, together with all PUD modifications recorded since the date of the original approval;
4. Plans and diagrams clearly showing the approved final PUD, as well as any proposed modifications to the approved final PUD;
5. Any other information required by the community development director for the purposes of ascertaining ownership and the existence of easements or covenants affecting the subject property.
B. Criteria for Approval of a Major Modification to an Approved Final PUD. A major modification to an approved final PUD shall be granted by the city only if the applicant demonstrates that the proposed modifications are consistent with the criteria for approval for preliminary PUDs, as listed in BMC 12.30.110. (Ord. 2348 § 31, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2076 § 2 (Exh. B), 2011. Formerly 12.30.210).
A. The city shall issue building permits for buildings and structures which conform with the approved final PUD and with all other applicable city ordinances and regulations. The city shall issue a certificate of occupancy for completed buildings or structures which conform to the requirements of the approved final PUD and all other applicable city ordinances and regulations. The construction and development of all the open spaces and public and recreational facilities and required common features of any green PUD of each project phase must be completed or bonded before any certificate of occupancy will be issued.
B. In PUD projects receiving final approval, where units will have common walls, the city may issue building permits for construction of those units prior to approval of final lot lines. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.220).
For good cause shown, the hearing body, in its discretion, may grant one extension of time for commencement or continuation of construction subsequent to approval of the final PUD. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.230).
A. If the construction has not been started within five years from the date of approval of a final PUD with an associated subdivision, or two years from the date of approval of any other final PUD, or if construction has been commenced but the work has been abandoned for a period of one year or more, and if no extension of time has been granted as provided in BMC 12.30.240, the authorization granted for the planned unit development project shall terminate and all permits and approvals issued pursuant to such authorization shall expire and be null and void; except that for final PUDs approved through December 31, 2011, if construction has not been started within seven years from the date of approval of a final PUD with an associated subdivision, or four years from the date of approval of any other final PUD, or if construction has been commenced but the work has been abandoned for a period of three years or more, and if no extension of time has been granted as provided in BMC 12.30.240, the authorization granted for the PUD project shall terminate as set forth herein.
B. The time period of commencing or continuing construction shall not include periods of time during which commencement of construction or continuation of construction was reasonably halted or reasonably delayed due to the filing of a pendency of legal action challenging an approval granted by the city pursuant to this chapter; however, in all cases, when more than five years have elapsed subsequent to the date of approval of a final PUD with associated subdivision, or more than two years have elapsed subsequent to the date of approval of any other final PUD, whether due to pendency of litigation, city-approved extensions of time for development, or otherwise, the permittee shall be required to comply with all current building, construction, subdivision and other applicable standards of the city; except that for final PUDs approved through December 31, 2011, the time limits established in subsection A of this section shall apply; provided, that a change in zoning classification enacted subsequent to approval of the final development plan shall not affect the project. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.240).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish a process for site plan review of certain types and sizes of development, specifically:
A. To review development proposals for general compliance with the applicable requirements of this code.
B. To ensure that development is coordinated with other known or planned development and public improvements adjacent to the subject property.
C. To ensure that the basic site design elements of this code are considered and resolved prior to submittal of detailed engineering and construction applications.
D. To encourage developments that embody good site design principles that will result in a high quality of life for future residents or users of the development. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The requirements of this chapter shall apply to all proposed developments meeting the following thresholds:
A. Development proposals containing any structure greater than 4,000 square feet in area, and/or constructing more than 20 parking spaces;
B. Residential structures containing five or more dwelling units;
C. Development proposals of 10 or more detached residential structures that do not include a subdivision;
D. Additions or expansions to existing building(s) comprising at least 4,000 square feet;
E. Exceptions. The following developments do not have to apply for a separate site plan review but are required to submit a site plan with their respective permit applications:
1. Detached single-family residential structures in accordance with Chapter 20.02 BMC;
2. Agricultural structures below 10,000 square feet;
3. Conditional use permits in accordance with Chapter 12.28 BMC;
4. Variances in accordance with Chapter 12.36 BMC;
5. Planned unit developments, or PUDs, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC;
6. Preliminary subdivisions in accordance with Chapter 15.08 BMC;
7. Preliminary short subdivisions in accordance with Chapter 15.06 BMC;
8. Shoreline substantial development permits, shoreline conditional use permits, or shoreline variances in accordance with Chapter 13.17 BMC. (Ord. 2370 § 4, 2021; Ord. 2348 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
A site plan review is a Type II action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such permits as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Applications for project permits shall be submitted to the city upon forms provided by the director. Site plan review applications shall include the following:
A. The minimum application requirements within BMC 11.06.002;
B. The application materials, number of copies, and any electronic format shall be as directed by the city;
C. The appropriate fee as specified within the city’s fee resolution as adopted by the city council;
D. Notes and determinations from the pre-application conference;
E. Site plan review application contents:
1. A map or maps using a scale of 100 feet to one inch or larger, showing:
a. Boundary lines, including bearing and distance;
b. Tracts and easements, including location, width and purpose;
c. Topographical and other data depicting:
(1) Scale, north arrow and date;
(2) Existing or proposed lot lines, dimensions, and lot and block numbers;
(3) Streets on and adjacent to the parcel(s), including name and right-of-way width and location; type, width and elevation of surfacing; walks, curbs, gutters, culverts, and other pertinent information;
(4) Ground elevations on the parcel(s), based on the city of Bothell datum plane; show contours with an interval of not more than five feet if ground slope is regular and such information as is needed for planning purposes;
(5) Conditions on adjacent land within 300 feet of the subject parcel(s), including approximate direction and gradient of ground slope, embankments, retaining walls; location of buildings, power lines and towers, existing trees, and land uses;
d. Utilities on and adjacent to the parcel(s), including location, size and elevation of sanitary, storm, water, gas lines, fire hydrants, electric and telephone poles, and street lights;
e. The location and description of any critical areas and buffers;
f. The location, species and driplines of all existing trees eight inches or more in diameter as measured four feet above grade;
g. The location of all existing and proposed structures;
h. Other significant site features on the subject property;
i. Zoning, on and adjacent to the parcel(s);
j. Proposed public improvements, including future construction improvements planned by other public authorities on or near the parcel(s);
k. Lands, if any, to be reserved or dedicated for parks, playgrounds, open space or other recreational uses;
l. Minimum building setback lines pursuant to the zoning code;
m. Site data, including total site area, lot dimensions and area, and a depiction and quantification of the net buildable area of the subject property;
n. Conceptual cross-sections of the proposed finish grades of the site, and proposed streets and sidewalks;
o. Conceptual sanitary sewer and water systems plan(s) indicating points of connection, grades and sizes of facilities; and
p. Conceptual surface water facility design, location, and size;
2. Conceptual building cross-sections depicting the building height, scale, number of stories, and relationship of the building to the proposed finish grade;
3. Title and certificates, including legal descriptions, purpose and ownership of all recorded tracts and easements, and any private conditions, covenants or restrictions applicable to the subject property;
4. Information on soil types and their feasibility, for low impact development (LID) storm water control purposes, in accordance with the city of Bothell design and construction standards;
5. Critical area reports regarding critical areas and buffers, if any, on and/or adjacent to the subject parcel(s) in accordance with Chapter 14.04 BMC; and
6. A traffic impact analysis consistent with the minimum standards of BMC 17.04.010 and a conceptual analysis of potential traffic impact mitigation options consistent with Chapter 17.04 BMC;
F. SEPA Review. A site plan review shall include environmental review in accordance with Chapter 14.02 BMC. The following additional items shall be submitted:
1. A completed SEPA environmental checklist;
2. Copies of all studies or analyses identified within the SEPA environmental checklist and any additional information as required by the responsible official in accordance with Chapter 14.02 BMC;
3. Conceptual building elevations and proposed building materials of all facades visible from a public right-of-way. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The following site elements shall be evaluated for consistency with this code:
A. Building location and height;
B. Required setbacks;
C. Critical areas and buffers;
D. Ingress and egress, internal circulation, and pedestrian and bicycle circulation;
E. Parking stall numbers, parking lot configuration and emergency vehicle circulation within parking areas;
F. Public and private open space provisions;
G. Landscaping;
H. Tree retention;
I. Mail delivery and pick-up, garbage and recycling pick-up;
J. Surface water facilities;
K. Transportation improvements and mitigation;
L. Proposed dedications to the city, if any;
M. Landmark preservation;
N. Environmental review, to include:
1. Other environmental checklist elements;
2. Building facade design and proposed building materials; and
O. Whether the public interest will be served by the development. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Upon receipt of a complete site plan review application, the director shall forward the site plan review application to other applicable city departments for their review and comment in accordance with this code. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The community development director shall approve a site plan review application only upon determining that the site plan application is generally consistent with this code. For the purposes of this chapter, “generally consistent” means the application demonstrates general compliance, or, with some modifications, can be brought into general compliance with this code. Approval of the site plan review application does not guarantee approval of subsequent permit applications which must also fully comply with all applicable regulations and standards. The site plan application shall be reviewed for consistency with:
A. Critical Areas. The site plan demonstrates consistency with the critical areas regulations within Chapter 14.04 BMC;
B. Parking. The site plan must demonstrate consistency with the parking requirements of Chapter 12.16 BMC and the Bothell Standards;
C. Building Height. The building(s) are consistent with minimum and maximum building stories or heights pursuant to Chapter 12.14 BMC and any applicable subarea regulations;
D. Building Location. The building placement, orientation, setbacks and other locational requirements are consistent with Chapter 12.14 BMC and any applicable subarea regulations;
E. Hard Surface and Building Coverage. The site plan design complies with the maximum hard surface and building coverage requirements of Chapter 12.14 BMC;
F. Tree Preservation Retention. The site plan preserves existing trees and other vegetation consistent with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
G. Landscaping. The conceptual landscaping is consistent with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
H. Surface Water. The conceptual surface water facilities are consistent with the Bothell Standards;
I. Transportation Improvements. The conceptual frontage and street improvements and preliminary traffic mitigation is consistent with BMC Title 17 and the Bothell Standards;
J. Proposed Dedications of Land. Do the proposed dedications of land, if any, serve the public interest;
K. Landmark Preservation. The site plan addresses the historic landmarks, if any, located on the site in accordance with BMC Title 22; and
L. If requested by the applicant, State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA) review. The site plan design does not represent potentially significant adverse environmental impacts, or, if potentially significant environmental impacts are anticipated, those impacts can be mitigated as promulgated under Chapter 14.02 BMC. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Upon determining that the proposed site plan is consistent with the review criteria of BMC 12.32.070, the director shall issue a Type II notice of decision consistent with BMC 11.12.002(C) which shall serve as the site plan review approval permit. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Appeals of any decision regarding a proposed site plan review shall follow the Type II permit application appeal procedures of Chapter 11.04 BMC. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
An applicant may request modifications to an approved site plan as a Type I action as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and this chapter. Modifications to an approved site plan are those which do not exceed the thresholds of BMC 12.32.020, nor represent potentially significant adverse environmental impacts. Should either of those thresholds be met, the applicant shall be required to apply for a new site plan approval.
A. The community development director shall only allow modifications that are consistent with subsection B of this section.
B. Modifications to the site plan approval shall only be granted upon a finding by the director that the following criteria are met:
1. All land uses continue to be a permitted use under the zoning classification;
2. The design intent and quality of the original approval is retained;
3. The number of dwelling units in residential developments and the square footage of nonresidential structures shall not involve more than a 10 percent change of that established by the approved site plan;
4. Buildings, parking areas, streets or other uses or built features are within the same general location as shown on the approved site plan;
5. Required yard, setback, buffers or open space areas or dimensions, as established by the approved site plan, are not reduced;
6. The height of buildings and other structures remains consistent with this code;
7. Traffic volumes shall not increase more than 10 percent of that established by the approved site plan;
8. Modifications to internal circulation layout are consistent with the Bothell Standards; provided, that ingress and egress points to the subject property are not relocated and external traffic patterns are not affected;
9. Tree retention and landscaping remains consistent with Chapter 12.18 BMC. (Ord. 2444 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
An approved site plan shall be effective for a period of two years from the date of approval to the commencement of construction or submittal of a development application. Should construction not commence within two years of approval, the director may, for good cause shown, grant a one-time extension of up to one year. No additional extensions shall be allowed. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Applicants are strongly encouraged to complete site plan review prior to submittal of an application for any construction-level development permits such as, but not limited to: building, right-of-way, utility, and grading permits. No construction-level development permits shall be issued prior to completion of site plan review, except in the circumstances described in BMC 12.32.020(E) for which a separate site plan review is not required. Applicants submitting applications for any construction-level development permits before completing site plan review do so at their own risk. (Ord. 2370 § 3, 2021; Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The community development director is authorized to adopt such administrative rules and regulations as necessary and appropriate to implement this chapter and to prepare and require the use of any forms as necessary for its administration. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application, and criteria for approval for site rezones. A site rezone is a change in the zoning classification of a property or properties that is consistent with the Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan. The site rezone process shall not be used to amend a comprehensive plan designation. (Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A site rezone is a Type V action and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In order for a site rezone request to be approved, the requested zone classification must be found to be consistent with and implement the land use designation provided in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan for the subject property or properties. (Ord. 2441 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Upon the effective date of the adoption by ordinance of a site rezone, the official zoning map of the city shall be so amended. (Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application and criteria for approval for variances. A variance is an authorization to depart from the development regulations contained in this title. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A variance is a Type III action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
An application for a variance is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application shall contain:
A. Completed application form and attachments signed and dated by owner/agent.
B. Complete legal description of the subject property.
C. Site plan depicting proposed and existing improvements on the property. The site plan shall contain the following information in addition to the standard information required by BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations:
1. Dimensions and shape of the lot and street names;
2. Location and dimensions of existing and proposed buildings including setbacks and requested variance(s);
3. Circulation. Adjacent street improvements, curb cut locations for ingress and egress, parking layout in accordance with Chapter 12.16 BMC;
4. Existing and proposed landscaping in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
5. Existing watercourses, sensitive areas (such as wetlands, geologically hazardous areas, etc.), utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, structures, rockeries, and other manufactured or natural features restricting use of the subject property;
6. Preliminary grading plan depicting proposed and existing grades at five-foot contours, if grading is proposed in conjunction with proposed use; and
7. Storm drainage, sidewalks, and exterior lighting.
D. Building elevations depicting requested variances.
E. Necessary information for review of environmental impacts, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment.
F. The appropriate fee(s) as specified within the city’s fee resolution as adopted by the city council.
G. Applications found to contain material errors shall not be deemed complete until such material errors are corrected.
H. The community development director may waive specific submittal requirements determined to be unnecessary for review of the application. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A variance shall be granted by the city only if an applicant demonstrates all of the following:
A. The strict enforcement of the provisions of this title creates an unnecessary hardship to the property owner;
B. The variance is necessary because of the unique size, shape, topography, or location of the subject property;
C. The subject property is deprived, by provisions of this title, of rights and privileges enjoyed by other properties in the vicinity and under an identical zone;
D. The need for the variance is not the result of deliberate actions of the applicant or property owner or previous property owner;
E. The variance does not create health and safety hazards or result in lowering of public capital facilities levels of service below the standards and guidelines set forth in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan;
F. The variance does not relieve an applicant from any of the procedural provisions of this title or, when applicable, those in the shoreline master program;
G. The variance does not allow establishment of a use that is not otherwise permitted in the zone in which the proposal is located;
H. The variance is the minimum necessary to grant relief to the applicant;
I. The variance does not relieve an applicant from the provisions of the critical areas ordinance, except as provided therein. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2441 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application, criteria for approval, and comprehensive plan and zoning requirements for annexations. An annexation is the addition of land to the corporate limits of the city. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
An annexation is a Type V action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, Chapter 35A.14 RCW, Annexation by Code Cities, and Chapter 36.93 RCW, Local Government Organization – Boundaries – Review Boards. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The city council shall evaluate proposed annexations based on the following criteria:
A. State annexation regulations as set forth in Chapters 35A.14 and 36.93 RCW;
B. The ability of the city to provide public services at a level equal to or better than that available from current service providers;
C. The ability of the city to provide public services at the city’s adopted levels of service;
D. Whether the annexation would eliminate an unincorporated island or could be expanded to eliminate an unincorporated island;
E. Whether the annexation would follow logical boundaries, such as streets, waterways, or substantial topographic changes;
F. Whether the annexation would eliminate an irregularity or irregularities in the city’s boundaries, thereby improving service delivery;
G. The relative costs to serve the proposed annexation versus the revenue to be derived from the annexation;
H. No property shall be annexed which is outside the adopted urban growth areas for King and Snohomish Counties. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
All territory which may hereafter be annexed to the city shall be considered to be zoned in conformance with the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan for the area to be annexed. In the event the area annexed is not within the area encompassed by the comprehensive plan, its temporary zoning shall be the zone in the city in this title which corresponds in description most closely to the existing zoning of the property in the county until such time as the city has amended its comprehensive plan to include the annexed area. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The city council may direct the planning commission to prepare a comprehensive land use plan and/or proposed zoning regulations to become effective upon the annexation of any area which might reasonably be expected to be annexed by the city at any future time. Such comprehensive plan and zoning actions are legislative actions and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations and Chapter 35A.14 RCW. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
This article provides aesthetic, design, and concealment standards and permit and review procedures for wireless communication facilities. This article does not apply to small wireless facilities. These provisions are intended to provide objective design criteria to assist in minimizing the visually obtrusive impacts that can be associated with wireless communication facilities and to encourage creative approaches in the location and construction of wireless communication facilities. (Ord. 2295 § 10, 2019).
A WCF permit shall be required prior to the construction or installation of each new WCF other than a temporary WCF or other exempt facility as defined in this chapter. Maintenance of existing facilities that does not qualify as an eligible facilities request will only require a building permit. See Article III of this chapter for provisions relating to eligible facilities requests. All other requests to increase or expand the number and size of WCFs shall comply with the requirements of this article. For the purposes of BMC Title 11, WCF permits shall be designated as Type I project permit applications. No public notice shall be required for such permits.
A. A WCF permittee shall construct and commence operation of the WCF within two years from the date of issuance. The director is authorized to approve a request for an extended expiration date where a construction schedule is provided by the applicant warranting such extension and approved prior to permit issuance.
B. Every WCF permit may be renewed for a period of 180 days for an additional fee as long as no changes have been made to the originally approved location and plans. The request for an extension must be received prior to the permit expiration. For permits that have expired, a new permit must be obtained, and full new fees paid. No permit shall be renewed more than once.
C. Operational Activity. Within 60 days of operation, the permittee shall send a letter to the city confirming that operation has commenced at the WCF.
D. If an applicant is issued a written determination from the city that an application is not complete, the applicant shall have 180 calendar days from the date of personal delivery or date of mailing by the city to submit the required information to the city. If the applicant fails to resubmit, the applicant may request a refund of the unused portion of the application fee for staff time expended as determined in the sole discretion of the director.
E. Small Wireless Facilities. Any proposed wireless communication facility that qualifies as a small wireless facility as defined in BMC 12.11.020 must apply for a small wireless facility permit consistent with Article II; it cannot proceed under this article related to WCFs.
F. Post-Construction As-Builts. Within 60 days after construction of the WCF, the permittee shall provide the city with as-builts and site photographs of the WCF demonstrating compliance with the permit. (Ord. 2373 § 5, 2022; Ord. 2295 § 11, 2019; Ord. 2252 § 5, 2018; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
An application for a WCF permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations; provided, however, that eligible facilities requests are governed by Article III of this chapter. The permit fee shall be established by resolution of the city council. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application for a WCF shall contain:
A. A complete application form, permit fee, and attachments signed and dated by the owner/agent. The application shall be on a standardized form provided by the city;
B. The name, address, phone number and signature of the applicant or authorized representative;
C. A complete legal description of the subject property;
D. Locational maps, including:
1. A vicinity map showing the location of the proposed WCF and the location of any existing WCFs of the licensed carrier within the service area when applying the siting hierarchy in BMC 12.11.065;
2. A map depicting the area immediately around the proposed site, showing the zoning designation of the subject property and of all adjacent properties;
E. Site plans, drawn to scale, depicting the proposed and existing improvements on the property. The site plans shall include drawings which include a plan view and elevations, and contain the following information, to the extent applicable:
1. Dimensions and shape of the lot, and street names;
2. Location and dimensions of existing and proposed buildings and structures, including setbacks;
3. Circulation. Adjacent street improvements, curb cut locations for ingress and egress, and parking layout in accordance with the applicable portions of Chapters 12.16, 17.05, 17.06, and 17.09 BMC; provided, however, that the requirements of BMC 12.16.120(A) and (B) shall not apply to WCFs;
4. Existing and proposed landscaping, in accordance with this chapter, including the location of significant trees with a caliper diameter exceeding eight inches as measured four feet above grade;
5. Existing watercourses, critical areas, utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, rockeries, and other built or natural features restricting use of the subject property;
6. Preliminary grading plan depicting proposed and existing grades at five-foot contours if grading is proposed in conjunction with the proposed WCF;
7. Storm drainage, sidewalks, and exterior lighting;
8. Elevations for all proposed improvements on the site;
F. Color photographs of the existing site, and computer-generated color photographs depicting the proposed WCF incorporated into the site (photosimulations, or photosims). At least one color photograph and one color photosim shall be provided depicting the site as viewed from each adjacent public right-of-way;
G. A description of the support structure or building upon which the WCF is proposed to be located, and detailed description of the design and configuration of the WCF;
H. A statement of whether excess space will be incorporated into the design and configuration of the structure or building, whether excess space will remain after installation of the proposed WCF, and whether such excess space shall be leased;
I. Information necessary to determine the intended service area of the WCF;
J. Design information, including equipment brochures, color and material boards, and dimensional information;
K. The applicant shall submit a sworn declaration signed by an RF engineer with knowledge of the proposed project affirming that the WCF will be compliant with all FCC and other governmental regulations in connection with human exposure to radio frequency emissions for every frequency at which the facility and associated wireless backhaul will operate. If facilities that emit RF necessary to the WCF are to be provided by another provider, the right-of-way use permit or building permit to deploy such facilities shall be contingent on submittal of an RF certification by the other provider for any such facilities which produce RF emissions. If such facilities will emit RF emissions, this additional RF certification shall address the cumulative impact of the RF emissions and certify compliance with federal requirements. A modification of a facility by an eligible facilities request requires a new RF certification;
L. Necessary information for review of environmental impacts, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment;
M. Application fee and environmental trust fee (if subject to SEPA review);
N. Compliance with the design and locational requirements of this chapter, as well as the Bothell Standards, if applicable, and with the transportation requirements (e.g., pedestrian accessible routes, clear zones, site distance);
O. A completed application for all related permits and approvals, including a right-of-way placement permit application under Chapter 17.24 BMC if the WCF is to be located within a public right-of-way;
P. The director may waive any of the specific submittal requirements set forth in this section when determined by the director to be unnecessary for review of the application; and
Q. Such other information as the director, in his/her discretion, shall deem appropriate to effectively evaluate the application based on technical, engineering, and aesthetic considerations. (Ord. 2295 § 12, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Siting of a WCF shall adhere to the siting hierarchy of this section. Where a lower ranking alternative is proposed, the applicant must file relevant information demonstrating that despite diligent efforts to adhere to the established hierarchy within the geographic search area, higher ranking options are not technically or physically feasible.
A. Example. A new WCF is proposed; the applicant demonstrates that the new WCF cannot be sited under hierarchy 1. The applicant then moves to hierarchy 2 and is able to propose a site.
B. Siting Hierarchy. A new WCF shall be located according to the following hierarchy:
1. Attached to an existing structure in which a WCF antenna is already attached, unless that structure is located in the right-of-way.
2. Located on a high voltage electrical transmission tower.
3. Collocated on an existing or replacement utility pole within a classified principal arterial right-of-way.
4. Collocated on an existing pole, field light, or municipal building within public parks, public open spaces, or on other publicly owned land and not located in the right-of-way.
5. Attached to the roof or side of any building in the commercial zones listed in BMC 12.11.040.
6. Attached to a utility pole in a minor arterial right-of-way.
7. Located on the roof of any commercial or mixed use building in the mixed use zones listed in BMC 12.11.040.
8. Located in a residentially zoned area on a parcel not used for residential purposes.
9. Located on a utility pole in a collector arterial right-of-way.
10. A monopole-style WCF with antennas in a canister or as otherwise camouflaged (e.g., monopine or stealth design) that is located within commercial zones as permitted in BMC 12.11.040.
11. A monopole-style WCF with antennas in a canister or as otherwise camouflaged (e.g., monopine or stealth design) that is located in public parks, public open spaces, or on other publicly owned land or property and not located in the right-of-way.
12. A monopole-style WCF with antennas in a canister or as otherwise camouflaged (e.g., monopine or stealth design) that is located in a residentially zoned area on a parcel not used for residential purposes and not located within the right-of-way.
13. A reasonable alternative similar to subsections (B)(1) through (12) of this section, as determined by the director.
C. When a WCF cannot meet any of the siting hierarchy options above and denial would constitute an effective prohibition of service, the WCF shall be located consistent with the provisions of BMC 12.11.040. (Ord. 2295 § 13, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013).
All WCFs should meet these visibility and dimensional thresholds, unless the applicant can provide supporting documentation that demonstrates that it is not technically or physically feasible. Proposed WCFs that exceed these dimensional standards must be designed to have the minimum impact feasible, as certified by the provider’s licensed engineer, and as approved by the director.
A. Utility Pole Mounted WCFs.
1. Antennas. Antennas shall be mounted on existing or replacement utility poles. Only one WCF shall be permitted on any utility pole. Antennas shall be either fully concealed within a canister or flush-mounted to the utility pole (flush-mounted shall be the minimum amount of space technically necessary, but no more than 12 inches from the pole). Antennas not flush-mounted on the side of the utility pole shall be centered on the top of the utility pole to which they are mounted and camouflaged or disguised. The antennas shall be colored or painted to match the pole. Except with regard to height and volumetric requirements, utility pole-mounted WCFs must comply with the same design standards applicable to SWFs, as described in BMC 12.11.260, unless doing so would be technically or physically infeasible.
2. Height Increase. An additional 15 feet is allowed, either for an existing or replacement utility pole with flush-mounted antennas or a pole-top mounted canister. Any pole-top mount shall not be greater in diameter than the existing utility pole, or 16 inches, whichever is greater, and shall be designed to blend into the colors and textures of the existing utility pole.
3. Equipment Enclosures. All equipment enclosures shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
4. Replacement Pole. An existing utility pole may be removed and replaced so long as the replacement pole is of similar color and material as the existing and adjacent pole(s) (unless the pole owner decides to use a hollow pole and then it shall match as closely as possible to the color and material of the existing pole) and is located as near as possible to the existing pole. The replaced utility pole must be used by the owner of the utility pole to support its utility lines. A replacement utility pole shall be designed such that coaxial cables and feed lines can be located within the pole or in a covered raceway or conduit of similar color and material as the pole. If the replacement utility pole has a light standard then a photometric analysis shall be provided with the application. Such application shall only be approved if the replaced pole can maintain the appropriate lighting in the right-of-way.
5. Design Districts. New WCFs are prohibited within the rights-of-way of a design district unless denial of the siting could be a prohibition or effective prohibition of the applicant’s ability to provide telecommunications service in violation of 47 USC §§ 253 and 332.
6. Pedestrian Impact. The proposed WCF collocation shall not result in a significant change in the pedestrian environment or preclude the city from making pedestrian improvements. If a utility pole is being replaced, consideration shall be given to improving the pedestrian environment.
7. Prohibited Poles. WCFs are prohibited on nonwooden light poles, decorative poles, or traffic poles located within the right-of-way.
B. Building-Attached WCFs (Commercial and Mixed Use Zones and Nonresidential Structures in Residential Zones).
1. Antennas. Roof-mounted antennas shall not exceed 15 feet above the highest portion of the building, including the mount.
a. Roof-mounted antennas shall be placed to the center of the roof where possible, and shall either be completely concealed or be fully camouflaged into the building design. This may include the construction of false equipment penthouses on the roofs of buildings or some other concealment type structure, the design of which is approved by the director. When a roof mount installation is performed, the antennas, mounting brackets and any concealment structures shall be exempt from the height limit of the underlying zone to the extent that the total height of such facilities does not increase the overall building height by more than 20 feet. A WCF may not be attached on top of any false equipment penthouses.
b. Side-mounted antennas shall be mounted flush (no more than 12 inches from the surface) on the exterior walls of the building, shall not extend above the building parapet or other roof-mounted structure, and shall either be completely concealed or fully camouflaged into the building design.
c. Whip antennas shall be a neutral color to blend with the surroundings or the building, or be fully concealed, at the discretion of the director. In determining whether to require concealment of whip antennas, the director shall consider whether the site line diagrams, site plans, and photosimulations submitted by the applicant demonstrate that the whip antennas will not be visible from the public right-of-way adjacent to the subject property.
2. Equipment Enclosures and Ground-Mounted Equipment. All equipment enclosures and ground-mounted equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
C. New Monopole Towers (Commercial and Mixed Use Zones).
1. Antennas. Panel and omni-directional antennas shall be no greater in height than 10 feet. The antenna array and mount, if any, shall extend no further than 20 feet measured horizontally from the centerline of the pole. Antennas shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color matching the monopole that blends into the natural and built surroundings where it is located.
2. Support Structure. Monopoles shall be located in such a manner that a portion of the tower is screened by existing buildings or trees. Also, the pole shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color to blend into the surroundings. The height of the monopole and the associated antennas shall be no greater than 110 feet. All new monopole towers shall be screened through the planting of at least five evergreen trees of a minimum height of 20 feet tall and of a species approved by the director. Said trees shall be spaced around the pole in such a manner that the maximum screening effect is achieved. Said trees shall be planted within 30 feet of the monopole and maintained in a healthy condition at all times. Existing trees within 30 feet of the monopole may be used to fulfill this screening requirement. In the event that any such tree shall become diseased or suffer other mortality, it shall be replaced with a tree meeting the requirements of this subsection.
3. Equipment Enclosures and Ground-Mounted Equipment. All equipment enclosures and ground-mounted equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
4. Setbacks. Monopole support structures and equipment enclosures shall be constructed with a setback equal to the height of the tower, or the lowest engineered break point, if the tower is designed with break point engineering, from any exclusively residentially zoned property, including the SSHO and MHP overlay zones.
D. Electric Transmission Towers (Commercial Zones).
1. Antennas. Panel and omni-directional antennas shall be painted a color matching the tower so as to blend into the existing tower.
2. Equipment Enclosures. If the WCF is attached to an electrical transmission tower, the equipment enclosure can be located directly under the tower or located consistent with subsection (G)(2) of this section.
E. Collocation on Existing Monopoles and Lattice Towers (Residential Zones).
1. Antennas. Panel and omni-directional antennas shall be no greater in height than 10 feet. However, panel, whip, microwave dish, and omni-directional antennas which are for emergency services, emergency notification services or emergency support services may extend more than 10 feet above an existing lattice or monopole tower as approved by the director. On monopole towers, the antenna array and mount, if any, shall extend no further from the centerline of an existing monopole than 20 feet measured horizontally. On lattice towers, the antennas shall extend no further than 20 feet, measured horizontally, from the portion of the lattice tower to which the antennas are mounted. Existing monopole and lattice towers, and any additional equipment collocated thereon, shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color that blends into the natural and built surroundings where it is located.
2. Support Structure. All monopole and lattice towers upon which collocation is permitted shall be screened through the planting of at least five evergreen trees of a minimum height of 20 feet tall and of a species approved by the director. Existing trees of equal or greater height within 30 feet of the monopole may be used to fulfill this requirement. Said trees shall be spaced around the pole in such a manner that the maximum screening effect is achieved. Said trees shall be planted within 30 feet of the monopole and maintained in a healthy condition at all times. In the event that any such tree shall become diseased or suffer other mortality, it shall be replaced with a tree meeting the requirements of this subsection.
3. Equipment Enclosures. All equipment enclosures shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
4. Setbacks. New equipment enclosures associated with new WCFs collocated upon existing monopoles or lattice towers shall be placed no closer to existing residential uses than any existing equipment enclosure on the subject property, or as approved by the director.
F. Existing Monopole and Lattice Towers. Any existing monopole or lattice tower may be replaced on the same parcel with a lattice tower of the same or smaller dimensions or a new monopole. The new monopole tower must comply with subsection C of this section. However, the height of the new monopole may be the same as the tower being replaced or the height prescribed in subsection (C)(2) of this section, whichever is higher.
G. Concealment Standards for Equipment Enclosures and Ground-Mounted Equipment.
1. Equipment Enclosures for Building-Attached WCF.
a. If feasible, equipment enclosures shall be located within existing buildings (excluding single-family residential) or located underground. All underground equipment enclosures shall have the top of the vault flush with the surrounding grade.
b. If it is infeasible due to either technical, physical, or landlord requirements to place equipment enclosures inside an existing building or underground, then the equipment enclosure may be placed on the roof of an existing building, provided the use of the building is not single-family residential and the equipment enclosure is not visible from the street. Equipment enclosures located on the roof of a building shall be placed to the center of the roof where feasible and shall either be completely concealed or fully camouflaged into the building with architecturally compatible design.
c. If some other placement is proposed, the applicant shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the city that it is not technically or physically feasible to locate the equipment underground, within the building, or on a roof. All equipment and cabinets that will be visible to the traveling public, workers, or residents shall be as small and unobtrusive as is practicable and designed to blend in with existing surroundings. The applicant shall size any equipment enclosure and other facilities to minimize visual clutter.
d. If a ground-mounted equipment enclosure is permitted, the equipment enclosure must comply with subsection (G)(2)(c) of this section.
2. Equipment Enclosures for Pole-Mounted WCF. These requirements apply both for monopoles and for utility poles.
a. In exclusively residential zones, including SSHO and MHP overlay zones, ground-mounted equipment shall be located as close as possible to the intersection of the public right-of-way boundary and the side property line of the abutting property, but in no case shall any portion of said equipment be located more than six feet from either side of said intersection.
b. Equipment enclosures for WCFs must be located as follows:
(1) No new ground-mounted or underground equipment enclosures are permitted in the right-of-way;
(2) Underground or on adjacent property outside of the right-of-way; provided, that any ground-mounted equipment enclosure is fenced and landscaped. All underground equipment enclosures shall have the top of the vault flush with the surrounding grade. Underground equipment enclosures shall not be greater than 480 square feet in area and shall have the smallest access door feasible;
(3) Inside a building located outside of the right-of-way; or
(4) Located outside of the right-of-way so as not to be open or visible to public view (e.g., in a forested area surrounded by vegetation so that the equipment enclosure is not open to public view and also fenced for security purposes) and in compliance with subsection (G)(2)(c) of this section.
(5) Equipment enclosures mounted on a utility pole are not permitted.
c. Ground-mounted equipment enclosures shall be the minimum size technically necessary and not greater than 480 square feet in area. Ground-mounted equipment enclosures shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color so as to blend in with the surroundings. Any new building or structure constructed for housing equipment, other than self-contained equipment cabinets, shall be designed and constructed to be architecturally compatible with buildings in the immediate vicinity and to blend into the surroundings. The exterior of all such buildings or structures shall be finished with masonry or siding and shall have a peaked roof. Buildings or structures with nonmasonry exterior finishing shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color. Pre-fabricated concrete and metal structures shall not be permitted unless treated with a facade meeting the requirements of this subsection.
3. Screening and Noise Standards. If a WCF is proposed in a residential zone or within 100 feet of a residential use, then the applicant must demonstrate that the proposed WCF will generate no increased sound levels as documented by an acoustical consultant, as measured at the property line of the subject property at any time of day or night. If the WCF will generate increased sound levels, then the equipment generating such noise shall be surrounded with a noise abatement material such as solid masonry or concrete wall on all four sides, comprised of at least four inches of solid masonry or concrete components. Said wall shall be located within five feet of any noise source associated with the equipment enclosure and shall have a height that is at least three feet above the highest point of the noise source. Gates or doors providing access to areas within said wall shall be constructed of a solid material and shall not be located on the wall immediately adjacent to the noise source. Any such noise source shall be oriented to minimize impacts on neighboring residential properties.
4. Landscaping. Ground-mounted equipment enclosures that are not required to be surrounded by a masonry or concrete wall shall be surrounded with a six-foot-tall wood fence and a five-foot-wide landscape bed (located in front of the fence) containing Type III landscape materials, as specified in BMC 12.18.040. Otherwise, ground-mounted equipment enclosures shall be surrounded by a 10-foot-wide landscape bed (located in front of the masonry or concrete wall of such structure) containing Type II landscape materials, as specified in BMC 12.18.040. The requirements of this subsection may be varied by the director on a case-by-case basis when doing so would result in a greater degree of concealment of an equipment enclosure. Chapter 12.18 BMC notwithstanding, the landscaping provisions of this subsection shall not be fulfilled through use of berms or fencing. (Ord. 2295 § 14, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1885 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
A. All new monopole towers, and any pre-existing monopole or lattice towers, owned by a licensed carrier, upon which this chapter permits collocation of additional WCFs, shall be made available for use by the owner or initial user thereof, together with as many other licensed carriers as can be technically collocated thereon. However, nothing in this chapter shall prevent such licensed carrier from charging a reasonable fee for the collocation of additional WCFs upon said tower which does not exceed the fair market value for the space occupied.
B. All licensed carriers shall cooperate with each other in collocating additional WCFs upon such towers. All licensed carriers shall exercise good faith in collocating with other licensed carriers and in the sharing of towers, including the sharing of technical information to evaluate the feasibility of collocation. In the event that a dispute arises as to whether a licensed carrier has exercised good faith in allowing other licensed carriers to collocate upon its tower, the city may require a third party technical study to evaluate the feasibility of collocation at the expense of either or both licensed carriers. This covenant of good faith and fair dealing shall be a condition of any permit issued pursuant to this chapter for a new monopole tower.
C. Any licensed carrier which allows collocation upon a tower permitted pursuant to this chapter may condition said collocation to assure that the collocated WCF does not cause electronic or radio frequency interference with its existing WCF. In the event that the collocated licensed carrier is unable to remedy the interference, the owner of the tower shall be relieved of its obligation to allow collocation of the interfering WCF upon its structure. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Repealed by Ord. 2295. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
No permittee shall place or allow to be placed signs, symbols, flags, or banners attached to, painted, or inscribed upon any WCF. A permittee may place not more than one sign measuring 18 inches by 12 inches upon or near the WCF which: (1) states that trespassers will be prosecuted (if applicable); (2) lists the names and telephone numbers of persons to be contacted in the event of an emergency; (3) identifies the permittee or person responsible for operating the WCF; and/or (4) contains information necessary and convenient for the permittee or person operating the WCF to identify the WCF. Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit the placement of safety or warning signs upon any portion of the WCF which are required by law or which are designed to apprise emergency response personnel and the employees and agents of WCF providers of particular hazards associated with equipment located upon the WCF. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Repealed by Ord. 2295. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Repealed by Ord. 2295. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
This article provides aesthetic, design, and concealment standards and permit and review procedures for small wireless facilities. These provisions are intended to provide objective design criteria to assist in minimizing the visual impacts that can be associated with small wireless facilities and to encourage creative approaches in the location and construction of wireless communications facilities. All permits necessary for the deployment of small wireless facilities and, if applicable, an application for a franchise may be consolidated for review. (Ord. 2295 § 16, 2019).
A. Type I Decision. For the purposes of BMC Title 11, SWF permits, including associated proposals to install replacement or new poles, shall be designated as Type I project permit applications. No public notice shall be required for such permits. As a Type I decision, any decision by the community development director or the public works director is final and is not subject to administrative appeal.
B. Review of Facilities. Review of the site locations proposed by the applicant shall be governed by the provisions of 47 USC §§ 253 and 332 and other applicable law. Applicants for franchises and small wireless facility permits shall be treated in a competitively neutral and nondiscriminatory manner with other service providers, utilizing supporting infrastructure that is functionally equivalent, that is, service providers whose facilities are similarly situated in terms of structure, placement, or cumulative impacts. Small wireless facility permit review under this chapter shall neither prohibit nor have the effect of prohibiting the ability of an applicant to provide telecommunications services.
C. Public Comment. The applicant is encouraged to host informational meetings for the public regarding the deployment and shall post meeting notices, if any, for informational meetings on its website. These meetings are for the public’s information and are neither hearings nor part of any land use appeal process.
D. Withdrawal. Any applicant may withdraw a SWF application at any time, provided the withdrawal is made in writing. When a withdrawal is received, the application shall be deemed null and void. If such withdrawal occurs prior to the director’s decision, the applicant may request a refund of the unused portion of the application fee for staff time expended as determined in the sole discretion of the director. If such withdrawal is not accomplished prior to the director’s decision, there shall be no refund of all or any portion of such fee.
E. Supplemental Information. If an applicant is issued a written determination from the city that an application is not complete, the applicant shall have 180 calendar days from the date of personal delivery or date of mailing by the city to submit the required information to the city. If the applicant fails to resubmit, the applicant may request a refund of the unused portion of the application fee for staff time expended as determined in the sole discretion of the director.
F. Eligible Facilities Requests. The design approved in a small wireless facility permit shall be considered concealment elements and such facilities may only be expanded upon an eligible facilities request described in Article III of this chapter when the modification does not defeat the concealment elements of the small wireless facility.
G. Site-Specific Agreement. Prior to the issuance of a permit to construct a new pole or ground-mounted equipment in the right-of-way, the applicant must obtain a site-specific agreement from the city to locate such new pole or ground-mounted equipment. This requirement also applies to replacement poles when the replacement is necessary for the installation or attachment of small wireless facilities, the replacement structure is higher than the replaced structure, and the overall height of the replacement structure and the proposed small wireless facility is more than 60 feet. The director may execute such site-specific agreements on behalf of the city to any applicant that has obtained a franchise. (Ord. 2295 § 17, 2019).
A. The following information shall be provided by all applicants for a small wireless facility permit; provided, however, that the applicant may request a waiver of application requirements prior to submittal of an SWF permit application if, at the sole discretion of the director, the submittal information is duplicative or unnecessary in the specific situation:
1. The name, address, phone number, and signature of the applicant or authorized representative on a complete application form, applicable permit fee(s), and attachments signed and dated by the owner/agent. The application shall be on a form approved by the city.
2. The application shall provide the following:
a. The specific locational information including GIS coordinates of all proposed small wireless facilities and specify where the small wireless facilities will utilize existing, replacement or new poles, towers, existing buildings and/or other structures.
b. Ground-mounted equipment, conduit, junction boxes and fiber and electrical connections necessary for and intended for use in the deployment shall also be specified regardless of whether the additional facilities are to be constructed by the applicant or leased from a third party.
c. Color photographs of the existing site, and computer-generated color photographs depicting the proposed SWF incorporated into the site (e.g., photosimulations, or photosims). At least one color photograph and one color photosim shall be provided depicting the site as viewed from each adjacent public right-of-way.
d. Detailed construction drawings of the SWF, including engineering details.
3. The application shall have sufficient detail to identify:
a. The location and dimensions of existing buildings and structures, including setbacks and sidewalks, including five-foot-wide pedestrian accessible route;
b. The location of overhead and underground public utility, telecommunication, cable, water, sewer, and storm drainage and other lines and equipment in the rights-of-way along the proposed route and/or specific configuration and structural elements associated with structurally mounted facilities outside of the rights-of-way;
c. The location of existing watercourses, critical areas, utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, rockeries, and other built or natural features restricting use of the subject property or right-of-way;
d. The specific trees, structures, improvements, facilities, lines and equipment, and obstructions, if any, that applicant proposes to temporarily or permanently remove or relocate and a landscape plan for protecting, trimming, removing, replacing, and restoring any trees or areas to be disturbed during construction;
e. Compliance with aesthetic design concealment requirements of BMC 12.11.260 and the Bothell Standards and with the transportation requirements (e.g., pedestrian accessible routes, clear zones, sight distance).
4. Permission.
a. The applicant must show written approval from the owner of any pole or structure for the installation of its small wireless facilities on such pole or structure. Such written approval shall include approval of the specific pole or structure, engineering and design standards from the owner, unless the pole owner is the city. Submission of the lease agreement between the owner and the applicant is not required.
b. For city-owned poles or structures, the applicant must obtain a lease from the city prior to or concurrent with the small wireless permit application.
c. Small wireless facilities may not encroach onto or over private property or property outside of the right-of-way without the property owner’s express written consent. Such consent shall be submitted with the application.
5. Specific Location Considerations.
a. Any application for a small wireless facility located in the right-of-way adjacent to a parcel zoned for residential use shall demonstrate that it has considered all of the following:
(1) Whether a small wireless facility is currently installed on an existing pole in front of the same residential parcel. If a small wireless facility exists, then the applicant must demonstrate that no technically feasible alternative location exists that is not in front of the same residential parcel.
(2) Whether the proposed small wireless facility can be screened from residential view by choosing a pole location that is not directly in front of a window or views.
b. Any application for a small wireless facility located in a design district must provide appropriate analysis of location priority, as required by BMC 12.11.250 and the Bothell Standards, demonstrating that the SWF cannot be located outside the proposed design district.
6. Any application for a small wireless permit that contains an element not exempt from SEPA review shall simultaneously apply under Chapter 43.21C RCW and Chapter 14.02 BMC. Further, any application proposing small wireless facilities in shoreline management zones (pursuant to BMC Title 13) or in critical areas (pursuant to Chapter 14.04 BMC) must indicate that the application is exempt or comply with the review processes in such codes.
7. The applicant shall submit a sworn declaration signed by an RF engineer with knowledge of the proposed project affirming that the small wireless facilities will be compliant with all FCC and other governmental regulations in connection with human exposure to radio frequency emissions for every frequency at which the small wireless facility and, if applicable, associated wireless backhaul will operate. If facilities that generate RF radiation necessary to the small wireless facility are to be provided by a third party, then the small wireless facility permit shall be conditioned on an RF certification showing the impact of the RF emissions of the entire installation. The applicant may provide one emissions report for the entire small wireless deployment if the applicant is using the same small wireless facility configuration for all installations within that batch or may submit one emissions report for each subgroup installation identified in the batch.
8. A professional engineer licensed by the state of Washington shall certify in writing, over his or her seal, that both construction plans and final construction of the small wireless facilities and structure or pole and foundation are designed to reasonably withstand wind and seismic loads as established by the International Building Code. Further, the construction drawings shall depict all existing proposed improvements related to the proposed location, including but not limited to poles, driveways, ADA ramps, equipment cabinets, street trees, and structures within 150 feet from the proposed site. The construction drawings shall also include the applicant’s plan for electric and fiber utilities and for all conduits, cables, wires, handholes, junctions, meters, disconnect switches and any other ancillary equipment or construction necessary to construct the small wireless facility. Where another party is responsible for installing such electric and fiber utilities, conduits, cables, and related improvements, applicant’s construction drawings will include such utilities to the extent known at the time of application, but at a minimum applicant must indicate how it expects to obtain fiber (if applicable) and electric service to the small wireless facility.
9. A traffic control plan as required by BMC Title 17.
10. The small wireless facilities permit will include those elements that are typically contained in the right-of-way use permit to allow the applicant to proceed with the build-out of the small wireless facility deployment.
11. Such other information as the director and/or the public works director, in their discretion, deem appropriate to effectively evaluate the application based on technical, engineering, and aesthetic considerations.
B. The applicant may batch multiple small wireless facility sites in one application. The applicant is encouraged to batch the small wireless facility sites with similar designs and/or in a contiguous service area within one application. (Ord. 2295 § 18, 2019).
A. The issuance of a small wireless permit grants authority to construct small wireless facilities in the rights-of-way in a consolidated manner to allow the applicant, in most situations, to avoid the need to seek duplicative approval by both the public works and the community development departments. Specifically, small wireless facilities installed within the rights-of-way pursuant to an SWF permit may proceed to construct the approved SWFs without the need for an additional right-of-way use permit.
B. If the applicant requires a new franchise to utilize the right-of-way, the franchise approval may be consolidated with the small wireless facility permit review if requested by the applicant. As an exercise of police powers pursuant to RCW 35.99.040(2), the small wireless facility permit is not a right-of-way use permit, but instead a consolidated public works and land use permit. (Ord. 2295 § 19, 2019).
A. Upon approval of an SWF permit, the permittee shall comply with all of the requirements described within the permit.
B. Within 60 days after construction of the small wireless facility, the permittee shall provide the city with as-builts and site photographs of the small wireless facilities demonstrating compliance with the permit.
C. An SWF permittee shall construct and commence operation of the WSF within two years from the date of issuance. The director is authorized to approve a request for an extended expiration date where a construction schedule is provided by the applicant warranting such extension and approved prior to the permit issuance.
D. Every SWF permit may be renewed for a period of 180 days for an additional fee as long as no changes have been made to the originally approved location and plans. The request for an extension must be received prior to the permit expiration. For permits that have expired, a new permit must be obtained, and full new fees paid. No permit shall be renewed more than once.
E. Within 60 days of operation, the permittee shall send a letter to the city confirming that operation has commenced at the SWF.
F. The permittee must maintain the SWF in safe and working condition. The permittee shall be responsible for the removal of any graffiti or other vandalism and shall keep the site neat and orderly, including but not limited to following any maintenance or modifications on the site. (Ord. 2295 § 20, 2019).
A. Design District. Design districts may be established within the city where there are well-coordinated, cohesive streetscapes. These design districts will be established within the Bothell Standards. The placement, appearance, and location for SWFs within a design district will be governed by this chapter and by the Bothell Standards. Where there is an inconsistency between this chapter and the Bothell Standards, the Bothell Standards will control.
B. Any applicant who desires to place a small wireless facility in a design district must first establish that the applicant cannot locate the small wireless facility outside of a design district. Applications for small wireless facilities in a design district may be approved if the applicant demonstrates that due to technical infeasibility the applicant cannot locate the proposed small wireless facility on an existing or replacement pole within 500 feet of the proposed site and outside of a design district.
C. If the city has created a small wireless facility standard for poles within the design district in the Bothell Standards (as used herein “design district pole(s)”), then the applicant is required to first consider using the design district pole adopted for small wireless facilities from the Bothell Standards. Deviation from the adopted design district poles is only permitted pursuant to BMC 12.11.260(F)(2). (Ord. 2295 § 21, 2019).
Small wireless facility deployments shall conform to the following design standards:
A. General Requirements.
1. Ground-mounted equipment in the rights-of-way is prohibited, unless such facilities are placed underground or the applicant can demonstrate that pole-mounted or undergrounded equipment is technically infeasible. If ground-mounted equipment is necessary, then the applicant shall submit a concealment element plan. Generators located in the rights-of-way are prohibited.
2. No equipment shall be operated so as to produce noise in violation of Chapter 8.26 BMC.
3. Small wireless facilities are not permitted on traffic signal poles unless denial of the siting could be a prohibition or effective prohibition of the applicant’s ability to provide telecommunications service in violation of 47 USC §§ 253 and 332.
4. Replacement poles and new poles shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), city construction and sidewalk clearance standards, city ordinances, traffic warrants, and state and federal laws and regulations in order to provide a clear and safe passage. Further, the location of any replacement or new pole must: be physically feasible; not interfere with utility or safety fixtures (e.g., fire hydrants, traffic control devices); and not adversely affect the public welfare, health, or safety.
5. Vertical clearance shall be reviewed by the public works director to ensure that the small wireless facilities will not pose a hazard to other users of the rights-of-way.
6. Replacement poles shall be located as near as possible to the existing pole with the requirement to remove the abandoned pole.
7. No signage, message, or identification other than the manufacturer’s identification or identification required by governing law is allowed to be portrayed on any antenna or equipment enclosure. Any permitted signage shall be located on the equipment enclosures and be of the minimum amount required to achieve the intended purpose (no larger than four by six inches); provided, that signs are permitted as concealment element techniques where appropriate and safety signage is permitted as required by applicable laws or regulations.
8. Antennas and related equipment shall not be illuminated unless necessary for security reasons, required by a federal or state authority, or approved as part of a concealment element plan.
9. Side arm mounts for antennas and unified enclosures must be the minimum extension necessary and may be no more than 12 inches off the pole.
10. The preferred location of a small wireless facility on a pole is the location with the least visible impact as determined by the community development director.
11. Antennas, equipment enclosures, and ancillary equipment, conduit, and cable shall not visually dominate the structure or pole upon which they are attached.
12. Except for locations in the right-of-way, small wireless facilities are not permitted in the residential zones on any residential structure or on any property containing a single-family residential use.
13. The city may consider the cumulative visual effects of small wireless facilities mounted on poles within the rights-of-way when assessing proposed siting locations so as to not adversely affect the visual character of the city. This provision shall not be applied to limit the number of permits issued when no alternative sites are reasonably available nor to impose a technological requirement on the applicant.
14. These design standards are intended to be used solely for the purpose of concealment and siting. Nothing herein shall be interpreted or applied in a manner that dictates the use of a particular technology. When strict application of these requirements would unreasonably impair the function of the technology chosen by the applicant, be technically infeasible, or otherwise have the effect of prohibiting service, alternative forms of concealment or deployment that provide similar or greater protections from negative visual impacts to the streetscape may be permitted at the discretion of the director.
15. Upon adoption of a city standard small wireless facility pole design(s) within the Bothell Standards, an applicant shall first consider using or modifying the standard pole design to accommodate its small wireless facility without substantially changing the outward visual and aesthetic character of the design. The applicant, upon a showing that use or modification of the standard pole design is either technically or physically infeasible, or that the modified pole design will not comply with the city’s ADA, sidewalk clearance requirements and/or would violate electrical or other safety standards, may deviate from the adopted standard pole design and use the design standards as further described in subsections B and C of this section.
B. Outside a design district, small wireless facilities attached to existing or replacement nonwooden utility poles (in or outside the right-of-way) shall conform to the following design criteria:
1. The applicant shall minimize the antenna and equipment space and shall use the smallest amount of enclosure technically necessary to fit the equipment and antennas. The antennas and equipment shall be located using one or more of the following methods:
a. Concealed completely within the pole or pole base. Antennas and the associated equipment enclosures (including disconnect switches and other appurtenant devices) shall be fully concealed within the pole, unless such concealment is otherwise technically infeasible, or is incompatible with the pole design. If within the pole base, the base shall meet the ADA requirements and not impact the pedestrian access route.
b. Located on a pole. If located on a pole, antennas and the associated equipment enclosures or unified enclosure (including disconnect switches and other appurtenant devices) must be camouflaged to appear as an integral part of the pole.
(1) The antenna(s) shall be placed as close to the surface of the pole as possible, but may not be more than 12 inches off the surface of the pole, and only if such distance is necessary for antenna tilt and/or technical need. Each antenna may not exceed three cubic feet in volume.
(2) The equipment enclosure(s) shall be placed as close to the surface of the pole as possible, but the inside edge may not be more than six inches off the surface of the pole. The equipment must be placed in the smallest enclosure feasible for the technical need of the small wireless facility. The equipment enclosure(s) and all other wireless equipment associated with the utility pole, including wireless equipment associated with the antenna (including conduit) and any preexisting associated equipment on the pole, may not exceed 28 cubic feet. The applicant is encouraged to place the equipment enclosure(s) behind any banners or road signs that may be on the pole; provided, that such location does not interfere with the operation of the banners or signs or the operation of the small wireless facility.
(3) A unified antenna and equipment enclosure shall be placed as close to the surface of the pole as possible, but not more than 12 inches off the pole if necessary for antenna tilt and technical need. The unified equipment enclosure shall be the smallest size technically necessary, but shall not exceed the dimensional requirements of subsection (B)(1)(b)(2) of this section.
(4) The applicant may propose a side-mounted canister antenna, so long as the inside edge of the antenna is no more than 12 inches from the surface of the pole.
(5) Any equipment or antenna enclosures must meet WSDOT height clearance requirements. Applicants are encouraged to place the equipment enclosure as close to the antennas as physically and technically feasible, unless such placement would cause a greater aesthetic impact.
c. Underground in a utility vault. If located underground, the access lid to the equipment enclosure shall be located outside the footprint of any pedestrian curb ramp and shall have a nonskid surface meeting ADA requirements if located within an existing pedestrian access route.
2. All conduit, cables, wires, and fiber must be routed internally in the pole. Full concealment of all conduit, cables, wires, and fiber is required within mounting brackets, shrouds, canisters, or sleeves if attached to exterior antennas or equipment.
3. An antenna on top of an existing pole may not extend more than six feet above the height of the existing pole and the diameter may not exceed 16 inches, measured at the top of the pole, unless the applicant can demonstrate that more space is technically needed. The antenna shall be integrated into the pole design so that it appears as a continuation of the original pole, including being colored or painted to match the pole, and if technically feasible shall be shrouded or screened to blend with the pole, except for canister antennas which shall not require separate shrouding or screening. All cabling and mounting hardware/brackets from the bottom of the antenna to the top of the pole shall be fully concealed and integrated with the pole.
4. Any replacement pole shall substantially conform to the design of the pole it is replacing or the neighboring pole design utilized within the contiguous right-of-way.
5. The height of any replacement pole may not extend more than 10 feet above the height of the existing pole or the minimum additional height necessary; provided, that the height of the replacement pole cannot be extended further by additional antenna height.
6. The diameter of a replacement pole shall comply with the city’s setback and sidewalk clearance requirements and shall, to the extent technically feasible, not be more than a 25 percent increase of the existing nonwooden pole diameter measured at the base of the pole, unless additional diameter is needed in order to provide demonstrated need for structural stability or to conceal equipment or conduit within the base of the pole, and shall comply with the requirements in subsection (A)(4) of this section.
7. Unless specifically authorized through a site-specific lease agreement with the city to install a new pole in the right-of-way for a small wireless facility, the use of a pole in the right-of-way for the siting of a small wireless facility shall be considered secondary to the primary function of the pole. If the primary function of such pole serving as the host site for a small wireless facility becomes unnecessary, the pole shall not be retained for the sole purpose of accommodating the small wireless facility and the small wireless facility and all associated equipment shall be removed.
C. Outside a design district, small wireless facilities attached to existing or replacement wooden utility poles (in or outside the right-of-way) shall conform to the following design criteria:
1. The wooden pole at the proposed location may be replaced with a taller pole for the purpose of accommodating a small wireless facility; provided, that the replacement pole shall not exceed a height that is a maximum of 10 feet taller than the existing pole, unless a further height increase is required and confirmed in writing by the pole owner and that such height extension is the minimum extension necessary to provide sufficient separation and/or clearance from electrical and wireline facilities.
2. A pole extender may be used instead of replacing an existing wooden pole but may not increase the height of the existing pole by more than 10 feet, unless a further height increase is required and confirmed in writing by the pole owner and that such height increase is the minimum extension necessary to provide sufficient separation and/or clearance from electrical and wireline facilities. A “pole extender” as used herein is an object affixed between the pole and the antenna for the purpose of increasing the height of the antenna above the pole. The pole extender shall be painted to approximately match the color of the pole and shall substantially match the diameter of the pole measured at the top of the pole.
3. Replacement wooden poles must either match the approximate color and materials of the replaced pole or shall be the standard new wooden pole used by the pole owner in the city. Alternatively, the applicant may replace the wooden pole with a nonwooden pole with permission of or as required by the pole owner; provided, that the new pole is hollow and incorporates internal power and fiber conduit for the small wireless facility.
4. Antennas, equipment enclosures, and all ancillary equipment, boxes, and conduit shall be colored or painted to match the approximate color of the surface of the wooden pole on which they are attached.
5. Antennas shall not be mounted more than 12 inches from the surface of the wooden pole.
6. Antennas should be placed in an effort to minimize visual clutter and obtrusiveness. Multiple antennas are permitted on a wooden pole; provided, that each antenna enclosure shall not be more than three cubic feet in volume.
7. A canister antenna may be mounted on top of an existing wooden pole, which may not exceed the height requirements described in subsection (C)(1) of this section. A canister antenna mounted on the top of a wooden pole shall not exceed 16 inches in diameter, measured at the top of the pole, and shall be colored or painted to match the pole. The canister antenna must be placed to look as if it is an extension of the pole. In the alternative, the applicant may propose a side mounted canister antenna, so long as the inside edge of the antenna is no more than 12 inches from the surface of the wooden pole. All cables shall be concealed either within the canister antenna or within a sleeve between the antenna and the wooden pole.
8. An omni-directional antenna may be mounted on the top of an existing wooden pole, provided such antenna is no more than four feet in height and is mounted directly on the top of a pole or attached to a sleeve made to look like the exterior of the pole as close to the top of the pole as technically feasible. All cables shall be concealed within the sleeve between the bottom of the antenna and the mounting bracket.
9. The furthest point of any antenna or equipment enclosure may not extend more than 28 inches from the face of the pole, unless such extension is technically necessary. Any equipment or antenna enclosures must meet WSDOT height clearance requirements.
10. All related equipment mounted on wooden poles, including but not limited to ancillary equipment, radios, cables, associated shrouding, microwaves, and conduit, shall not be mounted more than six inches from the surface of the pole, unless a further distance is technically required.
11. Equipment for small wireless facilities must be attached to the wooden pole, unless otherwise permitted to be ground-mounted pursuant to subsection (A)(1) of this section. The equipment must be placed in the smallest enclosure possible for the intended purpose. The equipment enclosure and all other wireless equipment associated with the utility pole, including wireless equipment associated with the antenna and any preexisting associated equipment on the pole, may not exceed 28 cubic feet. The applicant is encouraged to place the equipment enclosure behind any banners or road signs that may be on the pole; provided, that such location does not interfere with the operation of the banners or signs.
12. An applicant who desires to enclose both its antennas and equipment within one unified enclosure may do so; provided, that such enclosure is the minimum size necessary for its intended purpose and the enclosure and all other wireless equipment associated with the pole including wireless equipment associated with the antenna and any preexisting associated equipment on the pole does not exceed 28 cubic feet. The unified enclosure may not be placed more than six inches from the surface of the pole, unless a further distance is technically necessary or required by the pole owner. To the extent possible, the unified enclosure must be placed either so as to appear as an integrated part of the pole or behind banners or signs; provided, that such location does not interfere with the operation of the banners or signs.
13. The visual effect of the small wireless facility on all other aspects of the appearance of the wooden pole shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible.
14. The use of the wooden pole for the siting of a small wireless facility shall be considered secondary to the primary function of the pole. If the primary function of a pole serving as the host site for a small wireless facility becomes unnecessary, the pole shall not be retained for the sole purpose of accommodating the small wireless facility and the small wireless facility and all associated equipment shall be removed.
15. The diameter of a replacement pole shall comply with the city’s setback and sidewalk clearance requirements and shall match the standard wood pole of the utility pole owner.
16. All cables and wires shall be routed through conduit along the outside of the pole. The outside conduit shall be colored or painted to match the pole. The number of conduit shall be minimized to the number technically necessary to accommodate the small wireless facility.
D. Small wireless facilities attached to existing buildings shall conform to this title design requirements and the following design criteria:
1. Small wireless facilities may be mounted to the sides of a building if the antennas do not interrupt the building’s architectural theme.
2. The interruption of architectural lines or horizontal or vertical reveals is discouraged.
3. New architectural features such as columns, pilasters, corbels, or other ornamentation that conceal antennas may be used if they complement the architecture of the existing building.
4. Small wireless facilities shall utilize the smallest mounting brackets necessary in order to provide the smallest offset from the building.
5. Skirts or shrouds must be utilized on the sides and bottoms of antennas in order to conceal mounting hardware, create a cleaner appearance, and minimize the visual impact of the antennas. Exposed cabling/wiring is prohibited.
6. Small wireless facilities shall be colored, painted, and/or textured to match the adjacent building surfaces or shall be colored or painted a natural, nonreflective color so as to blend in with the surroundings.
E. Any small wireless facility mounted on cable(s) strung between existing utility poles (“strand-mounted facility”) shall conform to the following standards:
1. Each strand-mounted facility, including antennas and equipment, shall not exceed three cubic feet in volume.
2. Only one strand-mounted facility is permitted per cable between any two existing poles.
3. The strand-mounted facility shall be placed as close as possible to the nearest utility pole, in no event more than five feet from the pole unless a greater distance is technically necessary or is required by the pole owner for safety clearance.
4. No strand-mounted facility shall be located in or above the portion of the roadway open to vehicular traffic.
5. Ground-mounted equipment to accommodate a strand-mounted facility is not permitted except when placed in preexisting equipment cabinets.
6. Pole-mounted equipment shall comply with the requirements of subsections A and C of this section.
7. Strand-mounted facilities must be installed to cause the least visual impact and without excess exterior cabling or wires (other than the original strand).
8. Strand-mounted facilities are prohibited on cables strung between nonwooden poles.
F. Small wireless facilities attached to (1) new poles in the rights-of-way or (2) to any poles in a design district shall conform to the following design criteria:
1. New Poles within the Rights-of-Way.
a. Generally, new poles within the rights-of-way are permitted only if the applicant can establish that:
(1) The proposed small wireless facility cannot be located on an existing or replacement utility pole or light pole, on an electrical transmission tower, or on a site outside of the public rights-of-way or a design district, such as a public park, public property, building, transmission tower, or in or on a nonresidential use whether by roof or panel-mount or separate structure;
(2) The proposed small wireless facility is consistent with the Bothell Standards;
(3) The proposed small wireless facility receives approval for a concealment element design, as described in subsection (F)(2) of this section; and
(4) The proposed small wireless facility also complies with the Shoreline Management Act and SEPA, if applicable.
b. No new poles shall be located in a critical area or associated buffer required by the city’s critical areas regulations (Chapter 14.04 BMC), except when determined to be exempt pursuant to said ordinance.
c. Even if an alternative location is determined to exist instead of installing a new pole in the right-of-way, the public works director may determine that a new pole in the right-of-way is in fact a superior alternative based on the impact to the city, the concealment element design, the city’s comprehensive plan, and the added benefits to the community.
2. New Pole Designs.
a. Within a Design District.
(1) If the applicant desires to place the small wireless facility in a design district and the city has adopted in the Bothell Standards a small wireless facility standard for poles within the design district (as used herein, “design district pole(s)”), then the applicant is required to use the design district pole to install the small wireless facility. The applicant may propose modifying the design district pole design to accommodate its small wireless facility without substantially changing the outward visual and aesthetic character of the design. The applicant may deviate from the adopted design district pole design and propose a concealment element design consistent with subsection (F)(2)(a)(2) of this section, but only upon a showing that using the design district pole, even in a modified manner, is either technically or physically infeasible or that the adopted or a modified pole design will not comply with the city’s ADA or sidewalk clearance requirements and/or would violate electrical or other safety standards.
(2) If a design district pole is not utilized, the concealment element design shall minimize the visual obtrusiveness of the small wireless facility. The concealment element design must include the design of screening, fencing, or other concealment technology for a pole or equipment structure and for all related transmission equipment or facilities associated with the proposed small wireless facility, including but not limited to fiber and power connections. The applicant shall aim to mimic the general designs and height of the design district pole, unless the director otherwise approves a deviation or modification due to aesthetic or safety concerns. The proposed new pole shall be a nonwooden hollow pole and include a light feature that matches the style of the design district pole, unless such lighting is determined unnecessary by the director. Other concealment methods include, but are not limited to, integrating the installation with architectural features or building design components; utilization of coverings or concealment devices of similar material, color, and texture (or the appearance thereof) as the surface against which the installation will be seen or on which it will be installed; landscape design; or other camouflage strategies appropriate for the type of installation. Applicants are required to utilize designs in which all conduit and wirelines are installed internally in the structure. Further, applicant designs must, to the extent technically and physically feasible, comply with the applicable design regulations adopted in subsections B and C of this section and within the Bothell Standards.
(3) If the director has already approved a concealment element design either for the applicant or another small wireless facility within the design district, then the applicant shall utilize a substantially similar concealment element design, unless it can show that such concealment element design is not physically or technically feasible or that such deployment would undermine the generally applicable design standards. This subsection shall only apply if the design district pole is either technically or physically infeasible in the proposed location(s) consistent with requirements of subsection (F)(2)(a)(1) of this section.
b. Outside of the Design District.
(1) Upon adoption of a city standard small wireless facility pole design(s) within the Bothell Standards for new poles outside a design district, an applicant shall first consider using or modifying the standard pole design to accommodate its small wireless facility without substantially changing the outward visual and aesthetic character of the design. Upon a showing that use or modification of the applicable standard pole design is either technically or physically infeasible or that the modified pole design will not comply with the city’s ADA or sidewalk clearance requirements and/or would violate electrical or other safety standards, the applicant may deviate from the adopted standard pole design and use the design standards as further described below.
(2) If a standard pole design adopted in the Bothell Standards is not utilized, the concealment element design should seek to minimize the visual obtrusiveness of the small wireless facility. The concealment element design must include the design of screening, fencing, or other concealment technology for a pole or equipment structure and for all related transmission equipment or facilities associated with the proposed small wireless facility, including but not limited to fiber and power connections. The proposed pole or structure should have similar designs to existing neighboring poles in the rights-of-way, including similar height to the extent technically feasible, except that the new pole must be a nonwooden, hollow pole. The proposed new pole shall include a light feature, unless such lighting is determined unnecessary by the director. Other concealment methods include, but are not limited to, integrating the installation with architectural features or building design components; utilization of coverings or concealment devices of similar material, color, and texture (or the appearance thereof) as the surface against which the installation will be seen or on which it will be installed; landscape design; or other camouflage strategies appropriate for the type of installation. Applicants are required to utilize designs in which all conduit and wirelines are installed internally in the structure. Further, applicant designs must, to the extent technically and physically feasible, comply with the applicable design regulations adopted in subsections B and C of this section and within the Bothell Standards.
(3) If the director has already approved a concealment element design either for the applicant or another small wireless facility along the same public right-of-way, then the applicant shall utilize a substantially similar concealment element design, unless the applicant can show that such concealment element design is not physically or technically feasible or that such deployment would undermine the generally applicable design standards. This subsection shall only apply if the standard small wireless facility pole design is either technically or physically infeasible in the proposed location(s) consistent with requirements of subsection (F)(2)(b)(1) of this section. (Ord. 2295 § 22, 2019).
The following definitions shall only apply to this article relating to eligible facilities requests:
A. “Base station” means a structure or equipment at a fixed location that enables FCC-licensed or authorized wireless communications between user equipment and a communications network. The term does not encompass a tower as defined herein nor any equipment associated with a tower. “Base station” includes, without limitation:
1. Equipment associated with wireless communications services as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul.
2. Radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, regular and backup power supplies, and comparable equipment, regardless of technological configuration (including distributed antenna systems (“DAS”) and small wireless networks).
3. Any structure other than a tower that, at the time the relevant application is filed (with jurisdiction) under this section, supports or houses equipment described in subsections (A)(1) and (A)(2) of this section that has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process, even if the structure was not built for the sole or primary purpose of providing that support.
4. The term does not include any structure that, at the time the eligible facilities request application is filed with the city, does not support or house equipment described in subsections (A)(1) and (A)(2) of this section.
B. “Collocation” means the mounting or installation of transmission equipment on an eligible support structure for the purpose of transmitting and/or receiving radio frequency signals for communication purposes.
C. “Eligible facilities request” means any request for modification of an existing tower or base station that does not substantially change the physical dimensions of such tower or base station, involving:
1. Collocation of new transmission equipment;
2. Removal of transmission equipment; or
3. Replacement of transmission equipment.
D. “Eligible support structure” means any tower or base station as defined in this section; provided, that it is existing at the time the relevant application is filed with the city.
E. Existing. A constructed tower or base station is “existing” if it has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process; provided, that a tower that has not been reviewed and approved because it was not in a zoned area when it was built, but was lawfully constructed, is existing for purposes of this definition.
F. Substantial Change. A modification “substantially changes” the physical dimensions of an eligible support structure if it meets any of the following criteria:
1. For towers other than towers in the public rights-of-way, it increases the height of the tower by more than 10 percent or by the height of one additional antenna array with separation from the nearest existing antenna not to exceed 20 feet, whichever is greater; for other eligible support structures, it increases the height of the structure by more than 10 percent or more than 10 feet, whichever is greater;
a. Changes in height should be measured from the original support structure in cases where deployments are or will be separated horizontally, such as on buildings’ rooftops; in other circumstances, changes in height should be measured from the dimensions of the tower or base station, inclusive of originally approved appurtenances and any modifications that were approved prior to the passage of Section 6409(a) of the Spectrum Act as part of the Middle Class Tax Relief and Job Creation Act of 2012;
2. For towers other than towers in the public rights-of-way, it involves adding an appurtenance to the body of the tower that would protrude from the edge of the tower more than 20 feet, or more than the width of the tower structure at the level of the appurtenance, whichever is greater; for other eligible support structures, it involves adding an appurtenance to the body of the structure that would protrude from the edge of the structure by more than six feet;
3. For any eligible support structure, it involves installation of more than the standard number of new equipment cabinets for the technology involved, but not to exceed four cabinets; or, for towers in the public rights-of-way and base stations, it involves installation of any new equipment cabinets on the ground if there are no preexisting ground cabinets associated with the structure, or else involves installation of ground cabinets that are more than 10 percent larger in height or overall volume than any other ground cabinets associated with the structure;
4. It entails any excavation or deployment outside the current site;
5. It would defeat the concealment elements of the eligible support structure; or
6. It does not comply with conditions associated with the siting approval of the construction or modification of the eligible support structure or base station equipment; provided, however, that this limitation does not apply to any modification that is noncompliant only in a manner that would not exceed the thresholds identified above.
G. “Tower” means any structure built for the sole or primary purpose of supporting any FCC-licensed or authorized antennas and their associated facilities, including structures that are constructed for wireless communications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul and the associated site.
H. “Transmission equipment” means equipment that facilitates transmission for any FCC-licensed or authorized wireless communication service, including, but not limited to, radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, and regular and backup power supply. The term includes equipment associated with wireless communications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul. (Ord. 2295 § 24, 2019).
A. Application Review.
1. Application. The city shall prepare and make publicly available an application form that shall be limited to the information necessary for the city to consider whether an application is an eligible facilities request. The application cannot require the applicant to demonstrate a need or business case for the proposed modification.
2. Type of Review. Upon receipt of an application for an eligible facilities request pursuant to this chapter, the director shall review such application to determine whether the application qualifies as an eligible facilities request.
3. Time Frame for Review. Within 60 days of the date on which an applicant applies seeking approval under this chapter, the director shall approve the application unless it determines that the application is not covered by this section.
4. Tolling of the Time Frame for Review. The 60-day review period begins to run when the application is filed and may be tolled only by mutual agreement by the city and the applicant or in cases where the director determines that the application is incomplete. The time frame for review of an eligible facilities request is not tolled by a moratorium on the review of applications.
a. To toll the time frame for incompleteness, the director shall provide written notice to the applicant within 30 days of receipt of the application, clearly and specifically delineating all missing documents or information required in the application.
b. The time frame for review begins running again when the applicant makes supplemental submission in response to the city’s notice of incompleteness.
c. Following a supplemental submission, the director will notify the applicant within 10 days that the supplemental submission did not provide the information identified in the original notice delineating missing information. The time frame is tolled in the case of second or subsequent notices pursuant to the procedures identified in this subsection (A)(4). The second or subsequent notice of incompleteness may not specify missing documents or information that was not delineated in the original notice of incompleteness.
5. Determination That Application Is Not an Eligible Facilities Request. If the city determines that the applicant’s request does not qualify as an eligible facilities request, the city shall deny the application. To the extent additional information is necessary, the city manager may request such information from the applicant to evaluate the application under other provisions of this chapter and applicable law.
B. Failure to Act. In the event the city fails to approve or deny a request for an eligible facilities request within the time frame for review (accounting for any tolling), the request shall be deemed granted. The deemed grant does not become effective until the applicant notifies the director in writing after the review period has expired (accounting for any tolling) that the application has been deemed granted.
C. Remedies. Both the applicant and the city may bring claims related to Section 6409(a) of the Spectrum Act to any court of competent jurisdiction. (Ord. 2295 § 25, 2019).
A. Each permit granted pursuant to this chapter shall contain a condition which requires the permittee to reimburse the city for all direct and indirect expenses reasonably incurred in connection with the modification, amendment, or transfer of the permit.
B. Each permittee shall be required to reimburse the city for all direct and indirect expenses not otherwise covered by permit application fees reasonably incurred while reviewing, inspecting, and supervising the construction, installation, and/or maintenance of a WCF authorized by a permit granted pursuant to this chapter.
C. Costs incurred by the city in response to any emergency at a WCF or SWF shall be included within the reimbursable expenses set forth in this section. (Ord. 2295 § 27, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.090).
Each permittee shall maintain its WCF or SWF in a good and safe condition and preserve its original appearance and concealment, disguise, or camouflage elements incorporated into the design at the time of approval and in a manner which complies with all applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Such maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, such items as painting, repair of equipment, and maintenance of landscaping. (Ord. 2295 § 28, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.100).
A. Any proposed change, modification, or addition to any existing WCF or SWF that does not qualify as an eligible facilities request shall require the issuance of a new WCF or SWF permit, pursuant to the requirements of this chapter. Such modifications include but are not limited to expanding or changing the antenna type, increasing the equipment enclosure, placing additional pole-mounted or ground-mounted equipment, or modifying the concealment elements.
B. This provision requiring a new permit does not apply to routine maintenance and repair of a WCF or SWF.
C. This provision also does not apply to the replacement of any portion of the WCF with similar equipment, as described in this chapter. Similarly, this provision does not apply to SWFs for the replacement of an antenna or equipment of similar size, weight, and height; provided, that such replacement does not (1) defeat the concealment elements used in the original deployment of the SWF; (2) does not impact the structural integrity of the pole; and/or (3) does not require pole replacement. Further, a new SWF permit shall not be required for replacing equipment within the equipment enclosure or reconfiguration of fiber or power to the small wireless facility.
D. While a new WCF or SWF permit may not be required, any routine maintenance, repair, or replacement shall comply with Chapter 17.02 BMC and the Bothell Standards, including the general standards applicable to the use of the rights-of-way described in BMC Title 17. As such, a right-of-way use permit may be required.
E. Following any modification, repair, or replacement to a WCF or SWF that changes or may change the radio frequency radiation, the permittee must submit a copy of a revised non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation (NIER) report. The revised report must be submitted to the city within 30 days following the update of the facility. (Ord. 2295 § 29, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.110).
A. Each permittee shall conduct tests necessary to demonstrate compliance with all applicable local regulations regarding the noise emissions of the WCF or SWF. All such tests shall be performed by or under the supervision of a qualified acoustical consultant competent to perform such tests and interpret the data gathered. The requirement to conduct noise tests may be waived for SWFs that do not include noise generating equipment or antennas.
B. All permittees shall submit a report, certified by a qualified acoustical consultant, setting forth the observed noise levels at the property line of the property upon which the WCF is located. The report shall account for background noise and other noise sources and demonstrate the noise levels emitted by the WCF, including any air conditioning or ventilation equipment contained therein.
C. Compliance reports shall be required upon request by the city or upon a modification, in which such modification changes the noise from the report measures described in subsection B of this section.
D. The city may retain a technical expert in environmental noise measurement to verify the noise measurements and certification. The cost of such a technical expert shall be borne by the permittee.
E. Upon request from the city, the operator of a SWF shall submit a report, certified by a qualified acoustical consultant, setting forth the observed noise levels at the closest private property line from where the SWF is located. The report shall account for background noise and other noise sources and demonstrate the noise levels emitted by the SWF, including any air conditioning or ventilation equipment contained therein. (Ord. 2295 § 30, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.130).
All WCFs and SWFs shall be protected from unauthorized use through appropriate means approved by the director on a case-by-case basis consistent with the purpose of protecting the public health, safety, and welfare. (Ord. 2295 § 31, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.140).
A. Any WCF or SWF that has had no antenna mounted upon it for a period of six months, or if the antenna(s) mounted thereon is not operated for a period of three months, shall be considered abandoned, and the owner thereof shall remove the WCF or SWF within 90 days following the six- or three-month period.
B. In the event that more than one wireless service provider is using the antenna support structure, the antenna support structure shall not be considered abandoned until all such users cease using the structure as provided in this section.
C. If a WCF or SWF and associated equipment are not removed within 90 days after receipt of a notice from the city requiring said removal, the city may seek and obtain a court order directing such removal and imposing a lien upon the real property upon which such WCF is situated in an amount equal to the cost of removal. (Ord. 2295 § 32, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.150).
A decision of the director or their designee made in accordance with this chapter, including assessment of fees as provided herein, shall be considered a final Type I administrative decision. (Ord. 2295 § 33, 2019).
In addition to the remedies and process set forth in Chapter 11.20 BMC, a permit issued pursuant to this chapter may be revoked for the following reasons:
A. Construction and/or maintenance operation of a WCF or SWF commences or occurred at an unauthorized location;
B. Construction or operation of a WCF or SWF commences or is found to be in violation of any of the terms and conditions of this chapter or the conditions attached to the permit;
C. Misrepresentation or lack of candor by or on behalf of an applicant, permittee, or wireless communications service provider in any application or written or oral statement upon which the city substantially relies in making the decision to grant, review or amend any permit pursuant to this chapter;
D. Abandonment of a WCF as set forth in this chapter;
E. Failure to relocate or remove facilities as required in this chapter; or
F. Failure to promptly cure a violation of the terms or conditions of the permit. (Ord. 2295 § 34, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.170).
The ordinance codified in this title may be cited as either the Bothell Zoning Code or BMC Title 12, and is hereinafter referred to as “this title.” (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this title is to promote the public health, safety and welfare through regulations which control the location and development of land uses within the city of Bothell, in accordance with the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. (Ord. 2441 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. No use or structure shall be established, substituted, expanded, constructed, altered, moved, maintained or otherwise changed except in conformance with this title.
B. Creation of or changes to lot lines shall conform with the use provisions, dimensional and other standards, and procedures of this title and city of Bothell subdivision regulations.
C. All land uses and development authorized by this title shall comply with all other regulations and/or requirements of this title and any other local, state or federal agency that has jurisdiction over land uses and development. Where a difference exists between this title and other regulations, the more restrictive requirements shall apply.
D. Where more than one part of this title applies to the same aspect of a proposed use or development, the more restrictive requirement shall apply, except as provided in BMC 12.04.020. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In interpretation and application, the requirements set forth in this title shall be considered the minimum requirements necessary to accomplish the purposes of this title. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Regulations, conditions or procedural requirements that are specific to an individual land use shall supersede regulations, conditions or procedural requirements of general application.
B. A land use shall be interpreted as including structures within or on which the use is conducted.
C. Chapter and section headings, captions, illustrations and references to other sections or titles are for reference or explanation only and shall not be deemed to govern, limit, modify, or in any manner affect the scope, meaning or intent of any section. In case of any ambiguity, difference of meaning or implication between text and any heading, caption or illustrations, the text and the permitted use tables in Chapter 12.06 BMC shall control. All applicable requirements shall govern a use whether or not they are cross-referenced in a text section or land use table.
D. The word “shall” is mandatory and the word “may” is discretionary.
E. Unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, words in the present tense shall include past and future tense, and words in the singular shall include the plural or vice versa. Except for words and terms defined in this title, all words and terms used in this title shall have their customary meanings.
F. The words “use,” “used,” “occupy” or “occupied” as applied to any land or building shall be interpreted to include the words “intended,” “arranged” or “designed” to be used or occupied. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Amendments to the provisions of this title shall be made consistent with the procedures in Chapter 11.18 BMC. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish and describe the purpose of zoning classifications utilized in this title, and to establish maps which depict the geographic allocation of those zoning classifications throughout the city. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In order to regulate the use of land and structures, the city is divided into the following land use zoning classifications. The development potential of any individual property under these zoning classifications shall be based on the net buildable area of that property, and shall be further subject to planned unit development provisions, availability of necessary utilities, critical area regulations, impact mitigation and other applicable development policies, regulations and standards.
Name | Symbol |
|---|---|
Agricultural | AG |
Residential/Conservation | R-C |
Residential/Low 1 | R-L1 |
Residential/Low 2 | R-L2 |
Residential/Medium 1 | R-M1 |
Residential/Medium 2 | R-M2 |
Residential/Medium 3 | R-M3 |
Residential/Medium 4 | R-M4 |
Residential – Activity Center (see subarea plan for minimum density; maximum number of units controlled by site and building envelope regulations) | R-AC |
Residential/Manufactured Home Park | R-MHP |
Office-Professional | OP |
Neighborhood Business | NB |
Community Business | CB |
General Commercial | GC |
Mixed Use/Neighborhood Overlay | MU-N |
Mixed Use/Community Overlay | MU-C |
Mixed Use/Employment Overlay | MU-E |
Commercial/General Overlay | C-G |
Employment/Medium (City) Overlay | E-MC |
Light Industrial | LI |
Specialized Senior Housing Overlay | SSHO |
Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay | MVSO |
North Creek Fish and Wildlife Critical Habitat Protection Area | NCFWCHPA |
Zoning classifications are applied separately (e.g., R-M4) where one category of land use is determined to be appropriate as designated by the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, and in combination (e.g., R-M4, OP, CB) where more than one category of land use is determined to be appropriate as designated by the plan. When used in combination, the most permissive regulations of the combined zones shall apply, unless specifically provided otherwise, such as minimum density and minimum floor area ratio requirements which must be met. (Ord. 2457 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 6, 2021; Ord. 2282 § 4, 2019; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The intent of agricultural zoning classification (AG) is to preserve and protect irreplaceable and limited supplies of farmland well suited to agricultural uses by their location, geological formation and chemical and organic composition, and to encourage environmentally sound agricultural production. This classification is assigned solely to the Magnolia Dairy properties in the Westhill Subarea: further development of these properties is subject to the regulations in Chapter 12.62 BMC and the terms of the 1986 King County purchase of development rights, consistent with the provisions of Chapter 84.34 RCW. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010).
The intent of residential zoning classifications (R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, R-M2, R-M3, R-M4, R-MHP, R-AC) is to provide locations for a range of densities and housing types to ensure a broad choice of attractive and affordable living accommodations to persons desiring to reside in Bothell. Residential zones may contain as outright permitted uses or conditional uses certain nonresidential uses which enhance the community including but not limited to schools, churches and parks. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification is intended to allow specialized senior housing development at densities higher than normally permitted in specified R-C through R-M3 zoning districts where such development has been determined to be appropriate due to proximity to facilities and/or services which especially benefit the elderly. The implementing regulations concerning the location, density, design and operation of specialized senior housing are set forth in the subarea chapter in which the SSHO zoning classification is located. The SSHO zoning classification provides for an additional use within, but does not replace, the underlying zoning classification. SSHO zoning classification regulations shall not apply to uses other than specialized senior housing (see BMC 12.04.020). (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997).
The Office-Professional zoning classification (OP) is intended to provide locations for personal and professional service businesses such as banks, medical, dental and psychological clinics, accounting, law, real estate, insurance and travel agencies. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Neighborhood Business zoning classification (NB) is intended to provide locations for retail and service businesses which serve the limited convenience shopping and personal service needs of the immediate surrounding neighborhood. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Community Business zoning classification (CB) is intended to provide locations for retail, dining, entertainment, and other businesses which are primarily oriented indoors and serve large portions of the city or the community as a whole. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay zoning classification (MVSO) is intended to allow the sale and outside display of automobiles, vans, light trucks, motorcycles, boats and watercraft within Community Business (CB) zoning districts where such development has been determined to be appropriate due to proximity to arterial streets, high intensity retail uses, and the presence of other motor vehicle dealers. The sale and display of heavy equipment such as construction and earthmoving equipment, tractors, farm implements, heavy vehicles such as heavy trucks, dump trucks and trailers, semi-tractors and trailers, buses, recreational vehicles and other large-sized vehicles are not permitted within the MVSO. The implementing regulations concerning the location, landscaping, lighting and design of motor vehicle sales lots within Community Business zones are set forth in the applicable subarea chapter in which the MVSO zoning classification is located. The MVSO zoning classification provides for an additional use within, but does not replace, the underlying zoning classification. The MVSO zoning classification regulations shall not apply to uses other than motor vehicle sales. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001).
The General Commercial zoning classification (GC) is intended to provide locations for retail and service uses which typically require outdoor display and/or storage of merchandise, involve the operation or repair of machinery, and/or generate noise as a part of their operations. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Mixed Use Neighborhood Overlay (MU-N) is intended to promote mixed-use development focused on medium-density multifamily residential and supporting neighborhood business in areas near other higher-intensity mixed-use development and with good access to other services. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for a mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services with a focus on medium density multifamily residential and supporting neighborhood businesses, with typical heights up to five stories and a target FAR of up to 3.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Mixed Use Community Overlay (MU-C) is intended to promote transit-oriented, mixed-use development focused on higher density multifamily residential and supporting retail and services in areas closest to high-capacity transit. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for a mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services with a focus on higher-density multifamily residential and supporting retail and services, with typical heights up to five stories with a target FAR of up to 3.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Mixed Use Employment Overlay (MU-E) is intended to promote transit-oriented, mixed-use development providing employment and multifamily housing opportunities in areas closest to high capacity transit, including portions of the Canyon Park Regional Growth Center, North Creek Business Park, and the Midtown Subarea. These areas are intended to foster centers of activity, reduce automobile trips, and encourage other travel modes and to make use of existing neighborhood anchors, such as groceries, parks, schools, and other businesses. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for a mix of office, residential, retail, services, and other comparable commercial uses, with a focus on multifamily housing and supportive commercial activities, with typical heights up to seven stories and a target FAR of up to 3.5. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Commercial General Overlay (C-G) is intended to promote options for local retail, service, dining/entertainment, personal and professional service businesses, and other businesses that serve large portions of the city or the community as a whole. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay allow for retail and service uses ranging from those primarily oriented indoors to those which typically require outdoor display and/or storage of merchandise, involve the operation or repair of machinery, and/or generate noise as a part of their operations. The overlay also allows for personal and professional service businesses, which may include banks, medical, dental, and psychological clinics, accounting, law, real estate, insurance, and travel agencies. The C-G overlay allows for typical heights up to three stories and a target FAR of up to 2.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The Employment Medium (City) Overlay (E-MC) is intended to provide specifically for medium intensity employment opportunities and supporting non-residential uses. The principal uses and intensity within the overlay are intended primarily for medium-intensity office/flex/manufacturing uses with some light industrial, with maximum heights typically up to five stories and a target FAR of up to 3.0. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
The intent of the Light Industrial zoning classification (LI) is to provide for a range of manufacturing, processing, wholesaling, distributing, and similar activities, together with associated administrative and office uses, which typically serve regional, national, and international markets. Such uses tend to require large buildings and to generate more large truck traffic than do other types of land uses. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The North Creek Fish and Wildlife Critical Habitat Protection Area (NCFWCHPA) zoning classification is intended to implement special protections for specified areas within the city which have been determined to contain or contribute to exceptional fish and wildlife habitat. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005).
The shoreline master program (SMP) contains use, development, performance, and procedural regulations which apply to portions of the city within 200 feet of the ordinary high water mark of North Creek and the Sammamish River, plus associated wetlands. The shoreline master program comprises BMC Title 13. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The Manufactured Home Park zoning classification is intended to promote the retention of manufactured home parks as a source of affordable detached single-family and senior housing. This classification is assigned to certain existing manufactured home parks which contain rental pads, as opposed to fee simple owned lots, and as such are more susceptible to future redevelopment. The Manufactured Home Park zoning classification limits development to manufactured home parks unless and until a comprehensive plan and zoning amendment for another type of land use is requested, considered and adopted. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Within designated activity centers in conjunction with the R-AC zone classification, the OP, NB, CB, GC, and LI zones may have a minimum floor area ratio (FAR) established within the individual subarea plan regulations. The maximum FAR shall be controlled by site and building regulations concerning height, parking, landscaping, setbacks, and other aspects of development established within each subarea plan. (Ord. 2353 § 6, 2021).
Prior to the Canyon Park Annexation, owners of certain properties within the annexation boundaries entered into concomitant zoning agreements with the city providing for retention of Snohomish County development regulations, as they existed at adoption of the annexation, for varying lengths of time, depending on the individual agreement. As these agreements expire, or if property owners desire to void their agreements prior to the expiration dates, the Snohomish County development regulations which existed at adoption of the annexation, which regulations were adopted and codified as the Bothell Municipal Code Appendix, will be replaced with city of Bothell development regulations, including zoning classifications. The boundaries of properties subject to these concomitant zoning agreements are depicted on the zoning map. (Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In order to plan for and regulate the use of land and structures in a manner which recognizes that residential neighborhoods and business areas within Bothell vary one from another in desired character, subareas are established in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan and these implementing zoning regulations.
Subarea comprehensive plans are implemented in part through the adoption of use, development, performance, or procedural regulations specific to the subarea or to a portion or portions of the subarea. Regulations which are specific to a subarea or portions of a subarea are located in the chapter of this zoning code concerning the subarea.
The following subareas are established:
Name | Symbol | Code Chapter |
|---|---|---|
Queensborough/Brentwood/Crystal Springs | QB | 12.42 |
Shelton View/Meridian/3rd Avenue SE | SV | 12.44 |
Country Village/Lake Pleasant/527 Corridor | CV | 12.46 |
Canyon Park | CP | 12.48 |
Canyon Creek/39th Avenue SE | CC | 12.50 |
Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE | FI | 12.52 |
Maywood/Beckstrom Hill | MB | 12.54 |
North Creek/NE 195th Street | NC | 12.56 |
Bloomberg Hill | BH | 12.58 |
Brickyard Road/Queensgate | BR | 12.60 |
Westhill | WH | 12.62 |
Downtown | DT | 12.64 |
Waynita/Simonds/Norway Hill | WS | 12.66 |
Locust/14th Avenue W | LO | 12.68 |
Damson/Logan | DL | 12.70 |
Filbert/Winesap | FW | 12.72 |
Thrasher’s Corner/Red Hawk | TC | 12.74 |
(Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The downtown subarea regulations in Chapter 12.64 BMC comprise zoning regulations which are unique to the downtown subarea, except where other regulations in this title are adopted by reference. The downtown subarea regulations reside in a document, entitled the “Downtown Subarea Plan and Regulations,” which is formatted differently and bound separately from the other regulations in this title. The downtown subarea regulations utilize district zoning classifications unique to this subarea, which zoning classifications are denoted in color in the downtown subarea plan and regulations but are assigned letter symbols for city-wide zoning classification mapping purposes as follows:
Name of Downtown Subarea District | Symbol |
|---|---|
Downtown Core District | DC |
Downtown Neighborhood District | DN |
Downtown Transition District | DT |
SR-522 Corridor District | 522 |
General Downtown Corridor District | GDC |
Sunrise/Valley View District | SVV |
Campus District | C |
Parks and Public Open Space District | PPOS |
(Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009).
The Canyon Park Subarea regulations in Chapter 12.48 BMC comprise zoning classifications and regulations which are unique to the subarea, except where other regulations in this title are adopted by reference.
Name of Canyon Park Subarea Districts | Symbol |
|---|---|
Office/Residential Mixed-Use – High | OR-H |
Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Medium | OR-M |
Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Low | OR-L |
Residential Mixed-Use – High | RMU-H |
Residential Mixed-Use – Medium | RMU-M |
Employment – Medium | E-M |
Employment – Low | E-L |
A. Office/Residential Mixed-Use – High (OR-H). This zone is intended for a high-intensity, transit-oriented mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services in those areas closest to high-capacity transit service. Professional office uses will be emphasized in those areas closest to the planned high-capacity transit station. Buildings up to seven stories are envisioned throughout the district.
B. Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Medium (OR-M). This zone is intended for a medium-intensity (three to six stories) mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services and functions as a transition between the high-intensity transit-oriented development and nearby job opportunities.
C. Office/Residential Mixed-Use – Low (OR-L). This zone is intended for a lower-intensity (up to three stories) mix of office, residential, and retail or other commercial services further from transit and focused public investments and could include “missing middle” housing that makes use of North Creek as an amenity and connects residential areas.
D. Residential Mixed-Use – High (RMU-H). This zone is intended for high-intensity residential uses (three to six stories) within walking distance to high-capacity transit service. Office, retail, and other commercial services are also allowed in the zone.
E. Residential Mixed-Use – Medium (RMU-M). This zone is intended for medium-intensity residential uses (three to six stories) and functions as a transition between the high-intensity transit-oriented development and nearby job opportunities. Office, retail, and other commercial services are also allowed in the zone.
F. Employment – Medium (E-M). This zone is intended for medium-intensity (three- to six-story) office/flex/manufacturing uses.
G. Employment – Low (E-L). This zone is intended for low-intensity (one- to two-story) office/flex/manufacturing uses. (Ord. 2341 § 2, 2020).
This title consists of text, illustrations, and city-wide and subarea zoning maps. The purpose of the city-wide zoning map is to depict the exact boundaries of each zoning classification for the entire city. The purpose of the subarea zoning maps is to depict the exact boundaries of each zoning classification within each subarea and the exact boundaries of special zoning districts in which regulations specific to that district apply. The city-wide and subarea zoning maps are adopted as parts of the ordinance codified in this title, and may be amended from time to time by ordinance.

(Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.04.130).
When uncertainty exists as to boundaries of any land use zoning classification on the zoning map, the community development director following the administrative procedures of a Type I application as contained in Chapter 11.04 BMC shall make a determination as to the location of the boundary in question based on the following rules of construction:
A. Where zone boundaries are indicated as approximately following the centerline of street, alley or highway right-of-way, the actual centerline shall be the boundary.
B. Where zone boundaries are indicated as running approximately parallel to the centerline of the street right-of-way, the boundary line shall be construed to be parallel to the centerline of the street right-of-way.
C. Where zone boundaries are indicated as approximately following the lot or tract lines, the actual lot or tract lines shall be construed to be the boundaries of such zone.
D. Where a zone boundary divides a tract in unsubdivided property, the location of such zone boundary, unless the same is indicated by dimensions thereon, shall be determined by use of the scale appearing on the zoning map.
E. Zone boundaries indicated as following shorelines shall be interpreted to follow such shorelines, and in the event of change in the shoreline shall be interpreted as moving with the actual shoreline.
F. Where a public street or alley right-of-way is officially vacated or abandoned, the regulations applicable to the abutting property to which the vacated portion shall revert shall apply to such vacated or abandoned street or alley right-of-way.
G. Where the zone boundaries shown on the zoning map are inconsistent with the written legal descriptions of the zoning boundary as described in the implementing ordinance, the written legal description of the zoning boundary shall prevail. (Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.04.140).
In case uncertainty exists in zoning designation lines which cannot be resolved by application of the administrative rules contained in BMC 12.04.140, the hearing body shall recommend and the city council determine the location of such zone boundaries. This action shall be considered a Type IVA application as outlined under Chapter 11.04 BMC. The hearing body and city council shall base the determination of zone designation lines on the land use designation maps and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. (Ord. 2445 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.04.150).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish permitted land uses for the city of Bothell. The use of a property is defined by the activity for which the building or lot is intended, designed, arranged, occupied, or maintained. The use is considered permanently established when that use will be or has been in continuous operation for a period exceeding 60 days, except that in no case shall a transitory accommodation, which may be allowed to operate continuously for a period of up to 90 days as set forth in BMC 12.06.160(B)(3)(c), be considered permanently established. A use which will operate for 60 days or less, and transitory accommodations, are considered temporary uses, and are subject to the requirements of BMC 12.06.160. All applicable requirements of this code, or other applicable state or federal requirements, shall govern a use located within the Bothell city limits. (Ord. 1955 § 1, 2005; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. The land use tables in this chapter determine whether a specific use is allowed in a zone classification. Specific uses are divided among 17 tables, each of which represents a broad category of land use. The tables are arranged in alphabetical order by land use category, as listed at the beginning of this chapter. Within each table, zone classifications are located in vertical columns and specific uses are arranged alphabetically in horizontal rows.
B. If no symbol appears in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is not allowed in that zoning classification.
C. If the letter “P,” for “Permitted,” appears in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is allowed in that classification, subject to the development and operational requirements of this and other applicable titles. The conduct or development of a permitted use may require approvals including but not limited to land clearing, grading, plumbing, mechanical and building permits. The procedures for applying for such approvals shall be as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations.
D. If the letter “C,” for “Conditional,” appears in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is allowed subject to conditional use permit procedures and requirements and other development and operational requirements of this and other applicable titles. The conduct or development of a conditional use shall require approval of a conditional use permit in addition to other approvals as set forth in subsection C of this section. Procedures for applying for a conditional use permit shall be as set forth in Chapter 12.28 BMC and BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations.
E. If a number appears in the box describing the use, or in the box at the intersection of a column and a row, the use is subject to specific development and/or operational requirements which may be in addition to or in place of general requirements of this and other applicable titles. Such use-specific requirements typically follow the table and correspond to the number in the table, although some such requirements, such as those for specialized senior housing, are set forth in separate chapters.
F. Where multiple zoning classifications are combined (e.g., OP, LI), the most permissive land use regulations of the individual zoning classifications shall apply, unless specifically provided otherwise or as stipulated within a subarea regulation. For example, if a use is not permitted in the OP zone but is permitted in the LI zone, the use is permitted on land zoned OP, LI.
G. Any proposed use not listed in the table shall be classified by the community development director as permitted, conditional, or not permitted, based on the listed use to which the proposed use is most similar. If the community development director determines that the proposed use is not similar to any use in the table, the proposed use shall not be permitted. The determination of the community development director shall be appealable to the hearing body.
H. Permitted uses as established by this chapter may be modified by subarea regulations. (Ord. 2353 § 7, 2021; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Agriculture | Zoning Classification | |||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | AG | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Growing and harvesting of crops (1) | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Plant nurseries and greenhouses (1) | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes (1)(2) | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | ||||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Activities associated with the growing and harvesting of crops and the operation of plant nurseries and greenhouses shall be controlled so as not to result in adverse impacts on nearby properties. Such adverse impacts include but are not limited to noise, dust, fertilizer/pesticide overspray, odor, and glare.
b. The sale of agricultural products on the property on which the products were grown is permitted.
c. The raising and keeping of chickens as an accessory use to residential properties is regulated under BMC 12.06.140(B)(2).
2.
a. Activities associated with the raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes shall be controlled so as not to result in adverse impacts on nearby properties. Such adverse impacts include but are not limited to noise, dust, fertilizer/pesticide overspray, odor, glare and roaming. No stable, shed, coop or other structure for the keeping of animals, not including bees, shall be located closer than 20 feet from any exterior property line. Setbacks for structures for the keeping of bees are addressed in BMC 12.06.190(B).
b. Minimum requirements for animals raised and kept for agricultural purposes are as follows:
(1) Large livestock including but not limited to horses, cows, steers, and llamas, one-half acre per animal, and one acre minimum lot area;
(2) Small livestock including but not limited to sheep, pigs, goats, mink and miniature horses, 7,000 square feet per animal, and one acre minimum lot area;
(3) Poultry other than chickens and small animals including but not limited to rabbits, mice and rats, one animal per one square foot of structure used to house such animals, up to a maximum of 2,000 square feet, and one-half acre minimum lot area;
(4) The minimum requirements for beekeeping for agricultural purposes shall be the same as the minimum requirements for hobby beekeeping as outlined in BMC 12.06.190(B)(4).
c. The sale of animals raised for agricultural purposes and the sale of products of such animals, such as eggs, fleece and milk, on the property on which the animals are or were raised or kept is permitted subject to subsection A of this section. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2378 §§ 1, 2, 2022; Ord. 2141 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Automotive, Marine, and Heavy Equipment Services | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Automotive or marine repair (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Car wash (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Electric vehicle battery charging station | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Gasoline or diesel fuel dispensing (gas stations) (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Heavy equipment repair (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Service and car wash bay openings shall be oriented away from adjacent streets and Residential-zoned properties, or landscaping shall be installed between the bay opening and adjacent streets and Residential-zoned properties so as to soften adverse visual impacts. In addition, where a service or car wash bay opening would be oriented towards an abutting Residential-zoned property, noise shall be reduced by means of an intervening building or buildings, freestanding walls, doors or other devices for enclosing the car wash, or other methods determined by the community development director to be effective for reducing noise.
b. Storage of inoperable vehicles awaiting repair shall be screened from adjacent streets or properties through a combination of fencing and landscaping.
2.
a. Gas stations shall be located only on arterials, unless incorporated as an integral part of a shopping center or business complex.
b. Gas station driveways shall be located at least 50 feet from the nearest point of intersection of public rights-of-way. There shall be no more than four curb cuts with a maximum combined length of 120 feet. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Business and Personal Services | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Architectural/engineering services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Banking and financial services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Churches, temples, mosques and other religious facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Clerical services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Conference centers | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | |
Dry cleaning establishments | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Environmental analysis services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Social organizations and other private clubs | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | P | P | P |
Insurance services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Kennels, catteries and animal obedience schools (1) | C | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Legal services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Mortuary services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Personal care services (e.g., barbershops, hair salons, tanning booths) | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – | – |
Photo processing, photo copying, and printing services | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Print and electronic media offices (newspaper, magazine, radio, television) (2) | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Real estate services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Self-service laundromats | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
– | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P | |
Travel services | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Veterinary clinics (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Any other professional, executive or administrative office use | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. The portion of the building or structure in which animals are treated, trained, or kept shall be soundproofed. All run areas shall be surrounded by an eight-foot-high solid wall and surfaced with concrete or other permanent impervious material. The wall shall be placed consistent with the setback requirements of the underlying zone. The outside of the wall shall be screened with evergreen plantings which shall be six feet tall upon planting and shall attain a height of eight feet within five years. Kennels, catteries, animal obedience schools, animal shelters, and veterinary clinics shall be operated in accordance with BMC Title 6, Animals.
2. Transmitting and receiving equipment shall be subject to the use-specific requirements in BMC 12.06.180.
3. Animal shelters owned, maintained or operated by a public body, an established humane society, animal welfare society, society for the prevention of cruelty to animals, or other nonprofit organization whose primary mission is the protection and welfare of animals may sell goods and products that enhance the health and comfort of the animals adopted. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Eating and Drinking Establishments | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Restaurants, drive-through order | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Restaurants, take-out order | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Restaurants, on-site dining (indoor and outdoor) (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Taverns (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Vendor carts or trucks (3) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Vendor, ice cream | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Vendor spaces or stands (4) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Outdoor seating, tables, umbrellas and other appurtenances of outdoor dining may be placed on public sidewalks, provided a minimum sidewalk width of five feet measured to the street side of the sidewalk shall be kept clear for pedestrians.
2. Taverns may include brewing equipment.
3. Vendor carts and trucks shall be subject to the following conditions:
a. Carts may be placed on public sidewalks; provided a public area use permit is obtained, a minimum sidewalk width of five feet measured to the street side of the sidewalk shall be kept clear for pedestrians, and visibility at driveways, street intersections, store entrances and display windows shall not be obscured (note: a public area use permit is not required for private streets or the campus district, but other requirements of this subsection apply);
b. If a cart or truck is to be situated on private property, written permission shall be obtained from the legal owner of such property on which the cart is situated;
c. Carts or trucks shall not be located in required parking or landscaping areas;
d. Carts shall be limited to two per city block side or 300 lineal feet, whichever is less, or, when placed within a building, one cart per building;
e. Carts or trucks shall be removed at night, or, when carts are placed within a building, they shall be covered or secured;
f. Carts shall be no larger than a size which can be maneuvered by one person on foot, and in no case shall cover an area larger than 25 square feet;
g. The vendor shall comply with all applicable state and county health regulations. Evidence of compliance and a current city of Bothell business license must be conspicuously posted on the vendor truck or cart;
h. Vendor carts within a building shall be located in a manner that is consistent with International Building and Fire Code requirements for exiting, corridor width, and other requirements;
i. Vendor trucks shall be no larger than eight feet wide by 30 feet long, exclusive of temporary canopies which may be extended over the service side when parked;
j. Vendor trucks may be placed on public property and streets; provided a public area use permit is obtained, adequate lane width is maintained, adequate sidewalk space is available for the service side of the truck, and visibility at driveways, street intersections, store entrances and display windows is not obscured (note: a public area use permit is not required for private streets or the campus district, but other requirements of this subsection apply);
k. The city may place additional restrictions, including limits on duration and frequency, for public area use permits for vendor trucks;
l. Vendor trucks shall not be placed in a public area closer than 100 feet from any existing eating establishment, unless the legal owner of the eating establishment provides written permission to be within 100 feet of the eating establishment.
4. Vendor stands shall be considered permanent structures and shall meet all requirements for such structures. Vendor spaces placed within an existing building shall meet all International Building Code requirements and shall not exceed 1,000 square feet in total area, including product preparation and seating areas. Vendors shall comply with all applicable state and county health regulations. Evidence of compliance must be conspicuously posted on the vendor stand or space. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2152 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1991 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Education Services | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Administrative offices, not located in schools | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Community colleges, colleges and universities, less than 10 acres in land area (1) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P |
Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage areas for education services (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Portable or modular classroom buildings, as additions to existing schools (3) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Pre-schools | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Primary and secondary schools (elementary, junior high, and high schools), with associated athletic and other facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Vocational-technical institutions, less than 10 acres in land area | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | P | P | P |
Vocational-technical institutions, 10 acres or more in land area | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Community colleges, colleges and universities 10 acres in land area or more are essential public facilities, which are subject to the requirements of BMC 12.06.080.
2.
a. Service and car wash bay openings shall be oriented away from residential uses or screened from such uses by a combination of fencing and landscaping; where a service or car wash bay opening would be oriented towards an abutting Residential-zoned property, noise shall be reduced by means of an intervening building or buildings, freestanding walls, doors or other devices for enclosing the car wash, or other methods determined by the community development director to be effective for reducing noise. In any case, noise shall be controlled so as to comply with BMC 8.26.040.
b. Storage of vehicles and equipment shall be located behind buildings or screened from adjacent streets and properties by a combination of fencing and landscaping.
3. Portable and modular classroom buildings are permitted as additions to existing schools; provided all setbacks are met, required parking and landscaping are provided, and the cumulative square footage of the added building or buildings comprises no more than 20 percent of the original permanent building square footage. Proposals which exceed this threshold shall require a conditional use permit. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2120 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1845 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Essential Public Facilities | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | |
Community colleges, colleges and universities, 10 acres or more in land area (1)(2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | |
Electrical transmission lines of higher voltage than 115 kV, in existing corridors of such transmission lines (1)(2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Electrical transmission lines of higher voltage than 115 kV, in new corridors (1)(2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | |
In-patient facilities including but not limited to substance abuse facilities and mental health facilities (1)(2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | – | C | C | C |
– | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | |
C | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | |
Transit bus, train, or other high capacity vehicle bases (1)(2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C |
– | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | |
– | – | – | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. RCW 36.70A.200, the Growth Management Act, requires cities to include in their comprehensive plans a process for identifying and siting essential public facilities (EPFs). Essential public facilities are described in the Act as those facilities which are typically difficult to site, but are needed to support orderly growth and delivery of services. The Act states that no local comprehensive plan or development regulation may preclude the siting of essential public facilities.
2. Essential public facilities shall require a conditional use permit. In addition to the regular conditional use permit review criteria, the following shall apply:
a. Documentation of Need. Project sponsors must demonstrate the need for their proposed EPFs. Included in the analysis of need should be the projected service population, an inventory of existing and planned comparable facilities and projected demand for this type of essential public facility.
b. Consistency with Sponsor’s Plans. The proposed project should be consistent with the sponsor’s own long-range plans for facilities and operations.
c. Consistency with Other Plans. The proposal must demonstrate the relationship of the project to local, regional and state plans. The proposal should be consistent with the comprehensive plan and other adopted plans of the prospective host community. In evaluating this consistency, consideration shall be given to urban growth area designations and critical area designations, population and employment holding capacities and targets, and the land use, capital facilities and utilities elements of these adopted plans.
d. Relationship of Service Area to Population. The facility’s service area population should include a significant share of the host community’s population, and the proposed site should be able to reasonably serve its overall service area population. However, linear transmission facilities are exempt from this criterion. Equitable distribution would preclude siting of SCTFs for both counties in Bothell.
e. Minimum Site Requirements. Sponsors shall submit documentation showing the minimum siting requirements for the proposed facility. Site requirements may be determined by the following factors: minimum size of the facility, access, support facilities, topography, geology, and mitigation needs. The sponsor shall also identify future expansion needs of the facility.
f. Alternative Site Selection. The project sponsor shall search for and investigate alternative sites before submitting a proposal for siting review. The proposal shall indicate whether any alternative sites have been identified that meet the minimum site requirements of the facility. The sponsor’s site selection methodology will also by reviewed. Where a proposal involves expansion of an existing facility, the documentation shall indicate why relocation of the facility to another site would be infeasible.
g. Distribution of Essential Public Facilities. In considering a proposal, the city shall examine the overall distribution of essential public facilities within King and Snohomish Counties to avoid placing an undue burden on any one community. Equitable distribution would preclude siting of SCTFs for both counties in Bothell.
h. Public Participation. Sponsors shall encourage local public participation in the development of the proposal, including mitigation measures. Sponsors shall conduct local outreach efforts with early notification to prospective neighbors to inform them about the project and to engage local residents in site planning and mitigation design prior to the initiation of formal hearings. The sponsor’s efforts in this regard shall be evaluated.
i. Consistency with Local Land Use Regulations. The proposed facility shall conform to local land use and zoning regulations that are consistent with the applicable county-wide planning policies. Compliance with other applicable local regulations shall also be required.
j. Compatibility with Surrounding Land Uses. The sponsor’s documentation shall demonstrate that the site, as developed for the proposed project, will be compatible with surrounding land uses.
k. Proposed Impact Mitigation. The proposal must include adequate and appropriate mitigation measures for the impacted area(s) and community(ies). Mitigation measures may include, but are not limited to, natural features that will be preserved or created to serve as buffers, other site design elements used in the development plan, and/or operational or other programmatic measures contained in the proposal. The proposed measures shall be adequate to substantially reduce or compensate for anticipated adverse impacts on the local environment.
3. Additional Siting Criteria for SCTFs.
a. In no case shall a secure community transition facility (SCTF) be sited adjacent to, immediately across a street or parking lot from, or within the line-of-sight of risk potential activities or facilities in existence at the time a site is listed for consideration. Line-of-sight has been estimated to be 600 feet from a risk potential activity or facility, which distance has been determined to be the maximum distance at which it is possible to reasonably visually distinguish and recognize individuals. Through the conditional use process, line-of-sight may be considered to be less than 600 feet if the applicant can demonstrate that visual barriers exist or can be created which would reduce the line-of-sight to less than 600 feet.
b. The site or building shall meet all of the security requirements of RCW 71.09.285.
c. No SCTF may be located within 600 feet of any residentially zoned property.
d. In mixed use zones, SCTFs may be located only in mixed use zones which do not have a Residential designation in the zone. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1884 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Government Services, General | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
City, county, special district, state, and federal offices | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Fire stations | C | C | C | C | – | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage areas for general government services (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Police stations, including temporary holding cells (2) | C | C | C | C | – | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Post offices | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Service and car wash bay openings shall be oriented away from residential uses or screened from such uses by a combination of fencing and landscaping; where a service or car wash bay opening would be oriented towards an abutting Residential-zoned property, noise shall be reduced by means of an intervening building or buildings, freestanding walls, doors or other devices for enclosing the car wash, or other methods determined by the community development director to be effective for reducing noise. In any case, noise shall be controlled so as to comply with BMC 8.26.040.
b. Storage of vehicles and equipment shall be located behind buildings or screened from adjacent streets and properties by a combination of fencing and landscaping.
2. Temporary holding cells may include overnight stays. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1845 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Health and Social Services (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Day care centers in existing schools (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Day care centers in new schools and in existing or new churches (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | – |
Day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of owners or renters of dwelling units located on the same site (2, 3) | – | – | – | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – |
Day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of employees of a separate business establishment located on the same site (2, 3) | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Day care centers, independent (2) | – | – | – | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | – |
Hospitals | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | – | C | C | – |
Human service agency offices | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Medical, dental, psychological, psychiatric, osteopathic, naturopathic, chiropractic, physical therapy or other clinics | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Pharmacies | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Family day care, adult family homes and other health and social services which are residential in nature are regulated under BMC 12.06.140, Residential uses.
2. Includes adult and child day care, subject to all state licensing requirements. Day care centers in the R-M4 zone shall incorporate residential design features.
3. Day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of owners or renters of dwelling units located on the same site, and day care centers providing care for children and/or adult relatives of employees of a separate business establishment located on the same site, shall be given the following allowances to encourage development of such uses:
a. Such day care centers shall not be required to provide parking for the day care use in addition to parking required for the primary business or the dwelling units; and
b. Such day care centers may provide care for children and/or adults other than those related to employees of the on-site business or the owners or renters of the on-site dwelling units. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Lodging | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Bed and breakfast guest houses (1) | P | – | P | P | – | P | P | P | P | – | – |
Campgrounds (2) | C | C | C | C | – | C | C | – | – | – | – |
Hostels | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Hotels and motels | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – | P | P | P |
Recreational vehicle parks (2) | C | C | C | C | – | C | C | – | – | C | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1.
a. Bed and breakfast guest houses may be converted from existing residences or newly constructed residences, but shall not contain more than four bedrooms for guests in the R-C, R-M2, and R-M3 zones.
b. Parking for bed and breakfast guest houses shall be limited to that which can be accommodated in a garage and driveway. No such garage or driveway shall be wider than that necessary to park three vehicles abreast. No on-street parking shall be allowed.
c. The establishment shall be operated in such a manner as to give no outward appearance nor manifest any characteristics of a business that would be incompatible with the ability of the neighboring residents to enjoy peaceful occupancy of their properties.
d. The owner shall operate the establishment and reside on the premises.
e. Meal service shall be limited to serving overnight guests of the establishment. Kitchens shall not be allowed in individual guest rooms.
2. Campgrounds and recreational vehicle parks shall be a minimum of 10 acres, and may be combined. Such uses shall include shower and restroom facilities connected to public water and sanitary sewer services, a paved roadway which provides access to each campsite and recreational vehicle site in the development, and Type III landscaping around the perimeter of the development in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Manufacturing, Distribution, Storage, and Warehousing | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Contractors’ shops (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Distribution | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Food manufacturing, including bakeries, breweries, distilleries, and wineries (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Manufacturing | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Outdoor storage yards (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Research, development and testing | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – | – | P | P |
Self-service warehouses (“mini-warehouses”) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Warehouse and wholesale trade | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Wholesale bakeries, breweries, distilleries and wineries may contain retail outlets.
2. Any outside storage shall be screened from view from the street and adjacent properties by fences, walls, earth berms, landscaping, or any combination of these features. In the CB zone, only inside storage shall be allowed. However, properties located within the Canyon Park, North Creek, and Downtown 180th St./Riverfront subareas within a Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay (MVSO) designation having the required city authorization may have outdoor display and/or storage of motor vehicles subject to the provisions of the subarea. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Recreation, Culture and Entertainment | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Adult entertainment facilities (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – |
Amusement arcades | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Amusement parks | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | – |
Art galleries | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Baseball, football, soccer, tennis and other sports fields and courts (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Beaches and other natural water-oriented play areas | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Bingo halls | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Bowling centers and billiard parlors | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Community centers | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Fitness clubs | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | P |
Golf courses | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Golf driving ranges (3) | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Golf, miniature | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Indoor recreation facilities (6) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Libraries | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Marinas | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P |
Movie theaters | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Museums | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Parks | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Performing arts facilities | – | – | – | – | – | – | C | C | P | P | – |
Riding arenas (5) | C | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Riding stables (4) | P | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P |
Shooting or archery ranges, indoor | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Skating arenas | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P |
Stadiums, not including stadiums for professional sports teams | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
Swimming pools | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Adult entertainment facilities are allowed only on General Commercial-zoned properties which are located west of Bothell Way NE (SR-522) south of a point approximately 300 feet south of the intersection of SR-522 and Hall Road, and which have frontage on SR-522. No more than three adult entertainment establishments shall be allowed within this area at one time. Adult entertainment facilities shall be subject to the following special conditions:
a. Purpose and Intent. The purpose and intent of requiring the following special conditions for adult entertainment facilities is to mitigate the adverse secondary effects caused by such facilities and to maintain compatibility with other land uses and services permitted within the city.
b. Applicability. The conditions established in this section apply to all adult entertainment facilities and include, but are not limited to, the following: adult arcades, adult motels, adult motion picture theaters, adult retail establishments, and other adult entertainment facilities.
c. Limitations. The conditions established in this chapter shall not be construed to restrict or prohibit the following activities or products:
(1) Expressive dance;
(2) Plays, operas, musicals, or other dramatic works;
(3) Classes, seminars, or lectures conducted for a scientific or educational purpose;
(4) Printed materials or visual representations intended for educational or scientific purposes;
(5) Nudity within a locker room or other similar facility used for changing clothing in connection with athletic or exercise activities;
(6) Nudity within a hospital, clinic, or other similar medical facility for health-related purposes; and
(7) All movies and videos that are rated G, PG, PG-13, R, and NC-17 by the Motion Picture Association of America.
d. Visibility. All building entrances and parking areas shall be visible to law enforcement officers from the street frontage, in accordance with the following:
(1) Required landscaping materials, including trees and ground cover, shall be of such species and spaced and maintained in such a manner as to preserve a clear view of the site from the street frontage. Large shrubs, hedges and coniferous trees which obscure vision shall not be allowed.
(2) Exterior lighting of all building entrances and parking areas shall be required. All exterior lighting equipment, including light bulbs, shall be maintained in good operating condition, and be in operation from dusk to one hour past closing time. Exterior lighting shall be of a brightness or luminosity sufficient in the determination of the director to provide law enforcement visibility of the building and parking areas during hours of darkness consistent with the intent of this subsection.
In accordance with BMC 8.64.030, all exterior lighting shall be shielded or recessed so that direct glare and reflections are contained within the boundaries of the property, and shall be directed downward and away from adjoining properties and public rights-of-way. No lighting shall blink, flash, or be of unusually high intensity or brightness. All lighting fixtures shall be appropriate in scale, intensity and height to the use they are serving.
Exterior lighting shall be installed so that in no case shall more than one footcandle power of light five feet above ground cross a property line as measured by a light meter meeting the American National Standards Institute specifications for such instruments. The owner of the property on which the light source is located shall bear the burden of proof that exterior lighting on their property meets these requirements, including the expense of a light meter reading. The meter reading shall be taken by a person deemed qualified by the director. The director shall maintain a list of pre-qualified persons available to the public.
e. Signage. Signage of an adult entertainment facility shall be in accordance with Chapter 12.22 BMC, Signs, except for the following provisions:
(1) Subject to subsections (B)(1)(e)(2) and (3) of this section, signage and other informational material on the building shall be limited to one sign flush with the building front as defined by this code, and shall be limited to the name of the establishment, street address, the days and hours of operation, restrictions on the age of persons to be admitted to the building, and identification of the stock-in-trade or adult entertainment offered therein.
(2) Nowhere on the building visible to passersby outside the building shall appear any words suggestive of sexual acts.
(3) Nowhere on the building visible to passersby outside the building shall appear any drawings or pictures or other depictions representing the sexually oriented materials and/or performances of such adult entertainment facilities.
2. Any lighting or public address system on a sports field or court located on Residential-zoned land shall be turned off by an automatically timed mechanism no later than 10:00 p.m. Field or court lighting fixtures shall minimize scattering of light beyond the field or court being illuminated. Adequate parking shall be provided on site to accommodate all participants’ and spectators’ vehicles. Parking need shall be determined for each proposed facility based on a demand analysis provided by the applicant.
3. Within residential zoning classifications, golf driving ranges shall be allowed only as accessory uses to golf courses.
4. Riding stables are private or public open air areas where equine boarding and equestrian riding activities occur at the same site. Sites hosting riding stables shall be limited in the number of horses to those criteria contained under BMC 12.06.030.
5. Riding arenas are private or public facilities devoted to spectator viewing of equestrian activities. Riding arenas may be indoor or outdoor with spectator seating, temporary or permanent equine boarding facilities, and accessory uses.
6. Indoor recreation areas are those recreational uses contained entirely within an enclosed building. Indoor recreational facilities shall provide parking, setbacks, landscaping, and other improvements consistent with the use that most closely resembles the specific type of recreational use placed within the building. No portion of the use may be placed outside of the building. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1697 § 3, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Residential Uses | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Adult family homes (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Co-living | C | C | C | P | – | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Domestic animals, keeping of (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Dormitories, fraternities and sororities (3) | C | C | C | P | – | P | P | P | P | P | – |
Dwelling units, accessory (4) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Dwelling units, single-family (5) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – | |
Dwelling, multifamily (6) | – | – | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Emergency housing | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P |
Family day care (7) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Home occupations (8) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Manufactured home parks (9) | C | C | C | C | P | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Mobile and/or manufactured homes, in manufactured home parks (9) | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – | – |
Nursing homes (10) | – | C | C | C | – | C | C | C | C | C | – |
Permanent supportive housing (16) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P |
Residential care facilities (11) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Rooms for roomers or boarders (12) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Rooms for the use of domestic employees of the owner, lessee, or occupant of the primary dwelling (12) | P | P | P | P | – | P | – | – | – | – | – |
Specialized senior housing (10) | – | – | – | C | – | C | C | C | C | C | – |
Transitional housing | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | P | P | P |
Uses customarily accessory to permitted principal uses, including but not limited to garages, garden houses, tool sheds, playhouses or other play structures, greenhouses, swimming pools, and boat moorage (13) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development Conditions.
1. Adult family homes are permitted, subject to obtaining a state license in accordance with Chapter 70.128 RCW and the following:
a. Compliance with all building, fire, safety, health code, and city licensing requirements;
b. Conformance to lot size, setbacks, building coverage, hard surface coverage, and other design and dimensional standards of the zoning classification in which the home is located.
2. Keeping of animals shall not constitute a public nuisance which endangers the public health, safety or general welfare, in accordance with BMC Title 6, Animals. Suitable structures or fences shall be provided to restrain animals from leaving the premises. Animals other than and in excess of those permitted by this title shall require a conditional use permit. The raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes is regulated under BMC 12.06.030.
The following domestic animals are permitted in residential uses; provided, that hobby kennels or catteries and special hobby kennels or catteries may increase the number of adult dogs and cats, pursuant to Chapter 6.12 BMC:
a. Three or fewer adult dogs per dwelling unit;
b. Three or fewer adult cats per dwelling unit;
c. A total of three adult dogs or three adult cats per dwelling unit; provided, that any combination of adult dogs and adult cats shall not exceed four;
d. Three or fewer adult rabbits per dwelling unit;
e. The keeping of chickens shall comply with the following:
(1) The number of chickens allowed shall be based upon the following:
(A) No chickens may be kept on properties less than 5,000 square feet in area or on properties within the R-M4, DT, DN, DC, GDC, 522 and R-AC zoning classifications, except for those properties within the aforementioned zones which contain one single-family residence may keep the number of chickens allowed herein;
(B) Up to five total adult chickens on properties of 5,000 to 7,200 square feet;
(C) Up to eight total adult chickens on properties of 7,200 to 35,000 square feet; and
(D) Up to eight total adult chickens on properties larger than 35,000 square feet plus one additional adult chicken for each 1,000 square feet of additional lot area beyond 35,000 square feet;
(2) Coops, sheds, or structures, including chicken tractors (small portable cages that are moved periodically), used to house chickens shall be set back per the accessory setback requirements of Chapter 12.14 BMC;
(3) Juvenile chickens, or chicks, less than 30 days old shall not be counted toward the total number of allowed adult chickens; and
(4) Adult roosters are prohibited;
f. Three or fewer adult non-chicken fowl per dwelling unit;
g. Gerbils, guinea pigs, hamsters, mice, caged birds;
h. Nonvenomous reptiles and amphibians;
i. Other animals normally associated with a dwelling unit, and which are generally housed within the dwelling unit;
j. In addition to the maximum number of adult animals permitted, offspring from females are permitted at any given time until those offspring are able to survive independently.
3. Dormitories, fraternities and sororities shall be permitted as accessory uses to public or private educational institutions or churches.
4. Accessory dwelling units are permitted when added to, created within, or detached from a primary dwelling unit(s) subject to the restrictions in BMC 12.14.135.
5. Detached primary dwelling units, or single-family dwelling units, include site-built homes, type A manufactured homes and modular homes. Modular homes on individual lots shall incorporate design features of typical site-built homes including but not limited to modulation, articulation, sloped roofs, and wood siding or siding of a material which imitates wood.
6. In the R-M3 zone, permitted primary dwelling units may include middle housing or multifamily units, in accordance with subarea regulations.
7. Family day care is a permitted use, subject to obtaining a state license in accordance with Chapter 74.15 RCW and the following:
a. Compliance with all building, fire, safety, health code, and city licensing requirements;
b. Conformance to lot size, setbacks, building coverage, hard surface coverage, and other design and dimensional standards of the zoning classification in which the home is located;
c. Certification by the office of child care policy licensor that a safe passenger loading area, if necessary, is provided.
8. Home occupations are permitted subject to the following:
a. The home occupation shall be subordinate to the primary use of the premises as a dwelling unit.
b. All activities of the home occupation shall be conducted indoors.
c. The business shall be conducted by a resident of the dwelling unit plus no more than one additional person not residing in the dwelling unit.
d. Home occupations may have on-site client contact subject to the following limitations:
(1) All the activities of the home occupation shall take place inside the primary residential structure or accessory building;
(2) The home occupation shall generate no more than two vehicle trips per hour to the licensed residence, except that for one continuous three-hour period per month, the home occupation may generate up to 10 vehicle trips; and
(3) The home occupation shall not create a public nuisance as defined and regulated in Chapter 8.24 BMC.
e. The following activities shall be prohibited:
(1) Automobile, truck, boat and heavy equipment repair;
(2) Auto or truck body work or boat hull and deck work;
(3) Parking and storage of heavy equipment;
(4) Storage of building materials for use on other properties;
(5) Painting or detailing of autos, trucks, boats, or other items;
(6) The outside storage of equipment, materials or more than one vehicle related to the business;
(7) Vehicles larger than 10,000 pounds gross weight operated out of the premises or parked on the property or on adjacent streets; and
(8) Taxicab, van shuttle, limousine or other transportation services, except for office activities; provided all other requirements of this subsection concerning home occupations are met.
f. Home occupations shall not be allowed in accessory buildings within the rear yard setback, except when conducted in an accessory dwelling unit on an alley meeting all other setback provisions.
g. Home occupations in accessory buildings shall not permit noise to intrude into another residential property at a level at or above 45 decibels outside the hours of 7:00 a.m. through 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, and 9:00 a.m. through 5:00 p.m. on Saturday.
9. Mobile and/or (type B) manufactured homes are allowed only in manufactured home parks developed in accordance with Chapter 12.08 BMC.
10. See BMC 12.04.035, Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification; Chapter 12.10 BMC, Specialized Senior Housing and Nursing Homes, and BMC 12.66.060, Specialized Senior Housing Overlay in the vicinity of the Northshore Senior Services Center – R-L1, SSHO zoning.
11. Residential care facilities means facilities which care for at least five but not more than 15 functionally disabled persons, and which are not licensed as an adult family home pursuant to Chapter 70.128 RCW. Residential care facilities are subject to the following:
a. Compliance with all building, fire, safety, health code, and state and city licensing requirements;
b. Conformance to lot size, setbacks, building coverage, hard surface coverage, and other design and dimensional standards of the zoning classification in which the home is located;
c. A safe passenger loading area shall be provided, if determined necessary by the director.
12. If such rooms meet the definition of a dwelling unit, the requirements for accessory dwelling units shall be met.
13. Non-residential accessory buildings shall be limited to a maximum building coverage of five percent as established in BMC 12.14.030. Garages and carports located in R-L2, R-M1, R-M2, R-M3, and R-M4 zoned properties may exceed the five percent coverage limitation provided the garage or carport does not exceed 480 square feet in area. Accessory buildings shall be consistent with BMC 12.14.130 which addresses accessory building height and design.
14. Middle housing is permitted as follows and subject to the provisions in BMC 12.14.134:
a. The development of two dwelling units per lot on all lots zoned predominantly for residential use, unless zoning permitting higher densities or intensities applies.
b. The development of up to four dwelling units per lot in the R-L zones and six units per lot in the R-M zone, unless zoning permitting higher densities or intensities applies, within one-quarter mile walking distance of a major transit stop. Middle housing within one-quarter mile of major transit stops is not required to provide an affordable unit.
c. The development of four dwelling units per lot in the R-L zones and six units per lot in the R-M zones, unless zoning permitting higher densities or intensities applies, if at least one unit above the base two units in the R-L zones or one unit above the base four units in the R-M zones is affordable housing in accordance with Chapter 12.07 BMC:
(i) Owner-Occupied Units. The development shall commit to providing a minimum of one unit per four affordable to moderate-income (BMC 12.07.015) households.
(ii) Renter-Occupied Units. The development shall commit to providing a minimum of one unit per four affordable to low-income (BMC 12.07.015) households.
d. Cottage and courtyard housing is allowed on all lots zoned predominantly for residential use when all applicable requirements of BMC 12.14.134 are met.
15. Nursing homes in R-M1, R-M2, and R-M3 zones are subject to the following conditions:
a. Nursing homes are only allowed on parcels of four acres or more.
b. Vehicular access to nursing homes must be from arterial streets only. Where secondary access for emergency vehicles is required, the secondary access may be from nonarterial streets provided the access is restricted to emergency vehicles only.
c. Nursing homes adjacent to R-C and R-L zones must have a minimum 25-foot setback including a minimum 10-foot Type II landscape buffer.
16. Permanent supportive housing may include accessory office and support uses designed to provide direct support to residents.
17. Co-living housing is permitted by right within R-M2 and R-M3 zones, which allow at least six multifamily units. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 3 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2348 § 3, 2021; Ord. 2284 § 1, 2019; Ord. 2258 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2255 § 2, 2018; Ord. 2252 § 3, 2018; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2141 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1995 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1817 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1661 § 1, 1996; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Retail Uses | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Boat sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Building materials stores (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Bulk retail stores | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Department and variety stores | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Equipment or tool sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Heavy equipment and heavy vehicles sales or rental, new or used | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – |
Manufactured or modular home sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Motor vehicle sales or rental, new or used (1) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | – |
Neighborhood scale commercial (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – |
Open air markets | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Recreational vehicle sales or rental, new or used | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | – |
Any other retail business the primary activity of which is the sale of merchandise in an enclosed building | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. The uses denoted shall be permitted in the Community Business zone provided at least 50 percent of the space devoted to the display and/or storage of products for sale or rent is enclosed within a building allowed. However, properties located within the Canyon Park, North Creek, and Downtown 180th St./Riverfront subareas within a Motor Vehicle Sales Overlay (MVSO) designation having the required city authorization may have outdoor display and/or storage of motor vehicles subject to the provisions of the subarea.
2. Neighborhood Scale Commercial.
a. Intent. Neighborhood scale commercial uses are intended to promote neighborhood vitality and compatibility with surrounding residential areas, allowing only small-scale retail, service, and residential uses that primarily serve local residents with minimal traffic from outside the neighborhood. These businesses should support live-work opportunities, be easily accessible by walking, biking, and local transit, and contribute to vibrant, pedestrian-friendly community hubs which eliminate reliance on automobiles.
b. Hours of Operation. Hours of operation, including deliveries, are allowed between 6:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, 7:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m. Saturday through Sunday.
c. Scale. Maximum square footage for a neighborhood scale commercial space is limited to the greater of 1,800 square feet or 30 percent of the net buildable area of the lot, not to exceed 2,500 square feet.
d. Permitted Uses. The following uses are allowed within neighborhood scale commercial. Other proposed uses that are not mentioned in this section but achieve the intent and definition of neighborhood scale commercial highlighted in subsection (B)(2)(a) of this section and BMC 11.02.060 as determined by the community development director, may be considered a permitted use as an administrative interpretation.
(1) Food and Beverage.
(i) Restaurants;
(ii) Coffee shops;
(iii) Bakeries;
(iv) Bars/pubs/taverns;
(2) Retail Sales.
(i) Grocery or food markets (i.e., traditional “corner stores”);
(ii) Hardware stores;
(iii) Bike and sporting goods;
(iv) Pharmacies;
(v) Boutique shopping (i.e., clothing, crafts, art, houseplants);
(vi) Artisan manufacturing with on-site sales;
(3) Services.
(i) Child-care centers;
(ii) Salons and barbers;
(iii) Pet care, boarding, vet;
(iv) Physicians and dentists;
(v) Art gallery;
(vi) Financial services (i.e., tax preparers);
(vii) Florist shops.
e. Prohibited Uses and Elements.
(1) Automotive, marine, and heavy equipment services listed in BMC 12.06.040 such as gas stations and repair shops;
(2) Large item retailers providing items such as furniture and appliances;
(3) Auto or truck body work or boat hull and deck work;
(4) Parking and storage of heavy equipment;
(5) Storage of building materials for use on other properties;
(6) Painting or detailing of auto, truck, boats, or other items;
(7) The outside storage of equipment, materials, or more than one vehicle related to the business;
(8) Vehicles larger than 10,000 pounds gross weight operated out of the premises or parked on the property or on adjacent streets;
(9) Taxicab, van shuttle, limousine or other transportation services, except for office activities; provided, that all other requirements of this subsection concerning neighborhood scale commercial are met;
(10) No outdoor pet runs, kennels, or similar activities associated with pet care, boarding, or vet uses (indoor is permitted);
(11) Drive-in or drive-through businesses; and
(12) Weapon sales. (Ord. 2460 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1853 § 1, 2001; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Temporary Uses | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Amusement rides, carnivals or circuses | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Christmas tree lots | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | P | – |
Community festivals and street fairs | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Construction sheds or trailers (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Fireworks stands | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Parking lot and sidewalk sales | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Wireless communication facilities (2) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Seasonal sales of flowers or produce | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | P | P | P | – |
Transitory accommodations (3) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Yard and garage sales | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Construction sheds and trailers are permitted on the subject property or on adjacent property with permission of the owner for the duration of the construction activity; provided, that such sheds and trailers are located in conformance with all required setbacks and no residential or other use shall be made of such sheds or trailers which is unrelated to the construction activity.
2. Temporary WCFs as defined in BMC 12.11.020 are permitted for the following purposes:
a. Evaluating the technical feasibility of locating a permanent WCF upon the subject property, not to exceed three consecutive days.
b. Providing emergency communications services during natural disasters or other emergencies which may threaten the public health, safety and welfare.
c. Providing signal coverage for a temporary special event, such as a news event, community activity, sporting event or other special event, for up to five consecutive days; provided, that additional days may be approved by the director.
The placement and use of temporary WCFs shall conform to required setbacks as specified in Chapter 12.11 BMC and shall be maintained in a good and safe condition, and shall comply with all federal, state and local rules and regulations. No person may extend the allowable time for a temporary WCF through trivial or minimal movements of the temporary WCF.
3. “Transitory accommodations” shall mean tents, sheds, huts, cabins, trailers or other enclosures which are not permanently attached to the ground, may be easily erected and dismantled, and are intended for temporary occupancy, usually for recreational or humanitarian purposes. Transitory accommodations are permitted provided the community development director determines on a case-by-case basis that such use possesses no characteristics which would adversely impact the community in any way, or that any potentially adverse characteristics can be adequately minimized and/or mitigated so as not to be materially detrimental to the community. Transitory accommodations can vary widely in their characteristics, which include but are not limited to size of site, surrounding land uses, duration, number of occupants, noise generation, and light and glare emanation. Accordingly, certain types of transitory accommodations may require the imposition of extensive conditions to mitigate potential adverse impacts to the community, while others may not; in some cases, adequate mitigation of impacts may not be feasible, and a proposed transitory accommodation consequently may not be allowed. The community development director shall therefore have the authority to approve, approve with conditions, or deny a permit for a transitory accommodation proposal, after consideration of the performance criteria set forth herein.
a. Process.
(1) A transitory accommodation permit shall be required prior to the commencement of such a use, unless the community development director determines, after consideration of the performance criteria set forth in this section, that the proposed transitory accommodation possesses no characteristics which might adversely impact the community. The prospective transitory accommodation host (property owner and lessee, if applicable), sponsor and manager shall jointly apply for the transitory accommodation permit and shall be equally responsible for compliance with all conditions of the permit. “Applicant,” as used in these regulations, shall mean the transitory accommodation host, sponsor and manager. “Proponent,” as used in these regulations, shall mean the prospective host, sponsor and manager prior to submittal of an application for a transitory accommodation permit.
(2) A transitory accommodation permit is a Type II action and shall be processed accordingly, as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, except that a pre-application conference and transportation concurrency review shall not be required. The permit fee shall be established by resolution of the city council.
(3) The applicant shall identify potential adverse effects of the proposed transitory accommodation on neighboring properties and the community and shall develop measures to mitigate such effects. The applicant shall submit a transitory accommodations impact mitigation plan with the permit application. The plan shall contain a narrative and drawing(s) that describe, to the satisfaction of the community development director, the measures the applicant will use to mitigate the effects of the transitory accommodation. At a minimum, the plan shall specifically describe the measures that will be implemented to satisfy the approval criteria provided in subsection (B)(3)(b) through (f) of this section, except for criteria specifically waived by the community development director.
The plan shall include a code of conduct and the names and phone numbers of all persons comprising the applicant. The form and organization of the mitigation plan shall be as specified by the community development director, but the elements of the plan shall be bound together. The approved transitory accommodation impact mitigation plan shall be signed by the community development director and the applicant, and implementation and enforcement of the plan shall be a condition of permit approval.
(4) Advance Discussions with Nearby Child Care Facilities and Schools.
(A) Except for religious organizations, prior to applying for a transitory accommodation permit, the proponent shall provide written notice to any licensed child care facility and the administration of any public or private elementary, middle, junior high or high school within 600 feet of the boundaries of the proposed transitory accommodations site, and shall seek comments from said child care facility and school administration.
(B) Where no comments are received, or where said child care facility(ies) or the administration of said school(s) is supportive of the proposal, the proponent shall submit an affidavit to this effect with the application.
(C) Where said child care facility(ies) or the administration of said school(s) registers objections or concerns regarding the proposed transitory accommodations, the proponent shall attempt to resolve such objections or concerns via a negotiated mitigation plan between the proponent and the child care facility(ies) or school(s). Such a plan shall be submitted with the application and shall be incorporated in the conditions of the permit. Where the negotiations do not result in a mutually agreed upon mitigation plan within 30 days of receipt by the child care facility or school administration of the initial notice from the proponent, but the parties desire to continue to pursue resolution of the issues, the parties may request mediation services from or through the city. In the event the parties cannot reach agreement after a good faith effort of at least 30 days from receipt by the child care facility or the school administration of the initial notice from the proponent, the proponent may submit an application but shall provide a record of the negotiations between the parties, including but not limited to copies of all correspondence and meeting notes. In evaluating the application against the performance criteria set forth herein, the director shall consider the topic(s) of the unsuccessful negotiations and the extent to which the parties demonstrated good faith in their discussions. “Good faith” in this context shall mean a recognition of the legitimacy of, and a willingness to reasonably accommodate, each party’s needs, desires and concerns.
(D) A religious organization may host individuals or families experiencing homelessness pursuant to RCW 35A.21.360, including extreme weather shelters, on property owned or controlled by the religious organization whether within buildings located on the property or elsewhere on the property outside of buildings, subject to the conditions set forth in this section. The city may require an organization to enter into a memorandum of understanding for fire safety that includes inspections, an outline for appropriate emergency procedures, a determination of the most viable means to evacuate occupants from inside a site with appropriate illuminated exit signage, panic bar exit doors, and a completed fire water agreement indicating: (a) posted safe means of egress; (b) operable smoke detectors, carbon monoxide detectors as necessary, and fire extinguishers; and (c) a plan for monitors who spend the night awake and are familiar with emergency protocols, who have suitable communication devices, and who know how to contact the fire department.
(5) Decisions of the community development director and/or police chief may be appealed. Such appeals shall be heard and decided by the hearing examiner in accordance with the procedures set forth in BMC 11.12.010.
(6) Emergencies. The community development director may waive these requirements when a natural or manufactured disaster necessitates the immediate establishment of transitory accommodations.
(7) Failure to Comply. If a transitory accommodation permit has been issued, and the community development director determines that the applicant has violated any condition of that permit, the director shall issue a notice of violation and require compliance in accordance with the procedures set forth in Chapter 11.20 BMC, Enforcement. Failure to correct the violation after a reasonable time for compliance shall result in revocation of the permit. In such an event all activities associated with the accommodation shall cease immediately and the site shall immediately be vacated and restored to its pre-accommodation condition.
b. Site Performance Criteria.
(1) Size. The site shall be of sufficient land area to support the activities of the transitory accommodation without overcrowding of occupants, intruding into required setbacks or critical areas, destroying vegetation, eroding soils or otherwise overtaxing the land. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a site plan indicating the location of the proposed transitory accommodation on the host property; its area in square feet; and the proposed distribution of, and allocation of space for, anticipated activities including but not limited to sleeping, eating, socializing, and bathing and other personal functions.
(2) Setbacks from Property Line. All activities of the transitory accommodation shall be set back from adjacent properties a sufficient distance so as not to impinge upon or otherwise unduly influence activities on said adjacent properties. The transitory accommodation shall be positioned on the property in the location that results in the least adverse impact to occupants of neighboring properties. The community development director may require the applicant to change the proposed location of the transitory accommodation to mitigate adverse impacts to occupants of neighboring properties. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a site plan indicating buildings and uses on properties surrounding the proposed transitory accommodation, and the distance the proposed accommodation would be set back from surrounding property lines. A transitory accommodation shall be set back no less than 20 feet from the exterior boundary lines of adjacent properties unless the owners of such properties consent in writing to a reduction or waiver of such setback.
(3) Screening of Activities. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, activities of the transitory accommodation shall be obscured from view from adjacent properties, by a minimum six-foot-high temporary fence, an existing fence, existing dense vegetation, an existing topographic difference, distance from exterior property lines, or other means, to the maximum extent feasible.
(4) Parking. Adequate parking for the transitory accommodation shall be provided so as not to reduce parking utilized by existing surrounding uses. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a proposed parking plan which addresses the following:
(A) A description of parking capacity, both on site and on street, that describes the amount and location of parking prior to the transitory accommodation and any displacement of parking resulting from the transitory accommodation; and
(B) Any circumstances which may reduce the normal demand for parking, such as off-peak-season use; and/or any mechanisms or strategies to reduce parking demand, such as the provision of shuttle buses for the use of occupants of the transitory accommodations, or the provision of shared parking agreements with adjacent uses.
(5) Access to Public Transportation. Where occupants of a proposed transitory accommodation are anticipated to walk to public transportation services, said accommodation shall be located no farther than one-half mile walking distance from a regular public transportation stop.
(6) Critical Areas. All proposed transitory accommodations shall comply with the city’s critical areas regulations as set forth in Chapter 14.04 BMC. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a site plan indicating the presence and extent of any critical areas.
(7) Restoration of Site. Upon cessation of the temporary accommodation, the site shall be restored, as near as possible, to its original condition. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall re-plant areas in which vegetation had been removed or destroyed.
c. Duration Performance Criteria.
(1) Length of Time. The proposed transitory accommodations shall be in operation the minimal length of time necessary to achieve the recreational, humanitarian or other objective(s) of the applicant. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a narrative explaining the objective(s) the applicant seeks to achieve, and the amount of time the applicant believes necessary to achieve that objective. However, under no circumstances shall a proposed transitory accommodation be allowed in one location for more than 90 days, either consecutively or cumulatively, during any 12-month period, except that where the ninetieth day falls on a Friday, an additional two days shall be allowed to dismantle and remove the accommodation over the immediately following weekend.
d. Health and Safety Performance Criteria. Transitory accommodations shall be operated in such a manner as to ensure the health and safety of occupants of the subject and surrounding properties. Accordingly, all transitory accommodations shall comply with the following:
(1) Health Regulations. All applicable city, county and state regulations pertaining to public health shall be met.
(2) Fire Safety. Inspections of the accommodation by the city for fire safety purposes may be conducted at any time and without prior notice. Adequate access, as determined by the fire marshal, shall be maintained within and around the accommodation at all times to ensure that emergency vehicles can ingress/egress the site.
(3) Building Code Inspections. Inspections of the accommodation by the city to ensure the public health and safety with regard to structures may be conducted at any time and without prior notice.
(4) Drinking Water and Solid Waste. An adequate supply of potable water shall be available at all times. Adequate toilet facilities shall be provided ons ite, as determined by the public works director. All city, county and state regulations pertaining to drinking water connections and solid waste disposal shall be met.
(5) Trash. Adequate facilities for dealing with trash shall be provided on site. A regular trash patrol or other method of regular maintenance in the immediate vicinity of the site shall be provided.
e. Conduct and Security Performance Criteria.
(1) Noise. Any transitory accommodation shall comply with city noise regulations as set forth in Chapter 8.26 BMC. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a plan to mitigate potential noise impacts.
(2) Light and Glare. Any transitory accommodation shall comply with city light and glare regulations as set forth in Chapter 8.64 BMC. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, the applicant shall provide a plan to mitigate potential light and glare impacts.
(3) Security. Any transitory accommodation shall comply with city regulations regarding lawful behavior as set forth in BMC Title 9, Criminal Code. Any transitory accommodation shall provide all required legal access to public areas of the site by the city of Bothell police department and any other relevant law enforcement agency at all times. Additionally, where deemed necessary by the community development director or the police chief, the applicant shall provide for the following:
(A) The applicant shall take all reasonable and legal steps to obtain verifiable identification, such as a valid driver’s license, government-issued identification card, military identification card, or passport, from all prospective and current camp residents.
(B) The applicant will use such identification to obtain warrant and sex offender checks from the King or Snohomish County Sheriff’s office or other relevant authority. The anonymity of the requesting party shall be maintained.
(C) If said check reveals that the subject of the check is a sex offender, required to register with the city, county or state authorities pursuant to RCW 9A.44.130, then the applicant shall immediately reject the subject of the check for residency in the transitory accommodation or eject the subject of the check if that person is currently a resident of the accommodation, and shall immediately notify the Bothell police department of such rejection or ejection.
(D) If said check reveals that the subject of the check has an existing or outstanding warrant, then the applicant may select either of the following alternative actions:
(1) Immediately reject or eject the subject of the check and immediately notify the Bothell police department of such rejection or ejection; or
(2) Request the Bothell police department to confer with the agency or court of jurisdiction from which the warrant originated to determine whether or not said agency or court desires the warrant to be served. If the originating agency or court desires the warrant to be served, the Bothell police department shall do so immediately. If the originating agency or court declines warrant service, due to the minor nature of the offense for which the warrant was issued or for other reasons, the subject may enter or remain in the transitory accommodation; provided, that the applicant actively assists the subject in resolving the warrant.
(E) The applicant shall keep a log of all individuals who stay overnight in the transitory accommodation, including names and dates. Logs shall be kept for a minimum of six months.
(F) The applicant shall provide on-site security, as approved by the community development director in consultation with the city of Bothell police department.
(4) Codes of Conduct. The applicant shall provide and enforce a written code of conduct which mitigates impacts to neighbors and the community. Said code shall be incorporated into the conditions of approval.
f. Other Performance Criteria.
(1) Indemnification. Except for religious organizations, the applicant shall defend, indemnify, and hold the city, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits of any nature, including attorney fees, due to the acts or omissions of the applicant in connection with the operation of the transitory accommodation.
(2) Liability Insurance. Where deemed necessary by the community development director, with the exception of religious organizations, the applicant shall procure and maintain in full force, through the duration of the transitory accommodation, comprehensive general liability insurance with a minimum coverage of $1,000,000 per occurrence/aggregate for personal injury and property damage.
(3) Other Criteria. Where deemed necessary, the community development director may identify other performance criteria; require the applicant to describe the potential impacts of the proposed transitory accommodation with respect to those criteria; and determine if measures are warranted to minimize or otherwise mitigate such impacts. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2093 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1955 § 1, 2005; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1733 §§ 4 (Exh. C), 6, 1998; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Transportation | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Highways, rail lines and high occupancy vehicle lanes | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Parking facilities (surface or structured) (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Streets and pedestrian and bicycle facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Transit park and ride lots | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Transit shelters | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Transit stations (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. In the Residential, OP, and NB zones, parking facilities are permitted only as accessory uses to a principal use.
2. Transit stations may incorporate accessory convenience retail and service establishments for use by transit riders. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Utilities | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Electrical distribution lines, pipes, and support poles, transformers, and related facilities, not including substations (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Electrical distribution substations (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Electrical transmission lines of 115 kV or less and support poles (3) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Electric vehicle battery charging stations (7) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Natural gas conveyance facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Potable water conveyance facilities (5) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Potable water storage facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
Storm water collection and conveyance facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Storm water detention/retention facilities | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications earth receiving stations (satellite dishes) (4) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications lines, pipes, support poles and related facilities, not including earth receiving stations, personal wireless service, transmission/receiving/relay facilities, or switching facilities (1) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications switching facilities | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P | P | P |
Telecommunications transmission/receiving/relay facilities (2) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | P | P | P |
Waste water conveyance facilities (5) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
Wireless communication facilities (WCFs) (6) | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P | P |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. Electrical and telecommunications service lines on individual properties shall be placed underground in conjunction with new development or any construction activity which increases floor area, or, in the case of a remodel which does not increase floor area, has a valuation amounting to more than 50 percent of the assessed value of the structure being remodeled, according to the records of the King or Snohomish County assessor.
2.
a. Electrical substations and telecommunications towers, antennas and switching stations shall be designed so as to be compatible with surrounding development, through placement, architectural features, landscaping, and other measures, except that WCFs shall be regulated in accordance with Chapter 12.11 BMC.
b. Amateur radio antennas shall be allowed at heights no greater than those minimally sufficient to accommodate amateur service communications, in accordance with FCC regulations. Persons desiring to erect such antennas shall submit documentation indicating the height which meets this requirement. Such antennas shall be required to comply with the requirements of the Washington State Building Code, including the seismic and wind resistance provisions of the code, and to obtain a building permit.
3. Support poles for transmission lines shall be designed so as to minimize adverse aesthetic impacts. Electrical transmission lines over 115 kV are classified as essential public facilities, and are regulated under BMC 12.06.080.
4. Telecommunications earth receiving stations (satellite dish antennas) over two feet in diameter shall be screened from view from neighboring properties by location, berming, fences, walls, landscaping, or a combination of these techniques; provided, however, that no screening shall be required which would prevent reception of satellite signals.
5. Aboveground water conveyance facilities and waste water conveyance facilities shall require a conditional use permit.
6. WCFs shall be regulated in accordance with Chapter 12.11 BMC.
7. Electric vehicle charging stations are permitted as an accessory use to any permitted primary use and shall count towards the required number of parking spaces for said primary use. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1733 § 3 (Exh. B), 1998; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Use Table.
Uses Not Otherwise Categorized | Zoning Classification | ||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1, RL2 | RM1, RM2, RM3 | R-M4 | R-MHP | R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Cemeteries (1) | C | C | C | C | C | C | – | – | – | – | – |
Off-site hazardous waste treatment and/or storage facility for the processing and handling of dangerous waste (2) | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | – | C |
On-site hazardous waste treatment and/or storage facility (3) | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
Hobby beekeeping (4) | P | P | P | P | P | P | – | – | – | – | – |
P: Permitted Use C: Conditional Use –: Use not permitted Numbers in parentheses reference use-specific development and operating conditions under subsection B of this section. | |||||||||||
B. Development and Operating Conditions.
1. The development and operation of cemeteries shall comply with RCW Title 68.
2. Subject to compliance with Department of Ecology regulations and state siting criteria as adopted in accordance with RCW 70.105.210, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended; provided, that dangerous substances are processed and handled as permitted uses in this zone; provided further, that nothing herein shall be construed to allow the processing and handling of dangerous substances or dangerous waste if otherwise prohibited by this code; and provided further, that a conditional use permit is not required for the treatment and/or storage of household hazardous waste.
3. Subject to compliance with Department of Ecology regulations and state siting criteria as adopted in accordance with RCW 70.105.210, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended; provided, that nothing herein shall be construed to allow the processing and handling of hazardous substances or hazardous wastes if otherwise prohibited by the code; and provided further, that a conditional use permit is not required for the treatment and/or storage of household hazardous waste.
4. The minimum requirements for hobby beekeeping are as follows:
a. Required Review Process. No permit, review, or authorization from the city is required for beekeeping complying with the requirements of this subsection.
b. Maximum Number of Hives. The maximum number of hives that may be located on a single lot shall be determined by lot size as follows:
(1) No more than four hives, each with only one swarm, shall be kept on lots that are 10,000 square feet or less in area.
(2) For each 2,500 square feet of lot area in excess of 10,000 square feet, one additional hive may be kept, up to a maximum of 10 hives. Each additional hive shall have only one swarm.
c. Hive Size. No hive shall exceed the standard dimensions typical to the practice of beekeeping.
d. Required Setbacks. Each hive must be located at least 25 feet from any property line, except that hives may be located closer than 25 feet to any property line where each hive is:
(1) Situated eight feet or more above adjacent ground level; or
(2) Situated less than six feet above adjacent ground level and behind a solid fence or hedge six feet in height parallel to any property line within 25 feet of the hive and extending at least 20 feet beyond the hive in both directions.
e. Special Regulations.
(1) All bee colonies must be raised and kept in movable frame hives.
(2) Adequate space must be maintained in every hive to prevent overcrowding and swarming.
(3) Each and every hive containing bees that exhibit swarming or aggressive behavior must be immediately requeened.
(4) Each person owning one or more hives with bees, brokers renting hives, and apiarists residing in other states who operate hives within the city must register with the Washington State Department of Agriculture as required under Chapter 15.60 RCW.
f. Permissible Zones.
(1) If the requirements of this subsection (B)(4) are satisfied, then hobby beekeeping is allowed within any zone as an accessory use to any permissible detached single-family use.
(2) Hobby beekeeping is not allowed as an accessory use to any multifamily use anywhere in the city. (Ord. 2445 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2378 §§ 3, 4, 2022; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The incentives and regulations offered in this chapter are used by the city as one means of meeting its commitment to encourage housing affordable to all economic groups, and to meet its regional share of affordable housing requirements. The purposes of this chapter are to:
A. Help achieve comprehensive plan goals of affordable housing;
B. Implement through regulations the responsibility of the city under state law to provide for housing opportunities for all economic segments of the community;
C. Preserve opportunities for affordable housing as the city continues to grow;
D. Create affordable housing opportunities as a result of increased development capacity in various zones of the city; and
E. Encourage developments that include affordable housing and that combine local incentives provided by the city with resources available from other public and private sources. (Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
The following definitions are listed in alphabetical order for the purpose of these affordable housing regulations, and shall apply to the administration of this chapter. In addition, except as otherwise provided in this section, those definitions as contained in Chapter 11.02 BMC are adopted and incorporated into this section by reference.
A. “Affordable housing” and “affordable unit” mean a dwelling unit(s) reserved for occupancy by eligible households and having monthly housing expenses to the household no greater than 30 percent of a given monthly household income, adjusted for household size for a designated percent of area median income.
B. “Area median income” means the median family income for the Seattle-Bellevue, WA Metro Fair Market Rent (FMR) Area as most recently determined by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) under Section 8(f)(3) of the United States Housing Act of 1937, as amended. In the event that HUD no longer publishes median family income figures for the Seattle-Bellevue, WA HUD Metro FMR Area, the city may estimate the median income in such manner as the city shall determine.
C. “Eligible household” means one or more adults and their dependents who certify that their annual household income does not exceed the applicable percent of the area median income, adjusted for household size, and who certify that they meet all qualifications for eligibility, including any requirements for recertification on income eligibility.
D. “Housing expense” means, in the case of renter-occupied housing, rent, tenant-paid utilities (excluding telephone), and other tenant expenses required for the dwelling unit; and in the case of owner-occupied housing, mortgage, mortgage insurance, property taxes, property insurance, and homeowner’s dues. (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2341 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2325 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
A. Downtown Subarea:
1. Within the Downtown Transition District Affordable Housing Overlay, affordable housing is required as provided in BMC 12.64.103(B)(3)(a), and voluntary affordable housing incentives are available as provided in BMC 12.64.103(B)(3)(b).
2. Within the SR 522 Corridor District Affordable Housing Overlay, affordable housing is required as provided for in BMC 12.64.104(B)(4).
3. Within the SR 522 Corridor District outside the Affordable Housing Overlay, voluntary affordable housing incentives are available as provided in BMC 12.64.104(B)(5).
4. Within the General Downtown Corridor District, affordable housing is required as provided for in BMC 12.64.105(B)(4).
B. The development of four middle housing dwelling units per lot in the R-L and six middle housing dwelling units per lot in the R-M zones on all lots zoned predominantly for residential use are required to provide one affordable unit per four units in the R-L zones and one affordable unit per six units in the R-M zones, unless within one-quarter mile walking distance of a major transit stop, in accordance with BMC 12.06.140. (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2416 § 2 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 4 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2360 § 2, 2021; Ord. 2325 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2270 § 2, 2018).
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all affordable housing units required by, or allowed through, any chapter of the Bothell Municipal Code, except as otherwise provided by this code.
A. Threshold for Compliance.
1. For Affordable Housing Overlays. All developments creating 10 or more new dwelling units shall provide for affordable dwelling units within the development or provide other methods of creating affordable housing as provided in BMC 12.07.050. Adjacent developments by the same developer will be considered as a single development for the purpose of applying the threshold for compliance.
2. For Affordable Housing Incentives. All developments using voluntary incentives shall make dwelling units within the development affordable as provided in BMC 12.64.103(B)(3)(b) and 12.64.104(B)(5).
B. Duration of Affordability. Affordable units that are provided under this section shall remain as affordable housing for a minimum of 50 years from the date of initial occupancy for owner-occupied affordable units and for the life of the project (an individual building or group of buildings as part of one development) for renter-occupied affordable units. At the sole discretion of the director, the city may approve a shorter affordability time period for owner-occupied affordable housing, not to be less than 30 years, in order to meet federal financial underwriting guidelines.
C. Designation of Affordable Units and Standards for Affordable Units in Developments with a Mix of Affordable and Market-Rate Units. Prior to the issuance of any permit(s), the city shall review and approve the selection of affordable units, consistent with the following standards:
1. The affordable units shall generally be interspersed with all other dwelling units in the development.
2. The tenure (ownership or rental) of the affordable units shall be the same as the tenure of the rest of the dwelling units in the development.
3. The affordable units shall consist of a mix of number of bedrooms that is generally proportionate to the bedroom mix of units in the overall development.
4. The exteriors of the affordable units shall be compatible with and comparable in quality and durability to the rest of the dwelling units in the development and shall comply with any design standards for the underlying zoning district. The interior finish, durability and quality of construction of the affordable units shall, at a minimum, be comparable to new entry level rental or ownership housing in the city.
D. Availability in Developments with a Mix of Affordable and Market-Rate Units. The affordable units shall be available for occupancy in a time frame comparable to the availability of the rest of the dwelling units in the development. (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2416 § 2 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2325 § 3, 2020; Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
A. An affordable housing agreement shall be recorded with the King or Snohomish County recorder’s office, as applicable, prior to the issuance of a building permit for any development providing affordable housing pursuant to the requirements or incentives of the Bothell Municipal Code.
B. The recorded agreement shall be a covenant running with the land and shall be binding on the assigns, beneficiaries, and successors of the applicant.
C. The agreement shall be in a form approved by the city and shall address price restrictions, homebuyer or tenant qualifications, affordability duration, phasing of construction, monitoring of affordability, and any other topics related to the provision of the affordable housing units.
D. The agreement shall provide the city sole discretion to establish monitoring fees for the affordable units, which fees may be adjusted over time to account for inflation. The purpose of any monitoring fee is for the review and processing of documents to maintain compliance with income and affordability restrictions of the affordability agreement.
E. The city may agree, at its sole discretion, to subordinate any affordable housing regulatory agreement for the purpose of enabling the owner to obtain financing for development of the property. (Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
The city’s priority is for residential and mixed-use developments to provide affordable housing on the site of the development generating the affordable housing requirement. With respect to the programs identified in BMC 12.07.020(A), an applicant may propose alternative methods for satisfying all or part of a project’s on-site affordable housing, which the city will evaluate according to the requirements of this section.
A. Application Requirements. Applicants requesting alternative compliance must do so in writing at the time of any building permit or land use application, whichever is earliest, and receive approval prior to obtaining any building permit for the project, unless otherwise allowed by the director.
B. Criteria. The director may, at the director’s discretion, approve an applicant’s request for alternative compliance that must achieve an affordable housing benefit to the city equal to or better than providing the affordable units on site.
C. For off-site affordable housing as alternative compliance, the director may approve an off-site location for affordable units. If allowed, the following restrictions apply:
1. The off-site location for the affordable housing would not lead to a disproportionate concentration of affordable dwelling units either on the proposed off-site property or within a particular location within the city;
2. The alternative location must demonstrate that the affordable units provided off site will be completed and made available for occupancy before or within the same time period as the development generating the affordable housing requirement; and
3. The affordable units provided off site will have the same tenure (type of ownership) of units as the new market-rate housing units developed on the subject property.
D. For payments in lieu of construction of affordable housing as alternative compliance, the director may approve cash payments in lieu of providing actual affordable units with the following parameters:
1. The director shall establish a generally applicable formula for determining the payment amount, which may be modified as frequently as once per year.
2. The director shall determine the payment obligation for a particular applicant and the applicant must enter into an agreement with the city agreeing to payment of the fee, all prior to issuance of any building permits for the project.
3. Payment shall be due prior to issuance of any certificate of occupancy for the project.
4. The city shall deposit collected payments in an affordable housing fund established by the city and used for affordable housing development.
5. The subarea generating the affordable housing requirement is the priority location for affordable housing funded wholly or in part with in-lieu fees. However, the city may authorize the use of these funds for affordable housing projects in other subareas of the city (as a second priority) or within another jurisdiction (as a third priority) with close proximity to commercial uses, transit services, and/or employment opportunities.
E. The director may consider other alternative compliance methods for satisfying the affordable housing requirements, as proposed by the project proponent, such as fewer affordable units at greater affordability (e.g., 50 percent of area median income instead of 60 percent of area median income). (Ord. 2442 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
A. Payment shall be due prior to issuance of any certificate of occupancy for the project.
B. The city shall deposit collected payments in an affordable housing fund established by the city and used for affordable housing development.
C. The subarea generating the affordable housing linkage fee is the priority location for affordable housing funded wholly or in part with the fee. The city may, however, authorize the use of these funds for affordable housing projects in other subareas of the city (as a second priority) or within another jurisdiction (as a third priority) with close proximity to commercial uses, transit services, and/or employment opportunities. (Ord. 2341 § 4, 2020).
In the event a fractional affordable housing unit is required, the owner or developer shall have the option of providing an affordable unit or making payment to the city, as described in BMC 12.07.050(D), payments in lieu of construction. (Ord. 2255 § 1, 2018).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish regulations concerning the development and operation of manufactured home parks. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Manufactured home parks shall be not less than 10 acres in size.
B. The number of manufactured homes in the manufactured home park shall not exceed the allowable number of site-built dwelling units which could be constructed on the property in the zone district in which the manufactured home park is located. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Manufactured home parks shall require the same permitting requirements and development standards as the zone district in which the manufactured home park is located. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2252 § 4, 2018; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Chapter 296-150M WAC as currently promulgated, together with any future amendments thereof or future additions thereto, is adopted by this reference and incorporated into this code as if set forth in this section in full. The building official, or designee, is authorized to inspect the installation of manufactured homes, issue permits for all manufactured homes that meet the requirements of this chapter and enforce all violations of this chapter. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
No manufactured home shall be placed on any lot within the city unless a valid installation building permit has been issued by the city pursuant to the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All manufactured home parks existing on April 1, 1996, and which were in compliance with existing city or county codes at the time of their establishment shall be legal nonconforming uses and shall be entitled to the number of manufactured homes which was permitted by the applicable ordinance in effect at the time the manufactured home park was established; provided, however, that no increase in the number of units shall be allowed unless the provisions of this chapter are met.
B. Setbacks applied to structures within the existing Hollyhills and Woodcrest Estates Manufactured Home Parks shall be based upon the setback dimensions of Table 12.08-1 below; provided, that all setback dimensions shall be consistent with the city-adopted building and fire codes:
Table 12.08-1: Setbacks Applicable to Hollyhills and Woodcrest Estates Manufactured Home Parks
Notes:
1Corner lots shall observe a minimum setback of 10 feet from all streets and alleys.
2The distance from accessory buildings to the manufactured home may be reduced when consistent with the building and fire codes.
(Ord. 2442 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2252 § 4, 2018; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to provide standards for the development of specialized senior housing and nursing homes in a manner which recognizes and accommodates the varied housing needs and desires of seniors; promotes independence and a high quality of life; and ensures that specialized senior residences and nursing homes are so located and constructed as to be compatible with surrounding land uses.
Seniors, like other segments of the community, are varied in their housing needs and lifestyle choices. Most of the community’s seniors reside in nonspecialized owned or rented site-built single-family residences, mobile and manufactured homes, and apartments and condominiums which typically contain no inherent design features to aid mobility (although such features may be included by the owner), and which offer no on-site services or activities. These types of housing which are not specifically age-targeted, as well as accessory senior dwelling units (“mother-in-law apartments”) and adult family homes, are regulated elsewhere in this title (see permitted uses and accessory uses under each zoning classification). This chapter provides for and regulates housing intended for those seniors who want or need such specialized design features, services and/or activities to enhance their quality of life.
Where the regulations of this chapter conflict with other regulations in this title, the more restrictive regulations shall apply.
These housing types are described as follows:
A. Specialized senior housing, comprising of coordinated developments of two or more owned or rented site-built single-family dwellings, manufactured homes, apartments and condominiums which contain specialized design features and/or on-site services and activities to accommodate the mobility, nutrition, medical, social and/or other needs of persons 62 years of age or older and/or disabled persons. Domestic partners of and/or caregivers for such persons may also reside in such developments and need not be 62 years of age or older and/or disabled. Individual residences which contain design features to aid mobility but which are not part of a coordinated development are not included in this category.
This category covers a range of service levels, from no services (“independent living”) to minimal meal service and housekeeping (“semi-independent living”) to a high level of assistance with daily life functions (“assisted living”), with many gradations of service levels in between.
B. Nursing homes, comprising facilities which provide short- or long-term care for seniors and other persons who need skilled nursing care but do not require hospitalization. (Ord. 2445 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Occupancy of specialized senior housing shall be limited to persons 62 years of age or over and/or disabled persons, and their domestic partners and/or live-in caregivers who need not be 62 years of age or older and/or disabled. Senior housing may not be converted to another allowed residential use, unless such use meets the density and other requirements of the city code. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The maximum number of dwelling units in a specialized senior housing development and the maximum number of beds in a nursing home development shall be as set forth below.
A. Specialized Senior Housing.
1. On properties located within an area with a Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification, the particular density or intensity of the developments shall be as set forth in the subarea chapter containing the overlay, subject to compliance with all development standards set forth in the said subarea chapter.
2. On properties zoned R-M3, R-M4, R-AC or having multiple zoning classifications (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB), the maximum number of specialized senior housing dwelling units shall not be restricted, subject to compliance with all dimensional, design, parking, landscaping and other development standards of the zoning classification in which the development would occur except those standards relating to density or number of units allowed for nonspecialized housing.
B. Nursing Homes. The maximum number of beds in a nursing home shall not be restricted, subject to compliance with all dimensional, design, parking, landscaping and other development standards of the zoning classification in which the development would occur except standards relating to density or number of units allowed for nonspecialized housing. (Ord. 2445 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Specialized senior housing developments and nursing homes shall exhibit a residential rather than institutional character, through quality site, building, and landscaping design and materials. Adherence to this standard shall be ensured through application of the goals, policies and actions contained in the Urban Design Element of the Comprehensive Plan. Specialized senior housing located within an area having a Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification shall in addition be designed, located and operated in accordance with development standards set forth in the subarea chapter containing the overlay. Where a conflict between city-wide and subarea design and operating standards exists, the subarea standards shall apply. (Ord. 2284 § 2, 2019; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Specialized senior housing located within an area having a Specialized Senior Housing Overlay (SSHO) zoning classification shall be designed, located and operated in accordance with development standards set forth in the subarea chapter containing the overlay. Where a conflict between city-wide and subarea design and operating standards exists, the subarea standards shall apply.
Where a property proposed for specialized senior housing or nursing home development is directly adjacent along a property line to single-family zoned property, which zoning shall include R-C, R-L1, and R-L2, compatibility shall be achieved through a combination of measures including but not limited to the following:
A. The minimum setback from adjacent single-family zoned property line(s) shall be 25 feet;
B. Type II landscaping shall be required along the single-family property line(s); this and other landscaping within the development shall reinforce the existing landscape character of the area to the maximum extent possible;
C. Building design shall incorporate a repetitive articulation and modulation which reflects the scale of nearby single-family lot development, unless the context is poorly defined and/or undesirable and a different character and scale has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations;
D. The following design features of nearby single-family residential development shall be incorporated unless the context is poorly defined and/or undesirable and a different character and scale has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations:
1. Siding materials and styles;
2. Fenestration pattern;
3. Roof materials and styles; and
4. Proportions of architectural elements;
E. Building design shall respect and preserve the privacy and solar access of adjacent single-family development and minimize windows, decks and balconies overlooking neighboring single-family yards;
F. Parking lots shall be designed so as to least impact the character of the neighborhood;
G. Heating, cooling, kitchen and other mechanical equipment; conduits, service panels, meters and other electrical equipment; and refuse collection facilities shall be located and/or screened so as not to be visible or audible above ambient noise levels from adjacent single-family development or the street;
H. In non-single-family zones, building height may exceed that allowed in Chapter 12.14 BMC for architectural elements only and not to increase the number of floors; provided, that for every additional foot of height over the maximum, the building shall be set back from the single-family zoned property line(s) one foot in addition to the minimum required setback. (Ord. 2445 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The required number of parking stalls for specialized senior housing is one per dwelling unit. This may be reduced to one stall per one and one-half dwelling units if justification for the reduction can be provided based on the number and types of services and activities to be provided on site or other factors which affect parking demand. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Recreation space shall be provided at a ratio of a minimum of 100 square feet per dwelling unit for specialized senior housing, and 50 square feet per bed for nursing homes. At least 50 percent of the required minimum area shall be outdoors. The location and layout of recreation space for such developments shall be as set forth in Chapter 12.20 BMC. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Specialized senior housing and nursing home developments on properties located more than one-half mile by sidewalk or walkway from the outer perimeter of a community or neighborhood retail/services activity center (as depicted in Figure ED1 of the comprehensive plan) or a transit route shall demonstrate that a disabled-accessible transportation program offering regular and frequent daily service is provided to the site for use by residents. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1685, 1997; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Provision of Opportunities for Wireless Providers. This chapter is designed to provide opportunities for wireless communication facilities (WCFs) and small wireless facilities (SWFs) consistent with rights of wireless service providers while providing for an orderly development of the city and protecting the health, safety, and general welfare of the city’s residents and property owners.
B. Preservation of Character of City. A primary objective of this chapter is to preserve the existing visual and aesthetic character of the city and its neighborhoods, as well as minimize the noise impacts generated by WCFs and SWFs. Preserving the visual and aesthetic character of the city includes the protection of views within the city which create a special character for the community, high property values and a tax base sufficient to support the city’s operations, limiting the intrusion of noise, visual, and aesthetic impacts associated with commercial and other uses into residential neighborhoods, and encouraging well-coordinated, cohesive streetscapes in those areas of the city where specific design districts are established through planning efforts and capital investments.
C. Goals. The goals of this chapter include:
1. Establishing development regulations consistent with the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, adopted July 31, 1995, as subsequently updated;
2. Providing sites for locating WCFs and SWFs;
3. Providing WCFs and infrastructure a regulatory process free from local regulation that could effectively prohibit wireless communication providers from serving the city and its residential, educational, public safety, commercial users and visitors who use wireless services, as well as providing consumers a choice of providers and allows for continuous improvements in quality, reliability, and innovation;
4. Encouraging the use of appropriate designs that have minimal adverse environmental, noise, and visual impacts on the city and the prompt removal of abandoned facilities;
5. Prioritizing the location of WCFs upon existing nonresidential structures, in such a manner that the WCF is integrated, or appears to be integrated, into the structure;
6. Establishing standards for WCFs and SWFs to mitigate the visual and noise impacts associated with those facilities;
7. Facilitating the use of rights-of-way for WCFs and SWFs to reduce the impact of those facilities upon residential areas of the city where the siting of WCFs or SWFs in residential zoning districts is necessary or desired by a provider;
8. Facilitating the use of existing high voltage transmission towers in private rights-of-way in commercial and certain mixed use zones for WCFs to reduce the need of such facilities within residential areas and to reduce the impacts of WCFs upon residential and other properties; and
9. Encouraging the development of WCFs and SWFs on a competitively neutral basis. (Ord. 2445 § 5 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2295 § 3, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
The following definitions apply throughout this chapter. Additional definitions applicable to those sections relating specifically to eligible facilities requests are included in a separate section within that particular article:
A. “Antenna” means an apparatus designed for the purpose of emitting radio frequency (RF) radiation, to be operated or operating from a fixed location pursuant to FCC authorization, for the provision of personal wireless service and any commingled information services. For the purposes of this definition, the term “antenna” does not include an unintentional radiator, mobile station or device authorized by 47 C.F.R. Part 15.
B. “Antenna array” means two or more devices used for the transmission or reception of radio frequency signals, microwave or other signals for commercial communications purposes.
C. “Applicant” means any person, firm or entity seeking to place a WCF within the boundaries of the city.
D. “Camouflaged” or “concealed” means the use of shape, color and texture to cause an object to appear to blend into something else, usually a structure, such as a building, wall or roof. “Camouflage” or “conceal” does not mean invisible, but rather appearing as part of or blending into either the structure used as a mount or the immediate adjacent background.
E. As used in this chapter, the term “city” means the city of Bothell, Washington.
F. “Director” means the director of the community development department and their designee.
G. “Disguised” means that a WCF is changed to appear to be something other than what it really is. For example, WCFs are sometimes disguised to appear as trees or flagpoles.
H. “Emergency notification services” means services that notify the public of an emergency.
I. “Emergency services” means 911 emergency services and emergency notification services.
J. “Emergency support services” means information or database management services used in support of emergency services.
K. “Equipment enclosure” means a structure, shelter, cabinet, box or vault designed for and used to house and protect the electronic equipment necessary and/or desirable for processing wireless communication signals and data, including any provisions for mechanical cooling equipment, air conditioning, ventilation, or auxiliary electric generators.
L. “FCC” means the Federal Communications Commission.
M. “Guyed tower” means a vertical support structure which is usually over 100 feet tall, which consists of metal crossed strips or bars, and is steadied by wire guys in a radial pattern around the tower.
N. “Lattice tower” means a wireless communication support structure that consists of metal crossed strips, bars, or braces, forming a tower which may have three, four, or more sides.
O. “Licensed carrier” means any person, firm or entity licensed by the FCC to provide personal wireless services and which is in the business of providing the same.
P. “Light pole” means a nonwooden pole that provides lighting for the right-of-way.
Q. “Monopole tower” or “monopole” means a vertical support structure, consisting of a single vertical pole, typically with a platform or bracket for mounting multiple antennas. Monopoles as used herein do not apply to structures designed to support small wireless facilities.
R. “Mount,” depending on its context, means any mounting device or bracket which is used to attach an antenna or antenna array to a utility pole, building, structure, lattice tower, or monopole or may mean the structure or surface upon which personal wireless communication facilities are mounted.
S. “Panel antenna” means a directional antenna designed to transmit and/or receive signals in a directional pattern.
T. “Right-of-way” means any public right-of-way that is classified as an alley, local access street, collector street, minor arterial, or principal arterial and that is partially or fully developed and devoted to transportation use by the public at large. The term shall be interpreted to be synonymous with the term right-of-way as defined in RCW 35.99.010(5).
U. “Small wireless facility (SWF)” is defined in accord with 47 C.F.R. 1.6002(l).
V. “Structure” means a pole, tower, base station, or other building, whether or not it has an existing antenna facility, that is used or to be used for the provision of personal wireless service (whether on its own or comingled with other types of service).
W. “Temporary WCF” means a nonpermanent WCF installed on a short-term basis, for the purpose of evaluating the technical feasibility of a particular site for placement of a WCF; for providing emergency communications during a natural disaster or other emergencies which may threaten the public health, safety and welfare; for providing wireless service during a special event; or for other purposes approved by the city under BMC 12.11.035. Examples of temporary WCFs include, but are not limited to, placement of an antenna upon a fully extended bucket truck, crane, or other device capable of reaching the height necessary to evaluate the site for placement of a WCF.
X. “Unified enclosure” means a small wireless facility providing concealment of antennas and equipment within a single enclosure.
Y. “Utility pole” means a structure designed and used primarily for the support of electrical wires, communication wires, television cables, and it includes light poles. Utility poles can be wooden or nonwooden.
Z. “View corridor” means scenic views of natural and built areas and features, including, but not limited to: tree-covered hillsides; the “feathered edge” along ridgelines surrounding the city; views of the built environment which contain significant architectural or historical features; natural features such as lakes, rivers, streams or mountains; an area of landscaping of local or regional significance; or a public art work.
AA. “Whip antenna” means an omni-directional antenna designed to transmit and/or receive signals in a 360-degree pattern.
BB. “Wireless communications facilities (WCFs)” means any unstaffed facility for the transmission and/or reception of wireless communications services, but does not include small wireless facilities within this definition.
CC. “Wireless services” means any service using licensed or unlicensed spectrum, whether at a fixed or mobile location, provided to the public.
DD. “Wireline services” means a facility used to transport communications data by wire, including but not limited to fiber optic, coax, or other physical medium. (Ord. 2295 § 4, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1885 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
A. Design and construction covered in this chapter shall be in accordance with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications (“Bothell Standards”), which are incorporated herein by reference as currently issued and as may be later amended by the public works director or the director’s designee. The public works director has the authority to implement and enforce the Bothell Standards.
B. The public works director and the community development director are jointly responsible for interpretation and application of the Bothell Standards specifically related to WCF and SWF projects and developments in the city. The procedure for such administrative interpretations is set forth in Chapter 11.04 BMC.
C. The public works director and the community development director jointly shall have the authority to review requests from an applicant for deviations from the Bothell Standards, provided the deviation shall result in performance equal to or better than the original standard. The decision to approve or deny the request shall include consideration of written information submitted by the applicant, and the public works director and the community development director jointly shall notify the applicant in writing of the decision as part of the normal permit review process. A copy of the decision shall be kept in the city’s project files for reference. (Ord. 2295 § 5, 2019).
A. The placement or modification of any WCF or SWF at any location within the city is subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. WCFs shall not be permitted on any building or structure within an area of the city zoned exclusively R-C through R-M4, including the SSHO and MHP overlay zones, except as specified in BMC 12.11.040.
C. Unless specifically exempted by law or ordinance, WCFs and SWFs located within a designated critical area or within a shoreline management area and/or WCFs and SWFs subject to the State Environmental Policy Act shall comply with the requirements of BMC Titles 13 and 14.
D. Lattice and guyed towers solely for WCFs and SWFs shall not be permitted in any zoning district. Monopoles shall be permitted only as specified in BMC 12.11.040.
E. All applicants for WCFs or SWFs in the right-of-way must obtain a franchise. (Ord. 2445 § 5 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2295 § 6, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
The following are exempt from the provisions of this chapter and shall be permitted in all zones:
A. Industrial processing equipment and scientific or medical equipment using frequencies regulated by the FCC.
B. Radar systems for military and civilian communication and navigation.
C. Wireless radio utilized for temporary emergency notifications in the event of a disaster, and police, fire and first responder communications facilities; provided, however, that joint use networks such as the Public Safety Broadband Network (First Net) which also provide commercial telecommunications services to the public shall be subject to this chapter.
D. Licensed amateur (ham) radio stations.
E. Satellite dish antennas less than two meters in diameter, including direct to home satellite services, when used as a secondary use of the property.
F. Routine maintenance, replacement, or repair of a WCF and related equipment (excluding increases in height or expansion of or dimensions of antennas, towers, or buildings); provided, that compliance with the standards of this title is maintained.
G. Subject to compliance with all other applicable standards of this title, a building permit application need not be filed for emergency repair or maintenance of a WCF until 30 days after the completion of such emergency activity.
H. A cell on wheels or other temporary personal wireless telecommunications facility shall be permitted at a time and manner as determined by the city.
I. Automated meter reading (AMR) facilities for collecting utility meter data for use in the sale of utility services, except for whip and other antennas greater than two feet in length; so long as the AMR facilities are within the scope of activities permitted under a valid franchise agreement between the utility service provider and the city. (Ord. 2295 § 7, 2019).
The following siting standards shall apply to all new WCFs and SWFs:
Zone Designation | Permitted Uses | Visual, Dimensional and Equipment Enclosure Standards | Noise Standards |
|---|---|---|---|
Exclusive residential zones (R-C through R-M4, including MHP and SSHO overlays) | In the right-of-way, WCFs and SWFs are permitted | As per BMC 8.26.040 and WAC 173-60-040 | |
Outside of the right-of-way, WCFs and SWFs attached to nonresidential structures and existing monopole and lattice towers are permitted | |||
New monopoles on nonresidential properties with a CUP | As per BMC 12.11.070 | ||
Commercial zones (NB, CB, GC, LI, OP) and mixed use zones (SR 522, GDC, DT, DN, DC, and those containing R-M4 or R-AC as components) | In the right-of-way, WCFs and SWFs are permitted | As per BMC 8.26.040 and WAC 173-60-040 | |
WCFs and SWFs attached to commercial or mixed use buildings are permitted | |||
WCFs and SWFs attached to existing high voltage transmission towers are permitted | |||
Monopoles are permitted outside of the public right-of-way. New monopoles are limited to the zones listed below. | As per BMC 12.11.070 |
New monopoles not to exceed 110 feet in height, unless additional height is demonstrated to be technically necessary to prevent an effective prohibition of service as certified by the provider’s qualified radio frequency engineer and with approval of the community development director and the public works director, are permitted in the following zones:
A. Properties which contain the specific zoning classification combination of: CB, OP, LI and R-AC.
B. Commercial zones which have the exclusive combination of R-AC, CB and OP as a zoning classification and which are located in areas lying within 400 feet of the Interstate 405 right-of-way and more than 100 feet east of the SR-527 right-of-way.
C. Commercial zones which have the exclusive combination of OP and LI as a zoning classification.
D. Other commercial or mixed use zones and public lands as provided by the siting hierarchy in BMC 12.11.065.
E. On nonresidential properties in residential zones as a conditional use. (Ord. 2445 § 5 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2295 § 8, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1885 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish forest practices and land clearing regulations which allow the growing, harvesting and processing of timber on forest land, the conversion of forest land to uses incompatible with timber growing, and the clearing of nonforest land, while preventing the indiscriminate removal or destruction of trees and ground cover on undeveloped and partially developed property during such activities. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The definitions in RCW 76.09.020 of the state Forest Practices Act are hereby adopted by reference for purposes of administration of forest practices permits and shall apply in lieu of any conflicting definitions in the Bothell Municipal Code. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010).
No person, corporation, or other legal entity shall conduct Class I, II, III or IV forest practices, as defined in RCW 76.09.050, or engage in or cause land clearing in the city without first having obtained a forest practices/land clearing permit, except for exempt activities as provided otherwise under BMC 12.12.040. A forest practices/land clearing permit is a Type I permit if environmental review is not required and a Type II permit if environmental review is required, and shall be subject to the procedures for such permits as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.020).
The following shall be exempt from the provisions of this chapter:
A. No separate forest practices/land clearing permit shall be required under this chapter if an application has been filed for a development permit, so long as no alteration of the site is made pending the consideration by the city of such application. The purposes and standards set forth in this chapter shall apply to said pending application;
B. The installation and maintenance of fire hydrants, water meters, pumping stations, and street furniture, by the city or its contractors;
C. Removal of trees and ground cover in emergency situations involving immediate danger to life or property or substantial fire hazards;
D. Removal of dead or diseased trees, dead or diseased shrubs, or dead or diseased ground cover;
E. Removal of invasive, nonnative trees, shrubs, or ground cover unless located within a critical area or its buffer;
F. Removal of ornamental, landscape trees installed for aesthetic purposes in association with a residential use subject to the landscaping and tree retention requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC and the critical areas requirements of Chapter 14.04 BMC. Trees associated with timber production such as Douglas fir, western hemlock, western red cedar, western white pine, Engelmann spruce, western larch, and other timber trees as determined by the director of community development shall not be considered ornamental landscape trees for the purposes of this exemption;
G. Removal of trees, shrubs or ground cover for purposes of general property and utility maintenance or landscaping on developed properties one half acre or less in area, subject to the landscaping and tree retention requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC and the critical areas requirements of Chapter 14.04 BMC. This exemption shall not apply to any forest practices or land clearing which involves the use of a bulldozer or similar mechanical earth-moving equipment, neither shall it be construed to eliminate the requirement of obtaining other applicable development permits;
H. Removal of trees as part of the normal maintenance within the Tolt River pipeline right-of-way and the Seattle City Light transmission line easement;
I. Forest practices on ownerships of contiguous forest land equal to or greater than 20 acres where the forest landowner provides, to the Department of Natural Resources and the applicable county, a written statement of intent, signed by the forest landowner, not to convert to a use other than growing commercial timber for 10 years, in accordance with RCW 76.09.240(1)(a)(i);
J. Forest practices necessitated by fire, flood, windstorm, earthquake or other emergency defined by the state Forest Practices Board, in accordance with RCW 76.09.060(7);
K. Forest practices conducted to control exotic forest insect or disease outbreaks, in accordance with RCW 76.09.060(8); and
L. Forest practices consistent with a habitat conservation plan approved prior to March 25, 1996, by the United States Secretary of the Interior or Secretary of Commerce, and the Endangered Species Act of 1973 as amended, in accordance with RCW 76.09.340. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.030).
An application for a forest practices/land clearing permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application shall contain:
A. A map or plot plan of the subject property at a scale determined to be adequate by the community development director and including date; north arrow; scale; property area, in acres or square feet; contours; location of existing and proposed improvements; location, type, size, and condition of existing trees; general location of existing ground cover and shrubs; and identification of trees, shrubs, and ground cover to be cut or removed;
B. A tree retention plan consistent with BMC 12.18.030, including calculations;
C. Description of the methods intended to be utilized for the proposed forest practices or land clearing activity and the expected dates of commencement and completion of such activity;
D. If applicable, a critical area report as set forth in Chapter 14.04 BMC;
E. A temporary erosion sedimentation control plan as set forth in the Bothell design and construction standards and specifications;
F. Additionally, for applications for forest practices permits and conversions to uses other than commercial timber operation, the information required in RCW 76.09.060, including reforestation plans if applicable;
G. A completed development review billing form committing the applicant to pay development review fees as established in the city fee resolution;
H. Additionally, for forest practices permit applications, fees as established in RCW 76.09.065. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.040).
A forest practices/land clearing permit application shall be evaluated by the city and the permit granted if it is determined that the proposed forest practice or land clearing activity:
A. Promotes the public health, safety, and general welfare of the citizens of Bothell;
B. Is consistent with Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan goals and policies fostering sensitive treatment of the city’s natural vegetation, including but not limited to LU-G7, LU-G8, LU-P10, LU-P11, NE-G1, NE-G2, NE-G3, NE-P5 and UD-P7;
C. Complies with the requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC, Tree Retention and Landscaping, including but not limited to retention of significant trees;
D. Complies with the requirements of BMC Title 13, Shoreline Management, as applicable;
E. Complies with the requirements, purpose and provisions of BMC Title 14, Environment;
F. Complies with the requirements of the Bothell design and construction standards and specifications, including but not limited to installation and maintenance of erosion and sedimentation control before, during and after the forest practice or land clearing activity;
G. Complies with all other applicable requirements of the Bothell Municipal Code and Bothell design and construction standards and specifications;
H. Prevents the indiscriminate removal or destruction of trees and ground cover on undeveloped and partially developed property, and significantly retains the effect of the wooded slopes and the existing tree top line as seen from the valley floors, also known as the “feathered edge”;
I. Promotes building-planning and site-planning practices that are consistent with the city’s natural topographical and vegetational features;
J. Retains clusters of trees for the abatement of noise and for wind protection;
K. Additionally, applications for permits to conduct forest practices or for conversions to uses other than commercial timber operation shall be evaluated for compliance with the requirements of the state Forest Practices Act as set forth in Chapter 76.09 RCW, including but not limited to the following sections:
1. Legislative finding and declaration, as set forth in RCW 76.09.010;
2. Rules establishing classes of forest practices – Applications for classes of forest practices – Approval or disapproval – Notifications – Procedures – Appeals – Waivers, as set forth in RCW 76.09.050;
3. Form and content of notification and application – Reforestation requirements – Conversion of forest land to other use – New applications – Approval – Emergencies, as set forth in RCW 76.09.060;
4. Forest practices permit – Habitat incentives agreements, as set forth in RCW 76.09.063;
5. Forest practices application or notification – Fee, as set forth in RCW 76.09.065;
6. Application for forest practices – Owner of perpetual timber rights, as set forth in RCW 76.09.067;
7. Reforestation – Requirements – Procedures – Notification on sale or transfer, as set forth in RCW 76.09.070;
8. Forest practices – County, city or town to regulate – When – Adoption of development regulations – Enforcement – Technical assistance – Exceptions and limitations – Verification that land not subject to a notice of conversion to nonforestry uses – Reporting of information to the department of revenue, as set forth in RCW 76.09.240;
9. Notice of conversion to nonforestry use – Denial of permits or approvals by the county, city, town or regional governmental entity – Enforcement, as set forth in RCW 76.09.460; and
10. Conversion of land to nonforestry use – Action required of landowner – Action required of county, city, town or regional governmental entity, as set forth in RCW 76.09.470. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.050).
In accordance with the state Forest Practices Act, when issuing a forest practices permit, the city shall:
A. Include with every forest practices permit associated with the conversion of forest land to a use other than commercial timber operation a verification that the land in question is not or has not been subject to a notice of conversion to nonforestry uses under RCW 76.09.060 during the six-year period prior to the submission of a permit application, as required by RCW 76.09.240(7);
B. Report to the state Department of Revenue no later than 60 days after the date the forest practices permit was issued permit information including but not limited to the landowner’s legal name, address, telephone number, and parcel number, as required by RCW 76.09.240(8); and
C. Make inspections of forest lands before, during and after the conducting of forest practices, as required by RCW 76.09.150. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010).
A. Conducting forest practices or land clearing without a permit or failing to comply with the conditions of an issued forest practices/land clearing permit is a violation of these regulations and shall be subject to the provisions under Chapter 11.20 BMC, Enforcement. The unauthorized removal of vegetation shall be mitigated as set forth in BMC 12.18.030(F).
B. In addition to the provisions in subsection A of this section, conducting forest practices without a permit or failing to comply with the conditions of a permit which authorizes a forest practice, including unauthorized conversion to nonforestry use, shall be subject to the violation regulations in the state Forest Practices Act as set forth in Chapter 76.09 RCW, including but not limited to the following sections:
1. Stop work orders – Grounds – Contents – Procedure – Appeals, as set forth in RCW 76.09.080;
2. Notice of failure to comply – Contents – Procedures – Appeals – Hearing – Final order – Limitations on actions, as set forth in RCW 76.09.090;
3. Failure to comply with water quality protection – Department of ecology authorized to petition appeals board – Action on petition, as set forth in RCW 76.09.100;
4. Final orders or final decisions binding on all parties, as set forth in RCW 76.09.110;
5. Failure of owner to take required course of action – Notice of cost – Department authorized to complete course of action – Liability of owner for costs – Lien, as set forth in RCW 76.09.120;
6. Failure to obey stop work order – Departmental action authorized – Liability of owner or operator for costs, as set forth in RCW 76.09.130;
7. Enforcement, as set forth in RCW 76.09.140;
8. Violations – Conversion to nontimber operation – Penalties – Remission or mitigation – Appeals – Lien, as set forth in RCW 76.09.170;
9. Disposition of moneys received as penalties, reimbursement for damages, as set forth in RCW 76.09.180;
10. Additional penalty, gross misdemeanor, as set forth in RCW 76.09.190;
11. Notice of conversion to nonforestry use – Denial of permits or approvals by the county, city, town or regional governmental entity – Enforcement, as set forth in RCW 76.09.460; and
12. Conversion of land to nonforestry use – Action required of landowner – Action required of county, city, town or regional governmental entity, as set forth in RCW 76.09.470. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010).
The burning of trees, shrubs, ground cover or any other material shall be prohibited. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.070).
Any permit granted under this chapter shall expire two years from the date of issuance. Upon a showing of good cause, a permit may be extended for an additional one year. Approved plans shall not be amended without authorization of the responsible official. The permit may be suspended or revoked by the community development director if incorrect information has been supplied in the application, or upon violation of the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.080).
The community development director may require as a condition to the granting of a forest practices/land clearing permit that the applicant furnish a performance bond to the city to secure the applicant’s obligation to complete the restoration and replanting of the property after the approved land clearing has been accomplished in accordance with the terms of this permit and within the term thereof. The bond shall be in an amount equal to 120 percent of the estimated cost of such restoration and replanting and with surety and conditions satisfactory to the community development director. (Ord. 2041 § 4 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.12.090).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish area, dimension and design regulations which comply with and implement the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan with respect to the desired intensity and appearance of development within the city’s residential, commercial and industrial areas. (Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040 contain general density and dimension standards for the various zones. Subarea regulations may establish specific and different density and dimensional standards and take precedent over city-wide regulations. Methods for measuring these city-wide standards are set forth in BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.140.
B. The area and dimension standards are arranged in a table for each of two general land use categories:
1. Residential;
2. Commercial/industrial.
C. Development standards are listed down the left side of both tables, and the zones are listed at the top. The matrix cells contain the area and dimensional requirements of each zone. All dimensions are measured in lineal feet, and all areas are measured in square feet. The parenthetical numbers in the matrix identify specific requirements or other information which is set forth following the matrix. (Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Development Standards Table.
Residential Development Standards (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C | R-L1 | R-L2 | R-M1 | R-M2 | R-M3 | R-M4 | R-AC (always in combination with OP, NB, CB, and/or LI) | ||
40,000 min. | 6,000 | 3,600 | None | None | None | None | None | ||
Middle housing (see BMC 12.14.134) | Base | 2 | 2 | 2 | 4 | ||||
Transit/affordable housing | – | 4 | 4 | 6 | |||||
Maximum ADUs per lot | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | |||||
Maximum base density (3) | 25 | 50 | 60 | 80 | |||||
50% of maximum base density | 50% of maximum base density | 50% of maximum base density | As established for designated centers (6) | ||||||
Garage door | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 | As established for designated centers (6) or for associated commercial designations See BMC 12.14.040(A) | |
All others | 15 | 15 | 15 | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 | ||
No Alley | 35 | 15 | 15 | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 | ||
Alley | – | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | ||
Alley (garage doors) | – | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | ||
5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | |||
Maximum building height (5) | 35 | 35 | 35 | 35 | 35 | 45 | 55 | ||
Maximum hard surface coverage (7) | 35% | 55% | 60% | 70% | 75% | 80% | 90% | 80% | |
The area within the front yard setback shall not contain any hard surface except for driveways, walkways, and structures allowed to project into the setback in accordance with BMC 12.14.090. If critical areas are present anywhere on the property, impervious surface coverage is further regulated by BMC Title 14, Environment. | If critical areas are present anywhere on the property, impervious surface coverage is further regulated by BMC Title 14, Environment. | ||||||||
B. Notes.
1. General Notes.
a. Where a district combines multiple zoning classifications or overlays (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB, MU-N), the most permissive standards of the individual zoning classifications shall apply.
b. Development standards may be modified through the planned unit development process. See Chapter 12.30 BMC.
c. Development standards for manufactured home parks are contained in Chapter 12.08 BMC.
2. Minimum, Average and Maximum Lot Area.
a. In the R-C zone, no lot shall be less than the minimum lot area except as may otherwise be permitted under an approved planned unit development, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC or under Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea regulations in accordance with Chapter 12.52 BMC.
b. Lot Size Averaging in Land Divisions. Lot size averaging applies in the R-L1 and R-L2 zones. When creating new residential lots through land division, individual lots shall be considered in compliance with minimum lot size requirements if the average of the areas of all the lots in the land division meets the minimum requirement for the base zone in which the land division is located, provided:
(1) That no individual lot therein shall be reduced below the average lot size for the next densest zone. For example, lots in the R-L1 zone may not be reduced below R-L2 square feet and lots in the R-L2 zone may not be reduced below R-M1 square feet equivalent of units per acre.
c. In order to promote efficient use of land, no subdivision shall contain any lot having more than one and one-half times the minimum lot area in the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, and R-M1 zones, except as follows:
(1) Any subdivision of nine lots or fewer may contain larger lots, but the property lines of such a subdivision shall be laid out so as to allow future subdivisions which comply with this subsection;
(2) A subdivision of 10 or more lots may contain larger lots to accommodate phasing of the subdivision; provided, that at completion of all phases, the subdivision complies with this subsection;
(3) A subdivision of 10 or more lots may contain a larger lot to permit the preexisting house and any related outbuildings and grounds to be retained intact on one property;
(4) These maximum lot size regulations do not apply to any common tracts for critical area protection, open space retention, storm water retention/detention or other purposes as may be required by the city as a condition of subdivision approval.
d. Land area in dedicated public rights-of-way, surface storm water retention/detention/water quality facilities located within required tracts, critical areas, critical area buffers, or any other land dedicated to the city, shall not be included in any proposed single-family lot, unless so stated in the conditions of an approved planned unit development, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
e. Land in an access easement, utility easement, or other form of easement which is not set aside as a separate tract as required under subsection (B)(2)(c)(4) of this section shall be counted as part of the area of a parcel for the purpose of calculating minimum lot area.
3. Multifamily Minimum and Maximum Density.
a. In the R-M1 through R-M4 zones, one multifamily dwelling unit shall be allowed for each whole number multiple of the stated allowed density, measured as units per acre. Only whole numbers may be credited toward unit count. Rounding up is not permitted. The following exceptions apply:
(1) Specialized senior housing subject to an approved conditional use permit in accordance with Chapter 12.10 BMC; or
(2) Middle housing developments created consistent with BMC 12.06.140 and 12.14.134.
b. In order to promote efficient use of land, no multifamily development in the R-M2 through R-M4 zones shall contain fewer than 50% of the maximum base units for each zone, except as follows:
(1) The total number of units may be fewer than as required above if the development is proposed to be phased; provided, that at completion of all phases, the development complies with the above requirements;
(2) These minimum density regulations do not apply to any multifamily/commercial combination zoning classification (e.g., R-M4, OP, CB);
(3) These minimum density regulations do not apply to any common tracts for critical area protection, open space retention, storm water retention/detention or other purposes as may be required by the city as a condition of development approval.
c. In the R-M2 through R-M4 zones, density, calculated as units per acre, is determined using the net buildable area, unless so stated in the conditions of an approved planned unit development, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
d. Land in an access easement, utility easement, or other form of easement which is not set aside as a separate tract as required under subsection (B)(3)(b)(3) of this section shall be counted as part of the net buildable area of a parcel for the purpose of calculating number of units allowed.
e. In the R-AC zone, minimum residential density is based on the net buildable area and shall be consistent with the applicable subarea regulations.
4. Setbacks.
a. “Setback” shall mean the distance from the lot line to the point where a structure may be constructed, not including those structures permitted under BMC 12.14.090 to project into the setback. The area between a lot line and a setback is a yard. Setbacks shall be in accordance with BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.100.
b. Garages, carports, and other structures whose intent is to house or provide parking for vehicles shall be set back from streets and access tracts a minimum of 20 feet.
c. Special setbacks apply to specific building types, uses and accessory structures. See BMC 12.14.070.
d. When middle housing is created by retaining and renovating a legally established nonconforming residential structure, building setbacks and height of the nonconforming residential structure can be matched in any building addition or expansion necessary to convert the existing dwelling unit to middle housing.
e. For duplex, triplex, or fourplex development, front and rear setbacks may be reduced to a minimum of five feet in the R-C, R-L1, and R-L2 zones, when at least one of the following conditions exists:
(1) Such reduction is allowed with an equal increase in setback distance on the opposite side of the structure. For example, a 10-foot reduction in front yard setback would require a 10-foot increase in rear yard setback.
(2) Such reduction is allowed when necessary to preserve or create natural amenities on the lot. Natural amenities may include, but are not limited to, trees, low impact development features such as rain gardens, or other similar amenities as approved by the community development director. Such amenities shall be placed in a conservation, utility, drainage or similar easement.
(3) Such reduction is allowed when the reduced front and rear setbacks or the associated increased setback pursued under subsection (B)(4)(e)(1) of this section is planted with a 10-foot-wide Type V landscape strip. Low impact development-compliant features such as rain gardens designed to treat storm water runoff from the entire site are allowed in lieu of the required planting strip.
5. Specific building height, minimum residential densities, and minimum floor area ratios may apply to certain activity centers as follows:
a. Within the following activity centers identified in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan:
(1) Filbert/Winesap neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.72 BMC.
(2) Juanita-Woodinville Way/I-405 neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.60 BMC.
(3) Maltby/York/Jewel neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.74 BMC.
(4) Canyon Park community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC. In zones where multiple designations exist, the commercial development regulations in BMC 12.14.040(A) shall apply.
(5) Downtown community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.64 BMC (Downtown Subarea Regulations).
(6) Thrasher’s Corner community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.48 and 12.74 BMC.
(7) Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC.
(8) North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.56 BMC.
(9) Midtown neighborhood activity center in accordance with Chapter 12.46 BMC.
b. Within the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, and R-M2 zones, residential structures may be up to 35 feet in height, provided the residential structure shall incorporate peaked roofs having a minimum roof pitch of four feet vertical for every 12 feet horizontal (4:12), or the uppermost interior floor area does not exceed 50 percent of the interior floor area directly below.
6. Hard surface coverage shall be measured as set forth in BMC 12.14.140. For the purposes of this section, driveways within the front yard setback shall be no wider than necessary to accommodate three vehicles across, and walkways within the front yard setback shall not exceed five feet in width.
a. Notes. Hard surfaces legally established on a site prior to December 31, 2016, and which exceed the limits set forth in this section and BMC 12.14.040 shall be subject to nonconforming provisions of Chapter 12.26 BMC.
b. In determining the hard surface coverage for a panhandle lot, the handle or access portion of the lot shall not be used to determine hard surface coverage. Hard surface coverage shall be measured as though no handle was on the lot.
c. For duplex, triplex and fourplex development, maximum hard surface coverage may be increased by 10 percent, subject to the conditions in subsection (B) of this section.
7. Within the R-AC zoning classification, minimum residential density is prescribed in the applicable subarea regulations. The maximum number of dwelling units attainable shall be controlled by the applicable site and building envelope design regulations.
8. Lands with a zoning classification of R-M3, R-M4, DC, DT, DN, GDC, or R-AC where offspring or unit lots are proposed to be created within a parent site through the subdivision provisions of BMC Title 15 may apply setback dimensions to the offspring lots as set forth in BMC 12.14.085.
9. Within specific subareas duplexes shall be allowed on individual lots to meet affordable housing requirements (see Chapter 12.07 BMC). Such duplexes do not need to meet the side yard setbacks for the common walls between dwelling units, but all duplex lots shall provide all setbacks from adjacent property lines pursuant to subsection A of this section. (Ord. 2459 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2457 § 3 (Exh. C), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2373 §§ 6, 7, 2022; Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2348 §§ 4, 5, 2021; Ord. 2282 § 5, 2019; Ord. 2258 § 2, 2018; Ord. 2255 § 3, 2018; Ord. 2252 §§ 6, 7, 2018; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1995 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1988 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1980 § 2, 2007; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Development Standards Table.
Commercial and Industrial Development Standards (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
Minimum front yard setback (2) | Setbacks shall be the distance required for landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, except as otherwise provided under BMC 12.14.080 | ||||
Minimum rear yard setback (2) | |||||
Minimum side yard setback (2) | |||||
Maximum building height (3) | 35, or as established for designated centers (3) | 35, or as established for designated centers | 35, or as established for designated centers (3) | 35 | 35, or as established for designated centers (3) |
Floor area ratios (3) | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers | As established for designated centers |
Maximum hard surface coverage (4) | 100%, except for any required landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, and required critical areas and their buffers, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment | ||||
B. Notes.
1. General Notes.
a. Where a district combines multiple zoning classifications (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB), the most permissive standards of the individual zoning classifications shall apply; provided, however, that within activity centers, minimum density and/or floor area ratio requirements as established within the applicable subarea regulations shall be met.
b. Development standards may be modified through the planned unit development process consistent with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
2. Setbacks shall be in accordance with BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.100.
3. Specific building height, minimum residential densities, and minimum floor area ratios may apply in the following activity centers identified in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan:
a. Canyon Park community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.44 and 12.48 BMC.
b. Thrasher’s Corner community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.48 and 12.74 BMC.
c. Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC.
d. North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.56 BMC.
e. Downtown community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.64 BMC (Downtown Subarea Regulations).
f. Juanita-Woodinville Way/I-405 neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.60 and 12.66 BMC.
g. Filbert/Winesap neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.72 BMC.
h. Maltby/York/Jewel neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.74 BMC.
i. Country Village/Bothell-Everett Highway/Lake Pleasant/Bothell-Everett Highway neighborhood activity center in accordance with Chapter 12.46 BMC.
4. Building and hard surface coverage shall be measured as set forth in BMC 12.14.140.
C. Development Standards Table – Overlays.
Commercial and Industrial Development Standards (1) | Zoning Classification | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
MU-N | MU-C | MU-E | C-G | E-MC | |
Minimum front yard setback (2) | Setbacks shall be the distance required for landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, except as otherwise provided under BMC 12.14.080 | ||||
Minimum rear yard setback (2) | |||||
Minimum side yard setback (2) | |||||
Maximum building height (3) | 60, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) | 60, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) | 85, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) | 35 | 60, or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater (3) |
Floor area ratios(3) | 3.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 3.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 3.5 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 2.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater | 3.0 or as established for designated centers, whichever is greater |
Maximum hard surface coverage(4) | 100%, except for any required landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC, and required critical areas and their buffers, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment | ||||
D. Notes.
1. General Notes.
a. Where a district combines multiple zoning classifications (e.g., R-AC, OP, CB), the most permissive standards of the individual zoning classifications shall apply; provided, however, that within activity centers, minimum density and/or floor area ratio requirements as established within the applicable subarea regulations shall be met.
b. Development standards may be modified through the planned unit development process consistent with Chapter 12.30 BMC.
2. Setbacks shall be in accordance with BMC 12.14.050 through 12.14.100.
3. Specific building height, minimum residential densities, and minimum floor area ratios may apply in the following activity centers identified in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan:
a. Canyon Park community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.44 and 12.48 BMC.
b. Thrasher’s Corner community activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.48 and 12.74 BMC.
c. Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.48 BMC.
d. North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.56 BMC.
e. Downtown community activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.64 BMC (Downtown Subarea Regulations).
f. Juanita-Woodinville Way/I-405 neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapters 12.60 and 12.66 BMC.
g. Filbert/Winesap neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.72 BMC.
h. Maltby/York/Jewel neighborhood activity center, in accordance with Chapter 12.74 BMC.
i. Country Village/Bothell-Everett Highway/Lake Pleasant/Bothell-Everett Highway neighborhood activity center in accordance with Chapter 12.46 BMC.
4. Building and hard surface coverage shall be measured as set forth in BMC 12.14.140. (Ord. 2459 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2053 § 3 (Exh. C), 2010; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Front Yard Setbacks.
1. Front yard setbacks shall be measured from the street right-of-way boundary to a line parallel to and measured perpendicularly from the street right-of-way boundary. In the case of corner lots, there shall be a front yard setback provided for each lot side abutting an existing or proposed public right-of-way. The yards opposite said front yards need only meet the side yard setback requirements.
2. Where a property abuts a street identified as a collector, minor arterial, principal arterial or freeway/limited access highway in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, the front yard setback shall be measured from the projected right-of-way boundary for the street as if it were fully developed in accordance with the plan.
3. Should the edge of a street surface improvement, including roadway, curb and gutter, and sidewalk, extend beyond the street right-of-way boundary, the front yard setback shall be measured from the edge of the surface improvement. For the purposes of this chapter, the edge of the surface improvements shall be the edge of the pavement, curb or sidewalk.
B. Side and rear yard setbacks shall be measured from the interior lot line to a line parallel to and measured perpendicularly from the interior lot lines at the depth prescribed for each zone.
C. The director is authorized to designate front, side and rear yard setbacks in accordance with subsections A and B of this section. If these subsections do not establish a front, side and rear yard setback, the director shall establish the setbacks based upon orientation of the lot to surrounding lots and to any existing development pattern. All other setbacks shall be established in relation to the established front, side and rear yard setbacks. (Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Structures shall be set back from a property line abutting an alley a minimum of five feet, except as provided in BMC 12.14.030 and subsection B of this section.
B. Vehicle access points from garages, carports or fenced parking areas shall be set back from the alley property line to provide a straight line length of at least 25 feet from the access point to the opposite edge of the alley. No portion of the garage or the garage door in motion may cross the property line. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
When a building or use is required to maintain a specific setback from a property line or other building, such setback shall apply only to the specified building or use.
A. Any structures containing two or more attached primary dwelling units shall be set back a minimum of 25 feet from any property line in or abutting the R-40,000 zone, unless the adjacent property already is occupied by structures containing two or more primary dwelling units. This special setback requirement shall not apply to middle housing structures within detached residential zones that provide affordable dwelling units consistent with the affordable housing provisions of Chapter 12.07 BMC.
B. Within all residential zone classifications, rear yard setbacks for accessory buildings and structures, other than detached accessory dwelling units, shall be five feet. Detached accessory dwelling units shall maintain the same rear yard setback as primary structures, except for those accessory dwelling units located on an alley, in which case the setbacks for structures adjoining alleys in BMC 12.14.060 shall apply.
C. Gas station pump islands shall be set back a minimum of 25 feet from any property line.
D. Abutting an Residential-zoned property, not including combined zones, the setback shall be 50 feet for any building containing manufacturing, distribution, storage or warehousing uses, and 30 feet for any other nonresidential use.
E. Pad-mounted heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment such as heat pumps, air conditioning units, furnaces, and other similar pad-mounted equipment installed after October 16, 2010, shall comply with the following (note: these requirements shall not apply to portable generator use during times of emergency):
1. Not be located in any front yard setback area;
2. Be located at least three feet from any adjacent property line or structure, including fences;
3. Be screened from view of any public right-of-way by means of either landscaping or fencing. Any such screening should be installed such that it can either be readily removed to provide access to said equipment, or should be placed at least three feet from said equipment to allow for access. (Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2373 § 8, 2022; Ord. 2258 § 3, 2018; Ord. 2255 § 4, 2018; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2047 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.080).
The following setback modifications are permitted:
A. When the common property line of two lots is covered by a building(s), the setbacks required by this chapter shall not apply along the common property line;
B. When a lot is located between lots containing structures which are located at nonconforming front yard setbacks, the required front yard setback for such lot may be the average of the two nonconforming setbacks or 60 percent of the required front yard setback, whichever results in the greater front yard setback; and
C. Any modification of setbacks shall be reviewed by the fire department for potential effects on fire flows. (Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.090).
Lands with a zoning classification of R-M3, R-M4, DC, DT, DN, GDC, or R-AC where offspring lots are created through the subdivision provisions of BMC Title 15 may apply the following special setbacks to offspring lots within a parent site; provided, however, that setbacks from the exterior lot lines of the parent site shall be consistent with BMC 12.14.030(A), 12.14.050, 12.14.060, 12.14.070, and 12.14.080(B):
A. Side and rear yard setbacks from offspring lot lines that are not a parent site lot line may be based upon the building separation requirements of the applicable building and fire codes; provided, that zero, common, or shared lot lines may be allowed as set forth within subsection C of this section;
B. Front yard setbacks from internal private access streets and/or access drives shall be at least five feet or shall be set back from the internal private access street and/or access drive tract or easement line sufficient to provide a straight line length of at least 25 feet from the access point of the garage, carport or parking area to the opposite edge of the private access street and/or access drive tract or easement. No portion of a garage or any garage door which may be in motion may cross any lot line;
C. Zero, common, or shared lot lines may be permitted subject to the standards of the applicable building and fire codes;
D. Existing developments comprising detached condominiums or common wall townhouses may utilize the setback provisions of this section if converting to fee simple lots as provided by the subdivision process of BMC Title 15; and
E. Figure 12.14.085-1 provides a visual example of the parent site and offspring lot line setback requirements as set forth within subsections A, B, and C of this section and Figure 12.14.085-2 provides a visual example of zero, common, or shared offspring lot line requirements as set forth within subsection C of this section.


(Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2123 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013).
Projections and facilities may extend into required setbacks as follows:
A. Fireplace structures, bay or garden windows, enclosed stair landing, or similar structures may project into any setback, provided such projections are:
1. Limited to one per facade;
2. Not wider than 10 feet; and
3. Not more than 18 inches into a setback.
B. Uncovered porches and decks which exceed 18 inches above the finished grade may project:
1. Eighteen inches into side and rear yard setbacks; and
2. Thirty-six inches into the front yard setback.
C. Uncovered porches and decks not exceeding 18 inches above the finished grade may project to the property line.
D. Eaves may not project more than:
1. Eighteen inches into a side or rear yard setback;
2. Twenty-four inches into a front yard setback; or
3. Eighteen inches across a lot line in a zero lot line development.
E. Fences with a height of six feet or less may project into any setback; and
F. Storm water facilities, such as, but not limited to, retention/detention ponds, bioswales, vaults, bioretention or other facilities as required by the Bothell Standards, may be located within any front, rear and side yard setback, provided such facilities are set back from any property line a minimum of five feet. Any portion of a surface water retaining structure that is exposed to the air for a dimension of four feet or more above city-approved finish grade shall be consistent with BMC 12.14.152(B)(3). (Ord. 2269 § 5, 2018; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.100).
In determining setbacks for a panhandle lot, the handle or access portion of the lot shall not be used to determine building setbacks. Setbacks shall be determined as though no handle was on the lot. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.110).
A. Building height shall be measured vertically from the average city-approved finish grade to the highest point of the structure.
B. The average city-approved finish grade shall be measured by first delineating the smallest rectangle which can enclose the building and then averaging the existing ground elevations taken at the midpoint of each side of the rectangle. In the event the midpoint of the rectangle drawn is not located on the subject property, the measurement point shall be determined by establishing the midpoint of the property line where it intersects the rectangle.
C. Submittal Requirements.
1. The site plan shall indicate the existing ground elevations and proposed finish grades, as determined by a licensed land surveyor.
2. Building elevations or sections shall be provided for all sides of the building.
D. Compliance with the height requirement shall be determined by:
1. Review of building permit plans, including a site plan indicating existing and proposed finished grades and building footprint, and elevations for each side of the structure; and
2. Field verification at the completion of building framing. On sloping lots or when the structure is within two feet of the height limit, certification by a licensed surveyor is required. On all other structures, verification shall be provided to the building official as required at the time of the framing inspection. (Ord. 1980 § 2, 2007; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.120).
The following structures may be erected above the height limits as set forth in BMC 12.14.110:
A. Roof structures housing or screening ventilating fans, HVAC (heating and cooling equipment), or similar equipment required for building operation and maintenance;
B. Fire or parapet walls, flagpoles, chimneys, smokestacks, communication transmission and receiving structures, utility line towers and poles, water towers/storage tanks, and similar structures;
C. On properties with any of the following zoning designations: R-M4, R-AC, OP, NB, CB, CG, or LI, architectural elements including, but not limited to, peaked roofs and steeples; provided, that the increase in height shall not increase usable floor area;
D. Structures containing certain manufacturing processes within the Canyon Park regional activity center, in accordance with BMC 12.48.020, or the North Creek regional activity center, in accordance with BMC 12.56.080;
E. Repealed.
F. Primary and secondary schools in the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, and R-M1 through R-M4 zones, through the conditional use permit process, in accordance with the following:
1. The maximum height for school buildings shall be 35 feet except as provided in subsection (F)(2) of this section.
2. Architectural elements which do not increase usable floor area, including but not limited to peaked roofs, may extend above 35 feet but in no case shall exceed a height of 55 feet, subject to the following:
a. For each one foot of building height over 35 feet, the required building setback shall be increased one foot from street property lines and two feet from interior property lines. Such increased setbacks shall apply only to that portion of the building exceeding 35 feet in height.
b. For each one foot of building height over 35 feet, the required interior lot line landscaping width shall be increased 0.25 foot (three inches) along those interior lot lines from which the portion of the building over 35 feet is visible.
c. Additional site and building design requirements may be imposed through the conditional use permit process if deemed necessary to mitigate the visual impacts of buildings over the normal height limit and otherwise ensure that such buildings comply with the criteria for approval of conditional use permits, as set forth in BMC 12.28.040. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2025 § 2 (Exh. C), 2009; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1922 § 1, 2004; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.130).
Accessory buildings and structures within residential zone classifications, including but not limited to storage buildings and detached private garages, shall maintain the same residential character of the primary structure, shall cover a maximum of five percent of the lot area, and shall have an exterior height no greater than 20 feet or the height of the primary building or structure, whichever is less, except as provided for detached accessory dwelling units in BMC 12.14.135.
A. Accessory buildings shall utilize similar siding, roofing and detailing as the primary structure, and be of a style that complements the primary structure. Metal buildings that are clearly of a different style than the primary structure shall not be allowed for accessory buildings over 120 square feet.
B. Accessory buildings with a footprint greater than 1,200 square feet shall be set back from the required setback line an additional foot for each 100 square feet of area above 1,200 square feet. A minimum 10-foot-wide Type II landscape buffer shall be installed between any accessory building with a footprint greater than 1,200 square feet and any property line within 50 feet of that structure.
C. Accessory buildings shall have a maximum height of 10 feet at the five-foot accessory building rear setback line, increasing by one foot for each additional foot of setback to the maximum height allowed for accessory buildings. (Ord. 2258 § 4, 2018; Ord. 1995 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.140).
Floor area ratio (FAR) is a mechanism for establishing a relationship between the floor area of a building and the size of the parcel upon which the building is located.
A. FAR is calculated using the following method:
1. First, determine the net buildable area of the site.
2. Second, determine the total square footage of all enclosed and temperature-controlled portions of the proposed, existing or any combination thereof of building(s) located on the subject parcel. Square footage within the building(s) dedicated for parking, parking garages, drive aisles, and interior recreation purposes consistent with BMC 12.20.020 are exempt from the FAR ratio.
3. Finally, divide the floor area by the net buildable site area using similar units of measure to derive the floor area ratio.
4. For example, a 10,000-square-foot parcel within an activity center that requires a minimum FAR of 0.5 establishes that the minimum square footage of temperature-controlled and enclosed building area must be at least 5,000 square feet.
B. Visual examples of FAR:
Figure 12.14-133-A

Figure 12.14-133-B

C. FAR Transference. Square footage of building used to satisfy the floor area ratio may be located anywhere within the subject property and may further be transferred across contiguous or noncontinuous parcels provided the parcels are included as part of an overall development, the FAR transfer runs with the land in perpetuity, and transfer documents shall be recorded with the applicable county. This provision does not relieve an applicant from compliance with all other applicable provisions of the code.
D. Mixed-Use Developments. Where residential and nonresidential uses are combined within one or more buildings on a single parcel or development area, the mix of minimum residential density and nonresidential floor area ratio shall be established within the subarea regulations. (Ord. 2457 § 3 (Exh. C), 2025; Ord. 2353 § 8, 2021).
A. Middle housing is allowed in residential zones pursuant to BMC 12.06.140. Middle housing projects shall comply with the design requirements in this section.
1. All middle housing units directly abutting a public street shall have entries and windows facing the street.
2. Where alleys are available, vehicular access for all middle housing units shall be provided from the alley, unless alley access is demonstrated to be infeasible and alternate access is approved by the public works director as a deviation.
B. Cottage Housing.
1. Cottage housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
a. Maximum lot sizes shall not apply to cottage housing developments.
b. Cottages shall be separated by a minimum distance of six feet.
c. Cottages shall be oriented to a shared open space and shall be connected to the shared open space by a pedestrian path. Cottages within 20 feet of a street property line shall be oriented toward the street.
2. Shared open space owned in common shall be provided for cottage housing as follows:
a. A minimum of 150 square feet per cottage of shared open space is required. The shared open space shall be one contiguous area unless infeasible due to space constraints, as approved by the community development director. Parking areas, driveways, setback areas, and private open space do not qualify as shared open space. Storm water management facilities do not qualify as shared open space unless they are low impact development features that do not adversely impact access to or use of the shared open space for typical use by residents. The shared open space must be a minimum of 15 feet wide in any dimension.
b. Land located between dwelling units and an abutting right-of-way or access easement greater than 21 feet in width shall not serve as required common open space, unless the area is reserved as a separate tract, and does not contain pathways leading to individual units or other elements that detract from its appearance and function as a shared space for all residents.
c. At least 50 percent of the cottages shall abut the shared open space. All cottages shall be within 60 feet walking distance measured from the nearest entrance of the cottage along the shortest accessible walking route to the nearest point of the shared open space.
d. Shared open space shall have cottages on at least two sides.
e. The shared open space shall be developed in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC and shall include a mix of landscaping, lawn area, pedestrian paths, and/or paved courtyard area, and may also include recreational amenities. Impervious surfaces shall not exceed 75 percent of the total shared open space.
3. Private open space shall be provided for cottage housing as follows:
a. Each cottage shall be provided with a minimum of 200 square feet of usable private open space that is clearly separated from the shared open space.
b. No dimension of the private open space shall be less than six feet.
4. Parking shall meet the following requirements:
a. Parking shall be located on the same property as the cottage housing. Parking can be consolidated into one or more off-street parking areas. Off-street parking areas shall be located to the side or rear of the cottage housing development. Off-street parking areas shall not be located between the cottage housing development and the primary street frontage.
b. Off-street parking may be located in or under an accessory parking structure (such as a single or multi-auto carport or garage), but such structures shall not be attached to individual cottages. Uncovered parking is also permitted.
c. Off-street parking shall be screened from direct street view by garage doors, six-foot-high solid sight-obscuring fencing, and/or Type III landscaping that is at least five feet wide.
C. Courtyard housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
1. Number of Dwelling Units. A single courtyard housing development shall include a maximum of eight units, except in R-M3 zones and denser.
2. Courtyard housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
a. Lots developed with courtyard housing shall meet the average lot size requirements of the zone.
b. The main entry to each ground floor dwelling unit shall be directly off a common courtyard or directly from a street. Access to upper-level dwelling units may be through an open or roofed stair.
c. Clear and obvious pedestrian access and visual access between the sidewalk shall be provided.
3. Courtyard housing shall be in a U- or L-shaped configuration where the ends facing the street have the dimensions no larger than a single-family detached structure on the combined lots or adjacent lots on the block-face.
4. Shared open space shall be provided for courtyard housing as follows:
a. A minimum of 200 square feet per dwelling unit of shared open space is required. At least 800 square feet of shared open space shall be provided for each courtyard housing development. Parking areas, driveways, setback areas, and private open space do not qualify as shared open space. Storm water management facilities do not qualify as shared open space unless they are low impact development features that do not adversely impact access to or use of the shared open space for typical use by residents. The shared open space must be a minimum of 15 feet wide in any dimension.
b. Fences are not allowed in any shared open space areas.
c. The shared open space shall be developed with a mix of landscaping, lawn area, pedestrian paths, and/or paved courtyard area, and may also include recreational amenities. Impervious surfaces shall not exceed 75 percent of the total shared open space.
5. Private open space shall be provided for courtyard housing as follows:
a. Each dwelling unit shall be provided with a minimum of 60 square feet of usable private open space in the form of a private yard, porch, patio, balcony, or similar configuration.
b. No dimension of the private open space shall be less than six feet.
6. Parking shall meet the following requirements:
a. Parking shall be located on the same property as the courtyard housing development. Parking can be consolidated into one or more off-street parking areas. Off-street parking areas shall be located to the side or rear of the courtyard housing development. Off-street parking areas shall not be located between the courtyard housing development and the primary street frontage.
b. Off-street parking may be located in or under an accessory parking structure (such as a single or multi-auto carport or garage), but such structures shall not be attached to individual units. Uncovered parking is also permitted.
c. Off-street parking shall be screened from direct street view by garage doors, solid sight-obscuring fencing, and/or Type III landscaping that is five feet wide. (Ord. 2461 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024).
Accessory dwelling units are permitted subject to the following requirements:
A. Two accessory dwelling units are allowed per lot.
B. One accessory dwelling unit in any configuration is allowed on a lot developed with middle housing.
C. One accessory dwelling unit is allowed on lots designated with critical areas or their buffers.
D. The size of an accessory dwelling unit shall be limited as follows:
1. An accessory dwelling unit may be developed up to 1,200 square feet. Conversion of an existing space to an accessory dwelling unit may exceed 1,200 square feet as approved by the community development director, provided this does not exceed 40 percent of the primary dwelling unit’s gross floor area.
2. Detached accessory dwelling units are exempt from the provisions of BMC 12.14.130 that limit the size of accessory buildings to five percent of the lot area.
E. Detached accessory dwelling units shall have a height no greater than 30 feet or no greater than 33 feet for units over an existing accessory structure.
F. For existing accessory dwelling units that were created without an approved application, the property owner must apply to the city for approval. If an accessory dwelling unit was created without a building permit, the city shall require a building inspection to determine whether the structure is sound, will not pose a hazard to people or property, and meets the requirements of this section and BMC Title 20. The accessory dwelling unit application fee will cover the building inspection of the accessory dwelling unit. Permits and inspections may be required for existing attached and detached ADUs per the building official.
G. The city will not assess impact fees on the construction of accessory dwelling units that are greater than 50 percent of the impact fees that would be imposed on the principal unit. (Ord. 2461 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 5 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2277 § 1, 2019; Ord. 2258 § 5, 2018).
A. Building coverage shall mean that portion of a lot that is occupied by the principal building and its accessory buildings, including all projections except eaves. Decks are exempted from the building coverage provisions. Building coverage shall be expressed as a percentage of the total lot area.
B. Hard surface coverage shall mean the ground areas of the entire development site covered by any impervious surface, permeable pavement, or vegetated roof, determined by extending a vertical projection to the ground from the widest points of any hard surface, and expressed as a percentage of total lot area. Permeable pavement and vegetated roofs shall count only 50 percent of their site area as hard surface for the purposes calculating coverage in the Development Standards Tables in BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.150).
Fences and freestanding walls may be erected in any zone district as provided below:
A. Fences and/or freestanding walls six feet or less in nominal height shall be consistent with the following:
1. Shall be placed behind any landscape buffer required by Chapter 12.18 BMC.
2. Where no landscape buffer is required, fences and freestanding walls may be allowed without a setback within any front, rear or side yard.
3. Fence and freestanding wall height shall be measured from the horizontal projection of the predominant ground level of either the city-approved finish grade where such grade has been established, or from the horizontal projection of the predominant existing grade in the vicinity of the fence.
4. Fence and freestanding wall height shall be measured to the upper surface of the fence or freestanding wall panel.
5. Where the International Residential Code (IRC) or the International Building Code (IBC) requires a guard on top of a retaining wall or retaining structure, any fence or freestanding wall so located shall meet the minimum guard height and construction requirements of the IRC or IBC, as applicable.
6. No fence or freestanding wall shall be placed closer than three feet to or may obscure the vision of any fire hydrant.
7. All fences and freestanding walls shall comply with the sight distance requirements of the Bothell Standards.
B. Fences and freestanding walls that exceed a nominal height of six feet shall comply with any required front, side, and rear yard setbacks.
C. Electric fences shall:
1. Be permitted only within the residential zone classifications and only for the raising and keeping of animals for agricultural purposes or pasturing;
2. Be posted with permanent signs a minimum of two square feet in area at 50-foot intervals stating that the fence is electrified;
3. Be placed no closer than six feet to any fire hydrant.
D. Barbed wire fencing is permitted in association with animal husbandry or pasturing and for security purposes to protect sensitive locations or facilities as identified by the chief of police.
E. Razor wire fencing is prohibited; provided, however, that military or police services may install razor wire to protect sensitive locations or facilities as identified by the chief of police. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2269 § 6, 2018; Ord. 1997 § 2, 2008; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.160).
Retaining walls, rockeries, modular block walls, rock walls, or any other structures which retain soil, retain earth surcharge, protect an exposed soil face, or serve as a gravity retaining wall, shall, for the purposes of this chapter, be known as retaining structures. Retaining structures shall be consistent with the following:
A. Height Measurement. The height of a retaining structure shall be measured from the point at which the ground elevation of the city-approved finish grade intersects with the retaining structure to the highest point of the retaining structure as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-1.
Figure 12.14.152-1

B. Outward Facing Retaining Structures. The following section regulates retaining structures that face outward from a property and are primarily and directly visible to adjacent properties:
1. Retaining Structure Location, Maximum Heights and Minimum Separation within Setbacks.
a. All retaining structures, including footings or foundations, shall be set back at least one foot or a horizontal distance equal to the height of the structure, whichever is greater, from any property or right-of-way line, unless the applicant provides a recorded easement from the adjacent property owner or owners to allow either all or a portion of the retaining structure to be on or closer to an adjacent property.
b. Within rear and front yard setback areas, retaining structures shall not be higher than four feet. Two or more up to four-foot-high retaining structures may be permitted within rear or front yard setbacks, provided the retaining structures are separated by a distance that is equal to two times the height of the structure as illustrated in Figures 12.14.152-2 and 12.14.152-3.
c. The maximum slope gradient allowed between retaining structures shall be a four-foot horizontal to a one-foot vertical (4H:1V) slope.
d. Within side yard setback areas, retaining structures shall not be higher than six feet as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-2.
Figure 12.14.152-2

Figure 12.14.152-3

Figure 12.14.152-4

2. Retaining structures located outside the setback or yard area shall be consistent with the following:
a. Retaining structures shall have a maximum height of 12 feet;
b. All retaining structures shall be separated by a distance that is equal to the height of the downslope retaining structure; and
c. A maximum slope gradient of four feet horizontal to one-foot vertical (4H:1V) shall be placed between retaining structures;
These provisions are illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-5 below.
Figure 12.14.152-5

d. The community development director, in consultation with the public works director, may waive or reduce the wall separation distance, may increase the maximum allowed slope gradient between retaining structures up to a three-to-one slope (3H:1V), and may increase the allowed maximum height of a retaining structure if the applicant demonstrates the reduced separation distance and/or increased gradient and/or wall height is necessary to:
(1) Reduce potential adverse impacts to a critical area(s) or buffer(s) as defined by Chapter 14.04 BMC; or
(2) Retain a greater number or diameter inches of significant trees; or
(3) Permit the installation of transportation improvements; or
(4) The alternative separation, slope gradient, or height is in the public interest.
3. All retaining structures, building or structure foundation walls or the walls of surface water vaults or facilities that are visible from adjacent public rights-of-way or residential properties shall apply the following:
a. All retaining structures four or more feet in height shall be constructed of or faced with brick, stone, split-face or fluted concrete block, textured poured-in-place concrete, or other materials with texture to reduce the apparent mass of the wall, as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-6;
Figure 12.14.152-6

b. All retaining structures greater than six feet in height shall be installed with hanging and/or climbing vegetation above or below the wall, and/or shall be installed with a bas-relief sculpture or other art forms as approved by the community development director, which sculpture or art shall be incorporated on or into the face of the wall, as illustrated in Figure 12.14.152-7.
Figure 12.14.152-7

C. Inward Facing Retaining Structures. The following subsection regulates retaining structures that face into a development site and are primarily visible to the tenants and users of that development:
1. Retaining Structure Location, Maximum Heights and Minimum Separation.
a. Retaining structures, including footings, foundations and tie-backs or other structural anchors, shall be set back at least one foot from any property or right-of-way line or a horizontal distance equal to the height of the structure, whichever is greater, unless the applicant provides a recorded easement from the adjacent property owner or owners to allow either all or a portion of the retaining structure to be on or closer to an adjacent property (see Figure 12.14.152-8).
b. Engineered retaining structures may be built one foot from the property line regardless of the height of the structure as long as the horizontal distance to any structures on the adjacent property is equal to the height of the structure (see Figure 12.14.152-9).
c. Maximum exposed height shall be 12 feet unless mitigated by measures described in subsections (B)(2)(d) and/or (B)(3) of this section.
d. Height of exposed walls may also be mitigated through the use of one or more planters designed to accommodate minimum landscape buffers. Width of such planters shall be a minimum of five feet.
e. Minimum separation from face of building shall be 10 feet, or more if determined to be necessary for fire or other access requirements.
Figure 12.14.152-8

Figure 12.14.152-9

(Ord. 2417 § 2 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2269 § 7, 2018).
All development other than single-family residential development shall provide storage space for the collection of recyclables and garbage as follows:
A. The storage space shall be provided at the rate of:
1. Three square feet per dwelling unit in multifamily developments except where the development is participating in a public agency-sponsored or approved direct collection program in which individual recycling bins are used for curbside collection;
2. Four square feet per every 1,000 square feet of building gross floor area in office, educational and institutional developments;
3. Six square feet per every 1,000 square feet of building gross floor area in manufacturing developments and all developments other than those specified in this subsection; and
4. Ten square feet per every 1,000 square feet of building gross floor area in retail developments.
B. The storage space for multifamily residential developments shall be apportioned and located in collection points as follows:
1. The required storage area shall be dispersed among collection points throughout the site when there is more than one building.
2. There shall be a minimum of one collection point for every 30 dwelling units.
3. Collection points may be located within residential buildings, in separate buildings/structures without dwelling units, or outdoors. Outdoor collection points shall not be located in any required setback areas.
4. Collection points located in separate buildings/structures or outdoors shall be no more than 200 feet from a common entrance of a residential building.
5. Collection points shall be located in a manner so that hauling trucks do not obstruct pedestrian traffic or project into any public right-of-way.
C. The storage space for nonresidential development shall be apportioned and located in collection points as follows:
1. Storage space may be allocated to a centralized collection point.
2. Outdoor collection points shall not be located in any required setback areas.
3. Collection points shall be located in a manner so that hauling trucks do not obstruct pedestrian or vehicle traffic , or project into any public right-of-way.
4. Access to collection points may be limited, except during regular business hours and/or specified collection hours.
D. The collection points shall be designed as follows:
1. Dimensions of the collection points shall be of sufficient width and depth to enclose containers for recyclables and garbage. The area enclosed in such collection points shall be in accordance with the storage space requirements set forth in subsection A of this section.
2. Architectural design of any structure enclosing an outdoor collection point or any building primarily used to contain a collection point shall be consistent with the design of the primary structure(s) on the site through all of the following:
a. Similar architectural style;
b. Similar exterior finish materials and colors;
c. Similar architectural details or features.
3. Collection points shall be identified by signs not exceeding two square feet each.
4. A seven-foot wall or fence with a gate or gates shall enclose any outdoor collection point, excluding collection points located in industrial developments that are greater than 100 feet from residentially zoned property and not visible from the street right-of-way.
5. Enclosures for outdoor collection points and buildings used primarily to contain a collection point shall have gate openings at least 12 feet wide for hauling trucks. In addition, the gate opening for any building or other roofed structure used primarily as a collection point shall have a vertical clearance of at least 12 feet. Each enclosure may have more than one gate opening.
6. Weather protection of recyclables shall be ensured by using weather-proof containers or by providing a roof over the storage area.
7. No collection point or container shall be visible from the street right-of-way or adjacent single-family development. The collection point or container shall either be located behind the building or shall be adequately screened with Type I landscaping.
E. Only recyclable materials and garbage generated shall be collected and stored at such collection points. Except for initial sorting of recyclables by users, all other processing of such materials shall be conducted off site.
F. No container shall be collected and stored at any location on the site except in a designated storage facility.
G. The lids of all garbage and recyclables containers shall be maintained in a closed position. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.165).
When a lot is divided by a zone boundary, the following rules shall apply:
A. When a lot contains both residential and nonresidential zoning, the zone boundary between the zones shall be considered a lot line for determining permitted building height and required setbacks on the site;
B. When a lot contains residential zones of varying density, any residential density transfer within the lot shall only be allowed from the portion with the lesser residential density to that of the greater residential density; and
C. Uses on each portion of the lot shall only be those permitted in each zone pursuant to Chapter 12.06 BMC. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.170).
Design of sites and buildings shall comply with BMC 12.14.180 through 12.14.230 and other applicable regulations in this code which implement the goals and policies of the urban design element of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. In addition to compliance with these regulations, persons interested in developing property are required to consult the illustrations and written guidelines in the urban design element and in the residential development handbook for Snohomish County Communities, which is incorporated by reference in the comprehensive plan as Appendix H. As an appendix to the plan, the residential development handbook is an adopted SEPA policy of the city of Bothell. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.180).
A. Residential Development Access Design. The access design of residential developments shall comply with the following:
1. Streets shall be located and configured in such a manner as to not promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic. Improvements to the existing street network shall be planned to restrict through traffic to arterials and to reduce the amount of through traffic on residential neighborhood streets. Neighborhood cut-through traffic shall mean motor vehicle traffic which neither originates nor terminates within the neighborhood, but travels through the neighborhood for the purposes of avoiding arterial traffic and/or saving time between an origin and a destination outside the neighborhood. Whether a proposed street network promotes or does not promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic will be determined on the basis of the required traffic impact analysis submitted with the development application.
2. Connections to surrounding streets and developments shall be provided for pedestrians and bicyclists as warranted for safe and efficient nonmotorized travel within and between neighborhoods, and in particular to provide access to activity centers, parks, schools, transit stops and other gathering places. Such connections shall include but are not limited to bicycle lanes, sidewalks and dedicated pedestrian/bicycle paths, and shall be provided in accordance with BMC 12.16.120 and this section.
3. Connections to surrounding streets and developments shall be provided for police, fire and emergency medical services vehicles as warranted to minimize response times to, from and within the neighborhood. Where such connections are determined on the basis of the required transportation impact analysis to promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic, emergency vehicle-only access ways shall be provided.
B. Commercial and Mixed-Use Development Access Design. In conjunction with new development or redevelopment in areas zoned for commercial or mixed commercial and residential uses, proposed streets shall be located and configured in such a manner as to create an interconnected network which facilitates motorized and nonmotorized travel; provided, however, that proposed streets or connections which are determined to promote residential neighborhood cut-through traffic, as defined in subsection A of this section, are not allowed.
C. Development on Hillsides. Development on hillsides shall blend visually and functionally into the natural environment to the maximum extent possible. Such development shall comply with the following:
1. Changes to the natural topography shall be minimized. Roads, lots, buildings and parking areas shall be located, configured and constructed so as to minimize grading and its consequent impacts on soil stability and surface and groundwater movement.
2. Clearing of existing native vegetation shall be minimized. Existing vegetation shall be retained in accordance with BMC 12.18.030 and this section to preserve wildlife habitat and natural groundwater recharge functions and promote soil stability.
3. Retaining walls and high foundations on the underside of buildings shall be screened by vegetation.
D. Location of Buildings and Parking. In any development in the OP, NB, CB, and GC zoning classifications, and in any zone which combines one or more of these classifications with an R zoning classification, parking shall not be located between any building to which the general public has access and the front lot line, subject to the following:
1. Parking shall be prohibited in the area between the front lot line and a line running parallel to the front lot line and tangent to the closest point of the building to the front lot line, and extending along the front lot line that distance by which the building faces the front lot line, as measured between points projected from the most distant points of the building at right angles to the front lot line. Examples of how this regulation applies are provided in Figures 12.14-1, 12.14-2 and 12.14-3.
Fig. 12.14-1

Fig. 12.14-2

Fig. 12.14-3

2. Corner Lots. A corner lot is defined as a lot at the junction of and having frontage on two or more intersecting streets. On a corner lot, each lot line abutting a street right-of-way is considered a front lot line.
a. A building on a corner lot shall be placed at the intersection of the front lot lines so that there is no parking between the building and either front lot line.
b. When a corner lot has frontage on more than one street intersection, the regulation in subsection (A)(2)(a) of this section shall apply only to one of the intersections. An example of how this regulation applies is provided in Figure 12.14-4.
c. Buildings on a corner lot shall be located so as not to interfere with sight distance at intersections.
Fig. 12.14-4

3. A through lot is defined as a lot which has frontage on two parallel or approximately parallel streets. In such a case, the requirements in subsection A of this section shall apply to only one of the frontages. An example of how this regulation applies is provided in Figure 12.14-5.
Fig. 12.14-5

4. Where a development consists of two or more buildings on one property, the requirement in this subsection D shall apply to only one of the buildings in the development. Buildings containing less than 1,000 square feet of gross floor area shall not be counted as satisfying this requirement.
5. The area between the building and the front lot line may be utilized for landscaping, outdoor pedestrian activities, critical areas and their buffers, or storm water detention facilities.
6. Where it can be demonstrated that one or more site characteristics make compliance with these regulations unfeasible, the community development director may allow an alternative building location. Such site characteristics include but are not limited to:
a. Parcel shape;
b. Topography;
c. Existing shared access with adjacent properties;
d. Existing significant trees which might be saved by locating a building elsewhere.
7. Where an overall site plan has been adopted, through a subarea plan and implementing regulations, a planned unit development, a binding site plan, a conditional use permit, or other mechanism requiring approval by the hearing body, planning commission and/or the city council, the adopted site plan shall control the location of buildings and parking.
8. These regulations shall not apply to location of single-family dwellings.
E. Community Gathering Place. To encourage public interaction and promote a sense of community, proposed developments of five acres or more shall provide a community gathering place or places at a ratio of 20 square feet of improved space per acre, with a minimum of 100 square feet per gathering place. For the purposes of these regulations, “community gathering place” shall mean an informal, small-scale, hard-surfaced area intended for use by the general public. The community gathering place may be located adjacent to public right-of-way, for example, as a plaza connected to the sidewalk, or internal to the development. Adjacent developments may combine to form one or more community gathering places. Each community gathering place shall include one or more features to encourage public interaction. Such features include but are not limited to the following:
1. Benches;
2. Fountains;
3. Sculpture or other art forms;
4. Kiosks for posting neighborhood items;
5. Links to transit and pedestrian and bike trails;
6. Bandstands or gazebos;
7. Pedestrian-scale lighting.
F. Exterior Lighting. Exterior lighting shall be an integral part of the site and building design and shall serve the purposes of enhancing safety and security, defining on-site pedestrian and bicycle paths and connections with off-site paths, and encouraging safe nighttime pedestrian activity and public interaction. Such lighting shall accomplish one or more of the following:
1. Illuminate landscaping elements such as tree foliage and shrubs;
2. Illuminate building elements such as entryways, canopies, cornices or other architectural features;
3. Illuminate parking lots;
4. Illuminate pedestrian and bicycle pathways with fixtures such as lighting bollards or low pole lights.
G. Design of Parking Lots, Parking Structures, Transit Stops and Shelters and Pedestrian Sidewalks and Pathways. The design of these facilities shall be in accordance with BMC 12.16.080 through 12.16.120. (Ord. 2269 § 8, 2018; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 2140 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.190).
A. Overall Design. The exterior of each non-single-family building shall be designed so as to have a visually distinct base, main section and roofline, to provide visual references to the scale of the building, and to help the building fit in with its context, in accordance with the following:
1. The base may comprise the foundation itself; the nonstructural use of materials such as brick, stone or textured concrete which convey an impression of permanence and support; or a contrast in materials or colors between the base and the main section.
2. The main section shall incorporate architectural features and detailing to create visual interest. In addition to the requirements of BMC 12.14.200 and 12.14.210, such features and detailing may include but are not limited to windows, columns, pilasters, belt courses, brackets, arches, decorative molding, quoins and similar architectural devices. Any architectural decoration shall be part of a unified design.
3. The design of the roof shall employ at least one of the following:
a. A gable, gambrel or hipped roof;
b. A broken or articulated roofline;
c. A prominent cornice or fascia that defines and emphasizes the top of the building;
d. Any other roof element that emphasizes a building’s unifying architectural concept and helps it to fit in with its context.
Examples of how these regulations apply are illustrated in Figures 12.14-9, 12.14-10 and 12.14-11.
Fig. 12.14-9

Fig. 12.14-10

Fig. 12.14-11

B. Pedestrian Entries. The building design shall clearly define and emphasize the pedestrian entries. Any primary pedestrian entry to a building shall be designed so as to be visually predominant over parking lot driveways or garage entrances. Pedestrian entries shall be emphasized by one or more of the following methods:
1. Landscaping the entry and approach to the entry in a manner which is consistent with and extends the building design theme;
2. Incorporating a formal entry;
3. Utilizing modulation to emphasize by indentation or protrusion the portion of the building containing the entry;
4. Incorporating a porte-cochere or other cover providing weather protection for the entry.
Examples of how these regulations apply are illustrated in Figure 12.14-12.
Fig. 12.14-12

C. Exterior Building Materials. Building exteriors shall be constructed of durable and easily maintainable materials, to enhance the overall appearance, community character and long-term economic vitality of the area in which the building is located. The use of various types of materials in exterior building design shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Metal siding shall have visible corner moldings and trim, and a matte finish;
2. Mirrored glass is allowed only in the LI zone and above the street level story in the OP, NB, CB and GC zones;
3. Concrete walls shall be enhanced by texturing, coloring with paint or an admixture, or by incorporating embossed or sculpted surfaces, mosaics or artwork.
D. Screening of Roof-Mounted Mechanical Devices. Mechanical devices, such as exhaust fans, vents, air conditioning units, heating equipment, electrical devices, mechanical, electrical and other equipment located on the roof of any structure shall be screened to avoid unsightly roof appearance as viewed from surrounding property, including hillsides. The design of the screening shall be incorporated as an integral part of the overall building design. Screening materials shall be consistent with subsection C of this section. Roof-mounted solar or wind equipment is exempt from screening requirements, provided the installation is consistent with BMC 12.14.250(D). (Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.200).
A. Multiple-family residential building design shall promote public interaction and a sense of community within each development by incorporating one or more of the following features:
1. Balconies;
2. Porches;
3. Rooftop terraces;
4. At-grade patios;
5. Courtyards;
6. Formal or informal gardens.
B. Where a building containing residential dwelling units would be located in close proximity to a public right-of-way, the design shall create a transition between the public realm of the street and the private realm of the residences by incorporating one or more of the following:
1. Screening and buffering with trees, shrubs, fences and/or walls to create a physical separation between pedestrians and the windows of residential units;
2. Construction of the first story of units so that they are above the level of the sidewalk a sufficient height to prevent a direct view into the dwelling units;
3. Partially enclosed porches and other outdoor living areas which front onto the street;
4. Courtyards fronting on the street and defined by landscaping and/or fences.
Examples of how these regulations apply are illustrated in Figure 12.14-13.
Fig. 12.14-13

C. Building Facade Modulation. Modulation is a measured and proportioned inflexion or setback in a building’s face. Multifamily residential buildings shall provide modulation on facades as follows:
1. The maximum wall length without modulation shall be 40 feet;
2. The sum of the modulation depth and modulation width shall be no less than eight feet. The modulation depth shall be not less than two feet and the modulation width shall be not less than six feet.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-14.
Fig. 12.14-14

D. Roofline Variation. Multifamily residential buildings shall provide roofline variation as follows:
1. The maximum roof length without variation shall be 40 feet;
2. The minimum horizontal or vertical offset shall be three feet;
3. The minimum variation length shall be six feet;
4. Roofline variation shall be achieved using one or more of the following methods:
a. Vertical offset in ridge line;
b. Horizontal offset in ridge line;
c. Variations of roof pitch;
d. Gables;
e. Any other technique approved by the community development director which avoids the appearance of a continuous unrelieved monolithic roofline.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-15.
Fig. 12.14-15

(Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.210).
A. Where pedestrian activity is present, windows are preferable to blank walls because windows create visual interest both for the passerby and for the building occupant. Windowless walls shall not be oriented to the street unless necessary for the use conducted in the building, mandated by the fire code, or otherwise required by city codes. Where a windowless wall is oriented to the street, the appearance of the wall shall be softened by application of BMC 12.18.080(C) and one or more of the following:
1. Installation of trellises and vines;
2. Use of brick, stone, split-face or fluted concrete block, textured poured-in-place concrete, or other materials with texture to reduce the scale of the wall;
3. Incorporation of artwork, such as a mural, sculpture, or bas-relief, on the wall surface;
4. False windows.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-16.
Fig. 12.14-16

B. Buildings at the corners of street intersections shall incorporate design features to create or reinforce the appearance and feeling of the intersection as an outdoor community “room.” Such design features include but are not limited to:
1. A change of wall plane;
2. A change of roofline;
3. A major pedestrian entry;
4. Balconies;
5. Turrets;
6. Sculpture, mosaic, or other artwork.
An example of how these regulations apply is illustrated in Figure 12.14-17.
Fig. 12.14-17

(Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.220).
Where multifamily residential, commercial or industrial development abut single-family residential zones, design compatibility shall be achieved through a combination of measures including but not limited to the following, in addition to other requirements of this title:
A. The minimum setback from adjacent single-family zoned property shall be 25 feet;
B. At a minimum, a Type II landscaping buffer shall be required along the single-family property line(s); this and other landscaping within the development shall reinforce the existing landscape character of the area to the maximum extent possible;
C. Multiple-family and mixed use building design shall incorporate a repetitive articulation and modulation which reflects the character of development in the adjacent single-family zones, as illustrated in Figure 12.14-18, unless a majority of the houses within one street of the proposed development do not share a common style or a different character has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations;
Fig. 12.14-18

D. The following design features of adjacent single-family residential development shall be incorporated in multiple-family and mixed use developments unless a majority of the houses within one street of the proposed development do not share a common style or a different character and scale has been identified and adopted under subarea regulations:
1. Siding materials and styles;
2. Window arrangement, spacing and sizing;
3. Roof materials and styles; and
4. Proportions of architectural elements;
Examples of how the above regulations apply are illustrated in Figure 12.14-19.
Fig. 12.14-19

E. Building design shall respect and preserve the privacy of adjacent single-family development by minimizing the quantity and size of windows oriented to the single-family residential zone. Any decks and balconies overlooking neighboring single-family yards are prohibited;
F. Parking lots shall be designed so as to least impact the character of the single-family neighborhood;
G. Heating, cooling, kitchen and other mechanical equipment, conduits, service panels, meters and other electrical equipment, and refuse collection facilities shall be located and screened so as not to be visible or audible above ambient noise levels from adjacent single-family development or the street. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.14.230).
Where a proposed development would be on or adjacent to a property on the local, state or national historic register or local historic inventory or within an historic district on the register, the following regulations shall apply:
A. If the proposed development would entail any changes to a structure on an historic register or demolition of a structure on the local historic inventory, such proposed changes or demolition shall be subject to the procedures and criteria set forth in Chapter 22.28 BMC, Changes to Property on Register or Inventory.
B. The proposed development shall reflect the architectural character of adjacent and nearby historic properties by one or more of the following measures:
1. A similar unifying design concept which organizes a building’s architectural elements into a harmonious composition;
2. Similar building proportions, scale and roof line;
3. Similar architectural style and exterior finish materials;
4. Similar patterns and proportions of windows;
5. Similar entry configuration and relationship to the street;
6. Similar architectural details or features (such as cornices or trellises). (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000. Formerly 12.14.240).
A. Purpose. The purpose of this section is to regulate exterior lighting by promoting the principles of good lighting design, including:
1. Permit reasonable amounts of exterior lighting for night-time safety, utility, security, productivity, enjoyment and commerce;
2. Minimize adverse off-site impacts including light trespass, glare, and night glow;
3. Conserve energy and resources to the greatest extent possible; and
4. Curtail light pollution and preserve the night-time environment.
B. Definitions. The following definitions are listed in alphabetical order for the purpose of exterior lighting regulations, and shall apply to the administration of this section. In addition, except as otherwise provided in this section, those definitions as contained in Chapter 11.02 BMC are adopted and incorporated into this section by reference.
“Adjacent grade” means the grade directly below a luminaire (light fixture) on a plumb line or nearest grade thereto based upon city-approved finish grade.
“Astronomic time switch” means an automatic lighting control device that operates as an on/off switch for outdoor lighting relative to the time of solar day with time of year correction.
“Canopy” means a covered, unconditional structure with at least one side open for pedestrian and/or vehicular access.
“Common outdoor areas” means one or more of the following: a common parking for three or more domiciles or buildings; a common parking garage or covering entrance intended to be used by three or more domiciles or buildings; a common entrance for three or more domiciles or buildings.
“Curfew” means a time defined by the authority when outdoor lighting is reduced to a specified maximum level or extinguished.
“Emergency conditions” means a loss of electrical power, fire, security alarm, or other situation requiring uninterrupted illumination for the path of egress.
“Fully shielded luminaire” means a luminaire typically with opaque top and sides, capable of only emitting light in the lower photometric hemisphere as installed.
“Glare” means a light entering the eye directly from luminaires that causes visual discomfort or reduced visibility.
“Hardscape area” means area in square feet of all hardscape including any medians, walkways, landscape areas 10 feet or less in width within the hardscape area.
“Hardscape perimeter” means a perimeter in linear feet of all hardscape outside perimeter plus perimeter around buildings and structures greater than 10 feet in width.
“IDA” means the International Dark-Sky Association.
“IESNA” means the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
“Illuminated area” means an exterior area for which lighting of reasonable uniformity and illumination is provided; not incidentally lighted or partially lighted.
“Improved area” means the area of a specific use, measured in plain view.
“Initial lamp lumens” means the lumen rating of a lamp when the lamp is new and has not depreciated in light output (rated lamp lumens). Lamp lumen depreciation equals 1.0.
“Intended manner” means the manner of use of the product generally as listed, advertised and/or per manufacturer’s standard installation instructions.
“Lamp” means a generic term for a source created to produce optical radiation (i.e., “light”), often called a bulb or tube.
“Lamp watts” means the rated watts of the lamp, not including the watts of external auxiliaries.
“Landscape lighting” means lighting not mounted to poles or buildings, for the purpose of illumination of trees, shrubbery and other natural external elements.
“Light pollution” means light trespass, and excessive light levels, beyond what is necessary to perform the defined task.
“Light trespass” means unwanted light that falls on neighboring properties.
“Lighting equipment” means equipment specifically intended to provide electric illumination, including, but not limited to, luminaire(s), poles, posts, and related structures, electrical wiring, and other necessary or auxiliary components.
“Lighting system” means on a site, all exterior artificial lighting sources, associated infrastructure and controls.
“Lighting zone (LZ)” means a designation assigned by the city for specified parcels, areas or districts defining allowable ambient lighting levels, operational characteristics and other control criteria.
“Low voltage landscape lighting” means electric lighting powered at less than 24 volts and limited to lamps of 50 watts or less, not mounted to poles or buildings, for the purpose of illuminating trees, shrubbery and other natural external elements.
“Lumens (lm)” means an international unit of luminous flux; light power corrected for Vλ, the human photopic sensitivity function.
“Luminaire” means the complete lighting unit assembly (entire fixture), consisting of a lamp, or lamps and ballast(s), drivers or transformers (when applicable), together with the parts designated to distribute the light (reflector, lens, diffuser), to position and protect the lamps, and to connect the lamps to the power supply.
“Mounting height” means the height of a luminaire above finished grade level. The horizontal spacing of poles is often measured in units of “mounting height.” Example: “The luminaires can be spaced up to four mounting heights apart.”
“New lighting” means lighting for areas not previously illuminated; newly installed lighting of any type except for replacement lighting or lighting repairs.
“Nontradable surface” means those surfaces where lighting power allowance amounts may be used only for the specific application identified within subsection F of this section and Table 12.14-2 and cannot be transferred to other surfaces or be used as a group.
“Opaque” means a solid material not allowing light to pass through.
“Ornamental lighting” means lighting that is not a sign and does not impact the function and safety of an area but is purely decorative, or used to illuminate architecture and/or landscaping, and installed for aesthetic effect.
“Partly shielded luminaire” means a luminaire in which the lamp is shielded by a translucent shade as to prevent light from being directly emitted by the lamp or reflector into the upper photometric hemisphere.
“Photoelectric switch” means a control device employing a photocell or photodiode to detect daylight and automatically switch lights off by day.
“Project” means installation of a lighting system under a single electrical permit or for a specific construction project, multiple permits when required for phased construction.
“Property line” means the boundary line, or lot line between platted or unplatted lots or both, defining the edges of a legally defined piece of property.
“Replacement lighting” means lighting installed specifically to replace existing lighting equipment that is sufficiently inoperable to be beyond repair(s).
“Repair(s)” means the reconstruction or renewal of any part of an existing luminaire for the purpose of its ongoing operation, including but not limited to relamping or replacement of components such as capacitor, ballast, or photoelectric control.
“Residential luminaire” means luminaires used solely for compliance with Section V.
“Right-of-way” means the land, property, or interest therein acquired for or devoted to transportation purposes.
“Sales area” means exterior areas used for sales of retail goods and materials, including but not limited to automobiles, recreational vehicles, trailers, boats, building supplies, and gardening and nursery products.
“Seasonal lighting” means temporary lighting installed and operated in connection with holidays, community celebrations or traditions.
“Service yard” means uncovered exterior area specifically used for vehicular, marine or aviation service or for outdoor storage and/or loading of goods and materials.
“Shielded directional luminaire” means a fully shielded luminaire with an adjustable mounting device allowing aiming in a direction other than straight downward.
“Sign” is a communication device, structure, or fixture which incorporates graphics, symbols, or written copy for the purpose of conveying a particular message to public observers.
“Site” means a geographical area delineated by specific dimensions and coordinates or a complete land parcel defined by designated property boundaries as recorded by the authority.
“Sky glow” means the illumination of clouds, moisture and airborne matter by lighting.
“Temporary lighting” means lighting installed and operated for periods not to exceed 60 days, completely removed and not operated again for at least 30 days.
“Third party” means a party contracted to provide lighting, such as a utility company.
“Time switch” means an automatic lighting control device that operates as an on/off switch for outdoor lighting according to time of day.
“Tradable surface” means those surfaces where lighting power allowances may be traded or transferred from one surface to another surface resulting in an increase of the power allowance on one surface and a decrease of power allowance on other surfaces. Tradable surface power allowances may be added together used as a group. See subsection F of this section and Table 12.14-1.
“Translucent” means a material allowing light to pass through while obscuring or diffusing the lamp.
“Uplight” means, for an exterior luminaire, light emitted in the hemisphere at or above the horizontal plane.
“WS NREC” means the Washington State Non-Residential Energy Code (current version).
C. Applicability. These regulations shall be applicable to all exterior lighting whether attached to structures, poles, the earth, or any other location, installed in conjunction with development applications, including building permits, grading permits, utility permits, shorelines substantial development permits, conditional use permits, tenant improvement permits, and right-of-way invasion permits except as provided in subsection D of this section. Provided, however, that different land uses and development scale may be subject to specific exterior lighting provisions as provided below. Where the exterior lighting regulations within this section are in conflict with exterior lighting provisions of a subarea zoning regulation, or the conditions of approval for a conditional use permit or planned unit development, the subarea zoning regulations or conditions of approval shall control.
D. Exemptions. The following exterior lighting is exempt from the provisions of this section:
1. Lighting equipment placed within public rights-of-way intended solely for roadway and sidewalk illumination;
2. Lighting equipment used exclusively for signs;
3. Lighting equipment necessary for emergency situations and law enforcement actions;
4. Temporary lighting installed for holidays and celebrations; provided, that individual lamps are 10 watts or less;
5. Traffic control signals and devices;
6. Low voltage landscape lighting equipment controlled by a photoelectric switch or astronomic time switch;
7. Lighting equipment in swimming pools, spas, fountains, and other water features;
8. Temporary lighting equipment for theatrical, television, performance areas and construction sites;
9. Repairs to existing lighting equipment; provided, all light fixtures repaired or replaced shall comply with basic light glare and light pollution standards as detailed within subsection H of this section;
10. Lighting equipment for public monuments, flags, and statuary; and
11. Existing lighting equipment installed on or before January 22, 2011, for the following minor building or site alterations:
a. Tenant improvements that do not alter the building exterior;
b. Alterations or remodels that do not alter the building exterior;
c. Improvements to parking lots that do not increase the number of parking stalls;
d. Changes in use when the change is for uses listed within the same use table within Chapter 12.06 BMC. For example, BMC 12.06.050, Business and personal services, lists a number of similar uses, including architectural/engineering and banking and financial services. When the change in use is from one business and personal use to another business and personal use the change in use is exempt from these lighting regulations.
E. Lighting Zones. The city of Bothell has established lighting zones (LZ) which limits the amount of electrical energy used for exterior lighting as specified in subsection F of this section and Tables 12.14-1 and 12.14-2 (see Figure 12.14-20 for a map of zone locations). The descriptive criteria for each lighting zone shall be as follows:
1. Lighting Zone 1 (LZ1). Low ambient lighting including developed areas of national parks, state parks, forest land, and rural areas. No Lighting Zone 1 areas have been identified within the city of Bothell;
2. Lighting Zone 2 (LZ2). Moderate ambient lighting areas including lands predominately consisting of residential zoning, neighborhood business districts, light industrial with limited night-time use and residential mixed use areas. These areas are depicted on Figure 12.14-20 and include the following zoning classifications: R-C; R-L1; R-L2; R-M1; R-M2; R-M3; R-M4; OP; OP; R-M4, OP; MHP; SSHO; R-C (LID); R-L1 (LID), R-M3 (LID); C; SVV; PPOS; DT; and OP, LI;
3. Lighting Zone 3 (LZ3). Moderately high ambient lighting areas such as commercial districts. These areas are depicted on Figure 12.14-20 and include the following zoning classifications: CB; R-M4, OP, CB; R-M4, OP, NB; R-AC, OP, CB, LI; R-AC, OP, CB, MVSO; OP, CB, MVSO; OP, CB, LI, MVSO; SR-522; and GDC; and
4. Lighting Zone 4 (LZ4). High ambient lighting including high activity commercial districts in major metropolitan areas. No Lighting Zone 4 areas have been identified within the city of Bothell. However, pursuant to subsection (I)(2)(b) of this section, an applicant of a large development may request Lighting Zone 4 high ambient lighting energy levels;
5. Lighting zone power allowances shall be based upon subsection F of this section and Tables 12.14-1 and 12.14-2.
F. Exterior Lighting Power Allowances (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1). The city of Bothell is utilizing the exterior lighting power allowances as promulgated by the American National Standards Institute/American Society of Hearing Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA) Standard 90.1 to promote energy efficiency and reduce power consumption associated with exterior lighting. Certain modifications to the standard have been incorporated to accommodate lighting zones as described in subsection E of this section.
1. The total exterior lighting power allowance for exterior areas shall be the sum of the individual lighting power densities specified in Tables 12.14-1 and 12.14-2 plus the base power allotment specified for the lighting zone of the subject property.
2. Transference or trade-offs of lighting power densities may only occur between exterior surfaces listed as tradable surfaces in Table 12.14-1.
Table 12.14-1 Lighting Power Allowances Tradable Surfaces
Zone 2 | Zone 3 | Zone 4 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Base Site Allowance (All properties are allowed the base site allowance and may use the base site allowance for either tradable or nontradable surfaces but cannot be combined) | 600 W | 750 W | 1300 W | |
Building Grounds | ||||
Walkways less than 10 feet wide | 0.7 W/linear foot | 0.8 W/linear foot | 1.0 W/linear foot | |
Walkways 10 feet wide or greater | 0.14 W/ft2 | 0.16 W/ft2 | 0.2 W/ft2 | |
Plaza areas | ||||
Special feature areas | ||||
Uncovered Parking Areas | ||||
Parking areas and drives | 0.06 W/ft2 | 0.10 W/ft2 | 0.15 W/ft2 | |
Tradable Surfaces (Lighting power densities for uncovered parking areas, building grounds, building entrances and exits, canopies and overhangs and outdoor sales areas may be traded) | Building Entrances and Exits | |||
Main entries | 20 W/linear foot of door width | 30 W/linear foot of door width | 30 W/linear foot of door width | |
Other doors | 20 W/linear foot of door width | 20 W/linear foot of door width | 20 W/linear foot of door width | |
Entry canopies | 0.25 W/ft2 | 0.4 W/ft2 | 0.4 W/ft2 | |
Sales Canopies | ||||
Freestanding and attached | 0.8 W/ft2 | 0.8 W/ft2 | 1.0 W/ft2 | |
Outdoor Sales | ||||
Open areas (including vehicle sales lots) | 0.5 W/ft2 | 0.5 W/ft2 | 0.5 W/ft2 | |
Street frontage for vehicle sales lots in addition to open area allowance | 10 W/linear foot | 10 W/linear foot | 10 W/linear foot | |
Table 12.14-2 Lighting Power Allowances Nontradable Surfaces
Zone 2 | Zone 3 | Zone 4 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Base Site Allowance (All properties are allowed the base site allowance and may use the base site allowance for either tradable or nontradable surfaces but cannot be combined) | 600 W | 750 W | 1300 W | |
Nontradable Surfaces (Lighting power density calculations for the following applications can be used only for the specific application and cannot be traded between surfaces or with other exterior lighting. The following allowances are in addition to any allowance otherwise permitted in the “Tradable Surfaces” section of this table) | Building Facades | 0.1 W/ft2 for each illuminated wall or surface or 2.5 W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length | 0.15 W/ft2 for each illuminated wall or surface or 3.75 W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length | 0.2 W/ft2 for each illuminated wall or surface or 3.75 W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length |
Automated teller machines and night depositories | 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location | 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location | 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location | |
Entrances and gate-house inspections at guarded facilities | 1.25 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 1.25 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 1.25 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | |
Loading areas for law enforcement, fire, ambulance and other emergency service vehicles | 0.5 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 0.5 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | 0.5 W/ft2 of covered and uncovered area | |
Drive-up windows/doors | 400 W per drive-through | 400 W per drive-through | 400 W per drive-through | |
Parking near 24-hour retail entrances | 800 W per main entry | 800 W per main entry | 800 W per main entry | |
Figure 12.14-20 Lighting Zones Map

G. Exterior Lighting Controls and Curfews. Exterior lighting shall be equipped with automatic controls and, for the specific uses identified below, curfews and automatic lighting reduction controls as consistent with the following:
1. Automatic Control Requirements. All exterior lighting shall have controls that automatically extinguish all exterior lighting during daylight hours using a switching device such as a photoelectric switch, astronomic time switch or a control system such as a programmable lighting controller, building automation system, lighting energy management system or equivalent, per the requirement of WS NREC.
2. Curfew and Automatic Lighting Reduction Requirements. The city of Bothell has established curfew time(s) specific to business and/or use types, for all lighting systems installed after January 22, 2011, whereupon the total outdoor lighting lumens shall be uniformly reduced by a specified amount. Individual light fixtures shall not be extinguished to meet this curfew lighting reduction requirement. The following uses and project types shall have curfews as follows:
a. Office, warehouse, manufacturing, light industrial and similar use exterior parking lots – 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. or 30 minutes before opening. The lighting system must be uniformly reduced to a maximum of 25 percent of normal output during curfew times.
b. Retail and mixed use without residential uses exterior parking lots – two hours after close of business hours. Lighting system must be uniformly reduced to a maximum of 25 percent of normal output during curfew times.
c. Mixed use containing residential uses, exterior parking lots – 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. or 30 minutes before opening. The lighting system must be uniformly reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal output during curfew times.
d. Parking structures or garages and other types of covered parking areas – no curfew; provided, that all light fixtures are fully shielded or obscured by building components such that the fixture is not visible from surrounding properties.
e. Sports Fields.
(1) Located on lands with detached residential zoning classifications of R-C, R-L1, and R-L2 – 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. unless a game is in progress. Games may not start after 8:00 p.m. Spectator, parking lot, and other non-sports field areas may remain fully illuminated for up to two hours after completion of the event.
(2) Located on lands with all other zoning classifications – 11:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. Spectator, parking lot, and other non-sports field areas may remain fully illuminated for up to two hours after completion of the event.
H. Illumination Standards. The city of Bothell requires that all exterior lighting satisfy the illumination level recommendations as established within the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Lighting Handbook and associated recommended practice documents.
I. Requirements for Exterior Lighting.
1. The following exterior lighting requirements are applicable to all proposed development applications and existing developments, except outdoor performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfield lighting, which must comply with subsection H of this section, and individual single-family residential structures, which must comply with subsection J of this section.
a. Submittal Requirements.
(1) A site plan showing the proposed location, mounting height, aiming point, type, and size of all exterior lighting including building mounted, landscape, roadways, and parking lot lighting drawings should include property line or project limit line if part of a larger campus.
(2) Manufacturer fixture specification sheets or cut-sheets for all fixture types. Fixture cut sheets must be labeled with fixture type and all fixture features and accessories must be defined and an image of the fixture included.
(3) A fixture schedule including quantity and type of lamps.
(4) If building elevations are to be illuminated, submit building elevation drawings showing the location and type of all fixtures, the area of the building elevation to be illuminated, the illumination levels, and the aiming point for all light fixtures.
(5) If building mounted fixtures are used, submit building elevations showing the location of each fixture.
(6) All drawings must have fixture type indicators.
(7) The community development director may require submittal of additional information demonstrating the objectives of the lighting design including:
(A) A brief written narrative; and/or
(B) Supplemental drawings.
b. Fixture Requirements.
(1) All fixtures must be similar to those identified as acceptable within Figures 12.14-21, 12.14-22, and 12.14-23;
(2) The maximum mounting pole height of exterior light fixtures shall be consistent with the following schedule:
(A) Within Lighting Zone 2: 15 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(B) Within developments classified as large under subsection (I)(2) of this section located within Lighting Zone 2: 20 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(C) Within Lighting Zone 3: 20 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(D) Within developments classified as large under subsection (I)(2) of this section located within Lighting Zone 3: 25 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(E) Within properties which have been assigned a Lighting Zone 4 classification by the community development director per subsection (I)(2)(b) of this section: 25 feet above city-approved finish grade.
(3) All light fixtures within two mounting pole heights of any adjacent property (excluding public rights-of-way) that are not building mounted must be facing in toward the project and have house-side shields consistent with Figure 12.14-25 installed on the side of the fixture nearest the adjacent property. (See Figure 12.14-25).
Figure 12.14-21 Acceptable and unacceptable light fixtures
Acceptable fixtures | Comments | Not acceptable fixtures | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|
![]() | Example of ceiling mounted fixture | ![]() | Surface mounted square fixture with exposed lamp and lens |
![]() | Lamp concealed in opaque upper portion. Clear flat glass lens | ![]() | Translucent white lens with decorative metal grill work is not acceptable |
![]() | Solid, opaque sides and top. Flat clear glass lens | ![]() | Vertical lamp with dropped lens is not acceptable |
![]() | Flat lens and horizontal top is acceptable | ![]() | Clear, translucent, white or clear textured with or without an internal refractor is unacceptable |
![]() | Clear flat lens. Lamp concealed within opaque portion of fixture at less than 5 degrees above the horizontal | ![]() | Fixture aimed above the horizontal is not acceptable |
![]() | Bollard lamp concealed by opaque louvers aimed in a downward direction | ![]() | Bollards with translucent lens with decorative grill-work directed horizontally are not acceptable |
![]() | Fixture has opaque shields with flat lens | ![]() | Standard yard or barn light |
![]() | Flat lens fixtures with lamp concealed in top opaque portion | ![]() | Lamp below opaque portion of fixture is not acceptable |
![]() | Full cut-off wall pack fixture | ![]() | Perimeter wall pack with exposed lens or lamp |
![]() | Flat glass lens. Lamp completely concealed within opaque fixture | ![]() | Compact refractor wall pack with exposed lens or lamp |
Figure 12.14-22 Acceptable fixtures subject to special requirements
Fixtures acceptable subject to specific requirements | Requirements |
|---|---|
![]() | Pole-mounted fixtures limited to 6,600 lumens. Fixture must not have more than two percent of lumens above 90 degrees |
![]() | Floodlights aimed above the horizontal to illuminate flags and building elements are acceptable only when the fixture is shielded or aimed such that people on the ground cannot see into the fixture or the lamp from normal viewing angles. See Figure 12.14-26 for information regarding other options for illuminating building elements |
![]() | Wall sconces with opaque fronts that are limited to 6,200 lumens. Uplighting is acceptable only when fixture is located beneath building overhangs, cantilevers, or canopies. Arrows indicate direction of light |
![]() | Horizontal lamp completely contained inside opaque portion of housing. Lamp limited to 6,200 lumens. Clear or translucent lens acceptable |
![]() | Wall mounted fixtures with translucent, white lens up to 12 inches in diameter and limited to 1,250 lumens |
![]() | Decorative wall sconce with translucent white lens. If using metal halide lamp, lamp must be concealed in upper or lower opaque portion of fixture. Limited to 3,300 lumens. If using fluorescent lamp, limited to one T8 or T5 standard output lamp mounted vertically within the fixture |
Figure 12.14-23 Acceptable fixtures for individual single-family residential
Acceptable fixtures (may be similar) | Requirements |
|---|---|
![]() | Clear glass with a maximum of 345 lumens per lamp. Two lamps per fixture maximum |
![]() | Translucent lens up to 1,220 lumens per lamp maximum. One lamp per fixture maximum |
![]() | Post top with clear glass with maximum lamp lumens of 345 with a three lamp maximum |
![]() | Bare bulbs with motion sensor |
![]() | Light completely concealed within opaque housing. All light aimed in a downward direction |
![]() | Shielded lamps with motion sensors |
Figure 12.14-24 Unacceptable fixtures
Unacceptable light fixtures | Comment |
|---|---|
![]() | Commonly called a yard or area light, these fixtures are not acceptable under any circumstances |
![]() | Bare bulbs with no shielding and no motion sensor |
![]() | Flood light fixtures with no shielding and no motion sensors |
Figure 12.14-25 Example of house-sided shielding

Figure 12.14-26 Illustration demonstrating building uplight requirement
Acceptable flood light use for architectural uplighting | Unacceptable flood light use for architectural uplighting |
|---|---|
![]() | ![]() |
Figure 12.14-27 Illustration demonstrating shielding requirement for pole-mounted fixtures located within two pole heights of adjacent properties

Figure 12.14-28 Illustration demonstrating when pole-mounted fixtures are located two or more pole heights away from adjacent properties house-side shielding not required

2. The following additional requirements are applicable to development applications for projects that include: buildings covering 10,000 square feet or more of gross floor area; parking lots containing 40 or more parking stalls; and residential developments of 20 or more dwelling units shall comply with subsection (G)(1) of this section except outdoor performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfield lighting, which must comply with subsection H of this section, and individual single-family residential structures, which must comply with subsection J of this section.
a. Submittal Requirements.
(1) All of the submittal items required for general requirements plus provide site lighting calculations showing:
(A) Illumination points at maximum 10 foot intervals for all parking and on-site roadways measured at finish grade;
(B) Pathways, stairs, entrances, under canopies, and other pedestrian areas must be at five-foot maximum intervals. Include any areas intended for human use; and
(C) The grid shall extend to the points surrounding the property line to the point where the light levels fall below 0.2 footcandles. The calculations shall include any existing or proposed ROW lighting that will contribute light onto the property.
b. Lighting Standards for Larger Developments.
(1) Maximum fixture pole height shall be 20 feet above city-approved finish grade, including height of pole base;
(2) Lighting power density shall not exceed the limits established within Table 12.14-1 for the applicable lighting zone;
(3) The community development may allow increases from the established lighting zone to the next highest zone, if any, if safety and security is an issue. This may include instances where:
(A) The parking facility is used during all hours of the day and night; where the police chief has identified special security needs exist;
(B) High vandalism or crime rates have been documented by the Bothell police department; or
(C) The community development director may consider specific site characteristics, level of vehicle and pedestrian conflict, special security needs, and history or likelihood of crimes in making a determination.
J. Lighting of Exterior Performance, Sport and Recreation Facilities and Playfields. The following requirements shall be applied to all illuminated exterior performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfields:
1. Lighting levels for outdoor performance areas, sport and recreation facilities, and playfields shall be Class III and Class IV as determined by the IESNA RP-6 (Recommended Practice for Sports and Recreational Area Lighting). The community development director may allow increases in designed lighting levels for venues hosting higher classes of sports play (collegiate/professional) and/or for stadiums with seating capacities in excess of 2,500 spectators.
2. Where exterior playing fields or other exterior activity areas are to be illuminated, lighting fixtures shall be mounted, aimed and shielded such that light is directed only to the primary playing area and immediate surroundings associated with the playing area, such as spectator seating, concessions, ingress/egress areas, pedestrian aisles, maintenance facilities, and general pedestrian use areas. Direct illumination of adjacent nonplaying and immediate surroundings associated with the playing areas is prohibited.
3. Floodlight shielding shall consist of one of the following:
a. Full cutoff shoebox style floodlights aimed a maximum of five degrees above the horizontal mounting height of the luminaire. (See Figure 12.14-25). This is the only light fixture acceptable for tennis or similar hardcourts.
b. Spun parabolic floodlights with external shielding consisting of a visor attached to the front of the floodlight. The visor shall extend beyond the upper hemisphere of the fixture a minimum of 12 inches and wrap a minimum of 170 degrees around the upper hemisphere of the floodlight. All surfaces of the fixture shall be nonreflecting and the external visor shall have a dull powder coat factory finish.
4. Areas used for ingress/egress, pedestrian aisles, and general pedestrian use not associated with the playing or activity area shall be illuminated with separate lighting fixtures and shall provide an average horizontal illumination level at grade of no more than 1.0 footcandle average.
5. In facilities with a seating capacity of 2,500 or more spectators, circulation areas around the concessions and restroom areas shall be no more than 10.0 footcandles average at three feet above grade, and shall be no more than 5.0 footcandles average at three feet above grade for facilities with a seating capacity of less than 2,500 spectators. The uniformity ratio (average horizontal illumination to minimum illumination) shall not exceed 4:1 within pedestrian aisles and walkways.
6. Light trespass levels shall be a maximum of one and one-half footcandles when measured on either a horizontal surface (three feet above grade) or a vertical surface (five feet above grade) at all residential property lines.
7. Applicants shall submit lighting plans for all outdoor sports courts and playing fields for review and approval. The following plans and information shall be included:
a. Pole locations;
b. Pole heights (poles used for exterior performance, sport and recreation facilities and playfields may exceed the height maximum established within the lighting zone requirements);
c. Pole types;
d. Luminaire quantities;
e. Luminaire types;
f. Luminaire mounting heights;
g. Aiming points;
h. Fieldcourt boundaries; and
i. Site property lines.
j. Computer generated vertical and horizontal illumination grids for the field or court shall be provided with the plans showing:
(1) Horizontal footcandle levels calculated on a 15-foot grid three feet above the playing surface. The horizontal grid shall extend to the points surrounding the lighted field/court to the point where the light levels fall below 0.2 footcandles including lands beyond the subject property when necessary.
(2) Vertical footcandle illumination levels at 15-foot increments, five feet high facing into the field at all property lines.
8. Measurement and Verification. Prior to issuance of occupancy permit, the applicant shall provide the city with confirmation of compliance with regulations. Applicant shall measure lighting along residential property lines at a minimum of 30 feet on center. Documentation shall be submitted in writing and signed by the engineer of record.
Figure 12.14-29 Illustration of spun parabolic floodlight with shields

Figure 12.14-30 Example of full-cut-off shoe box floodlight

Figure 12.14-31 Illustration of five degree maximum tilt

K. Requirements for Single-Family Residential Lighting. Individual single-family residential structures shall be subject to the following requirements:
1. Decorative building mounted lighting (porch lights and sconces) are acceptable with the following limitations:
a. Fixtures with clear glass lenses are limited to up to two 345 lumen lamps (equivalent to 25 watt incandescent).
b. Fixtures with translucent lenses are limited to a total of 1,220 lumens (equivalent to 75 watt incandescent).
c. Fully shielded fixtures (see example in Figure 12.14-21) can be up to 2,700 lumens (equivalent to 150 watt incandescent).
d. Low voltage fixtures up to 50 watts and/or 1,500 lumens.
e. Fixtures shall comply with Figures 12.14-23 and 12.14-24 or be consistent with the above standards.
2. Pole-mounted light fixtures are acceptable with the following limitations:
a. Fixtures’ lumen output shall be consistent with subsection (K)(1) of this section;
b. Fixtures shall be mounted a maximum of 12 feet above finish grade;
c. Fixtures used for hardscape sports courts, such as tennis, basketball, pickleball and other courts shall be consistent with subsection J of this section. (Ord. 2445 § 6 (Exh. F), 2024; Ord. 2373 § 9, 2022; Ord. 2055 § 2 (Exh. B), 2011).
A. Purpose and Intent. This section is established to:
1. Promote clean energy production by citizens and businesses;
2. Ensure that alternative energy infrastructure is compatible with the development and development on adjacent properties;
3. Provide options to traditional energy use; and
4. Promote reduction of energy use within the city.
B. General Criteria. Alternative energy infrastructure shall meet all of the following criteria:
1. Setbacks. Alternative energy infrastructure shall not be located within any building setback or required setback, unless below grade or as allowed in BMC 12.14.070(E) for pad-mounted equipment and BMC 12.14.090(D) for panels that are components of roof structures.
2. Compliance with International Building Code. Any installation of an alternative energy system shall comply with any and all applicable provisions of the International Building Code.
3. Compliance with National Electrical Code. Any installation of an alternative energy system shall comply with any and all applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code.
4. Utility Notification. No alternative energy system shall be installed unless evidence has been provided to the city of Bothell that the utility company has been informed of the customer’s intent to install an interconnected customer-owned power generation system. Off-grid systems shall be exempt from this requirement.
5. Compliance with Environmental Regulations. Any installation of alternative energy infrastructure shall comply with all applicable environmental regulations.
C. Geothermal Infrastructure Criteria. In addition to the approval criteria established in subsection B of this section, geothermal alternative energy systems are encouraged and shall comply with the following standards:
1. Location. Geothermal infrastructure shall be located entirely within the subject property, or within appropriate easements.
2. Installation. Installation of geothermal infrastructure shall comply with all building department requirements, and applicable state laws and codes.
D. Solar and Wind Infrastructure. Alternative energy facilities, including solar and wind equipment, are encouraged, subject to the following provisions:
1. Solar and Wind Infrastructure Requirements.
a. Building-mounted solar and wind equipment shall be integrated into the structure’s architectural design. Techniques for achieving this include, but are not limited to, aligning equipment with a building’s structural or functional articulation, coordinating panel placement with other building features or using equipment to enhance a building’s architectural expression.
b. Roof-mounted solar and wind equipment may extend above the building height limit without screening, but shall be designed to avoid creating glare or blocking views and solar access to surrounding properties.
2. Solar and Wind Infrastructure Guidelines.
a. Use of solar panels to serve other functions, like weather protection, shading, building articulation and place-making, is encouraged.
b. Exposing solar and wind equipment in a way that enhances architectural design and demonstrates the viability of alternative energy is encouraged. (Ord. 2107 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012).
The purpose of this chapter is to provide adequate parking for all uses permitted in the code, to reduce demand for parking by encouraging alternative means of transportation including public transit, ride-sharing and bicycles, to increase pedestrian mobility, and to ensure that the visual impacts of parking and loading areas and structures are minimized. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Before an occupancy permit may be granted for any new or enlarged building or for a change of use in any existing building, the use shall be required to meet the provisions of this chapter.
1. Outdoor dining space structures of 1,000 square feet in area or less associated with existing businesses are exempt from the provisions of this chapter and do not constitute an expansion of the existing business.
B. Repealed by Ord. 2461.
C. Parking spaces may be enclosed or unenclosed. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2397 § 1, 2023; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Except as provided herein, there is no required minimum number of off-street parking spaces. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2442 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2415 § 6 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2397 § 2, 2023; Ord. 2360 § 3, 2021; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Bicycle Requirements Table.
Specific Use | Long-Term Spaces | Short-Term Spaces |
|---|---|---|
1. Multifamily housing | 2, or 0.5 per bedroom and studio unit. | 2 per 10 units. |
2. Commercial: Retail sales and services, including eating and drinking establishments | 2, or 1 per 12,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. | 2, or 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. |
3. Commercial: Office | 2, or 1 per 10,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. | 2, or 1 per 20,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area. |
4. Commercial: Off-street parking lots and garages available to the general public without charges or on a fee basis | 2, or 1 per 20 vehicle spaces. | 6, or 1 for each 20 vehicle spaces. |
Note: Wherever this table indicates two numerical standards, such as “2, or 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. of gross floor area,” the larger number applies. Fractions of 0.5 or greater are rounded up to the next whole number. | ||
B. Bicycle parking is required to encourage the use of bicycles by providing safe and convenient places to park bicycles. These regulations ensure adequate short- and long-term bicycle parking based on the demand generated by the different use categories and on the level of security necessary to encourage the use of bicycles for short and long stays.
1. The required minimum number of bicycle parking spaces for each use category is shown in the bicycle parking requirements table. No bicycle parking is required for uses not listed.
2. The required minimum number of bicycle parking spaces is based on the primary uses on a site. When there are two or more separate primary uses that operate at the same time on a site, the required bicycle parking for the site is the sum of the required parking for the individual primary uses.
C. Exemptions.
1. No long-term bicycle parking is required on a site where there are less than 2,500 square feet of gross building area.
2. No bicycle parking is required for unattended surface parking lots.
D. Bicycle Parking Standards.
1. Short-Term Bicycle Parking.
a. Purpose. Short-term bicycle parking encourages shoppers, customers, messengers, and other visitors to use bicycles by providing a convenient and readily accessible place to park bicycles. Short-term bicycle parking should serve the main entrance of a building and should be visible to pedestrians and bicyclists.
b. Standards.
(1) Required short-term bicycle parking shall be located:
(A) Outside a building;
(B) On the site;
(C) At the same grade as the sidewalk or at a location that can be reached by an accessible route; and
(D) Within 50 feet of the main entrance to the building as measured along the most direct pedestrian access route. For sites that have more than one primary building, the bicycle parking shall be within 50 feet of a main entrance as measured along the most direct pedestrian access route, and shall be distributed to serve all primary buildings.
(2) Short-term bike parking may be located within the public right-of-way provided the location and design are subject to public works department approval.
2. Long-Term Bicycle Parking.
a. Purpose. Long-term bicycle parking provides employees, residents, commuters and others who generally stay at a site for several hours a secure and weather-protected place to park bicycles. Although long-term parking does not have to be provided on site, the intent of these standards is to allow bicycle parking to be within a reasonable distance in order to encourage bicycle use.
b. Standards. Required long-term bicycle parking shall be:
(1) Provided in racks or lockers that meet the standards of subsection (D)(3)(c) of this section;
(2) Located on the site or in an area where the closest point is within 300 feet of the site;
(3) Covered. At least 50 percent of required long-term bicycle parking shall be covered and meet the standards of subsection (D)(3)(e) of this section (Covered Bicycle Parking); and
(4) Secured. To provide security, long-term bicycle parking shall be in at least one of the following locations:
(A) In a locked room;
(B) In an area that is enclosed by a fence with a locked gate. The fence shall either be eight feet high or be floor-to-ceiling;
(C) Within view of an attendant or security guard;
(D) In an area that is monitored by a security camera; or
(E) In an area that is visible from employee work areas.
(5) E-Bikes. Long-term bicycle parking facilities shall include at least one electrical outlet for e-bike charging, and a minimum of one outlet shall be provided for every 10 long-term bicycle parking spaces. Electrical outlet shall be provided within or adjacent to each long-term bicycle parking facility, in a secure and accessible location, to accommodate the charging of electric bicycles. Charging infrastructure must comply with applicable code requirements and be protected from weather and vandalism.
3. Standards for All Bicycle Parking.
a. Purpose. These standards ensure that required bicycle parking is designed so that bicycles may be securely locked without undue inconvenience and will be reasonably safeguarded from intentional or accidental damage.
b. Bicycle Lockers. Where required bicycle parking is provided in lockers, the lockers shall be securely anchored.
c. Bicycle Racks. Required bicycle parking may be provided in floor, wall, or ceiling racks. Where required bicycle parking is provided in racks, the racks shall meet the following standards:
(1) The bicycle frame and one wheel can be locked to the rack with a high security, U-shaped shackle lock if both wheels are left on the bicycle;
(2) A bicycle six feet long can be securely held with its frame supported so that the bicycle cannot be pushed or fall in a manner that will damage the wheels or components; and
(3) The rack shall be securely anchored.
d. Parking and Maneuvering Areas.
(1) Each required bicycle parking space shall be accessible without moving another bicycle;
(2) There shall be an aisle at least five feet wide behind all required bicycle parking to allow room for bicycle maneuvering. Where the bicycle parking is adjacent to a sidewalk, the maneuvering area may extend into the right-of-way; and
(3) The area devoted to bicycle parking shall be hard surfaced.
e. Covered Bicycle Parking. Covered bicycle parking, as required by this section, can be provided inside buildings, under roof overhangs or awnings, in bicycle lockers, or within or under other structures. Where required covered bicycle parking is not within a building or locker, the cover shall be:
(1) Permanent;
(2) Designed to protect the bicycle from rainfall; and
(3) At least seven feet above the floor or ground.
f. Signs. If required bicycle parking is not visible from the street or main building entrance, a sign shall be posted at the main building entrance indicating the location of the parking. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025).
In the event that shared parking facilities for two or more uses are proposed, a covenant or other contract for shared parking between the cooperating property owners is approved by the community development director. This covenant or contract must be recorded with the appropriate county auditor as a deed restriction on all affected properties and cannot be modified or revoked without the consent of the community development director. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Off-street parking and access for physically disabled persons shall be provided in accordance with the State Building Code as adopted in Chapter 51-50 WAC. (Ord. 2212 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. An off-street loading space having access to a public thoroughfare shall be required adjacent to each business building thereafter erected or enlarged if the use of such building entails deliveries or shipments to or from it. Such loading space shall be of adequate size to accommodate the number and size of vehicles simultaneously loaded and/or unloaded in connection with the business conducted in such building. Loading spaces shall be located so that vehicles to be loaded or unloaded shall not obstruct pedestrian or other vehicle traffic movement or project into any public right-of-way. All loading space areas shall be separated from required parking areas and shall be designated as vehicle loading spaces.
B. Any lighting used in association with loading areas shall be directed onto the loading area only and shall not intrude onto adjacent properties. Loading areas serving businesses that are located adjacent to a less intensive zone than that in which the business is located, or are located adjacent to a public use area such as a street, sidewalk, park, or trail, shall be landscaped to provide a buffer between the loading area and the adjacent zone or public use. Said landscaping shall conform to the requirements of BMC 12.16.090 and Chapter 12.18 BMC. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. A stacking space shall be an area measuring eight feet by 20 feet with direct forward access to a service window of a drive-through facility. A stacking space shall be located to prevent any vehicles from extending onto the public right-of-way, or interfering with any pedestrian circulation, traffic maneuvering, or other required parking areas. Stacking space for drive-through or drive-in uses may not be counted as required off-street parking spaces.
B. For each drive-up lane of a financial institution, business service, vendor stand, or other drive-through use not listed, a minimum of three stacking spaces shall be provided.
C. For each service lane of a drive-through restaurant, a minimum of seven stacking spaces shall be provided.
D. Stacking spaces serving businesses that are located adjacent to a less intensive zone than that in which the business is located, or are located adjacent to a public use area such as a street, sidewalk, park, or trail, shall be landscaped to provide a buffer between the stacking spaces and the adjacent zone or public use. Said landscaping shall conform to the requirements of BMC 12.16.090 and Chapter 12.18 BMC.
Figure 12.16-1 Stacking Space Requirements for Typical Drive-Through

(Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Off-street parking areas shall not be located more than 500 feet from the building they are required to serve except as otherwise provided in BMC 12.16.040 and subsections (A)(1) through (A)(3) of this section. Where the off-street parking areas do not abut the building they serve, the required maximum distance shall be measured from the nearest building entrance that the parking area serves:
1. For single-family dwellings, the parking spaces shall be located on the same lot they are required to serve;
2. For multifamily residential dwellings, at least a portion of parking areas shall be located within 100 feet from the building(s) they are required to serve; and
3. For all nonresidential uses permitted in residential zones, the parking spaces shall be located on the same lot they are required to serve and at least a portion of parking areas shall be located within 150 feet from the nearest building entrance they are required to serve.
B. The minimum parking space and aisle dimensions shall be as set forth in the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications.
C. Lighting shall be provided for safety of traffic and pedestrian circulation on the site, and shall be designed to minimize direct illumination of abutting properties and adjacent streets.
D. Tandem or end-to-end parking is allowed in residential developments and in other developments provided the applicant demonstrates special conditions and/or management plans that allow use of tandem parking without effectively reducing the number of required parking spaces available. In residential developments, tandem parking is only allowed when the tandem spaces are assigned to the same dwelling unit and shall count toward meeting minimum parking requirements at a rate of one space for every 20 linear feet with any necessary provision for turning radius.
E. All vehicle parking and storage on a residential lot may be covered or uncovered and shall be on an approved hard surface. Any hard surface used for vehicle parking or storage shall have direct and unobstructed driveway access. Legally nonconforming gravel surfaces in existing parking areas can still be used to meet local parking standards, for up to six parking spaces.
F. The total number of vehicles parked outside of a building on a single-family lot shall not exceed six vehicles on lots 12,500 square feet or less and eight vehicles on lots greater than 12,500 square feet.
G. A dead-end alley may provide access to no more than eight required off-street parking spaces.
H. Parking facilities shall not be located between the front lot line and the building in the OP, NB, CB and GC zones, in accordance with and except as provided for in BMC 12.14.180.
I. Within community activity centers, as depicted in BMC 12.14.030(B)(6), parking garages along a street frontage shall incorporate in that portion of the garage facing the street externally oriented at-grade space for retail uses, eating and drinking establishments, recreation, culture and entertainment uses, personal services, and/or other similar businesses which are characterized by regular and frequent patronage during the course of the normal business day. “Externally oriented” shall mean having a door opening directly to the outside.
J. Parking garages shall be architecturally compatible with the building in which they are located, other buildings on the same site, and/or buildings on adjacent sites. Architectural compatibility shall be achieved through one or more of the following measures:
1. Facing the parking structure with the same material as the building;
2. Continuing architectural elements from the building, such as a frieze, cornice, trellis, or pattern of modulation or articulation, on the parking structure;
3. Incorporating usable space into the parking structure, such as storefronts along the sidewalk or a deck or garden on top of the structure;
4. Designing the entrance to the parking structure to be visually subordinate to pedestrian entrances to the building; for example, by emphasizing the pedestrian entrances using modulation, arches, porticos, molding, or other architectural devices, as illustrated in Figure 12.14-12;
5. Incorporating artistically designed bars or metal grilles for security and air circulation in the fascia of the parking structure;
6. Locating the entrance to the parking structure on a side street or alley. (Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2101 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 2093 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All parking lots and garages, loading areas, drive-through lanes and stacking spaces which can be seen from a public right-of-way shall be screened from view from the right-of-way by means of landscaping as provided for in BMC 12.18.050, 12.18.060 and 12.18.080, except as otherwise provided in BMC 12.16.080 and this section. In order to minimize the visual impact of parked automobiles, the required shrubs and ground cover shall include a berm a minimum of three feet in height and/or planting materials which will form a dense hedge a minimum of three feet in height. Vegetation-based LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities are permitted within parking lot landscaping provided the screening requirements are met. Use drought-tolerant plant materials such as Ottoluyken laurel, Zabel laurel, photinia and pyramidalis, or other plant materials as approved by the city. Periodic breaks in the hedge for pedestrian paths may be provided, and the hedge shall be installed and maintained so as not to interfere with sight distance, in accordance with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications.
B. In cases where, in accordance with Chapter 12.36 BMC, a variance from the street frontage landscaping width requirements as set forth in BMC 12.18.050 and 12.18.060 has been applied for and granted, a screen wall shall be substituted. Said wall shall be a minimum of three feet high, of durable and attractive materials such as brick, stone or textured concrete, and shall incorporate a continuous planting box or trellis or grillwork with climbing plants. Said wall shall not interfere with sight distance in accordance with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications.
Figure 12.16-5 Screening Wall

(Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Parking and loading areas shall include lighting capable of providing adequate illumination for security and safety. Lighting standards shall be in scale with the height and use of the associated structure. Pedestrian walkways and sidewalks may be lighted with three- to four-foot-high lighting bollards. Any illumination, including security lighting, shall be directed away from adjoining properties and public rights-of-way. Lighting intensity shall comply with city exterior lighting performance standards as set forth in BMC 8.64.030. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All land uses for which the majority of the parking demand is generated by employees who remain on site for at least six hours each day shall be required to reserve one parking space for rideshare parking for every 20 installed parking spaces, up to a maximum of 20 rideshare spaces, as follows:
1. The parking spaces shall be located convenient to the primary employee entrance;
2. Reserved areas shall have markings and signs indicating that the space is reserved between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m., 12:00 noon and 1:00 p.m., and at all other shift changes; and
3. Parking in reserved areas shall be limited to vanpools and carpools established through rideshare programs and to vehicles meeting minimum rideshare qualifications set by the employer.
B. All uses which are located on an existing transit route and are required under the computation for required off-street parking spaces in BMC 12.16.030 to provide more than 200 parking spaces may be required to provide transit shelters, bus turnout lanes or other transit improvements as a condition of permit approval. Uses which reduce required parking shall provide transit shelters if transit routes adjoin the site. Adjoining uses which meet these criteria may coordinate in the provision of transit shelters.
C. Any development application to which this section applies shall complete and submit to the city all necessary agreements with transit agencies, rideshare programs, or other information required by this section prior to the issuance of any building permits associated with the development.
D. Any applicant for a development permit for other than a short plat or construction of a single-family residence shall inquire of the transit agency for the area in which the development would be located as to whether the agency desires a transit stop on the street or streets immediately adjacent to the development, or within the development itself. The applicant shall provide to the community development department a letter from the agency stating whether or not a transit stop is desired, and if so, whether the agency desires to construct and maintain a shelter at the stop. When a transit agency determines that a transit stop is warranted, the development shall incorporate the transit stop into the overall site design, including construction of a direct pedestrian connection from the transit stop to the development; construction of a pull-out, if desired by the transit agency; designation of land for a shelter, if the transit agency desires to construct a shelter; and installation of landscaping adjacent to the transit stop, in accordance with the transit agency’s landscaping standards. (Ord. 2461 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. 2415 § 6 (Exh. E), 2024; Ord. 2348 § 6, 2021; Ord. 2325 § 2, 2020; Ord. 2212 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2154 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All uses, except single-family building permits, shall provide pedestrian access onto the site. Pedestrian access points shall be provided at all pedestrian arrival points to the development including the property edges, adjacent lots, abutting street intersections, crosswalks, and transit stops. Pedestrian access shall be located as follows:
1. Access points at property edges and to adjacent lots shall be coordinated with existing development to provide circulation patterns between developments;
2. Residential development shall provide pedestrian access between cul-de-sacs or groups of buildings to allow pedestrian access from within the development and from adjacent developments to activity centers, parks, common tracts, open spaces, schools or other public facilities, transit stops and public streets, when determined by the community development director to be necessary for safe and efficient pedestrian circulation.
B. Provision for safe and efficient pedestrian circulation shall be provided as follows:
1. All developments which contain more than one building shall provide walkways between the principal entrances of the buildings;
2. All nonresidential buildings located more than 100 feet from the public right-of-way shall provide for direct pedestrian access from the building to buildings on adjacent lots;
3. Where a parking lot exists between a building or buildings and the street front sidewalk, pedestrian access shall be provided from the street front sidewalk to the building(s) and shall be designed so as to provide safe and efficient pedestrian travel across and/or around parking lots. This may be accomplished by integrating pedestrian sidewalks/walkways into the parking lot design either around the perimeter of the parking lot or through the interior of the parking lot.
Pedestrian sidewalks/walkways that serve the interior of the parking lot shall be clearly marked so as to distinguish those areas from vehicle drive lanes.
C. Pedestrian sidewalks and walkways shall meet the following minimum design standards:
1. Sidewalks and walkways shall be well lit using pedestrian scale lighting;
2. Sidewalks and walkways shall be a minimum of 60 inches of unobstructed width and meet city of Bothell standards for walkways and sidewalks; parked vehicles shall not intrude into the required unobstructed width;
3. Access for mobility impaired persons shall be provided in accordance with Section 7503 of the regulations adopted pursuant to Chapter 19.27 RCW, State Building Code; Chapter 70.92 RCW, Provisions in Buildings for Aged and Handicapped Persons. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Existing residential parking spaces that do not conform to this code as of June 6, 2024, are not required to be modified or resized, except to ensure compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). In existing paved parking lots, the size of the existing parking spaces is not required to be changed if such changes will be more costly or require significant reconfiguration of the parking space locations. (Ord. 2437 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024).
The purpose of this chapter is to foster retention of significant trees, provide visual relief from large expanses of building and parking areas, reduce the impacts of development on drainage systems, provide wildlife habitat, and provide a separation or transition between land uses of differing intensities. (Ord. 2245 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2087 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all new development and to changes of use or structural additions comprising more than 20 percent of gross floor area prior to the addition, when such changes or additions require additional landscaping under the regulations of this chapter. (Ord. 2245 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2087 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Purpose. The retention of existing vegetation such as intact forest areas is an important component of the city’s character, and assists the city in meeting its aesthetic, surface water, and environmental policies within the Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan. Existing vegetation may also be used to meet all or portions of the landscaping requirements within this chapter.
B. Applicable Activities. Tree retention shall apply to developments where any human-caused change to improved or unimproved real estate, including, but not limited to, construction of buildings or other structures, dredging, filling, grading, paving, excavation, or other land-altering activities, are proposed or may be occurring. For the purposes of this chapter, vegetation retention shall apply to significant trees, which shall mean existing trees over eight inches in diameter (excluding alders and cottonwoods) as measured four feet above grade, that are located within the net buildable area of a subject property as described within BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040.
C. These tree retention requirements shall not apply to existing individual single-family dwellings on lots of record that are 20,000 square feet or less in area, or duplexes, multiple-family residential or nonresidential developments having less than 2,000 square feet of required landscaping over the entire development area.
D. All proposed development applications not specifically excepted as outlined in subsection C of this section shall include a tree retention plan for the entire subject property identifying and locating all significant trees on the subject property excepting only those lands where existing vegetation would not be disturbed in any manner including, but not limited to, lands covered by critical areas or critical area buffers. The tree retention plan shall be prepared by a qualified professional such as a licensed landscape architect, licensed/certified forester; licensed/certified arborist, or Washington State certified nurseryperson. The city may have submitted reports and tree retention plans peer-reviewed by qualified consultants at the applicant’s expense.
The tree retention plan shall include the following:
1. Location, size, species and driplines of all existing significant trees greater than eight inches in diameter measured four feet above grade;
2. Proposed and existing contours;
3. Trees and other vegetation to be retained and removed;
4. An evaluation by a qualified professional of all significant trees including those to be retained and removed;
5. A description of protection techniques to be utilized during construction to protect existing vegetation including, but not limited to, the use of an air shovel to locate the root zone, installation of a minimum four-foot-high chainlink or plastic-net fencing around tree driplines and/or root zones, using tunneling instead of trenching for utility installation, stump grinding instead of stump pulling and routing of construction traffic away from retained tree root areas to prevent soil compaction;
6. Tree retention plans shall indicate a disturbance-free area around all retained trees where the soil grade or ground contours shall not be altered. At a minimum, the disturbance-free area shall extend to a tree’s dripline or at least 15 feet from the trunk of a tree, whichever is the greater distance, unless an alternative tree protection method is submitted by a qualified professional, and said alternative method is approved by the city.
E. Significant trees shall be retained as follows:
1. Significant trees located within any required Type I or II perimeter landscape area as set forth in BMC 12.18.080(C) and 12.18.110 which do not pose a significant safety hazard as determined by a qualified professional.
2. Within the R-C, R-L1, and R-L2 zoning classifications, at least 20 percent of the total in diameter inches of the significant trees located within the net buildable area of the subject property as described within BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040 shall be retained.
3. Within the R-M1 through R-M4 zoning classifications, at least 20 percent of the total diameter inches of the significant trees located within the net buildable area of the subject property as described within BMC 12.14.030 and 12.14.040 shall be retained; provided, tree retention may be satisfied by retaining at least 15 percent of the tree diameter inches in significant trees and up to five percent of the tree diameter inches in existing trees two to eight inches in diameter or installing new coniferous trees at least six feet in height or new deciduous trees at least one and one-half inches in diameter. Each new tree installed shall be counted as two diameter inches toward the minimum required amount of tree diameter inches. For example, five new installed trees would be credited as 10 diameter inches.
4. Within the R-AC, DC, DN, DT, and GDC zones where the city desires to create compact, walkable neighborhoods, an applicant shall be required to preserve 15 percent of the site diameter inches of trees on the subject property but may implement the following alternative tree retention practices:
a. Retain existing coniferous or deciduous (excluding alders and cottonwoods) trees that are between two and eight inches in diameter as credit toward the 15 percent minimum site diameter inches retention; or
b. Install new coniferous and/or deciduous trees of an indigenous species to the maximum extent feasible on the subject property consistent with the following replacement ratios:
(i) Replace one significant tree with one new coniferous tree a minimum of 20 feet in height at time of planting; or
(ii) Replace one significant tree with two new coniferous trees a minimum of 14 feet in height at time of planting; or
(iii) Replace one significant tree with one new deciduous tree of a minimum diameter of four inches at time of planting; or
(iv) Replace one significant tree with two new deciduous trees of a minimum diameter of two inches at time of planting.
5. The selection of which existing significant trees are to be retained shall be based upon the following objectives:
a. Provide continuous overstory tree canopies;
b. Preserve trees in groupings or mutually supporting groves;
c. Protect trees adjacent to critical area buffers;
d. Retain or enhance the “feathered edge” visual effect of ridgeline trees against the sky. The feathered edge is more completely described within the Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan Land Use Element and is depicted in Land Use Element Figure LU-5;
e. Retain those trees which a qualified professional has identified have the best chance of survival following development;
f. Retain trees which will be used as part of a low impact development storm water facility such as dispersion of surface water; and
g. Retain trees within an open space tract created as part of a clustered subdivision planned unit development pursuant to Chapter 12.30 BMC.
6. The community development director is authorized to allow the minimum percentage of retained diameter inches of existing significant trees on the subject property to be satisfied through the retention of existing trees (excluding alders and cottonwoods) that are two to eight inches in diameter and/or by installing new coniferous or deciduous trees of an indigenous species to the maximum extent feasible and meeting the minimum size provisions of BMC 12.18.140 only if, in consultation with the public works director, the community development director determines that retention of significant trees on the subject property is in conflict with the adopted infrastructure standards of the Bothell Municipal Code and the Bothell Design and Construction Standards. Trees that are two to eight inches in diameter that are proposed to be retained, consistent with this subsection, shall be identified, located, and evaluated pursuant to subsection D of this section.
7. The community development director is further authorized to require the applicant to implement minor site plan alterations to achieve the tree retention requirements identified within this chapter. In exercising the authority granted when implementing this requirement, the director shall avoid requiring site plan modifications that:
a. Require the relocation of a building or improvement more than 20 feet horizontally;
b. Affect the location of required sanitary sewer, water and other utility facilities;
c. Modify the construction and location of surface water facilities that are consistent with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards; and
d. Conflict with the location of access drives and streets as required by the Bothell Design and Construction Standards.
F. The community development director shall require a tree retention bond or other surety be submitted to the city of Bothell to ensure retention of existing trees and plant material during construction. In the event any trees designated by the city to be retained are removed, the city shall have the option of enforcing any bond posted. Each tree identified for retention shall be bonded pursuant to the following table. The applicant may request that the bond be waived for trees outside the project clearing area, such as those within critical areas and their buffers, and such requests shall not be reasonably denied.
Tree Diameter | Amount |
|---|---|
8 – 12 inches | $2,000 |
Larger than 12 – 16 inches | $4,000 |
Larger than 16 – 20 inches | $8,000 |
Larger than 20 – 24 inches | $12,000 |
Larger than 24 – 28 inches | $16,000 |
Larger than 28 inches | $20,000 |
G. In the event that existing significant trees or vegetation which are designated to be retained die or are damaged or removed as a result of development activity, or which removal has been authorized by the city, prior to issuance of occupancy permits, or release of any tree retention bonds required pursuant to subsection F of this section, a restoration plan shall be prepared and submitted to the city for review and approval. The plan shall provide for replacement of trees in the following manner:
1. Each such significant tree designated to be retained that is removed or damaged as a result of development activity shall be replaced with new deciduous and/or coniferous trees pursuant to the following:
a. Replacement tree species shall be indigenous species to the maximum extent feasible or may be another species as approved by the city.
b. Replacement coniferous trees shall be as follows:
(i) Two trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum of 20 feet in height at time of planting; or
(ii) Four trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum of 14 feet in height at time of planting.
c. Replacement deciduous trees shall be as follows:
(i) Two trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum diameter of four inches at time of planting; or
(ii) Four trees for each significant tree removed with replacement trees being a minimum diameter of two and one-half inches at time of planting.
2. At the discretion of the community development director, the applicant may propose, and the director may allow, the retention of existing coniferous or deciduous (excluding alders and cottonwoods) trees that are between two and eight inches in diameter as credit toward the minimum site diameter inches retention standard, provided the coniferous or deciduous trees are identified, located, and evaluated pursuant to subsection D of this section.
3. Shrubs and ground cover shall be replaced by a mixture of Type VI indigenous materials in all disturbed areas.
4. Any funds generated by revocation of bonds for tree retention shall be used to plant new trees in the city of Bothell. (Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2245 § 1, 2018; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2087 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Types of landscaping are as follows. In cases where two types are specified for one area, the more intensive landscape type shall be required.
Type | Purpose | Tree Planting | Shrubs/Ground Covers | LID Elements | Other |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
I | Type I landscaping is intended to provide a solid sight barrier to totally separate incompatible uses. Coniferous materials are selected to provide maximum year-round screening. | A planting strip with two offset rows of coniferous trees at an average spacing of 10 feet triangulated on-center. | Mixture of shrubs, ground covers and other plant material to provide 85 percent surface coverage within two years from planting. | Vegetation-based LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities are permitted within all landscaping types provided the location and plant materials do not detract from the primary purpose of the landscaping type. Drought tolerant and native vegetation shall be used to the maximum extent practicable. | Either earth berming at a minimum height of two and one-half feet or a six-foot-high sight-screening fence. |
II | Type II landscaping is intended to create a semi-sight-obscuring buffer between incompatible uses and against building facades. The majority of selected plant materials shall be coniferous to provide the intended buffering year-round. | A planting strip planted with trees, of which a maximum of 30 percent may be deciduous, at an average spacing of 20 feet on-center. | |||
III | Type III landscaping is intended to provide visual relief between incompatible uses and against building facades. A mixture of deciduous and coniferous plant material shall be provided using a minimum of coniferous material to provide visual relief on a year-round basis. | Planting strip planted with coniferous or a maximum of 75 percent deciduous trees at an average spacing of 25 feet on-center. | |||
IV | Type IV landscaping is intended to provide visual relief within parking areas and adjacent to building facades. Deciduous tree materials are selected to provide shade and clear sight-lines within parking areas. | At least one deciduous tree for each 150 square feet of landscaped area at an average spacing of 30 feet on-center. | |||
V | Type V landscaping is intended to provide visual relief and add to the overall quality of a development by softening the effect of the new building upon the landscape. | At least one evergreen or deciduous tree for each 500 square feet of landscaped area. | |||
VI | Type VI landscaping is intended to revegetate, restore, or enhance existing or damaged areas of native plantings. | A mixture of coniferous trees which shall range from one to six feet at installation. Deciduous trees shall range from “whips” to one and one- half-inch caliper at installation. | Native wetland plants shall be preferred for wetland areas. |
Figure 12.18-1 Type I Landscaping

Figure 12.18-2 Type II Landscaping

Figure 12.18-3 Type III Landscaping

Figure 12.18-4 Type IV Landscaping

Figure 12.18-5 Type V Landscaping

(Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Landscaping shall be installed within street rights-of-way abutting all subdivisions, multifamily residential and commercial developments. For the purposes of this section, “street right-of-way landscaping” shall be that landscaping installed within the right-of-way. Street right-of-way landscaping includes landscaping installed between the curb and sidewalk, within planter strips, landscaping behind sidewalks, and landscaping installed within medians. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way landscaping where feasible, as determined by city of Bothell design and construction standards, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved. Where a property has frontage on a street which is part of the Bothell boulevard system, the regulations in BMC 12.18.060 shall apply. Street rights-of-way landscaping shall be as follows:
A. Landscaping shall be installed between the curb and sidewalk within a planter strip, pursuant to the following table:
Street Classification | Trees | Shrubs and Ground Covers |
|---|---|---|
Local access street | One deciduous tree, at an average spacing of 30 feet on center. Trees to be selected from the list contained in BMC 12.18.140(G). | Turf grass of ground covers as approved by director |
Collector | Pursuant to Type IV standard | Pursuant to Type IV standard |
Arterial street | Pursuant to Type IV standard | Pursuant to Type IV standard |
Boulevard street | See BMC 12.18.060 | See BMC 12.18.060 |
B. Landscaping installed within the street right-of-way between the sidewalk and the front property line shall meet or exceed a Type IV landscape standard. Other portions of abutting street right-of-way which do not contain roadway, gutters, curbing, street furniture, sidewalks or walkways or other hard surfaces shall be landscaped in accordance with a Type IV standard. Individual single-family and duplex residences are exempt from the provisions of this subsection.
C. Landscaping installed within city-approved traffic medians, islands, or other landscape features installed within street rights-of-way shall meet a Type IV landscape standard. All deciduous and coniferous trees installed within traffic medians or islands shall be selected from the Bothell boulevard median tree list as contained under BMC 12.18.060.
D. All landscaping installed within the street right-of-way shall comply with the sight distance requirements as set forth in the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications.
E. Property owners shall be responsible for maintaining any landscaping within abutting public rights-of-way.
F. The landscaping requirements in this section may be modified by the director when their strict application could create conflicts with overhead or underground utilities, traffic control signs, or other structures or conditions within the right-of-way. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Properties which have street frontage along the Bothell boulevard system as set forth in the urban design element of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan shall install Type IV landscaping in a five- to 10-foot-wide planter along the street frontage placed between the sidewalk and vehicle travel lanes, except in more urbanized areas with on-street parking and/or street trees with grates area appropriate, and shall incorporate the street trees specified in the table below. The city of Bothell may determine that median planting islands shall be required as part of street planting for the Bothell boulevard system. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way landscaping where feasible, as determined by city of Bothell design and construction development standards, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved. Median designs shall be reviewed and approved by the department of public works.
Boulevard Name | Street Tree | Median Tree(s) |
|---|---|---|
Bothell Way NE SR 522 to NE 188th St. (Multiway Boulevard) | Consistent with Multiway Boulevard design | Consistent with Multiway Boulevard design |
Bothell Way NE/Bothell-Everett Highway (NE 188th to I-405) | Red Oak (Quercus rubra), Summit Ash (Fraxinus pennsylvanica ‘Summit’) | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’), Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’) |
SR-527/Bothell Everett Highway (I-405 to northern planning area boundary) | Sugar Maple (Acer saccharum), Apollo Sugar Maple (Acer saccharum ‘Barrett cole’) | Hornbeam (Carpinus betula), Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’) |
SR 522 in the downtown core (from NE 180th to 102nd Ave. NE) | Consistent with Crossroads design | Consistent with Crossroads design |
SR-522 (outside of the downtown core) | Sycamore Maple (Acer pseudoplatanus), Greencolumn Maple (Acer nigrum ‘Greencolumn’), planted in a less formal, more naturalistic pattern | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’), Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’), Columnar (Acer rubrum ‘Red sunset’), Hornbeam (Carpinus betula ‘Fastigiata’) |
Pontius/Meridian Avenue (228th St. SE to SR-522) | Zelkova Tree (Zelkova serrat ‘Village Green’), Musashino Zelkova (Zelkova serrata ‘musashino’) | Snowdrop Tree (Styrax japonica), Pyramidal Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Fastigiata’), Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Aristocrat’) |
228th Avenue (entirety) | American Sweet Gum (Liquidambar styraciflua) | Little-Leaf Linden (Tilia cordata), Pyramidal Hornbeam (Carpinus betulus pyramidalis) |
Filbert Maltby Road | Pin Oak (Quercus palustris), Tricolor Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Roseomarginata’) | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Aristrocrat’), Pyramidal ‘Dawyck’ Beech (Fagus sylvatica fastigiata) |
35th Avenue SE/39th Avenue SE/240th St SE | Silver Maple (Acer saccarinum), Princeton Sentry (Gingko biloba ‘Princeton sentry’) | Katsura (Ceridiphyllum japonicum), Sargent Cherry (Prunus sargentii ‘Columnaris’) |
120th Avenue NE (north of NE 195th) | Red Oak (Quercus rubra), Summit Ash (Fraxinus pennsylvanica ‘Summit’) | Mountain Ash (Sorbus aucuparia), Sargent Cherry (Prunus sargentii ‘Columnaris’) |
120th Avenue NE/NE 180th Street (south of NE 195th) | Norway Maple (Acer platanoides), Parkway Maple (Acer platanoides ‘Columnarbroad’) | Mountain Ash (Sorbus aucuparia), Pyramidal Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Fastigiata’), Pyramidal Hornbeam (Carpinus betulus pyramidalis) |
Beardslee Blvd./NE 195th St. | American Sweet Gum (Liquidambar styraciflua) | Armstrong Maple (Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’), Hornbeam (Carpinus betulus) |
Waynita Drive NE/100th Avenue NE | Sycamore Maple (Acer pseudoplatanus), Apollo Sugar Maple (Acer saccharum ‘Barrett cole’) | Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’), Snowdrop Tree (Styrax japonica) |
Woodinville Way NE/NE 160th Street (if and when annexed) | Scarlet Oak (Quercus coccinea), Dawyck Purple Beech (Fagus sylvatica ‘Dawyck purple’) | Columnar maple (Acer rubrum ‘Columnare’), Columnar Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Aristocrat’) |
B. Alternative species may be substituted; provided such species are demonstrated to have the same characteristics such as speed of growth, form, size, leaf texture and root spread. Departures from the required street tree species shall require the approval of the community development director. (Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 2171 § 3 (Exh. C), 2015; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Amended during 7/15 supplement.
All development adjacent to I-405 shall install a minimum 20-foot-wide Type II landscaping area along the entire property line abutting the freeway right-of-way. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way landscaping where feasible, as determined by city of Bothell design and construction standards, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The required front lot line landscaping and interior lot line landscaping as set forth in the table in subsection C of this section shall be entirely on the subject property. For the purposes of this section, “front lot line landscaping” shall be that landscaping installed on the subject property immediately adjacent to the front or street lot line. “Interior lot line landscaping” is that landscaping installed on the subject property adjacent to the interior or side and rear lot line.
A. The width of the landscaping may be averaged but in no case shall be less than five feet.
B. Where a building is proposed to be located on a property line abutting a street right-of-way, alternative landscaping shall be installed to soften the appearance of the building. Examples of such landscaping include window boxes, hanging planters, ivy, large potted plants, and trees and shrubs planted against the building wall.
C. Front lot line landscaping and interior lot line landscaping shall comply with the table below. The land uses below correspond to those listed in Chapter 12.06 BMC.
D. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be utilized within right-of-way and interior lot landscaping, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved.
Land Use | Front Lot Line | Interior Lot Line |
|---|---|---|
Agriculture, in R-M4, OP, NB, CB, GC and LI only | IV/5 ft. | IV/5 ft. |
Automotive, marine and heavy equipment services | III/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Business and personal services | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Eating and drinking establishments, not including vendor carts | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Education | IV/10 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Essential public facilities – to be determined in conjunction with conditional use permit review | ||
Government services, general | IV/10 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Maintenance shops and vehicle and equipment parking and storage areas | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Health and social services | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Hospitals | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Lodging, temporary, excluding bed and breakfast guesthouses | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Campgrounds and recreational vehicle parks | III/10 ft. | III/10 ft. |
Manufacturing, distribution, storage and warehousing | II/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Exception: Outdoor storage yards | II/5 ft. | I/10 ft. |
Recreation, culture and entertainment | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Amusement parks | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Exception: Baseball, football, soccer and other sportsfields | IV/15 ft. | III/10 ft. |
Exception: Stadiums, not including stadiums for professional sports teams | III/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Residential uses, including only the following uses: | ||
Dormitories, fraternities and sororities | IV/5 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Manufactured home parks | See BMC 12.08.030 | See BMC 12.08.030 |
Multifamily dwelling units | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Nursing homes and specialized senior housing | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Retail uses | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Exception: Boat, equipment, manufactured or modular home, and motor vehicle sales or rental, new or used | III/10 ft. | II/5 ft. |
Transportation, including only parking facilities, transit park and ride lots and transit stations | IV/5 ft. | IV/5 ft. |
Utilities, including only the following uses: | ||
Electrical distribution substations, potable water storage facilities, storm water detention/retention facilities, and telecommunications switching facilities | II/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
Telecommunications earth receiving stations and transmission/receiving/relay towers | I/10 ft. | I/10 ft. |
Uses not otherwise categorized, as follows: | ||
Cemeteries | IV/5 ft. | III/5 ft. |
Off-site and on-site hazardous waste treatment and/or storage facilities | II/10 ft. | II/10 ft. |
(Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000).
The following are minimum landscaping requirements relating to off-street parking areas for development other than single-family detached and two-family dwellings:
A. A five-foot-wide Type IV landscape strip around the outside perimeter of the parking area, except where required street frontage landscaping forms a portion of such perimeter.
B. If a parking lot contains at least 20 parking stalls, Type IV landscaping shall be installed as follows:
1. At least seven percent of the interior parking area shall be landscaped;
2. At least one interior landscape island for every 10 parking stalls shall be distributed throughout the parking lot;
3. At least one tree shall be provided in each landscape island peninsula;
4. A planting bed or landscape island peninsula shall be provided at the end of each parking row;
5. Landscaping shall not be installed so as to obstruct the view of or inhibit access to fire hydrants or other fire protection equipment;
6. All planting beds, landscape islands, and landscape peninsulas shall have a minimum dimension of five feet as measured from the interior of the curb;
7. LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities should be used within parking lot landscaping where feasible. Where bioretention facilities are located within parking lot landscaping, curb inlets shall be provided consistent with the city of Bothell design and construction development standards.
C. Use of parking lot area for outdoor dining facilities shall not result in a net loss of required landscaping. Removal of landscaping shall be avoided whenever possible. Any landscaping approved for removal shall be replaced in kind elsewhere on site as approved by the director.
Fig. 12.18-6. Parking Area Landscaping

(Ord. 2397 § 3, 2023; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.080).
A. Landscaping shall be required around buildings to soften the visual impact of large expanses of walls as follows. Bioretention facilities are permitted within landscaping around buildings, provided such facilities are set back at least five feet from any structure:
1. Building walls less than 30 feet in height, Type IV landscaping at least five feet in width;
2. Building walls between 30 and 50 feet in height, Type III landscaping at least eight feet in width;
3. Building walls more than 50 feet in height, Type II landscaping at least 10 feet in width.
B. All garbage dumpsters and other refuse containers shall be obscured from view from adjacent streets and properties with a solid four-foot evergreen hedge or a fence or textured wall supplemented with plantings a minimum of three feet in width. (Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.090).
The following minimum landscaping standards shall be required of properties developing adjacent to a less intensive zoning classification. If a property’s use has multiple zoning designations (e.g., R-M4, OP, CB), the standards of the more intensive zone shall be utilized. Landscaping required by BMC 12.18.050 may be credited for requirements herein. Subarea regulations may require additional landscaping adjacent to a less intensive zoning classification, particularly where subarea-specific building height regulations or overlay districts are established. The use of LID BMPs such as bioretention facilities is encouraged within landscaping, provided the screening purpose of the landscape type is achieved.
Zoning Classification of Subject Property | Zoning Classification of Adjacent Property | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
R-C – R-M3 | R-M4 – R-AC | OP | NB | CB | GC | LI | |
R-C – R-M3 | - | ||||||
R-M4 – R-AC | II/10 ft | - | |||||
OP | II/10 ft | II/10 ft | - | ||||
NB | II/10 ft | II/10 ft | III/5 ft | - | |||
CB | I/10 ft | I/10 ft | II/5 ft | II/5 ft | - | ||
GC | I/15 ft | I/15 ft | II/10 ft | II/5 ft | III/5 ft | - | |
LI | I/20 ft | I/20 ft | I/10 ft | I/10 ft | II/10 ft | II/10 ft | - |
(Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 2200 § 2 (Exh. B), 2016; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.100).
Type V landscaping shall be installed in any area of a proposed development that is not covered with a building, vehicle circulation area or other improvement, or is not committed to and being used for some specific purpose. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.110).
A. A dimensioned landscaping plan showing existing and proposed landscaping, irrigation and utilities shall be submitted with the project application for any development except that for individual single-family dwellings and duplexes; the plan shall only address landscaping within the right-of-way, in accordance with BMC 12.18.050. These landscaping plans shall be prepared by a licensed landscape architect or Washington State Certified Nurseryman, except that this requirement shall not apply to individual single-family dwellings, or duplexes, or multiple-family commercial, or industrial projects proposing 2,000 square feet of landscaping or less over the entire development area. Plants shall be identified by botanical and common names, and by caliper (deciduous trees), height (shrubs or coniferous trees), or container size of plant material (ground covers).
B. Irrigation system plans shall be provided, to consist of the following, as may be determined necessary by the community development director based on the size, scale and location of the proposed project:
1. Adequate water pressure and spacing to serve all landscaped areas in non-single-family developments;
2. Moisture or precipitation sensors;
3. Automatic timers set for operation during periods of minimum evaporation and that assure adequate moisture levels;
4. Pressure regulating devices;
5. Backflow prevention devices;
6. Separate irrigation zones for turf and planting beds.
C. Utility plans shall identify the location and size of existing and proposed sewer, water and storm drains and other utilities, both above and below ground. Potential conflicts between landscaping and utilities shall be minimized or avoided.
D. The normal scale for landscape plans shall be one inch equals 20 feet. However, in large projects, the landscape plans shall be at the same scale as all other construction drawings with supplemental drawings at one inch equals 20 feet if necessary to provide sufficient detail. This determination shall be made by the community development director.
E. Final landscaping plans shall be submitted as part of the construction drawing package with one additional copy of the landscaping plan, except as other provisions of this title may require earlier submittal.
F. Final plans shall be approved by the community development director prior to project construction. Changes to approved plans must be approved by the community development director prior to changes being made. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.120).
A. The community development director shall adopt a list of plant materials which may be used to comply with the provisions of this chapter. A copy of this plant list will be available for inspection and copying in the department of community development during regular business hours.
B. The applicant may use plant materials on the adopted plant list or other plant materials as approved by the city. The city may require the applicant to modify the plant choice to:
1. Provide a desired diversity of species;
2. Make the plantings more in scale and compatible with the uses in the immediate vicinity of the subject property;
3. Provide plant materials which will fulfill buffering or landscaping purposes on a year-round basis;
4. Provide Pacific Northwest indigenous plant species, particularly drought resistant species that minimize water, maintenance, and fertilizer requirements.
C. Nonvegetative material shall not be considered a substitute for plant material. Bark, mulch, gravel, or other nonvegetative material shall only be used in conjunction with landscaping to assist vegetative growth, retain soil moisture, and assist in maintenance.
D. Plant sizes, excluding Type VI landscaping, shall be as follows:
1. Evergreen trees shall be a minimum height of six feet above finished grade, except that evergreen trees in Type I/II landscaping shall be a minimum height of 10 feet above finished grade.
2. Deciduous trees in street frontage landscaping, the Bothell boulevard system and Type II landscaping areas shall be at least two and one-half inches in diameter measured six inches above grade. All other deciduous trees shall be at least one and one-half inches in diameter measured six inches above grade. Where sight distance needs to be maintained, deciduous trees shall have a clear trunk area of at least eight feet above the ground.
3. All shrubs shall be at least 21 inches in height above finished grade and spaced at maximum three feet on center. Dwarf varieties or others approved by the department of community development may be installed at smaller heights and spacing. Varieties significantly larger than 21 inches in height may be installed at greater heights and spacing subject to approval by the community development director.
4. Ground cover spacing for one gallon plantings shall be 18 inches on center maximum or four-inch pots planted at maximum 12 inches on center.
5. Shrubs and ground cover shall provide an immediate surface coverage of at least 50 percent with an 85 percent coverage within two years.
E. Those developments where reduced landscaping is approved, pursuant to BMC 12.18.150, may be required to install street trees utilizing tree pits. Tree pits shall be a minimum of four feet by four feet depending on size potential of the tree.
F. All plant materials shall conform to the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
G. Street trees installed along residential local access streets shall be chosen from the following list:
Red Maple (Non-columnar) (Acer rubrum)
Norway Maple (Acer platanoides)
Redmond Linden (Tilia americana ‘Redmond’)
Zelkova (Zelkova serrata)
English Oak (Quercus robor)
White Oak (Quercus alba)
Katsura tree (Katsura japonica)
European Hornbeam (Non-columnar) (Carpinus betula)
Other trees as reviewed and approved by the community development director (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.130).
A. The applicant shall follow accepted nursery standards and practices in the planting and maintenance of vegetation required by this chapter.
B. All shrubs and trees used in the landscaping and screening of a zone or use shall be maintained in a healthy, natural growing condition.
C. With the exception of dead, diseased or damaged trees specifically retained to provide wildlife habitat, other dead, diseased, damaged or stolen shrubs or trees shall be replaced immediately, and the planting area shall be maintained reasonably free of weeds and trash in perpetuity.
D. Fertilizer and pesticides applications within shorelines areas shall comply with the Bothell shoreline master program. Elsewhere, care shall be exercised to prevent entry into creeks, wetlands and stormdrains.
E. The use of plant material requiring excessive pesticide applications to be kept healthy and attractive is discouraged. Pesticide applications shall be made only for the control of specific pests, using proper materials at a correct rate, applied at the proper time to obtain the desired results. All pesticide applications practices shall conform to federal and state regulations and be in accordance with the product labels. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.140).
The applicant may request and the community development director may grant a modification to the requirements of this chapter under one or more of the following circumstances:
A. The existing or finished grade of the subject property or adjoining property decreases or eliminates the need for the required landscaping;
B. The modification will be more beneficial to the adjoining property than the required landscaping by causing less impairment of view or sunlight;
C. It is reasonable to anticipate that the adjoining property will be rezoned in the near future to a zone which would require no buffer or a less intensive buffer, based on land use designations in the adopted Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan;
D. The modification is necessary to allow for maximum efficiency of an active or passive solar energy system on the subject property or a nearby adjoining property;
E. The required landscaping would substantially conflict with existing utility lines;
F. If required biofiltration swales are required and proposed within landscape areas; provided the intent for the required type of landscaping is met by meandering the swale or increasing the landscape buffer to accommodate both;
G. If there are unique or unusual existing site configurations or structures which preclude landscaping requirements, they may be transferred elsewhere on site;
H. If application of these landscaping standards would block transmission or reception of a telecommunications signal. (Ord. 2445 § 7 (Exh. G), 2024; Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.150).
A. All landscaping and required irrigation shall be installed and shall pass inspection by the city prior to final occupancy. To accommodate temporary occupancy permits, the city may accept a performance bond or other monetary surety as approved by the city attorney in lieu of immediate installation for 120 percent of the labor and materials cost to install the approved landscaping and required irrigation.
B. A landscaping maintenance bond or other approved monetary security for 10 percent of the labor and materials cost to install the approved landscaping shall be submitted prior to occupancy or release of any landscaping performance security held by the city. The maintenance security shall be released in three years after completion of the landscaping if the landscaping has been maintained in a healthy, growing condition, and if any dead, dying, or missing plants have been replaced. (Ord. 1904 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.18.160).
This chapter is intended to provide for recreation areas for residents of dwellings in the R-M3, R-M4 and R-AC zoning districts, to separate such areas from automobile oriented space, and to enhance the environmental quality of such districts, thus promoting the public health, safety, and welfare of the community. (Ord. 2445 § 8 (Exh. H), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Each development within an R-M3 or R-M4 zoning district shall provide a minimum area of 200 square feet of recreation area for each living unit in the development, including those units used by the owner or building management personnel; in the R-AC zoning district, the minimum area shall be 50 square feet for each living unit. Balconies shall not be counted as recreation area. No more than 50 percent of recreation area may be indoor or covered space; except that in the R-AC zone, 100 percent of the recreation area may be indoor or covered space.
Except in specialized senior housing developments and in the R-AC zone, at least 50 percent of the recreation area shall be outdoors and laid out in a manner that makes it suitable and safe as play space for children. Recreation areas shall be accessible to disabled persons, in accordance with Chapters 19.27 and 70.92 RCW. (Ord. 2445 § 8 (Exh. H), 2024; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
No more than 50 percent of the required area may be used for single-purpose facilities, such as swimming pools, tennis courts and similar facilities which may be available for recreational use by occupants of the development. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Where the total required recreation area is 3,000 square feet or less after subtracting area in indoor or covered space and single-purpose facilities, in accordance with BMC 12.20.020 and 12.20.030, the recreation area shall be one continuous parcel of land, except as otherwise provided in BMC 12.20.020 for the R-AC zone. Where the required recreation area totals more than 3,000 square feet, the area may be divided into several usable parcels on the site; provided, that at least one parcel is a minimum of 2,000 square feet in size and all the other parcels are at least 1,000 square feet in size with a minimum width of 15 feet.
B. No part of the recreation area may be used for driveway, parking or other vehicular use. A six-foot-high fence and 10-foot-wide Type II landscaping strip shall separate the recreation space from public streets, parking areas and driveways.
C. The square footage in any required front yard setback area shall not be used to meet the recreation area requirements. The square footage in any required side yard and rear yard setback areas may be used to meet the recreation area requirements if it satisfies the requirements of this chapter. The shape and layout of the area shall be subject to approval by the community development director. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Enforcement of this chapter shall take place in accordance with BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish sign regulations that are intended to:
A. Protect the general public health, safety, welfare, and aesthetics of the community.
B. Implement community design standards, consistent with the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan.
C. Promote the community’s appearance by regulating the number, design, character, location, type, quality of materials, scale, illumination, and maintenance of signs to maximize their positive visual impact.
D. Promote the effective identification of businesses while maintaining an attractive and inviting cityscape.
E. Promote signs that identify uses and premises without confusion and remain content-neutral.
F. Reduce possible traffic and safety hazards through good signage. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following definitions are listed in alphabetical order for the purpose of sign regulations, and shall apply to the administration of this chapter. In addition, except as otherwise provided in this section, those definitions as contained in Chapter 11.02 BMC are adopted and incorporated into this section by reference.
“Animated sign” is a sign which contains wind-, electronically, or mechanically operated moving parts or which flashes or simulates motion by the use of electric lights.
“Awning” or “canopy” means a covering structure projecting horizontally from and attached to a building, affording protection from the elements to persons or property thereunder.
“Awning/canopy sign” is a sign which is integrated into an awning/canopy and does not extend beyond the limits of the awning or canopy.
“Awning/canopy sign, under” is a sign which is suspended from an awning/canopy but does not extend beyond the horizontal limits of the awning/canopy.
“Banners” are temporary signs made of cloth, fabric, paper, nonrigid plastic or similar types of material and displayed from a building or structure.
“Bench sign” means any sign which is painted or affixed to any portion of a bench.
“Billboard” means a large fixed outdoor advertising sign with one or more structural supports. The approximate sizes of the billboard faces range from 12 to 14 feet in height and 24 to 48 feet in width.
“Changeable copy sign” means a sign designed to allow the changing of copy through manual, mechanical, or electrical means including time and temperature.
“Directional sign” is a sign that guides the public to a specific place or location.
“Externally illuminated sign” is a sign which is lighted by a source not concealed or contained within the sign. “Externally illuminated sign” means the same thing as “indirect illumination.”
“Fixed sign” is any sign attached or affixed to the ground or any structure in such a manner so as to provide for continuous display for an extended or indeterminable period of time. Fixed signs include, but are not limited to, freestanding signs and wall signs.
“Freestanding sign” means a sign which is supported by one or more uprights, braces, poles, or other structural components that is not attached to a building or buildings. Examples of freestanding signs include pole-mounted signs and monument signs.
“Front face of building” means the face of a building which is parallel to an abutting street or the length of the projection of the wall of a building facing obliquely toward an abutting street when such projection is made perpendicular to the centerline of the street.
“Governmental sign” is a sign posted and displayed by a governmental agency that is necessary to protect and regulate the public health and safety. Governmental signs include traffic signs, directional and informational signs for public health and safety facilities (such as hospitals, police stations, governmental offices, etc.) and public safety warning or hazard signs.
“Illegal sign” is a sign which was erected without first complying with all ordinances and regulations in effect at the time of its erection and use.
“Internally illuminated sign” is a sign with the light source concealed or contained within the sign. “Internally illuminated sign” means the same thing as “direct illumination.”
“Multiple building complex” is a group of structures housing at least one retail business, office, commercial venture, or independent and separate department of a business which shares the same lot, access and/or parking facilities or coordinated site plan.
“Multiple tenant building” is a single structure housing more than one retail, office, or commercial business.
“Mural” is a picture painted directly on a building or its appurtenances.
“Nonconforming sign” is a legally established sign which fails to conform to the requirements of this chapter.
“Off-premises sign” means any sign which relates to a good, product, service, place, thing, event, or meeting that is offered, sold, traded, provided, located or conducted at a location other than that upon which the sign is posted or displayed. Off-premises signs include, but are not limited to, billboards and other outdoor advertising structures that are related to a particular location or premises other than that upon which the sign is posted or displayed.
“On-premises sign” means any sign which advertises or relates to a good, product, service, place, thing, event, or meeting that is lawfully offered, sold, traded, provided, located, or conducted at the location or premises upon which the sign is posted or displayed. On-premises signs also include signs not related to any particular location or premises, such as signs displaying religious, charitable, cultural, governmental, informational, political, educational or artistic messages that are intentionally displayed by the owner of the property or premises upon which the sign is displayed.
“Permanent sign” is a fixed or portable sign intended for continuous use or intermittent display for periods exceeding 60 days in any calendar year.
“Portable sign” means any sign which is readily capable of being moved or removed, whether attached or affixed to the ground or any structure, that is designed, constructed and typically intended for temporary display. Portable signs include, but are not limited to:
A. Signs posted or displayed upon a movable chassis or support with or without wheels;
B. A-frame signs;
C. Wooden, metal, or plastic “stake” or “yard” signs;
D. Posters or banners affixed to windows, railings, overhangs, trees, hedges, or other structures or vegetation;
E. Signs mounted on vehicles parked and visible from the public right-of-way, except signs mounted upon vehicles that are being primarily used for normal day-to-day transportation purposes and not primarily for advertising or display purposes and except for signs advertising for sale the vehicle upon which the sign is posted;
F. Searchlights;
G. Inflatables.
“Projecting sign” is any sign attached or affixed to a building or wall in such a manner that its leading edge extends more than 12 inches beyond the surface of the building or wall.
“Sign” is a communication device, structure, or fixture which incorporates graphics, symbols, or written copy for the purpose of conveying a particular message to public observers.
“Sign area.” The following shall apply for the purpose of defining sign area for various types of signs:
A. Freestanding signs of six feet in height or less/wall/projecting signs: the entire face of a sign, excluding any framing, projections, molding, or support structures.
B. Freestanding signs of greater than six feet in height/window/awning signs: the area defined by the smallest rectangle enclosing all lettering and any associated graphics and/or symbols.
C. Individual channel-type letters mounted on a building shall be measured by the area enclosed by the smallest rectangle outlining each word.
“Sign height” is the vertical distance from the city-approved finish grade to the uppermost element of the entire sign structure including any base or foundation, as illustrated below.

Fig. 12.22.020-1.
“Temporary sign” is an allowed portable sign intended for short-term use, not to exceed 60 days in a calendar year.
“Wall sign” is a sign attached to a wall or facade with its face parallel to the wall and projecting no more than one foot.
“Window sign” is any copy that is applied or attached to a window. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2282 § 6, 2019; Ord. 2101 § 2 (Exh. B), 2012; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following table specifies the major categories of signs addressed by this chapter, gives examples of signs within each category, and specifies the applicable chapter section for those signs regulated within each category.
Sign and Display Category (applicable code section) | Example | Residential Zones | Residential – Activity Center, Business and Commercial Zones (R-AC, NB, CB, GC, OP and LI) |
|---|---|---|---|
Exempt Signs (BMC 12.22.040) | Traffic signs, legal and public notices, etc. Signs which because of their regulatory or public safety nature are exempt from the requirements of this chapter. Certain sizes of temporary signs. | Exempt. | Exempt. |
Temporary On-Premises Signs | A-frames, banners, posters, informational, political, decorative freestanding, wall, and portable signs for short-term display. | Banner signs require registration. Prohibited in residential zones. | Allowed, subject to sign size, height, design, and placement regulations. No sign permit required for exempt signs. Banner signs require sign registration. |
Permanent On-Premises Signs | Freestanding, wall, window, and portable signs intended for long-term display. | Subject to maximum signage limitations in residential zones. | Allowed, subject to sign size, height, design, and placement regulations. Sign permit required in commercial zones. |
Temporary Off-Premises Signs | Informational, political, decorative, and real estate signs displayed off site. | Allowed, subject to sign size, height, design, and placement regulations. No sign permit required for exempt signs. | |
Permanent Off-Premises Signs | Freestanding, wall, window, and portable signs located off site. | Prohibited. | Prohibited. |
(Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following signs are exempt from regulation under this title:
A. Off-premises governmental signs posted in accordance with BMC 12.22.070.
B. Signs required by law such as official legal notices.
C. Traffic control or directional signs posted on premises by private persons, which do not exceed six square feet in area and which contain only copy or symbols necessary to provide for reasonable traffic control and direction upon the premises. Such signs include, but are not limited to, “no parking,” “entrance,” “exit” and other similar informational and directional signs.
D. Signs or displays not visible from the public right-of-way.
E. Flags. Patriotic, governmental, institutional or corporate flags; provided, that each flag does not exceed 50 square feet.
F. “No Trespassing,” “No Dumping,” “No Parking,” “Private,” “Entrance,” “Exit” and other on-premises informational warning and directional signs which do not exceed two square feet in area.
G. Seasonal decorations within the public holiday season, or civic or festival season. Such displays shall be removed at the end of the season.
H. Sculptures, fountains, benches, lighting, mosaics, murals and other urban design elements.
I. Postal signs.
J. Gravestones.
K. Memorial signs, historic site markers or plaques recognized by the city council.
L. Address numbers not exceeding 12 inches in height.
M. Temporary signs with a sign area no greater than three square feet in area per side and no more than four feet in height that remain for less than 90 days in a one-year period. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2145 § 2 (Exh. B), 2014; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following signs are prohibited:
A. Signs which interfere with the view of traffic signs, signals or devices, and approaching or merging traffic;
B. Animated Signs. No sign shall be animated, revolve or rotate either mechanically or by illumination except the movement of the hands of a clock, electronic message displays and barber poles;
C. Signs which are significantly distracting to vehicle operators, such as those containing flashing, moving or intermittent lights, or signs with a concentrated light source or reflecting frames or surface(s) of such intensity or glare that it may create a safety hazard to motorists or pedestrians;
D. Signs erected, maintained, or painted upon trees, rocks, or other natural features;
E. Signs which are structurally unsafe, or improperly maintained, or otherwise in violation of the Uniform Building Code and other Bothell ordinances;
F. Signs on utility poles as prohibited by RCW 70.54.100;
G. Pennants; permanent banners; streamers; strings of ribbon, tinsel, small flags, pinwheels, twirlers, propellers, and flashing or blinking lights; flares; balloons; and devices of a similar carnival character;
H. Portable permanent signs, with the exception of A-frame signs as allowed by BMC 12.22.060(B) and (C);
I. Portable temporary signs of the following types:
1. Signs posted or displayed upon a movable chassis or support, with or without wheels;
2. Posters;
3. Signs mounted upon vehicles as specified in subsection E of the definition for portable signs, BMC 12.22.020;
4. Searchlights;
5. Inflatables;
J. Signs which by reason of their size, location, movement, content, shape, coloring or manner of illumination obscure, imitate, or may be confused with lawfully posted governmental signs such as traffic control signs, signals, or devices;
K. Billboards. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The following tables specify the permitted number, size and location of signs by zoning category:
A. Residential Zones – On-Premises Sign Requirements.
Use | Permitted Sign Type(s) and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width |
|---|---|---|---|
Residential uses and permitted and licensed activities1 occurring in a single-family residential structure. | One wall sign (on-premises real estate signs may also be freestanding). | Two square feet (on-premises real estate signs may be up to six square feet in area). | Wall – No sign shall project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Permitted and licensed activities1 occurring in a multifamily residential structure.3 | One wall sign (on-premises real estate signs may also be freestanding). | Two square feet (on-premises real estate signs may be up to six square feet in area). | Wall – No sign shall project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Schools, churches, and other permitted and licensed activities1 not occurring in a single-family or multifamily residential structure. | One wall and one freestanding sign per street frontage. | Wall – 36 square feet. Freestanding – 36 square feet. | Wall – No sign shall project above the uppermost extent of wall. Freestanding – six feet in height or 10 feet in width.4 |
Neighborhood, subdivision, multifamily complex and manufactured home park identification signs.2 | One freestanding sign per entrance. | 50 square feet. | Freestanding – six feet in height or 10 feet in width. |
1Permitted activities in these zones are specified in Chapter 12.06 BMC. Examples of some of these activities include home day care centers and home occupation businesses.
2Includes approved short and formal plats (subdivisions), approved multifamily developments of two or more dwelling units, and approved manufactured home parks.
3Potential users of such signs should note that the use of such signs may also be at the discretion of the property owner.
4Uses located on property containing at least 660 lineal feet of street frontage may erect a freestanding sign up to 15 feet tall. Other dimensional requirements as specified above shall still apply. No structural support poles or braces shall be visible (“pole signs” are prohibited) and the overall appearance of the sign shall be as a uniformly integrated whole. For the purposes of this section, lineal feet shall apply to a single street frontage only. Corner lots shall not count both street frontages towards the total.
Other: Only indirect illumination of signs permitted.
B. R-AC, NB, CB, OP, GC, and LI Zones – On-Premises Sign Requirements for a Single Use (One Business or Tenant) on an Individual Lot.
Use | Permitted Sign Type(s) and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width |
|---|---|---|---|
Advertisement and identification of permitted uses.4 | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: No maximum number.1 | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: Total area of all signs shall not exceed two square feet of sign area per lineal foot of front face of building containing a public entrance.1 A minimum of 36 square feet of sign area is permitted. | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: Shall not project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Freestanding: One sign per street frontage for individual uses located on a single lot. | Freestanding: Maximum of 50 square feet. | Freestanding: six feet in height or 10 feet in width.3 | |
Portable A-frame: One sign per property street frontage.2 | Portable A-frame: Maximum six square feet. | Portable A-frame: three feet in height or width. |
1There is no limit to the number of wall/window/projecting/awning signs a use may have, nor is there any particular locational requirement (though they must be located on the building where the use is occurring). The total maximum sign area may be applied to one sign, or be divided among several signs.
2A-frame signs shall be subject to the following criteria:
1Each legal business shall be permitted one A-frame sign per street frontage on which the business is located. The maximum size of an A-frame sign shall be six square feet in area and 36 inches in height or width.
2A-frame signs shall be located on the same lot on which the business being advertised by the sign is located. For the purposes of this section, the lot shall be considered to include the sidewalk abutting the business.
3A-frame signs shall be placed so as to not impede pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
4A-frame signs shall not be placed in any landscaped area.
3Uses located on property containing at least 330 lineal feet of street frontage may erect a freestanding sign up to 15 feet tall. Other dimensional requirements as specified above shall still apply. No structural support poles or braces shall be visible (“pole signs” are prohibited) and the overall appearance of the sign shall be as a uniformly integrated whole.
4If a property containing a single use changes such that two or more uses occupy the property, the sign regulations in subsection C of this section shall apply.
Other: Either indirect or internal illumination of signs is permitted.
C. R-AC, NB, CB, OP, GC and LI Zones – On-Premises Sign Requirements for Two or More Uses (Businesses or Tenants) Located on an Individual Lot, or an Aggregation of Lots into One Retail or Commercial Center.
Use | Permitted Sign Type(s) and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width |
|---|---|---|---|
Advertisement and identification of permitted uses. | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: No limit, subject to maximum allowable sign area.4 | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: two square feet of sign area per each lineal foot of the width of tenant’s space within the front face of the building.2 A minimum of 36 square feet of sign area is permitted. | Wall/Window/Projecting/ Awning: Shall not project above the uppermost extent of wall. |
Freestanding: One sign per each 150 lineal feet of property street frontage.1 | Freestanding: Maximum of 50 square feet. | Freestanding: six feet in height and 10 feet in width.3 | |
5Portable A-frame: One sign per property street frontage. | 5Portable A-frame: Maximum six square feet. | 5Portable A-frame: three feet in height or width. |
1Freestanding signs may be used both to identify a multitenant center and/or to identify individual tenants within a center, at the property owner’s discretion.
2A tenant whose business is located on more than one floor of a building shall be permitted sign area based upon the width of the tenant’s space within the building face of each occupied floor.
3For uses located on property containing at least 330 lineal feet of street frontage, one of the allowed freestanding signs may be up to 15 feet in height. Other dimensional requirements as specified above shall still apply. No structural support poles or braces shall be visible.
4The total maximum sign area may be applied to one sign, or be divided among several signs.
5A-frame signs shall be subject to the following criteria:
1Each legal business shall be permitted one A-frame sign per street frontage on which the business is located. The maximum size of an A-frame sign shall be six square feet in area and 36 inches in height or width.
2A-frame signs shall be located on the same lot on which the business being advertised by the sign is located. For the purposes of this section, the lot shall be considered to include the sidewalk abutting the business.
3A-frame signs shall be placed so as to not impede pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
4A-frame signs shall not be placed in any landscaped area.
Other: Either indirect or internal illumination of signs is permitted.
D. Other Requirements Applicable to All Zones.
1. In multiple use zones, the number of signs permitted and the location, maximum sign area, and permitted illumination shall be based upon the zoning designation of the actual use proposed (e.g., signs for a proposed multifamily complex within the R-M4, OP zone shall be regulated per the R-C through R-M4 zone restrictions).
2. In multiple building complexes, each building is permitted one additional 10-square-foot wall sign for building identification purposes.
E. Landscaping Requirements for Freestanding Signs.
1. Pole-mounted signs shall be landscaped around the base of the sign with shrubs and groundcovers, or other plant materials, such that, within a period of two years from planting, the pole support(s) of the sign shall effectively be obscured by the landscape plantings.
2. Monument signs shall be landscaped around the base of the sign with groundcovers or other plant materials sufficient to provide at least 85 percent ground coverage around the base of the sign within a period of two years from planting.
F. Setbacks. There are no specific setback requirements for on-premises signs; provided, that no sign shall intrude into the sight distance triangle and line of sight, as depicted in plan No. 316 of the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1994 § 1, 2008; Ord. 1957 § 1 (Exh. B), 2006; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1879 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Permanent, off-premises signs are prohibited throughout the city (all zones), with the exception of governmental signs. The director of community development shall control the size, design, number and location of said signs. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 2373 § 10, 2022; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Banner signs require registration with the city in accordance with the registration procedures contained in BMC 12.22.125.
A. Residential Zones (R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, R-M2, R-M3, R-M4). Temporary signs located on-premises are subject to the following criteria:
Permitted Sign Type and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height |
|---|---|---|
One wall or freestanding sign per property street frontage. | Five square feet for wall or freestanding. | Wall – shall not project above the uppermost extent of the wall. Freestanding – six feet. |
B. Residential – Activity Center and Commercial Zones (R-AC, NB, CB, GC, OP, and LI). Temporary signs located on-premises are allowed, subject to the following criteria:
Permitted Sign Type and Number Permitted | Maximum Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Allowable Sign Height/Width/Other |
|---|---|---|
One wall, window or banner sign per property street frontage. One banner per building. | Wall, window: 50 square feet. Banner: 50 square feet. | Wall – shall not project above the uppermost extent of the wall. Banner – shall not project above the uppermost extent of the wall on which it is located. Shall be wholly located upon the building on which it is displayed. Shall be registered with the city. |
(Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1876 § 2, 2002; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A. Temporary off-premises signs shall be prohibited, except as specifically provided in BMC 12.22.090.
B. All temporary off-premises signs relating to a specific meeting, event, or occurrence shall be removed within 10 days following the conclusion of the meeting, event, or occurrence to which they relate.
C. Only portable freestanding signs may be used as temporary off-premises signage.
D. The maximum number of allowed off-premises signs to be displayed simultaneously shall be four.
E. Temporary off-premises signs shall be constructed of suitable material and designed to adequately withstand the reasonably expected normal or average weather conditions during the intended display period of the sign.
F. Temporary off-premises signs shall be regularly inspected to ensure that they have not been damaged or destroyed by natural forces or vandalism. Damaged or destroyed signs shall be immediately removed or repaired so as to avoid threats to public health and safety or the accumulation of unclaimed refuse upon the public rights-of-way.
G. All temporary off-premises signs shall be posted and displayed in accordance with the following regulations:
1. Temporary off-premises signs may be posted in any portion of the public rights-of-way including areas landscaped with lawns. Temporary off-premises signs in the public rights-of-way are allowed only between the property line and the back edge of the nearest sidewalk, or where no sidewalk exists, between the property line and a line five feet away from the nearest edge of the roadway pavement. Approval of the abutting owner is recommended. Signs on stakes that can be manually pushed or hammered into the ground are allowed. All other signs are prohibited, unless specifically allowed by a street use permit;
2. Temporary off-premises signs may not be posted within areas of the public rights-of-way landscaped with trees, shrubs, or other large plant materials;
3. Temporary off-premises signs may not be posted in any portion of the public right-of-way typically used by motor vehicles in a lawful manner;
4. Temporary off-premises signs shall be posted so as to not impede pedestrian, bicycle or handicapped travel or access;
5. Temporary off-premises signs shall be posted in accordance with the requirements contained in the city’s adopted design and construction standards and specifications pertaining to driveway and intersection sight triangles and line of sight (drawing No. 316).
H. Any temporary, off-premises sign posted in the public right-of-way in violation of the regulations set forth in this section, or with the dimensional standards set forth in BMC 12.22.060 and 12.22.080, constitute a trespass upon public property and are declared to be a public nuisance. Such signs shall be subject to immediate abatement by removal and confiscation. The city shall dispose of all confiscated signs as follows:
1. If of apparent negligible value, the city may immediately destroy and/or permanently dispose of such signs.
2. If of apparent significant value, the city shall retain such signs for a period of not less than 30 days, after which time such signs shall be presumed abandoned under the provisions of RCW Title 63, unless claimed by their owner, and shall be disposed of in any lawful manner.
3. In the event a confiscated sign is claimed by its owner prior to final disposition by the city, the owner shall be liable to the city for all normal and reasonable costs and expenses incurred in the confiscation and storage of such signs. The city shall collect such costs from the owner prior to returning possession of the sign. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2015 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Temporary signs located off-premises are prohibited in all residential and commercial zones of the city. Temporary off-premises signs shall be posted in accordance with the general regulations for temporary off-premises signs contained in BMC 12.22.088. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Repealed by Ord. 2455. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
Approval of a master sign plan shall be an option for retail, commercial, business park and industrial developments containing more than one tenant or business. The purpose of the master sign plan option is to simplify the sign permit process for multitenant/business developments. The master sign plan process allows all signs within a multitenant/business development to be reviewed and approved concurrently, thereby eliminating the need for individual sign permit applications for individual tenants/businesses. The following criteria shall apply:
A. Application for approval of a master sign plan shall be made and processed concurrently with the project application to construct the associated development, except that existing multitenant or multibusiness developments desiring to achieve conformance with this code shall be permitted to apply for a master sign plan retroactively. Submittal requirements shall be as per BMC 12.22.130.
B. Review of signs contained within the master sign plan shall consist of sign location, size, type, number, height, setback, and illumination, in accordance with the requirements contained within this chapter and within any applicable subarea sign regulations.
C. Approval of a master sign plan shall constitute approval for all individual signs contained within said plan with regards to the elements specified in BMC 12.22.140. No further review by the city for consistency with these elements shall be required. In order to document consistency with the approved master sign plan, individual tenants/businesses shall file with the city one copy of the appropriate sign plans for all signs within the approved master sign plan applicable to that tenant/business. Submittal requirements shall be per BMC 12.22.130.
D. A master sign plan is a Type I permit and shall be processed as such pursuant to BMC Title 11.
E. Minor revisions to an approved master sign plan may be granted by the director; provided, that no variation from the requirements of this chapter and any applicable subarea sign regulations are made. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A sign permit is a Type I action and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. No sign shall be erected, re-erected, attached, structurally altered, or relocated by any person, firm or corporation from and after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this section without a sign permit issued by the city. The director shall issue all sign permits. No permit is required for the repair, cleaning, repainting or other normal maintenance, nor for changing the message of a sign on a sign designed for changeable copy, as long as the sign structure is not modified in any way. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
An application for a sign permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application shall contain, at a minimum:
A. Submittal Requirements for All Signs. One set of folded sign design plans showing the following. All plans must be drawn to scale and dimensioned accurately. Indicate existing and proposed signs.
1. A diagram, plan or illustration clearly depicting the sign dimensions and design and indicating the color(s) of the proposed sign(s), materials to be used and lighting (if any) to be utilized;
2. Necessary building or lot dimensions as required to calculate allowable sign area.
B. Submittal Requirements for Freestanding, Wall-Mounted and Projecting Signs. In addition to the above sign design plan, two sets of construction plans showing the listed items below are required for submittal. All plans must be drawn to scale and dimensioned accurately.
1. Freestanding.
a. Plot plan clearly indicating the location of the proposed sign relative to existing buildings and other structures and to streets/rights-of-way and property lines;
b. Foundation plan;
c. Anchoring/mounting system; and
d. Manufacturing specifications.
2. Wall-Mounted.
a. Location of sign on building;
b. Anchoring/mounting system; and
c. Manufacturing specifications.
3. Projecting.
a. Height above sidewalk;
b. Distance from curb;
c. Anchoring/mounting system; and
d. Manufacturing specifications.
C. Per RCW 18.27.110, signs requiring a building permit shall require that any contractor required by law to be registered with the state, provide verification and evidence of such registration at the time of permit issuance. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A. Banner signs are allowed as a form of temporary signage; provided, that the signs are registered with the city in accordance with the following registration process:
1. The person seeking to display the sign shall notify the city either in person, by telephone, in writing via fax, the mail or electronically via the Internet, of their intent to display the sign and shall provide the city with the location of the sign and the dates of display, subject to the criteria contained in BMC 12.22.080.
2. The city shall maintain a log of registered signs that is available for viewing by the public upon request.
B. Any displayed banner sign that is not registered with the city shall be removed until such time that it is registered. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003).
A. A permitted sign shall present a finished appearance on all visible sides. There shall be no unfinished back side consisting of visible braces or other support structures.
B. No more than two sides are allowed per sign.
C. For the purpose of determining number of signs, a sign shall be considered to be a single display surface or display device containing elements organized, related, and composed to form a unit. Where independent elements are displayed in a random manner without organized relationship of elements, or where there is reasonable doubt about the relationship of elements, each element shall be considered to be a single sign.
D. The Uniform Sign Code, 1976 Edition, of the International Conference of Building Officials as adopted by Ordinance No. 873 of the city and any subsequent amendments to said ordinance are made a part of this chapter and shall also serve to regulate the construction of signs in the city. In the case of disagreement or contradiction between the zoning requirements and the Uniform Sign Code, the more restrictive provisions shall prevail.
E. There are no specific setback requirements for signs, but no sign shall be located within the sight distance triangle and line of sight, as determined according to drawing No. 316 of the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications.
F. Structural Requirements. The structure and erection of signs within the city shall be governed by the adopted Uniform Sign Code and Uniform Building Code (or any superseding edition adopted by the city, including appendices), as promulgated by the International Conference of Building Officials, which are adopted and made a part hereof by this reference. Compliance with the Uniform Sign Code and Uniform Building Code shall be a prerequisite to issuance of a sign permit under BMC 12.22.120.
G. Electrical Requirements. Electrical requirements for signs within the city shall be governed by the adopted National Electrical Code (or any superseding edition adopted by the city, including appendices), promulgated by the National Fire Protection Association, which is adopted and made a part hereof by this reference. Compliance with the Uniform Sign Code and Uniform Building Code shall be a prerequisite to issuance of a sign permit under BMC 12.22.120.
H. Sign Illumination. Illumination from or upon any sign shall be shaded, shielded, directed or reduced so as to avoid undue brightness, glare, or reflection of light on private or public property in the surrounding area, and so as to avoid unreasonable distraction to pedestrians or motorists. In no case shall any illuminated sign be in violation of the standards set forth in BMC 8.64.030, Exterior lighting.
I. Sign Maintenance. All signs, including signs heretofore installed, shall be constantly maintained in a state of security, safety and repair. If any sign is found not to be so maintained or is insecurely fastened or otherwise dangerous, it shall be the duty of the owner and/or occupant of the premises on which the sign is fastened to repair or remove the sign upon receiving notice from the director. The premises surrounding a freestanding sign shall be free and clear of rubbish and any landscaping area free of weeds.
J. Sign Obstructing View or Passage. No sign shall be located so as to physically obstruct any door, window or exit from a building. No sign shall be located that is hazardous to vehicular ingress, egress or that impedes the sight distance triangle or line of sight as determined according to drawing No. 316 of the city of Bothell design and construction standards and specifications.
K. Sign Inspection. All sign users shall permit the periodic inspection of their signs by the city upon city staff request.
L. Conflicting Provisions. Whenever two provisions of this code overlap or conflict with regard to size or placement of a sign, the more restrictive provision with regards to number, maximum height and sign area shall apply. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
A. A legal, nonconforming sign existing on the effective date of this sign code shall be allowed to continue in existence without abatement provided all of the following criteria are met:
1. The sign was lawfully constructed, erected, posted or displayed in full compliance with all development regulations and standards then in effect; and
2. The sign does not present a threat to the public health and safety.
B. Any legal, nonconforming sign shall immediately be brought into compliance with the applicable provisions of this sign code upon any of the following events:
1. Any change in the use classification of the primary building or structure to which the sign advertises or relates, as determined by reference to the most current version of the Uniform Building Code as adopted by reference by the city of Bothell.
2. Any significant modification or repair to the structure, frame, or support of the nonconforming sign. For purposes of this section, “significant modification or repair” shall mean modification or repair that exceeds 50 percent of the fair market value of the sign.
3. Any relocation or replacement of a nonconforming sign.
C. A legal, nonconforming sign shall not be expanded or enlarged to any degree without bringing the sign into conformance with the provisions of this sign code.
D. Where the use of a legal nonconforming sign is abandoned or discontinued for a continuous period of 180 days, such sign shall lose its nonconforming status and shall be immediately removed or brought into compliance with the provisions of this sign code. For on-premises signs, a nonconforming sign shall be considered to be abandoned or discontinued upon the close, expiration, or termination of the location or activity to which the sign relates. (Ord. 2455 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The hearing body may approve or approve with modification the application for a variance from the provisions of the sign code if:
A. The applicant is unable to obtain signage consistent with this chapter due to special circumstances or conditions related to the size, topography, location, or other physical characteristics of the premises, and that such special circumstances or conditions are not the direct result of the actions or omissions of the applicant. For purposes of this section, such special circumstances may include the proximity of the premises to any state highway, but shall not include proximity to local streets and roads;
B. The variance will not constitute a grant of a special privilege inconsistent with the limitation upon signage and other uses of other properties in the vicinity and zone in which the property, on behalf of which the application was filed, is located;
C. That the granting of such variance will not be materially detrimental to the public welfare or injurious to the property or improvements in the vicinity and in the zone in which the subject property is situated; and
D. Signs that are on, or are being considered for, nomination to any local, state, or national Register of Historic Places, or have, or are being considered for, local landmark status. (Ord. 1905 § 1, 2003; Ord. 1805 § 2, 2000).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the legal status of nonconforming uses, buildings, other site improvements, and development densities by creating provisions through which such nonconformities may be established, maintained, altered, reconstructed, expanded or abated. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. All nonconformities shall be subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. The provisions of this chapter do not supersede or relieve a property owner from compliance with:
1. The requirements of the Uniform Building and Fire Codes; or
2. The provisions of this code beyond the specific nonconformance addressed by this chapter. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Any use, building, other site condition (e.g. density or floor area ratio) or improvement (e.g., landscaping, parking or signage), or development density shall be considered legally nonconforming if:
1. It was legally established prior to the effective date of this title or amendments thereto; and
2. One of the following is applicable:
a. The use is now prohibited or cannot meet use limitations applicable to the zone in which it is located; or
b. The building or other site condition or improvement does not comply with the floor area ratio, dimensions, landscaping, parking, sign, design or other standards of this title; or
c. The development does not comply with the minimum density standards for this title.
B. A change in the required permit review process shall not create a nonconformity.
C. Any nonconformity that is brought into conformance for any period of time shall forfeit status as a nonconformity, except as specified in BMC 12.26.040. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
If, at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title or any amendment thereto, a lawful use of land exists that is made no longer permissible under the terms of this title or amendments thereto, such use may be continued as a legal nonconforming use so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following conditions:
A. No nonconforming use shall be intensified, enlarged, increased or extended to occupy a greater area of land than was occupied on the effective date of the zoning code or amendment that made the use no longer permissible.
B. No nonconforming use shall be moved in whole or in part to any other portion of the lot which contains the nonconforming use.
C. If any nonconforming use of land ceases for any reason for a period of one year over a three-year period, any subsequent use of such land shall conform to the regulations specified by this title for the zone in which such land is located. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
If, at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title or any amendment thereto, a lawful building or other improvement exists which is made no longer permissible under the terms of this title or amendment(s) thereto, such building or other site improvement may be continued as legal nonconforming so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following conditions:
A. No alteration or change is permitted which increases the nonconformity.
B. Nonconforming buildings that propose an increase in useable floor area are exempt from complying with the floor area ratio required at the time of the proposed increase.
C. Upkeep, repairs and maintenance of a legal nonconforming building or other improvement shall be permitted. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 9, 2021; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
If, at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title or any amendment thereto, a lot is developed at a residential density which is no longer permissible under the terms of this title or amendment thereto, the density may be continued as legal nonconforming so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following conditions:
A. Any proposed change in density is exempt from complying with the minimum required residential density at the time of the proposed change.
B. Buildings and other site improvements on such a lot are subject to a separate determination under BMC 12.26.030 as to their conformity to this code. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024).
A. This section only applies to nonconformities to this title.
B. A legal nonconforming building or other site improvement may be maintained, repaired, renovated or structurally altered provided the nonconformity is not increased.
C. All expansion or extension of nonconforming buildings or other site improvements shall be consistent with all other provisions of this code.
D. A nonconforming building or other site improvement destroyed by fire or acts of nature may be repaired or reconstructed to the same or smaller nonconformity that existed at the time of destruction; provided, that:
1. The repair or reconstruction does not increase the previous nonconformity;
2. The building permit application for repair or reconstruction is submitted within 12 months of the occurrence of damage;
3. Landscaping fully complies with the requirements of Chapter 12.18 BMC.
E. Should such building or other site improvement be moved for any reason for any distance whatever, it shall thereafter conform to the regulations for the zone in which it is located. (Ord. 2461 § 3 (Exh. C), 2025; Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In any zone in which single-family dwellings are permitted, notwithstanding limitations imposed by other provisions of this title, a single-family dwelling may be erected on any single lot of record.
A. A lot of record is defined by utilizing the following criteria:
1. A lot created via the subdivision process of Chapter 58.17 RCW;
2. A lot which has a conveyance of record prior to November 5, 1951;
3. Any lot which was a legal lot under the regulations or standards of King or Snohomish County prior to annexation or incorporation into the city of Bothell; and
4. A building site under Ordinance No. 156 of the city.
B. The proponent or applicant for any permit application involving a nonconforming lot shall be required to provide information and documentation demonstrating consistency with this section.
C. Variance of area width and yard setback requirements shall be obtained only through the variance process as outlined under Chapter 12.36 BMC. (Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Any use, building, other site improvement, or developed density which cannot be established as a legal nonconformity shall be deemed illegal and be subject to abatement by removal or conformance with this title or amendments thereto in accordance with procedures set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2443 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 1817 § 2, 2000; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application, and criteria for approval for conditional use permits. Conditional use permits are required for land uses which are appropriate in a zone but typically have certain characteristics such as traffic generation or building mass which warrant imposition of special conditions to ensure compatibility with permitted uses in the zone. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A conditional use permit is a Type III action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such permits as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
An application for a conditional use permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application shall contain:
A. Completed application form and attachments signed and dated by owner/agent.
B. Complete legal description of the subject property.
C. Site plan depicting proposed and existing improvements on the property. The site plan shall contain the following information:
1. Dimensions and shape of the lot, and street names;
2. Location and dimensions of existing and proposed building including setbacks;
3. Circulation. Adjacent street improvements, curb cut locations for ingress and egress, parking layout in accordance with Chapter 12.16 BMC;
4. Existing and proposed landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
5. Existing watercourses, critical areas, utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, structures, rockeries, and other manufactured or natural features restricting use of the subject property;
6. Preliminary grading plan depicting proposed and existing grades at five-foot contours if grading is proposed in conjunction with proposed use; and
7. Storm drainage, sidewalks, and exterior lighting.
D. An analysis detailing how the proposal is consistent with the criteria for approval as contained in BMC 12.28.040.
E. Ten copies of all plans. All oversized plans shall be folded to eight and one-half inches by 11 inches.
F. One paper reduction of each oversized plan to 11 by 17 inches.
G. Necessary information for review of environmental impacts, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment.
H. Application fee and environmental trust.
I. Applications found to contain material errors shall not be deemed complete until such material errors are corrected.
J. The community development director may waive specific submittal requirements determined to be unnecessary for review of the application. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A conditional use permit shall be granted by the city, only if the applicant demonstrates that:
A. The granting of the conditional use permit will not:
1. Adversely affect the established character of the surrounding vicinity. For the purposes of this section, character shall mean the distinctive features or attributes of buildings and site design on adjacent properties and in the vicinity and as articulated in the comprehensive plan, including but not limited to building facade, length, building modulation, building height, roof form, tree cover, types of flora, location of landscaping, size and location of signs, setbacks, amount and location of parking, fencing type, height and location, and the like;
2. Be detrimental to the public health, safety and general welfare; and
3. Be injurious to the property or improvements adjacent to, and in the vicinity of, the site upon which the proposed use is to be located.
B. The granting of the proposed conditional use permit is consistent and compatible with the goals and policies of the comprehensive plan, and any code, ordinance, regulation or standard in effect to implement the plan.
C. The proposed use is properly located in relation to other land uses, transportation and public facilities and services in the vicinity; and further, that the capacity of the transportation system and other public facilities and services will adequately serve the proposed use without placing an undue burden on such systems, facilities and services.
D. The intensity (i.e., the nature, types and hours of human activity) and character of the proposed use is compatible with the intensity and character of the uses of adjacent property and of property in the vicinity.
E. That the site is of sufficient size to accommodate the proposed use; and further that, in the opinion of the city, all yards, open spaces, landscaping, walls and fences, parking, loading, and other necessary features are properly provided to assure the proposed use will be compatible with adjacent uses and the character of the vicinity.
F. The proposed use will not introduce hazardous conditions at the site that cannot be mitigated so as to protect adjacent properties, the vicinity, and the public health, safety and welfare of the community from such hazards.
G. The conditions necessary to mitigate the impacts of the proposed conditional use are capable of reasonable monitoring and reasonable enforcement. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The city may impose any condition of approval on a conditional use permit needed to mitigate adverse impacts to the environment, adjacent properties or the community, consistent with the goals and policies of the comprehensive plan, and any code, ordinance, regulation or standard in effect to implement the plan. (Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A minor modification to an approved CUP is a Type I action and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and in accordance with the provisions of this section. Minor modifications to an approved CUP shall be defined as those which do not increase the intensity of the use and the resulting impacts to the surrounding area.
A. The community development director is authorized to allow minor modifications in accordance with subsection B of this section. The community development director shall allow only such minor modifications as are consistent with guidelines established in subsection B of this section.
B. For the purposes of this section, “minor modification” means a departure from the conditions of an approved CUP which is consistent with the following criteria:
1. It does not in any way change the use permitted by the approved CUP;
2. It maintains the design intent and quality of the original approval;
3. The number of dwelling units in residential developments and the square footage of nonresidential structures shall not involve more than a 10 percent increase of that established by the approved CUP;
4. The minor modification shall not relocate a building, parking area, street or other use or built feature in such a way that visual, light, noise, vibration or other impacts as experienced from surrounding properties and public rights-of-way are intensified, and shall not reduce any required yard, setback, buffer or open space below the area or dimensions established by code or conditions of CUP approval, whichever is more restrictive;
5. The height of buildings and other structures shall not increase;
6. Traffic volumes shall not increase more than 10 percent of that established by the approved CUP;
7. Modifications to internal circulation layout are acceptable; provided, that ingress and egress points to the subject property are not modified in such a way that external traffic patterns are affected or impacts increased;
8. Minor changes to plant species, variety, color, etc., may be made; provided, that the type of landscaping required pursuant to BMC 12.18.040 shall not be modified;
9. The adjustment does not add significant new environmental impacts or significantly increase environmental impacts disclosed in the original SEPA documents;
10. The community development director determines that the change will not increase any adverse impacts or undesirable effects of the project, or that the change in no way significantly alters the project. (Ord. 2252 § 8, 2018; Ord. 2046 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010).
A complete application of all required construction level permits shall have been submitted to the city for approval within five years of the date of conditional use permit approval; except that for conditional use permits approved through December 31, 2011, a complete application of all required construction level permits shall have been submitted to the city for approval within seven years of the date of conditional use permit approval. (Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002).
The purpose of this chapter is to provide for the modification of certain regulations when it can be demonstrated that such modification would result in a development which, except as expressly authorized by this chapter, would not increase the density and intensity of land use beyond that which would be allowed if no regulations were modified, would preserve or create features or facilities of benefit to the community such as but not limited to green development practices, open space or active recreational facilities, which features or facilities would not have been provided if no regulations were modified, would be compatible with surrounding development, and would conform to the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan. Throughout this title, “PUD” shall mean the same as “planned unit development.” (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A. Five types of planned unit developments are established. A PUD may comprise all or any combination of the below types:
1. Standard single-family PUDs, comprising detached dwelling units on individual lots; the necessary streets and other public and/or private rights-of-way to serve such dwelling units; and any appurtenant common open space, recreational facilities or other areas or facilities. A single-family PUD requires the approval of a subdivision consistent with the procedures set forth in the Bothell subdivision ordinance, codified in BMC Title 15.
2. Non-single-family PUDs, comprising attached dwelling units, detached dwelling units not on individual lots, retail, office, service or industrial buildings, or any combination thereof, the necessary streets and other public and/or private rights-of-way to serve such uses, and any appurtenant common open space, recreational facilities or other areas or facilities.
3. Green PUDs, comprising single-family and non-single-family developments incorporating site development and building design, construction and operating features and practices which, compared to standard development features and practices, lessen impacts to native plants and animals, reduce consumption of raw materials, lower greenhouse gas emissions, provide healthier living and working environments, and otherwise decrease human impacts on local and global ecosystems. Green PUDs which comprise detached single-family residences require approval of a subdivision consistent with the procedures set forth in the Bothell subdivision ordinance, codified in BMC Title 15. In order to be considered a green PUD, a proposed development must include design and features that achieve at least the minimum certification level identified below under one of the following programs or other certification program as approved by the community development director:
a. For site development:
(1) The United States Green Building Council (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Neighborhood Design at the Gold level or higher;
(2) The International Code Council (ICC) and National Home Builders Association (NHBA) National Green Building Standard (NGBS) at either the Green Subdivision Four Star or higher level or the Lot Design, Preparation and Development Gold level or higher;
(3) The Master Builders Association (MBA) Built Green, at the Three Star level or higher;
(4) The Pacific Rivers Council Salmon Safe, at the Salmon Safe Certification level.
b. For building design:
(1) The United States Green Building Council (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) at the Silver or higher level;
(2) The International Code Council (ICC) and National Home Builders Association (NHBA) National Green Building Standard (NGBS) at the Silver or higher level for building design; and
(3) The Master Builders Association (MBA) Built Green, at the Three Star level or higher.
4. Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea clustering PUDs, comprising clustered subdivisions within the Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea consistent with Chapter 12.52 BMC.
5. City-wide clustered subdivision PUDs, which may include detached or attached residential developments on individual lots where the development preserves open space. A clustered subdivision PUD requires the approval of a subdivision consistent with BMC Title 15.
B. Planned unit developments may be located within any zoning classification.
C. Uses permitted within the PUD shall be governed by the use regulations of the underlying zoning classification as provided for within Chapter 12.06 BMC or any subarea regulations governing permitted and conditional uses, including special overlay zoning classifications, except as expressly modified by this chapter. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In considering a proposed planned unit development project, the approval thereof may involve modifications in the site development regulations, requirements and standards of this title, Zoning, and BMC Title 17, Transportation, as identified within this chapter. In modifying such regulations, requirements and standards as they may apply to a planned unit development project, the limitations set forth in this section shall apply to all PUDs. In order to be granted any such modifications, the applicant shall demonstrate that the proposed development complies with the purpose of this chapter as stated in BMC 12.30.010. The applicant shall bear the burden of supporting any change in requirements. The city may increase any requirement necessary to make the project conform to the purposes of this chapter.
A. Front Yard Setbacks. The requirements for minimum front yard setbacks for the zone in which the planned unit development is located shall apply to all exterior boundary lines of the site.
B. Distance between Buildings. The requirements for minimum side and rear yard setbacks may be modified; provided, that minimum distances required by the International Building Code and Fire Code shall be met.
C. Building Height. Building height and any corresponding setback requirements related to building height shall be governed by the requirements of the underlying zoning classification as set forth in Chapter 12.14 BMC or any applicable subarea regulation.
D. Minimum density and minimum floor area ratios in designated zones and/or activity centers shall be governed by the requirements of the applicable zones or subarea regulations wherein the development is located and shall not be modified. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2353 § 10, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.210).
Standard single-family PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to those limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030; provided, however, that within the Fitzgerald/35th Avenue SE Subarea the clustering provisions of BMC 12.52.040 shall control regarding the minimum lot size, common open space areas, and the number of lots allowed:
A. The minimum lot size as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC may be reduced by up to 15 percent; provided, that an area(s), not including a critical area or its buffer or storm water conveyance or storage facility, equal to the combined reduction in lot area is set aside in a manner that creates a public benefit that would not exist if the minimum lot size were not modified. Set asides may include one or more of the following:
1. Common useable open space comprising landscaping and facilities such as but not limited to play areas, trails, gazebos, covered shelters, picnic tables and benches;
2. Areas containing significant trees as defined in Chapter 12.18 BMC;
3. Other noncritical areas, the preservation or creation of which promotes one or more goals and/or policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan;
B. The number of lots in a standard single-family PUD shall not exceed the number of lots which could be obtained if no regulations were modified;
C. Required side and rear yard setbacks may be reduced; provided, that minimum distances required by the International Building Code and Fire Code shall be met. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2215 § 3 (Exh. B3), 2016; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.220).
Non-single-family PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to those limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030:
A. When a non-single-family PUD proposes attached dwelling units and the subject property(s) contains different zoning classifications that have different dwelling unit per acre amounts, the total number of dwelling units allowed within the PUD may be determined by calculating the number of dwelling units allowed within each zoning classification portion of the PUD and adding the allowed dwelling units together creating a total number of allowed dwelling units, except as may be modified under BMC 12.30.070.
B. The number of units arrived at by the method identified above may be located anywhere within the planned unit development, subject to the PUD approval process set forth in this chapter. (Ord. 2282 § 7, 2019; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.230).
Green PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to those limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030, 12.30.040 and 12.30.050:
A. In single-family green PUDs, the minimum lot size as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC may be reduced by up to 30 percent; provided, that an area(s), not including a critical area or its buffer or a non-low-impact-development storm water conveyance or storage facility, equal to the combined reduction in lot area, is set aside for one or more of the following:
1. Common useable open space comprising landscaping and facilities such as but not limited to play areas, trails, gazebos, covered shelters, picnic tables and benches;
2. Permanently dedicated open space tracts containing intact, rehabilitated or restored forest areas as described within Chapter 11.02 BMC;
3. Special storm water conveyance or storage facilities consistent with low impact development practices and standards as promulgated within the Bothell Design and Construction Standards;
4. Other noncritical areas, the preservation or creation of which promotes one or more goals and/or policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan.
B. The number of lots in a single-family green PUD shall not exceed the number of lots which could be obtained if no regulations were modified.
C. The minimum lot circle diameter as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC may be reduced by up to 30 percent.
D. Within self-contained developments, the minimum front yard setback as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC for individual lots may be reduced up to 50 percent, except for garages and carports; this permissive modification shall not apply to the front yard setback from all exterior boundary lines of the site required under BMC 12.30.030(A).
E. Required side and rear yard setbacks may be reduced; provided, that minimum distances required by the International Building Code and Fire Code shall be met.
F. Recreation area requirements as set forth in Chapter 12.20 BMC may be varied as follows:
1. The minimum recreation area required in BMC 12.20.020 may be modified by the hearing body when trails and viewing platforms or facilities of a similar nature are provided within or adjacent to retained forest areas;
2. Single-purpose facilities may account for up to 80 percent of the required recreation area;
3. Location, layout and dimensions of required recreation areas in BMC 12.20.040 may be varied to accommodate the use of trails and other linear facilities located within forest retention areas.
G. The hearing body may grant modifications to the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications as adopted in BMC 17.02.010 as conditions of approval of a green PUD in accordance with the following:
1. Public street width standards may be reduced pursuant to the following:
a. Public streets classified by the city as public local access streets (ADT less than 500) may be constructed as two-lane, two-way, 20-foot-wide clear, drivable surface constructed of a standard paving material; provided, that on-street parking is prohibited on both sides of the street and announced with appropriate signage.
b. Should on-street parking on one side of the street be desired, a six-foot-wide parking area will be added to the 20-foot-wide drivable surface for a total width of 26 feet. The six-foot-wide parking area may be constructed of a pervious material as approved by the public works director.
c. Should on-street parking on both sides of the street be desired, a six-foot-wide parking area shall be added to both sides of the 20-foot-wide drivable surface for a total width of 32 feet. The six-foot-wide parking area may be constructed of a pervious material as approved by the public works director.
d. Local access streets (ADT less than 500) may be constructed as one-way looped road sections in accordance with recommendations from the public works director and the city fire marshal.
e. Guest parking must be provided when on-street parking is not constructed. One guest parking stall shall be provided for every four dwelling units. All guest parking will be clearly identified with signage and striping.
2. Private street and fire department access drives may be reduced to the following:
a. Local access private streets and access drives (ADT less than 500) may be constructed as 16-foot-wide clear, drivable surfaces constructed of standard pavement materials, with an additional three-foot pervious material shoulder capable of supporting the imposed weight of a fire apparatus on each side; provided, that on-street parking is prohibited on both sides of the street and announced with appropriate signage.
b. Guest parking must be provided when on-street parking is not constructed. One guest parking stall shall be provided for every four dwelling units. All guest parking will be clearly identified with signage and striping.
3. Roadway materials standards may be varied according to the following:
a. Pervious pavement may be allowed on road shoulders subject to specific standards established by the public works department to ensure serviceability and durability.
b. Pervious pavement on emergency vehicle turnouts and traveled ways may be allowed on a case-by-case basis by the public works director in consultation with the fire marshal based on specific plans and information regarding roadway serviceability and durability.
4. Cul-de-sac and turn-around dimensions may be varied to provide a hammerhead type of design to reduce impervious surface and may be constructed of pervious pavement pursuant to the LID Supplement to the Bothell Design and Construction Standards.
5. Pedestrian facility placement, design, and materials standards may be varied according to the following:
a. A sidewalk or trail may be allowed on one side of public or private streets or roads and driveways if the following criteria are met:
(1) The sidewalk is not designated as a primary pedestrian access route to schools;
(2) The sidewalk does not serve more than 100 dwelling units as the single point of pedestrian access between the residential unit and other elements of the pedestrian circulation system;
(3) Marked crosswalks are provided to allow pedestrians to safely cross the street to the pedestrian facility at safe locations.
b. Pedestrian facilities may utilize pervious pavement subject to specific standards to ensure serviceability and durability.
6. Parking lot standards may be varied to allow pervious pavement throughout the parking lot, provided drive aisles are capable of supporting the weight of fire apparatus. Pervious pavement shall be required on all portions of the parking lot other than the drive aisle when soil conditions warrant. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009. Formerly 12.30.240).
Clustered subdivision and attached residential PUDs shall be subject to the following limitations in modification of regulations in addition to the applicable limitations set forth in BMC 12.30.030, 12.30.040 and 12.30.050:
A. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the minimum lot area as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC within the R-L1, R-L2, and R-M1 zoning classifications may be reduced up to 50 percent.
B. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the minimum lot area as required in Chapter 12.14 BMC within the R-C zoning classification may be reduced up to 60 percent.
C. The number of lots in a clustered subdivision PUD shall be subject to the following lot yield methodology:
1. The net buildable area of the development site shall be determined pursuant to BMC 12.14.030(B)(3) wherein land area in dedicated public rights-of-way, surface storm water retention/detention/water quality facilities located within required tracts, critical areas, critical area buffers, or any other land dedicated to the city shall be deducted from the gross site area;
2. To determine the number of allowed lots upon the subject property, the net buildable area shall be divided by the underlying zoning classification’s minimum lot area thereby deriving the number of allowed lots using whole numbers only. Rounding up is not permitted;
3. Portions of the net buildable area placed into a dedicated open space tract pursuant to subsection G of this section shall be credited toward the allowed lot yield calculation; and
4. An increase in the number of allowed lots for clustered subdivisions PUDs shall be permitted consistent with subsection (H) of this section.
D. For attached residential PUDs, the number of dwelling units within the R-M2, R-M3, and R-M4 zones shall be subject to BMC 12.14.030(B)(3) and the following:
1. Portions of the net buildable area placed into a dedicated open space tract pursuant to subsection G of this section shall be credited toward the allowed unit yield calculation; and
2. An increase in the number of allowed dwelling units for attached residential PUDs shall be permitted consistent with subsection (G)(1)(d) of this section.
E. Side and Rear Yard Setbacks. Side and rear yard setbacks may be modified consistent with BMC 12.30.030(B).
F. Hard Surface Cover. The maximum hard surface cover for each residential lot within a clustered subdivision PUD may be increased consistent with the schedule below; provided, however, that the maximum amount of hard surface coverage shall be no greater than that established for the underlying zoning classification as applied to the net buildable area of the development site:
1. R-C Zone. No increase in hard surface coverage is allowed;
2. R-L1 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 55 percent up to a maximum of 65 percent;
3. R-L2. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 60 percent up to a maximum of 65 percent;
4. R-M1 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 70 percent up to a maximum of 75 percent; and
5. R-M2 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 75 percent up to a maximum of 80 percent; and
6. R-M3 Zone. Hard surface coverage placed within individual lots may increase from 80 percent up to a maximum of 85 percent.
G. Open Space Preservation. Clustered subdivision and attached residential PUDs shall reserve a portion of the site as dedicated, permanent open space not available for future development consistent with the following criteria:
1. Amount and Minimum Dimension of Land to Be Preserved.
a. All clustered subdivision PUDs shall provide for a minimum of 10 percent of the net buildable area of the site to be placed within a dedicated tract or tracts containing intact forest, rehabilitated or restored forest, a forest equivalent surface water facility, as defined herein, a tree preservation, or another type of passive open space tract to be preserved in perpetuity consistent with the provisions of subsection (G)(3) of this section;
b. Land preserved under this section shall meet the following dimensional standards:
(1) All open space tracts for clustered subdivision PUDs shall provide an average horizontal dimension equal to 50 percent of the underlying zoning minimum lot circle diameter with a minimum horizontal dimension of 20 feet;
(2) All open space tracts for clustered subdivision PUDs shall cover an area that is at least 50 percent of the minimum lot area of the underlying zoning classification;
(3) All open space tracts for attached residential PUDs shall provide an average horizontal dimension of at least 25 feet with a minimum dimension of 15 feet; and
(4) All open space tracts for attached residential PUDs shall cover an area that is at least equal to the underlying zoning classification minimum land area per dwelling unit;
c. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the city may approve an increase in the number of lots beyond the number established by the allowed lot yield method of subsection C of this section provided additional land is placed within a dedicated tract containing intact forest, rehabilitated or restored forest, forest equivalent surface water facility as defined herein, a tree preservation, or other type of passive open space, which tract is to be preserved in perpetuity consistent with the provisions of subsections (G)(2) and (G)(3) of this section, consistent with the following schedule:
(1) Preserving at least 15 percent of the net buildable area as open space tract consistent with this section, an increase of 10 percent of the calculated lot yield; or
(2) Preserving at least 20 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 15 percent of the calculated lot yield; or
(3) Preserving at least 25 percent of the net buildable area with an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 20 percent of the calculated lot yield; or
(4) Preserving at least 30 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 25 percent of the calculated lot yield;
d. For attached residential PUDs, the city may approve an increase in the number of dwelling units beyond the number established by BMC 12.14.030(B)(3) provided additional land, not including recreation area as required under Chapter 12.20 BMC, is placed within a dedicated tract consistent with subsections (G)(2) and (G)(3) of this section, and the following schedule:
(1) Preserving at least 20 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 10 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield; or
(2) Preserving at least 25 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 15 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield; or
(3) Preserving at least 30 percent of the net buildable area with an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 20 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield; or
(4) Preserving at least 40 percent of the net buildable area within an open space tract consistent with this chapter, an increase of 25 percent of the calculated dwelling unit yield.
2. Type of Land to Be Preserved as Open Space. The type of open space shall be based upon the following hierarchical preferences. Applicants shall demonstrate that all reasonable efforts have been made to design the development in a manner that preserves the types of lands listed herein consistent with these hierarchical priorities:
a. Intact forest areas as defined within Chapter 11.02 BMC;
b. Rehabilitated or restored forest areas as defined within Chapter 11.02 BMC;
c. Lands containing existing trees preserved pursuant to Chapter 12.18 BMC;
d. Lands adjacent to critical area buffers which are also enhanced pursuant to Chapter 14.04 BMC;
e. Lands used for forest equivalent surface water facilities, provided such facilities shall be limited to bio-infiltration or surface water dispersion into forest lands;
f. Lands used for passive recreational open space purposes may contain trails, picnic tables, benches, and open lawn areas; provided, that existing significant trees shall not be removed to create open lawn areas and/or other passive recreational uses. Up to 20 percent of the passive recreational open space area may be used for active recreation uses such as playgrounds, tot lots, sports courts, playfields, shelters, gazebos, and other active recreation open space uses.
All passive and active recreational open space areas shall be accessible to residents of the development via dedicated access tracts or easements that are at least 10 feet in width; and
g. Lands used for passive open space purposes containing trails, picnic tables, benches, and other passive recreational uses, provided such areas are accessible to residents of the development via access tracts or easements that are at least 10 feet in width.
3. All lands preserved as open space shall be placed into a separate and permanent open space tract as follows:
a. All open space tracts shall be recorded on all documents of title of record for all affected lots.
b. Open space tracts shall be designated on the face of the plat or recorded drawing in a form as approved by the city attorney and shall be placed within an individual tract. The designation shall include the following restrictions:
(1) The stated purpose of the open space tract shall be clearly indicated. For example, if the open space tract is adjacent to a critical area, the tract shall stipulate the purpose is to prevent harm to the environment, including, but not limited to, controlling surface water runoff and erosion, buffering, protecting plants, fish, and animal habitat, etc. If the purpose is to preserve existing mature trees and other plant materials, the tract shall stipulate that trees may not be removed except as needed to protect the health, safety and welfare of adjacent residential structures as reviewed and authorized by the city of Bothell; and
(2) The right of the city to enforce the terms of the restriction.
c. The city may require that the open space tract be held for its stated purpose in an undivided interest by each owner of a building lot within the development with the ownership interest passing with the ownership of the lot, or held by an incorporated homeowners’ association or other legal entity (such as a land trust or authorized entity, which ensures the ownership, maintenance, and protection of the tract).
d. Statements shall be included which provide that the open space tract shall not be subject to future development or alteration except for maintenance of the tract for its intended purpose or for other common activities associated with the purpose of the tract.
H. Clustered subdivision PUDs within the R-C, R-L1, R-L2, R-M1, and R-M2 zones may allow attached residential developments such as townhouses or other types of attached residential development, provided the dwelling unit is contained within its own individual lot, subject to the following additional requirements:
1. At least 40 percent of the net buildable area is preserved within a permanent open space tract as described in subsections (G)(2) and (G)(3) of this section;
2. All buildings containing three or more dwelling units shall be set back from the perimeter of the development as described within BMC 12.30.030(A) a minimum of 30 feet and shall install a Type III landscape buffer. Should the development contain both attached and detached residential buildings, the portion of the site that contains detached residential buildings may apply the 20-foot perimeter setback dimension of BMC 12.30.030(A);
3. Attached residential buildings shall comply with the requirements of BMC 12.14.200, Exterior building design – Multiple-family residential; and
4. Increases in the lot yield for attached residential dwelling units as established under subsection C of this section shall be limited to a maximum of a 20 percent increase in lot or dwelling unit yield.
I. Clustered subdivision and attached residential PUDs are eligible for modifications to the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and Specifications as adopted in BMC 17.02.010 in accordance with the same modifications available for a green PUD as described within BMC 12.30.060(G). (Ord. 2457 § 4 (Exh. D), 2025; Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2282 § 8, 2019; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017).
Each PUD shall require preliminary and final approval. Both preliminary and final PUD approvals are Type II actions and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations.
The preliminary development plan and the final development plan may be combined and together processed through review as a final development plan. In addition, the applicant may file a concurrent subdivision or short subdivision application, in accordance with the procedures as set forth in BMC Title 15, Subdivisions, which application(s) shall be processed concurrently with the PUD application(s). (Ord. 2348 § 7, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.070).
A. Development of a PUD project may be phased, in which case each complete phase may be processed separately through both preliminary development plan review and final development plan review. A map showing all property owned or controlled by the developer which is contiguous to the development site or which is within the area determined by the community development director to be relevant for comprehensive planning and environmental assessment purposes, together with a conceptual plan of said properties’ eventual development through all potential phases, shall be submitted with the application for the first phase. The developer is not responsible for providing a conceptual plan for contiguous or nearby property which is not owned or controlled by the developer. The conceptual plan shall conform to the purposes of this chapter and shall be used by the city to review all phases of the development. All phases of the development shall conform to the conceptual plan, all conditions of approval, and applicable regulations.
B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this section, all phased PUD projects shall comply with the provisions of this chapter and any subarea regulation. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.080).
A. The applicant shall file with the community development department a preliminary development plan, including the following:
1. A legal description of the property proposed to be developed;
2. A map of the subject property and surrounding area determined by the community development director to be relevant for comprehensive planning, environmental assessment or zoning review purposes, which map shall depict comprehensive plan designations, zoning classifications and existing land uses, including streets;
3. A proposed site plan for the subject property depicting the following:
a. Topography at two-foot contours for slopes 15 percent or less and five-foot contours for slopes over 15 percent;
b. Individual trees over eight inches in trunk diameter measured four feet above the base of the trunk in areas to be developed or otherwise disturbed;
c. Designated placement, location, and principal dimensions of lots, buildings, streets, parking areas, recreation areas and other open space, landscaping areas and utilities;
d. If the developer owns or otherwise controls property adjacent to the proposed development, a conceptual plan for such property demonstrating that it can be developed in a compatible manner with the proposed development;
4. A conceptual landscape plan showing existing and proposed landscaping, in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
5. Drawing and/or text showing scale, bulk and architectural character of proposed structures;
6. For standard single-family PUDs, a conceptual drawing depicting the number and location of lots which would be allowed if no regulations were modified;
7. For green PUDs, a narrative and illustrations describing and depicting the specific green or sustainable features or practices proposed and how these features or practices achieve the purposes as set forth in BMC 12.30.020(A)(3), 12.30.110(F), and the following submittal items:
a. Identification of which green program the applicant is proposing to implement;
b. Documentation showing the applicant is either currently enrolled or is a member of the identified green program or that members of the development team are enrolled or are members of the identified green program;
c. The name of the green program verifier, or verification team; and
d. A completed checklist from the selected green program wherein the applicant identifies the features and techniques that will be used to achieve the minimum certification level;
8. For clustered subdivision PUDs, a conceptual drawing and narrative describing the type, location, size, and features of the proposed open space area(s);
9. Special features including but not limited to critical areas and sites or structures of historic significance;
10. A text describing conditions or features which cannot be adequately displayed on maps or drawings;
11. A narrative stating how the proposed development complies with the goals and policies of the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, including level of service standards and guidelines, and with the development regulations contained in this and other titles;
12. Draft conditions, covenants and restrictions and other documents relating to operation and maintenance of the development, including all of its open areas and recreational facilities;
13. Other information required by the community development director, or by any other section of the Bothell Municipal Code. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.090).
Preliminary PUD approval shall be granted by the city only if the applicant demonstrates that:
A. The proposed project shall not be detrimental to present and potential surrounding land use.
B. Land surrounding the proposed development can be planned in coordination with the proposed development and can be developed so as to be mutually compatible.
C. Streets and sidewalks, existing and proposed, are suitable and adequate to carry anticipated vehicular and pedestrian traffic within the proposed project and in the vicinity of the proposed project, in light of the transportation provisions and concurrency standards of BMC Title 17 and the comprehensive plan.
D. Services including potable water, sanitary sewer and storm drainage are available or can be provided by the development prior to occupancy so as to comply with the Bothell Design and Construction Standards and BMC Title 18, Utilities Infrastructure, and guidelines contained in the comprehensive plan.
E. Each phase of the proposed development, as it is planned to be completed, contains the required parking spaces, recreation spaces, landscape and utility areas necessary for creating and sustaining a desirable and stable environment.
F. In the case of green PUDs, the proposed site development and building designs include features, improvements and facilities that would achieve at least the minimum certification specified under BMC 12.30.020 under the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Standard, National Green Building Standard, the Built Green Standard, the Salmon Safe Standard, or other certification program as approved by the community development director.
G. The project conforms with the purposes and standards prescribed in this chapter.
H. The project conforms to the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan, and any applicable subarea plan that has been adopted by the city.
I. If a subdivision application is being processed concurrently, conformance with the requirements of BMC Title 15. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.100).
A. A proposed minor change to an approved preliminary PUD is a Type I action and shall be incorporated into the application for final PUD approval, and any notification regarding such final PUD approval shall describe the proposed minor change(s). A “minor change” means any departure from the conditions of preliminary approval which is not a “major change” and includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Revisions to number of dwelling units in a structure;
2. Revisions to number of nonresidential structures;
3. Revisions to heights of structures;
4. Revisions to location of internal roads;
5. Revisions similar in nature to those above as determined by the community development director.
B. A proposed major change to an approved preliminary PUD shall require reapplication for preliminary PUD approval which is a Type II action, as set forth in BMC 12.30.080 and this section, and any notification regarding such preliminary PUD approval shall describe the proposed major change or changes. A major change is any departure from the conditions of preliminary PUD approval which would result in any of the following:
1. Revisions to the approved design concept;
2. Revisions to the approved use(s);
3. An increase or decrease in the number of residential dwelling units;
4. An increase or decrease in square footage of nonresidential structures;
5. A decrease in the amount of landscaping and site perimeter buffering;
6. A decrease in the amount or hierarchical preference of any proposed open space pursuant to BMC 12.30.070; and
7. An increase in traffic volumes or change in circulation patterns which impacts surrounding development. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2348 § 30, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.110).
For good cause shown, the city council, in its discretion, may grant an extension of time of one year for filing the final PUD application, and may grant additional one-year extensions; provided, however, the city shall have the right to re-examine and update any conditions made to mitigate development impact. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.120).
A. In the event the final PUD application is not filed within 12 months following approval of a preliminary PUD, except as provided in BMC 12.30.130 or as noted in subsection B of this section, the approval of the preliminary PUD shall lapse and the approval shall be deemed null and void and without force or effect; except that for preliminary PUDs approved through December 31, 2011, the final PUD shall be filed within 36 months following approval of a preliminary PUD or shall lapse and be deemed null and void and without force or effect.
B. When it is determined as part of the preliminary PUD approval that the final PUD is to be phased, the final PUD for the first phase shall be submitted within 12 months of preliminary approval; except that the final PUD for the first phase of a PUD receiving preliminary approval through December 31, 2011, shall be submitted within 36 months of preliminary approval. The final development plan for each subsequent phase shall be submitted within the schedule established at the time of preliminary PUD approval. In the case of a PUD which includes a subdivision, the final PUD shall be submitted within five years of receiving preliminary approval; except that for combined preliminary PUDs and subdivisions approved through December 31, 2011, the final PUD shall be submitted within seven years of receiving preliminary approval.
C. The time period for filing of final PUDs shall not include periods of time during which progress on the final PUD was reasonably halted or delayed due to the filing and pendency of legal actions challenging an approval granted by the city pursuant to this chapter; provided, that in all cases when more than two years have elapsed subsequent to the date of approval of a preliminary PUD, whether due to the pendency of litigation, city-approved extensions of time for filing or otherwise, the permittee shall be required to comply with all current building, construction, subdivision and other applicable standards of the city prior to being granted approval of the final PUD. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.130).
Within 12 months following the approval of the preliminary PUD, the applicant shall file with the community development director a final PUD conforming to the approved preliminary PUD, including any proposed minor changes pursuant to BMC 12.30.120. Should the approved preliminary PUD include a preliminary subdivision, the applicant shall file a final development plan within the time period provided under Chapter 58.17 RCW. Such a final subdivision shall not be approved unless and until the associated final PUD is approved. In addition to the information required under BMC 12.30.100 for the preliminary PUD, the final PUD shall include the following:
A. A survey of the property, showing for all areas to be developed or disturbed existing features, including topography at two-foot contours for slopes 15 percent or less and five-foot contours for slopes over 15 percent, buildings, structures, trees over eight inches in trunk diameter measured four feet above the base of the trunk, streets, utility easements, rights-of-way, and existing land uses;
B. Elevation and perspective drawings of project structures and improvements;
C. Proposed final conditions, covenants and restrictions (CC&Rs) and other documents relating to operation and maintenance of the development, including all of its open areas and recreational facilities and any open space pursuant to BMC 12.30.070, which CC&Rs and other documents shall be recorded upon final PUD approval;
D. Proposed final agreements which may have been required as conditions of preliminary PUD approval;
E. A development schedule, if development may extend over more than a two-year period;
F. The following plans and diagrams:
1. An off-street parking plan;
2. A circulation diagram indicating the proposed movement of vehicles and pedestrians within the planned unit development, and to and from existing and programmed thoroughfares; any special engineering features and traffic regulating devices needed to facilitate or ensure the safety of this circulation pattern must be shown;
3. Landscaping and tree planting plan, including site grading;
4. A topographic map or model of the site and surrounding vicinity;
5. For green PUDs, a site plan and/or building elevations or other drawings indicating the location of features which promote sustainability and which qualify for credit under the certification program utilized by the applicant; and
6. For clustered subdivision PUDs, a description of the type of open space being provided and the proposed management or maintenance of the open space. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.140).
Final PUD approval shall be granted by the city only if the applicant demonstrates that the final PUD substantially conforms to the approved preliminary PUD, including minor changes pursuant to BMC 12.30.120. For the purposes of this section, “substantially conforms” means that, as compared to the preliminary PUD, the final PUD contains no revisions in density, uses, design or development standards or in the site plan, other than the minor changes pursuant to BMC 12.30.120. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.150).
The approved final development plan shall have the effect of a binding site plan under RCW 58.17.040(5), so that a lease of land not involving a residential structure shall be exempt from the subdivision ordinance if the lease conforms to the final development plan. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.160).
The conditions of approval of an adopted final PUD control over any conflicting regulations. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.170).
The approval of a subdivision shall be required of all projects which involve or contemplate the subdivision of land and the procedures set forth in the Bothell subdivision ordinance, codified in BMC Title 15, shall be followed concurrently herewith. The approved final development plan shall be a binding site plan under RCW 58.17.040(5), so that a lease of land not involving a residential structure shall be exempt from the subdivision ordinance if the lease conforms to the final development plan. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.180).
A final PUD runs with the land and notice on title is required. All lots or other divisions of a subdivided planned unit development shall remain subject to compliance with the final development plan regardless of the fact of subdivision in compliance with BMC Title 15, or subsequent conveyance of such individual lots or divisions. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013. Formerly 12.30.190).
Minor modifications to approved final PUDs are Type I actions and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and in accordance with the provisions of this section.
A. The community development director is authorized to allow minor modifications in accordance with subsection B of this section. The community development director shall allow only such modifications as are consistent with guidelines established in subsection B of this section, and in no case shall a minor modification be allowed if it will increase the total amount of floor space authorized in the approved final PUD, or the number of dwelling units or density, or decrease the amount of parking or loading facilities or permit buildings to locate substantially closer to any boundary line or change substantially any point of ingress or egress to the site.
B. For the purposes of this section, “minor modifications” means any departure from the conditions of final PUD approval which complies with the following criteria:
1. The modification maintains the design intent and quality of the original approval;
2. The amount of landscaping, buffering and open space shall not be reduced;
3. The number of dwelling units in residential developments and the square footage of nonresidential structures shall not change;
4. The modification shall not relocate a building, street or other use more than 20 feet in any direction and shall not reduce any required yard and/or setback;
5. The height of buildings and other structures shall not increase;
6. Views from both structures on site and off site shall not be substantially reduced;
7. Traffic volumes shall not increase and circulation patterns shall not change;
8. Changes in colors, plant material and parking lot configurations are minor;
9. For green PUDs, the modification shall not reduce the number of credits for which the proposed development qualified at final PUD approval under the certification program utilized by the applicant; provided, however, that one or more green features or practices may be reduced or eliminated if the resulting reduction in the number of credits is offset by the increase or addition of other green features or practices;
10. For clustered subdivision PUDs, the modification shall not reduce the amount of open space lands, nor the identified type of open space and any facilities, consistent with BMC 12.30.070, permitted to be included within the open space tract;
11. The modification does not add significant new environmental impacts or significantly increase environmental impacts disclosed in the original SEPA documents;
12. The community development director determines that the modification will not increase any adverse impacts or undesirable effects of the project, or that the modification in no way significantly alters the project. (Ord. 2445 § 9 (Exh. I), 2024; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2076 § 2 (Exh. B), 2011; Ord. 2046 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1871 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.200).
For the purposes of this section, “major modifications” means any proposed modifications to an approved final PUD that do not comply with the criteria contained in BMC 12.30.210(B). Major modifications to approved final PUDs are Type II actions and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and in accordance with the provisions of this section.
A. Requirements for a Complete Application for Major Modification to an Approved Final PUD. These requirements are in addition to the minimum application requirements in BMC 11.06.002. Application contents:
1. Signatures of those persons or parties having an ownership interest in those lots, tracts, parcels, sites or divisions in the subject final PUD that are proposed to be altered;
2. A copy of any restrictive covenants applicable to the PUD. If the PUD is subject to restrictive covenants which were filed at the time of the approval of the final PUD, and the application for alteration would result in the violation of a covenant, the application shall contain an agreement signed by all parties subject to the covenants providing that the parties agree to terminate or alter the relevant covenants to accomplish the purpose of the modification of the PUD or portion thereof;
3. A copy of the approved final PUD sought to be modified, together with all PUD modifications recorded since the date of the original approval;
4. Plans and diagrams clearly showing the approved final PUD, as well as any proposed modifications to the approved final PUD;
5. Any other information required by the community development director for the purposes of ascertaining ownership and the existence of easements or covenants affecting the subject property.
B. Criteria for Approval of a Major Modification to an Approved Final PUD. A major modification to an approved final PUD shall be granted by the city only if the applicant demonstrates that the proposed modifications are consistent with the criteria for approval for preliminary PUDs, as listed in BMC 12.30.110. (Ord. 2348 § 31, 2021; Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2076 § 2 (Exh. B), 2011. Formerly 12.30.210).
A. The city shall issue building permits for buildings and structures which conform with the approved final PUD and with all other applicable city ordinances and regulations. The city shall issue a certificate of occupancy for completed buildings or structures which conform to the requirements of the approved final PUD and all other applicable city ordinances and regulations. The construction and development of all the open spaces and public and recreational facilities and required common features of any green PUD of each project phase must be completed or bonded before any certificate of occupancy will be issued.
B. In PUD projects receiving final approval, where units will have common walls, the city may issue building permits for construction of those units prior to approval of final lot lines. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.220).
For good cause shown, the hearing body, in its discretion, may grant one extension of time for commencement or continuation of construction subsequent to approval of the final PUD. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.230).
A. If the construction has not been started within five years from the date of approval of a final PUD with an associated subdivision, or two years from the date of approval of any other final PUD, or if construction has been commenced but the work has been abandoned for a period of one year or more, and if no extension of time has been granted as provided in BMC 12.30.240, the authorization granted for the planned unit development project shall terminate and all permits and approvals issued pursuant to such authorization shall expire and be null and void; except that for final PUDs approved through December 31, 2011, if construction has not been started within seven years from the date of approval of a final PUD with an associated subdivision, or four years from the date of approval of any other final PUD, or if construction has been commenced but the work has been abandoned for a period of three years or more, and if no extension of time has been granted as provided in BMC 12.30.240, the authorization granted for the PUD project shall terminate as set forth herein.
B. The time period of commencing or continuing construction shall not include periods of time during which commencement of construction or continuation of construction was reasonably halted or reasonably delayed due to the filing of a pendency of legal action challenging an approval granted by the city pursuant to this chapter; however, in all cases, when more than five years have elapsed subsequent to the date of approval of a final PUD with associated subdivision, or more than two years have elapsed subsequent to the date of approval of any other final PUD, whether due to pendency of litigation, city-approved extensions of time for development, or otherwise, the permittee shall be required to comply with all current building, construction, subdivision and other applicable standards of the city; except that for final PUDs approved through December 31, 2011, the time limits established in subsection A of this section shall apply; provided, that a change in zoning classification enacted subsequent to approval of the final development plan shall not affect the project. (Ord. 2221 § 2 (Exh. B), 2017; Ord. 2117 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 2029 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 2028 § 1 (Exh. B), 2009; Ord. 1815 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996. Formerly 12.30.240).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish a process for site plan review of certain types and sizes of development, specifically:
A. To review development proposals for general compliance with the applicable requirements of this code.
B. To ensure that development is coordinated with other known or planned development and public improvements adjacent to the subject property.
C. To ensure that the basic site design elements of this code are considered and resolved prior to submittal of detailed engineering and construction applications.
D. To encourage developments that embody good site design principles that will result in a high quality of life for future residents or users of the development. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The requirements of this chapter shall apply to all proposed developments meeting the following thresholds:
A. Development proposals containing any structure greater than 4,000 square feet in area, and/or constructing more than 20 parking spaces;
B. Residential structures containing five or more dwelling units;
C. Development proposals of 10 or more detached residential structures that do not include a subdivision;
D. Additions or expansions to existing building(s) comprising at least 4,000 square feet;
E. Exceptions. The following developments do not have to apply for a separate site plan review but are required to submit a site plan with their respective permit applications:
1. Detached single-family residential structures in accordance with Chapter 20.02 BMC;
2. Agricultural structures below 10,000 square feet;
3. Conditional use permits in accordance with Chapter 12.28 BMC;
4. Variances in accordance with Chapter 12.36 BMC;
5. Planned unit developments, or PUDs, in accordance with Chapter 12.30 BMC;
6. Preliminary subdivisions in accordance with Chapter 15.08 BMC;
7. Preliminary short subdivisions in accordance with Chapter 15.06 BMC;
8. Shoreline substantial development permits, shoreline conditional use permits, or shoreline variances in accordance with Chapter 13.17 BMC. (Ord. 2370 § 4, 2021; Ord. 2348 § 8, 2021; Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
A site plan review is a Type II action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such permits as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Applications for project permits shall be submitted to the city upon forms provided by the director. Site plan review applications shall include the following:
A. The minimum application requirements within BMC 11.06.002;
B. The application materials, number of copies, and any electronic format shall be as directed by the city;
C. The appropriate fee as specified within the city’s fee resolution as adopted by the city council;
D. Notes and determinations from the pre-application conference;
E. Site plan review application contents:
1. A map or maps using a scale of 100 feet to one inch or larger, showing:
a. Boundary lines, including bearing and distance;
b. Tracts and easements, including location, width and purpose;
c. Topographical and other data depicting:
(1) Scale, north arrow and date;
(2) Existing or proposed lot lines, dimensions, and lot and block numbers;
(3) Streets on and adjacent to the parcel(s), including name and right-of-way width and location; type, width and elevation of surfacing; walks, curbs, gutters, culverts, and other pertinent information;
(4) Ground elevations on the parcel(s), based on the city of Bothell datum plane; show contours with an interval of not more than five feet if ground slope is regular and such information as is needed for planning purposes;
(5) Conditions on adjacent land within 300 feet of the subject parcel(s), including approximate direction and gradient of ground slope, embankments, retaining walls; location of buildings, power lines and towers, existing trees, and land uses;
d. Utilities on and adjacent to the parcel(s), including location, size and elevation of sanitary, storm, water, gas lines, fire hydrants, electric and telephone poles, and street lights;
e. The location and description of any critical areas and buffers;
f. The location, species and driplines of all existing trees eight inches or more in diameter as measured four feet above grade;
g. The location of all existing and proposed structures;
h. Other significant site features on the subject property;
i. Zoning, on and adjacent to the parcel(s);
j. Proposed public improvements, including future construction improvements planned by other public authorities on or near the parcel(s);
k. Lands, if any, to be reserved or dedicated for parks, playgrounds, open space or other recreational uses;
l. Minimum building setback lines pursuant to the zoning code;
m. Site data, including total site area, lot dimensions and area, and a depiction and quantification of the net buildable area of the subject property;
n. Conceptual cross-sections of the proposed finish grades of the site, and proposed streets and sidewalks;
o. Conceptual sanitary sewer and water systems plan(s) indicating points of connection, grades and sizes of facilities; and
p. Conceptual surface water facility design, location, and size;
2. Conceptual building cross-sections depicting the building height, scale, number of stories, and relationship of the building to the proposed finish grade;
3. Title and certificates, including legal descriptions, purpose and ownership of all recorded tracts and easements, and any private conditions, covenants or restrictions applicable to the subject property;
4. Information on soil types and their feasibility, for low impact development (LID) storm water control purposes, in accordance with the city of Bothell design and construction standards;
5. Critical area reports regarding critical areas and buffers, if any, on and/or adjacent to the subject parcel(s) in accordance with Chapter 14.04 BMC; and
6. A traffic impact analysis consistent with the minimum standards of BMC 17.04.010 and a conceptual analysis of potential traffic impact mitigation options consistent with Chapter 17.04 BMC;
F. SEPA Review. A site plan review shall include environmental review in accordance with Chapter 14.02 BMC. The following additional items shall be submitted:
1. A completed SEPA environmental checklist;
2. Copies of all studies or analyses identified within the SEPA environmental checklist and any additional information as required by the responsible official in accordance with Chapter 14.02 BMC;
3. Conceptual building elevations and proposed building materials of all facades visible from a public right-of-way. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The following site elements shall be evaluated for consistency with this code:
A. Building location and height;
B. Required setbacks;
C. Critical areas and buffers;
D. Ingress and egress, internal circulation, and pedestrian and bicycle circulation;
E. Parking stall numbers, parking lot configuration and emergency vehicle circulation within parking areas;
F. Public and private open space provisions;
G. Landscaping;
H. Tree retention;
I. Mail delivery and pick-up, garbage and recycling pick-up;
J. Surface water facilities;
K. Transportation improvements and mitigation;
L. Proposed dedications to the city, if any;
M. Landmark preservation;
N. Environmental review, to include:
1. Other environmental checklist elements;
2. Building facade design and proposed building materials; and
O. Whether the public interest will be served by the development. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Upon receipt of a complete site plan review application, the director shall forward the site plan review application to other applicable city departments for their review and comment in accordance with this code. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The community development director shall approve a site plan review application only upon determining that the site plan application is generally consistent with this code. For the purposes of this chapter, “generally consistent” means the application demonstrates general compliance, or, with some modifications, can be brought into general compliance with this code. Approval of the site plan review application does not guarantee approval of subsequent permit applications which must also fully comply with all applicable regulations and standards. The site plan application shall be reviewed for consistency with:
A. Critical Areas. The site plan demonstrates consistency with the critical areas regulations within Chapter 14.04 BMC;
B. Parking. The site plan must demonstrate consistency with the parking requirements of Chapter 12.16 BMC and the Bothell Standards;
C. Building Height. The building(s) are consistent with minimum and maximum building stories or heights pursuant to Chapter 12.14 BMC and any applicable subarea regulations;
D. Building Location. The building placement, orientation, setbacks and other locational requirements are consistent with Chapter 12.14 BMC and any applicable subarea regulations;
E. Hard Surface and Building Coverage. The site plan design complies with the maximum hard surface and building coverage requirements of Chapter 12.14 BMC;
F. Tree Preservation Retention. The site plan preserves existing trees and other vegetation consistent with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
G. Landscaping. The conceptual landscaping is consistent with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
H. Surface Water. The conceptual surface water facilities are consistent with the Bothell Standards;
I. Transportation Improvements. The conceptual frontage and street improvements and preliminary traffic mitigation is consistent with BMC Title 17 and the Bothell Standards;
J. Proposed Dedications of Land. Do the proposed dedications of land, if any, serve the public interest;
K. Landmark Preservation. The site plan addresses the historic landmarks, if any, located on the site in accordance with BMC Title 22; and
L. If requested by the applicant, State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA) review. The site plan design does not represent potentially significant adverse environmental impacts, or, if potentially significant environmental impacts are anticipated, those impacts can be mitigated as promulgated under Chapter 14.02 BMC. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Upon determining that the proposed site plan is consistent with the review criteria of BMC 12.32.070, the director shall issue a Type II notice of decision consistent with BMC 11.12.002(C) which shall serve as the site plan review approval permit. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Appeals of any decision regarding a proposed site plan review shall follow the Type II permit application appeal procedures of Chapter 11.04 BMC. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
An applicant may request modifications to an approved site plan as a Type I action as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, and this chapter. Modifications to an approved site plan are those which do not exceed the thresholds of BMC 12.32.020, nor represent potentially significant adverse environmental impacts. Should either of those thresholds be met, the applicant shall be required to apply for a new site plan approval.
A. The community development director shall only allow modifications that are consistent with subsection B of this section.
B. Modifications to the site plan approval shall only be granted upon a finding by the director that the following criteria are met:
1. All land uses continue to be a permitted use under the zoning classification;
2. The design intent and quality of the original approval is retained;
3. The number of dwelling units in residential developments and the square footage of nonresidential structures shall not involve more than a 10 percent change of that established by the approved site plan;
4. Buildings, parking areas, streets or other uses or built features are within the same general location as shown on the approved site plan;
5. Required yard, setback, buffers or open space areas or dimensions, as established by the approved site plan, are not reduced;
6. The height of buildings and other structures remains consistent with this code;
7. Traffic volumes shall not increase more than 10 percent of that established by the approved site plan;
8. Modifications to internal circulation layout are consistent with the Bothell Standards; provided, that ingress and egress points to the subject property are not relocated and external traffic patterns are not affected;
9. Tree retention and landscaping remains consistent with Chapter 12.18 BMC. (Ord. 2444 § 2 (Exh. B), 2024; Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
An approved site plan shall be effective for a period of two years from the date of approval to the commencement of construction or submittal of a development application. Should construction not commence within two years of approval, the director may, for good cause shown, grant a one-time extension of up to one year. No additional extensions shall be allowed. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
Applicants are strongly encouraged to complete site plan review prior to submittal of an application for any construction-level development permits such as, but not limited to: building, right-of-way, utility, and grading permits. No construction-level development permits shall be issued prior to completion of site plan review, except in the circumstances described in BMC 12.32.020(E) for which a separate site plan review is not required. Applicants submitting applications for any construction-level development permits before completing site plan review do so at their own risk. (Ord. 2370 § 3, 2021; Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The community development director is authorized to adopt such administrative rules and regulations as necessary and appropriate to implement this chapter and to prepare and require the use of any forms as necessary for its administration. (Ord. 2269 § 4, 2018).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application, and criteria for approval for site rezones. A site rezone is a change in the zoning classification of a property or properties that is consistent with the Imagine Bothell… Comprehensive Plan. The site rezone process shall not be used to amend a comprehensive plan designation. (Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A site rezone is a Type V action and shall be processed in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
In order for a site rezone request to be approved, the requested zone classification must be found to be consistent with and implement the land use designation provided in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan for the subject property or properties. (Ord. 2441 § 3 (Exh. C), 2024; Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
Upon the effective date of the adoption by ordinance of a site rezone, the official zoning map of the city shall be so amended. (Ord. 2252 § 9, 2018; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application and criteria for approval for variances. A variance is an authorization to depart from the development regulations contained in this title. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A variance is a Type III action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
An application for a variance is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application shall contain:
A. Completed application form and attachments signed and dated by owner/agent.
B. Complete legal description of the subject property.
C. Site plan depicting proposed and existing improvements on the property. The site plan shall contain the following information in addition to the standard information required by BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations:
1. Dimensions and shape of the lot and street names;
2. Location and dimensions of existing and proposed buildings including setbacks and requested variance(s);
3. Circulation. Adjacent street improvements, curb cut locations for ingress and egress, parking layout in accordance with Chapter 12.16 BMC;
4. Existing and proposed landscaping in accordance with Chapter 12.18 BMC;
5. Existing watercourses, sensitive areas (such as wetlands, geologically hazardous areas, etc.), utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, structures, rockeries, and other manufactured or natural features restricting use of the subject property;
6. Preliminary grading plan depicting proposed and existing grades at five-foot contours, if grading is proposed in conjunction with proposed use; and
7. Storm drainage, sidewalks, and exterior lighting.
D. Building elevations depicting requested variances.
E. Necessary information for review of environmental impacts, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment.
F. The appropriate fee(s) as specified within the city’s fee resolution as adopted by the city council.
G. Applications found to contain material errors shall not be deemed complete until such material errors are corrected.
H. The community development director may waive specific submittal requirements determined to be unnecessary for review of the application. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
A variance shall be granted by the city only if an applicant demonstrates all of the following:
A. The strict enforcement of the provisions of this title creates an unnecessary hardship to the property owner;
B. The variance is necessary because of the unique size, shape, topography, or location of the subject property;
C. The subject property is deprived, by provisions of this title, of rights and privileges enjoyed by other properties in the vicinity and under an identical zone;
D. The need for the variance is not the result of deliberate actions of the applicant or property owner or previous property owner;
E. The variance does not create health and safety hazards or result in lowering of public capital facilities levels of service below the standards and guidelines set forth in the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan;
F. The variance does not relieve an applicant from any of the procedural provisions of this title or, when applicable, those in the shoreline master program;
G. The variance does not allow establishment of a use that is not otherwise permitted in the zone in which the proposal is located;
H. The variance is the minimum necessary to grant relief to the applicant;
I. The variance does not relieve an applicant from the provisions of the critical areas ordinance, except as provided therein. (Ord. 2462 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 2441 § 4 (Exh. D), 2024; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The purpose of this chapter is to establish the type of action, contents of a complete application, criteria for approval, and comprehensive plan and zoning requirements for annexations. An annexation is the addition of land to the corporate limits of the city. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
An annexation is a Type V action and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations, Chapter 35A.14 RCW, Annexation by Code Cities, and Chapter 36.93 RCW, Local Government Organization – Boundaries – Review Boards. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The city council shall evaluate proposed annexations based on the following criteria:
A. State annexation regulations as set forth in Chapters 35A.14 and 36.93 RCW;
B. The ability of the city to provide public services at a level equal to or better than that available from current service providers;
C. The ability of the city to provide public services at the city’s adopted levels of service;
D. Whether the annexation would eliminate an unincorporated island or could be expanded to eliminate an unincorporated island;
E. Whether the annexation would follow logical boundaries, such as streets, waterways, or substantial topographic changes;
F. Whether the annexation would eliminate an irregularity or irregularities in the city’s boundaries, thereby improving service delivery;
G. The relative costs to serve the proposed annexation versus the revenue to be derived from the annexation;
H. No property shall be annexed which is outside the adopted urban growth areas for King and Snohomish Counties. (Ord. 1946 § 2, 2005; Ord. 1798 § 1, 2000; Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
All territory which may hereafter be annexed to the city shall be considered to be zoned in conformance with the Imagine Bothell Comprehensive Plan for the area to be annexed. In the event the area annexed is not within the area encompassed by the comprehensive plan, its temporary zoning shall be the zone in the city in this title which corresponds in description most closely to the existing zoning of the property in the county until such time as the city has amended its comprehensive plan to include the annexed area. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
The city council may direct the planning commission to prepare a comprehensive land use plan and/or proposed zoning regulations to become effective upon the annexation of any area which might reasonably be expected to be annexed by the city at any future time. Such comprehensive plan and zoning actions are legislative actions and shall be considered in accordance with the procedures for such actions as set forth in BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations and Chapter 35A.14 RCW. (Ord. 1629 § 1, 1996).
This article provides aesthetic, design, and concealment standards and permit and review procedures for wireless communication facilities. This article does not apply to small wireless facilities. These provisions are intended to provide objective design criteria to assist in minimizing the visually obtrusive impacts that can be associated with wireless communication facilities and to encourage creative approaches in the location and construction of wireless communication facilities. (Ord. 2295 § 10, 2019).
A WCF permit shall be required prior to the construction or installation of each new WCF other than a temporary WCF or other exempt facility as defined in this chapter. Maintenance of existing facilities that does not qualify as an eligible facilities request will only require a building permit. See Article III of this chapter for provisions relating to eligible facilities requests. All other requests to increase or expand the number and size of WCFs shall comply with the requirements of this article. For the purposes of BMC Title 11, WCF permits shall be designated as Type I project permit applications. No public notice shall be required for such permits.
A. A WCF permittee shall construct and commence operation of the WCF within two years from the date of issuance. The director is authorized to approve a request for an extended expiration date where a construction schedule is provided by the applicant warranting such extension and approved prior to permit issuance.
B. Every WCF permit may be renewed for a period of 180 days for an additional fee as long as no changes have been made to the originally approved location and plans. The request for an extension must be received prior to the permit expiration. For permits that have expired, a new permit must be obtained, and full new fees paid. No permit shall be renewed more than once.
C. Operational Activity. Within 60 days of operation, the permittee shall send a letter to the city confirming that operation has commenced at the WCF.
D. If an applicant is issued a written determination from the city that an application is not complete, the applicant shall have 180 calendar days from the date of personal delivery or date of mailing by the city to submit the required information to the city. If the applicant fails to resubmit, the applicant may request a refund of the unused portion of the application fee for staff time expended as determined in the sole discretion of the director.
E. Small Wireless Facilities. Any proposed wireless communication facility that qualifies as a small wireless facility as defined in BMC 12.11.020 must apply for a small wireless facility permit consistent with Article II; it cannot proceed under this article related to WCFs.
F. Post-Construction As-Builts. Within 60 days after construction of the WCF, the permittee shall provide the city with as-builts and site photographs of the WCF demonstrating compliance with the permit. (Ord. 2373 § 5, 2022; Ord. 2295 § 11, 2019; Ord. 2252 § 5, 2018; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 2043 § 2 (Exh. B), 2010; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
An application for a WCF permit is complete for the purposes of this section when it has been determined by the city to contain the information described below in addition to the standard application information required under BMC Title 11, Administration of Development Regulations; provided, however, that eligible facilities requests are governed by Article III of this chapter. The permit fee shall be established by resolution of the city council. A complete application is sufficient for continued processing even though additional information may be required or modifications may subsequently be made. The city’s determination of completeness shall not preclude the city from requesting additional information or studies, either at the time of the notice of completeness or subsequently if new information is required or substantial changes in the application occur. A complete application for a WCF shall contain:
A. A complete application form, permit fee, and attachments signed and dated by the owner/agent. The application shall be on a standardized form provided by the city;
B. The name, address, phone number and signature of the applicant or authorized representative;
C. A complete legal description of the subject property;
D. Locational maps, including:
1. A vicinity map showing the location of the proposed WCF and the location of any existing WCFs of the licensed carrier within the service area when applying the siting hierarchy in BMC 12.11.065;
2. A map depicting the area immediately around the proposed site, showing the zoning designation of the subject property and of all adjacent properties;
E. Site plans, drawn to scale, depicting the proposed and existing improvements on the property. The site plans shall include drawings which include a plan view and elevations, and contain the following information, to the extent applicable:
1. Dimensions and shape of the lot, and street names;
2. Location and dimensions of existing and proposed buildings and structures, including setbacks;
3. Circulation. Adjacent street improvements, curb cut locations for ingress and egress, and parking layout in accordance with the applicable portions of Chapters 12.16, 17.05, 17.06, and 17.09 BMC; provided, however, that the requirements of BMC 12.16.120(A) and (B) shall not apply to WCFs;
4. Existing and proposed landscaping, in accordance with this chapter, including the location of significant trees with a caliper diameter exceeding eight inches as measured four feet above grade;
5. Existing watercourses, critical areas, utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, rockeries, and other built or natural features restricting use of the subject property;
6. Preliminary grading plan depicting proposed and existing grades at five-foot contours if grading is proposed in conjunction with the proposed WCF;
7. Storm drainage, sidewalks, and exterior lighting;
8. Elevations for all proposed improvements on the site;
F. Color photographs of the existing site, and computer-generated color photographs depicting the proposed WCF incorporated into the site (photosimulations, or photosims). At least one color photograph and one color photosim shall be provided depicting the site as viewed from each adjacent public right-of-way;
G. A description of the support structure or building upon which the WCF is proposed to be located, and detailed description of the design and configuration of the WCF;
H. A statement of whether excess space will be incorporated into the design and configuration of the structure or building, whether excess space will remain after installation of the proposed WCF, and whether such excess space shall be leased;
I. Information necessary to determine the intended service area of the WCF;
J. Design information, including equipment brochures, color and material boards, and dimensional information;
K. The applicant shall submit a sworn declaration signed by an RF engineer with knowledge of the proposed project affirming that the WCF will be compliant with all FCC and other governmental regulations in connection with human exposure to radio frequency emissions for every frequency at which the facility and associated wireless backhaul will operate. If facilities that emit RF necessary to the WCF are to be provided by another provider, the right-of-way use permit or building permit to deploy such facilities shall be contingent on submittal of an RF certification by the other provider for any such facilities which produce RF emissions. If such facilities will emit RF emissions, this additional RF certification shall address the cumulative impact of the RF emissions and certify compliance with federal requirements. A modification of a facility by an eligible facilities request requires a new RF certification;
L. Necessary information for review of environmental impacts, in accordance with BMC Title 14, Environment;
M. Application fee and environmental trust fee (if subject to SEPA review);
N. Compliance with the design and locational requirements of this chapter, as well as the Bothell Standards, if applicable, and with the transportation requirements (e.g., pedestrian accessible routes, clear zones, site distance);
O. A completed application for all related permits and approvals, including a right-of-way placement permit application under Chapter 17.24 BMC if the WCF is to be located within a public right-of-way;
P. The director may waive any of the specific submittal requirements set forth in this section when determined by the director to be unnecessary for review of the application; and
Q. Such other information as the director, in his/her discretion, shall deem appropriate to effectively evaluate the application based on technical, engineering, and aesthetic considerations. (Ord. 2295 § 12, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Siting of a WCF shall adhere to the siting hierarchy of this section. Where a lower ranking alternative is proposed, the applicant must file relevant information demonstrating that despite diligent efforts to adhere to the established hierarchy within the geographic search area, higher ranking options are not technically or physically feasible.
A. Example. A new WCF is proposed; the applicant demonstrates that the new WCF cannot be sited under hierarchy 1. The applicant then moves to hierarchy 2 and is able to propose a site.
B. Siting Hierarchy. A new WCF shall be located according to the following hierarchy:
1. Attached to an existing structure in which a WCF antenna is already attached, unless that structure is located in the right-of-way.
2. Located on a high voltage electrical transmission tower.
3. Collocated on an existing or replacement utility pole within a classified principal arterial right-of-way.
4. Collocated on an existing pole, field light, or municipal building within public parks, public open spaces, or on other publicly owned land and not located in the right-of-way.
5. Attached to the roof or side of any building in the commercial zones listed in BMC 12.11.040.
6. Attached to a utility pole in a minor arterial right-of-way.
7. Located on the roof of any commercial or mixed use building in the mixed use zones listed in BMC 12.11.040.
8. Located in a residentially zoned area on a parcel not used for residential purposes.
9. Located on a utility pole in a collector arterial right-of-way.
10. A monopole-style WCF with antennas in a canister or as otherwise camouflaged (e.g., monopine or stealth design) that is located within commercial zones as permitted in BMC 12.11.040.
11. A monopole-style WCF with antennas in a canister or as otherwise camouflaged (e.g., monopine or stealth design) that is located in public parks, public open spaces, or on other publicly owned land or property and not located in the right-of-way.
12. A monopole-style WCF with antennas in a canister or as otherwise camouflaged (e.g., monopine or stealth design) that is located in a residentially zoned area on a parcel not used for residential purposes and not located within the right-of-way.
13. A reasonable alternative similar to subsections (B)(1) through (12) of this section, as determined by the director.
C. When a WCF cannot meet any of the siting hierarchy options above and denial would constitute an effective prohibition of service, the WCF shall be located consistent with the provisions of BMC 12.11.040. (Ord. 2295 § 13, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013).
All WCFs should meet these visibility and dimensional thresholds, unless the applicant can provide supporting documentation that demonstrates that it is not technically or physically feasible. Proposed WCFs that exceed these dimensional standards must be designed to have the minimum impact feasible, as certified by the provider’s licensed engineer, and as approved by the director.
A. Utility Pole Mounted WCFs.
1. Antennas. Antennas shall be mounted on existing or replacement utility poles. Only one WCF shall be permitted on any utility pole. Antennas shall be either fully concealed within a canister or flush-mounted to the utility pole (flush-mounted shall be the minimum amount of space technically necessary, but no more than 12 inches from the pole). Antennas not flush-mounted on the side of the utility pole shall be centered on the top of the utility pole to which they are mounted and camouflaged or disguised. The antennas shall be colored or painted to match the pole. Except with regard to height and volumetric requirements, utility pole-mounted WCFs must comply with the same design standards applicable to SWFs, as described in BMC 12.11.260, unless doing so would be technically or physically infeasible.
2. Height Increase. An additional 15 feet is allowed, either for an existing or replacement utility pole with flush-mounted antennas or a pole-top mounted canister. Any pole-top mount shall not be greater in diameter than the existing utility pole, or 16 inches, whichever is greater, and shall be designed to blend into the colors and textures of the existing utility pole.
3. Equipment Enclosures. All equipment enclosures shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
4. Replacement Pole. An existing utility pole may be removed and replaced so long as the replacement pole is of similar color and material as the existing and adjacent pole(s) (unless the pole owner decides to use a hollow pole and then it shall match as closely as possible to the color and material of the existing pole) and is located as near as possible to the existing pole. The replaced utility pole must be used by the owner of the utility pole to support its utility lines. A replacement utility pole shall be designed such that coaxial cables and feed lines can be located within the pole or in a covered raceway or conduit of similar color and material as the pole. If the replacement utility pole has a light standard then a photometric analysis shall be provided with the application. Such application shall only be approved if the replaced pole can maintain the appropriate lighting in the right-of-way.
5. Design Districts. New WCFs are prohibited within the rights-of-way of a design district unless denial of the siting could be a prohibition or effective prohibition of the applicant’s ability to provide telecommunications service in violation of 47 USC §§ 253 and 332.
6. Pedestrian Impact. The proposed WCF collocation shall not result in a significant change in the pedestrian environment or preclude the city from making pedestrian improvements. If a utility pole is being replaced, consideration shall be given to improving the pedestrian environment.
7. Prohibited Poles. WCFs are prohibited on nonwooden light poles, decorative poles, or traffic poles located within the right-of-way.
B. Building-Attached WCFs (Commercial and Mixed Use Zones and Nonresidential Structures in Residential Zones).
1. Antennas. Roof-mounted antennas shall not exceed 15 feet above the highest portion of the building, including the mount.
a. Roof-mounted antennas shall be placed to the center of the roof where possible, and shall either be completely concealed or be fully camouflaged into the building design. This may include the construction of false equipment penthouses on the roofs of buildings or some other concealment type structure, the design of which is approved by the director. When a roof mount installation is performed, the antennas, mounting brackets and any concealment structures shall be exempt from the height limit of the underlying zone to the extent that the total height of such facilities does not increase the overall building height by more than 20 feet. A WCF may not be attached on top of any false equipment penthouses.
b. Side-mounted antennas shall be mounted flush (no more than 12 inches from the surface) on the exterior walls of the building, shall not extend above the building parapet or other roof-mounted structure, and shall either be completely concealed or fully camouflaged into the building design.
c. Whip antennas shall be a neutral color to blend with the surroundings or the building, or be fully concealed, at the discretion of the director. In determining whether to require concealment of whip antennas, the director shall consider whether the site line diagrams, site plans, and photosimulations submitted by the applicant demonstrate that the whip antennas will not be visible from the public right-of-way adjacent to the subject property.
2. Equipment Enclosures and Ground-Mounted Equipment. All equipment enclosures and ground-mounted equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
C. New Monopole Towers (Commercial and Mixed Use Zones).
1. Antennas. Panel and omni-directional antennas shall be no greater in height than 10 feet. The antenna array and mount, if any, shall extend no further than 20 feet measured horizontally from the centerline of the pole. Antennas shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color matching the monopole that blends into the natural and built surroundings where it is located.
2. Support Structure. Monopoles shall be located in such a manner that a portion of the tower is screened by existing buildings or trees. Also, the pole shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color to blend into the surroundings. The height of the monopole and the associated antennas shall be no greater than 110 feet. All new monopole towers shall be screened through the planting of at least five evergreen trees of a minimum height of 20 feet tall and of a species approved by the director. Said trees shall be spaced around the pole in such a manner that the maximum screening effect is achieved. Said trees shall be planted within 30 feet of the monopole and maintained in a healthy condition at all times. Existing trees within 30 feet of the monopole may be used to fulfill this screening requirement. In the event that any such tree shall become diseased or suffer other mortality, it shall be replaced with a tree meeting the requirements of this subsection.
3. Equipment Enclosures and Ground-Mounted Equipment. All equipment enclosures and ground-mounted equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
4. Setbacks. Monopole support structures and equipment enclosures shall be constructed with a setback equal to the height of the tower, or the lowest engineered break point, if the tower is designed with break point engineering, from any exclusively residentially zoned property, including the SSHO and MHP overlay zones.
D. Electric Transmission Towers (Commercial Zones).
1. Antennas. Panel and omni-directional antennas shall be painted a color matching the tower so as to blend into the existing tower.
2. Equipment Enclosures. If the WCF is attached to an electrical transmission tower, the equipment enclosure can be located directly under the tower or located consistent with subsection (G)(2) of this section.
E. Collocation on Existing Monopoles and Lattice Towers (Residential Zones).
1. Antennas. Panel and omni-directional antennas shall be no greater in height than 10 feet. However, panel, whip, microwave dish, and omni-directional antennas which are for emergency services, emergency notification services or emergency support services may extend more than 10 feet above an existing lattice or monopole tower as approved by the director. On monopole towers, the antenna array and mount, if any, shall extend no further from the centerline of an existing monopole than 20 feet measured horizontally. On lattice towers, the antennas shall extend no further than 20 feet, measured horizontally, from the portion of the lattice tower to which the antennas are mounted. Existing monopole and lattice towers, and any additional equipment collocated thereon, shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color that blends into the natural and built surroundings where it is located.
2. Support Structure. All monopole and lattice towers upon which collocation is permitted shall be screened through the planting of at least five evergreen trees of a minimum height of 20 feet tall and of a species approved by the director. Existing trees of equal or greater height within 30 feet of the monopole may be used to fulfill this requirement. Said trees shall be spaced around the pole in such a manner that the maximum screening effect is achieved. Said trees shall be planted within 30 feet of the monopole and maintained in a healthy condition at all times. In the event that any such tree shall become diseased or suffer other mortality, it shall be replaced with a tree meeting the requirements of this subsection.
3. Equipment Enclosures. All equipment enclosures shall comply with the applicable requirements of subsection G of this section.
4. Setbacks. New equipment enclosures associated with new WCFs collocated upon existing monopoles or lattice towers shall be placed no closer to existing residential uses than any existing equipment enclosure on the subject property, or as approved by the director.
F. Existing Monopole and Lattice Towers. Any existing monopole or lattice tower may be replaced on the same parcel with a lattice tower of the same or smaller dimensions or a new monopole. The new monopole tower must comply with subsection C of this section. However, the height of the new monopole may be the same as the tower being replaced or the height prescribed in subsection (C)(2) of this section, whichever is higher.
G. Concealment Standards for Equipment Enclosures and Ground-Mounted Equipment.
1. Equipment Enclosures for Building-Attached WCF.
a. If feasible, equipment enclosures shall be located within existing buildings (excluding single-family residential) or located underground. All underground equipment enclosures shall have the top of the vault flush with the surrounding grade.
b. If it is infeasible due to either technical, physical, or landlord requirements to place equipment enclosures inside an existing building or underground, then the equipment enclosure may be placed on the roof of an existing building, provided the use of the building is not single-family residential and the equipment enclosure is not visible from the street. Equipment enclosures located on the roof of a building shall be placed to the center of the roof where feasible and shall either be completely concealed or fully camouflaged into the building with architecturally compatible design.
c. If some other placement is proposed, the applicant shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the city that it is not technically or physically feasible to locate the equipment underground, within the building, or on a roof. All equipment and cabinets that will be visible to the traveling public, workers, or residents shall be as small and unobtrusive as is practicable and designed to blend in with existing surroundings. The applicant shall size any equipment enclosure and other facilities to minimize visual clutter.
d. If a ground-mounted equipment enclosure is permitted, the equipment enclosure must comply with subsection (G)(2)(c) of this section.
2. Equipment Enclosures for Pole-Mounted WCF. These requirements apply both for monopoles and for utility poles.
a. In exclusively residential zones, including SSHO and MHP overlay zones, ground-mounted equipment shall be located as close as possible to the intersection of the public right-of-way boundary and the side property line of the abutting property, but in no case shall any portion of said equipment be located more than six feet from either side of said intersection.
b. Equipment enclosures for WCFs must be located as follows:
(1) No new ground-mounted or underground equipment enclosures are permitted in the right-of-way;
(2) Underground or on adjacent property outside of the right-of-way; provided, that any ground-mounted equipment enclosure is fenced and landscaped. All underground equipment enclosures shall have the top of the vault flush with the surrounding grade. Underground equipment enclosures shall not be greater than 480 square feet in area and shall have the smallest access door feasible;
(3) Inside a building located outside of the right-of-way; or
(4) Located outside of the right-of-way so as not to be open or visible to public view (e.g., in a forested area surrounded by vegetation so that the equipment enclosure is not open to public view and also fenced for security purposes) and in compliance with subsection (G)(2)(c) of this section.
(5) Equipment enclosures mounted on a utility pole are not permitted.
c. Ground-mounted equipment enclosures shall be the minimum size technically necessary and not greater than 480 square feet in area. Ground-mounted equipment enclosures shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color so as to blend in with the surroundings. Any new building or structure constructed for housing equipment, other than self-contained equipment cabinets, shall be designed and constructed to be architecturally compatible with buildings in the immediate vicinity and to blend into the surroundings. The exterior of all such buildings or structures shall be finished with masonry or siding and shall have a peaked roof. Buildings or structures with nonmasonry exterior finishing shall be painted a natural, nonreflective color. Pre-fabricated concrete and metal structures shall not be permitted unless treated with a facade meeting the requirements of this subsection.
3. Screening and Noise Standards. If a WCF is proposed in a residential zone or within 100 feet of a residential use, then the applicant must demonstrate that the proposed WCF will generate no increased sound levels as documented by an acoustical consultant, as measured at the property line of the subject property at any time of day or night. If the WCF will generate increased sound levels, then the equipment generating such noise shall be surrounded with a noise abatement material such as solid masonry or concrete wall on all four sides, comprised of at least four inches of solid masonry or concrete components. Said wall shall be located within five feet of any noise source associated with the equipment enclosure and shall have a height that is at least three feet above the highest point of the noise source. Gates or doors providing access to areas within said wall shall be constructed of a solid material and shall not be located on the wall immediately adjacent to the noise source. Any such noise source shall be oriented to minimize impacts on neighboring residential properties.
4. Landscaping. Ground-mounted equipment enclosures that are not required to be surrounded by a masonry or concrete wall shall be surrounded with a six-foot-tall wood fence and a five-foot-wide landscape bed (located in front of the fence) containing Type III landscape materials, as specified in BMC 12.18.040. Otherwise, ground-mounted equipment enclosures shall be surrounded by a 10-foot-wide landscape bed (located in front of the masonry or concrete wall of such structure) containing Type II landscape materials, as specified in BMC 12.18.040. The requirements of this subsection may be varied by the director on a case-by-case basis when doing so would result in a greater degree of concealment of an equipment enclosure. Chapter 12.18 BMC notwithstanding, the landscaping provisions of this subsection shall not be fulfilled through use of berms or fencing. (Ord. 2295 § 14, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1885 § 1, 2002; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
A. All new monopole towers, and any pre-existing monopole or lattice towers, owned by a licensed carrier, upon which this chapter permits collocation of additional WCFs, shall be made available for use by the owner or initial user thereof, together with as many other licensed carriers as can be technically collocated thereon. However, nothing in this chapter shall prevent such licensed carrier from charging a reasonable fee for the collocation of additional WCFs upon said tower which does not exceed the fair market value for the space occupied.
B. All licensed carriers shall cooperate with each other in collocating additional WCFs upon such towers. All licensed carriers shall exercise good faith in collocating with other licensed carriers and in the sharing of towers, including the sharing of technical information to evaluate the feasibility of collocation. In the event that a dispute arises as to whether a licensed carrier has exercised good faith in allowing other licensed carriers to collocate upon its tower, the city may require a third party technical study to evaluate the feasibility of collocation at the expense of either or both licensed carriers. This covenant of good faith and fair dealing shall be a condition of any permit issued pursuant to this chapter for a new monopole tower.
C. Any licensed carrier which allows collocation upon a tower permitted pursuant to this chapter may condition said collocation to assure that the collocated WCF does not cause electronic or radio frequency interference with its existing WCF. In the event that the collocated licensed carrier is unable to remedy the interference, the owner of the tower shall be relieved of its obligation to allow collocation of the interfering WCF upon its structure. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Repealed by Ord. 2295. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
No permittee shall place or allow to be placed signs, symbols, flags, or banners attached to, painted, or inscribed upon any WCF. A permittee may place not more than one sign measuring 18 inches by 12 inches upon or near the WCF which: (1) states that trespassers will be prosecuted (if applicable); (2) lists the names and telephone numbers of persons to be contacted in the event of an emergency; (3) identifies the permittee or person responsible for operating the WCF; and/or (4) contains information necessary and convenient for the permittee or person operating the WCF to identify the WCF. Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit the placement of safety or warning signs upon any portion of the WCF which are required by law or which are designed to apprise emergency response personnel and the employees and agents of WCF providers of particular hazards associated with equipment located upon the WCF. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Repealed by Ord. 2295. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
Repealed by Ord. 2295. (Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998).
This article provides aesthetic, design, and concealment standards and permit and review procedures for small wireless facilities. These provisions are intended to provide objective design criteria to assist in minimizing the visual impacts that can be associated with small wireless facilities and to encourage creative approaches in the location and construction of wireless communications facilities. All permits necessary for the deployment of small wireless facilities and, if applicable, an application for a franchise may be consolidated for review. (Ord. 2295 § 16, 2019).
A. Type I Decision. For the purposes of BMC Title 11, SWF permits, including associated proposals to install replacement or new poles, shall be designated as Type I project permit applications. No public notice shall be required for such permits. As a Type I decision, any decision by the community development director or the public works director is final and is not subject to administrative appeal.
B. Review of Facilities. Review of the site locations proposed by the applicant shall be governed by the provisions of 47 USC §§ 253 and 332 and other applicable law. Applicants for franchises and small wireless facility permits shall be treated in a competitively neutral and nondiscriminatory manner with other service providers, utilizing supporting infrastructure that is functionally equivalent, that is, service providers whose facilities are similarly situated in terms of structure, placement, or cumulative impacts. Small wireless facility permit review under this chapter shall neither prohibit nor have the effect of prohibiting the ability of an applicant to provide telecommunications services.
C. Public Comment. The applicant is encouraged to host informational meetings for the public regarding the deployment and shall post meeting notices, if any, for informational meetings on its website. These meetings are for the public’s information and are neither hearings nor part of any land use appeal process.
D. Withdrawal. Any applicant may withdraw a SWF application at any time, provided the withdrawal is made in writing. When a withdrawal is received, the application shall be deemed null and void. If such withdrawal occurs prior to the director’s decision, the applicant may request a refund of the unused portion of the application fee for staff time expended as determined in the sole discretion of the director. If such withdrawal is not accomplished prior to the director’s decision, there shall be no refund of all or any portion of such fee.
E. Supplemental Information. If an applicant is issued a written determination from the city that an application is not complete, the applicant shall have 180 calendar days from the date of personal delivery or date of mailing by the city to submit the required information to the city. If the applicant fails to resubmit, the applicant may request a refund of the unused portion of the application fee for staff time expended as determined in the sole discretion of the director.
F. Eligible Facilities Requests. The design approved in a small wireless facility permit shall be considered concealment elements and such facilities may only be expanded upon an eligible facilities request described in Article III of this chapter when the modification does not defeat the concealment elements of the small wireless facility.
G. Site-Specific Agreement. Prior to the issuance of a permit to construct a new pole or ground-mounted equipment in the right-of-way, the applicant must obtain a site-specific agreement from the city to locate such new pole or ground-mounted equipment. This requirement also applies to replacement poles when the replacement is necessary for the installation or attachment of small wireless facilities, the replacement structure is higher than the replaced structure, and the overall height of the replacement structure and the proposed small wireless facility is more than 60 feet. The director may execute such site-specific agreements on behalf of the city to any applicant that has obtained a franchise. (Ord. 2295 § 17, 2019).
A. The following information shall be provided by all applicants for a small wireless facility permit; provided, however, that the applicant may request a waiver of application requirements prior to submittal of an SWF permit application if, at the sole discretion of the director, the submittal information is duplicative or unnecessary in the specific situation:
1. The name, address, phone number, and signature of the applicant or authorized representative on a complete application form, applicable permit fee(s), and attachments signed and dated by the owner/agent. The application shall be on a form approved by the city.
2. The application shall provide the following:
a. The specific locational information including GIS coordinates of all proposed small wireless facilities and specify where the small wireless facilities will utilize existing, replacement or new poles, towers, existing buildings and/or other structures.
b. Ground-mounted equipment, conduit, junction boxes and fiber and electrical connections necessary for and intended for use in the deployment shall also be specified regardless of whether the additional facilities are to be constructed by the applicant or leased from a third party.
c. Color photographs of the existing site, and computer-generated color photographs depicting the proposed SWF incorporated into the site (e.g., photosimulations, or photosims). At least one color photograph and one color photosim shall be provided depicting the site as viewed from each adjacent public right-of-way.
d. Detailed construction drawings of the SWF, including engineering details.
3. The application shall have sufficient detail to identify:
a. The location and dimensions of existing buildings and structures, including setbacks and sidewalks, including five-foot-wide pedestrian accessible route;
b. The location of overhead and underground public utility, telecommunication, cable, water, sewer, and storm drainage and other lines and equipment in the rights-of-way along the proposed route and/or specific configuration and structural elements associated with structurally mounted facilities outside of the rights-of-way;
c. The location of existing watercourses, critical areas, utility lines, easements, deed restrictions, rockeries, and other built or natural features restricting use of the subject property or right-of-way;
d. The specific trees, structures, improvements, facilities, lines and equipment, and obstructions, if any, that applicant proposes to temporarily or permanently remove or relocate and a landscape plan for protecting, trimming, removing, replacing, and restoring any trees or areas to be disturbed during construction;
e. Compliance with aesthetic design concealment requirements of BMC 12.11.260 and the Bothell Standards and with the transportation requirements (e.g., pedestrian accessible routes, clear zones, sight distance).
4. Permission.
a. The applicant must show written approval from the owner of any pole or structure for the installation of its small wireless facilities on such pole or structure. Such written approval shall include approval of the specific pole or structure, engineering and design standards from the owner, unless the pole owner is the city. Submission of the lease agreement between the owner and the applicant is not required.
b. For city-owned poles or structures, the applicant must obtain a lease from the city prior to or concurrent with the small wireless permit application.
c. Small wireless facilities may not encroach onto or over private property or property outside of the right-of-way without the property owner’s express written consent. Such consent shall be submitted with the application.
5. Specific Location Considerations.
a. Any application for a small wireless facility located in the right-of-way adjacent to a parcel zoned for residential use shall demonstrate that it has considered all of the following:
(1) Whether a small wireless facility is currently installed on an existing pole in front of the same residential parcel. If a small wireless facility exists, then the applicant must demonstrate that no technically feasible alternative location exists that is not in front of the same residential parcel.
(2) Whether the proposed small wireless facility can be screened from residential view by choosing a pole location that is not directly in front of a window or views.
b. Any application for a small wireless facility located in a design district must provide appropriate analysis of location priority, as required by BMC 12.11.250 and the Bothell Standards, demonstrating that the SWF cannot be located outside the proposed design district.
6. Any application for a small wireless permit that contains an element not exempt from SEPA review shall simultaneously apply under Chapter 43.21C RCW and Chapter 14.02 BMC. Further, any application proposing small wireless facilities in shoreline management zones (pursuant to BMC Title 13) or in critical areas (pursuant to Chapter 14.04 BMC) must indicate that the application is exempt or comply with the review processes in such codes.
7. The applicant shall submit a sworn declaration signed by an RF engineer with knowledge of the proposed project affirming that the small wireless facilities will be compliant with all FCC and other governmental regulations in connection with human exposure to radio frequency emissions for every frequency at which the small wireless facility and, if applicable, associated wireless backhaul will operate. If facilities that generate RF radiation necessary to the small wireless facility are to be provided by a third party, then the small wireless facility permit shall be conditioned on an RF certification showing the impact of the RF emissions of the entire installation. The applicant may provide one emissions report for the entire small wireless deployment if the applicant is using the same small wireless facility configuration for all installations within that batch or may submit one emissions report for each subgroup installation identified in the batch.
8. A professional engineer licensed by the state of Washington shall certify in writing, over his or her seal, that both construction plans and final construction of the small wireless facilities and structure or pole and foundation are designed to reasonably withstand wind and seismic loads as established by the International Building Code. Further, the construction drawings shall depict all existing proposed improvements related to the proposed location, including but not limited to poles, driveways, ADA ramps, equipment cabinets, street trees, and structures within 150 feet from the proposed site. The construction drawings shall also include the applicant’s plan for electric and fiber utilities and for all conduits, cables, wires, handholes, junctions, meters, disconnect switches and any other ancillary equipment or construction necessary to construct the small wireless facility. Where another party is responsible for installing such electric and fiber utilities, conduits, cables, and related improvements, applicant’s construction drawings will include such utilities to the extent known at the time of application, but at a minimum applicant must indicate how it expects to obtain fiber (if applicable) and electric service to the small wireless facility.
9. A traffic control plan as required by BMC Title 17.
10. The small wireless facilities permit will include those elements that are typically contained in the right-of-way use permit to allow the applicant to proceed with the build-out of the small wireless facility deployment.
11. Such other information as the director and/or the public works director, in their discretion, deem appropriate to effectively evaluate the application based on technical, engineering, and aesthetic considerations.
B. The applicant may batch multiple small wireless facility sites in one application. The applicant is encouraged to batch the small wireless facility sites with similar designs and/or in a contiguous service area within one application. (Ord. 2295 § 18, 2019).
A. The issuance of a small wireless permit grants authority to construct small wireless facilities in the rights-of-way in a consolidated manner to allow the applicant, in most situations, to avoid the need to seek duplicative approval by both the public works and the community development departments. Specifically, small wireless facilities installed within the rights-of-way pursuant to an SWF permit may proceed to construct the approved SWFs without the need for an additional right-of-way use permit.
B. If the applicant requires a new franchise to utilize the right-of-way, the franchise approval may be consolidated with the small wireless facility permit review if requested by the applicant. As an exercise of police powers pursuant to RCW 35.99.040(2), the small wireless facility permit is not a right-of-way use permit, but instead a consolidated public works and land use permit. (Ord. 2295 § 19, 2019).
A. Upon approval of an SWF permit, the permittee shall comply with all of the requirements described within the permit.
B. Within 60 days after construction of the small wireless facility, the permittee shall provide the city with as-builts and site photographs of the small wireless facilities demonstrating compliance with the permit.
C. An SWF permittee shall construct and commence operation of the WSF within two years from the date of issuance. The director is authorized to approve a request for an extended expiration date where a construction schedule is provided by the applicant warranting such extension and approved prior to the permit issuance.
D. Every SWF permit may be renewed for a period of 180 days for an additional fee as long as no changes have been made to the originally approved location and plans. The request for an extension must be received prior to the permit expiration. For permits that have expired, a new permit must be obtained, and full new fees paid. No permit shall be renewed more than once.
E. Within 60 days of operation, the permittee shall send a letter to the city confirming that operation has commenced at the SWF.
F. The permittee must maintain the SWF in safe and working condition. The permittee shall be responsible for the removal of any graffiti or other vandalism and shall keep the site neat and orderly, including but not limited to following any maintenance or modifications on the site. (Ord. 2295 § 20, 2019).
A. Design District. Design districts may be established within the city where there are well-coordinated, cohesive streetscapes. These design districts will be established within the Bothell Standards. The placement, appearance, and location for SWFs within a design district will be governed by this chapter and by the Bothell Standards. Where there is an inconsistency between this chapter and the Bothell Standards, the Bothell Standards will control.
B. Any applicant who desires to place a small wireless facility in a design district must first establish that the applicant cannot locate the small wireless facility outside of a design district. Applications for small wireless facilities in a design district may be approved if the applicant demonstrates that due to technical infeasibility the applicant cannot locate the proposed small wireless facility on an existing or replacement pole within 500 feet of the proposed site and outside of a design district.
C. If the city has created a small wireless facility standard for poles within the design district in the Bothell Standards (as used herein “design district pole(s)”), then the applicant is required to first consider using the design district pole adopted for small wireless facilities from the Bothell Standards. Deviation from the adopted design district poles is only permitted pursuant to BMC 12.11.260(F)(2). (Ord. 2295 § 21, 2019).
Small wireless facility deployments shall conform to the following design standards:
A. General Requirements.
1. Ground-mounted equipment in the rights-of-way is prohibited, unless such facilities are placed underground or the applicant can demonstrate that pole-mounted or undergrounded equipment is technically infeasible. If ground-mounted equipment is necessary, then the applicant shall submit a concealment element plan. Generators located in the rights-of-way are prohibited.
2. No equipment shall be operated so as to produce noise in violation of Chapter 8.26 BMC.
3. Small wireless facilities are not permitted on traffic signal poles unless denial of the siting could be a prohibition or effective prohibition of the applicant’s ability to provide telecommunications service in violation of 47 USC §§ 253 and 332.
4. Replacement poles and new poles shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), city construction and sidewalk clearance standards, city ordinances, traffic warrants, and state and federal laws and regulations in order to provide a clear and safe passage. Further, the location of any replacement or new pole must: be physically feasible; not interfere with utility or safety fixtures (e.g., fire hydrants, traffic control devices); and not adversely affect the public welfare, health, or safety.
5. Vertical clearance shall be reviewed by the public works director to ensure that the small wireless facilities will not pose a hazard to other users of the rights-of-way.
6. Replacement poles shall be located as near as possible to the existing pole with the requirement to remove the abandoned pole.
7. No signage, message, or identification other than the manufacturer’s identification or identification required by governing law is allowed to be portrayed on any antenna or equipment enclosure. Any permitted signage shall be located on the equipment enclosures and be of the minimum amount required to achieve the intended purpose (no larger than four by six inches); provided, that signs are permitted as concealment element techniques where appropriate and safety signage is permitted as required by applicable laws or regulations.
8. Antennas and related equipment shall not be illuminated unless necessary for security reasons, required by a federal or state authority, or approved as part of a concealment element plan.
9. Side arm mounts for antennas and unified enclosures must be the minimum extension necessary and may be no more than 12 inches off the pole.
10. The preferred location of a small wireless facility on a pole is the location with the least visible impact as determined by the community development director.
11. Antennas, equipment enclosures, and ancillary equipment, conduit, and cable shall not visually dominate the structure or pole upon which they are attached.
12. Except for locations in the right-of-way, small wireless facilities are not permitted in the residential zones on any residential structure or on any property containing a single-family residential use.
13. The city may consider the cumulative visual effects of small wireless facilities mounted on poles within the rights-of-way when assessing proposed siting locations so as to not adversely affect the visual character of the city. This provision shall not be applied to limit the number of permits issued when no alternative sites are reasonably available nor to impose a technological requirement on the applicant.
14. These design standards are intended to be used solely for the purpose of concealment and siting. Nothing herein shall be interpreted or applied in a manner that dictates the use of a particular technology. When strict application of these requirements would unreasonably impair the function of the technology chosen by the applicant, be technically infeasible, or otherwise have the effect of prohibiting service, alternative forms of concealment or deployment that provide similar or greater protections from negative visual impacts to the streetscape may be permitted at the discretion of the director.
15. Upon adoption of a city standard small wireless facility pole design(s) within the Bothell Standards, an applicant shall first consider using or modifying the standard pole design to accommodate its small wireless facility without substantially changing the outward visual and aesthetic character of the design. The applicant, upon a showing that use or modification of the standard pole design is either technically or physically infeasible, or that the modified pole design will not comply with the city’s ADA, sidewalk clearance requirements and/or would violate electrical or other safety standards, may deviate from the adopted standard pole design and use the design standards as further described in subsections B and C of this section.
B. Outside a design district, small wireless facilities attached to existing or replacement nonwooden utility poles (in or outside the right-of-way) shall conform to the following design criteria:
1. The applicant shall minimize the antenna and equipment space and shall use the smallest amount of enclosure technically necessary to fit the equipment and antennas. The antennas and equipment shall be located using one or more of the following methods:
a. Concealed completely within the pole or pole base. Antennas and the associated equipment enclosures (including disconnect switches and other appurtenant devices) shall be fully concealed within the pole, unless such concealment is otherwise technically infeasible, or is incompatible with the pole design. If within the pole base, the base shall meet the ADA requirements and not impact the pedestrian access route.
b. Located on a pole. If located on a pole, antennas and the associated equipment enclosures or unified enclosure (including disconnect switches and other appurtenant devices) must be camouflaged to appear as an integral part of the pole.
(1) The antenna(s) shall be placed as close to the surface of the pole as possible, but may not be more than 12 inches off the surface of the pole, and only if such distance is necessary for antenna tilt and/or technical need. Each antenna may not exceed three cubic feet in volume.
(2) The equipment enclosure(s) shall be placed as close to the surface of the pole as possible, but the inside edge may not be more than six inches off the surface of the pole. The equipment must be placed in the smallest enclosure feasible for the technical need of the small wireless facility. The equipment enclosure(s) and all other wireless equipment associated with the utility pole, including wireless equipment associated with the antenna (including conduit) and any preexisting associated equipment on the pole, may not exceed 28 cubic feet. The applicant is encouraged to place the equipment enclosure(s) behind any banners or road signs that may be on the pole; provided, that such location does not interfere with the operation of the banners or signs or the operation of the small wireless facility.
(3) A unified antenna and equipment enclosure shall be placed as close to the surface of the pole as possible, but not more than 12 inches off the pole if necessary for antenna tilt and technical need. The unified equipment enclosure shall be the smallest size technically necessary, but shall not exceed the dimensional requirements of subsection (B)(1)(b)(2) of this section.
(4) The applicant may propose a side-mounted canister antenna, so long as the inside edge of the antenna is no more than 12 inches from the surface of the pole.
(5) Any equipment or antenna enclosures must meet WSDOT height clearance requirements. Applicants are encouraged to place the equipment enclosure as close to the antennas as physically and technically feasible, unless such placement would cause a greater aesthetic impact.
c. Underground in a utility vault. If located underground, the access lid to the equipment enclosure shall be located outside the footprint of any pedestrian curb ramp and shall have a nonskid surface meeting ADA requirements if located within an existing pedestrian access route.
2. All conduit, cables, wires, and fiber must be routed internally in the pole. Full concealment of all conduit, cables, wires, and fiber is required within mounting brackets, shrouds, canisters, or sleeves if attached to exterior antennas or equipment.
3. An antenna on top of an existing pole may not extend more than six feet above the height of the existing pole and the diameter may not exceed 16 inches, measured at the top of the pole, unless the applicant can demonstrate that more space is technically needed. The antenna shall be integrated into the pole design so that it appears as a continuation of the original pole, including being colored or painted to match the pole, and if technically feasible shall be shrouded or screened to blend with the pole, except for canister antennas which shall not require separate shrouding or screening. All cabling and mounting hardware/brackets from the bottom of the antenna to the top of the pole shall be fully concealed and integrated with the pole.
4. Any replacement pole shall substantially conform to the design of the pole it is replacing or the neighboring pole design utilized within the contiguous right-of-way.
5. The height of any replacement pole may not extend more than 10 feet above the height of the existing pole or the minimum additional height necessary; provided, that the height of the replacement pole cannot be extended further by additional antenna height.
6. The diameter of a replacement pole shall comply with the city’s setback and sidewalk clearance requirements and shall, to the extent technically feasible, not be more than a 25 percent increase of the existing nonwooden pole diameter measured at the base of the pole, unless additional diameter is needed in order to provide demonstrated need for structural stability or to conceal equipment or conduit within the base of the pole, and shall comply with the requirements in subsection (A)(4) of this section.
7. Unless specifically authorized through a site-specific lease agreement with the city to install a new pole in the right-of-way for a small wireless facility, the use of a pole in the right-of-way for the siting of a small wireless facility shall be considered secondary to the primary function of the pole. If the primary function of such pole serving as the host site for a small wireless facility becomes unnecessary, the pole shall not be retained for the sole purpose of accommodating the small wireless facility and the small wireless facility and all associated equipment shall be removed.
C. Outside a design district, small wireless facilities attached to existing or replacement wooden utility poles (in or outside the right-of-way) shall conform to the following design criteria:
1. The wooden pole at the proposed location may be replaced with a taller pole for the purpose of accommodating a small wireless facility; provided, that the replacement pole shall not exceed a height that is a maximum of 10 feet taller than the existing pole, unless a further height increase is required and confirmed in writing by the pole owner and that such height extension is the minimum extension necessary to provide sufficient separation and/or clearance from electrical and wireline facilities.
2. A pole extender may be used instead of replacing an existing wooden pole but may not increase the height of the existing pole by more than 10 feet, unless a further height increase is required and confirmed in writing by the pole owner and that such height increase is the minimum extension necessary to provide sufficient separation and/or clearance from electrical and wireline facilities. A “pole extender” as used herein is an object affixed between the pole and the antenna for the purpose of increasing the height of the antenna above the pole. The pole extender shall be painted to approximately match the color of the pole and shall substantially match the diameter of the pole measured at the top of the pole.
3. Replacement wooden poles must either match the approximate color and materials of the replaced pole or shall be the standard new wooden pole used by the pole owner in the city. Alternatively, the applicant may replace the wooden pole with a nonwooden pole with permission of or as required by the pole owner; provided, that the new pole is hollow and incorporates internal power and fiber conduit for the small wireless facility.
4. Antennas, equipment enclosures, and all ancillary equipment, boxes, and conduit shall be colored or painted to match the approximate color of the surface of the wooden pole on which they are attached.
5. Antennas shall not be mounted more than 12 inches from the surface of the wooden pole.
6. Antennas should be placed in an effort to minimize visual clutter and obtrusiveness. Multiple antennas are permitted on a wooden pole; provided, that each antenna enclosure shall not be more than three cubic feet in volume.
7. A canister antenna may be mounted on top of an existing wooden pole, which may not exceed the height requirements described in subsection (C)(1) of this section. A canister antenna mounted on the top of a wooden pole shall not exceed 16 inches in diameter, measured at the top of the pole, and shall be colored or painted to match the pole. The canister antenna must be placed to look as if it is an extension of the pole. In the alternative, the applicant may propose a side mounted canister antenna, so long as the inside edge of the antenna is no more than 12 inches from the surface of the wooden pole. All cables shall be concealed either within the canister antenna or within a sleeve between the antenna and the wooden pole.
8. An omni-directional antenna may be mounted on the top of an existing wooden pole, provided such antenna is no more than four feet in height and is mounted directly on the top of a pole or attached to a sleeve made to look like the exterior of the pole as close to the top of the pole as technically feasible. All cables shall be concealed within the sleeve between the bottom of the antenna and the mounting bracket.
9. The furthest point of any antenna or equipment enclosure may not extend more than 28 inches from the face of the pole, unless such extension is technically necessary. Any equipment or antenna enclosures must meet WSDOT height clearance requirements.
10. All related equipment mounted on wooden poles, including but not limited to ancillary equipment, radios, cables, associated shrouding, microwaves, and conduit, shall not be mounted more than six inches from the surface of the pole, unless a further distance is technically required.
11. Equipment for small wireless facilities must be attached to the wooden pole, unless otherwise permitted to be ground-mounted pursuant to subsection (A)(1) of this section. The equipment must be placed in the smallest enclosure possible for the intended purpose. The equipment enclosure and all other wireless equipment associated with the utility pole, including wireless equipment associated with the antenna and any preexisting associated equipment on the pole, may not exceed 28 cubic feet. The applicant is encouraged to place the equipment enclosure behind any banners or road signs that may be on the pole; provided, that such location does not interfere with the operation of the banners or signs.
12. An applicant who desires to enclose both its antennas and equipment within one unified enclosure may do so; provided, that such enclosure is the minimum size necessary for its intended purpose and the enclosure and all other wireless equipment associated with the pole including wireless equipment associated with the antenna and any preexisting associated equipment on the pole does not exceed 28 cubic feet. The unified enclosure may not be placed more than six inches from the surface of the pole, unless a further distance is technically necessary or required by the pole owner. To the extent possible, the unified enclosure must be placed either so as to appear as an integrated part of the pole or behind banners or signs; provided, that such location does not interfere with the operation of the banners or signs.
13. The visual effect of the small wireless facility on all other aspects of the appearance of the wooden pole shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible.
14. The use of the wooden pole for the siting of a small wireless facility shall be considered secondary to the primary function of the pole. If the primary function of a pole serving as the host site for a small wireless facility becomes unnecessary, the pole shall not be retained for the sole purpose of accommodating the small wireless facility and the small wireless facility and all associated equipment shall be removed.
15. The diameter of a replacement pole shall comply with the city’s setback and sidewalk clearance requirements and shall match the standard wood pole of the utility pole owner.
16. All cables and wires shall be routed through conduit along the outside of the pole. The outside conduit shall be colored or painted to match the pole. The number of conduit shall be minimized to the number technically necessary to accommodate the small wireless facility.
D. Small wireless facilities attached to existing buildings shall conform to this title design requirements and the following design criteria:
1. Small wireless facilities may be mounted to the sides of a building if the antennas do not interrupt the building’s architectural theme.
2. The interruption of architectural lines or horizontal or vertical reveals is discouraged.
3. New architectural features such as columns, pilasters, corbels, or other ornamentation that conceal antennas may be used if they complement the architecture of the existing building.
4. Small wireless facilities shall utilize the smallest mounting brackets necessary in order to provide the smallest offset from the building.
5. Skirts or shrouds must be utilized on the sides and bottoms of antennas in order to conceal mounting hardware, create a cleaner appearance, and minimize the visual impact of the antennas. Exposed cabling/wiring is prohibited.
6. Small wireless facilities shall be colored, painted, and/or textured to match the adjacent building surfaces or shall be colored or painted a natural, nonreflective color so as to blend in with the surroundings.
E. Any small wireless facility mounted on cable(s) strung between existing utility poles (“strand-mounted facility”) shall conform to the following standards:
1. Each strand-mounted facility, including antennas and equipment, shall not exceed three cubic feet in volume.
2. Only one strand-mounted facility is permitted per cable between any two existing poles.
3. The strand-mounted facility shall be placed as close as possible to the nearest utility pole, in no event more than five feet from the pole unless a greater distance is technically necessary or is required by the pole owner for safety clearance.
4. No strand-mounted facility shall be located in or above the portion of the roadway open to vehicular traffic.
5. Ground-mounted equipment to accommodate a strand-mounted facility is not permitted except when placed in preexisting equipment cabinets.
6. Pole-mounted equipment shall comply with the requirements of subsections A and C of this section.
7. Strand-mounted facilities must be installed to cause the least visual impact and without excess exterior cabling or wires (other than the original strand).
8. Strand-mounted facilities are prohibited on cables strung between nonwooden poles.
F. Small wireless facilities attached to (1) new poles in the rights-of-way or (2) to any poles in a design district shall conform to the following design criteria:
1. New Poles within the Rights-of-Way.
a. Generally, new poles within the rights-of-way are permitted only if the applicant can establish that:
(1) The proposed small wireless facility cannot be located on an existing or replacement utility pole or light pole, on an electrical transmission tower, or on a site outside of the public rights-of-way or a design district, such as a public park, public property, building, transmission tower, or in or on a nonresidential use whether by roof or panel-mount or separate structure;
(2) The proposed small wireless facility is consistent with the Bothell Standards;
(3) The proposed small wireless facility receives approval for a concealment element design, as described in subsection (F)(2) of this section; and
(4) The proposed small wireless facility also complies with the Shoreline Management Act and SEPA, if applicable.
b. No new poles shall be located in a critical area or associated buffer required by the city’s critical areas regulations (Chapter 14.04 BMC), except when determined to be exempt pursuant to said ordinance.
c. Even if an alternative location is determined to exist instead of installing a new pole in the right-of-way, the public works director may determine that a new pole in the right-of-way is in fact a superior alternative based on the impact to the city, the concealment element design, the city’s comprehensive plan, and the added benefits to the community.
2. New Pole Designs.
a. Within a Design District.
(1) If the applicant desires to place the small wireless facility in a design district and the city has adopted in the Bothell Standards a small wireless facility standard for poles within the design district (as used herein, “design district pole(s)”), then the applicant is required to use the design district pole to install the small wireless facility. The applicant may propose modifying the design district pole design to accommodate its small wireless facility without substantially changing the outward visual and aesthetic character of the design. The applicant may deviate from the adopted design district pole design and propose a concealment element design consistent with subsection (F)(2)(a)(2) of this section, but only upon a showing that using the design district pole, even in a modified manner, is either technically or physically infeasible or that the adopted or a modified pole design will not comply with the city’s ADA or sidewalk clearance requirements and/or would violate electrical or other safety standards.
(2) If a design district pole is not utilized, the concealment element design shall minimize the visual obtrusiveness of the small wireless facility. The concealment element design must include the design of screening, fencing, or other concealment technology for a pole or equipment structure and for all related transmission equipment or facilities associated with the proposed small wireless facility, including but not limited to fiber and power connections. The applicant shall aim to mimic the general designs and height of the design district pole, unless the director otherwise approves a deviation or modification due to aesthetic or safety concerns. The proposed new pole shall be a nonwooden hollow pole and include a light feature that matches the style of the design district pole, unless such lighting is determined unnecessary by the director. Other concealment methods include, but are not limited to, integrating the installation with architectural features or building design components; utilization of coverings or concealment devices of similar material, color, and texture (or the appearance thereof) as the surface against which the installation will be seen or on which it will be installed; landscape design; or other camouflage strategies appropriate for the type of installation. Applicants are required to utilize designs in which all conduit and wirelines are installed internally in the structure. Further, applicant designs must, to the extent technically and physically feasible, comply with the applicable design regulations adopted in subsections B and C of this section and within the Bothell Standards.
(3) If the director has already approved a concealment element design either for the applicant or another small wireless facility within the design district, then the applicant shall utilize a substantially similar concealment element design, unless it can show that such concealment element design is not physically or technically feasible or that such deployment would undermine the generally applicable design standards. This subsection shall only apply if the design district pole is either technically or physically infeasible in the proposed location(s) consistent with requirements of subsection (F)(2)(a)(1) of this section.
b. Outside of the Design District.
(1) Upon adoption of a city standard small wireless facility pole design(s) within the Bothell Standards for new poles outside a design district, an applicant shall first consider using or modifying the standard pole design to accommodate its small wireless facility without substantially changing the outward visual and aesthetic character of the design. Upon a showing that use or modification of the applicable standard pole design is either technically or physically infeasible or that the modified pole design will not comply with the city’s ADA or sidewalk clearance requirements and/or would violate electrical or other safety standards, the applicant may deviate from the adopted standard pole design and use the design standards as further described below.
(2) If a standard pole design adopted in the Bothell Standards is not utilized, the concealment element design should seek to minimize the visual obtrusiveness of the small wireless facility. The concealment element design must include the design of screening, fencing, or other concealment technology for a pole or equipment structure and for all related transmission equipment or facilities associated with the proposed small wireless facility, including but not limited to fiber and power connections. The proposed pole or structure should have similar designs to existing neighboring poles in the rights-of-way, including similar height to the extent technically feasible, except that the new pole must be a nonwooden, hollow pole. The proposed new pole shall include a light feature, unless such lighting is determined unnecessary by the director. Other concealment methods include, but are not limited to, integrating the installation with architectural features or building design components; utilization of coverings or concealment devices of similar material, color, and texture (or the appearance thereof) as the surface against which the installation will be seen or on which it will be installed; landscape design; or other camouflage strategies appropriate for the type of installation. Applicants are required to utilize designs in which all conduit and wirelines are installed internally in the structure. Further, applicant designs must, to the extent technically and physically feasible, comply with the applicable design regulations adopted in subsections B and C of this section and within the Bothell Standards.
(3) If the director has already approved a concealment element design either for the applicant or another small wireless facility along the same public right-of-way, then the applicant shall utilize a substantially similar concealment element design, unless the applicant can show that such concealment element design is not physically or technically feasible or that such deployment would undermine the generally applicable design standards. This subsection shall only apply if the standard small wireless facility pole design is either technically or physically infeasible in the proposed location(s) consistent with requirements of subsection (F)(2)(b)(1) of this section. (Ord. 2295 § 22, 2019).
The following definitions shall only apply to this article relating to eligible facilities requests:
A. “Base station” means a structure or equipment at a fixed location that enables FCC-licensed or authorized wireless communications between user equipment and a communications network. The term does not encompass a tower as defined herein nor any equipment associated with a tower. “Base station” includes, without limitation:
1. Equipment associated with wireless communications services as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul.
2. Radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, regular and backup power supplies, and comparable equipment, regardless of technological configuration (including distributed antenna systems (“DAS”) and small wireless networks).
3. Any structure other than a tower that, at the time the relevant application is filed (with jurisdiction) under this section, supports or houses equipment described in subsections (A)(1) and (A)(2) of this section that has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process, even if the structure was not built for the sole or primary purpose of providing that support.
4. The term does not include any structure that, at the time the eligible facilities request application is filed with the city, does not support or house equipment described in subsections (A)(1) and (A)(2) of this section.
B. “Collocation” means the mounting or installation of transmission equipment on an eligible support structure for the purpose of transmitting and/or receiving radio frequency signals for communication purposes.
C. “Eligible facilities request” means any request for modification of an existing tower or base station that does not substantially change the physical dimensions of such tower or base station, involving:
1. Collocation of new transmission equipment;
2. Removal of transmission equipment; or
3. Replacement of transmission equipment.
D. “Eligible support structure” means any tower or base station as defined in this section; provided, that it is existing at the time the relevant application is filed with the city.
E. Existing. A constructed tower or base station is “existing” if it has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process; provided, that a tower that has not been reviewed and approved because it was not in a zoned area when it was built, but was lawfully constructed, is existing for purposes of this definition.
F. Substantial Change. A modification “substantially changes” the physical dimensions of an eligible support structure if it meets any of the following criteria:
1. For towers other than towers in the public rights-of-way, it increases the height of the tower by more than 10 percent or by the height of one additional antenna array with separation from the nearest existing antenna not to exceed 20 feet, whichever is greater; for other eligible support structures, it increases the height of the structure by more than 10 percent or more than 10 feet, whichever is greater;
a. Changes in height should be measured from the original support structure in cases where deployments are or will be separated horizontally, such as on buildings’ rooftops; in other circumstances, changes in height should be measured from the dimensions of the tower or base station, inclusive of originally approved appurtenances and any modifications that were approved prior to the passage of Section 6409(a) of the Spectrum Act as part of the Middle Class Tax Relief and Job Creation Act of 2012;
2. For towers other than towers in the public rights-of-way, it involves adding an appurtenance to the body of the tower that would protrude from the edge of the tower more than 20 feet, or more than the width of the tower structure at the level of the appurtenance, whichever is greater; for other eligible support structures, it involves adding an appurtenance to the body of the structure that would protrude from the edge of the structure by more than six feet;
3. For any eligible support structure, it involves installation of more than the standard number of new equipment cabinets for the technology involved, but not to exceed four cabinets; or, for towers in the public rights-of-way and base stations, it involves installation of any new equipment cabinets on the ground if there are no preexisting ground cabinets associated with the structure, or else involves installation of ground cabinets that are more than 10 percent larger in height or overall volume than any other ground cabinets associated with the structure;
4. It entails any excavation or deployment outside the current site;
5. It would defeat the concealment elements of the eligible support structure; or
6. It does not comply with conditions associated with the siting approval of the construction or modification of the eligible support structure or base station equipment; provided, however, that this limitation does not apply to any modification that is noncompliant only in a manner that would not exceed the thresholds identified above.
G. “Tower” means any structure built for the sole or primary purpose of supporting any FCC-licensed or authorized antennas and their associated facilities, including structures that are constructed for wireless communications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul and the associated site.
H. “Transmission equipment” means equipment that facilitates transmission for any FCC-licensed or authorized wireless communication service, including, but not limited to, radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, and regular and backup power supply. The term includes equipment associated with wireless communications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul. (Ord. 2295 § 24, 2019).
A. Application Review.
1. Application. The city shall prepare and make publicly available an application form that shall be limited to the information necessary for the city to consider whether an application is an eligible facilities request. The application cannot require the applicant to demonstrate a need or business case for the proposed modification.
2. Type of Review. Upon receipt of an application for an eligible facilities request pursuant to this chapter, the director shall review such application to determine whether the application qualifies as an eligible facilities request.
3. Time Frame for Review. Within 60 days of the date on which an applicant applies seeking approval under this chapter, the director shall approve the application unless it determines that the application is not covered by this section.
4. Tolling of the Time Frame for Review. The 60-day review period begins to run when the application is filed and may be tolled only by mutual agreement by the city and the applicant or in cases where the director determines that the application is incomplete. The time frame for review of an eligible facilities request is not tolled by a moratorium on the review of applications.
a. To toll the time frame for incompleteness, the director shall provide written notice to the applicant within 30 days of receipt of the application, clearly and specifically delineating all missing documents or information required in the application.
b. The time frame for review begins running again when the applicant makes supplemental submission in response to the city’s notice of incompleteness.
c. Following a supplemental submission, the director will notify the applicant within 10 days that the supplemental submission did not provide the information identified in the original notice delineating missing information. The time frame is tolled in the case of second or subsequent notices pursuant to the procedures identified in this subsection (A)(4). The second or subsequent notice of incompleteness may not specify missing documents or information that was not delineated in the original notice of incompleteness.
5. Determination That Application Is Not an Eligible Facilities Request. If the city determines that the applicant’s request does not qualify as an eligible facilities request, the city shall deny the application. To the extent additional information is necessary, the city manager may request such information from the applicant to evaluate the application under other provisions of this chapter and applicable law.
B. Failure to Act. In the event the city fails to approve or deny a request for an eligible facilities request within the time frame for review (accounting for any tolling), the request shall be deemed granted. The deemed grant does not become effective until the applicant notifies the director in writing after the review period has expired (accounting for any tolling) that the application has been deemed granted.
C. Remedies. Both the applicant and the city may bring claims related to Section 6409(a) of the Spectrum Act to any court of competent jurisdiction. (Ord. 2295 § 25, 2019).
A. Each permit granted pursuant to this chapter shall contain a condition which requires the permittee to reimburse the city for all direct and indirect expenses reasonably incurred in connection with the modification, amendment, or transfer of the permit.
B. Each permittee shall be required to reimburse the city for all direct and indirect expenses not otherwise covered by permit application fees reasonably incurred while reviewing, inspecting, and supervising the construction, installation, and/or maintenance of a WCF authorized by a permit granted pursuant to this chapter.
C. Costs incurred by the city in response to any emergency at a WCF or SWF shall be included within the reimbursable expenses set forth in this section. (Ord. 2295 § 27, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.090).
Each permittee shall maintain its WCF or SWF in a good and safe condition and preserve its original appearance and concealment, disguise, or camouflage elements incorporated into the design at the time of approval and in a manner which complies with all applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Such maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, such items as painting, repair of equipment, and maintenance of landscaping. (Ord. 2295 § 28, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.100).
A. Any proposed change, modification, or addition to any existing WCF or SWF that does not qualify as an eligible facilities request shall require the issuance of a new WCF or SWF permit, pursuant to the requirements of this chapter. Such modifications include but are not limited to expanding or changing the antenna type, increasing the equipment enclosure, placing additional pole-mounted or ground-mounted equipment, or modifying the concealment elements.
B. This provision requiring a new permit does not apply to routine maintenance and repair of a WCF or SWF.
C. This provision also does not apply to the replacement of any portion of the WCF with similar equipment, as described in this chapter. Similarly, this provision does not apply to SWFs for the replacement of an antenna or equipment of similar size, weight, and height; provided, that such replacement does not (1) defeat the concealment elements used in the original deployment of the SWF; (2) does not impact the structural integrity of the pole; and/or (3) does not require pole replacement. Further, a new SWF permit shall not be required for replacing equipment within the equipment enclosure or reconfiguration of fiber or power to the small wireless facility.
D. While a new WCF or SWF permit may not be required, any routine maintenance, repair, or replacement shall comply with Chapter 17.02 BMC and the Bothell Standards, including the general standards applicable to the use of the rights-of-way described in BMC Title 17. As such, a right-of-way use permit may be required.
E. Following any modification, repair, or replacement to a WCF or SWF that changes or may change the radio frequency radiation, the permittee must submit a copy of a revised non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation (NIER) report. The revised report must be submitted to the city within 30 days following the update of the facility. (Ord. 2295 § 29, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.110).
A. Each permittee shall conduct tests necessary to demonstrate compliance with all applicable local regulations regarding the noise emissions of the WCF or SWF. All such tests shall be performed by or under the supervision of a qualified acoustical consultant competent to perform such tests and interpret the data gathered. The requirement to conduct noise tests may be waived for SWFs that do not include noise generating equipment or antennas.
B. All permittees shall submit a report, certified by a qualified acoustical consultant, setting forth the observed noise levels at the property line of the property upon which the WCF is located. The report shall account for background noise and other noise sources and demonstrate the noise levels emitted by the WCF, including any air conditioning or ventilation equipment contained therein.
C. Compliance reports shall be required upon request by the city or upon a modification, in which such modification changes the noise from the report measures described in subsection B of this section.
D. The city may retain a technical expert in environmental noise measurement to verify the noise measurements and certification. The cost of such a technical expert shall be borne by the permittee.
E. Upon request from the city, the operator of a SWF shall submit a report, certified by a qualified acoustical consultant, setting forth the observed noise levels at the closest private property line from where the SWF is located. The report shall account for background noise and other noise sources and demonstrate the noise levels emitted by the SWF, including any air conditioning or ventilation equipment contained therein. (Ord. 2295 § 30, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.130).
All WCFs and SWFs shall be protected from unauthorized use through appropriate means approved by the director on a case-by-case basis consistent with the purpose of protecting the public health, safety, and welfare. (Ord. 2295 § 31, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.140).
A. Any WCF or SWF that has had no antenna mounted upon it for a period of six months, or if the antenna(s) mounted thereon is not operated for a period of three months, shall be considered abandoned, and the owner thereof shall remove the WCF or SWF within 90 days following the six- or three-month period.
B. In the event that more than one wireless service provider is using the antenna support structure, the antenna support structure shall not be considered abandoned until all such users cease using the structure as provided in this section.
C. If a WCF or SWF and associated equipment are not removed within 90 days after receipt of a notice from the city requiring said removal, the city may seek and obtain a court order directing such removal and imposing a lien upon the real property upon which such WCF is situated in an amount equal to the cost of removal. (Ord. 2295 § 32, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.150).
A decision of the director or their designee made in accordance with this chapter, including assessment of fees as provided herein, shall be considered a final Type I administrative decision. (Ord. 2295 § 33, 2019).
In addition to the remedies and process set forth in Chapter 11.20 BMC, a permit issued pursuant to this chapter may be revoked for the following reasons:
A. Construction and/or maintenance operation of a WCF or SWF commences or occurred at an unauthorized location;
B. Construction or operation of a WCF or SWF commences or is found to be in violation of any of the terms and conditions of this chapter or the conditions attached to the permit;
C. Misrepresentation or lack of candor by or on behalf of an applicant, permittee, or wireless communications service provider in any application or written or oral statement upon which the city substantially relies in making the decision to grant, review or amend any permit pursuant to this chapter;
D. Abandonment of a WCF as set forth in this chapter;
E. Failure to relocate or remove facilities as required in this chapter; or
F. Failure to promptly cure a violation of the terms or conditions of the permit. (Ord. 2295 § 34, 2019; Ord. 2110 § 2 (Exh. B), 2013; Ord. 1733 § 7, 1998. Formerly 12.11.170).